JP7226873B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

Kind Code: A1 To provide a gaming machine having characteristics in the configuration of display and performance. executable, capable of outputting a first sound upon execution of the first processing, capable of executing a second processing of setting a game value determined at the start of a game, and capable of executing a second processing of setting a predetermined game value upon execution of the second processing A gaming machine capable of outputting a second sound, wherein the volume of the predetermined sound is higher than that of the first sound in the first period, which is a part of the period until the predetermined processing based on power-on is completed. output at a high volume, in the first period, a predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the second sound, and in a second period after the first period, the first sound is output is output at a volume higher than the volume of the sound, during the second period, the second sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound, and during the second period, the background sound of the game is output not.
[Selection drawing] Fig. 281

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by reel game machines (slot machines) and pinball game machines (pachinko machines).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are amusement machines that perform various displays and effects (for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2016-36477 A

However, there is room for improvement in the configuration of the display and presentation of the game table.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a characteristic configuration of display and presentation.

In order to solve the above problems, the amusement machine of the present invention includes:
It is possible to output a predetermined sound based on the fact that the power is turned on,
capable of executing a first process of outputting a gaming value to an external device, capable of outputting a first sound as the first process is executed,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second process for setting a predetermined game value at the start of a game, and capable of outputting a second sound as the second process is executed,
During a first period, which is a part of the period until a predetermined process based on power-on is completed, the predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than that of the first sound,
In the first period, the predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the second sound,
In a second period after the first period, the first sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound,
In the second period, the second sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound,
In the second period, the background sound of the game is not output,
In the second period, the first process and the second process can be executed, and the first sound and the second sound may be output in duplicate,
the first sound and the second sound are different sounds;
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic configuration of display and presentation.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention with the front door opened. FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention; (a) A plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention. (b) A diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game. (a) A transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) A transition diagram of an AT-based game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (a) A diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination. (b) It is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the pushing order of the slot machine according to the embodiment A1 of the present invention. It is the figure which corresponded the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127. FIG. (a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400; (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the judgment state production|presentation table. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the LMT state rendering table. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (a) (1) to (a) (4) is a diagram showing an example of starting the first effect (total notification) in the continuous hitting effect in chronological order. (b) (1) to (b) (3) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of starting a second effect (privilege effect) in the continuous hitting effect. (c) A diagram showing another example of an operation request display. (a) (1) to (a) (8) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of starting a third effect (result notification effect) in the judge effect. (b)(7)-(b)(8) Shows an example of the effect when the button image (operation request display) is displayed during the judgment effect, but the effect button (first operation means) is not operated. It is a diagram. It is the figure which showed the example which starts the 2nd production|presentation (result information production|presentation) during execution of the 1st production|presentation (total information production|presentation) in the continuous hit production|presentation in chronological order. (a)(1) to (a)(8) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example of starting an operation response presentation after displaying an operation request display in the judge victory presentation, FIG. 15(a)(1) It is a figure corresponding to (a) and (8) in the same figure. (b)(1) to (b)(2) are diagrams showing an example of a judge defeat effect (a effect when AT lottery in CZ is not won). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a production in a time series when no operation request display is displayed in the judge resurrection production (second case). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a production in a time series in a case where an operation request display is not displayed in a judge resurrection production (second case) and an operation means is operated to start an operation response production (third case). . FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a production in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge defeat production (second case) and the operation means is operated but the operation response production is not started (fourth case); be. In the case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge resurrection effect (second case), the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. It is a figure shown in time series. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts and operations. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effects of a 3-coin bet game and a 2-coin bet game in Example C1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of an effect when a 3-coin bet game is executed after the slot machine executes notification of a pseudo bonus determination in Example C1; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of an effect when a two-coin bet game is executed after the slot machine executes notification of a pseudo bonus determination in Example C1; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous effect in Example C2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating another example of continuous effects in Example C2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the continuous production|presentation shown in FIG. It is an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example C3 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a transition of an effect mode of the effect image display device when a two-coin bet game is executed in Example C3 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; It is a modified example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example C3 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a transition of an effect mode displayed on the effect image display device when a button effect is executed in Example C4 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 39 is a diagram showing a change in the effect mode of the effect image display device when the button effect shown in FIG. 38 is started, one 2-coin bet game is executed in the next game, and then the 3-coin bet game is executed. FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a notification period of a double bet notification in Example C5 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the notification period of the double bet notification shown in FIG. 40; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the effect executed in Example C5 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; (A) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of performing a 2-coin bet game after performing a 3-coin bet game in a normal state. (B) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of performing a 2-coin bet game after performing a 3-coin bet game in the specialized state. (C) A diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game performed in a specialized state in chronological order. (D) A diagram showing an example of a two-coin bet game performed in a specialized state in chronological order. (E) It is the figure which showed the transition example of the game state of AT type|system|group. (A) It is a diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game performed in a normal state in chronological order. (B) It is a diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game performed in a specialized state in chronological order. (A) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of performing a 2-coin bet game after performing a 3-coin bet game in a normal state. (B) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of performing a 2-coin bet game after performing a 3-coin bet game in the specialized state. (C) A diagram showing an example of an effect in time series when a three-coin bet game is performed in the specialized state and the accumulated point number reaches the target value. (D) is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in a normal state in chronological order. (E) is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in a specialized state in chronological order. (A)(1) to (A)(2) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which a setting suggestion A is started to be displayed in relation to execution of a three-bet game. (A)(3) to (A)(4) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which a setting suggestion B is started to be displayed in relation to execution of a three-bet game. (B)(1) to (B)(2) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion A is not started to be displayed in relation to the execution of the two-bet game. (B)(3) to (B)(4) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which a setting suggestion B is started to be displayed in relation to execution of a two-bet game. (C) A diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game performed in a high navigation state in chronological order. (D) A diagram showing an example of a two-coin bet game performed in a high navigation state in chronological order. (A) A time-series diagram showing an example of setting suggestions triggered by a game start operation in a game in which a judge (AT1) has shifted to AT2. (B) A time-series diagram showing an example of setting suggestions triggered by a game start operation in a game in which a judge (AT1) has finished. (C) A diagram showing in chronological order an example of setting suggestions triggered by a third stop operation in the next 3-coin bet game after the 3-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2. (D) It is the figure which showed the example which performs setting suggestion by operation of a production|presentation button as a trigger in a time series. (A) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion is not performed while the victory screen of the judge (AT1) is being displayed. (B) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example in which setting suggestions are not made while the defeat screen of the judge (AT1) is being displayed. (C) A time-series diagram showing an example of setting suggestions triggered by the third stop operation in the next two-coin bet game after the three-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2. (D) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion is not performed with the third stop operation as a trigger in the two-coin bet game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a predetermined number acquisition display (setting suggestion display). (B) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for obtaining a predetermined number of sheets. (C) A diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion display lottery table. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a handle member 104; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a handle member 104; FIG. 4 is a side view showing a handle member 104; FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing a handle member 104; FIG. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the side plate 103 without the handle member 104, (b) is a side view showing the positional relationship with the handle member 104 when attached to the side plate 103, and (c). is an enlarged side view showing a portion of the handle member 104; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the state of the handle member 104 in the process of being attached (removed) to the side plate 103; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the state of the handle member 104 in the process of being attached (removed) to the side plate 103; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the handle member 104; 1 is a diagram schematically showing a slot machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means when a door opening error is detected; It is a figure which shows the appearance of various notification means after display ES21 by the 1st display mode of a 2nd error display, and display ES21' by the 1st display mode of a 2nd same content error display are started. It is a timing chart of the information mode after the door opening error is detected. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing various notification means when an empty hopper error with an error code of E2 is detected; It is a figure which shows the appearance of various notification means after 3rd error display ES30 and 3rd same-contents error display ES30' are started. FIG. 10 is a timing chart of a notification mode after a hopper empty error is detected; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means when a medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7 is detected; It is a figure which shows the appearance of various notification means after 4th error display ES40 and 4th same content error display ES40' are started. It is a timing chart of a notification mode after a medal passage confirmation error is detected. It is a timing chart when a door open error is detected before a hopper empty error is detected and the error is resolved. It is a timing chart when a door opening error is detected and a medal passage confirmation error is detected before the error is resolved. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification using the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158; FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification continued from FIG. 71; FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a modification of the error notification continued from FIG. 72; 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700; (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 76; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194; It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect; (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed when the 1st chance button 165 is pushed down in the state shown to 86 (h). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step how the effect image display device 157 and various lamps appear when the power saving mode is selected while the non-demonstration animation is being displayed. 85 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 84; The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened while the opening/closing piece is pressed while the demo animation is displayed and the power saving mode is selected. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; FIG. 87 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 86; FIG. The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to open the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demonstration animation is being displayed and to set the power saving mode is performed step by step. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error is still occurring. It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine which can apply this invention from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700; (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 93; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194; It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect; (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed when the 1st chance button 165 is pushed down in the state shown to 103(h). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step how the effect image display device 157 and various lamps appear when the power saving mode is selected while the non-demonstration animation is being displayed. 102 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 101; The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened while the opening/closing piece is pressed while the demo animation is displayed and the power saving mode is selected. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; 104 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 103; The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to open the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demonstration animation is being displayed and to set the power saving mode is performed step by step. FIG. 10 shows. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error is still occurring. It is a figure which shows two examples of operation production|presentation. FIG. 92 is a table summarizing characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91; FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the relationship of colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91; It is a figure which shows concretely some examples of the 1st operation production|presentation 1 demonstrated using Fig.108 (a). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 1st operation production|presentation 2 demonstrated using FIG.108(b). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 2nd operation production|presentation 1 demonstrated using FIG.108(c). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 2nd operation production|presentation 2 demonstrated using FIG.108(d). It is a figure which shows the other example of operation production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an operation means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect; It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine which can apply this invention from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table of internal winning combinations in the state of internal winning special combination 2 together with types of internal winning combinations. 117(a) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, and (b) is a transition diagram of the effect state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing a flow of a main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 124; FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 126; 125 is a flow chart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG. 124; (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of item addition processing (step S1203) in FIG. 128; (e) is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery in step S1315. 129 is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG. 128; (a) is a diagram showing a table used for setting a confrontation mode. (b) is a diagram showing a table used for setting an aura start zone. 128(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the point specialization state B transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG. 128, and FIG. be. 129 is a flow chart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG. 128; (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for obtaining an item "Defeat 1 body", (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the defeat rate by the "defeat rate UP" item, and (c) is an AT remaining FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a game number lottery table, (d) is a diagram showing an AT direct hit lottery table, (e) is a diagram showing a pseudo BB lottery table, and (f) is an AT additional game number lottery. It is a figure which shows a table. 125 is a flow chart showing a flow of state update processing (step S117) in FIG. 124; 136(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG. 135, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for lottery for determining the value of acquired points. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG. 135, (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG. c) is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the flow of precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG. 135; FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the flow of confrontation state processing (step S1A27) in FIG. 135; 135. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of AT state processing (step S1A31) in FIG. 135, and (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 141. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production|presentation control processing (step S309) in FIG. 143(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of display point management processing (step S3003) in FIG. 142, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. 143 is a flow chart showing the flow of display item management processing (step S3005) in FIG. 142; FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the flow of item acquisition effect setting processing (step S3207) in FIG. 144. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed from an initial state to a normal state via a point specialization A state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state and returns to the normal state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an item acquisition effect when the effect state is the normal state; The flow from the normal state to the true omen state to the confrontation state will be described. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the true omen state and shifts to the confrontation state. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an item acquisition effect when the effect state is a confrontation state, and (d) to (f) are diagrams of an item use effect when the effect state is a confrontation state. It is a figure which shows an example, (g) is a figure which shows the state which the showdown production|presentation started. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of winning all the confrontation production|presentations. It is a figure which shows the example when it loses in confrontation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation performed before it transfers to a pseudo-BB state or an initial state from AT state. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of redisplaying an item that has been hidden before using (deleting) the item; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification when power failure and power recovery occur; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention with the front door opened. FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention; (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention. (b) A diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. (a) A transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) and (c) are transition diagrams of AT-based game states of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (a) A diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination. (b) It is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the pushing order of the slot machine according to the embodiment H1 of the present invention. It is the figure which corresponded the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing a flow of setting-related processing at power-on; It is the figure which showed an example of various alerting|reporting. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of a setting change at the normal time when the error does not generate|occur|produce in a gaming machine. (b) A diagram showing an example of the flow of setting confirmation during normal times when no error has occurred on the gaming machine. It is the figure which showed an example of various alerting|reporting. It is a diagram showing an example of a certain effect (pseudo bonus) in which the first effect (first button effect) is executed in chronological order. It is a diagram showing an example of a certain effect (pseudo bonus) in which the first effect (first button effect) is executed in chronological order. It is the figure which showed an example of a certain effect|action (pseudo-bonus) by which a 2nd effect|action (2nd button effect|action) is performed in a time series. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination, and remarks. (b) It is a diagram showing the types of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order. (a) A diagram schematically showing an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of game state transition of the slot machine 100. (a) It is the figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in a 1st chance state, and the winning probability of a transition lottery. (b) It is the figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in a 2nd chance state, and the winning probability of a transition lottery. (c) It is the figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in AT state, and the winning probability of a set continuation lottery. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of various navigation in a non-AT state. (b) A diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (non-AT state). (c) A diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (AT state). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a navigation number counter; (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the execution period of navigation, and a non-execution period. (b) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of various notifications.

(a) A diagram showing an example of modes in a normal state and count values of the navigation number counter 2 corresponding to each mode. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the navigation compliance rate and the lottery value of each mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the display of the navigation number counter; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the execution period of navigation; It is the figure which showed the modification of the navigation. (a) It is the figure which showed the modification of AT state. (b) A diagram showing an example of an AT end screen displayed during an AT extension period. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination, and remarks. (b) It is a diagram showing the types of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order. (A) It is the figure which showed the transition example of the game state of AT type|system|group. (B) A diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (1) when operation navigation is ignored. (C) A diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (2) when operation navigation is ignored. (A) It is the figure which showed the specific example of advantageous area control (3) at the time of operation navigation disregard. (B) It is the figure which showed the specific example of ending at the time of operation navigation disregard. (C) A diagram showing a specific example of the bell hit effect. It is the figure which showed the specific example of advantageous area control (4) at the time of operation navigation disregard. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing specific examples of advantageous section control (5) when operation navigation is ignored. (C) A diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game performed in an AT state in chronological order. (D) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of a two-coin bet game performed in the AT state. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the advantageous area control at the time of operation navigation disregard. (B) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of advantageous section control when operation navigation is ignored. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts and operations. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a panel elimination effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating another example of the panel elimination effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the execution time of the panel clear effect and the operation invalid time of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the panel attack production|presentation of Example L1 of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention (modification). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of effects of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB1 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a small winning symbol notification effect in a BB1 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB2 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB2 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effects of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect from a first stop operation to a third stop operation in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting|reporting aspect of the alerting|reporting means at the time of a 2nd error having generate|occur|produced in a certain game and performing 1st error alerting|reporting and 2nd error alerting|reporting. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the 3rd error generate|occur|produced in a certain game and the 1st error notification and the 3rd error notification are performed. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means at the time of the 4th error having generate|occur|produced in a certain game and performing the 4th error display. It is the figure which showed the flow from lever ON to error cancellation|release when the 4th error generate|occur|produced in a certain game and the 4th error display is performed. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed the item given in point specialization state production, and the point corresponding to each item. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st provision production|presentation in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd provision production|presentation (refill production|presentation) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st provision production|presentation in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd provision production|presentation (refill production|presentation) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the 3rd addition production|presentation (refill production of the refill production) in the point specialization state production|presentation in chronological order. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payouts before and after the slot machine is powered off and restored. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payout and error notification before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts and operations. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. In Example N1 of one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the AT game, and is a diagram for explaining an effect example when the effect button is operated once. In Example N1 of one embodiment of the present invention, FIG. In Example N1 of one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining an overview of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and is a diagram for explaining an effect example when the effect button is long-pressed. 251 to 253 are diagrams showing a high-level concept of the performance outline of one game. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a modification of the operation request effect and the operation response effect described in Example N1, and is a diagram showing an image example of the effect image display device for the first game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a modification of the operation request effect and the operation response effect described in Example N1, and is a diagram showing an image example of the effect image display device for the second game. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of an operation request effect and an operation response effect in a bonus winning game in Example N2 of one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 20 is a diagram explaining an outline of an operation request effect and an operation response effect in a bonus winning game in Example N2 of one embodiment of the present invention (modification). 10 is a time chart regarding changes in the volume of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and the operation of the effect button in Example N3 of one embodiment of the present invention (the operation of the effect button before the predetermined time TA elapses); is done). 10 is a time chart regarding changes in the volume of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and the operation of the effect button in Example N3 of one embodiment of the present invention (the effect button is operated after a predetermined time TA has passed; if done). In Example N4 of one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the bet button while the operation request effect and the operation response effect are being executed in the bonus winning game and after the start lever is operated in the next game ( (If medal insertion is performed based on the operation of the bet button). In Example N4 of one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the bet button while the operation request effect and the operation response effect are being executed in the bonus winning game and after the start lever is operated in the next game ( When the medal insertion is performed based on the operation of inserting three medals from the medal insertion slot). 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of switching display performed at the start of AT in chronological order; It is the figure which showed an example of the information display in the switching display performed during AT game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the information display after the end of the switching display performed during AT game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect of the notification means in a normal game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect of the alerting|reporting means in a two-stage error alerting|reporting in time series. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example of the mode of the notification means when executing the third error notification in the two-stage error notification. (g) A diagram showing a modification of the first error notification. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol variation production|presentation, a symbol stop production|presentation, and a prize confirmation display. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol variation production|presentation, a symbol stop production|presentation, and a prize confirmation display. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol variation production|presentation, a symbol stop production|presentation, and a prize confirmation display. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning confirmation display. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when power is turned on; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when power is turned on; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when power is turned on; It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement (medalless machine) at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement of a medalless machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement at the time of abnormality detection. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations for each RT; 4 is a transition diagram of a game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; 291 is a flow chart showing the flow of pseudo-game related processing (step S109). FIG. 293 is a flow chart showing the flow of reel rotation start processing (step S1003) of a pseudo-game. FIG. 293 is a flow chart showing the flow of the pseudo-game reel stop control process (step S1005). FIG. 292 is a flow chart showing a flow of reel rotation start processing (step S113) in FIG. 291; FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the flow of the 7-segment setting process (step S1305) in FIG. 296; 297 is a flow chart showing the flow of random delay rotation start processing (step S1311) in FIG. 296; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the pseudo-game of the basic embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of starting lighting of the navigation lighting and the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of starting reel rotation, navigation lighting, and lighting of an advantageous section lamp 191; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the lighting of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of starting lighting of the navigation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the lighting of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of starting lighting of the navigation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the lighting of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of starting lighting of the navigation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the lighting of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of starting lighting of the navigation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the lighting of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of starting lighting of the navigation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of reservation and cancellation of a pseudo-game, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of outputting a signal to the outside at the start of a pseudo-game.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment A1]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 19 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 19 on the middle reel 111 has a "blank pattern", and the frame numbered 18 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 2 Designs” are arranged respectively. In the following description, "Seven 1 pattern" may be referred to as "Blue 7 (design)", and "Seven 2 design" may be referred to as "Red 7 (design)".

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). FIG. 4(b) is a diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 2). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is the left reel bottom stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, The symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is displayed on the middle reel lower stage symbol and the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 7). The symbol displayed is the right reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 8 in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the right reel 112 lower stage symbol (9 shown in the figure) position (also referred to as symbol position 9) are called right reel lower symbols, and each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three-dimensionally displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through a symbol display window 113. , a total of nine are displayed.

In this embodiment, one prize line 114 is provided, which is a middle prize line L1 composed of a left reel middle pattern (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle pattern (symbol position 5) and a right reel middle pattern (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a symbol stop position that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination to be described later with reference to FIGS. This is the line on which it is determined whether or not the combination has been displayed. FIG. 4(b) shows the middle winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment can bet three or two, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, none of the winning lines are activated and three or two medals are placed. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a coin is betted. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three pay lines 114 may be set as the valid pay lines 114, or the number of pay lines 114 corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid pay lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b). FIG. 10(a) shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including active combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes special combinations (special combination 1, special combination 2), general combinations (replay combination 1 to replay combination 13, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination 1 to replay combination 13 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role 1 to a replay role 13 are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize 1 or the special prize 2. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is). The special game state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The “replay role (replay role 1 to replay role 13)” is a winning role (operating role) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay role 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay role 2 (effect replay 1), and replay role 3 (Effect replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "seven 1-seven 2-seven 1".

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 5)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. As shown in FIG. 5, the role 2 (watermelon 1) is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 should be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination to be described later), and the selected reel is stopped. Based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 . Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in a uniform manner within the range of the number of frames, even if it is bad. However, since it is only "accepted", there are cases where the symbol combination is not complete depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than 4 frames. don't stop at

Of course, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, the player wins 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the internal winning of the special role is not in progress (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state. It has a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based game state), and according to the AT-based game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control section 400 is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 6(b).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process for the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT type game state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination is obtained at the time of the internal lottery. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data within a numerical range (eg, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value for the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability for the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss.

A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for this lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. It should be noted that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the probability is not limited to this.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also In the replay low-probability state, a winning combination for internal winning is selected by referring to the lottery table in the row of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7(a).

Winning hands that are internally won in the replay low probability state include special hand 1 (condition device No. 1, only 3 bet games), special hand 2 (not shown, only 2 bet games), replay hand 1 ( Condition device No. 2), replay hands 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), small hand 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device No. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that the player did not win the winning role is expressed as "won the wrong way".

Here, "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" are replay hands 2, replay hands 4, replay hands 5, replay hands 6, replay hands 7, replay hands 8, replay hands 9 , and replay combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 5, replay combination 6, replay combination 7, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 8, a symbol combination corresponding to either a replay combination 9 or a replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. It should be noted that, like this "replayed combination 2, 4 to 10", there is a case where the combination in which the winning combination is determined by the order of operations is called a "push order combination".

Further, "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are replay hands 3, replay hands 4, replay hands 6, replay hands 8, replay hands 10, replay hands 11 , replay combination 12, and replay combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 6, replay combination 8, replay combination 10, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 11, a replay combination 12, and a replay combination 13 are displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line in accordance with the operation order of the player (FIG. 7 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals are paid out ( bell award). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

In addition, "small winning combination 4" is composed of "small winning combination 4a" and "small winning combination 4b". ” is displayed on the pay line. On the other hand, if the “small win 4b” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as

Here, with reference to FIG. 7(b), the operation sequence for the correct answer of "small winning combination 4" will be described in detail. "Small role 4" is exactly six of "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". , and a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 4". It should be noted that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small win 4LCR" of the "small win 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 6(a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), which will be described later. When the special combination 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), it is indicated that the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal election state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the internal winning winning combination is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the "RT2" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), the lottery table in the row of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. Winning hands internally won in the special role internal winning state include replay hand 1, replay hands 2, 4 to 10, replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, small hand 1 to small hand 4. There is
If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, in FIG. 6(a), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), a special game to be described later is performed. A transition to state (RT4) is shown.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In the special game state, the lottery table in the row of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination internally won in the special game state is only the small combination 5. - 特許庁Also, if the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 6(a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when the specified number of payouts is executed. For example, the game may end when a prize is won eight times, or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) are played. That is, condition (D) shown in FIG. 6A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). FIG. 6B is a transition diagram of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 .

The game state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigator means that an internal winning combination (in this example, replay combination 2, 4 to 10, replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or a small combination 4) is won. In this case, it refers to an effect that informs the correct operation order. That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state.

Operation navigation will now be described with reference to FIGS. 7(b) and 8. FIG. In this embodiment, the payout number display 127 and effect image display device 157 are used to execute operation navigation. FIG. 7(b) is a diagram for explaining the order of correct operation for pushing the winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment A1 of the present invention, and FIG. It is a diagram.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, and the display data 03 is , and data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel.

Therefore, when "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" or "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number indicator 127 displays a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03, and an effect image is displayed. Device 157 displays an image (eg, the characters “--1”) that suggests that the first stopping reel is right reel 112 .

The display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 06 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111, and the second stop reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110, the display data 08 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. , the display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel.

Therefore, when the small win 4CLR of the "small win 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected. and the effect image display device 157 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the characters “213”) is displayed.

In this embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a small combination of 4. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the small winning combination 4 may be three choices like the replay winning combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be notified using the display data 01-03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, it is also possible to configure the stop operation of the correct answer for the replay combination to be six options such as the small combination 4, and to notify the replay combination using the display data 04 to 09 as well. Also in this case, it is not possible to determine the internal winning combination only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 6(c), for example, transitions are made in the order of fixed notification state→AT1 state→judging state, and from this judging state, the game shifts to normal game state or AT2 state via pullback state. There is a route, and a route that directly transitions from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (eg, 50 games) of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is provided. Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing the effect state in each game state of the AT system. Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 6(b), which is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state is, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (This case will be described later). In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 9(a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400. FIG. The storage means (for example, the ROM 406 and the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub-control section 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400, in the command processing (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main processing to be described later, effect information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, Production state counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent production control process (step S3605), the production table corresponding to the production state, etc. is referred to, and production corresponding to the production state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described AT1 effect from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described judge effect from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9(b) is a diagram showing an example of the judgment state rendering table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, a judge state effect table as shown in FIG. Judge performances corresponding to points and performance state counters are performed.

Specifically, when the performance control is performed according to the judgment state performance table shown in FIG. <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, the judgment effect is performed to change the enemy character in the order of A->A->B->B. In addition, when the effect control is performed according to the judgment state effect table shown in FIG. -1→D2-1→D3-1→… Performs a judgment effect that changes in turn, and when the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the effect mode is changed. Judge performance is performed to change in the order of D1-2→D2-2→D3-2→ . . .

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9(c) is a diagram showing an example of the LMT state rendering table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the corresponding opportunity (starting condition, end condition, etc. of the performance) has arrived, and when the opportunity has arrived, the performance corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIG. When the pressing operation (lever on) is received, from among multiple types of effects A1 to A3 using the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 9 (c) (2), depending on the current setting value to select a predetermined effect, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, and execute setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image).

Also, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. Select a predetermined effect from among a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, etc., and perform setting suggestion effect B (for example, the background image of the end screen).

Further, although the details will be described later, in the case of a two-coin bet game, in the case of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display the subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect, the main control unit 300 is in the effect state. Since the counter value is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the scene corresponding to the same rendering state counter value. It should be noted that the method of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display subsequent scenes) in the interlocked effect is not limited to this example. It may be configured not to transmit the command for displaying the subsequent scene in the production.

It should be noted that the effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. , the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, bet number setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Prepare to send the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the effect state control processing A relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, control of various effects and the like are performed.

In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

At step S113, an effect state control process B relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state ending process for ending the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission processing (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S2003, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>2006 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S2007, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S2009, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 when power is restored, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 10 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. FIG. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the driving circuit 424. FIG. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of a command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S3101 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 12A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S3202, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 13A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S4202, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S4303; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534 . The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306; wait for is entered.

In step S4306, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Operation means>
Next, operation means provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment includes a plurality of It is configured to have an operation means of The operation means is at least a means that can be operated by the player. Examples of operating means include the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the bet button 130, the bet button 131, the effect button (bet button) 132, the medal return button 133, and the checkout button 134, which have been described with reference to FIG. In addition, a touch panel and the like can be mentioned, and the first operating means and the second operating means can be configured by combining any two of these operating means.

Note that the operation means may be composed of a plurality of operation units (for example, four up, down, left, and right buttons and one enter button). One decision button) may be defined as the operation means, or at least one of the plurality of operation units (for example, two upper and lower buttons, or one decision button) may be defined as the operation means. good. In addition, when a plurality of effect buttons (including operation means for effect other than buttons) are provided, any two of these effect buttons can be combined.

Also, the operation means can be in a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state different from the first state. For example, when the operating means has light output means capable of outputting light, the first state is any state of the light output means, such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc., and the second state is the light output means. is any state such as lit, extinguished, blinking, etc., which is different from the first state.

Further, for example, when the operation means includes a movable means, the first state is any state in which the movable means vibrates, rotates, rises, descends, reciprocates, etc., and the second state means that the movable means It is any state of vibration, rotation, rising, falling, reciprocating movement, etc., and is a state different from the first state.

Further, for example, when the operating means includes display means, the first state is a state in which the display means displays a certain display, and the second state is a state in which the display means displays a different display from the certain display. The first state is a state in which the display means displays a certain display, and the second state is a state in which the display means displays a certain display. It may be in a state where there is no display (or a state in which a part of a certain display is displayed).

Further, for example, when an operation request display prompting an operation by the operation means is performed, the first state is a state in which the first operation request display is displayed at the time of operation by the operation means, and the second state is , a state in which a second operation request display different from the first operation request display is displayed at the time of operation by the operation means and may be in a state different from the first state, or the first state The second state may be a state in which the operation request display is displayed during operation by the operation means, and the operation request display is not displayed during operation by the operation means.

<Consecutive hits>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, various effects in the consecutive hits will be described.

Here, the continuous hitting effect is an effect for informing a player of a benefit that is advantageous to the player, and is an example of the "first certain effect" according to the present invention. In addition, as "privileges advantageous to players", for example, adding AT games, increasing the number of medals won, giving AT winning judges such as bonuses and pseudo bonuses from normal times, giving various lotteries, giving players Examples include transition to an advantageous state (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.).

In this continuous hit effect (first certain effect), the first effect (in this example, total notification TG) can be started according to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, effect button 132). At the same time, it is possible to start a second effect (privilege giving effect SG in this example) in response to the operation of the second operation means (start lever 135 in this example).

<First effect in continuous hit effect (total notification)>
FIG. 14(a)(1) to FIG. 14(a)(4) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example of starting the first effect (total notification) in the repeated hitting effect.

The effect shown in FIG. 14(a)(1) indicates the start of the repeated hitting effect, and in this example, the repeated hitting effect is started with the third stop operation as a trigger.

In the continuous hit effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to flash a button image (operation request display) BG imitating the appearance of the effect button (first operation means) 132, and a button image BG is displayed above the button image BG. , by displaying an instruction image (operation request display) IG including characters of "continuous hit", an operation request display requesting the player to operate the effect button 132 a plurality of times (to repeatedly hit the effect button 132). Is going.

Also, although not shown, during the period when the operation request display (in this example, the button image BG and the instruction image IG) is displayed, an LED (light output) included in the production button (first operation means) 132 (not shown) means), the effect button (first operating means) 132 is shifted to the first state (blinking state).

On the other hand, in this continuous hit effect, the second effect (in this example, the privilege giving effect shown in FIG. 14 (b) (3)) corresponding to the operation of the second operation means (start lever 135 in this example) is performed. Although it can be started, at the timing shown in FIG. 14(a)(1), the operation request display requesting the player to operate the start lever (second operation means) 135 is not performed.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B show the continuation of the continuous hit effect, and in this example, the AT addition notification is started with the pressing operation of the effect button (first operation means) 132 as a trigger. ing.

In the AT addition notification of the present example, every time the depression operation of the effect button (first operation means) 132 is accepted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to include a number indicating a part of the number of games to be added that has been determined to be added. By displaying an image, a part of the number of AT-added games is notified.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(3) indicate the start of the total notification (first effect) during the continuous hit effect, and in this example, the effect button (first operating means ) 132 is received for a predetermined number of times (predetermined in this example so that the total number of operation response displays for a predetermined number of times is 80), the total notification TG is started.

In the total notification TG of this example, when the pressing operation of the production button (first operation means) 132 is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to determine the number of games to be added. By displaying an image including a number suggesting the total of, the total number of AT-added games (80G in this example) is notified.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(4) show an example of the result notification effect when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received in the next game during the repeated hitting effect.

In the result notification effect KG of this example, the display of the number of remaining AT games on the liquid crystal display device 157 is changed from 153G to 232G in response to the reception of the pressing operation of the start lever (second operation means) 135 in the next game. By updating to (=153G+80G-1G (operation by the start lever)), the player is notified of the result of the AT game (the number of remaining AT games).

<Second production in continuous hitting production (privilege production)>
FIG. 14(b)(1) to FIG. 14(b)(3) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example of starting the second effect (privilege giving effect) in the repeated hitting effect. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 14(b)(1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 14(a)(1), so the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 14(b)(2) shows the continuation of the continuous hitting effect, and in this example, the next game is started when the prescribed number of medals (three) are inserted. . In this example, since the operation of the effect button 132 is not accepted during the period when the operation request display corresponding to the effect button 132 is displayed, the total notification (first effect) is not started.

The subsequent production shown in FIG. 14 (b) (3) indicates the start of the privilege granting production (second production) during the continuous hitting production, and in this example, the start lever (second operation Means) Triggered by one reception of the pressing operation of 135, the privilege giving effect SG and the result notification effect KG described with reference to FIGS.

In the privilege giving effect SG of this example, when the start lever (second operation means) 135 is pressed once, characters suggesting AT addition (in this example, GREAT ) is displayed to inform the player that a privilege (additional AT) has been granted.

Needless to say, various notifications other than GREAT (eg, GOOD, COLL, EXCELLENT, etc.) may be made according to the total number of games to be added.

In this example, the total notification is started as the first effect, and the privilege grant effect is started as the second effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. (Operating means) 135 may be used as the second effect.

Also, the first effect and the second effect may be the same effect, or one may be with effect and the other may be without effect. In addition, in this example, the total notification and the privilege giving effect are the effects of notifying the player of a benefit that is advantageous to the player, but other types of effects may be used.

Further, the operation request display corresponding to the effect button 132 is not limited to the button image BG and instruction image IG shown in FIG. In this case, as one of a plurality of patterns, for example, an operation request display as shown in FIG. 14(c) may be displayed.

In the operation request display of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to create a button image (operation request display) imitating the appearance of the effect button (first operation means) 132, as shown in FIG. 14(a)(1). By blinking a button image (big button image) BG2 that is larger than the button image BG and displaying an instruction image (operation request display) IG2 containing the characters "push!" is performed a plurality of times (hitting the effect button 132 repeatedly).

<Judge performance>
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, various effects in judging will be described.

Here, the judgment effect is a effect for notifying the result of the finished game, and is an example of the "second certain effect" according to the present invention. The "result of the finished game" includes, for example, the result of the lottery according to the internal winning hand, the number and number of CZ games, the result of the lottery according to the number of times of getting stuck, etc., the winning results of various lotteries, and the mini game. results, etc.

In this judge effect (second certain effect), a third effect (in this example, an operation response effect) can be started in response to the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the effect button 132). However, the effect is not executed according to the operation of the second operating means (start lever 135 in this example).

In addition, when the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received in the judgment effect (the second certain effect), the first operating means does not start the third effect. may be configured so that the valid period of operation of is terminated. In addition, the second certain effect is not limited to the judge effect, and is, for example, an effect in which a part of the effect mode is different from the continuous hitting effect described using FIG. 14 (a part of the effect mode is common) good too.

<Third production in judge production (operation response production)>
FIG. 15(a)(1) to FIG. 15(a)(8) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of starting the third effect (result notification effect) in the judgment effect.

The effect shown in FIG. 15 (a) (1) indicates the start of the judge effect executed in the CZ (chance zone). , has started the judging performance that is executed during the CZ. In the judging effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a notification effect including the characters "development!", thereby notifying that the game state has shifted to CZ.

Subsequently, FIG. 15(a)(2) to FIG. 15(a)(4) are diagrams showing an example of effects in the first to third games of CZ. In this example, in the CZ 1st game, a judge production including a video of the lord chasing the old man is performed, in the next CZ 2nd game, a judgment production including a video of the lord approaching the old man is performed, and in the next CZ 3rd game, the lord is running a judge production including a video that catches up with the old man and crashes.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(5) show the continuation of the judgment effect executed in the third game of CZ. The result display (winning) of the executed lottery (AT lottery in this example) is started.

In the display of the result of the judge effect in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the gentleman catches the old man and an image containing the words "catch", indicating that the gentleman has won the judge effect ( The player is notified of the winning of the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(6) show the continuation of the judgment effect executed in the third game of CZ, and in this example, the result display described using FIG. 15(a)(5). In addition, confirmation production has started.

In the confirmation effect of this example, the button image (operation request display) BG3 imitating the appearance of the effect button (first operation means) 132 is lit (non-blinking) by using the liquid crystal display device 157. By performing an operation request display requesting the player to press the effect button 132 and displaying an explanation image DG including characters of "result confirmation" on the right side of the button image BG3, the effect button 132 can be pressed. This suggests to the player that the player can confirm the lottery result in the CZ by pressing the button.

Further, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judgment effect in this example is larger than the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous hit effect described with reference to FIG. 14(a)(1). In addition to the small size, the display position, color, and display mode are different.

Specifically, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judgment effect is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, whereas the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous hit effect is , are displayed in the lower center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 . In addition, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judgment effect is lit (not blinking) in blue, while the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous hit effect is blinking in white. .

According to this example, the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous hit effect and the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect are at least partially different operation request displays. ), the second operation means functions as a so-called hidden button, and it can be suggested that the effect (second effect) corresponding to the operation of this second operation means is a hidden button effect. . On the other hand, in the judgment effect (second certain effect), the operation of the second operating means is invalid, and it can be suggested that the effect corresponding to the operation of this second operating means is not executed.

At least one of the size, color, and display position of the button image during the continuous hit effect (operation request display) and the button image during the judge effect (operation request display) may be different from each other. .

In addition, the button image (operation request display) during the continuous hit effect may be displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns, but the button image (operation request display) during the judge effect ) is preferably a display displayed in one pattern.

Also, although illustration is omitted, during the period when the operation request display (the button image BG3 and the explanation image DG in this example) is displayed, an LED (light output means), the production button (first operation means) 132 is changed from the first state (blinking state) of the production button (first operation means) 132 during repeated hitting production. It is shifted to the second state (lighting state).

According to this example, it is possible to hint that there is a period during which the operation of the second operation means is valid depending on the state of the operation means and the mode of the operation request display.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(7) indicate the start of the operation response effect (third effect) during the judgment effect, and in this example, the effect button (first operation Means) The operation response presentation RG is started when the pressing operation of 132 is accepted once.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when one depression operation of the effect button (first operation means) 132 is accepted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to suggest the game and the internal winning combination that won the AT lottery. (In this example, in the 2G of CZ, winning with watermelon as an internal winning combination) is displayed to inform the lottery result in CZ.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning differs depending on the internal winning combination, but one or more combinations of the number of CZ games, the number of times of getting stuck, the number of times of entering CZ, the opportunity to enter, the acquisition status of chance-up items, etc. It may be configured such that the winning probability differs depending on the number of players.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(8) show an example of effects in the case where a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game during the judgment effect. Even when a pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is accepted, an effect corresponding to the pressing operation is not executed.

15(b)(7) to 15(b)(8), the button image (operation request display) BG3 is displayed during the judgment performance, but the performance button (first operation means) 132 is not operated. It is the figure which showed the example of the production|presentation in the case of.

In this example, after starting the confirmation effect described using FIG. Means) Without starting the result confirmation effect RG corresponding to the operation of 132, until a predetermined opportunity arrives (for example, until the next game is started, or the operation effective period of the first operation means elapses) until), the confirmation effect is continued.

<Modified example of continuous hit effect>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a modified example of the consecutive hits described with reference to FIG. 14 will be described.

In the repeated hit effect (first certain effect) of this example, after starting the first effect (in this example, total notification) in response to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, effect button 132) , During the execution of the first effect, if the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received, the second effect is performed without executing the remaining part of the first effect A second effect (result notification effect in this example) can be started in accordance with the operation of the operating means (start lever 135).

Figures 16(1), 16(2) and 16(4) correspond to Figures 14(a)(1), 14(a)(2) and 14(a)(4). , and is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which the second effect (result notification effect) is started while the first effect (total notification effect) is being executed in the continuous hit effect.

Specifically, in the AT addition notification (first effect) shown in FIG. is used to display an image including a number indicating a part of the number of games to be added that has been determined to be added, thereby notifying the number of AT added games.

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 16(4) shows an example of the result notification effect (second effect) when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received during execution of the AT addition notification.

In the result notification effect of this example, when the operation of pressing the start lever (second operating means) 135 is accepted during the execution of the AT addition notification, the AT addition notification is displayed in the middle (displayed in FIG. 16 (2)). The display of the number of AT remaining games on the liquid crystal display device 157 is changed from 153G to 232G (=153G + 80G - 1G (operation by the start lever)). By updating, the result of the AT game (the number of remaining AT games) is notified to the player.

<Invention 1>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the first invention of the present application has first operation means (for example, effect buttons) provided at a position where the player can operate. 132) and a second operating means (for example, start lever 135) provided at a position operable by the player, and a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "first certain Effect". For example, the continuous hitting effect shown in FIG. 14) is an effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (hereinafter referred to as "first effect". For example, shown in FIG. 14(a)(3) This is an effect that can start the total notification TG), and the first certain effect is an effect according to the operation of the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second effect". For example, FIG. ) (Benefit giving effect SG shown in (3)) can be started, and a certain effect different from the first certain effect (hereinafter referred to as “second certain effect”. For example, in FIG. Judge effect shown) can start the effect corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as "third effect"; for example, operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 15(a) (7)). The second certain effect is a effect that does not start in response to the operation of the second operation means, and the first certain effect corresponds to the first operation means. This is an effect including an effect in which an operation request display (hereinafter referred to as a "first operation request display"; for example, the button image BG and the instruction image IG shown in FIG. 14(a)(1)) is displayed. , an operation request display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second operation request display"; for example, the button image BG shown in FIG. 15(a) (6)) is displayed. The game machine is characterized in that the first operation request display and the second operation request display are at least partially different displays.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1, the first operation request display in the first certain effect and the second operation request display in the second certain effect are different operation request displays, so the first In a certain effect, the second operating means functions as a so-called hidden button, and it is possible to suggest that the effect (second effect) corresponding to the operation of the second operating means is the hidden button effect. On the other hand, in the second certain effect, the operation of the second operating means is invalid, and it can be suggested that the effect corresponding to the operation of this second operating means is not executed.

Further, the first operation means is in a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state") during at least a part of the period during which the first operation request display is displayed. and the first operating means is in a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "second state For example, the first state and the second state may be different states.

With such a configuration, it is possible to hint that there is a period during which the operation of the second operation means is valid depending on the state of the operation means and the mode of the operation request display.

Further, the first operation request display and the second operation request display are displays including a display imitating the appearance of the first operation means (for example, the appearance of the effect button 132), and The operation request display and the second operation request display may be displays different from each other in at least one of size, color, and display position.

With such a configuration, the first operation request display and the second operation request display are operation request displays corresponding to the first operation means, or the first operation request display and the second operation request display , it can be made clearer that the effects are different depending on the operation of the first operation means.

Further, the first certain effect is a repeated hitting effect (for example, repeated hitting effect shown in FIG. 14), and the first effect is the first certain effect in which a plurality of the first operating means are operated. The second effect may be an effect started by operating the second operation means once in the first certain effect. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the first operation means is effective in the first certain production, and the difference in role from the second operation means in the first certain production. can be made clearer.

In addition, the above-mentioned first certain effects are benefits that are advantageous to the player (for example, adding AT games, increasing the number of medals won, giving AT winning judges such as bonuses and pseudo bonuses from normal times, various lottery (e.g., transfer to a state advantageous to the player (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.), etc.). The result of the lottery according to the role, the number and number of games of CZ, the result of the lottery according to the number of times of getting stuck, etc., the winning result of various lotteries, the result of the mini game, etc.) may be provided.

With such a configuration, the difference between the first certain effect in which the second operating means is valid and the second certain effect in which the second operating means is invalid can be made clearer, It is possible to enhance playability.

Further, the first certain effect may be a effect that does not include an effect in which an operation request display corresponding to the second operation means is displayed.

With such a configuration, the second operating means functions as a so-called hidden button in the first certain effect, and the effect (second effect) corresponding to the operation of the second operating means is the hidden button effect. It can be suggested that

Further, the first operation request display is displayed in one of a plurality of patterns (for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 14(a)(1) and the pattern shown in FIG. 14(c)(1)). The second operation request display may be display displayed in one pattern (for example, the pattern shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(6)).

With such a configuration, the difference between the first operation request display and the second operation request display can be made clearer, and convenience for the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the second operation means is operated after the first operation means is operated once or multiple times in the first certain effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 16, the effect button 132 is repeatedly hit and then the start lever 135 is operated), a part of the first effect is executed, and the second effect is started without executing the remaining part. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cancel (interrupt) the first effect started by the operation by the first operating means and start the second effect, thereby enhancing the convenience of the player. can.

<Judge victory performance>
Next, various effects in the judge victory effect will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, the judge victory effect is a effect related to the granting or continuation of a privilege advantageous to the player, and is an example of the "certain effect" according to the present invention. In addition, as "privileges advantageous to players", for example, adding AT games, increasing the number of medals won, giving AT winning judges such as bonuses and pseudo bonuses from normal times, giving various lotteries, giving players Examples include transition to an advantageous state (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.). Also, a certain effect may be a effect that is not related to the granting or continuation of a privilege advantageous to the player.

In this judge victory effect (certain effect), when an operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) is displayed in relation to the judge victory effect (certain effect) (first case ), and there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (the effect button 132) is not displayed in relation to the judge victory effect (certain effect).

Further, in the first case, it is notified that the privilege is granted or that the privilege continues, and when the operation means (the production button 132) is operated in a state where the operation request display is displayed, the operation is performed. A response production is started.

<Operation request display and operation response presentation in judge victory presentation>
FIG. 17(a)(1) to FIG. 17(a)(8) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example of starting the operation response presentation after displaying the operation request display in the judge victory presentation. 15(a)(1) to 15(a)(8).

The effect shown in FIG. 17 (a) (1) indicates the start of the judge victory effect executed in the CZ (chance zone), and in this example, the transition to the CZ is triggered by the third stop operation in the game. At the same time, the judge victory effect executed during the CZ is started.

In the judge victory effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a notification effect including the characters "development!" Note that the trigger for starting the judge victory effect (certain effect) is not limited to the third stop operation, and for example, the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112 may be used as the start trigger.

Next, FIG. 17(a)(2) to FIG. 17(a)(4) are diagrams showing an example of effects in the first to third games of CZ. In this example, in the CZ 1st game, a judge victory production including a video in which the lord chases the old man is performed, in the next CZ 2nd game, a judgment victory production including a video in which the lord approaches the old man is performed, and in the next CZ 3rd game , Running a judge victory production including a video in which Tono catches up with the old man and crashes into it.

In the present embodiment, the judge victory effect is continued over three games, but from the player's point of view, whether or not the judge has won until the third game of CZ (that is, whether or not the AT has been won) configured in such a way that it cannot be identified. Also, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination established when the start lever of each game of CZ is operated. However, a lottery may be drawn in each game of CZ regardless of the lottery result in order to have the possibility of winning two or more ATs. In this case, it suffices to report that a plurality of prizes have been won in the "result confirmation" to be described later.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(5) show the continuation of the judge victory effect executed in the third game of CZ. The result display (winning) of the lottery (in this example, the AT lottery) to be executed at the beginning of the game is started.

In the display of the result of the judge victory effect in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the gentleman catches the old man and an image containing the words "catch", so that the gentleman wins in the judge victory effect. The player is notified of that (that the lottery (AT lottery) that is executed during the CZ has been won).

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 17(a)(6) show the continuation of the judge victory effect executed in the third game of CZ, and in this example, the result described using FIG. 17(a)(5). In addition to the display, confirmation production is started.

In the confirmation effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display (non-blinking) a button image (operation request display) BG3 imitating the appearance of the effect button (operation means) 132. is displayed to request the player to press the button image BG3, and an explanation image DG including the characters "result confirmation" is displayed on the right side of the button image BG3. This suggests to the player that the lottery results in the CZ can be confirmed.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(7) indicate the start of the operation response effect during the judgment victory effect. Triggered by the reception once, the operation response presentation RG is started.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when one depression operation of the effect button (operation means) 132 is accepted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display characters suggesting the number of games won in the AT lottery and the internal winning combination. (In this example, the result of the lottery in the CZ is notified by displaying an image containing (in this example, winning with watermelon as an internal winning combination in the 2nd G of the CZ).

In addition, the trigger for starting the operation response effect is not limited to the pressing operation of the effect button (operation means) 132, and the next operation (for example, the start lever 135 pressing operation, pressing operation of a bet button, etc.).

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(8) show an example of effects when a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game during the judge victory effect. Even if the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received in , the effect (confirmation of the lottery result during CZ) corresponding to the pressing operation is not executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a series of flow from CZ to AT is shown, but for example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G after the end of AT, and it is configured to function as a judge performance as to whether or not AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of lottery results" is intended to inform the cause of the continuation of the AT.

FIG. 17(b)(1) to FIG. 17(b)(2) are diagrams showing an example of a judge defeat effect (effect when AT lottery in CZ is not won).

In this example, instead of the lottery result display (winning) explained using FIGS. ) without displaying the operation request display explained using (6), it is configured to shift to another effect (return to normal effect in this example).

In the defeat effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the gentleman escapes from the old man and an image including the characters "escape", thereby indicating that the gentleman has been defeated in the judge effect (during CZ The player is notified that the lottery (AT lottery) has been lost).

<Judge revival performance>
Next, various effects in the judge resurrection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG.

In this judge resurrection effect (certain effect), when an operation request display corresponding to the operation means (the effect button 132 in this example) is displayed in relation to the judge resurrection effect (certain effect) (first case ), and there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (effect button 132) is not displayed in relation to the judge resurrection effect (certain effect).

In the second case, it is notified that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or that the privilege will continue after it is once suggested that the privilege will not be granted. , there is a case (third case) where the operation response effect is started when the operation means (effect button 132) is operated in a state where the operation request display is not displayed, and in this third case, the operation response effect is executed, or that the privilege is to be granted or that the privilege continues.

FIGS. 18(1) to 18(9) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of effects when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge resurrection effect (second case). 18(1) to 18(4) are the same as the judge victory effect explained with reference to FIG. 17, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 18 (5) shows the continuation of the judge revival effect executed in the third game of CZ, and in this example, the lottery executed during CZ with the third stop operation of the third game of CZ as a trigger. (In this example, AT lottery) result display (non-winning) is started.

In the display of the result of the judge resurrection effect in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the gentleman escapes from the old man and an image including the words "escape", so that the judge is defeated in the judge resurrection effect. The player is notified that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been lost, that is, confirmation of the lottery result during the CZ.

Also, in this embodiment, a series of flow from CZ to AT is not won, but for example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G after the end of AT, and it functions as a judge effect as to whether or not AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of lottery result" informs the factor that the AT will not continue.

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 18(6) shows an example of the resurrection effect. The player is informed that the privilege (in this example, AT game) will be given or continued by displaying an image including the chasing moving image and the characters "Let's escape!".

19(1) to 19(10) show the case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge resurrection effect (second case) and the operation means is operated to start the operation response effect (third case). ) in chronological order. Note that effects other than the effect shown in FIG. 19(6) are the same as the judge resurrection effect described with reference to FIG. 18, so description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 19 (6) indicates the start of the operation response effect during the judge resurrection effect. Triggered by the reception once, the operation response presentation RG is started.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when one depression operation of the effect button (operation means) 132 is accepted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display characters suggesting the number of games won in the AT lottery and the internal winning combination. (In this example, in the 2G of CZ, winning with watermelon as an internal winning combination, ie confirmation of the lottery result in CZ) is displayed to notify the lottery result in CZ.

In addition, in this embodiment, a series of flow from CZ to AT is shown, but for example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G after the end of AT, and it is configured to function as a judge performance as to whether or not AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of lottery results" is intended to inform the cause of the continuation of the AT.

According to this example, even if the operation request display corresponding to the effect button (operation means) 132 is not displayed, the operation response effect RG may be started in response to the operation of the effect button (operation means) 132. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation request display by making the player feel uncomfortable in relation to a certain effect.

Note that this operation response effect RG also functions as an effect (an effect that foretells that the resurrection effect will be executed in the next game) for notifying the cause of awarding or continuation of the privilege. Further, the operation response effect RG in the judge resurrection effect of this example and the operation response effect RG in the judge victory effect described with reference to FIGS. 17A and 17B are the same effect.

<Judge defeat performance>
Next, various effects in the judge defeat effect will be described with reference to FIG.

In this judge defeat effect (some effect), when an operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) is displayed in relation to the judge defeat effect (certain effect) (first case ), and there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (the effect button 132) is not displayed in relation to the judge defeat effect (certain effect).

In the second case, it is notified that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or that the privilege will continue after it is once suggested that the privilege will not be granted. , there is a case (fourth case) where the operation response effect is not started when the operation means (effect button 132) is operated in a state where the operation request display is not displayed.

FIG. 20(1) to FIG. 20(7) show the case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge defeat effect (second case) and the operation means is operated but the operation response effect is not started (fourth case). case) in chronological order. 20(1) to 20(4) are the same as the judge victory effect explained with reference to FIG. 17, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 20 (5) shows the continuation of the judge defeat effect executed in the third game of CZ. (In this example, AT lottery) result display (non-winning) is started.

In the result display of the judge defeat effect in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the gentleman escapes from the old man and an image including the words "escape". The player is notified of that (lost the lottery (AT lottery) executed during CZ).

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 20(6) shows the continuation of the defeat effect shown in FIG. 20(5). , the operation response effect is not started, and it is configured to shift to another effect (in this example, return to the normal effect).

<Modified example of judge resurrection production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a modified example of the judge resurrection effect will be described.

In the judge resurrection effect described with reference to FIG. 19, the defeat effect is started with the third stop operation as a trigger, and the operation response effect is performed when the operation of the operating means (effect button 132) is received after the third stop operation. Although an example is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation response effect may be started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating.

FIG. 21 shows the case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge resurrection effect (second case), and the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect in chronological order. The effects shown in FIGS. 21(1) to 21(5) are the same as the judge resurrection effects described with reference to FIG. 19, so description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 21(6) is an example of a resurrection effect. In the resurrection effect of this example, it is assumed that the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the game next to the game in which the defeat effect was executed. As a trigger, the player is informed that the privilege (AT game in this example) will be given or continued by displaying a video of the lord chasing the old man again and an image containing the characters "Let's escape!" are doing.

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 21(7) indicates the start of the operation response effect during the judge revival effect. While at least one of is rotating, the operation response presentation RG is started when a pressing operation of the presentation button (operating means) 132, which is a hidden button, is received once.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when one depression operation of the effect button (operation means) 132 is accepted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display characters suggesting the number of games won in the AT lottery and the internal winning combination. (In this example, in the 2G of CZ, winning with watermelon as an internal winning combination, ie confirmation of the lottery result in CZ) is displayed to notify the lottery result in CZ.

In addition, in this embodiment, a series of flow from CZ to AT is shown, but for example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G after the end of AT, and it is configured to function as a judge performance as to whether or not AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of lottery results" is intended to inform the cause of the continuation of the AT.

In addition, in the judge victory effect explained using FIG. However, in this example, the period from when the third stop operation is accepted in the current game to when the third stop operation is accepted in the next game is set as the operation acceptance valid period, and the judge victory effect (in the first case ) and the judge resurrection effect (second case) have different operation acceptance valid periods.

Note that the operation acceptance valid period is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a period until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after accepting the third stop operation in the game, or a period until the third stop operation in the game. It may be a period from when the operation is accepted until a specified number of medals are betted. It may be after receiving an operation.

As shown in FIG. 21(8), the operation response effect RG is continued until the operation reception valid period of the effect button (operation means) 132 elapses (in this example, until the third stop operation is received). may be executed. Further, in this example, an example is shown in which the operation response effect RG is started when the operation of the effect button 132 is accepted. A response presentation RG may be started.

<Invention 2-1>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention 2-1 of the present application has operating means (for example, the effect button 132) provided at a position operable by the player. ), wherein an operation request display (for example, button image BG shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain performance (for example, judge performance) is There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 17), and when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect ( Hereinafter, referred to as "second case", for example, there is a judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. 17(a)(7), and an operation response effect RG shown in FIG. It is a game table characterized by

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention 2-1 of the present application has first operation means (for example, the production button 132) provided at a position operable by the player. and a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position operable by the player, wherein the first operating means is operated in relation to a certain performance. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(6)) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory presentation shown in FIG. 17). , when the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means and the second operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case". For example, the judge shown in FIG. In the first case, when at least the first operation means is operated, an operation response effect (for example, FIG. 17(a) ( 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the second operation means (for example, , and the operation response presentation RG) shown in FIG. 19(6) is started.

According to the game machine according to the invention 2-1 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started in response to the operation of the operation means. By making the player feel uncomfortable in relation to the performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation request display.

<Invention 2-2>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention 2-2 of the present application has operating means (for example, the effect button 132) provided at a position operable by the player. ), wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine, and an operation request display (for example, FIG. 17(a) (6) button image BG) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 17). There is a case where the corresponding operation request display is not displayed (hereinafter referred to as "second case"; for example, the judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. 19). However, when the operation means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (for example, an operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. A response effect RG) is started, and in the first case, the display of the operation request display is started in a state where all the reels are stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention 2-1 of the present application has first operation means (for example, the production button 132) provided at a position operable by the player. and a second operation means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position operable by the player, wherein the game machine is a slot machine, and a In relation to this, when an operation request display (for example, button image BG shown in FIG. 17(a)(6)) corresponding to the first operation means is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case". For example, 17), and the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means and the second operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case For example, there is a judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. A rendering (for example, an operation response rendering RG shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(7)) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operating means is operated, the second operating means (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 19 (6)) is started in response to the operation of , and in the first case, the operation request display is displayed in a state where all the reels are stopped. is started.

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 2-2 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started in response to the operation of the operation means. By making the player feel uncomfortable in relation to the performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation request display. Further, when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is displayed, the operation request display is started after all the reels are stopped, so the player can concentrate on the operation by the operation means.

<Invention 2-3>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention 2-3 of the present application has operating means (for example, the effect button 132) provided at a position operable by the player. ), wherein an operation request display (for example, button image BG shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain performance (for example, judge performance) is There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 17), and when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect ( Hereinafter, referred to as "second case", for example, there is a judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. 17 (a) (7), and an operation response effect RG shown in FIG. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first case is more likely to appear than the second case.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to Invention 2-3 of the present application has first operation means (for example, the effect button 132) provided at a position operable by the player. and a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position operable by the player, wherein the first operating means is operated in relation to a certain performance. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(6)) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory presentation shown in FIG. 17). , when the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means and the second operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case". For example, the judge shown in FIG. In the first case, when at least the first operation means is operated, an operation response effect (for example, FIG. 17(a) ( 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the second operation means (for example, , and (6) of FIG. 19) are started, and are more likely to appear in the first case than in the second case.

According to the gaming machine according to the invention 2-3 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started in response to the operation of the operation means. By making the player feel uncomfortable in relation to the performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation request display. In addition, since the appearance frequency is higher when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is displayed than when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player. It should be noted that the second case may appear more easily than the first case.

<Invention 2-4>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention 2-4 of the present application has operation means (for example, the effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate. ), wherein an operation request display (for example, button image BG shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain performance (for example, judge performance) is There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 17), and when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect ( Hereinafter, referred to as "second case", for example, there is a judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. 17 (a) (7), and an operation response effect RG shown in FIG. The game machine is characterized in that the effect is executed in relation to a privilege advantageous to the player.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to Invention 2-4 of the present application has first operating means (for example, the effect button 132) provided at a position operable by the player. and a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position operable by the player, wherein the first operating means is operated in relation to a certain performance. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(6)) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory presentation shown in FIG. 17). , when the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means and the second operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case". For example, the judge shown in FIG. In the first case, when at least the first operation means is operated, an operation response effect (for example, FIG. 17(a) ( 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the second operation means (for example, , an operation response effect RG) shown in FIG. 19(6) is started, and the certain effect is a effect executed in relation to a privilege advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine according to the invention 2-4 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started in response to the operation of the operation means. By making the player feel uncomfortable in relation to the performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation request display. Moreover, since a certain effect is a effect that is executed in relation to a benefit advantageous to the player, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, the above-mentioned certain effects are benefits that are advantageous to the player (for example, adding AT games, increasing the number of medals won, giving AT winning judges such as bonuses and pseudo bonuses from normal times, giving various lotteries, playing games, etc.) (e.g., transition to a state (AT, bonus, etc.) that is advantageous to the player), and in the first case, the grant of the privilege or the continuation of the privilege. is notified, and in the first case, when the operation means (or at least the first operation means) is operated while the operation request display is displayed, the operation response effect is started, and the In the second case, notification that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or notification that the privilege will continue after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted In the second case, when the operation means (or at least the second operation means) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed, the operation response effect is started (hereinafter , “third case”), and in the third case, it is notified that the privilege is granted after the operation response effect is executed, or that the privilege continues. can be anything.

With such a configuration, when the operation means is operated while the operation request display is not displayed, the operation response effect is started (case 3), the player is given a privilege advantageous to the player. It will function as a continuous notice, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the second case, when the operation means (or at least the second operation means) is operated while the operation request display is displayed, the operation response effect is not started (hereinafter referred to as ), and the privilege may be more easily granted or continued in the third case than in the fourth case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player when the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated in a state where the operation request display is not displayed (third case). can.

Further, the operation response effect may be the same effect in the first case and the second case.

With such a configuration, the operation response effect can be made the same regardless of the presence or absence of the operation request display, and the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced.

Further, the operation response effect may be a effect of informing a cause of granting or continuation of the privilege.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation when the operation response effect is started, so that the player can be positively operated by the operation means.

Moreover, the length of the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective may be different between the first case and the second case. Also, the length of the period during which the operation of the first operating means is effective in the first case and the period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective in the second case are different. may

With such a configuration, the difference between the first case and the second case can be clarified, and the playability can be enhanced.

Further, the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective may be longer or shorter in the first case than in the second case. Further, the length of the period during which the operation of the second operating means is valid in the second case is longer than the period in which the operation of the first operating means is valid in the first case. can be longer or shorter.

Further, in the second case, when the operation means (or the second operation means) is operated even when at least one of the plurality of reels is rotating, the An operation response presentation may be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to receive an operation by the operating means and start an operation response effect even while the reels are rotating, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Further, in either case of the first case or the second case, the operation response presentation may not be started when the operation means is not operated. Further, when the first operation means is not operated in the first case and/or when the second operation means is not operated in the second case, the operation response effect is performed. It may not be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference from the case where the operation means is operated.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the contents described in one configuration among the plurality of configurations described in the above embodiment to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 22 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, three lines will be valid with the addition of the upper horizontal prize line and the lower horizontal prize line, and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right Five lines, ie, a downward pay line and an upward pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted may be referred to as a "three-bet game", and a game in which two medals are inserted may be referred to as a "two-bet game".

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as a effect device that executes effects described later.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. In the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the provision of a privilege may be executed based on the operation of the effect button 192 .

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the effect button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A driving circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127 is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
With reference to FIG. 24(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 24(b), the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are bonus combinations that shift to the bonus game, and the replay (replay) is repeated without inserting new medals. Winning hands may be distinguished from winning hands and may be called "working hands" as the hands that can be played. is included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7)-BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" for BB1 and "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7)-BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating internal winning is set is maintained until the next game and thereafter, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2. The combination "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also called bonus)-RB symbol-RB symbol". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not based on the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. A regular bonus game may be started later, and the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started.

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbols The combination is "cherry pattern-ANY pattern-ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for the replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each role is obtained by combining numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role with numerical data within the range of random numbers acquired during internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). It is obtained by the value divided by The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In the present embodiment, watermelon and cherry are respectively won when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. Further, Bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a pushing role.

The AT state is a game state in which information (details of stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the player wins an internal win for a chance combination or a push-up combination. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 are used to execute the operation navigation for informing the content of the stop operation to help win a prize. Specifically, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the timing of the stop operation (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the details of the stop operation of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which operation navigation is not executed even if the player wins internally for a chance combination or a push-up combination.

In this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state is shifted to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on the result of an internal winning combination lottery. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games), the state is shifted to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state, and a predetermined number of AT games is awarded. In the AT state, an AT add-on lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the given AT game numbers are consumed, the AT state ends and shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 in accordance with the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number obtained in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 26) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 27(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 27(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 27A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 28A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 28(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 28(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 28(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 28A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 28(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 28(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 28A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 28(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Playability>
Next, the game features common to the following Examples C1 to C5 will be described. In this embodiment, the two-coin bet game is disadvantageous to the player compared to the three-coin bet game. Here, the term "disadvantageous" specifically means that in a two-coin bet game, a process for giving a privilege advantageous to the player is not executed. For example, in a double bet game, an AT lottery for giving the number of AT games executed in the normal state, an AT extra lottery for giving an additional number of AT games in the AT state, a lottery for shifting to a specialized zone, etc. It may not be executed, or in a two-coin bet game, the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state may not be updated. For this reason, in the double-bet game, a "two-bet notification", which is an effect for notifying that the game is a two-bet game, is executed to alert the player that a game with a disadvantage is being executed. ing. As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine on which a three-coin bet game is recommended.

<Example C1>
First, with reference to FIG. 29, the effects of the 3-coin bet game and the 2-coin bet game in Example C1 will be described. FIG. 29(a) shows an example of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the 3-bet game, and FIG. 29(b) shows an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the 2-bet game. An example of the production is shown.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), in the 3-coin bet game, the number-of-games display d1 is updated based on the operation of the start lever while a predetermined effect image is being displayed. For example, the predetermined effect image may be an effect reflecting the result of the internal winning combination lottery process. The number-of-games display d1 is an effect for displaying the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state. In embodiment C1, as described above, when the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29(b), in the two-coin bet game, the two-coin bet notification d2 starts to be displayed based on the operation of the start lever. The 2-coin bet notification d2 is, as described above, a warning effect for informing that the game is a 2-coin bet game. The double bet notification d2 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the entire surface of the effect image display device 157, and is displayed from after the start lever operation to the third stop operation. That is, while the two-coin bet notification d2 is being displayed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. Also, after the third stop operation, the original effect image is restored, but the number-of-games display d1 is not updated. This is because the number of games in the normal state is not updated in the two-coin bet game. The number-of-games display d1 is updated when the start lever is operated in the next 3-bet game.

In the example shown in FIG. 29(a), the double bet notification d2 is executed from after the start lever operation to the third stop operation. It may be continued until the stop operation or the second stop operation, or it may be continued until the next game betting operation. Also, the two-coin bet notification d2 may continue for a predetermined time after the start lever is operated.

In the following, the case where the start lever is operated in the 3-bet game is referred to as "executing the 3-bet game", and the case where the start lever is operated in the 2-bet game is "bet 2". When the game is executed".

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an effect when a 3-coin bet game is executed after execution of the pseudo-bonus determination notification d3 in the normal state. Specifically, FIG. 30(a) is a time chart of game progress in the case where a 3-coin bet game is executed after execution of pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state, and FIG. 30(b) is a pseudo-bonus confirmation in the normal state. It shows an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the 3-coin bet game is executed after the notification d3 is executed. Note that the pseudo-bonus determination notification d3 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and is an effect for notifying the granting of a privilege. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus is the AT state of 30 games, and the pseudo-bonus determination notification d3 is an effect suggesting a transition to the AT state.

In Example C1, when a 3-coin bet game is executed in the next game after execution of the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3, the slot machine 100 executes a reel action based on the start lever operation. The reel action is an effect related to rotation and stopping of the reels 110-112. The slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the active line based on the execution of the reel action, and executes the symbol matching notification d4. The pattern matching notification d4 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and is an effect to notify that a special symbol combination has been completed by reel action, that is, to notify that a privilege has been granted. .

Next, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 and executes an effect d5 indicating that the state has shifted to the AT state. The effect d5 indicating that the state has shifted to the AT state is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and when an internal win is made for the winning combination in the game, operation navigation indicating the order of the stop operation is performed. to display an image of

FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining an outline of the effect when a two-coin bet game is executed after executing the pseudo-bonus determination notification d3 in the normal state. Specifically, FIG. 31(a) is a time chart of game progress in the case where a two-coin bet game is executed first and then a three-coin bet game is executed after the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state, FIG. (b) shows an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the 2-coin bet game is executed first and then the 3-coin bet game is executed after the pseudo bonus determination notification d3 is executed in the normal state. showing.

In the embodiment C1, when the two-coin bet game is executed in the next game after the execution of the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3, the slot machine 100 does not execute the reel action based on the start lever operation, and the two-coin bet notification d2 is issued. is set to start running.

As described above, in the embodiment C1, the reel action is reserved and set in the game in which the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed. It is designed to be executed when a 3-coin bet game is executed.

Therefore, when the 3-coin bet game is executed after the 2-coin bet game is executed, the slot machine 100 executes the reel action based on the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the activated line based on the execution of the reel action, terminates the double bet notification d2, and executes symbol matching notification d4. That is, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the two-coin bet notification d2 is continuously executed from the operation of the start lever for the two-coin bet game to the execution of the symbol alignment notification d4 for the three-coin bet game. be done.

As described above, in the embodiment C1, there is a period in which the 2-coin bet notification d2 is executed even in a 3-coin bet game, and the 2-coin bet executed in the previous 2-coin bet game in the 3-coin bet game is After the notifying effect is continuously executed for a part of the period (in the embodiment C1, the period until immediately before the pattern alignment is notified by the reel action), the effect notifying the awarding of the privilege is executed. .

After the reel action ends, the slot machine 100 starts spinning the reels 110 to 112 and executes an effect d5 indicating that the state has shifted to the AT state.

As described above, according to the embodiment C1, since the notification of the two-coin bet game is executed in the game in which the provision of the privilege, which is the effect that attracts the attention of the player, is notified, the attention of the two-coin bet game can be emphasized. .

In the embodiment C1, as an example in which a privilege is given, the case of a pseudo bonus is given, but in other cases, for example, when AT games are added, when the number of acquisitions is added, in a special zone Needless to say, it may be applied to cases such as rushing.

Further, in the embodiment C1, the reel action is executed when executing the 3-coin bet game after executing the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3, but the effect executed is not limited to this. For example, a freeze effect may be executed. The freeze effect is a effect in which the player's operation is not accepted for a predetermined time. For example, even if the start lever is operated, the reels 110 to 112 do not start rotating for a predetermined time.

In addition, in the embodiment C1, one type of double bet notification d2 is executed, but a plurality of types of double bet notification d2 are provided, and any one of the two bet notification d2 is executed according to the situation. good too.

Further, the two-coin bet notification d2 of the embodiment C1 is only an image effect and does not execute a sound effect of outputting a sound, but a sound effect may be executed.

<Example C2>
Next, the continuous effect of Example C2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32(a) is a time chart showing the flow of continuous effects in a three-bet game, and FIG. An example is shown.

The continuous effect d10 executed in the embodiment C2 is a effect that is developed over three games, and is a effect that expects the provision of a privilege. Specifically, the continuous effect d10 includes an introduction effect d11 executed in the first game of the continuous effect, a drinking comparison effect d12 executed in the second game of the continuous effect, and a third game of the continuous effect. and a result effect d13. Note that FIG. 32 shows a form of a continuous effect as an image display effect, but the continuous effect also includes a sound effect of outputting sound and a lamp effect accompanied by lamp lighting.

In the first game of the continuous effect d10, as shown in FIG. 32(b), in the 3-coin bet game, the game number display d1 is updated based on the start lever operation, for example. In addition, in the result effect d13 of the third game of the continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the result (win or lose) of the drinking comparison effect d12 is displayed. It is supposed to be granted. For example, when executing the continuous effect d10 in the normal state, the privilege may be a transition to the AT state.

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating another example of continuous effects in Example C2. FIG. 33(a) is a time chart showing the flow of continuous effects when a 3-coin bet game and a 2-coin bet game are mixed, and FIG. It shows an example of an effect mode of a continuous effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a case where the effect is performed. Specifically, in FIG. 33, when the game in which the execution of the continuous effect is started is the first game, the first and fourth games are three-bet games, and the second and third games are two-bet games. It shows the case of execution.

Since the first game in which execution of the continuous effect is started is the same as the example shown in FIG. 32, the description is omitted. The second game is a two-coin bet game, but the slot machine 100 executes the drinking comparison effect d12 in the same manner as in FIG. That is, the slot machine 100 develops a continuous effect without executing the double-bet notification d2 even in a double-bet game. However, in the drinking comparison effect d12 in this case, no sound is output, and only the effect image is displayed. This is to give a penalty to a player who has played a two-coin bet game.

As for the penalty, the example of the continuous effect shown in FIG. The player has suffered a loss for the amount played. Also, although not shown in FIG. 12, if the player loses in the drinking comparison effect d12 and the normal state continues, the number of games in the normal state is not updated as described above, so the number of medals inserted is simply changed. Not only is it a loss, but it also delays reaching the ceiling number of games.

Next, the slot machine 100 executes the double bet notification d2 in the third game. In other words, when a two-coin bet game is executed continuously for two games, the continuous effect is executed in the first game, and the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed in the second game. Specifically, the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed from after the start lever operation of the third game to the third stop operation. That is, the continuous effect is not executed in the third game.

Next, in the fourth game, the slot machine 100 executes a result effect d13 corresponding to the third game of the continuous effect. When a two-coin bet game is executed during execution of the continuous performance in this way, the two-coin bet notification d2 for calling attention is executed, so that the period for executing the continuous performance is extended as a result.

In the double bet game, as described above, the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state is not updated. is adjusted to prolong the period of arousing the player.

As described above, according to the embodiment C2, since the 2-coin bet game is notified during the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and to emphasize the attention of the 2-coin bet game.

FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the continuous effect in Example C2. FIG. 34 shows a modification of the effect mode of the continuous effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the 3-coin bet game and the 2-coin bet game are mixed.

In the example shown in FIG. 33, the slot machine 100 executes the double bet notification d2 in the third game, but the period during which the double bet notification d2 is executed is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 34, the slot machine 100 may execute the double bet notification d2 after the second stop operation of the second game. That is, part of the drinking comparison effect d12 may be performed during a part of the period of the second game, and then the two-coin bet notification d2 may be performed during the remaining period of the second game. In this case, there is a part in which the drinking comparison effect d12 is not executed in the second game.

Thus, according to the modification of the embodiment C2, since the continuous effect d10 and the two-coin bet notification d2 coexist in one game, it is possible to further emphasize the attention of the two-coin bet game.

<Example C3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the double bet notification d2 executed in the embodiment C3 will be described. In Example C3, there are two types of double bet notifications d2. One is a two-coin bet notification d2A that is executed in a state (hereinafter referred to as a first state) in which the bonus combination has not been internally won and there is no possibility of winning the bonus combination. This is a two-coin bet notification d2B that is executed in a state (hereinafter referred to as a second state) in which the bonus combination is internally won and there is a possibility of winning the bonus combination.

FIG. 35(b) shows an example of the display mode of the double bet notification d2A displayed on the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 35(c) is a double bet displayed on the effect image display device 157. An example of the display mode of the notification d2B is shown. The 2-coin bet notification d2A and the 2-coin bet notification d2B are at least partly the same (for example, the display wording "! 2-coin bet is playing!"), but the display mode, color, and size are the same. , the display area, etc. are different. For example, the two-piece bet notification d2A may be an effect image displayed over the entire screen, and the two-piece bet notification d2B may be an effect image displayed in a partial area of the screen. Also, the contents of the background images of the two-coin bet notification d2A and the two-coin bet notification d2B may be the same, but the colors of the background images may be different.

By the way, in Example C3, if a bonus combination is won in a two-coin bet game, the game shifts to a disadvantageous bonus game. A disadvantageous bonus game is, for example, when an AT lottery is not executed during a bonus game, when an AT additional lottery is not executed during a bonus game, or when the bonus game ends with the prescribed number of medals paid out, the number of medals paid out reaches the prescribed number. This is a bonus game in which a large number of medals are required to reach the goal, the number of medals does not actually increase, and a large number of games are required to complete the bonus game.

Therefore, when executing the double bet notification d2B in the second state in the embodiment C3, as shown in FIG. 35(c), the chance combination notification d21 is executed to avoid winning a bonus combination. The chance combination notification d21 is one of the operation navigations described above.

Now, the chance hand notification d21 will be described. d21 is executed. The chance combination notification d21 is an effect image suggesting that the chance combination has been internally won. By recognizing this performance image, the player aims at the cherry symbol and performs a stop operation. As a result, it is configured such that winning of the chance combination is facilitated.

On the other hand, the chance combination notification d21 that is executed together with the two-coin bet notification d2B in the second state is also executed to make the player perform a stop operation aiming at the cherry symbol. This is because the player aims at the cherry symbol by recognizing the effect image of the chance combination notification d21, as in the case of FIG. 35(a). As a result of this stop operation, winning of a bonus combination can be avoided.

FIG. 36(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the two-coin bet game is executed in the first state, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing transition of an effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when a coin betting game is executed; In either case, during the period from the operation of the start lever of the two-bet game to the third stop operation, the two-bet notification d2 (in the first state, the two-bet notification d2A, in the second state, , 2-coin bet notification d2B) is displayed.

Note that the original effect image (hereinafter referred to as background image) is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 while the two-coin bet notification d2 is being displayed.

As described above, according to the embodiment C3, the 2-coin bet notification d2B can be made conspicuous in the 2-coin bet game for avoiding the winning of the bonus combination. be able to.

FIG. 37(a) shows an image of a modified example of the double bet notification d2A. As shown in FIG. 37(a), the background image may be left and the double bet notification d2A may be displayed on the background image. In other words, it is not necessary to display the double bet notification d2A over the entire screen of the effect image display device 157. FIG.

FIG. 37(b) shows an image of a modified example of the double bet notification d2B. As shown in FIG. 37(b), the background image may be left and the two-coin bet notification d2B and chance combination notification d21 may be displayed on the background image.

Also, as in the case of adopting the two-coin bet notification d2A shown in FIG. 37(a) and the two-coin bet notification d2B shown in FIG. may be the same and their display positions may be different.

Note that a double bet notification d2B as shown in FIG. 37(c) may be employed. That is, as long as the wordings of the two-coin bet notification d2A and the two-coin bet notification d2B are partially the same (for example, two), the wordings of both may not be completely the same.

<Example C4>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the button effect of Example C4 will be described. In Example C4, there is a case where a button effect is executed in a 3-coin bet game in the normal state. The button effect is an effect in which a display prompting the operation of the effect button 192 is displayed after the third stop operation, and a result indicating winning or non-winning of the award is displayed when the effect button 192 is operated. be. It should be noted that the awarding of the privilege in Example C4 specifically means transition to the AT state.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when executing the button effect in the 3-coin bet game.

The button effect includes, as shown in FIG. 38, a start display d30, an operation promotion display d31, and an operation response display d32. The start display d30 is a display for notifying the start of the button effect, and is displayed after the third stop operation. The operation prompt display d31 is displayed after the end of the start display d30 after the third stop operation, and is a display prompting the operation of the effect button 192. FIG. The operation response display d32 is a display suggesting the result of privilege provision based on the operation of the effect button 192. FIG. The operation response display d32 includes an operation response display d32A suggesting winning of awarding of a privilege and an operation response display d32B suggesting non-winning of awarding of privilege. It should be noted that when the effect button 192 is not operated, the operation response display d32 is not executed.

When the operation response display d32A is displayed in the button effect, that is, when the privilege is given, AT starts to display the wording (for example, "bonus confirmed" etc.) indicating the award of the privilege based on the start lever operation of the next game. Image d33A is displayed.

On the other hand, when the operation response display d32B is displayed in the button effect, that is, when the privilege is not provided, the normal image d33B, which is the background image in the normal state, is displayed based on the start lever operation of the next game.

FIG. 39 shows the change in the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the button effect is started in the 3-coin bet game, the 2-coin bet game is executed in the next game, and then the 3-coin bet game is executed. It is a figure which shows. Note that FIG. 39 shows an example in which the effect button 192 is not operated in the button effect and a privilege is given.

If the next game after displaying the operation prompting display d31 in the button effect is a two-coin bet game, the slot machine 100 executes the two-coin bet notification d2 based on the start lever operation. The two-coin bet notification d2 is displayed after the start lever operation until the third stop operation.

Next, the slot machine 100 executes the start display d30 after the third stop operation of the double bet game. The start display d30 is continuously displayed until the start lever operation of the 3-bet game, which is the next game.

Next, the slot machine 100 displays the AT start image d33A based on the start lever operation of the 3-coin bet game, which is the next game. In other words, the start display d30 continues to be displayed after the third stop operation of the two-bet game until the start lever operation of the three-bet game, but after that, the operation promotion display d31 and the operation response display d32A are not displayed. , the AT start image d33A is suddenly displayed.

As described above, in the embodiment C4, the start display d30 is continuously displayed until the start lever operation of the three-bet game after the third stop operation of the two-bet game, but the operation prompting display d31 is not executed. Even if the performance button 192 is operated during the period from the third stop operation of the 2-bet game to the start lever operation of the 3-bet game, the operation of the performance button 192 is not effective and the operation response is not performed. Display d32 is also not executed.

As described above, according to the embodiment C4, when the next game after executing the button effect is the 2-coin bet game, even if the 3-coin bet game is executed thereafter, part of the button effect is not executed. It is possible to emphasize the call for attention to the two-coin bet game.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the 2-coin bet notification d2 is executed from the start lever operation of the 2-coin bet game to the third stop operation, but the 2-coin bet notification d2 is executed by the start lever operation of the 2-coin bet game. to the third stop operation of the 3-coin bet game. Also, it is not necessary to execute the double bet notification d2 in the double bet game. In other words, a configuration without the second two-coin bet notification d2 shown in FIG. 39 may be employed so that part of the button effect is not executed. The non-execution of a part of the button presentation functions as an alert notification that the game is a two-coin bet game.

In the embodiment C4, the operation response display d32 is not executed when the next game after executing the button effect is a two-coin bet game, but the operation response display d32 is executed after the button effect is executed. The case of not doing so is not limited to this. For example, it may be applied when the door is opened (for example, when the store clerk opens the door, or when there is a fraudulent act), and the operation response display d32 may not be executed.

Further, when a plurality of types of button effects with different execution triggers are provided, the operation response display d32 may not be executed when a two-coin bet game is executed for any of the button effects. Note that, for some button effects among the plurality of types of button effects, the operation response display d32 may be executed in the subsequent 3-bet game even when the 2-bet game is executed.

<Example C5>
In the fifth embodiment, the notification period of the double bet notification d2 will be described in detail. FIG. 40(a) is a time chart showing the notification period of the double bet notification d2 in the double bet game, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation aspect.

In the above embodiments C1 to C4, it was explained that the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed after the start lever operation of the two-coin bet game until the third stop operation. 2, the 2-coin bet notification d2 is executed from when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start lever is operated until the third stop operation is performed. After the third stop operation, the image of the effect executed before the start lever operation of the 2-bet game, that is, the image of the effect displayed in the 3-bet game (hereinafter referred to as normal image) is displayed. be. Since the two-piece bet notification d2 is displayed over the entire screen of the effect image display device 157, when the two-piece bet notification d2 is executed, the normal image becomes difficult to see.

In the normal state two-coin bet game, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the game number display d1 is performed, but the game number display d1 is not updated. The number of games shown in the number-of-games display d1 is the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state. Migration takes place. Therefore, the game number display d1 that is not updated can be said to be a penalty notification regarding the provision of benefits to the player.

Here, the notification timings of the number-of-games display d1 and the notification d2 of the number of games in the two-coin bet game are different. Specifically, in the two-coin bet game, after the start lever is operated, the game number display d1 is first executed, and then the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed. As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the penalty notification.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the display area of the double bet notification d2 is configured to be larger than the display area of the number-of-games display d1.

As described above, according to the embodiment C5, in a two-coin bet game, the execution timing of the two-coin bet notification d2 for notifying that the game is a two-coin bet game and the game number notification d1 for informing the number of games in the normal state are made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking each notification and to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game is a game in which a penalty is given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a modified example of the notification period of the double bet notification d2 will be described. FIGS. 41A and 41B are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the two-coin bet game.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the 2-coin bet notification d2 is executed from the time when a predetermined time has passed since the operation of the start lever of the 2-coin bet game until the 3-coin bet is made in the next game. may

Further, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the two-coin bet notification d2 may be started immediately after the start lever operation of the two-coin bet game and ended when a predetermined time has passed since the start lever operation. After that, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the number-of-games display d1A emphasizing that the number of games has not been changed (for example, the display area, display position, color, etc. are different from the number-of-games display d1) is displayed at the third stop. operations may be performed. That is, in the two-coin bet game, after the start lever is operated, the two-coin bet notification d2 may be executed first, and then the game number display d1 may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the two-coin bet notification d2 may be executed again from the third stop operation until the three-coin bet is made in the next game. That is, the two-coin bet notification d2 and the number-of-games display d1 may be repeatedly displayed.

Next, a modified example of the display area of the double bet notification d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 42(a). FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a two-coin bet game.

The double bet notification d2 may be displayed on a part of the screen of the effect image display device 157 as shown in FIG. 42(a). In this case, the normal image and the number-of-games display d1 may be displayed in the display area outside the double-bet notification d2. In other words, the two-coin bet notification d2 and the number-of-games display d1 may be displayed simultaneously in different display areas of one display device. Further, in this case, the display area of the two-coin bet notification d2 and the display area of the number-of-games display d1 may be displayed so as to overlap each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42(b), a modified example in which the double-bet notification d2 and the number-of-games display d12 are displayed on different display devices will be described. FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the sub effect image display device 195 in the two-coin bet game.

FIG. 42(b) shows a modification in which the two-coin bet notification d2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the number of games display d1 is displayed on the sub effect image display device 195. FIG. In this case, the sub effect image display device 195 displays the highlighted game number display d1A (for example, the game number display d1 is different in color, wording, etc.) from the start lever operation to the third stop operation of the two-bet game. may be displayed in

The execution end timings of the number-of-games display d1 and the two-coin bet notification d2 are different as shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, but may be the same.

Examples C1 to C5 of the present embodiment have been described above, but the example of the present embodiment is not limited to this, and each example may be combined.

<Summary of embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example C1),
Any one of a plurality of bets including a first bet (e.g. 3) and a second bet less than the first bet (e.g. 2) can be set betting number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102);
game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) for executing a game based on the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means;
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising
The game table is
A game in which the first bet amount is set and executed (hereinafter referred to as "first bet amount game") is recommended,
The effect means is a first method for notifying that a game executed with the second bet amount set (hereinafter referred to as a "second bet amount game") is the second bet amount game. A means capable of executing an effect (for example, 2 bet notification d2),
When the effect means executes the first effect in at least a part of the period of the first bet number game (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game") (hereinafter referred to as "first case") ) (for example, FIGS. 31(a) and (b)),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, in a certain first bet number game, there is a case where the first effect for informing that the second bet number is reached is executed, so that the second bet number game Attention calls can be emphasized.

In the above first basic configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second effect (for example, pattern matching notification d4) in the predetermined game,
In the first case, the effect means executes the second effect after executing the first effect (for example, FIGS. 31 (a) and (b)),
This is the first preferred configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, by continuously executing the first effect and the second effect, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game.

In the first preferred configuration,
The predetermined game is a game involving reel action,
The effect means executes the first effect during execution of the reel action in the predetermined game, and starts executing the second effect in relation to the end of the reel action (for example, FIG. 31 ( a) and (b)),
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game by executing the reel action.

In the second preferred configuration,
The reel action is reserved for execution in a game (hereinafter referred to as "reserved game") prior to the predetermined game,
When the game set as the reserved game reserved game is the second number-of-bets game, the reel action is not executed, and thereafter, the game that has become the first number-of-bets game is the reel action in the predetermined game. is executed (e.g., FIGS. 31(a) and (b)),
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game and notify that the first number-of-bets game is a recommended game.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, or third preferred configuration,
The predetermined game is a game that notifies the player of a benefit that is advantageous to the player (e.g., transition from normal state to AT state, addition of AT game, etc.)
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferred configuration, it is possible to call attention to the second bet number game in the game that is important to the player.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, third preferred configuration, or fourth preferred configuration,
The first case occurs in at least a part of the game immediately after the second bet number game (for example, FIGS. 31(a) and (b)),
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferable configuration, since the first effect is executed immediately after the second number-of-bets game, it is possible to clearly recognize that the attention is being called for the second number-of-bets game.

(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example C2),
Any one of a plurality of bets including a first bet (e.g. 3) and a second bet less than the first bet (e.g. 2) can be set betting number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102);
game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) for executing a game based on the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means;
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising
The gaming machine is recommended to play a game in which the first bet number is set (hereinafter referred to as "first bet number game"),
The effect means is a first effect for notifying that the second bet amount is reached in a game executed with the second bet amount set (hereinafter referred to as a "second bet amount game"). (For example, a two-coin bet notification d2) can be executed,
The effect means executes a second effect (for example, a drinking comparison effect d12 of the continuous effect d10) during at least a part of a certain second number-of-bets game (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined game"). There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, FIGS. 33(a) and (b)),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to this second basic configuration, since the second effect may be executed in a certain second number-of-bets game, it is possible to emphasize the calling of attention of the second number-of-bets game.

In the above second basic configuration,
The production means is means capable of executing a continuous production (for example, continuous production d10) over a plurality of games (for example, 3 games),
the game immediately before the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as the "immediate game") is the first bet number game;
The effect means executes a part of the continuous effect over a plurality of games in the previous game when the previous game and the predetermined game are performed during execution of the continuous effect, and the predetermined game. A means for executing the second production as part of the continuous production during at least a part of the period (for example, FIGS. 10 (a) and (b)),
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, since the second effect may be executed during the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game.

In the sixth preferred configuration,
When the game next to the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as the "next game") is the second bet number game, the effect means executes the first effect in the next game, Means that does not execute the second effect (for example, FIGS. 33 (a) and (b)),
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferable configuration, the first effect is executed during the continuous effect, and the second effect is not executed, so that it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game.

In the sixth preferred configuration or the seventh preferred configuration,
The continuous effect is a effect including at least a display effect of displaying an image and a sound effect of outputting a sound,
In the first case, the effect means executes the display effect during a part of the continuous effect and does not execute the sound effect.
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferable configuration, since the voice effect is not executed during the continuous effect, it is possible to emphasize the call of attention of the second number-of-bets game as a penalty.

In the second basic configuration, sixth preferred configuration, seventh preferred configuration, or eighth preferred configuration,
Privilege-related processing means (for example, a main control unit) that executes processing (hereinafter referred to as privilege-related processing) related to privileges that are advantageous to the player (for example, transition from normal state to AT state, addition of AT game, etc.) 300, etc.),
In the first case, the privilege-related processing means is means for not executing the privilege-related processing in the predetermined game,
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferable configuration, in the first case, since the privilege-related process is not executed, it is possible to call attention to the second number-of-bets game.

(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example C3),
Any one of a plurality of bets including a first bet (e.g. 3) and a second bet less than the first bet (e.g. 2) can be set betting number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102);
game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) for executing a game based on the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means;
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising
The gaming machine is recommended to play a game in which the first bet number is set (hereinafter referred to as "first bet number game"),
The effect means is a first method for notifying that a game executed with the second bet amount set (hereinafter referred to as a "second bet amount game") is the second bet amount game. Means capable of executing an effect (e.g., 2-bet notification d2A) or a second effect (e.g., 2-bet notification d2B) for notifying that the game is the second bet number game,
The first production is the production that is at least partially the same as the second production (for example, FIG. 35, FIG. 36),
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, since the first effect or the second effect is executed in the second number-bet game, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-bet game.

In the third basic configuration above,
The effect means is capable of executing the first effect in the case of the second number-of-bet game in a first state (for example, a state in which it is impossible to win a bonus combination),
The effect means is capable of executing the second effect when the second number-of-bets game is in a second state (for example, a state in which a bonus combination can be won).
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferable configuration, since the first effect or the second effect is executed according to the state of the second number-of-bets game, it is possible to emphasize the calling of attention of the second number-of-bets game. can.

In the tenth preferred configuration,
The first effect and the second effect are display effects for displaying an image,
The first effect and the second effect are effects that are partially different in at least one of display mode, display area, color, or size.
This is the eleventh preferred configuration.

According to the eleventh preferable configuration, since the first effect and the second effect are different in the effect mode, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the eleventh preferred configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Internal winning result determination means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Winning determination means (for example, main control unit 300, winning determination processing S109) for determining winning based on the result of the internal winning result determining means and the stop mode of the plurality of reels;
with
The first state is a state in which there is no possibility of winning an internal winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) in the second bet number game,
The second state is a state in which there is a possibility that the certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) will win in the second number-of-bets game,
If the player wins a certain internal winning combination in the second state, a game state disadvantageous to the player (for example, a bonus game such as AT lottery not executed, game number updated, medals not increased, etc.) ) occurs,
This is the twelfth preferred configuration.

According to the twelfth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize a game that should be especially noted in the two-coin bet game.

(4) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example C4),
Any one of a plurality of bets including a first bet (e.g. 3) and a second bet less than the first bet (e.g. 2) can be set betting number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102);
game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) for executing a game based on the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means;
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising
The gaming machine is recommended to play a game in which the first bet number is set (hereinafter referred to as "first bet number game"),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a first effect (for example, button effect) in the first number-of-bets game,
The effect means is a game (hereinafter referred to as a "second ) is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), means for not executing part of the first effect (for example, FIGS. 38 and 39). ),
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to this fourth basic configuration,
In the fourth basic configuration, by not executing a part of the first effect, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game.

The first effect is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to a game state (for example, AT state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
This is the thirteenth preferred configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferable configuration, since a part of the first effect advantageous to the player is not executed, it is possible to emphasize the calling of attention of the second number-of-bets game while giving a penalty.

In the thirteenth preferred configuration,
Predetermined operation means (for example, effect button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate,
The first effect includes an operation prompting effect (for example, an operation prompting display d31) that prompts the user to operate the predetermined operation means, and an operation response effect (for example, an operation response effect) that is executed based on the operation in the operation prompting effect. Display d32) and a production including,
In the first case, the effect means is a means that does not execute the operation response effect (for example, FIG. 39),
This is the fourteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the calling of attention of the second number-of-bets game while giving a penalty that the operation response presentation is not executed.

In the fourteenth preferred configuration above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
with
The effect means is means capable of executing a second effect (for example, 2 bet notification d2) for informing that the game is the second number-of-bets game during a part of the period of the second number-of-bets game. can be,
In the first case, the effect means executes the second effect until receiving a final stop operation (for example, a third stop operation) on the plurality of reels in the second bet number game, and means for executing the first effect after the last stop operation, while not executing the operation prompting effect and the operation response effect, which are part of the first effect; Means for notifying the result of whether or not to shift to a game state advantageous to the player in a number game (for example, FIG. 39),
This is the fifteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferable configuration, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game while giving a penalty that the operation prompting effect and the operation response effect are not executed.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above,
The effect means is means for executing the operation promotion effect after receiving the final stop operation in the first bet number game (for example, FIG. 38).
This is the sixteenth preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation after the final stop operation of the first number-of-bets game.

(5) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example C5),
Any one of a plurality of bets including a first bet (e.g. 3) and a second bet less than the first bet (e.g. 2) can be set betting number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102);
game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) for executing a game based on the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means;
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising
The gaming machine is recommended to play a game in which the first bet number is set (hereinafter referred to as "first bet number game"),
The effect means provides a first effect (for example, game number display d1) and , a second effect (for example, 2 bet notification d2) for informing that it is a game with the second number of bets, and
The execution start timing of the first effect is a timing different from the execution start timing of the second effect (for example, FIGS. 40 to 42),
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to this fifth basic configuration, in the second bet number game, the execution start timing of the first effect relating to the penalty and the execution start timing of the second effect informing that the second bet number game is Since it is different, it is possible to notify that there is a penalty for the second number-of-bets game and to call attention to the second number-of-bets game from the next time onward.

In the fifth basic configuration above,
Game count update means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) for updating the game count;
When the number of games updated by the number-of-games updating means reaches a predetermined number (for example, the number of ceiling games), a privilege (for example, transition from normal state to AT state) that is advantageous to the player is given. privilege granting means (for example, main control unit 300, etc.);
with
The first effect is a notification effect (for example, game number display d1) for notifying the number of games played,
The game number update means is means for not updating the game number when the second bet number game is executed,
The effect means executes the first effect in which the number of games is not updated when the second bet number game is executed (for example, FIGS. 40 to 42),
This is the seventeenth preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, it is possible to clarify that it is a penalty for the second bet number game.

In the seventeenth preferred configuration,
A game start means (for example, start lever 135, main control unit 300) that receives a game start operation is provided,
The game count update means is means for updating the game count in relation to the game start operation,
The effect means, in the second number-of-bets game, provides a period in which the number of games is not updated as the first effect after the game start means accepts the game start operation. Execute the second effect (for example, FIGS. 40 to 42),
This is the eighteenth preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferred configuration, by continuously executing the first effect and the second effect, it is possible to emphasize the call for attention of the second number-of-bets game.

In the fifth basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, or the eighteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of executing the first effect using a first effect device (for example, effect image display device 157, sub effect image display device 195),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect using a second effect device (for example, the effect image display device 157),
The first production device and the second production device are the same or different production devices,
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, the first effect and the second effect can be made conspicuous.

In the fifth basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The effect means terminates the second effect being executed after all of the plurality of reels have stopped in the second number-of-bets game.
This is the twentieth preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, the second effect is executed until all reels are stopped, so the second effect can be highlighted.

<Other game machines>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and paying out game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). When a start lever operation) is received, rotation is started, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation by a stop button described later), the propriety of internal winning of multiple types of hands is determined by lottery. Then, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop. This game machine advances a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, game media are paid out and the game is terminated, and if the game is not met, the game is terminated without paying out the game media.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 49. FIG. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 43 to 49 are used only for the explanation of this embodiment. 43 to 49 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine will be explained. The slot machine includes a main body and a front door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body. Three reels (a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body, and are configured to be rotatable inside the slot machine. These three reels are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on a belt-like member at regular intervals, and each reel is constructed by attaching the belt-like members to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. As for the symbols on the reels, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction through the symbol display window, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each reel, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each reel functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

The first to third bet buttons are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine. In this embodiment, each time the first bet button is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, and when the second bet button is pressed, two cards are inserted, and the third bet button is pressed. 3 cards will be thrown in. Hereinafter, the third bet button is also called a MAX bet button. In addition, the third bet button also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the third bet button is also referred to as an effect button.

The start lever is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the three reels. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot or the first to third bet buttons are operated to operate the start lever, the three reels start rotating. An operation on the start lever is called a game start operation.

The left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the three reels that have started rotating by operating the start lever, and are provided in association with each reel. ing. More specifically, the left reel can be stopped by operating the left stop button, the middle reel can be stopped by operating the middle stop button, and the right reel can be stopped by operating the right stop button. You can stop the reels.

Hereinafter, the operation on the stop button is called a stop operation, the first stop operation is called a first stop operation, the next stop operation is called a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called a third stop operation. The reel to be stopped may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel to be subjected to the second stop operation may be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel to be subjected to the third stop operation may be referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons for stopping all spinning reels is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel is called "reverse push". referred to as "operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high-navigation state lamp is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit is in the high-navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp.

A performance device is arranged on the upper part of the front door. This production device is provided with a shutter (shielding device) consisting of two right and left shutters that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device arranged behind the shutters. When the shutter opens horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device appears in front of the slot machine (on the side of the player). The liquid crystal display device of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop button, etc.).

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the controller of the slot machine will be described. The control section of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") sent by the main control section that controls the main effects. and a second sub-controller for controlling various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller.

The main control section has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section and enables communication with the first sub-control section. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit. It is not possible to send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller based on the control commands. The first sub-controller controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.) and various lamps.

The second sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller based on this control command. The second sub-controller controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained.

Symbols displayed on the top of the left reel are symbols on the top left reel, symbols displayed on the middle of the left reel are symbols on the middle of the left reel, symbols displayed on the bottom of the left reel are symbols on the bottom of the left reel, and symbols displayed on the top of the middle reel. The symbol to be displayed is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the right reel is the top symbol Right reel top symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel bottom symbols, and right reel bottom symbols. There are 3 vertically on each reel, for a total of 9.

In this embodiment, one winning line is provided, which is a middle winning line composed of left reel middle symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel middle symbols. A winning line is a line set at a stop position of a symbol visible through a symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine of this embodiment can bet 3 or 2, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines are activated and 3 or 2 medals are placed. Win lines are activated when bets are placed. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 pay lines, which are upward-sloping pay lines, may be set as valid pay lines, or a number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combination of the slot machine will be explained.

Winning combinations of the slot machine include a special combination (special combination 1, special combination 2), a general combination (replay combination 1 to 13, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination 1 to replay combination 13 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role 1 to a replay role 13 are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize.
In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role.

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is). The special game state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The “replay role (replay role 1 to replay role 13)” is a winning role (operating role) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, No medals will be paid out. “Small wins (small wins 1 to 5)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of reel stop control will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination to be described later), and the selected reel is stopped. Based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control refers to the control of shifting the stop position of the reel within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; maximum 4 frames here) after the player operates each stop button. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of where the tolerance control is performed are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing of the player's operation of each stop button is bad. Also, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed within the above range of the number of frames. However, since it only "permits", there are times when the symbol combination does not come together depending on the timing of operating each stop button.

For example, when a small win 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than 4 frames, so unless the timing of operating the stop button is suitable, the watermelon pattern does not stop at the winning line. .

Of course, depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels and the number of frames drawn, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, the player wins 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is lost and the special combination is not being internally elected (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing of the player's operation of each stop button is good. Also, control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine will be described.

The main control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a high replay probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state ( RT3), and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as AT game state). The sub control unit is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 43(E).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination varies from the default state.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also

When the special role 1 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later, and when the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later. do.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state, the game moves to a special game state (RT4), which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states.

In the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out, the state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be explained.

The game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode.

Here, operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the correct operation order when the player wins internally for the pushing order. That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state. In this embodiment, operation navigation is executed using a payout number display and effect image display device.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is established in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state (normal game state) of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 43(E), for example, it shifts to the AT1 state (judgment state), and from this AT1 state (judgment state), it goes directly to the AT2 state or via the pullback state. There is a route that shifts to the normal game state or AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (eg, 50 games) of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is provided. Further, when a certain condition is established in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state is, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state). In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control section will be described.

The storage means (for example, ROM) of the first sub-control section stores an effect table provided for each effect state. The first sub control unit acquires the effect information (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, effect state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit, and refers to the effect table corresponding to the effect state, etc. , to perform an effect according to the effect state counter or the like. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described AT1 effect from the ROM. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

Also, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described judge effect from the ROM. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

When a certain condition is met, the first sub-control unit selects a predetermined effect from a plurality of types of effects using a lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A according to the current set value, and selects the effect. is read from the ROM, and a setting suggestion A (for example, display of a character image), which will be described later, is displayed.

In addition, when a certain condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit selects a predetermined effect according to the current set value from a plurality of types of effects using the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B, and Processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM is performed, and setting suggestion B (for example, the background image of the end screen), which will be described later, is displayed.

<Point display/outline in non-recommended bet amount games>
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, an overview of point display in the non-recommended bet number game will be described.

The amusement machine according to the present embodiment (in this example, a slot machine) includes display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (in this example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. and a control means (in this example, the main control section, the first sub-control section, etc.) for shifting to one of the states.

One of the plurality of types of display is a counter display related to the player's advantage. As an example of this counter display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, in addition to the cumulative point display TP indicating the cumulative number of points acquired by the player, items and game media acquired by the player are displayed. A count display showing the number, a count display showing the number of wins of bonuses and winning combinations, a count display showing the number of AT additions, a count display showing the number of AT remaining games, and the like.

Also, one of the plurality of types of display is a certain display indicating the amount of change in the counter display in a certain game. Examples of this display include, for example, point award displays GP1 and GP2 indicating the number of points awarded in the game shown in FIGS. Examples include a display showing the number of game media, a display showing the number of AT additions given in the game, and the like. A certain display is not limited to the display when the advantage increases, and may be the display when the advantage decreases. For example, a display indicating the number of points consumed in the game (for example, " 20 points", etc.) may be used.

The plurality of types of states include a first state (in this example, normal state shown in FIG. 43A) and a second state (in this example, FIG. 43 ( B), the certain display in the first state (the first certain display; in this example, the point award display GP1 shown in FIG. 43(A)) and the second The certain display (the second certain display; in this example, the point award display GP2 shown in FIG. 43B) in the state of . is a different display. Also, the second state is a state in which the degree of change in the counter display is greater than that in the first state (in this example, a state in which points are easily awarded).

As an example of the combination of the first state and the second state, in addition to the normal state and specialized state (state in which points are more likely to be given than in the normal state), normal game state and judge state in high navigation state (normal game State in which AT extra games are more likely to be given than state), normal state and bonus game state (state in which game media are easier to acquire than normal state), normal state and replay high probability state (replay than normal state) A state in which it is easy to win a game role), a low navigation state and a high navigation state (a state in which navigation is more likely to appear than a low navigation state), and the like.

Further, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (slot machine in this example) is a first game (three in this example) in which the number of bets on game media is a first number (three in this example). betting game), and a second game (two betting game in this example) in which the number of game media bet is a second number (two in this example) different from the first number. and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game.

FIG. 43(A) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state and then a 2-coin bet game is performed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which a two-coin bet game is performed after a game is played, in chronological order.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 43(A)(1) to FIG. 43(A)(3), a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started in the normal state (first state). When predetermined points (20 points in this example) are awarded in the game, a point award display GP1 (first certain display) indicating the number of points awarded in the game is triggered by the third stop operation. In this example, display of an image including characters "+20") is started.

In addition, since points are awarded in the game, the cumulative point display TP indicating the cumulative number of points acquired by the player is changed from "200/1000pt" to "220/1000pt" with the third stop operation as a trigger. Updating. In addition, in this example, when the number of cumulative points acquired by the player reaches 1000 points, it moves to CZ (chance zone) with a high expectation of shifting to AT games, or benefits that make it easier to shift to AT games (items, etc.) are provided by lottery.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 43(B) to 43(B)(3), a 3-bet game (first game) is started in the specialized state (second state), and a predetermined When points (20 points in this example) are given, the point giving display GP2 (second certain display; , the display of an image in which the characters “+20” are enclosed in a square).

In addition, since one game in the special state has been completed in the game, with the third stop operation as a trigger, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the special state, and the remainder of the special state. The remaining game number display DP, which indicates the number of games played, is updated from "4 G left" to "3 G left".

Here, in the specialized state, points are more likely to be awarded than in the normal state, and the accumulated points easily reach the target value (1000 in this example). The second certain display) is a more conspicuous display than the point award display GP1 (the first certain display) in the normal state. Note that the point giving display GP1 (first certain display) and the point giving display GP2 (second certain display) may be different displays. Alternatively, one, a plurality, or all of the shape, color, size, and pattern may be displayed differently.

In addition, the gaming machine (in this example, the slot machine) according to the present embodiment performs the second game (in this example, the , two bet game) is started, the first certain display is not displayed after the second game is finished, and the second certain display (this In the example, when the execution of the second game is started while the point award display GP2) is being displayed, the second certain display is displayed after the second game is finished. configured as

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(A)(3), in the state where the point award display GP1 (first certain display) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 43(A)(4) , when execution of a two-coin bet game (second game) is started as the next game, as shown in FIG. after the stop operation), the point award display GP1 (the first certain display) is configured not to be displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43(B)(3), in the state where the point award display GP2 (second certain display) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 43(B)(4), the next When execution of a two-coin bet game (second game) is started as a game, as shown in FIG. ), and a point award display GP2 (second certain display) is displayed.

In addition, in the 3-bet game (first game) described with reference to FIGS. 3 With the stop operation as a trigger, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state, and the number of remaining games display DP indicating the number of remaining games in the specialized state is changed from "4G left" to "3G left". , but when a 2-bet game (second game), which is a non-recommended bet-number game, is executed, the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state is not updated, and the The number-of-remaining-games display DP indicating the count value is also configured not to be updated.

Further, in this example, when a two-coin bet game (second game), which is a non-recommended bet number game, is executed, the In this way, a warning display CD (in this example, a display including the character display of "Double bet game in progress") suggesting that the non-recommended bet number game has been executed is configured to start. Note that such a warning display is not limited to being displayed in a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. For example, if the whole display area is used to perform the warning display, the player can be alerted. Arousal can be performed more reliably.

FIG. 43(C) is a diagram showing an example of a 3-coin bet game in the specialized state in chronological order, and FIG. It is a diagram shown in series.

In this example, the display means is means capable of displaying operation navigation, and the control means is means capable of executing control to shift to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state. wherein the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the display of the operation navigation, the second state is one state included in the advantageous state, and the first state related to the advantageous state is counter (for example, a first counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), a counter for managing the number of games in the specialized state), and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the first The count value of the counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated. For example, as shown in FIG. 43(C), the first game (for example, , 3-bet game) is started, both the count value related to the first count value and the count display (for example, the accumulated point display TP shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B) is configured to update the count value of, and when execution of the second game (for example, a two-bet game) is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value is updated, The count value associated with the count display is configured not to be updated.

Further, in this example, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state. 43(C) and (D), each time one game is played in the certain advantageous game state. In addition, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of display indicates a certain value. A display including an image (hereinafter referred to as "first display"; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D)), and one display among the plurality of types of display is A display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), wherein the certain value is It is a value related to the second count value, for example, when execution of the first game (for example, 3-bet game) is started in the certain advantageous game state, as shown in FIG. 43(C) 43 ( D), when execution of the second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) is started in the certain advantageous gaming state, the first count value and the second count value Only the first count value of the is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game.

<Point display/specific example in non-recommended bet amount games>
Next, a specific example of point display in the non-recommended bet number game will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG.

<Point display in non-recommended bet number game / 3 bet game in normal state>
FIG. 44(A) is a diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game in the normal state in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 44(A)(2) is a state in which, after three medals have been bet in the normal state, a three-coin bet game is started by pressing the start lever. In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to display the accumulated points display TP "200/1000pt" of the previous game, triggered by the pressing operation of the start lever.

44(A)(3) to (A)(6), after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the cumulative point display TP is updated and displayed with the third stop operation as a trigger. has started. In this example, since 20 points have been awarded in the game, the cumulative point display TP is changed from "200/1000pt" shown in (A) (4) in FIG. ) The update display to update to "220/1000pt" shown in (6) is started.

In this example, an example of displaying the number of accumulated points after addition (220 in this example) and the target value of the number of accumulated points (1000 in this example) is shown as the display of accumulated points. Without limitation, the number of points (for example, 780 (=1000-220)) obtained by subtracting the accumulated points from the target value of the accumulated points may be displayed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 44(A)(7) is a state in which the point giving display GP1 is started with the end of the update display of the cumulative point display TP as a trigger. In this example, since 20 points were given in the game, the point giving display GP1 (the first certain display) indicating the number of points given in the game. display) has started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 44(A)(9) is a state in which, after three medals have been bet, the next three-bet game is started with the depression of the start lever. In this example, using the liquid crystal display device 157, the display of the accumulated points display TP "220/1000pt" of the previous game and the display of the point award display GP1 of the previous game are continued.

44(A)(10) to (A)(12), after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the point award display GP1 is updated and displayed with the third stop operation as a trigger. has started. In this example, since no points have been awarded in the game, display (fade-out display) for gradually erasing the point award display GP1 is started with the third stop operation as a trigger.

In this example, after the point award display GP1 is displayed from the previous game to the current game, the update display of the point award display GP1 is started with the third stop operation in the next game (fade-out display is performed in this example). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the fade-out display of the point award display GP1 may be started with the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the next game as a trigger. Alternatively, the fade-out display of the point award display GP1 may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the point award display GP1 was started in the previous game.

Also, after starting the display of the point award display GP1 in the previous game, the display of the point award display GP1 may be continued at least until the pressing operation of the start lever is received in the next game. Further, the method of erasing the point award display GP1 is not limited to the fade-out display, and may be a mode of simply erasing the display.

<Point display in non-recommended bet number game/3 bet game in specialized state>
FIG. 44B is a diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game in the specialized state in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 44(B)(2) is a state in which, after three medals have been bet in the specialization state, a three-coin bet game is started by pressing the start lever. In this example, since the normal state has shifted to the specialized state (a state in which points are more likely to be awarded than in the normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used as a trigger to press the start lever to enter the specialized state. A specialized state suggestive effect (in this example, an increased PT suggestive effect A), and a specialized state suggestive display (in this example, a character display of "PT Specialized Zone") display) has started.

Further, in this example, since the state has shifted from the normal state to the specialized state, the accumulated point display TP is changed from "200/1000pt" shown in (1) of FIG. The cumulative point display TP2 (in this example, a display including the character display of "200") shown in (B)(2) of FIG. In the example, the display including the character display of "remaining 4G") is started.

In the subsequent states shown in FIGS. 44(B)(3) to 44(B)(7), after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the point award display GP2 is started with the third stop operation as a trigger. At the same time, the update display of the cumulative point display TP2 is started.

In this example, since 20 points were given in the game, the point giving display GP2 (a second certain display; in this example, (display of an image of the character "+20" surrounded by a square), overlap display with specialization state suggestion effect (increase PT suggestion effect A in this example), and cumulative point display TP2 is changed to the same figure ( B) The updated display is started to update from "200" shown in (4) to "220" shown in (7) in FIG.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 44(B)(9) is a state in which, after three medals have been bet, the next three-bet game is started with the depression of the start lever. In this example, using the liquid crystal display device 157, while continuing to display the accumulated points display TP2 of the previous game "220", the display of the point award display GP2 of the previous game is erased, and a new specialized state suggestive effect is produced. (In this example, the increased PT suggesting effect C) is started. Note that the specialized state suggesting effect (increase PT suggesting effect C) of this example also functions as an effect suggesting that 50 points have been awarded in the game.

According to this example, in order to erase the display of the point award display GP2 of the previous game and start a new specialization state suggestion effect (increase PT suggestion effect C), the player decides to shift to a new specialization state. can clearly inform

44(B)(10) to (B)(13), after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the point award display GP2 is started with the third stop operation as a trigger. At the same time, the update display of the cumulative point display TP2 is started.

In this example, since 50 points were given in the game, the point giving display GP2 (a second certain display; in this example, (display of an image of the characters "+50" surrounded by a square), overlap display with the specialization state suggesting effect (increase PT suggesting effect C in this example), and the cumulative point display TP2 is changed to ( B) The update display has started to update from "220" shown in (11) to "270" shown in (13) in FIG.

<Point display in non-recommended bet number games / 3 bet games → 2 bet games>
FIG. 45(A) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of performing a 2-coin bet game after performing a 3-coin bet game in a normal state.

The state shown in (A) (8) of FIG. 44 is the same state as in (A) (8) of FIG. 44, in which the point award display GP1 and the accumulated points display TP are being performed in the normal three-bet game. is.

The state shown in FIG. 45(A)(1) is a state in which the point award display GP1 (first certain display) is displayed in the previous 3-coin bet game, and the next game is a 2-coin bet game ( Second game) is in a state where execution has been started.

In this example, while the point award display GP1 (the first certain display) is being displayed, the non-recommended bet number game, that is, the two-bet game (second game) is executed. It is configured so that the point giving display GP1 (first certain display) is not displayed while the caution display CD suggesting that the number-of-bets game has been executed is started.

Note that such a warning display is not limited to being displayed in a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. For example, if the whole display area is used to perform the warning display, the player can be alerted. Arousal can be performed more reliably.

Also, the method of not displaying the point award display GP1 (first certain display) in the two-coin bet game (second game) is not particularly limited. The point award display GP1 (the first certain display) may be made invisible (or difficult to be visually recognized) from the front by overlapping display of at least a part of the caution display, and the display in the previous three-bet game may be made invisible. The started point awarding display GP1 (first certain display) may be erased after a predetermined period of time. Also, the point award display GP1 (the first certain display) may be configured not to be displayed at least during the period in which the alert display is displayed.

45(A)(2) to (A)(4), after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the warning display CD is erased with the third stop operation as a trigger. state. In this example, the caution display CD is erased with the third stop operation as a trigger, but the caution display CD may be erased with the first stop operation or the second stop operation as a trigger.

FIG. 45(B) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of performing a 2-coin bet game after performing a 3-coin bet game in the specialized state.

The state shown in (B)(8) of FIG. 44 is the same state as in FIG. 44(B)(8), in which the point award display GP2 and the cumulative point display TP2 are performed in the specialized 3-coin bet game. state.

In this example, while the point award display GP2 (second certain display) is being displayed, the non-recommended number-of-bets game (2-bet game) (second game) is executed. A warning display CD suggesting that the number-of-bets game has been executed is started.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 45(B)(2) to 45(B)(4), after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the warning display CD is erased with the third stop operation as a trigger. On the other hand, it is in a state where the point award display GP2 (the second certain display) has started.

In this example, in a state where the point award display GP2 (second certain display) is displayed, a two-bet game (second game), which is a non-recommended bet number game, is executed, and the third stop operation Since the game has ended, the point award display GP2 (second certain display) is displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to grasp the latest game state (in this example, normal state or special state) based on the display mode of a certain display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

FIG. 45(C) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of an effect when a 3-coin bet game is performed in the specialized state and the cumulative point number reaches the target value.

The states shown in FIGS. 45(C)(1) to (C)(4) are states in which updating display of the cumulative point display TP2 is started with the third stop operation as a trigger. In this example, since 20 points were given in the game, the point giving display GP2 (a second certain display; in this example, (display of an image of the character "+20" surrounded by a square), overlap display with specialization state suggestion effect (increase PT suggestion effect A in this example), and cumulative point display TP2 is changed to the same figure ( C) The updated display is started to update from "990" shown in (1) to "1010" shown in (C)(4) of FIG.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 45(C)(5) is a CZ production (in this example, " CZ rush!!”) is started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 45(C)(6) is a state in which, after three medals have been bet, the next three-bet game is started with the depression of the start lever. In this example, since the number of accumulated points reached the target value (1000 in this example) in the previous game, the game is shifted to the CZ state.

FIG. 45D is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in the normal state in chronological order, and FIG. 45E is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in the specialized state in chronological order. is.

As described above, the specialized state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. For example, in this example, the CZ transition counter in the specialized state tends to increase more than the CZ transition counter in the normal state. That is, it is configured so that the player can easily shift to the CZ state, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in this example, when the execution of the first game (three bet game) is started in the normal state or the special state, both the count value of the high navigation state counter and the count value of the ceiling G number counter While the count value of is updated, when the execution of the second game (two bet game) is started in the normal state or the special state, the count value of the high navigation state counter and the ceiling G number counter Of the count values, only the count value of the high navigation state counter is configured to be updated.

As described above, the amusement machine (for example, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes display means (for example, liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of a plurality of types of states. and a control means (for example, a main control unit, a first sub-control unit, etc.) for shifting to a state, wherein one display among the plurality of types of display is based on the player's advantage A related counter display (for example, accumulated point display TP shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B), and one of the plurality of types of display is a certain game (for example, one of a plurality of games a display indicating the amount of change in the counter display in one game or two or more games out of a plurality of games), and the plurality of types of states include a first state in which the degree of change in the counter display is different. (for example, normal state) and a second state (for example, specialized state) are included, and the certain display in the first state (hereinafter referred to as "first certain display". For example, FIG. 43 ( A) The point award display GP1) shown in FIG. The gaming machine is characterized by displaying (for example, different display modes, different display positions, etc.).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the most recent game state based on the display mode of a certain display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, a first game (three bet game in this example) in which the number of bets on the game media is the first number (three in this example), and a second game in which the number of bets on the game media is the second number (this In this example, it is configured to be able to execute a second game (two bet game in this example), the first number and the second number being different numbers, and the second number Said first game is a game more advantageous for the player than said game, and execution of said second game is started while said first certain display is being displayed (some) In this case, the first certain display is not displayed after the second game ends, and the second display is displayed while the second certain display is being displayed (some). It may be configured such that when the execution of the second game is started, the second certain display is displayed after the second game is finished.

With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the most recent game state based on whether or not a certain display is displayed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

The first state is a state in which the counter display may or may not change when the first game is played, and the second state is a state in which the first game is played. is performed, the counter display may always change.

Conventionally, in an advantageous state with a large amount of change in points, the player pays attention to how many points have changed, and there is a risk of not being able to confirm the amount of change in points if the player hurriedly bets two coins after the previous result is displayed. was there. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, by showing the previous result display in an advantageous state to a player who has already performed a disadvantageous two-coin bet game, It is possible to maintain the desire to play. Conversely, in a non-advantageous state with a small amount of point change, the player does not pay attention to how many points have changed. Since attention is paid to whether or not the effect will occur, the player can be prevented from being misunderstood by not displaying the result display.

Also, the second state may be a state in which the degree of change in the counter display is greater than that in the first state (for example, a state in which points are likely to be awarded).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further maintain the motivation of a player who has played a game with a disadvantageous two-coin bet.

Further, the display means is means capable of displaying operation navigation, and the control means is means capable of executing control to shift to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state. , the advantageous state is a state in which the display of the operation navigation is more advantageous than the normal state, and the second state (or/and the first state) is one state included in the advantageous state. A first counter (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 43C and 43D, a counter for managing the number of games in the specialized state) relating to the advantageous state is provided, and one game is played in the advantageous state. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as the "first count value") can be updated each time it is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 43(C), the advantageous state , the first count value and the count display (for example, accumulated points shown in FIGS. 43(A) and (B) display TP) is updated, and when execution of the second game (for example, a two-bet game) is started in the advantageous state, the first may be configured such that only the count value of is updated, and the count value relating to the count display is not updated.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value among the count values related to the first count value and the count display is displayed. Since only the count value of is updated, it is possible to inform the player that the second game was played in a manner that does not embarrass the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved.

In addition, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is a certain advantageous game state, A second counter (for example, the second counters shown in FIGS. 43C and 43D) relating to the certain advantageous gaming state is provided, and each time one game is played in the certain advantageous gaming state, the The count value of two counters (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updatable, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "first display", for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D)), one of the plurality of types of display is the certain value (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is the second display It is a value related to the count value, and when the execution of the first game is started in the certain advantageous game state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. , the second display can be displayed in the first game. For example, as shown in FIG. When a two-coin bet game) is started, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and in the second game, the second count value is updated. It may be configured so that the display is not displayed.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value of the first Only the count value of is updated, and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, so the second game is performed. It is possible to notify the fact in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started in the state where the first certain display is displayed, a specific display (for example, a warning display shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B) CD) can be started, and the specific display is not started when the execution of the first game is started in the state where the second certain display is displayed. may be

With such a configuration, the player can be made aware that the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, has started.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started while the first certain display is being displayed, the first certain display is not displayed after the second game is finished. One display among the plurality of types of display is a certain display (hereinafter referred to as a "third certain display") indicating an accumulated amount accumulated based on execution of a game. 43 (A) and (B) are accumulated point display TP), and when the execution of the first game is started, the second certain display is displayed after the first game is finished. displayed and configured to update the third certain display, and when execution of the second game is started in a state in which the second certain display is displayed, the third The second certain display may be displayed after the second game is completed, and the third certain display may not be updated.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the display indicating the accumulated amount is not updated, so that the player's misunderstanding regarding the accumulated amount is prevented. It can be prevented before it happens.

Also, when the execution of the first game is started in the state where the first certain display is displayed, the time when the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the first game is completed and when the execution of the first game is started in the state where the second certain display is displayed, the first It may be configured such that the certain second display is not displayed when the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the game is completed.

Further, the first certain display may be a display that does not change for each game, and the second certain display may be a display that changes for each game. Also, the first state may be a game that is more advantageous to the player than the second state, or a game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state. Further, the first state and the second state are set after the display of the certain display (for example, the point award display GP1 shown in FIG. 43A) is started and the count display (for example, the The time until the cumulative point display TP) shown in (A) and (B) is started may be different.

<Suggestions/Overview of settings for non-recommended bet amount games>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, an overview of setting suggestion in the non-recommended bet amount game will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (slot machine in this example) includes display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays (in this example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 43A and the like), and multiple types of and setting value setting means (in this example, a main control unit or the like) capable of setting any one of the setting values.

One of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display (first display) suggesting the set value that has been set. As an example of this first display, for example, as shown in FIG. A suggestive display, a display suggesting that the set value is larger (or smaller) than a certain set value, or a display suggesting other game information along with the set value (for example, an AT game suggesting that the AT game ends display of an end screen, display of an ED (ending) end screen, and the like.

Also, one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display (second display) that suggests the set value that has been set. As an example of this second display, for example, as shown in FIG. A suggestive display, a display suggesting that the set value is larger (or smaller) than a certain set value, or a display suggesting other game information along with the set value (for example, an AT game suggesting that the AT game ends display of an end screen, display of an ED (ending) end screen, and the like.

Further, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (slot machine in this example) is a first game (three in this example) in which the number of bets on game media is a first number (three in this example). betting game), and a second game (two betting game in this example) in which the number of game media bet is a second number (two in this example) different from the first number. and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game.

Further, the gaming machine (in this example, the slot machine) according to the present embodiment displays the first display (in this example, FIG. 46 The setting suggestion A) shown in (A) is configured to be able to start displaying, and the first display (in this example, FIG. 46 (A ) is configured so that the setting suggestion A) shown in ) is not started to be displayed.

FIG. 46(A)(1) to FIG. 46(A)(2) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which setting suggestion A is started to be displayed in relation to execution of a three-bet game. (B)(1) to (B)(2) of the same figure are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion A is not started to be displayed in relation to the execution of the two-bet game.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 46(A)(1) to 46(A)(2), when a 3-bet game (first game) is started, a game start operation (in this example, , pressing operation of the start lever), the setting suggestion A (first display) is started, and the setting suggestion A (first display) is displayed until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game. continue.

On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. In the example, the pressing operation of the start lever) is used as a trigger to start the caution display CD suggesting that the non-recommended bet number game has been executed, but the setting suggestion A (first display) is displayed in the game never start.

The first display is preferably a display that does not end with the passage of time. For example, the display starts when the bet button is pressed, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, or the like. After that, the display may be continued even if the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation, the game medium payout operation, or the like is performed.

In addition, the gaming machine (in this example, the slot machine) according to the present embodiment displays the second display (in this example, FIG. 46 A setting suggestion B) shown in (A) can be started to be displayed, and a second display (setting suggestion B) can be started to be displayed in relation to execution of a second game (in this example, a two-bet game). configured to

FIG. 46(A)(3) to FIG. 46(A)(4) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion B is started to be displayed in relation to the execution of the 3-bet game. (B)(3) to (B)(4) of the same figure are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion B starts to be displayed in relation to the execution of the two-bet game.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 46(A)(3) to 46(A)(4), when a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started, or when FIG. 46(B) ( 3) As shown in (B) and (4) in the figure, when a two-coin bet game (second game) is started, a setting suggestion B (second display) is triggered by the third stop operation. to start.

It should be noted that the second display is preferably a display that ends with the lapse of time. In addition, the display ends when triggered by a first stop operation, a second stop operation, a third stop operation, a game medium payout operation, a bet button depression operation, a start lever depression operation, or the like in the next game. good too.

In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed depending on the game result of the game (for example, whether or not a specific winning combination has been won, or whether or not a lottery has been won, etc.) in a certain state. may be displayed.

FIG. 46(C) is a diagram showing an example of a three-bet game in a high navigation state in chronological order, and FIG. 46(D) shows an example of a two-bet game in a high navigation state. It is a diagram shown in series.

In this example, control means (e.g., main control unit, first sub control unit, etc.), a first counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 46 (C) and (D), a counter for managing the number of games in high navigation), and the advantageous state , each time one game is played, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated, and in the advantageous state, a plurality of advantageous game states One of the plurality of advantageous game states is a first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous state. A second counter (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D), a counter for managing the number of games in the AT2 state) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous state In addition, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of display indicates a certain value. A display including an image (hereinafter referred to as a "third display"; for example, a third display d3 shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D)), and one of the plurality of types of display includes a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth display"; for example, a fourth display d4 shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D)); is a value related to the second count value, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(C), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first When execution of a game (for example, a 3-coin bet game) is started, both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the fourth count value is updated in the first game. can be displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(D), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the second game (for example, When execution of a two-coin bet game is started, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and in the second game, the second count value is updated. Four displays are configured not to be displayed.

<Suggestions/concrete examples of settings for non-recommended bet amount games>
Next, a specific example of setting suggestion in the non-recommended bet number game will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG.

FIG. 47(A) is a time-series diagram showing an example of setting suggestions triggered by a game start operation in a game in which the judge (AT1) is shifted to AT2.

The states shown in FIGS. 47A(2) to 47(A)(3) are states in which a 3-coin bet game is executed in the judge (AT1) and the transition to AT2 is decided. In this example, a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started by the judge (AT1), and it is decided to shift to AT2 in the game. (in this example, the display of the victory screen) is started.

The states shown in subsequent FIGS. 47A(4) to 47(A)(6) are states in which a 3-coin bet game is executed in the next game after shifting from the judge (AT1) to AT2. In this example, when a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started, the AT2 start that suggests the set value is triggered by the game start operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever) The display of screen 1 (first display) is started, and the display of this AT2 start screen 1 (first display) is continued until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game.

FIG. 47(B) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of setting suggestions triggered by a game start operation in a game in which the judge (AT1) has finished.

The states shown in FIGS. 47B(2) to 47(B)(3) are states in which a 3-coin bet game has been executed by the judge (AT1) and the end of the game has been determined by the judge (AT1). In this example, a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started by the judge (AT1), the judge (AT1) is finished in the game, and it is decided not to shift to AT2, so the third stop operation is performed. As a trigger, an effect suggesting the end of the judge (AT1) (display of a defeat screen in this example) is started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 47B(4) to 47(B)(6) are states in which a 3-coin bet game is executed in the next game after the judge (AT1) has finished. In this example, when the 3-coin bet game (first game) is started, the game start operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever) is used as a trigger to end the judgment suggesting the set value. The display of screen 1 (first display) is started, and the display of this judgment end screen 1 (first display) is continued until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game.

FIG. 47(C) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of setting suggestions triggered by the third stop operation in the next 3-coin bet game after the 3-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2. .

The states shown in FIGS. 47(C)(2) to 47(C)(3) are states in which a 3-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2 and AT2 is finished. The states shown in 4) to (C) and (6) in the figure are states in which a three-coin bet game is executed in the next game after AT2 is finished.

In this example, when a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started in the next game after AT2 is finished, AT2 is finished with the game start operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever) as a trigger. After starting the display of the AT2 end screen suggesting the , with the third stop operation as a trigger, the display of the image 1 (second display) suggesting the set value that is set is started, and at least the bet button for the next game The display of this image 1 (second display) is continued until the pressing operation of is performed.

Note that the trigger for starting the display of image 1 (second display) is not limited to the third stop operation. For example, as shown in FIG. After the display of is started, as shown in (D) (6) of the figure, an image 1 suggesting the set value (the second display) is started, and the display of this image 1 (second display) may be continued at least until the operation of pressing the bet button for the next game is performed.

FIG. 48(A) is a time-series diagram showing an example in which setting suggestion is not performed while the victory screen of the judge (AT1) is displayed.

The states shown in FIGS. 48A(2) to 48(A)(3) are states in which a 3-coin bet game is executed in the judge (AT1) and the shift to AT2 is decided. In this example, a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started by the judge (AT1), and it is decided to shift to AT2 in the game. (in this example, the display of the victory screen) is started.

The states shown in subsequent FIGS. 48(A)(4) to 48(A)(6) are those in the next game in which the effect (in this example, display of the victory screen) suggesting the shift to AT2 is continued. This is a state in which a two-coin bet game (second game) has been executed.

In this example, when a two-coin bet game (second game) is started, it is determined that the non-recommended bet number game has been executed with the game start operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever) as a trigger. While starting the display of the suggested attention calling display CD, in the game, it is configured not to start displaying the AT2 start screen 1 (first display) described using Fig. 005 (A) (4). ing.

FIG. 48(B) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which setting suggestions are not made while the defeat screen of the judge (AT1) is being displayed.

The states shown in FIGS. 48B(2) to 48(B)(3) are states in which a 3-coin bet game has been executed by the judge (AT1) and the judge (AT1) has finished. In this example, a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started by the judge (AT1), the judge (AT1) is finished in the game, and it is decided not to shift to AT2, so the third stop operation is performed. As a trigger, an effect suggesting the end of the judge (AT1) (display of a defeat screen in this example) is started.

The states shown in subsequent FIGS. 48(B)(4) to 48(B)(6) are the next stage in which the effect suggesting the end of the judge (AT1) (in this example, the display of the defeat screen) continues. This is a state in which a two-coin bet game (second game) has been executed in the game.

In this example, when a two-coin bet game (second game) is started, it is determined that the non-recommended bet number game has been executed with the game start operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever) as a trigger. While starting the display of the suggestive attention calling display CD, in the game, it is configured not to start the display of the judgment end screen 1 (first display) described using Fig. 005 (B) (4). ing.

According to this example, while giving preferential treatment to the player playing the first game (recommended betting game advantageous to the player), the second game (non-recommended betting game disadvantageous to the player) is played. By not displaying the first display, it is possible to inform the player that the player was playing the second game in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

FIG. 48(C) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of setting suggestions triggered by the third stop operation in the next two-coin bet game after the three-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2. .

In the states shown in FIGS. 48(C)(2) to 48(C)(3), a 3-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2, followed by FIGS. 48(C)(4) to 48(C). The state shown in (6) is a state in which AT2 is continued since a two-coin bet game is executed in the next game.

In this example, when a two-coin bet game (second game) is started in the next game of the final game of AT2, AT2 is triggered by a game start operation (in this example, an operation of pressing the start lever). After starting the display of the effect during AT suggesting continuation, with the third stop operation as a trigger, the display of the image 1 (second display) suggesting the set value is started, and at least the next game is betted. This image 1 (second display) continues to be displayed until the button is pressed.

In addition, the image 1 (second display) shows that, in a certain state, whether the game is a 3-bet game (first game) or a 2-bet game (second game). It may be a display that may or may not be displayed depending on the game result.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 006(D)(5), the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window after the third stop operation is the display result 2 (second symbol combination. combination), the image 1 (second display) is not displayed, and the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window after the third stop operation is displayed as shown in FIG. In the case of result 1 (first symbol combination, for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a certain winning combination), image 1 (second display) may be displayed.

<Predetermined Number Acquisition Display (Setting Suggestion Display)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 49A and 49B, the predetermined number acquisition display (setting suggestion display) will be described. FIG. 49A is a diagram showing an example of a predetermined number acquisition display (setting suggestion display), and FIG. 49B is a diagram showing an example of a predetermined number acquisition display lottery table.

Based on the AT2 expected acquisition number information (the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter) and the AT2 acquisition number information (the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter) received from the main control section, the first sub control unit calculates the AT2 remaining acquisition number Update the count value of the display counter.

Then, at the end of one game, the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table shown in FIG. ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In addition, the condition for determining the predetermined number acquisition display is not limited to this example. is reached), the predetermined number acquisition display may be determined.

For example, when it is determined that the total number of acquired cards has reached 135, when the setting value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5), it is determined that 135 cards have been reached with a probability of 2/100. A suggestive predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a display including a character string "over 135") is performed, and when the set value is an even number, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that the number of cards has reached 135 is displayed, it is determined that the set value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). Therefore, the display can be said to be a setting suggestion display that suggests that the setting value is an odd number (odd number setting suggestion display).

Also, when it is determined that the total number of acquired cards has reached 246, when the setting value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), there is a probability of 2/100 that 246 cards have been reached. A suggestive predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a display including a character string "over 246") is performed, and when the set value is an odd number, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that the number of cards has reached 246 is displayed, it is determined that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). For this reason, the display can be said to be a setting suggestion display that suggests that the set value is an even number (display of even number setting suggestion).

Also, when it is determined that the total number of acquired cards has reached 333, when the setting value is 3, a predetermined number of acquisition display (for example, " When the setting value is 4, the same predetermined number acquisition display is performed with a probability of 2/100, and when the setting value is 5 or 6, 1 The same predetermined number acquisition display is performed with a probability of /100, and the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed at other set values. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that 333 cards have been reached is displayed, it is determined that the set value is 3 or more. Therefore, the display can be said to be a setting suggesting display suggesting that the set value is 3 or more (setting 3 or more suggesting display).

When the total number of acquired cards reaches 456, 555, and 666, the predetermined number of acquisition display also indicates that the set value is 4 or more (display of suggestion of setting 4 or more) and the set value, respectively. can be referred to as a setting suggesting display suggesting that the value is set to 5 or more (setting 5 or higher suggesting display), or a setting suggesting display suggesting that the set value is setting 6 (setting 6 suggesting display).

In addition, when it is determined that the total number of obtained cards has reached 500, a predetermined number of obtained display indicating that 500 cards have been reached with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value (for example, "Over 500 ”), and if it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired cards has reached 1000, it is suggested that 1000 cards have been reached with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. (eg, a display including a character string "over 1,000") is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 49(A), the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (500 cards) and the effect state is AT2. Based on the count value (500 in this example), the display of the acquisition of a predetermined number of medals is determined, and regardless of the set value, there is a probability of 100/100 that the number of medals obtained has reached 500. Acquisition display TG (in this example, a display including a character string of "over 500") is performed.

FIG. 49C is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion display lottery table. In this example, the first sub-control unit refers to the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIG. decide.

For example, when the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIG. One judgment end screen is determined by lottery, etc. from among the setting suggestion display that suggests that the value is an even number), judgment end screen 3 (setting suggestion display that suggests that the set value is other than setting 1), etc. Then, the judgment end screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display.

Note that the content of the setting suggestion display lottery table is not limited to this example. For example, as in the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIG. indication that does not imply a value) may be added. In addition, the trigger for starting the display of setting suggestion display is not particularly limited. The setting suggestion display may be started with an operation other than the stop operation as a trigger.

As described above, the gaming machine (for example, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of a plurality of types of setting values. and a set value setting means (in this example, a main control unit, etc.) capable of setting a set value of the A first type of display suggesting a set value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, in addition to the setting suggestion A shown in FIG. 49(B) (e.g., exceeding 456)), and the first game in which the number of game media bet is the first number (for example, 3) (in this example, 3) betting game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game media is a second number (in this example, a two-coin betting game), and the first number and the second number The numbers (for example, 2) are different numbers, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the The first display is configured to be able to start displaying (or configured to be displayed (always)), and the first display is configured not to start displaying in relation to the execution of the second game. It is a game machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, while giving preferential treatment to the player playing the first game (recommended bet game advantageous to the player), the second game (non-recommended bet unfavorable to the player) By not displaying the first display, the player playing the second game can be notified in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") that suggests the set value that has been set. setting suggestion B) shown, wherein the display of the second display can be started in relation to the execution of the first game, and the second display is displayed in relation to the execution of the second game It may be configured to be able to start.

With such a configuration, not only the player playing the first game (recommended betting game advantageous to the player), but also the second game (non-recommended betting game disadvantageous to the player) Advantageous information can also be provided to the player who is playing the game.

The first display may be a display that does not end with the lapse of time, and the second display may be a display that ends with the lapse of time.

With such a configuration, in the second game (non-recommended betting game disadvantageous to the player), by performing the second display that ends with the passage of time, the second game (the player can It is possible to reduce the disappointment felt by the player playing the disadvantageous non-recommended betting game.

Further, one game is configured to require a plurality of operations, the plurality of operations include a first operation and a second operation, and the first operation is the second operation. An operation performed before the second operation (an operation performed first among the plurality of operations, for example, an operation of pressing the start lever), and the second operation is one of the plurality of operations (for example, a third stop operation), and the first display is not started due to the second operation being performed, and the first operation is performed. and the second display is a display that does not start due to the first operation and can start to display due to the second operation. may

With such a configuration, by starting to display the second display in response to the second operation, the player who has finished the second game (non-recommended betting game disadvantageous to the player) feels regret. can be reduced.

In addition, if the replay role is won, the operation of pressing the bet button is unnecessary, so even if the "first operation" is defined as the operation of pressing the bet button, after winning the replay role The first operation of the game corresponds to the pressing operation of the start lever.

Further, the game is configured to require a plurality of operations in order to proceed with the game, the plurality of operations include a first operation and a second operation, and the first display is the A display that can be started when one of a plurality of operations (a first operation, for example, an operation of pressing a start lever) is performed, wherein the first operation among the plurality of operations is performed. It is a display that does not end before the next operation is performed, and the second display is one operation ( A display that can be initiated when a second operation (e.g., a third stop operation) is performed, the display being performed before the operation following the second operation of the plurality of operations is performed. may end.

In addition, an operation means (for example, a start lever, a stop button, a bet button) is provided at a position operable by the player, and the operation means can be operated multiple times from the start to the end of one game. , the first display is started at least from a first operation (for example, a bet button (or start lever) pressing operation) of a plurality of operations of the operation means, and the first It is a display that does not end before an operation other than the operation (for example, a third stop operation) is performed, and the second display is the first display of the plurality of operations of the operation means. At least the second operation (for example, the third stop operation) is started, and the display may end before the operation performed after the second operation (for example, the bet button depression operation for the next game). It may be a display.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly alleviate the regret felt by the player who is playing the second game (the non-recommended betting game disadvantageous to the player).

Further, the number of variations (types) of the display mode of the first type of display (first display) may be greater than the number of variations (types) of the display mode of the second type of display (second display). .

With such a configuration, the first type of display (first display) with many variations is shown only to the player who has played the first game (recommended betting game advantageous to the player), thereby improving the game. Fairness can be guaranteed.

In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed depending on the game result of the game (for example, whether or not a specific winning combination has been won, or whether or not a lottery has been won, etc.) in a certain state. It may be an indication that there is a case. Also, the second display may be displayed when the game result of the game is the first result in a certain state, and the game result in the certain state is different from the first result. It may be a display that may not be displayed for different second results.

With such a configuration, the second display may be displayed depending on the game result in the second game (non-recommended betting game disadvantageous to the player). It is possible to reduce the disappointment felt by the player playing the non-recommended betting game.

In addition, control means (e.g., main control unit, first sub-control unit for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (e.g., low navigation state) and an advantageous state (e.g., high navigation state) etc.), a first counter (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D), a counter for managing the number of games in high navigation) regarding the advantageous state, and 1 in the advantageous state Each time a game is played, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated, and in the advantageous state, one of the plurality of advantageous game states is selected. One of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous gaming state is related to the first advantageous state. Two counters (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D), a counter for managing the number of games in the AT2 state) are provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous state, The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, the third display d3 shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D)), and one of the plurality of types of display is the one of the above or 46(C) and (D), for example, a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value is a value related to the second count value. For example, as shown in FIG. 46(C), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the first game ( For example, when execution of a 3-coin bet game is started, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the fourth display is displayed in the first game. can be displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(D), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the second game (for example, two betting game) is started, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and in the second game, the fourth count value is updated. It may be configured so that the display is not displayed.

With such a configuration, when execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the third count value out of the third count value and the fourth count value Only the count value of is updated, and the fourth display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the value related to the fourth count value) is not displayed in the second game, so the second game is performed. It is possible to notify the fact in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the third counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved.

Further, the second display may be a display that can be started after performing the last operation of the plurality of operations.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly alleviate the regret felt by the player who is playing the second game (the non-recommended betting game disadvantageous to the player).

Also, the possibility that the second display will start in the second game in a certain state is higher than the possibility that the second display will start in the first game in a certain state. It can be low.

With such a configuration, by displaying the second display to the player who is playing the second game (the non-recommended betting game disadvantageous to the player), it is possible to keep the desire to play. can.

Further, the first display is a display that can start displaying before shifting to a certain AT state, the second display is a display that can start displaying after shifting to the certain AT state, It may be less likely to be displayed before transition to the certain AT state than after transition to the certain AT state.

Further, the display of the second display may be started while the first display is being displayed, or the second display may be started while the first display is being displayed. There may be no case where the display of is started. Further, the first display may be a display that is (always) displayed, and the second display may be a display that may be displayed (or may not be displayed).

<Other embodiments>
Next, a game machine according to another embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (eg, slot machine) includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, high a navigation state), and display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display. The operation information of the operation means can be reported to the operator, and the advantageous state is determined by the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, operation navigation using a payout number display, liquid crystal display, The operation navigation is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation using the device, and the operation navigation is the navigation for the pushing order, and the first counter (for example, FIG. , (D), a high navigation state counter indicating the number of remaining games in the high navigation state), and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as a "first count value". The termination condition is a condition that is established when the first count value becomes a specific value (eg, 0) (eg, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times). , In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is a first advantageous game state (for example, AT2), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 43 (C), (D ), an effect state counter indicating the number of remaining games in the effect navigation state (AT1 state, AT2 state, LMT state, etc.), and each time a game is played in the first advantageous game state , the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated, and a game that has not been won in the first winning combination in the first advantageous game state is performed. A first game (for example, a 3-coin bet game) in which the second count value is configured to be updateable and the number of bets on the game media is the first number, A second game in which the medium bet number is a second number (For example, a two-coin bet game) can be executed, the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the second number is higher than the second game. One game is more advantageous to the player, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of display, is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. When the second display is displayed in the second game, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated. A game machine characterized by:

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game It is possible to inform the player of the fact that he or she has performed In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as "third display"). When the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display. .

Further, even if the first game is played after the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, the third display is not displayed and the first game is played. There may be cases where the advantageous game state ends.

Also, one of the plurality of advantageous game states is a second advantageous game state, and the second advantageous game state is different from the first advantageous game state, and the operation Said third display is displayed when said first game is played after said second game is played in said first advantageous game state in an advantageous game state in which navigation can be executed. There may be a case where the first advantageous game state ends and the second advantageous game state starts.

Further, the first advantageous game state may end when the second count value reaches a predetermined value in the first advantageous game state.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image related to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display"), and When the first game is played in the first advantageous game state, the fourth display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the first advantageous game state In addition, the fourth display may not be displayed.

Further, in a state in which at least the first count value can be updated and the probability of winning a replaying combination that allows the game to be played without inserting game media is higher than in the normal state, the first The winning probability of the replay role in the second game may be higher than the winning probability of the replay role in one game.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including a first termination condition and a second termination condition is met, the advantageous state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value reaches a first specific value (e.g., 0) (e.g., advantageous state when the number of games after shifting to the upper limit number of times) can be established, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the plurality of one of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, A second counter (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), an effect state counter) relating to the first advantageous gaming state is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") can be updated each time the game is played, and the first winning combination is not won in the first advantageous game state. A first game in which the second count value is configured to be updateable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number even when the game is played (for example, a three-coin bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) , wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. When the second count value is set, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. a third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state, wherein one game is played in the advantageous state. is performed, the count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as "third count value"). The second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). The third count value can be updated based on the result of the game regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state. a setting value setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display indicates the setting value that has been set A certain display (hereinafter referred to as "third display", for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 46(A)), when the first game is played in the advantageous state is configured so that the third display may be displayed, and the third display may not be displayed when the second game is played in the advantageous state. When the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous game state, in the first game , a display related to the number of game media acquired in the first advantageous game state based on the game results of both the second game and the first game (for example, high navigator shown in FIG. 49A) The game machine is configured to be able to display the number of game media acquired in the state of "over 500").

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to the advantageous state) and the third counter (the total number of game media acquired by the player) are updated in both the first game and the second game, the first It is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is playing correctly in the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is a condition that can be established when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 43 (C), (D) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state. ) can be updated, and the second count value can be updated even when a game is played in which the first win is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the bet number of the game media is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game media is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) game), and the second number is a number different from the first number wherein, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of display, is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. A specific display different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as a "third display"; for example, a display in which the entire screen is blackened, a special effect display, or a display of a certain character image); is a value related to the second count value, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when execution of the first game is started, the Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and wherein the third display can be displayed without displaying the second display during the second game.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when the execution of the second game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, it is possible to inform the player that he or she has been playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

A setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and one display of the plurality of types of display indicates the setting value that has been set. (hereinafter referred to as "third display". For example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 46A), and when the first game is performed in the advantageous state , the third display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed. , and is configured to be able to execute a certain effect over a plurality of games, and the certain effect is a first scene (for example, an "enemy attack" scene) and a second scene (for example, a scene of "attack on allies"), and the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is produced. is configured so that execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, and execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed. If it is done, the execution of the second scene effect is not started in the second game, and then when the execution of the first game is started, the It may be configured such that execution of the second scene effect can be started.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button, normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including high navigation state), and display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of display. The game machine is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, using a payout number display device operation navigation, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display) is a state more advantageous than the normal state; , a first counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), a high navigation state counter), and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "the first "One count value". , a condition that can be established when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times); In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state (for example, AT2). , and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, in FIGS. 43(C) and (D)) related to the first advantageous gaming state A second counter (shown as a performance state counter) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state. can be updated, and the second count value can be updated even when a game is played in which the winning role is not won in the first advantageous game state. , a first game in which the bet number of the game medium is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) ), and the second number is a number different from the first number. wherein, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. When the second count value is set, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. One of the plurality of types of display is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as a "third display", for example, a display of the start of a judge effect), and the first advantage When the execution of the first game is started in a certain state of the game state, the third display can be displayed in the first game, and the second display is displayed in the certain state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the third display is not displayed in the second game when execution of the game is started.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when the execution of the second game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

A setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and one display of the plurality of types of display indicates the setting value that has been set. (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display". For example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 46A), and when the first game is performed in the advantageous state , the third display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed. and is configured to be able to give a certain profit when a certain profit giving condition (for example, a condition for starting a high navigation state) is satisfied, and the first profit in the advantageous state It may be configured such that the certain profit provision condition can be established in the execution of the game, and the certain profit provision condition is not established in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including a first termination condition and a second termination condition is met, the advantageous state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value reaches a first specific value (e.g., 0) (e.g., advantageous state when the number of games after shifting to the upper limit number of times) can be established, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the plurality of one of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, A second counter (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), an effect state counter) relating to the first advantageous gaming state is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") can be updated each time the game is played, and the first winning combination is not won in the first advantageous game state. A first game in which the second count value is configured to be updateable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number even when the game is played (for example, a three-coin bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) , wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. A specific display different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as a "third display"; for example, a display in which the entire screen is blackened, a special effect display, or a display of a certain character image); is a value related to the second count value, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when execution of the first game is started, the Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and the third display can be displayed while the second display is not displayed in the second game, and based on the number of used game media and the number of paid-out game media in the advantageous state , a third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player, each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as "third count value For example, the second end condition is established when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). It is a possible condition, and the third count value is updated based on the result of the game regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when the execution of the second game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved.

In addition, when the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous game state, in the first game, both the second game and the first game Based on the game result, display regarding the number of game media acquired in the first advantageous game state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state "GET 1326") can be displayed. , a certain effect can be executed over a plurality of games, and the certain effect includes a first scene (for example, "enemy attack" scene) and a second scene (for example, "friend attack" scene). "Attack" scene), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is produced, the first game is executed. Execution of the second scene effect can be started in one game, and when execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed , When the execution of the second scene effect is not started in the second game and then the execution of the first game is started, the second scene is executed in the first game It may be configured such that the execution of the effect can be started.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including a first termination condition and a second termination condition is met, the advantageous state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value reaches a first specific value (e.g., 0) (e.g., advantageous state when the number of games after shifting to the upper limit number of times) can be established, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the plurality of one of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, A second counter (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), an effect state counter) relating to the first advantageous gaming state is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") can be updated each time the game is played, and the first winning combination is not won in the first advantageous game state. A first game in which the second count value is configured to be updateable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number even when the game is played (for example, a three-coin bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) , wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. When the second count value is set, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. a third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state, wherein one game is played in the advantageous state. is configured to be able to update the count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as "third count value"; for example, the difference number counter) each time the It is a condition that can be established when the count value of three reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840), and either the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state. Even in such a case, the third count value can be updated based on the result of the game, and one of the plurality of types of display is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as a start display). , "third display". For example, a display of the start of judge production), and when execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous game state, the first The third display can be displayed in the game, and when the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the third display is displayed in the second game The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to be played.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when the execution of the second game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

In addition, when the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous game state, in the first game, both the second game and the first game Based on the game result, display regarding the number of game media acquired in the first advantageous game state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state "GET 1326") can be displayed. , a certain profit can be given when a certain profit giving condition (for example, a condition for executing high navigation state related processing) is established, and the first game is executed in the advantageous state. Alternatively, the certain profit provision condition may be established, and the certain profit provision condition may not be established in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is a condition that can be established when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 43 (C), (D) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state. ) can be updated, and the second count value can be updated even when a game is played in which the first win is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the bet number of the game media is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game media is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) game), and the second number is a number different from the first number wherein, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. A specific display that is different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as a "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), is a value related to the second count value, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when execution of the first game is started, the Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and the third display can be displayed while the second display is not displayed in the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is the start of a certain effect. This is a display (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth display", for example, a display of the start of the judgment effect), and when the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous game state, The fourth display can be displayed in the first game, and when the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the fourth display is displayed in the second game. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the display is not displayed.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when the execution of the second game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a certain effect over a plurality of games, and the certain effect includes a first scene (for example, "enemy attack" scene) and a second scene (for example, " is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including a scene of "friend attack"), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the Execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, and when execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed is, in the second game, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started, and next time the execution of the first game is started, the second scene is executed in the first game is configured to be able to start execution of the effect, and is configured to be able to grant a certain benefit when a certain benefit granting condition (for example, a condition for starting a high navigation state) is met, In the execution of the first game in the advantageous state, the certain profit provision condition can be established, and in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state, the certain profit provision condition is not established. may be configured.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is a condition that can be established when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 43 (C), (D) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state. ) can be updated, and the second count value can be updated even when a game is played in which the first win is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the bet number of the game media is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game media is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) game), and the second number is a number different from the first number wherein, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. is updated, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. and setting value setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display indicates the setting value that has been set. (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 44(A)), and when the first game is played in the advantageous state , the third display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may be displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when the execution of the second game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is a condition that can be established when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 43 (C), (D) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state. ) can be updated, and the second count value can be updated even when a game is played in which the first win is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the bet number of the game media is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game media is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) game), and the second number is a number different from the first number wherein, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. is updated, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. and when the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous game state, in the first game, the second game and the first game Based on both game results, a display regarding the number of game media obtained in the first advantageous game state (for example, display of the number of game media obtained in the high navigation state "GET 1326") can be displayed. A game machine characterized by:

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when the execution of the second game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, since the number of game media acquired in an advantageous state is displayed based on the game results of both the second game and the first game, the player who is playing correctly in the first game, It is possible to secure the fairness of the players who are playing the second game.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is a condition that can be established when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 43 (C), (D) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state. ) can be updated, and the second count value can be updated even when a game is played in which the first win is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the bet number of the game media is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game media is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) game), and the second number is a number different from the first number wherein, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. When the second count value is set, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is configured to be able to execute a certain effect over a plurality of games, and the certain effect is a first scene (e.g., "enemy attack" scene) and a second scene (e.g., , and a scene of "ally attack"), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is produced, , the execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed. In the case, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game in the first game The game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to start the execution of the scene production.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, it is possible to inform the player that he or she has been playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is a condition that can be established when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 43 (C), (D) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state. ) can be updated, and the second count value can be updated even when a game is played in which the first win is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the bet number of the game media is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game media is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) game), and the second number is a number different from the first number wherein, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. When the second count value is set, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. and is configured to be able to give a certain profit when a certain profit giving condition (for example, a condition for starting a high navigation state) is satisfied, and the first game in the advantageous state In the execution, the certain profit giving condition can be established, and in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state, the certain profit giving condition is not established. It's a playground.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including a first termination condition and a second termination condition is met, the advantageous state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value reaches a first specific value (e.g., 0) (e.g., advantageous state when the number of games after shifting to the upper limit number of times) can be established, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the plurality of one of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, A second counter (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), an effect state counter) relating to the first advantageous gaming state is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") can be updated each time the game is played, and the first winning combination is not won in the first advantageous game state. A first game in which the second count value is configured to be updateable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number even when the game is played (for example, a three-coin bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) , wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. A specific display that is different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as a "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), is a value related to the second count value, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when execution of the first game is started, the Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and the third display can be displayed while the second display is not displayed in the second game, and based on the number of used game media and the number of paid-out game media in the advantageous state , a third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player, and a count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as "third count value For example, the second termination condition is satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). It is a possible condition, and the third count value is updated based on the result of the game regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state. one of the plurality of types of display is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth display"; for example, a display for starting a judge effect); When the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in one advantageous game state, the fourth display can be displayed in the first game, and in the certain state wherein the fourth display is not displayed in the second game when execution of the second game is started It is a game table characterized by

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

In addition, the gaming machine (eg, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes operation means (eg, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), normal state (eg, low navigation state) and advantageous state (eg, , high-navigation state), a control means (e.g., main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device) is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state. For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as " referred to as a "first count value") can be updated, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including a first termination condition and a second termination condition is met, the advantageous state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value reaches a first specific value (e.g., 0) (e.g., advantageous state when the number of games after shifting to the upper limit number of times) can be established, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the plurality of one of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, A second counter (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), an effect state counter) relating to the first advantageous gaming state is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") can be updated each time the game is played, and the first winning combination is not won in the first advantageous game state. A first game in which the second count value is configured to be updateable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number even when the game is played (for example, a three-coin bet game) and a second game in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (for example, a two-bet game) , wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) is one of the plurality of types of display, and the display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display", for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. A specific display that is different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as a "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), is a value related to the second count value, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when execution of the first game is started, the Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and the third display can be displayed while the second display is not displayed in the second game, and based on the number of used game media and the number of paid-out game media in the advantageous state , a third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player, and a count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as "third count value For example, the second termination condition is satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). It is a possible condition, and the third count value is updated based on the result of the game regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state. setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display indicates the set value This is a certain display suggesting a value (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display"; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 46A), and the first game is executed in the advantageous state. If the second game is played in the advantageous state, the fourth display may be displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the fourth display is never displayed.

According to the amusement machine according to this example, when execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. It is possible to inform the player of what he/she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter relating to advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is played with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are involved. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and operation means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, a right stop button), and a control means (e.g., main control unit) that shifts to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (e.g., low navigation state) and an advantageous state (e.g., high navigation state), Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using a payout number indicator, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, etc. ), wherein the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state , a first counter (for example, a difference number counter) for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player, and the first count of the first counter is performed each time one game is played in the advantageous state; A value (for example, the count value of the difference number counter) is configured to be updatable, and when a condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the advantageous state is changed to the normal state. The termination condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the first count value reaches the first value (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times). In an advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and a second counter ( For example, an AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is provided, and the second count value of the second counter (for example, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) each time one game is played in the certain advantageous gaming state can be updated, and when a certain advantageous game state end condition is satisfied, the certain advantageous game state ends, and the certain advantageous game state end condition is at least the It is a condition that can be established when the second count value reaches the second value (for example, when the number of game media paid out after shifting to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 expected acquisition number), and the plurality of One type of display is a first display indicating a value related to the second count value (for example, a remaining number display (280 remaining) shown in FIG. 49A). ))), and a first game (for example, a three-bet game) in which the bet amount of the game medium is a first number (for example, 3), , 2), wherein the second number is different from the first number, and the certain advantageous game state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per hour is large, the profit amount per hour is large, the amount of profit per game is the net increase in the number of game media is large, it is easy to shift from a normal state to an advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc.). A result that is a different number (for example, 11) (hereinafter referred to as a “first result”). ), and the execution result of the second game is a result in which the number of payouts of game media is a number (for example, 11) different from the second number (hereinafter referred to as " ), and the first game is executed in the certain advantageous game state and the first display is displayed. When the first result is obtained, the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are count values of both the first count value and the second count value. and the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display, and in the certain advantageous gaming state the number of game media used (or the number of bets) related to the execution of the second game when the second game is executed with the first display being displayed and the second result is obtained ) and the number of payouts can be reflected only in the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value, and the number of game media used (or The number of bets) and the number of payouts are not reflected in the first display. The total number of game media acquired by the player derived based on the number of payouts (hereinafter referred to as “total number of acquisitions”; for example, the number indicated by the total acquisition number display counter shown in FIG. 49A (506)) is configured to be able to display a predetermined number of win display (for example, a predetermined number of win display TG shown in FIG. 49A) when a predetermined number of coins is reached, and the first game is completed during the predetermined game period. When the total number of wins reaches the predetermined number by execution, the display of the acquisition of the predetermined number can be displayed based on the execution of the first game, and the second game is performed during the predetermined game period. Even if the total number of acquired games reaches the predetermined number by execution, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game. One display is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as a "second display". For example, a display of the start of a judge effect), and in a certain state in the certain advantageous game state, the first game is started, the second display can be displayed in the first game, and in the certain state wherein the second display is not displayed in the second game when the execution of the second game is started by the second game.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the total number of game media acquired by the player reaches a predetermined number by executing the second game in a certain game period, the second game medium Since the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game, it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like. . In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and operation means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, a right stop button), and a control means (e.g., main control unit) that shifts to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (e.g., low navigation state) and an advantageous state (e.g., high navigation state), Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using a payout number indicator, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, etc. ), wherein the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state a second counter (e.g., difference number counter) for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player, and the second count of the second counter each time one game is played in the advantageous state; A value (for example, a count value of a differential number counter) is configured to be renewable, and when conditions for ending the advantageous state are satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the advantageous state ends. The condition is established when at least the second count value reaches the first value (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times (or a certain number of games)). It is a possible condition, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state. It is a game state, and has a third counter related to management of the first advantageous game state (for example, an AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter indicating the number of game media that can be acquired in AT2), and the first advantageous game state. , the third count value of the third counter (for example, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) can be updated each time one game is played, and the first advantageous game state end condition is The first advantageous gaming state is terminated when it is established, and the first advantageous gaming state ending condition is when the third count value reaches the second value (for example , when the number of game media paid out after shifting to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 expected number of acquisitions), and one of the plurality of types of display is A first display indicating a value related to the third count value (for example, the remaining number display (280 remaining) shown in FIG. 49A), and the number of game media bet is a first number (for example, 3). ) and a second game (e.g., a two-bet game) in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (e.g., 2) can be executed. wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the first advantageous gaming state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game (For example, the number of game media paid out per hour is large, the amount of profit per hour is large, the number of net increases per game is large, it is easy to shift from a normal state to an advantageous state, from an advantageous state to a normal state etc.), and the execution result of the first game is a result in which the number of payouts of game media is a number (for example, 11) different from the first number (hereinafter referred to as "first result ”. ), and the execution result of the second game is a result in which the number of payouts of game media is a number (for example, 11) different from the second number (hereinafter referred to as " ), and the first game is executed in the first advantageous game state and the first display is displayed. is the first result, the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are counts of both the second count value and the third count value and the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display. state and the first display is displayed, the second game is executed and the second result is obtained, the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts can be reflected only in the second count value out of the second count value and the third count value, and the number of game media used for execution of the second game (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts are not reflected in the first display, and the use of game media in a certain game period (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game period") in the advantageous state. A first counter (for example, a counter for displaying the total number of acquired media) that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player during the predetermined game period (hereinafter referred to as "total number acquired") based on the number and the number of payouts. wherein the display means is means capable of displaying a predetermined number of acquisition display (for example, a predetermined number of acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 49A) when the total number of acquisitions reaches a predetermined value; When the total number of wins reaches the predetermined value due to the execution of the first game during the game period, the display of the predetermined number of wins can be displayed based on the execution of the first game, and the predetermined Even if the total number of wins reaches the predetermined value due to the execution of the second game during the game period, the display of the predetermined number of wins is not displayed based on the execution of the second game. may

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are configured not to be reflected in the first display, it is more disadvantageous than the first game. It is possible to inform the player that the second game has been executed in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Also, even when the second game is executed, the total number of acquired game media reflects the number of used game media and the number of payouts, so the player who is executing the first game and the second game are executed. It may be possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing. Also, even if the number of game media increases in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts of game media are not reflected in the third count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the first advantageous game advantageous state does not progress), it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like.

The third counter counts the total number of game media acquired by the player in the first advantageous game state based on the number of used game media and the number of payouts in the first advantageous game state. It may be a counter that

Further, the first game is configured to be able to win a certain combination, and the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning of the certain combination is a certain number of 1 or more (for example, 11), In a certain state in which the total number of wins has reached the predetermined value due to the execution of the second game during the predetermined game period, when the winning combination is not won by the execution of the first game The predetermined number acquisition display is configured not to be displayed, and in a certain state in which the acquisition total number has reached the predetermined value due to the execution of the second game during the predetermined game period, the first When the player wins the certain combination by executing the game, the predetermined number of win display may be displayed.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a second display indicating a value related to the total number of wins, and the first display and the second display are in the first advantageous gaming state. is displayed, the first game is executed and the first result is obtained, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first can be reflected in all the count values of the first count value, the second count value and the third count value of the counter, and the number of use and the number of payouts of game media related to the execution of the first game is configured to be reflected in both the first display and the second display, and the display in both the first display and the second display in the first advantageous gaming state is displayed and the second game is executed and the second result is obtained, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are the first count values; The number of game media used related to the execution of the second game, which can be reflected in the first count value and the second count value out of the second count value and the third count value, and The number of payouts may not be reflected on the first display, but may be reflected on the second display.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the contents described in one configuration among the plurality of configurations described in the above embodiment to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

In the embodiment of the slot machine described below, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instructing operation, it is determined by lottery whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is appropriate, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is terminated if the condition does not meet. It is a gaming machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out the medium.

[overall structure]
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 50 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The outer panel that constitutes the main body 101 is composed of five wooden panels (top surface, bottom surface, right side surface, left side surface, and rear surface). Handle members 104 are attached to the side plates 103 that form the left and right side surfaces of the outer plates that form the housing of the main body 101 . It should be noted that the outer plates constituting the main body 101 may be entirely made of metal, or may be partially made of metal and the rest of the plates made of wood. In this case, since it is necessary to form a hole 103h in the side plate 103 to which the handle member 104 is attached, it may be made of wood, which is easy to process, and the remaining plate may be made of metal.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. A winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . The number of winning lines can be set arbitrarily.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the game state is related to this specific winning combination. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. (up to 3 cards). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the prescribed number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a specific game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. As shown in FIG. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160 for outputting the sound of a speaker provided in the upper part of the inside of the slot machine 100 to the outside. is provided. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

[Handle material]
The handle member 104 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51, 52, 53 and 54. FIG. 51 and 52 are perspective views showing the handle member 104, FIG. 53 is a side view showing the handle member 104, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view showing the handle member 104. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 51, one end of the handle member 104 is formed with an opening OP. Hereinafter, the handle member 104 will be described with the side facing the opening OP as the front, the longitudinal direction of the opening OP as the horizontal direction, and the lateral direction as the vertical direction, based on the mounted state. In the handle member 104, a bag-like internal space SP is formed from the opening OP. When the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, the slot machine 100 is gripped by inserting the hand into the internal space SP through the opening OP.

The opening OP of the handle member 104 is formed by the peripheral portion 1041 . This peripheral portion 1041 is larger than a hole 103h of the side plate 103, which will be described later, and when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, the handle member 104 moves and falls inside the main body 101 (on the rear side of the installation position). It has a role as a stopper to prevent If the thickness of the peripheral portion 1041 protrudes outside the side plate 103, it may damage the handle member 104 during movement. It is preferable to provide a counterbore portion (drop-in recess) of a height. When the side plate 103 is made of metal, the thickness of the side plate 103 is not as thick as that of the side plate 103 made of wood.

An introduction portion 1042 is formed from the peripheral portion 1041 . The introduction portion 1042 is a portion that fits into the hole 103h when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, and has a size that matches the hole 103h of the side plate 103. As shown in FIG. In addition, the introduction part 1042 forms a portion of the internal space SP that extends from the opening OP to the rear side.

An intermediate portion 1043 is formed from the introduction portion 1042 . The introduction portion 1043 is a portion that connects the introduction portion 1042 and a fingertip storage portion 1044, which will be described later, and forms a curved portion that connects a portion extending toward the rear side and a portion extending upward in the internal space SP. . More specifically, the upper surface of introduction portion 1042 and the front surface of fingertip storage portion 1044 are connected at a curved portion, and the lower surface of introduction portion 1042 and the rear surface of fingertip storage portion 1044 are connected to each other. is a portion in which a curved portion and a smooth portion are connected to form an L-shape as if the whole is curved.

A fingertip storage portion 1044 is formed from the intermediate portion 1043 . The fingertip storage portion 1044 forms an upwardly extending portion and the innermost portion (uppermost portion in FIG. 51) in the internal space SP. It should be noted that the fingertip housing portion 1044 is configured such that the length in the left-right direction becomes shorter (the left-right direction becomes narrower) as it advances upward. With this configuration, the fingertips are less likely to move when the slot machine 100 is carried, and work can be performed stably.

The introduction portion 1042, the intermediate portion 1043, and the fingertip storage portion 1044 described above form the entire handle member 104 into an L-shape, and a step portion 1045 extending in the left-right direction is provided inside the bend. ing. The step portion 1045 is one step higher than the upper surface of the introduction portion 1042 and one step higher than the front side surface of the fingertip storage portion 1044 . The position of the front side surface of the stepped portion 1045 is configured so that the side plate 103 can be sandwiched between the peripheral edge portion 1041 and the stepped portion 1045 .

In addition, an elastic engaging portion 1046 for sandwiching the side plate 103 between the handle member 104 and the peripheral portion 1041 is provided on the lower side of the handle member 104 .

As shown in FIG. 54, the handle member 104 is constructed by combining two parts, a right side part 104A and a left side part 104B. Among them, the left part 104B has a joint part that is one size smaller than the right part 104A so that the joint part fits inside the right part 104A. A step is formed for fitting 104B inside. Further, these two parts are engaged in a so-called snap-fit manner at a total of three engaging portions of the first engaging portion 1047, the second engaging portion 1048, and the third engaging portion 1049 in the fingertip storage portion 1044. configured to fit.

The first engaging portion 1047 is composed of a wedge-shaped first locking portion 1047B of the left side component 104B and a first locked portion 1047A of the right side component 104A with which the first locking portion 1047B is engaged.

The second engaging portion 1048 is composed of a wedge-shaped second locking portion 1048B of the left side component 104B and a second locked portion 1048A of the right side component 104A with which the second locking portion 1048B is engaged.

The third engaging portion 1049 is composed of a wedge-shaped third locking portion 1049A of the right side component 104A and a third locked portion 1049B of the left side component 104B with which the third locking portion 1049A is engaged. In addition, the third locked portion 1049B is configured to cover the boundary between the joint portions on the back side of the right component 104A and the left component 104B, and also has a role of protecting this joint portion.

In the first to third engaging portions 1047 to 1049, the locking portions (1047B, 1048B, 1049A) bend and elastically deform as they are inserted into the locked portions (1047A, 1048A, 1049B). When it reaches the engagement position and is elastically restored, the claw of the locking portion engages with the locked portion, so that the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B can be kept connected. In this coupled state, the first engaged portion 1047A is higher than the first engaging portion 1047B in the front direction, and the second engaged portion 1048B is higher than the second engaging portion 1048B in the upward direction. The stopping portion 1048A is higher, and the third locked portion 1049B is higher than the third locking portion 1049A with respect to the back direction.

Based on the structure of the handle member 104 described above, the handle member 104 attached to the side plate 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55, 56, and 57. FIG. 55(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the side plate 103 without the handle member 104, and FIG. 55(b) is a side view showing the positional relationship with the handle member 104 attached to the side plate 103. FIG. . 56 and 57 are diagrams showing an example of the state of the handle member 104 in the process of being attached (removed) to the side plate 103. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), the side plate 103 is formed with a hole 103h penetrating in its thickness direction. When attaching the handle member 104 to the side plate 103, as shown in FIG. 56, the handle member 104 is inserted from the fingertip storage portion 1044 side into the hole 103h, and is inserted to the intermediate portion 1043 so as to assume the posture shown in FIG. rotate to At this time, the elastic engaging portion 1046 bends and elastically deforms as the handle member 104 is inserted, so that it can pass through the hole 103h. Finally, when the peripheral edge portion 1041 is pressed against the side plate 103 , the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the peripheral edge portion 1041 and the stepped portion 1045 above the introduction portion 1042 . On the lower side of the introduction portion 1042, the elastic engaging portion 1046 that has passed through the hole 103h is elastically restored, and the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the elastic engaging portion 1046 and the peripheral portion 1041. FIG. In this way, the handle member 104 is fitted so as to block the hole 103h, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 55(b).

On the other hand, when the handle member 104 is to be removed, the elastic engaging portion 1046 is bent from the inside of the main body 101 to release the engagement state of the lower side of the handle member 104 with the side plate 103, and the elastic engaging portion 1046 is removed. is pushed into the hole 103h, the handle member 104 is rotated with the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041 as a fulcrum to release the fitted state of the side plate 103 on the upper side of the handle member 104 to the state shown in FIG. Then, the handle member 104 can be removed by moving it out of the main body 101 while rotating it so as to take the posture shown in FIG.

This handle member 104 has a role of preventing injury or the like during transportation and installation of the slot machine 100 . It should be noted that the hole 103h itself can be used as a handle. However, if the hole 103h is used as a handle, the side plate 103 may bite into the finger due to the load, resulting in injury. Further, if plywood made by compressing wood chips is used for the side plate 103, there is a risk that a piece of wood will be stuck when a finger is put on the edge of the fragile hole 103h. , there is a danger of injuring a finger on the periphery of the hole 103h. Since the handle member 104 can disperse the load applied to the fingers and prevent direct contact with the side plate 103, the above problems can be solved. Furthermore, it is difficult to allow foreign objects to enter the inside of the slot machine 100 from the outside. The handle member 104 may be fixed to the hole 103h using a separate fixing member such as a screw, or may be attached during transportation and removed after installation. In addition, the size of the hole 103h is as small as possible (for example, 80 to 90 mm wide and 30 to 40 mm high) so that fraudulent actions using the hole 103h become difficult even if the handle member 104 is removed. degree).

[Characteristics (1) of the handle member 104]
The handle member 104 has a curved shape, and when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, as shown in FIG. It will be in a state facing to. At this time, the first engaging portion 1047 of the handle member 104 is positioned in the space between the side plate 103 and the handle member 104 . The engaging portion provided at such a position may collide with the side plate 103 due to the force applied to the handle member 104, and the engagement may be released due to the impact or breakage. There is also the risk that such collisions may occur intentionally to disengage for fraudulent purposes.

In the handle member 104 described above, the stepped portion 1045 is closer to the side plate 103 than the first engagement portion 1047 when attached to the side plate 103 . With this configuration, when a force directed toward the side plate 103 is applied to the handle member 104 , the movement of the handle member 104 is restricted by the stepped portion 1045 before the first engaging portion 1047 collides with the side plate 103 . Collision between the portion 1047 and the side plate 103 can be prevented. In this way, in the space between the side plate 103 and the handle member 104, if the handle member 104 has a restricting portion that restricts movement at a position closer to the side plate 103 than the first engaging portion 1047, the side plate Collision between 103 and first engaging portion 1047 can be prevented.

Note that the position where such a restricting portion is provided is not limited to being provided in the curved portion like the stepped portion 1045 described above. It may be directly below the portion 1047, directly above the first engaging portion 1047, or both directly below and directly above. Furthermore, they may be provided on the left and right sides of the first engaging portion 1047 . However, if only one of the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B is provided with the stepped portion 1045, there is a risk that the stepped portion 1045 collides with the side plate 103 and the engagement is released. A stepped portion 1045 may be provided on both of them. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(b), it may be provided on the upper surface of the introduction portion 1042. FIG. Further, the stepped portion 1045 of the handle member 104 extends in the left-right direction, but may be arranged obliquely in a plane formed by the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and may extend in the up-down direction. It may be something to do. The handle member 104 and the stepped portion 1045 may be separate members, and the stepped portion 1045 corresponding to the thickness of the side plate 103 may be provided. In any case, the position of the first engaging portion 1047 is not limited as long as it restricts the movement of the first engaging portion 1047 toward the side plate 103 .

If the restricting portion is not provided in the curved portion, the handle member 104 bends due to the concentration of force on the curved portion, which may cause the first engaging portion 1047 to collide with the side plate 103 or cause the engaging portion to be damaged. Although there is a risk that the engagement may be easily released, a restricting portion may be provided in the curved portion such as the stepped portion 1045 of the handle member 104, or a portion closer to the curved portion than the first engaging portion 1047 may be provided. Such a problem can be made less likely to occur by making the curved portion less likely to bend by, for example, providing a restricting portion.

In the handle member 104 described above, the stepped portion 1045 serves as a restricting portion that prevents collision between the first engaging portion 1047 and the side plate 103 . The stepped portion 1045 extends in the left-right direction, but the length in the left-right direction of the restricting portion is not limited to this length, and may be shorter. However, as the restricting portion becomes shorter, the handle member 104 is bent, and the first engaging portion 1047 and the side plate 103 are more likely to collide with each other. In this regard, since the force applied to the fingertips during transportation of the slot machine 100 concentrates on the tip portion of the fingertip storage portion 1044, the length of the restricting portion should be the tip portion of the fingertip storage portion 1044 (more specifically, the internal length). By setting the length to be equal to or longer than the length in the left-right direction in the deepest part of the space SP, the role of the restricting portion can be exhibited. Note that the restricting portion is not limited to being integrated like the stepped portion 1045, and may be provided separately at a plurality of locations. It suffices if the length is equal to or greater than the length in the left-right direction of the tip portion of the .

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(a), a space into which the restricting portion including the stepped portion 1045 is fitted may be formed in the side plate 103, and a space (counterbore) into which the peripheral portion 1041 is fitted. may be formed on the side plate 103 .

[Feature (2) of handle member 104]
As shown in FIG. 55B, when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 on the upper surface of the introduction portion 142. It has become. When removing the handle member 104, the elastic engaging portion 1046 is pushed into the hole 103h and the handle member 104 is rotated around the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041 as a fulcrum. 57, the handle member 104 is moved out of the main body 101 while being rotated so as to assume the posture shown in FIG. Here, assuming that the height of the surface of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 facing each other in the upward direction is higher than the height of the surface of the peripheral edge portion 1041, the height of the peripheral edge portion 1041 Even if the handle member 104 is rotated with the upper end portion as a fulcrum, the state in which the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 is not easily released, and the removal operation takes time.

Regarding this point, in the handle member 104, as shown in FIG. 55(c), the height H1 of the surface of the stepped portion 1045 is higher than the height of the upper surface of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041. It is lower than the height H2 of the surface of the portion 1041 . With this configuration, the amount of rotation and the load required to release the state in which the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 can be reduced, and the work of removing the handle member 104 can be facilitated. can do. In such a configuration, it is sufficient that the height of the surface of the stepped portion 1045 is equal to or less than the height of the surface of the peripheral portion 1041 in the upward direction of the opposing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral portion 1041. .

As for the stepped portion 1045, even if the side plate 103 is thicker than expected and the side plate 103 cannot be sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041, the fingertip storage portion 1044, The side plate 103 can be sandwiched between the side plate 103 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 facing this, and the handle member 104 can be attached with the side plate 103 placed on the stepped portion 1045 . That is, it is possible to increase the thickness range of the side plate 103 that can be attached.

Regarding the height in the upward direction of the facing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041, when adopting a configuration in which the height of the surface of the stepped portion 1045 is equal to or lower than the height of the surface of the peripheral edge portion 1041, the above-described The handle member 104 described above is not limited to the handle member composed of a plurality of parts, and may be an integrally molded handle member. However, a handle member composed of a plurality of parts, such as the handle member 104 described above, may be disengaged due to a load applied during removal. With respect to the height of the facing surfaces of stepped portion 1045 and peripheral edge portion 1041 in the upward direction, it is preferable to employ a configuration in which the height of the surface of stepped portion 1045 is equal to or lower than the height of the surface of peripheral edge portion 1041 .

In addition, although the handle member 104 described above has an L-shape in a side view, the height of the surface of the stepped portion 1045 is equal to the height of the surface of the stepped portion 1045 facing the peripheral edge portion 1041 . is lower than the height of the surface of the peripheral edge portion 1041, the handle member 104 can be rotated with the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041 as a fulcrum, even if the shape is different from this shape. can be easily removed.

Further, when the upper end of the peripheral edge portion 1041 has a wavy design, the fulcrum of the rotational movement when removing the handle member 104 is the highest part of the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041. The surface facing the portion 1041 may be configured to have a height equal to or less than that height.

[Feature (3) of handle member 104]
The handle member 104 described above is a combination of a right side part 104A and a left side part 104B, and there are joints between these parts. Such joints are fragile compared to other parts, and it is conceivable that the joints on the rear side of the handle member 104 may be destroyed in order to tamper with the inside of the slot machine 100 . However, as shown in FIG. 52, in the handle member 104, the joint portion between the right component 104A and the left component 104B is covered by the third engaged portion 1049B of the third engaging portion 1049, preventing foreign matter from entering through the opening OP. Even if an attempt is made to allow the foreign matter to enter the main body 101 from the joint portion, the third locked portion 1049B, which is difficult to see from the outside of the slot machine 100, is present outside the joint portion, making it difficult for the foreign matter to enter. . More specifically, even if a foreign object enters the vicinity of the third engaging portion 1049 with the aim of disengaging the third engaging portion 1049, even if the third engaging portion 1049 can be disengaged, the third engaging portion 1049 cannot be engaged. Since the third locked portion 1049B is provided in the vicinity of the portion 1049, it is necessary to try to enter from a location different from the vicinity of the third engaging portion 1049. In this way, the boundary on the back side is protected, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at the joint portion.

In addition, since the handle member 104 may be removed and reused, it is desired that the handle member 104 is less likely to be damaged by attachment and detachment. When attaching and detaching the handle member 104, as shown in FIG. 56, the rear side (especially the curved portion) of the handle member 104 is likely to come into contact with the side plate 103, and this contact may damage the joint portion. Such a problem can be prevented by protecting the joint portion on the back side by the locked portion 1049B.

In the handle member 104 described above, the third engaging portion 1049 has a role of protecting the joint portion on the back side. It is good also as a structure provided. However, like the handle member 104 described above, by integrating the engaging portion and the protecting portion, a stronger structure can be obtained, and the effect of preventing tampering and damage can be enhanced.

The third locked portion 1049B is higher than the third locked portion 1049A in the back direction, and the claw portion of the third locked portion 1049A is higher than the third locked portion 1049B. Even if the rear side of the handle member 104 contacts the side plate 103, the third locking portion 1049A does not contact the side plate 103 because it is configured so as not to protrude, making it difficult to release the engagement state. can be done.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table that employs the handle member 104. , pachinko balls), a pachinko machine, an arrange ball game machine, a Jankyu game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Configuration of technical ideas included in the embodiment>>
Hereinafter, the technical ideas described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above description,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-like internal space (for example, internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape is provided on the outer plate. A game table (e.g., slot machine 100) attached to (e.g., side plate 103),
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B),
the internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) with which the plurality of parts are engaged,
The handle is provided with an outer plate side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047) that is the engaging portion on a surface facing the outer plate inside the game machine,
The handle is provided with a regulating portion (for example, a stepped portion 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate-side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 55(b)).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The handle is provided with a curved portion (for example, an intermediate portion 1043) inside the game machine,
The restricting portion is provided at a location closer to the curved portion than the outer plate side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 53),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-like internal space (for example, internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape is provided on the outer plate. A game table (e.g., slot machine 100) attached to (e.g., side plate 103),
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B),
the internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) with which the plurality of parts are engaged,
The handle is provided with an outer plate side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047) that is the engaging portion on a surface facing the outer plate inside the game machine,
The handle is provided with a regulating portion (for example, a step portion 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate-side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 55(b)),
The restricting portion is provided along the longitudinal direction of the opening (see, for example, FIG. 51),
The length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening becomes shorter as it goes deeper into the internal space (see, for example, FIGS. 51 and 54),
the length of the restricting portion is equal to or greater than the innermost length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening (see, for example, [Feature (1) of handle member 104]);
A game machine characterized by:

again,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-like internal space (for example, internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape is provided on the outer plate. A game table (e.g., slot machine 100) attached to (e.g., side plate 103),
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B),
the internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) with which the plurality of parts are engaged,
The handle is provided with an outer plate side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047) that is the engaging portion on a surface facing the outer plate inside the game machine,
The handle is provided with a plurality of restricting portions (for example, a stepped portion 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate-side engaging portion (for example, FIG. 55(b), [handle Characteristic (1) of member 104]),
The plurality of restricting portions are provided along the longitudinal direction of the opening (see, for example, FIG. 51),
The length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening becomes shorter as it goes deeper into the internal space (see, for example, FIGS. 51 and 54),
The total length of the plurality of restricting portions is equal to or greater than the innermost length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening (for example, the length described in [Feature (1) of handle member 104]). reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The handle is provided with a curved portion (for example, an intermediate portion 1043) inside the game machine,
The restricting portion is provided at a location closer to the curved portion than the outer plate side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 53),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-like internal space (for example, internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape is provided on the outer plate. A game table (e.g., slot machine 100) attached to (e.g., side plate 103),
The handle is provided with a peripheral edge portion (for example, peripheral edge portion 1041) that forms the opening,
It is possible to sandwich the outer plate having a thickness of a predetermined thickness or less between the upper edge of the peripheral edge and a stepped portion (e.g., stepped portion 1045) provided inside the game table (e.g., , see FIG. 55(b)),
the height of the surface of the stepped portion facing the outer plate is equal to or less than the height of the surface of the upper edge portion facing the outer plate (see, for example, FIG. 55(c));
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The stepped portion is provided between the surface facing the outer plate and higher than the height of the upper end of the stepped portion (for example, the fingertip storage portion 1044) and the upper edge portion ( For example, see FIG. 55(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B),
the internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) that engages the plurality of parts.
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-like internal space (for example, internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape is provided on the outer plate. A game table (e.g., slot machine 100) attached to (e.g., side plate 103),
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B),
the internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) with which the plurality of parts are engaged,
The handle is provided with a protective portion (for example, a third locked portion 1049B) that covers the joints of the plurality of parts inside the game machine,
The protection part is provided on a surface of the handle facing the inside of the game machine (see, for example, FIG. 52),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a third engaging portion 1049) on the inner side of the game machine, which is the engaging portion, on a surface of the handle facing the inside of the game machine. ,
The amusement machine inner side engaging portion and the protective portion are integrated (see, for example, FIG. 52),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a third engaging portion 1049) on the inner side of the game machine, which is the engaging portion, on a surface of the handle facing the inside of the game machine. ,
The amusement machine inner side engaging portion includes a locking portion having a claw portion (eg, third locking portion 1049A) and a locked portion locked by the claw portion (eg, third locked portion 1049B). ) and
The claw portion engaged with the engaged portion is configured so as not to protrude toward the interior of the game table beyond the engaged portion (for example, [Feature (3) of handle member 104 ]),
A game machine characterized by:

59 to 73, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 59 to 73 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 59 to 73 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 73, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

<Overall composition>
FIG. 59 is a diagram schematically showing a slot machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied. The slot machine 100 starts a game by inserting medals, and pays out medals according to the result of the game.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59 comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 via a hinge portion (not shown) provided on the left side of the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the store clerk. FIG. 59(a-1) is a top plan view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 closed, and the bottom of the figure is the front side (player side). FIG. 59(a-2) shown below is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 closed, as seen from the front side. Street.

When the main body 101 is divided into upper, middle, and lower parts, a first image display device 157 is arranged in the upper part. The first image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device. An EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen may be used. Also, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 is rectangular, and the entirety of the display screen 1571 can be visually recognized by the player. On the display screen 1571 shown in FIG. 59(a-2), a background display for effect indicated by hatching diagonally downward to the left is displayed. The display screen 1571 shown in FIG. 59 is a horizontally long rectangle whose horizontal length is longer than its vertical length, but it may also be a square. Moreover, the display screen 1571 is a flat surface, but may be curved.

Side lamps 144 capable of emitting light of nine colors are arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen 1571 . The side lamp 144 is a decorative lamp for livening up the game.

The middle and lower parts of the main body 101 are covered with a front door 102 . Sound holes 181 are arranged on the left and right sides of the lower portion of the front door 102 . The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 180 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. A medal payout port 155 for paying out medals is arranged at the center of the lower part of the front door 102 .

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) having a plurality of patterns (not shown in FIG. 59) arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored in the upper center of the front door 102. In 59(a-2), L is marked on the left reel 110, C is marked on the middle reel 111, and R is marked on the right reel 112. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

Each pattern on the reel is printed on a belt-like member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and this belt-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are generally displayed three times vertically when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Note that the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to those described here.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern is arranged on the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100, and the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

A second image display device 158 is arranged on the left side of the three reels 110-112. The second image display device 158 is also a liquid crystal display device, but it may be configured to display various effect images and various game information. An EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen may be used. The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 also has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of it. On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 59(a-2), a background display for effect indicated by hatching diagonally downward to the left is also displayed. The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 59 is a vertically long rectangle whose length in the vertical direction is longer than the length in the horizontal direction, but it may also be a square. Also, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is smaller than the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 .

On the right side of the three reels 110-112, a stored number display 125 and a payout number display 127 are arranged. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

An operation panel 120 is arranged below the three reels 110-112. The operation panel 120 is provided with a start lever, a medal slot, three stop buttons, a bet button, a checkout button, a chance button, a volume adjustment button, and the like. The start lever is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. The medal slot is a slot for a player to insert medals when starting a game. The bet button is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . That is, medals can be inserted electronically using a bet button, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from a medal insertion slot, and "insertion" includes both. The three stop buttons are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. When the settlement button is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. A chance button is a button provided for executing a predetermined effect. A volume adjustment button is a button for adjusting the volume of the speaker 180 .

A key hole 140 is provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened.

FIG. 59(b-1) is a top plan view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened to 90 degrees via a hinge (not shown) provided on the left side. It becomes the front side (player side). FIG. 59(b-2) shown below is a left side view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened to 90 degrees, and the right side of the figure is the front side.

The second image display device 158 arranged on the front door 102 is rotated together with the front door 102 . As a result, in the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened up to 90 degrees, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 arranged on the main body 101 cannot be visually recognized from the left side, but the front door 102 The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 arranged in the 158 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, from the front side, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 arranged on the front door 102 cannot be seen, but the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 arranged on the main body 101 can be seen. can do.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number indicator 127, the side lamp 144, and the speaker 180 correspond to an example of notification means.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means when a door open error is detected.

In FIG. 60, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number indicator 127, and the speaker 180 are shown as an example of the notification means.

FIG. 60(a) shown on the left side of the drawing shows a state immediately after the front door 102 is opened.

59, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. In 1571 and 1581, a background display for error notification is displayed in a single color (white in this case). Further, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 displays a first error display ES10 of "error occurrence". This first error display ES10 is a flashing display that repeats disappearing momentarily and being displayed. In FIG. 60(a), diagonal lines are displayed at the four corners of the first error display ES10, which indicates that the first error display ES10 is repeatedly extinguished momentarily. (same for other figures). The first error display ES10 is a kind of error notification that indicates that an error has been detected in the slot machine 100, but is a kind of error notification that cannot specify what kind of error the detected error is. Further, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 also displays an error list display EL1. The error list display EL1 is always displayed.

Here, the contents of various errors listed in the error list display EL1 and how to clear the errors will be described.

A door open error with an error code of E1 is notified when the front door 102 is in an open state. When the front door 102 is returned to the closed state, the error is canceled.

A hopper empty error with an error code of E2 is reported when the payout medals stored inside the slot machine 100 run out and the payout becomes impossible. That is, a motor-driven medal discharge device is provided inside the slot machine 100. During the medal payout operation, the game medals in the medal discharge device run out, and the payout switch for counting the paid out medals is activated at a predetermined number. It is notified when the motor is not turned on even after the time of 1 has elapsed and the motor cannot be restored even if the motor is reversely rotated. Open the front door 102 to replenish the medal ejection device with medals, press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. error will be cleared.

A hopper clogging error with an error code of E3 means that the medals do not pass the payout switch within the predetermined second time due to the medals being jammed in the medal ejection device during the medal payout operation, and the recovery process is performed. is notified when recovery is not possible. The error is released by opening the front door 102, removing the medals jammed in the medal discharging device, pressing the reset button, or closing the front door 102 and turning the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. .

A medal auxiliary box full error with an error code of E4 is notified at the next game opening when the medal auxiliary box installed inside the slot machine 100 is full. That is, a sensor is provided to detect that the medal auxiliary box is full, and when this sensor detects that the medal auxiliary box is full, a notification is given. The error is released by opening the front door 102, extracting medals from the medal auxiliary box, pressing the reset button, or closing the front door 102 and turning the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left.

A passing medal count error with an error code of E5 is notified when the medals inserted from the medal slot are jammed. That is, inside the slot machine 100, a first insertion switch and a second insertion switch for counting the medals inserted from the medal insertion port are provided. A notification is given when the closing switch has been in the ON state for a predetermined third time or more. Alternatively, if the number of medals passed through the first insertion switch and the second insertion switch and the number of medals passed through the second insertion switch are out of the allowable range, the notification is also made. Open the front door 102, remove the stuck medals in the medal passage path that continues from the medal insertion slot, press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error.

A medal passing time error with an error code of E6 means that medals have passed through the first insertion switch or the second insertion switch within a predetermined fourth period of time as a result of the medals inserted from the medal slot being clogged. You will be notified if not. Open the front door 102, remove the stuck medals in the medal passage path that continues from the medal insertion slot, press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn the power switch off and then on, press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. good.

A medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7 occurs when the first insertion switch has been on for a predetermined fifth time or more as a result of the medals inserted from the medal slot being jammed, etc., and the next medal is accepted. will be notified from time to time. Alternatively, it is also notified when the first closing switch or the second closing switch is turned on other than the predetermined sixth time set when the first closing switch is turned on. Open the front door 102, remove the stuck medals in the medal passage path that continues from the medal insertion slot, press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn the power switch off and then on, press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. good.

A medal reverse flow error with an error code of E8 means that the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot flow in the opposite direction along the medal passage path, and the first insertion switch and the second insertion switch are operated in an order other than the specified passage order. Notified when passage is detected. The error is released by opening the front door 102, removing the medals stuck in the medal passage path, pressing the reset button, or closing the front door 102 and turning the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. be done. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn the power-on switch off and then on, press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the keyhole 140 to the left. good.

The slot machine 100 is provided with an external centralized terminal board for outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device (hall computer). The eight types of errors described above are output from the external centralized terminal board to an external device when an error is detected, so that the amusement arcade can notice that an error has occurred. A signal output from the external centralized terminal board to the external device contains information (for example, an error code) that can identify the detected error.

In addition, errors with error codes E2 to E8 cannot be cleared unless the front door 102 is opened. The display screen 1581 of the two-image display device 158 can be visually recognized, and the display screen 1581 can also be captured by the monitor camera installed on the left side, indicating that the error cancellation operation is being performed. Further, even if the front door 102 is illegally opened, even a store clerk far away on the left side can visually recognize the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, and the monitor camera installed on the left side can also view the display screen 1581. 1581 can be caught and it may be possible to notice that the front door 102 has been tampered with.

The player cannot know which of the eight errors displayed in the error list display EL1 has occurred just by looking at the first error display ES "error occurred". For example, it is not possible to identify whether it is a door open error or a hopper empty error. Here, for a person who illegally opens the front door 102 to commit a fraudulent act, the fact that the door opening error is not notified makes the person uneasy that he or she has done something else. , can discourage cheating.

On the other hand, if an error (error other than the door opening error) occurs unintentionally by the player, the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100 can be pressed to cancel the error. Since I need a key, I have no choice but to call the amusement store clerk. For this reason, even if the error that has occurred cannot be specified, there is a possibility that the store clerk will be called if only the fact that the error has occurred is known. You can also expect to have a store clerk called to ask what the error that occurred is. Furthermore, the first error display ES is also displayed when the clerk opens the front door 102 using the key. There is no need to bother reporting that the error is a door opening error. In view of these facts, the necessary minimum information notification such as the first error display ES10 is sufficient.

The error list display EL1 displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 60(a) only displays error codes and error names. However, it is not a display for specifying E1 or door open error).

The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 also displays the characters "error occurred". This character display has the same content as the first error display ES10, but is similar in size to the first error display ES10. Hereinafter, the character display of "error occurrence" displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as a first same content error display ES10'. Display screen 1 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 60(a)
The first same-content error display ES10′ displayed at 581 is also a display that flashes in synchronization with the flashing of the first error display ES10, and is a kind of error notification indicating that an error has been detected in the slot machine 100. However, it is a type of error notification that cannot specify what kind of error is detected.

In addition, on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, a list display having the same contents as the error list display EL1 is also displayed. This list display is similar in size to the error list display EL1. Hereinafter, the list display displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as same-content error list display EL1'. The same content error list display EL1′ displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. It is not a display that specifies a specific error code or error name.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 60(a) outputs the first error sound such as "error occurrence", but does not output the voice "door open error". The first error sound is also a type of error notification that indicates that an error has been detected in the slot machine 100, but is a type of error notification that cannot specify what kind of error the detected error is.

As described above, the door opening error occurs in the error list display EL1 displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, and the speaker 180. There is no error notification specifying what happened. On the other hand, the first same-content error display ES10' displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 and the first error sound from the speaker 180 notify that some kind of error has occurred.

Also, the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIG. 60(a) is in a non-display state. When there is a payout during the game, the payout number display 127 displays a number representing the number of payout medals. The displayed number disappears, and it switches to a state where nothing is displayed. Note that while the payout number indicator 127 is displaying the first error display ES10 or the first same content first error display ES10′ or while the first error sound is being output, an error has occurred in the slot machine 100. Er may be displayed as a kind of error notification indicating that an error has been detected.

In FIG. 60(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 60, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first same-content error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. ' is shown after disappearing.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first same-content error display ES10' disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. On the display screen 1571 where the first error display ES10 has disappeared, the error list display EL1 is always displayed. When the first error display ES10 disappears, the error list display EL1 displays a display specifying the error that has occurred. Here, as an error indication for identifying the door opening error, E1 and the character indication of the door opening error are surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display specifying the door opening error will be referred to as the second error display. In addition, in the error list display EL1, the square thick frame display surrounding the character display of E1 and the door open error is referred to as a display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display. The display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display corresponds to a type of error notification capable of specifying that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is the door opening error.

In addition, on the display screen 1581 where the first same-content error display ES10' has disappeared, the same-content error list display EL1' is always displayed. When the first same-content error display ES10' disappears, the same-content error list display EL1' is also displayed to identify the error that has occurred. In this case as well, as an error indication for specifying the door opening error, E1 and the character indication of the door opening error are surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display specifying the door opening error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as the second same content error display. Further, in the same-content error list display EL1', the display of a square thick frame surrounding the character display of E1 and the door open error is referred to as a display ES21' in the first display mode of the second same-content error display. The display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second same-content error display also corresponds to a type of error notification capable of specifying that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is the door opening error.

It should be noted that both the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display and the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content are displays in which the character display of E1 and the door open error blink. may Alternatively, the eight error codes are displayed separately from the list display, and only the E1 error code is displayed blinking. may be displayed together with the display ES21'.

Further, the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 60(b) outputs a second error sound such as "door open error", and the voice output also indicates that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is a door open error. becomes identifiable. That is, the second error sound also corresponds to a type of error notification that can specify that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is the door opening error.

Note that the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIG. 60(b) remains in a non-display state, and no error notification is performed.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means after the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display and the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content are started.

In this FIG. 61 as well, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number indicator 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as an example of the notification means.

FIG. 61(a) shown on the left side of the drawing shows a state continued from FIG. 60(b). FIG. 61 shows the aspect ratio (14:25) of the display screen 1571 in the first image display device 157, and the aspect ratio (11:6) of the display screen 1581 in the second image display device 158. It is shown. The aspect ratios of both are expressed on the same scale. length is longer.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 61(a), the error list display EL1 is still displayed at all times, and the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1) where the first error display ES10 of "error occurred" shown in FIG. Character display is displayed. This "door error" is an abbreviation for door open error, corresponds to an error display specifying a door open error, and corresponds to a kind of second error display. Hereinafter, the character display of "door error" is referred to as display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display. The display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display blinks during the display of the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display. Therefore, there are two types of display modes for the second error display, and the displays ES21 and ES22 of these two types of display modes have a period of overlap. Note that the abbreviated display such as "door error" may be changed to a formal display such as "door open error", and display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display may be performed. FIG. 61(a) also shows the aspect ratio (3:10) of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display. This aspect ratio is expressed on the same scale as the aspect ratio of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the second error display is displayed in the second display mode with respect to the horizontal length of the display screen 1571. The lateral length ratio of ES22 is 10/25. Also, the ratio of the vertical length of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display to the vertical length of the display screen 1571 is 3/14.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 61(a), the same content error list display EL1' is always displayed, and the display ES21' of the second same content error display in the first display mode is displayed. is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area as the area where the first same-content error display ES10' labeled "error occurred" shown in FIG. , the character display of "door error" having the same content as the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. Hereinafter, the character display of "door error" on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is referred to as a display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same-content error display. The display ES22' of the second same-content error display in the second display mode is also the display ES22 of the second error display in the second display mode during the display of the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second same-content error display. flashes in synchronization with the flashing display of . Therefore, there are two types of display modes for the second same-content error display, and the displays ES21' and ES22' of these two types of display modes have a period of overlapping execution. It should be noted that the abbreviated display such as "door error" may be changed to a formal display such as "door open error", and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display may be performed. FIG. 61(a) also shows the aspect ratio (0.9:3) of the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display. This aspect ratio is expressed on the same scale as the aspect ratio of the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, and the second display mode of the second error display with the same contents with respect to the horizontal length of the display screen 1581 The ratio of the horizontal length of the display ES22' by is 3/6. Also, the ratio of the vertical length of the display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second same content error display to the vertical length of the display screen 1581 is 0.9/11. Note that the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is larger than the display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second same content error display.

As is clear from FIG. 61(a), the lateral direction from the end of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 to the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571 is The distance is longer than the horizontal distance from the end of the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 to the display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second same-content error display displayed on the display screen 1581 . Further, the vertical distance from the end of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 to the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571 is also the second image display device 158 is longer than the vertical distance from the end of the display screen 1581 to the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display displayed on the display screen 1581. Note that the horizontal distance or the vertical distance may be shorter. Conventionally, even if an error is displayed on one display screen, the player may not notice the error. Sometimes we can. Also, by varying the distance from the edge of the display screen to the error display for each display screen, it may be easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred. In particular, both the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content are displayed horizontally, so the distance in the horizontal direction is large. By being different, it is possible to give different impressions even if the same content is displayed, and it becomes easier to attract the player's attention. For example, on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, although the display is small, the display is full and easy to attract the player's attention.

Further, as is clear from FIG. 61(a), the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 is different from the display screen of the second image display device 158. This is a larger display than the display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second same content error display displayed in 1581 .

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 61(a), the voice output of "door opening error", which is the second error sound, continues. Note that the second error sound may be a voice output such as "door error".

The payout number indicator 127 shown in FIG. 61(a) is still in a non-display state, and no error information is given.

FIG. 61(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 61 shows the state after the display of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same contents are started. It is shown.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 61(b), the error list display EL1 is still displayed all the time, and the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display is also displayed. Furthermore, in the area where the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display was displayed, the characters "Door is open" are displayed in a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). there is The frame display displaying the text "door is open" corresponds to the display showing the state of the slot machine 100 in which the door open error has occurred, and is hereinafter referred to as state display SS10. The status display SS10 can also be viewed as one mode of error display. The size of the status display SS10 is larger than the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display. Further, while the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is a blinking display, the status display SS10 is a lighting display that continues lighting without momentarily extinguishing. The status display SS10 and the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display are alternately displayed.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 61(b), the same content error list display EL1' is still always displayed, and the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second same content error display is displayed. is also displayed. Furthermore, in the area where the display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second same content error display was displayed, “Door is open." is displayed. This character display is also a frame display displayed in a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). Hereinafter, the frame display displaying the characters "The door is open" will be referred to as the content state display SS10'. The content status display SS10' can also be viewed as one mode of error display. The background color of the state display SS10' of the same content and the background color of the state display SS10 are the same color, but they may be different colors. The size of the same content status display SS10' is larger than the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display. Further, the same content state display SS10' and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display are alternately displayed.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 61(b) outputs a state notification sound by voice such as "the door is open", and the state of the slot machine 100 in which the door open error has occurred is also reported by voice output. . The speaker 180 alternately outputs a sound "the door is open" (status notification sound) and a sound "door open error" (second error sound).

The payout number indicator 127 shown in FIG. 61(b) is still in a non-display state, and no error information is given.

The notification mode after the detection of the door opening error explained above will be explained again using the timing chart.

FIG. 62 is a timing chart of the notification mode after the door opening error is detected. In FIG. 62, time elapses from left to right in the figure.

FIG. 62 shows the notification modes of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number indicator 127, respectively.

First, a door open error is detected by the open sensor. When the door opening error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts to display the first error display ES10 saying "error occurred" and the error list display EL1. 1 Same content error display ES10′ and same content error list display EL1′ start to be displayed. Also, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error occurrence". Note that the payout number display 127 is in a non-display state in which nothing is displayed.

The start of display of the first error display ES10, start of display of the error list display EL1, start of display of the first same content error display ES10', start of display of the same content error list display EL1', and start of output of the first error sound are The display of the first error display ES10, the display of the first same-content error display ES10', and the output of the first error sound are finished at the same timing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the error list display EL1' having the same contents are continued to be displayed even after a predetermined time has passed. The display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the same content error list display EL1' continue to be displayed until the door open error is cancelled.

On the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 ends, the display of the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display that can identify the door opening error is started. The display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display continues to be displayed until the door open error is cancelled. Although the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display is a lighting display, it may be a display in which a square thick frame display blinks. The flashing display is repeated.

In the second image display device 158, when the display of the first same-content error display ES10' ends, the display of the second same-content error display ES21' in the first display mode in which the door opening error can be specified is started. . The display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content also continues to be displayed until the door open error is cancelled. The display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content is also a lighting display, but it may be a display in which a square thick frame display blinks. In this case, the door open error is canceled. The flashing display is repeated until the

When the output of the first error sound ends, the speaker 180 starts outputting a second error sound such as "door open error". Note that the payout number display 127 remains in a non-display state.

In the first image display device 157, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the display of the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display was started, the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and The state display SS10 such as "the door is open" is alternately displayed. That is, after the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is blinking, the status display SS10 is illuminated, and the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is blinking again. Alternating displays are repeated until the door open error is cleared. In this alternate display, the display period of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the display period of the status display SS10 have the same length, but the display period of the former is long and the display period of the latter is short. Alternatively, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has passed since the display of the display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second same content error display is started, the second same content error display is displayed in the second display mode. After ES22' is flashed, the same content status display SS10' is illuminated, and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display is flashed again. Repeat until the error is cleared. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is synchronized with the alternate display on the first image display device 157 .

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined time elapses after the output of the second error sound such as "door open error" is started, the second error sound is switched to the status notification sound such as "door is open". This switching timing is synchronized with the timing at which the first image display device 157 starts displaying the state display. The state notification sound and the second error sound are alternately output until the door open error is cleared. The output switching timing between the status notification sound and the second error sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the status display and the second error display on the first image display device 157 .

In the example shown in FIG. 62, the payout number display 127 remains in a non-display state until the door open error is cancelled.

Note that the display name of the first image display device 157 and the display name of the second image display device 158 are described with the words “same content” to distinguish between the two, but the display content is the same. , both indications may be treated without distinction.

The speaker 180 outputs three different sounds, namely, the first error sound, the second error sound, and the status notification sound, but the same sound is consistently output from the stage when the door open error is detected. You may make it For example, the first error sound may continue to be output, the second error sound may continue to be output, or the state notification sound may continue to be output from the time the door opening error is detected until the error is resolved. However, a non-speech warning sound may continue to be output.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means when an empty hopper error with an error code of E2 is detected.

As in FIG. 60, FIG. 63 also shows the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the number-of-payouts display 127, and the speaker 180 as an example of notification means. It should be noted that the description of the content that overlaps with the content described using FIG. 60 may be omitted.

FIG. 63(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows the situation immediately after the hopper empty error is detected.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 63(a), a background display for error notification is displayed in a single color (white in this case). ing. Further, on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, a first error display ES10 of "error occurrence" is blinking. In addition, although the error list display EL1 is always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, an error display that can specify that the error that has occurred is the hopper empty error is not displayed. .

Also on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 63(a), a first error display ES10' having the same content as "Error Occurred" blinks in synchronism with the blinking display of the first error display ES10. there is The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 also displays the same content error list display EL1', but does not display an error display that can identify that the error that has occurred is the hopper empty error. .

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 63(a) outputs the first error sound such as "error occurred", but does not output the sound "hopper empty error".

Unlike the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 60(a), the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 63(a) displays the error code E2 of the detected error. Even a person who does not remember the error code can understand the error name by looking at the error list display EL1 or the error list display EL1' of the same content. Therefore, it can be said that the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIG. 63(a) displays an error display that can identify the hopper empty error. However, since the payout number display 127 displays the number of medals, there is a high possibility that only a person who knows that an error display is displayed on the payout number display 127 will not notice it, but at least the game Store clerks notice. The error display on the payout number display 127 immediately after the occurrence of the hopper empty error, which can identify that the error is the hopper empty error, can be said to be an error display for the clerk, and even if the player does not understand it, The store clerk can immediately identify that the error that has occurred is a hopper empty error.

In FIG. 63(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 63, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first same-content error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. ' is shown after disappearing.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first same-content error display ES10' disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. On the display screen 1571 where the first error display ES10 has disappeared, the error list display EL1 is always displayed. When the first error display ES10 disappears, the error list display EL1 displays a display specifying the error that has occurred. Here, as an error display specifying the hopper empty error, E2 and the character display of the hopper empty error are surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display specifying the hopper empty error will be referred to as a third error display ES30. The display mode of the third error display ES30 is a display mode in which the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error displayed in the error list display EL1 are surrounded by a thick square frame.

In addition, on the display screen 1581 where the first same-content error display ES10' has disappeared, the same-content error list display EL1' is always displayed. When the first same-content error display ES10' disappears, the same-content error list display EL1' is also displayed to identify the error that has occurred. Again, as error indications identifying the hopper empty error, E2 and the character indication of the hopper empty error are surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display specifying the hopper empty error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as a third same-content error display ES30'. The display mode of the third same content error display ES30' is a display mode in which the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error displayed in the same content error list display EL1' is surrounded by a thick square frame.

It should be noted that both the third error display ES30 and the third error display ES30' with the same content may be displayed by blinking the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error. Alternatively, the eight error codes are displayed separately from the list display, and as a different display mode of the third error display ES30 and the third error display ES30' with the same content, only the E3 error code is displayed in a bold square frame. It may be displayed together with the display mode surrounded by .

Further, the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 63(b) outputs a third error sound such as "Hopper Empty Error". becomes identifiable. That is, the third error sound also corresponds to a kind of error notification that can identify that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is the hopper empty error.

Note that the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 63(b) remains in the state of displaying E2, which is the error code of the hopper empty error.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means after the third error display ES30 or the third same content error display ES30' is started.

In this FIG. 64 as well, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the number-of-payouts display 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as an example of the notification means.

FIG. 64(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state continued from FIG. 63(b).

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 64(a), the error list display EL1 is still displayed all the time, and the third error display ES30 is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1) where the first error display ES10 "error occurred" shown in FIG. ” is displayed. This character display of "please call the clerk" corresponds to a kind of instruction notification indicating an instruction to the player. Hereinafter, the character display "Please call the store clerk" will be referred to as an instruction display IS10. This instruction display IS10 blinks during display of the third error display ES30. Therefore, the instruction display IS10 and the third error display ES30 have a period of overlap.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 64(a), the same content error list display EL1' is always displayed, and the third same content error display ES30' is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area as the area where the first same-content error display ES10' labeled "error occurred" shown in FIG. , the character display of the same content as the instruction display IS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. Hereinafter, the character display of "Please call the clerk" on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as the same content instruction display IS10'. This same-content instruction display IS10' also blinks in synchronism with the blinking display of the instruction display IS10 during the display of the third same-content error display ES30'. Therefore, the same-content instruction display IS10' and the third same-content error display ES30' have a period of overlapping execution.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 64(a), an instruction notification sound such as "Please call the store clerk" is output. That is, the third error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound. It should be noted that even if the instruction display IS10 is displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the third error sound may be continuously output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 64(a) still displays E2, which is the error code of the hopper empty error.

FIG. 64(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 64 shows the state after the instruction display IS10 and the content instruction display IS10' have started to be displayed.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 64(b), the error list display EL1 is still displayed all the time, and the third error display ES30 is also displayed. Further, in the area where the instruction display IS10 was displayed, the characters "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch" are displayed in a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). The frame display in which the characters "Replenish medals and press the reset switch" is displayed corresponds to an explanation notification explaining how to cancel the hopper empty error that has occurred, and is hereinafter referred to as the first error cancellation explanation display RS10. called. The first error cancellation explanation display RS10 can also be viewed as one mode of error display. Also, the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 can be regarded as one mode of error display that can specify that the error that has occurred is the hopper empty error. Further, the size of the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 is about the same as the size of the instruction display IS10. be. This is because the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 has more characters than the instruction display IS10, so it is illuminated so that it can be read clearly. The first error cancellation explanation display RS10 and the instruction display IS10 are alternately displayed. Note that the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 may be displayed larger than the instruction display IS10.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 64(b), the same content error list display EL1' is still always displayed, and the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second same content error display is displayed. is also displayed. Furthermore, in the area where the display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second same content error display was displayed, the same display as the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. A character display of the content "Replenish medals and press the reset switch" is displayed. This character display is also a frame display displayed in a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). Hereinafter, the frame display displaying the characters "Replenish medals and press the reset switch" will be referred to as a first same-content error cancellation explanation display RS10'. The first same-content error reset explanation display RS10' can be viewed as one mode of error display, and can also be viewed as one mode of error display that can identify that the error that has occurred is the hopper empty error. The background color of the first same-content error cancellation explanation display RS10' and the background color of the same-content instruction display IS10' are different colors, but they may be the same color. Furthermore, although the size of the first same-contents error cancellation explanation display RS10' is about the same as the size of the same-contents instruction display IS10', the same-contents instruction display IS10' was a blinking display, whereas the first same-contents error cancellation explanation display RS10' The same content error cancellation explanation display RS10' is a lighting display. The first same content error cancellation explanation display RS10' and the same content instruction display IS10' are alternately displayed. It should be noted that the first same content error cancellation explanation display RS10' may be displayed larger than the same content instruction display IS10'.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 64(b), an explanation of the error canceling method is given by voice such as "Replenish medals and press the reset switch." Hereinafter, this sound will be referred to as a first error cancellation explanation notification sound. The speaker 180 alternately outputs a first error cancellation explanation notification sound and an instruction notification sound such as "Please call the store clerk." Note that the speaker 180 may output only the instruction notification sound without outputting the first error cancellation explanation notification sound.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 64(a) still displays E2, which is the error code of the hopper empty error.

The notification mode after the detection of the hopper empty error explained above will be explained again using the timing chart.

FIG. 65 is a timing chart of a notification mode after the hopper empty error is detected. In this FIG. 65 as well, time elapses from left to right in the figure, and the notification modes of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number indicator 127 are shown. ing.

First, a hopper empty error is detected. When the hopper empty error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts to display the first error display ES10 saying "error occurred" and the error list display EL1. 1 Same content error display ES10′ and same content error list display EL1′ start to be displayed. Also, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error occurrence". Further, when the hopper empty error is detected, the payout number indicator 127 displays the error code (here, E2) of the error that has occurred. Start of display of first error display ES10, start of display of error list display EL1, start of display of first same content error display ES10′, start of display of same content error list display EL1′, start of output of first error sound, and payout The display of the error code on the number display 127 is started at the same timing, and when a predetermined time elapses, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first same content error display ES10' is displayed, and the first error sound is output. end at the same time. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the same content error list display EL1', and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 are continuously displayed even after a predetermined time has passed. The display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the same content error list display EL1' continue to be displayed until the hopper empty error is cleared. In the example shown in FIG. 65, the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 also continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is cancelled.

Among the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display 127, the payout number display 127 may start reporting the error code most quickly. As described above, the notification of the error code on the payout number display 127 can be said to be an error display for the clerk, and the clerk may be promptly notified of the occurrence of the hopper empty error.

On the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 is finished, the display of the third error display ES30 that can identify the hopper empty error is started. This third error display ES30 continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is cleared. Although the third error display ES30 is a lighting display, it may be a display in which a thick square frame blinks. In this case, the blinking display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. Become.

On the second image display device 158, when the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content ends, the display of the third error display with the same content ES30' with which the hopper empty error can be specified is started. This third same content error display ES30' also continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is cleared. The third same-content error display ES30' is also a lighting display, but it may be a display in which a square thick-framed display blinks. In this case, the blinking display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. will be

When the output of the first error sound ends, the speaker 180 starts outputting a third error sound such as "Hopper Empty Error". The payout number display 127 continues to display the error code (E2) of the hopper empty error.

On the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time has passed since the display of the third error display ES30 started, an instruction display IS10 such as "Please call a clerk" and "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch." ” are alternately displayed. That is, after the instruction display IS10 is flashed, the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 is illuminated, and the instruction display IS10 is flashed again. This alternate display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. . In this alternate display, the display period of the instruction display IS10 and the display period of the first error reset explanation display RS10 have the same length, but the former display period may be long and the latter display period may be short, or vice versa. Alternatively, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has passed since the display of the third same-content error display ES30' started, the same-content instruction display IS10' blinks and then the first same-content error cancellation explanation is displayed. The display RS10' lights up, and the content instruction display IS10' blinks again. This alternate display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is synchronized with the alternate display on the first image display device 157 .

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined time elapses after the output of the third error sound "Hopper Empty Error" is started, the third error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound "Please call the clerk". This switching timing is synchronized with the timing when the first image display device 157 starts displaying the instruction display. Also, in synchronism with the timing at which the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 is started on the first image display device 157, the speaker 180 also announces the first error cancellation explanation such as "Replenish medals and press the reset switch." A sound is output. From the speaker 180, the instruction notification sound and the first error cancellation explanation notification sound are alternately output until the hopper empty error is cancelled. The output switching timing between the instruction notification sound and the first error cancellation explanation notification sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing between the instruction display IS10 and the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 on the first image display device 157 .

It should be noted that although the display name of the first image display device 157 and the display name of the second image display device 158 are described as "same content" to distinguish between the two, the display content is the same. Therefore, both indications may be treated without distinction.

The speaker 180 outputs four different sounds, namely, a first error sound, a third error sound, an instruction notification sound, and a first error cancellation explanation notification sound, but an empty hopper error is detected. The same sound may be consistently output from the first stage. For example, the first error sound may continue to be output, the third error sound may continue to be output, or the instruction notification sound may continue to be output from the detection of the hopper empty error until the error is resolved. However, the first error cancellation explanation notification sound may continue to be output, or an alarm sound that is not a voice may continue to be output.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means when a medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7 is detected.

As in FIG. 63, FIG. 66 also shows the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the number-of-payouts display 127, and the speaker 180 as an example of notification means. It should be noted that the description of the content that overlaps with the content described using FIG. 63 may be omitted.

FIG. 66(a) shown on the left side of the drawing shows the state immediately after the medal passage confirmation error is detected.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 66(a), a background display for error notification expressed in a single color (white in this case) is displayed. ing. Further, on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, a first error display ES10 of "error occurred" is blinking. In addition, although the error list display EL1 is always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, an error display capable of specifying that the error that has occurred is a medal passage confirmation error is not displayed. do not have.

Also on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 66(a), a first error display ES10' having the same content as "Error Occurred" blinks in synchronism with the blinking display of the first error display ES10. there is In addition, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 also displays the error list display EL1' with the same content, but does not display an error display that can specify that the error that has occurred is a medal passage confirmation error. do not have.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 66(a), the first error sound, which is a voice saying "error occurred", is output, but the voice "medal passage confirmation error" is not output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 66(a) displays E7, which is the error code of the detected error.

In FIG. 66(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 66, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first same-content error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. ' is shown after disappearing.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first same-content error display ES10' disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. On the display screen 1571 where the first error display ES10 has disappeared, the error list display EL1 is always displayed. When the first error display ES10 disappears, the error list display EL1 displays a display specifying the error that has occurred. Here, as an error display for specifying a medal passage confirmation error, E7 and a character display of the medal passage confirmation error are surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display specifying the medal passage confirmation error will be referred to as a fourth error display ES40. The display mode of the fourth error display ES40 is a display mode in which the character display of E7 and the medal pass confirmation error displayed in the error list display EL1 is surrounded by a thick square frame.

In addition, on the display screen 1581 where the first same-content error display ES10' has disappeared, the same-content error list display EL1' is always displayed. When the first same-content error display ES10' disappears, the same-content error list display EL1' is also displayed to identify the error that has occurred. In this case as well, as an error display for specifying a medal passage confirmation error, E7 and the character display of the medal passage confirmation error are surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display for identifying the medal passage confirmation error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as a fourth same content error display ES40'. The display mode of the fourth same content error display ES40' is a display mode in which the character display of E7 and medal pass confirmation error displayed in the same content error list display EL1' is surrounded by a thick square frame.

It should be noted that both the fourth error display ES40 and the fourth error display E70' having the same contents may be displayed by blinking the character display of E7 and the medal pass confirmation error. Alternatively, the eight error codes are displayed separately from the list display, and as a different display mode of the fourth error display ES40 and the fourth same-content error display E70', only the error code E7 is displayed in a bold square frame. It may be displayed together with the display mode surrounded by .

Furthermore, from the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 66(b), a fourth error sound such as "Medal passing confirmation error" is output, and the error detected by the slot machine 100 is a medal passing confirmation error. Something becomes identifiable. In other words, the fourth error sound also corresponds to a type of error notification that can specify that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is a medal passage confirmation error.

The number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. 66(b) remains in the state of displaying E7, which is the error code for the token passage confirmation error.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means after the fourth error display ES40 or the fourth same content error display ES40' is started.

67 also shows the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display 127, and the speaker 180 as an example of the notification means.

FIG. 67(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state continued from FIG. 66(b).

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 67(a), the error list display EL1 is always displayed, and the fourth error display ES40 is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1) where the first error display ES10 of "error occurred" shown in FIG. An instruction display IS10 such as is blinking. The instruction display IS10 here also has a period during which it overlaps with the fourth error display ES40.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 67(a), the same content error list display EL1' is always displayed, and the fourth same content error display ES40' is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area as the area where the first same-content error display ES10' labeled "error occurred" shown in FIG. , and an instruction display IS10' having the same contents as the instruction display IS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158, such as "Please call a clerk." This same content instruction display IS10' also flashes in synchronism with the flashing display of the instruction display IS10 during the display of the fourth same content error display ES40'. Therefore, the same-content instruction display IS10' and the fourth same-content error display ES40' have a period of overlapping execution.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 67(a), an instruction notification sound such as "Please call the store clerk" is output. That is, the third error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound. It should be noted that even if the instruction display IS10 is displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the third error sound may be continuously output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 67(a) still displays E7, which is the error code of the token passage confirmation error.

FIG. 67(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 67 shows a state after the instruction display IS10 and the content instruction display IS10' have started to be displayed.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 67(b), the error list display EL1 is always displayed, and the fourth error display ES40 is also displayed. Further, in the area where the instruction display IS10 was displayed, the characters "Please remove medals and press the reset switch" are displayed in a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). The frame display with the characters "Remove the medal and press the reset switch" corresponds to an explanation notification explaining how to cancel the occurred medal passage confirmation error, and is hereinafter referred to as the second error cancellation explanation display RS20. . Like the first error cancellation explanation display RS10, the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 can also be viewed as one mode of error display, and can be regarded as one of the error displays that can specify that the error that has occurred is a medal passage confirmation error. It can also be viewed as a mode. Furthermore, the size of the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 is about the same as the size of the instruction display IS10. Like the error cancellation explanation display RS10, it is a lighting display so that many displayed characters can be clearly read. The second error cancellation explanation display RS20 and the instruction display IS10 are alternately displayed. Note that the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 may be displayed larger than the instruction display IS10.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 67(b), the same content error list display EL1' is always displayed, and the display ES21' of the second same content error display in the first display mode is displayed. is also displayed. Furthermore, in the area where the display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second same content error display was displayed, the same display as the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. A frame display of the contents is displayed. This frame display is also displayed in a certain background color (here, gray), and is hereinafter referred to as a second same content error cancellation explanation display RS20'. The second same-content error cancellation explanation display RS20' can be viewed as one mode of error display, and can also be viewed as one mode of error display that can specify that the error that has occurred is a medal pass confirmation error. The background color of the second same-content error cancellation explanation display RS20' and the background color of the same-content instruction display IS10' are different colors, but they may be the same color. Further, the size of the second same-contents error cancellation explanation display RS20' is about the same as the size of the same-contents instruction display IS10', but the same-contents instruction display IS10' was a blinking display, whereas the second same-contents error cancellation explanation display RS20' The same content error cancellation explanation display RS20' is a lighting display. The second same content error cancellation explanation display RS20' and the same content instruction display IS10' are alternately displayed. It should be noted that the second same content error cancellation explanation display RS20' may be displayed larger than the same content instruction display IS10'.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 67(b), an explanation of the error cancellation method is given by voice such as "Remove the medal and press the reset switch." Hereinafter, this sound will be referred to as a second error cancellation explanation notification sound. The speaker 180 alternately outputs a second error cancellation explanation notification sound and an instruction notification sound such as "Please call the store clerk." Note that the speaker 180 may output only the instruction notification sound without outputting the second error cancellation explanation notification sound.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 67(a) still displays E7, which is the error code of the token passage confirmation error.

A timing chart will be used to explain again the notification mode after the medal passage confirmation error explained above is detected.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart of a notification mode after a medal passage confirmation error is detected. In FIG. 68 as well, time elapses from left to right in the drawing, and the notification modes of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number indicator 127 are shown. ing.

First, a medal passage confirmation error is detected. When a medal pass confirmation error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts to display the first error display ES10 and the error list display EL1 saying "Error Occurred", and the second image display device 158 also starts displaying "Error Occurred". The display of the first same content error display ES10' and the same content error list display EL1' is started. Also, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error occurrence". Furthermore, when a medal passage confirmation error is detected, the payout number display 127 displays the error code (here, E7) of the error that has occurred. Start of display of first error display ES10, start of display of error list display EL1, start of display of first same content error display ES10′, start of display of same content error list display EL1′, start of output of first error sound, and payout The display of the error code on the number display 127 is started at the same timing, and when a predetermined time elapses, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first same content error display ES10' is displayed, and the first error sound is output. end at the same time. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the same content error list display EL1', and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 are continuously displayed even after a predetermined time has passed. The display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the same content error list display EL1' continue to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. In the example shown in FIG. 68, the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 also continues to be displayed until the medal pass confirmation error is cleared.

Among the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display 127, the payout number display 127 may start reporting the error code most quickly.

On the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 is completed, the display of the fourth error display ES40, which can specify the medal passage confirmation error, is started. This fourth error display ES40 continues to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is cancelled. Although the fourth error display ES40 is a lighting display, it may be a display in which a thick square frame is blinking. In this case, the blinking display is repeated until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. become.

On the second image display device 158, when the display of the first same-content error display ES10' ends, the display of the fourth same-content error display ES40' capable of specifying the medal passage confirmation error is started. This fourth same content error display ES40' also continues to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is cancelled. The fourth error display ES40′ with the same content is also lit, but it may be a display in which a thick square frame is blinking. will be repeated.

When the output of the first error sound ends, the speaker 180 starts outputting a fourth error sound such as "error to confirm passage of medals". It should be noted that the error code (E7) of the medal passage confirmation error is continuously displayed on the payout number display 127. FIG.

On the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time has passed since the display of the fourth error display ES40 started, an instruction display IS10 saying "Please call a clerk" and an instruction display IS10 saying "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" are displayed. The second error cancellation explanation display RS20 is alternately displayed. That is, after the instruction display IS10 is blinked, the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 is lit, and the instruction display IS10 is blinked again. be In this alternate display, the display period of the instruction display IS10 and the display period of the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 have the same length, but the former display period may be long and the latter display period may be short, or vice versa. Alternatively, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has passed since the display of the fourth same-content error display ES40' started, the same-content instruction display IS10' blinks, and then the second same-content error cancellation explanation is performed. The display RS20' lights up, and the same content instruction display IS10' blinks again, and so on, and so on, and so on, and this alternate display is repeated until the medal pass confirmation error is cleared. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is synchronized with the alternate display on the first image display device 157 .

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined time elapses after the output of the fourth error sound "Medal passage confirmation error" is started, the fourth error sound is switched to an instruction notification sound "Please call a clerk". This switching timing is synchronized with the timing when the first image display device 157 starts displaying the instruction display. In addition, in synchronization with the timing when the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 is started on the first image display device 157, a second error cancellation explanation notification sound such as "Remove the medal and press the reset switch" is also emitted from the speaker 180. output. From the speaker 180, the instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound are alternately output until the medal passage confirmation error is cancelled. The output switching timing between the instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing between the instruction display IS10 and the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 on the first image display device 157 .

It should be noted that although the display name of the first image display device 157 and the display name of the second image display device 158 are described as "same content" to distinguish between the two, the display content is the same. Therefore, both indications may be treated without distinction.

The speaker 180 outputs four different sounds, namely, a first error sound, a fourth error sound, an instruction notification sound, and a second error cancellation explanation notification sound. You may make it output the same sound consistently from the stage which was carried out. For example, the first error sound may continue to be output, the fourth error sound may continue to be output, or the instruction notification sound may continue to be output from the time when the medal passage confirmation error is detected until the error is resolved. Alternatively, the second error cancellation explanation notification sound may continue to be output, or an alarm sound that is not a voice may continue to be output.

In addition, the description using FIGS. 66 to 68 was for the detection of a medal passage confirmation error with error code E7, but when various errors with error codes E3 to E6 and E8 are detected, Similar error notification is performed. That is, the first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurred" and the first error display ES10' having the same contents as "Error Occurred" are displayed, and the first error sound "Error Occurred" is output. After that, the target error code and error name in the error list display EL1 are enclosed in a thick rectangular frame, and the target error code and error name in the same error list display EL1′ are displayed in a thick square. An error display surrounded by a frame is performed, and an instruction display IS10 and a second error cancellation explanation display RS20 are alternately displayed, and an instruction display IS10' of the same content and a second error cancellation explanation display RS20' of the same content are also alternately displayed. In addition, the speaker 180 outputs the instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound alternately after the error name is output by voice.

Next, a case where error reports overlap will be described.

FIG. 69 is a timing chart when a door open error is detected before the hopper empty error is detected and the error is resolved. In FIG. 69 as well, time elapses from left to right in the figure, and the notification modes of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number indicator 127 are shown. ing.

First, a hopper empty error is detected. When the hopper empty error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts to display the first error display ES10 saying "error occurred" and the error list display EL1. 1 Same content error display ES10′ and same content error list display EL1′ start to be displayed. Also, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error occurrence". Further, when the hopper empty error is detected, the payout number indicator 127 displays the error code (here, E2) of the error that has occurred. Start of display of first error display ES10, start of display of error list display EL1, start of display of first same content error display ES10′, start of display of same content error list display EL1′, start of output of first error sound, and payout The display of the error code on the number display 127 is started at the same timing, and when a predetermined time elapses, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first same content error display ES10' is displayed, and the first error sound is output. end at the same time. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the same content error list display EL1', and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 are continuously displayed even after a predetermined time has passed.

On the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 is finished, the display of the third error display ES30 that can identify the hopper empty error is started. Further, on the second image display device 158, when the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content ends, the display of the third error display with the same content ES30' with which the hopper empty error can be specified is started.

When the output of the first error sound ends, the speaker 180 starts outputting a third error sound such as "Hopper Empty Error". The payout number display 127 continues to display the error code (E2) of the hopper empty error.

On the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time has passed since the display of the third error display ES30 started, an instruction display IS10 such as "Please call a clerk" and "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch." ” are alternately displayed. Further, on the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time elapses after the display of the third same-content error display ES30' is started, the same-content instruction display IS10' and the first same-content error cancellation explanation display RS10' are displayed. are displayed alternately. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is synchronized with the alternate display on the first image display device 157 .

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the speaker 180 started outputting the third error sound "Hopper Empty Error", the instruction display IS10 and the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 are alternately displayed on the first image display device 157. In synchronism with , an instruction notification sound such as "Please call a clerk" and a first error cancellation explanation notification sound such as "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch" are alternately output.

The payout number display 127 continues to display the error code (E2).

A door open error is detected while the second instruction notification (display of instruction display IS10, display of instruction display IS10', and output of instruction notification sound) is being performed. However, even if the door open error is detected while the hopper empty error is not canceled, error notification based on the detection of the door open error is not started at all, and the error notification regarding the hopper empty error continues. That is, the display of the first error display ES10 such as "error occurrence", the display of the first same-content error display ES10', the output of the first error sound, and the display of the second error displays ES21, ES22 that can identify the door opening error. , the display of the second error displays ES21′ and ES22′ with the same content, and the output of the second error sound are not started, and the first image display device 157 alternately displays the instruction display IS10 and the first error cancellation explanation display RS10. The second image display device 158 alternately displays the same content instruction display IS10' and the first same content error cancellation explanation display RS10', and the speaker 180 alternately outputs the instruction notification sound and the first error cancellation explanation notification sound. continues. In addition, the display of the error code (E2) continues on the payout number display 127 . The error list display EL1 is also continuously displayed on the first image display device 157. In the error list display EL1, the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error is surrounded by a thick square frame. 3 Error display ES30 continues to be displayed. The second image display device 158 also continues to display an error list display EL1' with the same content. The third same-content error display ES30' surrounded by a thick frame continues to be displayed.

In the example explained using FIG. 69, the error that occurred earlier was the hopper empty error with error code E2, but even if the error code is E3 to E8, those errors are canceled. Even if the door opening error is detected in the state where the door opening error is not detected, no error notification is started based on the detection of the door opening error. By doing so, the store clerk may be able to concentrate on dealing with the error that has occurred first. In addition, while the door open error is a simple error that can be canceled by closing the front door 102, the errors E2 to E8 are complicated errors that involve replenishing and removing medals. It is notified with priority over the open error. In other words, in the error notification, an error for which error cancellation explanation notification is performed is notified with priority over an error for which error cancellation explanation notification is not performed.

FIG. 70 is a timing chart when a door opening error is detected and a medal passage confirmation error is detected before the error is resolved. In FIG. 70 as well, time elapses from left to right in the figure, and the notification modes of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display 127 are shown. ing.

First, a door open error is detected. When the door opening error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts to display the first error display ES10 saying "error occurred" and the error list display EL1. 1 Same content error display ES10′ and same content error list display EL1′ start to be displayed. Also, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error occurrence". Note that the payout number display 127 is in a non-display state in which nothing is displayed. The start of display of the first error display ES10, start of display of the error list display EL1, start of display of the first same content error display ES10', start of display of the same content error list display EL1', and start of output of the first error sound are The display of the first error display ES10, the display of the first same-content error display ES10', and the output of the first error sound are finished at the same timing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the error list display EL1' having the same contents are continued to be displayed even after a predetermined time has passed.

In the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 ends, the display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode, which can identify the door opening error, is started. Further, in the second image display device 158, when the display of the first error display ES10′ with the same content ends, the display ES21′ of the second error display with the same content with which the door opening error can be specified is started in the first display mode. .

When the output of the first error sound ends, the speaker 180 starts outputting a second error sound such as "door open error". Note that the payout number display 127 remains in a non-display state.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time elapses after the display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode of the second error display is started, the display ES22 of the second error display in the second display mode such as "door error" is displayed. The display and the state display SS10 such as "the door is open" are displayed alternately. Further, in the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time elapses after the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second same content error display is started, the second same content error display such as "door error" is displayed. The display of the display ES22' by the two display modes and the state display SS10' of the same content such as "the door is open" are displayed alternately. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is synchronized with the alternate display on the first image display device 157 .

After the speaker 180 starts outputting a second error sound such as "door error", in synchronism with the start of display of the state display SS10 on the first image display device 157, a state notification sound such as "the door is open" is generated. is output, and thereafter the second error sound and the status notification sound are alternately output. This alternate output from the speaker 180 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the state display SS10 on the first image display device 157 . Note that the payout number display 127 remains in a non-display state.

A medal passage confirmation error is detected in a state in which the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display such as the second "door error" is being performed. Then, even if the door opening error is not canceled, the error notification regarding the door opening error ends, and instead, the error notification based on the detection of the medal passage confirmation error is started. That is, the display of the first error display ES10 such as "error occurrence", the display of the first same-content error display ES10', and the output of the first error sound are displayed on the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, and the speaker. 180 each. In addition, the payout number display 127, which has been hidden until now, starts to display E7, which is an error code for a token passage confirmation error. In the first image display device 157, the error list display EL1 that started to be displayed as an error notification regarding the door opening error is continuously displayed. The display ES21 in the 1 display mode has ended. Also, in the second image display device 158, the error list display EL1' having the same content, which started to be displayed as an error notification regarding the door opening error, is continuously displayed, but the same error list display EL1' is used. The display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second same-content error display is finished.

Before long, the first image display device 157 starts to display the fourth error display ES40 using the error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 displays the fourth same content error display EL1′ using the same content error list display EL1′. The display of the error display ES40' is started. In addition, the display of the error code (E7) continues on the payout number display 127 . Thereafter, the first image display device 157 alternately displays the instruction display IS10 and the second error cancellation explanation display RS20, and the second image display device 158 displays the same content instruction display IS10′ and the second same content error cancellation explanation display RS20. ' is alternately displayed, and the speaker 180 continues to alternately output the instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound. In addition, the display of the error code (E7) continues on the payout number display 127 .

In the example described with reference to FIG. 70, the newly generated error was a token passage confirmation error with an error code of E7. and E8 is also detected, the error notification regarding the door opening error is terminated, and instead, the error notification based on the newly generated error is started. Again, the door open error is a simple error that can be canceled by closing the front door 102, while the errors E2 to E8 are complicated errors that involve adding or removing medals. It is notified with priority over the door open error. In other words, in the error notification, an error for which error cancellation explanation notification is performed is notified with priority over an error for which error cancellation explanation notification is not performed.

60 to 70, the error notification using the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number indicator 127, and the speaker 180 has been described. An error notification may also be performed. For example, in the error list display EL1 and the error list display EL1' of the same content, a color representing each error (a color other than white) is displayed, and in the case of the first error notification indicating that an error has been detected, the side The lamp 144 may be flashed in white, and in the case of an error notification specifying each error, the side lamp 144 may be flashed in a color representing each error.

Next, a modified example of error notification using the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158 will be described.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modified example of error notification using the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a modified example of error notification continued from FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification continued from FIG. FIG. 71(a-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 71(a-1), and FIG. 71(b-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 71(b-1). FIG. 72(a-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 72(a-1), and FIG. 72(b-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 72(b-1). Further, FIG. 73(a-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 73(a-1), and FIG. 73(b-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 73(b-1).

FIG. 71(a-1) shows the first image display device 157 in which the display screen 1571 displays the background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left, and the display screen 1581 also displays the background display diagonally downward to the left. A second image display device 158 is shown in which a background display for effect represented by hatching of .

Here, the configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described. The control units of the slot machine 100 are roughly divided into a main control unit that controls the progress of a game, a first sub-control unit that controls main effects in accordance with a command signal transmitted by the main control unit, and a second sub-control unit. and a second sub-controller that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller. The second sub-controller is provided with a VDP (video display processor), to which ROM and VRAM 518 are connected via a bus. In the VRAM 518, an area for the first effect image display device 157 (hereinafter referred to as "first area") and an area for the second effect image display device 158 (hereinafter referred to as "second area") are distinguished. is provided. The VDP reads image data and the like stored in the ROM based on a signal from the CPU of the second sub-controller, develops the image data in the first area provided in the work area of the VRAM 518, and performs drawing processing. I do. When the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1571 is completed in the first area, the image is displayed on the first effect image display device 157 . In addition, the VDP reads image data and the like stored in the ROM based on a signal from the CPU of the second sub-controller, develops the image data in a second area provided in the work area of the VRAM 518, Perform drawing processing. When the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1581 is completed in the second area, the image is displayed on the second effect image display device 158 . A plurality of drawing areas are prepared for both the first area and the second area.

FIG. 71(a-2) shows a first drawing area 5181 in the first area of the VRAM 518 provided in the slot machine 100 and a first drawing area 5182 in the second area. In the second drawing area in the first area, which is not shown in FIG. 71(a-2), the display screen 157 in FIG. The display image has been generated. Also, in the second drawing area in the second area, which is also not shown in FIG. The generation of the background display image for is complete. On the other hand, neither the first drawing area 5181 in the first area nor the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 71(a-2) is drawn.

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 71(b-2), the entire display image of the first error display ES10 saying "error occurred" is generated, but the display image of the error list display EL1 is generated. is only generated halfway through. Therefore, generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1571 is not yet completed. In addition, no single-color background image that serves as a background display for error notification is generated at all. From the above, on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 71(b-1), the background display for effect remains displayed, and nothing else is additionally displayed. not

In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 71(b-2), the entire display image of the first same-content error display ES10' of "error occurred" is generated, and the same-content error list is displayed. The generation of the display image of EL1' is also completed. Therefore, generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1581 is completed. In this modification, when displaying images, the background display image and the display images other than the background image, such as the first same-content error display ES10' and the same-content error list display EL1', are handled separately. In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area, the single-color background image that serves as the background display for error notification is generated only halfway. As a result, the background display on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. A content error list display EL1' is additionally displayed. It should be noted that the background display image and the display image different from the background image may be handled together. will not be performed. Alternatively, the display image of the first same content error display ES10′ or the first error display ES10 and the display image of the same content error list display EL1′ or the error list display EL1 may be handled separately, for example, FIG. ), the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 may display only the first error display ES10.

At the stage of FIG. 71(b-2), the generation of the display image has progressed more in the first rendering area 5182 in the second area than in the first rendering area 5181 in the first area.

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 72(a-2), the entire display image of the first error display ES10 saying "error occurred" is generated, and the display image of the error list display EL1 is also generated. generation is complete. Therefore, generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1571 is completed. On the other hand, in the first drawing area 5181 in the first area, the single-color background image that serves as the background display for error notification is generated only halfway. As a result, on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(a-1), the background display remains the background display for effect, but the first error display ES10 and the error list display EL1 are displayed. is displayed.

In the first drawing region 5182 in the second region shown in FIG. 72(a-2), the error generated only halfway in the first drawing region 5182 in the second region shown in FIG. 71(b-2) The generation of the single-color background image that serves as the notification background display has also been completed, and on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 72(a-1), both the background display and the error notification background display The background image is a single color (white in this case).

At the stage of FIG. 72(a-2) as well, the generation of the display image is more advanced in the first rendering area 5182 in the second area than in the first rendering area 5181 in the first area.

In the first drawing region 5181 in the first region shown in FIG. 72(b-2), the error generated only halfway in the first drawing region 5181 in the first region shown in FIG. 72(a-2) The generation of the single-color background image to be the notification background display has also been completed, and the background display on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. The background image is a single color (white in this case).

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 73(a-2), the display image of the first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurred" is erased, and in the error list display EL1, E1 and the door open error are displayed. The display image of the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display of the square thick frame display surrounding the character display is generated halfway. As a result, the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 73(a-1) remains the same as the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(b-1). .

In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 73(a-2), the display image of the first same-content error display ES10' saying "error occurred" is erased, and in the same-content error list display EL1', The generation of the display image of the display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second same content error display of the square thick frame display surrounding the character display of E1 and the door open error has been completed. As a result, on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. A display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content is displayed, which is a square thick frame display surrounding the character display of E1 and the door open error. In this modification, the data amount of the image data of the second same content error display developed in the drawing area of the second area is set to the data amount of the image data of the second error display developed in the drawing area of the first area. Less than quantity. Also, even when viewed on the entire display screen, the data amount of the image data displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 is the same as that of the image data displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. less than the amount of data. As a result, the drawing in the drawing area of the second area is completed earlier than the drawing in the drawing area of the first area, and the first effect image display device 157 starts displaying the second error display. Before that, the second effect image display device 158 starts to display the second same-content error display. That is, in FIG. 73(a-1), the relationship between the display screen including the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display and the display screen including the display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second same error display. However, the relationship between the display screen including the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the display screen including the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display is also the same.

FIG. 73(b-2) shows the VRAM 518 immediately after the door open error is resolved while the status display SS10 such as "the door is open" is displayed. The VRAM 518 shows a second drawing area 5183 in the first area and a second drawing area 5184 in the second area. In the second drawing area 5183 in the first area, the generation of the background display image for effect indicated by hatching diagonally downward to the left is completed only halfway, and the first drawing area 5183 shown in FIG. On the display screen 1571 of the effect image display device 157, the state display SS10 such as "the door is open" and the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display remain displayed.

On the other hand, in the second drawing area 5184 in the second area, the generation of the background display image for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left has been completed. Therefore, on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 73(b-1), the display of the error notification is switched to the effect background display indicated by hatching diagonally downward to the left. In this modification, the data amount of the background display image data for effect developed in the drawing area of the second area is changed to the data amount of the image data for background display for effect developed in the drawing area of the first area. Less than quantity. As a result, the drawing in the drawing area of the second area is completed earlier than the drawing in the drawing area of the first area, and the display of the second error display on the first effect image display device 157 ends. Previously, the display of the second same-content error display on the second effect image display device 158 ends.

As described above, in this modification, the error notification on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 is started at an earlier timing than the error notification on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. be. Conventionally, even if an error is displayed on one display screen, the player may not notice the error. Sometimes we can. Also, by making the notification start time different for each display screen, it may be easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred. In particular, the display is first started on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158, which is smaller, and then the display is started on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157, which is larger. Thus, it is possible to give an impression that a small display is enlarged and displayed, and to realize an error display with movement between different display screens. Moreover, the larger display makes it easier for the player to notice.

Also, the error notification on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 ends earlier than the error notification on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 . That is, the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 may start the effect at an earlier timing than the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 . By doing so, it is possible to give an impression that a small effect display is enlarged and displayed, and to realize a dynamic effect display between different display screens.

In the modified example described above, the VRAM 518 is divided into the first area for the first effect image display device 157 and the second area for the second effect image display device 158. The display image may be generated in the same area (hereinafter referred to as "common drawing area"). Even in this case, in order to give the impression that the small display is enlarged and displayed, the display is started first on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 which is smaller. , the display start timing is controlled by the second sub-controller side. Alternatively, while the second effect image display device 158 displays the image generated in the common drawing area as it is, the first effect image display device 157 enlarges the image generated in the common drawing area on the device side. If the second effect image display device 158 does not perform the enlargement process, the second effect image display device 158 starts display at an earlier timing than the first effect image display device 157 .

Further, among the notification by the first effect image display device 157, the notification by the second effect image display device 158, and the notification by the speaker 180, the notification by the speaker 180 may be started earliest. The error sound is a notification that can be noticed even when looking away (without looking at the display screen), and is easily noticed by the store clerk, so it may be started first.

In addition, although the slot machine 100 has been described as an example in the above description, the error notification described above can also be applied to a pachinko machine. A pachinko machine also has a main body and a front frame door, and is equipped with a first effect image display device (main liquid crystal display device) on the main body side and a second effect image display device (sub-liquid crystal display device) on the front frame door. Alternatively, there is one in which both the first effect image display device and the second effect image display device are provided on the main body side. It also has a speaker and a frame lamp. Further, instead of the payout number display 127, a first special symbol display device or a second special symbol display device configured by a 7-segment display device or the like can be used as a notification means. Even in a pachinko machine, when the front frame door is opened, a door opening error occurs, and the second error display, the second error display with the same content, and the second error sound can be applied. In addition, the back side of the pachinko machine is provided with a payout device that pays out the game balls stored in the ball tank. There is Furthermore, there are also magnetic (magnet) errors, impact errors, large winning opening excess winning errors, large winning opening excess ejection errors, and the like. A third error display, a fourth error display, a third same content error display, a fourth same content error display, a third error sound, and a fourth error sound can be applied to these errors.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number indicator 127, a side lamp 144, and a speaker 180],
When an error is detected, the notification means provides a first error notification [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "error occurred", a first error display ES10' saying "error occurred", a first error display ES10' saying "error occurred", etc. first error sound by voice],
The first error notification is notification indicating that an error has been detected,
The gaming machine, wherein the first error notification is notification incapable of specifying what kind of error the detected error is. 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, when a fraudulent person attempts to commit fraudulent acts on the amusement machine and causes an error, the first error notification, in which the error name and error type are not specified, is made to make the fraudulent person uneasy. , may be able to discourage the execution of wrongdoing. Also, when an error occurs while the player is playing the game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the game clerk. sometimes it is possible.

again,
"The notification means is means for executing the first error notification when a second error [for example, a door opening error] is detected,
The first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to identify that the detected error is the second error.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The notification means is means for executing the first error notification even when a third error [e.g., hopper empty error] is detected,
The first error notification is a notification that cannot determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The notification means, when the second error is detected, executes the first error notification and then performs the second error notification [for example, character display of E1 and door open error in error list display EL1. Display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by a square thick frame, display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display of "door error", E1 in the same content error list display EL1', and the door Display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second error display with the same contents, in which the character display of the opening error is surrounded by a thick square frame, display ES22′ of the second error display with the same contents as “door error” in the second display mode, A second error sound by voice such as "door open error"],
The notification means, when the third error is detected, executes the first error notification and then issues the third error notification [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the hopper empty error are squared. A third error display ES30 surrounded by a thick frame, a third error display ES30′ with the same content surrounded by a thick square frame, E2 in the error list display EL1′ with the same content, and a character display of the hopper empty error, “Hopper empty error is a means for executing a third error sound by voice such as
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error,
The third error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the third error.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

When the game clerk called by the player by the first error notification rushes to the game machine, the content of the error can be grasped by the second error notification and the third error notification and can be dealt with. Sometimes.

again,
"The notification means is means including at least display means [e.g., first image display device 157, second image display device 158],
The first error notification [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "error occurred", a first same-content error display ES10' saying "error occurred", a first error sound by voice saying "error occurred"] is detected. is a notification by an unspecified display that the error is the second error,
The first error notification is notification by a display that makes it impossible to specify that the detected error is the third error content error display ES10'],
The second error notification is a notification by means of a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door open error are shown in thick square frames. display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by , display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display "Door error", E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same contents, and characters of the door open error Display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content surrounded by a square thick frame, and display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content of “door error”],
The third error notification is a notification by means of a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the hopper empty error are A third error display ES30 surrounded by a square, a third error display ES30′ with the same content, and E2 in the same content error list display EL1′ and a character display of the hopper empty error surrounded by a thick square frame].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The notification means is means including at least one of sound generating means [e.g., speaker 180] and light emitting means [e.g., side lamp 144].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"a main body [e.g., main body 101];
a door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be able to be opened and closed;
with
The main body includes a payout device [for example, a medal discharge device] that pays out the stored game media,
the second error is an error in which the door section is opened [for example, a door open error];
The third error is an error [e.g., hopper empty error] in which the game media that have been stored are exhausted and the dispensing device is unable to dispense game media.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number indicator 127, a side lamp 144, and a speaker 180],
When a second error [e.g., door open error] is detected, the notification means notifies the second error [e.g., character display of E1 in error list display EL1 and door open error with a thick square frame. Enclosed display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode, display ES22 of the second error display "door error" in the second display mode, E1 in the error list display EL1' of the same content, and character display of the door open error. is surrounded by a thick square frame ES21′ in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content, display ES22′ of the second same content error display in the second display mode of “door error”, “door open error” A second error sound by voice such as
When the third error [e.g., hopper empty error] is detected, the notification means notifies the third error [e.g., character display of E2 and hopper empty error in error list display EL1 with a thick square frame The third error display ES30 enclosed, E2 in the same content error list display EL1', and the third same content error display ES30' enclosing the character display of the hopper empty error in a thick square frame, by voice such as "Hopper empty error" 3rd error sound],
The notification means is means for not executing the second error notification when the second error is detected during the execution of the third error notification [for example, the example described with reference to FIG. 69]. , a game machine characterized by: ' was explained.

According to this gaming machine, the store clerk of the gaming parlor may be able to concentrate on dealing with the third error that has occurred earlier.

again,
"The notification means is means for executing the third error notification when the third error is detected during execution of the second error notification [for example, the example described with reference to FIG. notation],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, between the second error and the third error, the third error is the error to be reported with priority. In other words, between the second error and the third error, the third error has a higher priority.

again,
"Equipped with a signal output means [e.g., an external lumped terminal board],
The signal output means is means for outputting a signal indicating that the second error has been detected to the outside when the second error is detected.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, when a fraudulent person commits fraud without noticing the occurrence of the second error, the store clerk may notice the occurrence of the second error. .

again,
"When the second error is detected, the annunciation means notifies the first error [for example, the first error display ES10 of 'error occurrence', 'error occurrence'] prior to the second error notification." a first error display ES10′ with the same content, and a first error sound by voice such as “error occurrence”],
The notification means is means for executing the first error notification prior to the third error notification even when the third error is detected,
The first error notification is a notification that cannot determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error,
The third error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the third error.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The notification means is means including at least display means [e.g., first image display device 157, second image display device 158],
The first error notification is notification by a display that makes it impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error content error display ES10'],
The first error notification is notification by a display that makes it impossible to specify that the detected error is the third error content error display ES10'],
The second error notification is a notification by means of a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door open error are shown in thick square frames. display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by , display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display "Door error", E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same contents, and characters of the door open error Display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content surrounded by a square thick frame, and display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content of “door error”],
The third error notification is a notification by means of a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the hopper empty error are A third error display ES30 surrounded by a square, a third error display ES30′ with the same content, and E2 in the same content error list display EL1′ and a character display of the hopper empty error surrounded by a thick square frame].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The notification means is means including at least one of sound generating means [e.g., speaker 180] and light emitting means [e.g., side lamp 144].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"a main body [e.g., main body 101];
a door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be able to be opened and closed;
with
The main body includes a payout device [for example, a medal discharge device] that pays out the stored game media,
the second error is an error in which the door section is opened [for example, a door open error];
The third error is an error [e.g., hopper empty error] in which the game media that have been stored are exhausted and the dispensing device is unable to dispense game media.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number indicator 127, a side lamp 144, and a speaker 180],
When a second error [e.g., door open error] is detected, the notification means notifies the second error [e.g., character display of E1 in error list display EL1 and door open error with a thick square frame. Enclosed display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode, display ES22 of the second error display "door error" in the second display mode, E1 in the error list display EL1' of the same content, and character display of the door open error. is surrounded by a thick square frame ES21′ in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content, display ES22′ of the second same content error display in the second display mode of “door error”, “door open error” A second error sound by voice such as
The second error notification includes notification in a first notification mode indicating that the detected error is the second error [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door open error are squared. ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by a thick frame, E1 in the same content error list display EL1', and the character display of the door open error are surrounded by a square thick frame. display ES21′ in the first display mode] and notification in the second notification mode indicating that the detected error is the second error [for example, the second display of the second error display of “door error” display ES22 according to the mode, display ES22′ according to the second display mode of the second same-content error display of “door error”] is included,
A playground characterized by:

Conventionally, even if an error is reported in one notification mode, the player may not notice the error, but according to this game machine, an error occurs to the player by performing the error notification in a different notification mode. You may be able to get noticed.

again,
"The notification means is a means for executing the notification according to the second notification mode even during the execution of the notification according to the first notification mode [for example, FIG. 61(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The notifying means [for example, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180], after the start of execution of the second error notification, the game machine where the second error occurred Execution of a state notification representing a state [for example, a status display SS10 such as ``the door is open'', a status display SS10' with the same content as ``the door is open'', and a status notification sound such as ``the door is open''] is a means to initiate
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to inform a player or a store clerk in what state the amusement machine is in due to the occurrence of the second error according to the state notification. In particular, for those who are unfamiliar with the occurrence of the second error, this status notification makes it easy to understand the second error that has occurred. In addition, in the case of a person who commits a fraudulent act that causes the second error, this state notification will let other players around him know what state the gaming machine is in. It may also be known that such fraudulent activity has been committed, and it may be possible to discourage further fraudulent activity.

again,
"The notification means is a means for executing notification according to the first notification mode even during execution of the state notification [for example, FIG. 61(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The notification means is means for alternately executing the notification according to the second notification mode and the status notification [for example, the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. Characteristic playground. 』
also explained.

again,
"When the third error [e.g., hopper empty error] is detected, the notifying means notifies the third error [e.g., E2 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the hopper empty error by a third error display ES30 surrounded by , a third error display ES30′ with the same content E2 in the error list display EL1′ with the same content, and a character display of the hopper empty error surrounded by a thick square frame, and a voice such as “Hopper empty error” 3rd error sound by],
When the second error is detected, the annunciation means issues a first error annunciation [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "error has occurred", a first error indication ES10 saying "error has first same content error display ES10', first error sound by voice such as "error occurrence"],
The notification means is means for executing the first error notification prior to the third error notification even when the third error is detected,
The first error notification is a notification that cannot determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

note that,
"The notification means, after the start of execution of the third error notification, provides an instruction notification indicating an instruction to the player [for example, an instruction display IS10 saying ``Please call a clerk'', or an instruction display IS10 saying ``Please call a clerk''. content instruction display IS10', an instruction notification sound such as "Please call a clerk"],
The notification means is means for executing the third error notification even during execution of the instruction notification [for example, FIG. 64(a)],
A playground characterized by: "
may be

again,
"The notification means, after starting the execution of the third error notification, provides an explanation notification explaining an error cancellation method [for example, the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 saying ``Please replenish medals and press the reset switch.'' , first same-content error cancellation explanation display RS10' saying ``Please add medals and press the reset switch. is a means of initiating execution,
The notification means is means for executing the third error notification even during execution of the explanation notification [for example, FIG. 64(b)],
A playground characterized by: "
may be

again,
"The notification means is means for alternately executing the instruction notification and the explanation notification [for example, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, and the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 65],
A playground characterized by: "
may be

again,
"The instruction information is an instruction to call a game store clerk [for example, an instruction display IS10 of ``Please call a clerk'', an instruction display IS10' of the same content as ``Please call a clerk'', ``Please call a clerk'' is an instruction notification sound such as
The explanation notification is a notification explaining the error cancellation operation to the sales clerk [for example, the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 saying ``Please replenish medals and press the reset switch'', ``Replenish medals and press the reset switch. 1st same-content error release explanation display RS10' saying "Please replenish medals and press reset switch", 1st error release explanation information sound by voice such as "Replenish medals and press reset switch", 1st error release explanation information sound "Please remove medals and press reset switch" 2 Error cancellation explanation display RS20, second error cancellation explanation display RS20' with the same content as "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch", second error cancellation explanation notification sound by voice such as "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" ] is
A playground characterized by: "
may be

again,
"The notification means is means including at least display means [e.g., first image display device 157, second image display device 158],
The first error notification is notification by a display that makes it impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error content error display ES10'],
The first error notification is notification by a display that makes it impossible to specify that the detected error is the third error content error display ES10'],
The notification by the first notification mode is notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door open error are displayed in squares. Display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by a thick frame, E1 in the error list display EL1' of the same content, and the character display of the door open error are surrounded by a thick square frame of the second error display of the same content. display ES21′ in the first display mode],
The notification by the second notification mode is notification by a display that can specify that the detected error is the second error [for example, the display ES22 of the second error display of the second error display of "door error" by the second display mode. , display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second error display with the same contents as “door error”],
The third error notification is a notification by means of a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the hopper empty error are A third error display ES30 surrounded by a square, a third error display ES30′ with the same content, and E2 in the same content error list display EL1′ and a character display of the hopper empty error surrounded by a thick square frame].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The notification means is means including at least one of sound generating means [e.g., speaker 180] and light emitting means [e.g., side lamp 144].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"a main body [e.g., main body 101];
a door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be able to be opened and closed;
with
The main body includes a payout device [for example, a medal discharge device] that pays out the stored game media,
the second error is an error in which the door section is opened [for example, a door open error];
The third error is an error [e.g., hopper empty error] in which the game media that have been stored are exhausted and the dispensing device is unable to dispense game media.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In the above description,
"first display means [e.g., first image display device 157];
a second display means [e.g., a second image display device 158];
A game machine comprising
When a second error [for example, a door open error] is detected, the second error display [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door open error are displayed in squares on the first display means Before the display of the second error display surrounded by a thick frame in the first display mode ES21] starts, an error display having the same content as the second error display (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as "same content error display") [for example, according to the first display mode of the second same content error display in which E1 in the same content error list display EL1' and the character display of the door open error are surrounded by a thick square frame display ES21'] starts [eg, FIG. 73(a-1)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

Conventionally, even if an error is notified by one display means, the player may not notice it, but according to this game machine, the error is generated by the player by announcing the error by different display means. You may be able to get noticed. In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred by making the notification start time different for each display means.

again,
"The display of the same content error display ends on the second display means before the display of the second error display ends on the first display means [eg, FIG. 73(b-1)] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"a main body [e.g., main body 101];
A door part [e.g., front door 102] attached to the main body so that it can be opened and closed,
The second display means is means provided on the door section,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The same content error display is displayed on the second display means even when the door portion is open, and the same content error display can be seen even from the lateral direction. Therefore, when an illegal person illegally opens the door, the staff of the amusement arcade or the surveillance camera may notice that the door has been illegally opened from a lateral viewpoint with respect to the game machine.

again,
"The first display means is means provided in the main body,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The second error display on the first display means is a display larger than the same error display on the second display means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the second error display by the display means (the first display means) whose notification start time is later is larger, it may be possible to make the player more aware of the occurrence of the error. .

again,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] displays the image generated in the first drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [for example, the VRAM 518]. means for displaying the second error display using
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] displays the image generated in the second drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [for example, the VRAM 518]. is a means for displaying the same content error display using
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

note that,
"The first display means [e.g., first image display device 157] is generated in a first drawing area [e.g., first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of VRAM [e.g., VRAM 518], Means for displaying an image of the second error display,
The second display means [e.g., second image display device 158] is generated in a second drawing area [e.g., first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [e.g., VRAM 518], A means for displaying an image of the same content error display,
A playground characterized by: "
may be, and furthermore,
"the image of the second error display generated in the first drawing area is an image generated by developing the first image data in the VRAM,
The image of the same content error display generated in the second drawing area is an image generated by developing the second image data in the VRAM,
wherein the second image data is image data having a data amount smaller than that of the first image data;
A playground characterized by: "
may be

Since the second image data has a smaller amount of data, the generation of the second image data in the second drawing area is completed earlier, and the second display means starts displaying the same content error display at an earlier timing. It will be.

again,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is means for displaying the second error display using an image generated in the common drawing area of the VRAM,
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is means for displaying the same content error display using the image generated in the common drawing area.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In the above description,
"A first display means [e.g., first image display device 157] having a first display screen [e.g., display screen 1571];
a second display means [e.g., second image display device 158] having a second display screen [e.g., display screen 1581];
A game machine comprising
The first display means displays a second error [for example, a second error display of "door error"] on the first display screen when a second error [for example, a door open error] is detected. display ES22 in the second display mode of],
The second display means, when the second error is detected, displays an error display having the same contents as the second error display (hereinafter referred to as "same error display") on the second display screen. ) [for example, display ES22′ in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content as “door error”],
The distance from the edge of the first display screen to the second error display displayed on the first display screen is the distance displayed on the second display screen from the edge of the second display screen. and the distance to the same content error display is different [for example, the magnitude relationship of the numbers indicated by the arrows in FIG. 61(a)]. 』
explained.

Conventionally, even if an error is notified by one display means, the player may not notice it, but according to this game machine, the error is generated by the player by announcing the error by different display means. You may be able to get noticed. Also, by varying the distance from the edge of the display screen to the second error display for each display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred.

note that,
"main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command;
Third display means [for example, payout number display 127] that displays an error display when a third error is detected;
with
The first display means is means controlled by the sub-control means,
The second display means is means controlled by the sub-control means,
The third display means is means controlled by the main control means,
A playground characterized by: "
may be

again,
"The third display means is a means for displaying an error display faster than the first display means and the second display means,
A playground characterized by: "
may be

again,
"The third display means is a means that does not display an error indication when the second error is detected.
A playground characterized by: "
may be

again,
"The first display screen [e.g., display screen 1571] is a rectangular display screen,
the second display screen [e.g., display screen 1581] is a rectangular display screen;
The horizontal length [for example, , "3" shown in FIG. 61(a)] ratio [for example, 3/6] to the horizontal length of the first display screen [for example, "25" shown in FIG. 61(a)] larger than the ratio [e.g., 10/25] of the horizontal length [e.g., "10" shown in FIG. 61(a)] of the second error display displayed on the first display screen;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By differentiating the display ratio of the error display in the horizontal direction between the two display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred.

again,
"The vertical length of the second error display displayed on the first display screen relative to the vertical length of the first display screen [eg, "14" shown in FIG. 61(a)]" The ratio [for example, 3/14] of [for example, "3" shown in FIG. 61(a)] corresponds to the vertical length of the second display screen [for example, "11" shown in FIG. ] to the vertical length of the same content error display displayed on the second display screen [for example, “0.9” shown in FIG. greater than
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred by making the display ratio of the error display in the vertical direction different between the two display means.

again,
"The first display screen has a horizontal length [eg, '25' shown in FIG. 61(a)] greater than a vertical length [eg, '14' shown in FIG. is a long display screen,
The second display screen has a vertical length [eg, "11" shown in FIG. 61(a)] longer than a horizontal length [eg, "6" shown in FIG. 61(a)]. is the display screen,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

To make it easier for a player to notice that an error has occurred by using a horizontally elongated first display screen and a vertically elongated second display screen so that error displays displayed on the respective display screens have different appearances. may be possible.

again,
"When the second error is detected, the second error display on the first display screen [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door open error are enclosed in a thick square frame. However, before the display of the second error display in the first display mode of the second error display ES21] starts, the error display with the same content [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1′ with the same content and the door opening Display ES21′ in the first display mode of the second error display with the same contents, in which the character display of the error is surrounded by a thick rectangular frame] starts to be displayed [for example, FIG. 73 (a-1)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Before the display of the second error display ends on the first display screen, the display of the same content error display ends on the second display screen [eg, FIG. 73 (b-1)] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"a main body [e.g., main body 101];
a door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be able to be opened and closed;
with
The second display means [e.g., second image display device 158] is means provided in the door section.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first display means [e.g., the first image display device 157] is means provided in the main body,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The second error display on the first display screen is a display larger than the same error display on the second display screen,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] displays the image generated in the first drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [for example, the VRAM 518]. means for displaying the second error display using
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] displays the image generated in the second drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [for example, the VRAM 518]. is a means for displaying the same content error display using
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

note that,
"The first display means [e.g., first image display device 157] is generated in a first drawing area [e.g., first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of VRAM [e.g., VRAM 518], Means for displaying an image of the second error display,
The second display means [e.g., second image display device 158] is generated in a second drawing area [e.g., first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [e.g., VRAM 518], A means for displaying an image of the same content error display,
A playground characterized by: "
may be, and furthermore,
"the image of the second error display generated in the first drawing area is an image generated by developing the first image data in the VRAM,
The image of the same content error display generated in the second drawing area is an image generated by developing the second image data in the VRAM,
wherein the second image data is image data having a data amount smaller than that of the first image data;
A playground characterized by: "
may be

Since the second image data has a smaller amount of data, the generation of the second image data in the second drawing area is completed earlier, and the second display means starts displaying the same content error display at an earlier timing. It will be.

again,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is means for displaying the second error display using an image generated in the common drawing area of the VRAM,
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is means for displaying the same content error display using the image generated in the common drawing area.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The prefixes for identification such as "first . For example, "the third ..." may be replaced with the "fourth ...".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are only the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. isn't it. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

74 to 90, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 74 to 90 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 74 to 90 in principle. In the description using FIG. 90, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 74 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 75, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol. is the middle reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the drawing) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively. 112, three in each vertical direction, nine in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 77) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. The symbol position on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The effective line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 82, is displayed. When the pattern corresponding to stops, it is determined as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 75 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine. Note that, among the lines shown in FIG. 75, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the lines becomes effective, and when 3 medals are betted, the line L4 becomes effective. (to be used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in a special game state, which will be described later. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141 . A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirm button. Sometimes.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 76) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 76) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). . Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 76 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below, a reel unit 700 with three reels 110-112 is arranged. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement shop, etc.) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out the medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264. Above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, there is a power supply having a power supply board. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power device 252 . The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 is a perspective view showing the structure of the reel unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. A connector 703 for connecting to a power source, the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is provided on the top of the reel case 702 . Also, the reel case 702 accommodates three reels 110 to 112 . These reels 110-112 are attached to a motor 720 for rotationally driving the reels 110-112. This motor 720, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational positions of the reels 110 to 112, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back surface to the front surface of the belt-shaped members 710 of the reels 110 to 112 are attached. It is attached to base 732 .

78(a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 78(b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 detachably attached to the back of the reflector 742 . The reflector 742 has three vertically arranged openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front side to the back side. Also, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (the positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 2) which are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, when irradiating light, it is configured not to interfere with light irradiated to other positions. As a result, light can be applied to each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate a part of the symbols visible to the player from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 76 will be described in detail. FIG. 79 shows the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG.

FIG. 79(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. FIG. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 79(a) has 16 contacts, a rotatable circular rotary portion 190a, and a circular rotary portion 190a protruding outward from the rotary portion 190a. and an instruction unit 190b. Also, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number out of 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (set values) representing settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to externally output the numerical information indicated by the instruction section 190b as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When "B" is indicated, the value of hexadecimal "B" is selected, and the information of the value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, receives this detection signal and selects the numerical value (one of the numerical values from 0 to F in hexadecimal) selected by the first selection switch 190. In the first sub-control section 400, the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b is treated as the selected setting value.

Instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 79(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 79(b) may be applied, or a slide switch 191 as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may be applied.

A rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 79(b) has 16 contacts, a rotatable ring-shaped rotating portion 191a, and a cutout window 191b formed in the rotating portion 191a. . Also, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

The rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value that can be seen through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output the information of the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the numerical value seen from the notch 191b is "F", it means that the numerical value of hexadecimal F is selected, and the information of the numerical value is expressed as a 4-bit binary code. can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, selects a numerical value seen from the notch 191b of the rotary switch 191 (hex 0 to Any of the numerical values of F) can be detected.

A slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 79(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. Also, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are given corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

With this slide switch 192, the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is positioned is selected, and information on the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 79(c), when the slide portion 192b is positioned at the position of the numerical value "0", the numerical value of hexadecimal 0 is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into a binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, receives this detection signal and selects the position of the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 (0 to F in hexadecimal). Either) can be detected.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. , the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained even when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off. In addition, since a number (display means) for confirming the selected numerical value is provided, it is easy to confirm the set value, which is highly convenient.

FIG. 79(d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. FIG. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 79(d) comprises the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 functioning as a confirm button shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 79(a) is an operating means provided at a position where the player cannot operate, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operation means provided at a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 is operated. Therefore, first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, receives this detection signal to detect which of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 has been operated. It has a configuration that allows

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 79(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195 , and this cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194 . Alternatively, two types of operating means may be provided, one of which may also serve as a chance button, or only one of which may be the second selection switch 194 .

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a non-energized state and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide storage means for storing the set values. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, but it may be backed up.

FIG. 79(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. Left button 167 and right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 79(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166 .

In addition, under the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, or one of the chance buttons is used for repeated hit effects, etc., and the other chance button is used as a hidden button. may Here, a hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, or the built-in effect lamp does not light up). at least one or both), but when the operation means is operated, some kind of production is performed.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194. As shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 are the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position where the player cannot operate it, and serves as a switch used by the store clerk to select a set value. Only the first selection switch 190 out of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the power saving mode is set only while the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration effect is a effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the power saving mode is set when the demonstration effect is started in a state where setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is reproduced in a dark state, thereby suppressing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . In addition, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157 .

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays either the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from among seven volume levels. Also, in the non-power saving mode, mute can be selected.

FIG. 80(A) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. The first sound volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first sound volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80A displays that the selection value of the seven-stage sound volume level is 0 (0/7) and the characters "mute". In addition, none of the 7 levels of horizontal level display are illuminated. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 are completely inaudible.

FIG. 80(B) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(B) displays characters “volume 1/7” indicating that the selection value of the seven-level volume level is 1. In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first step level is illuminated in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 80(C) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(C) displays characters “volume 7/7” indicating that the selected value of the seven-stage volume level is 7. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh-stage volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 80(D) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(D) displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). In place of the exhibition volume, a special volume that cannot be selected with the second selection switch 194 but can be selected only with the first selection switch 190 may be selected. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 80(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 79(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 80(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays characters indicating power saving mode, selection values of seven levels of volume levels, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). In the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 80(a), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven-stage volume level is 7 are displayed. there is In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are illuminated in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 80(b) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 79(a).

In the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 80(b), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1 are displayed. there is In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the first step level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. A power saving mode is selected to be set. Note that even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode. be a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to any one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. When setting to the non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is not set even in the demonstration state. Also, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 80(B) is the same as the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. The volume output with the selection value and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 80(a) are also the same.

FIG. 80(a) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the player operates the second selection switch 194 while the effect image display device 157 displays the first guide display icon GI1, which will be described later, the effect image display device 157 displays the third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 80(a), characters "volume 1/5" indicating that the selection value of the volume level in five stages is 1 are displayed. Also, in the five-stage level display, only the lowest level, the first stage, is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 80(a), the level does not drop any further. That is, it is not possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194 . It should be noted that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194 .

FIG. 80(a) shows a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 80(a).

On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 80(a), characters of "volume 5/5" indicating that the selection value of the five-step volume level is 5 are displayed. In addition, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels from the first step to the fifth step are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined time.

Seven levels of volume are selected by operating the first selection switch 190, while five levels of volume are selected by operating the second selection switch 194. FIG. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values in the seven steps are 18 for the first step, 36 for the second step, 54 for the third step, and 4 steps. The number is 73, the 5th row is 91, the 6th row is 109, and the 7th row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the 2nd to 6th stages are left except for the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage. That is, the 2nd step (36) of 7 steps is the 1st step of 5 steps, and the 6th step (109) of 7 steps is the 5th step of 5 steps. Therefore, only the store clerk of the amusement arcade can select the setting value (18) in the 7th stage and the setting value (127) in the 7th stage. In addition, the 1st stage (18) of 7 stages may be the 1st stage of 5 stages, the 5th stage (91) of 7 stages may be the 5th stage of 5 stages, or the 3rd stage of 7 stages (54 ) may be the first stage of the five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of the seven stages may be the fifth stage of the five stages. Alternatively, the set values in the five stages may be 26 in the first stage, 51 in the second stage, 76 in the third stage, 102 in the fourth stage, and 127 in the fifth stage.

With the effect image display device 157 displaying the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and a first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the volume level selection value is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, when the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. The display shows that the volume selection value is the fourth level. These displays are displayed regardless of what selection value the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 displays. That is, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once causes the selected value to be displayed as 2/5. Also, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value is displayed as 4/5. This is because when the third volume selection icon SI3 is switched to, the selected values up to that point are discarded, and the volume level value of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is selected again, and the left button is pressed. By operating 167 or right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by changing the initial value by operating the second selection switch 194 is changed to the first value. 3 Displayed by volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the intention of the player can be prioritized. Conversely, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selected value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is selected. By operating the switch 190, a value obtained by changing the previously selected value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (eg, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without taking over the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 , the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 339 (effective line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 162 lamp, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . The switch sensor 427 also detects pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166 , the left button 167 and the right button 168 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-controller 400 transmits to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-controller 500 a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-controller 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives control signals without going through the second sub-controller 500 .

FIG. 82 shows a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect.

A predetermined time period during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed continuously during the game or after the game ends. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the animation is switched to display the demonstration animation. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the demonstration animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, an opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen of the effect image display device 157 turns white once, and then the corporate logo gradually begins to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. 82(a), The company logo appears in full. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the characters appear begins. First, an animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character, Lord appears, is displayed as shown in FIG. 82(b). Also, when an animation in which a character appears is started, a first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. FIG. This first guide display icon GI1 is an icon that is displayed only during the demonstration effect. That is, it is displayed only in the animation in which the character in the demo animation appears. However, non-demonstration animations may also be displayed. The display of the second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guidance display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the letters "volume adjustment" are also displayed in black. It is suggested that the output sound from 272 and the output sound from the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted in volume. As described with reference to FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b), when the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. When the right button 168 is pressed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and the volume level of the five steps is increased by one step. In addition, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the characters "game information" are also displayed in white, suggesting that the game information will be displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 83(a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed.

The game information displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed is a payout table. The payout table shown in FIG. 83(a) indicates that 8 medals are paid out when the symbol combination of Bell-Bell-Bell is aligned on the activated line described with reference to FIG. - It is shown that three medals are paid out when the combination of watermelon symbols is complete. It also shows that two medals are paid out if the cherry symbol stops at the middle symbol. This payout table consists of a plurality of pages, and the payout table shown in FIG. 83(a) is the first page. The first guide display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen is replaced with the second guide display icon GI2. In the second guidance display icon GI2, black characters of "move page" are displayed in contrast to the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168, which are displayed in black, and the left button 167 and the right button 168 are operated. It is suggested that you can change the paytable page by doing. When the left button 167 is pressed once while the second guide display icon GI2 is displayed, the payout table page is returned by one page, and when the right button 168 is pressed once, the payout table page is advanced by one page. In addition, the characters "END" are displayed in white against the display 166p of the second chance button 166 displayed in white, and the display of the payout table can be terminated by operating the second chance button 166. is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the non-demonstration animation starts to be displayed. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration effect ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demonstration animation is started.

The first guidance display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the payout table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord appears, shown in FIG. 82(b), the animation in which the princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) shown in FIG. 82(c) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Further, in the demo animation, following the animation in which the princess appears, an animation in which an old man appears (demonstration animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 82(d) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. At the end of the demonstration animation, an ending animation (demonstration animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, a warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 82(e), and the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demonstration animations ends, and if the demonstration production continues, the above-mentioned opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) returns, the entire screen turns white again, and after that, a series of animations Demonstration animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing, step by step, the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while a non-demonstration animation is being displayed.

In FIG. 84(a), the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the head seat and the old man is reading a letter. This animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 continuously during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game ends. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation".) In addition, in this non-demonstration animation, the lord's eyes and fan move, and the hands of the old man move.In addition, this non-demonstration animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer on which the non-demonstration animation is displayed in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. Shown are button 165, second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112. In the first chance button 165 shown in a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 79) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. The three reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 84(a) are illuminated white.

The lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be illuminated in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be extinguished. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, among the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 79), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

In the state shown in FIG. 84(a), the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. 79(a). The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

In the example shown in FIG. 84 , in order to operate the first selection switch 190 , the store clerk inserts the key into the key hole 140 and turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock and open the front door 102 . Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the opening sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, and the upper speaker 272 outputs a message indicating that the door is open. An error annunciation sound is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door being opened". The output of the error notification sound for the door opening error and the display of the error display are continued until the front door 102 is closed. Not a few players think that the error notification sound is too loud for other players to hear. Therefore, there is a case where the store clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening/closing piece does not protrude, the opening sensor does not detect the opening of the front door 102, and the door opening error is not notified. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, switch operation (1) is performed by the store clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 79(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed.

FIG. 85 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 85, time elapses from left to right in the figure, timing of (c) in FIG. 85 coincides with timing of FIG. 84 (c), and timing of (d) in FIG. 84(d), and the timing of (e) in FIG. 85 matches the timing of FIG. 84(e). FIG. 85 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp and the second chance lamp built in the first chance button 165. The lighting modes of various lighting means such as the second effect lamp built into the button 166, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown. .

At the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 85, the effect image display device 157 displays the non-demonstration animation with normal brightness, and also displays the first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "volume 7/7". is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above-described various light-emitting means are lit in white.

Next, switch operation (2) is performed by the clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 84(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Even at the timing of (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 85, the effect image display device 157 displays a non-demonstration animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "exhibition volume". It is shown.

Subsequently, switch operation (3) is performed by the clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 79(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state. FIG. 84(d) shows the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 85, the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 84(d) is as shown in FIG. The time from switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 84(c) is shorter than the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. ) is the same length as the time until the state shown in FIG.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 84(c) has the same second volume selection icon SI2 as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 80(a). are displayed in an overlapping manner, and in the subsequent effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. This change of icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG.

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 84(e) displays the characters "power saving mode". This display indicates that the power saving mode setting has been selected, and the power saving It does not indicate that the mode has been set. The non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(e), and the non-demonstration state remains. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing charts of FIG. 84(e) and FIG. 144R, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 79) of each reel 110-112 remain lit white. In addition, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. Furthermore, the non-demonstration animation is played in a bright state without being darkened.

FIG. 86 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

In FIG. 86(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started to display the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 82(a). That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(a), after the entire display screen turns white once, the company logo that gradually starts to appear from the back is displayed in a completely appearing state. Also, the demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark. 86, similarly to FIG. 84, a first chance button 165, a second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. In addition, the first effect lamp incorporated in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 86(a) is lit in white, and the second effect lamp incorporated in the second chance button 166 is also lit in white. . Also, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 86(a) are lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 79) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 86(a) are illuminated in white. .

Also in the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be illuminated in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be extinguished. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, only the left side lamp 144L of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 79) may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may flash white, and the right side lamp 144R may light red.

86(a), the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 86 as well as the example shown in FIG. 84, the amusement store clerk presses the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. to operate. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example, as in the example shown in FIG. 84, the store clerk performs the switch operation (1) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 79(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(b) displays the animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character appears, which was described with reference to FIG. 82(b). The display of the display icon GI1 has started. This first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but on the contrary, the first volume selection icon SI1 overlaps part of the first guidance display icon GI1. May be displayed overlapping.

Next, switch operation (2) is performed by the clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. In addition, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(c) displays the animation (demonstration animation 3/5) in which the princess appears, which has been described with reference to FIG. 82(c). The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the volume for the exhibition, which started to be displayed after the first guidance display icon GI1, overlaps the first guidance display icon GI1.

Subsequently, switch operation (3) is performed by the clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 79(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state.

FIG. 87 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In this FIG. 87 as well, time elapses from left to right in the figure, as in FIG. Also, the timing of (c) in FIG. 87 matches the timing of FIG. 86(c), and the subsequent timings of (d) to (h) match the timings of FIGS. 86(d) to (h). I am doing it. Further, FIG. 87 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157, and the first effect lamp incorporated in the first chance button 165, the second effect lamp incorporated in the second chance button 166, the left side Light emission modes of various light emitting means such as the lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown.

Also on the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 87, the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which a princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) in a bright state, and the first animation in which the characters "exhibition volume" are displayed. A state in which the volume selection icon SI1 and the first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above-described various light-emitting means are lit in white.

FIG. 86(d) shows the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed, and the state shown stepwise after (d) in FIG. It becomes the one shown at a shorter time interval than the one shown.

When the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration effect is being executed, that is, the demonstration animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 86(d), the power saving mode has already been set, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light-emitting means that have lit in white until now, the light-emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 are turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 86(c) has the same second volume selection as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. The icon SI2 is displayed overlapping.

Furthermore, when the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. That is, as described above, if the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the power saving mode is set. is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 84, even if the user selects to set the power saving mode while the demonstration animation is not displayed, the power saving mode is not set and the demonstration animation is displayed. It doesn't even start from the beginning. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 87, at the timing of FIG. 86(d), while the demonstration animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is reproduced. is also started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. Also, the display of the demo animation 3/5 has ended, and the company logo has begun to appear faintly on the display screen that has become entirely white due to the start of the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). Also, the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(f), the company logo appears quite clearly, but since the second volume selection icon SI2 overlaps, the company logo is It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Also, at the timing of FIG. 86(f), the display of the power saving mode setting display AI for notifying that the power saving mode is set to "power saving mode being set" at the bottom of the display screen is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 86(g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to darken, it becomes more difficult to see than before it starts to darken, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 does not change, and the power saving mode setting AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the power saving mode setting display AI and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 86(h), the first guidance display icon GI1 that disappeared once is displayed again. The re-displayed first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed in the foremost layer, and overlaps part of the second volume selection icon SI2 and also overlaps the power saving mode setting display AI. The first guidance display icon GI1 also has the same visibility as the first guidance display icon GI1 in FIG. 86(b), and the first guidance display icon GI1 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the first guidance display icon GI1 does not change either.

Note that the power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed in the foremost layer and partially overlap the first guidance display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed in the foremost layer, partially overlapping the first guidance display icon GI1, and partially overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demonstration animation starts to darken to when it completely darkens on the effect image display device 157 (Fig. 86(g) to Fig. 86(h)) is determined by the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left The time for which the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are extinguished at the timing of FIG. 86(d) is longer. When the demonstration animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the effect image display device 157 is malfunctioning or be surprised. may be noticed by the player.

It should be noted that even if the store clerk performs a switch operation to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. Display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

When the second chance button 166 lit in white is pressed in accordance with the first guidance display icon GI1 in the state where the power saving mode is set, the display returns to the non-power saving mode, the display of the demonstration animation ends, and the display of the demonstration animation ends. A payout table shown in 83(a) is displayed. Also, when the left button 167 or the right button 168 is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1, the non-power saving mode is restored and the demonstration animation is switched to the non-demonstration animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the old man shown in FIG. 84). ), and the third volume selection icon SI3 described with reference to FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b) is displayed.

Also, if the unlit first chance button 165 is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, switching from the demonstration animation to the non-demonstration animation (for example, the lord shown in FIG. 84). Toji's animation), and a certain production may be started.

FIG. 83(b) shows a display screen displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 86(h).

In the state shown in FIG. 86(h), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 displays the first guidance display icon GI1. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display related to the first chance button 165. FIG. Also, since the power saving mode is being executed, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is there no prompt to press the first chance button 165, but there is no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165 either. In spite of this, when the first chance button 165 is operated, a setting suggestion display for the slot machine 100 is displayed as the certain effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. The player usually cannot know this setting value, but there are cases where a setting suggestion display is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(b). If only the Lord's character is displayed, it suggests an odd (settings 1, 3, 5) setting. If only the old man character is displayed, it suggests an even (settings 2, 4, 6) setting. If only the princess character is displayed, it suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, it suggests setting 5 or setting 6. When such setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIGS. 86(d) to 86(g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the effect image display device 157 does not display the setting suggestion display. can be Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the pressing timing.

FIG. 88 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demonstration animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The example shown in FIG. 88 is an example in which the door opening error is being notified. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 86 in which the error notification of the door open error is stopped will be mainly described.

In the example shown in FIG. 88, the store clerk opens the front door 102 before the demonstration animation starts. At this time, the store clerk opened the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece protruding when the front door 102 is opened, so that the error notification of the door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by a character display such as "Door being opened", and the upper speaker 272 not shown in FIG. is repeatedly output.

In FIG. 88(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, there is displayed an error display EI1 indicating a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door opening". This error display EI1 is displayed on the foremost layer and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

In addition, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 88(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is lit in white. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 79) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 88(a) are illuminated in white. .

The store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with characters "/7" is displayed. Also, at the lower left, the display of the first guide display icon GI1 has started.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "Exhibition volume" is displayed. A first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left.

Subsequently, the clerk performs switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 88(d), the power saving mode has already been set, but only the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is still lit in white. The off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

Also, the display of the demonstration animation is started from the beginning, and while the demonstration animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is also started to be reproduced. Furthermore, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 88(d), the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed so as to overlap the first volume selection icon SI1. Even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. Since the rest is the same as the example shown in FIG. 86, except for the mode of various light emitting means and the point that the error display EI1 is continuously displayed, the description will be omitted.

In this example as well, during the display of the demonstration animation in the power saving mode, the clerk operated the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to switch from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a). Also in this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing, step by step, the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error is still occurring.

Inside the slot machine 100, a motor-driven medal ejection device 180 (see FIG. 76) is provided. The hopper empty error is reported when the motor is not turned on even when the motor is turned on, and the recovery process for rotating the motor in the reverse direction cannot be recovered. If the hopper is empty error, open the front door 102 to replenish the bucket with tokens, press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted into the keyhole 140 to the left. The error is cleared by turning to .

FIG. 89(a) is a diagram showing a state in which an empty hopper error has occurred. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 89(a), the error notification is displayed in the background display of the error notification (background display with oblique hatching). That is, an error display EI2 such as "error occurred" that cannot identify the error that has occurred, and an error display EI3 that explains how to cancel the hopper empty error such as "replenish medals and press the reset switch". is displayed. It should be noted that an error display indicating an instruction to the player, such as "please call a clerk", may also be provided.

In addition, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 89(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 79) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 89(a) are illuminated in white. .

The amusement store clerk opens the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece, and performs switch operation (1) to set the indicating portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 79(a). Since the effect image display device 157 displays an error display EI2 such as "Error Occurred", this error display EI2 also serves as an error notification of the door opening error, and characters such as "Door opening" shown in FIG. The error display EI of the door opening error by display is not displayed. In addition, an error notification sound for a door opening error such as "the door is open" is not output. It is also possible to output an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player, such as "Please replenish medals." Alternatively, an error display EI for a door opening error may be displayed, or an error notification sound for a door opening error may be output.

When the store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying characters "7/7" is displayed overlapping an error display EI2 such as "error occurred". The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed in the foremost layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call a clerk" is also displayed, this error display is displayed. are also displayed overlapping each other. Alternatively, an error display EI3 explaining how to remove the hopper empty error may be displayed in the foremost layer.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first sound volume selection icon SI1 is displayed, which displays the characters "Meeting sound volume".

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190 to select the setting of the power saving mode, and the volume level is set to the seventh stage volume level. However, since the state shown in FIG. 89(d) is not a state in which the demonstration effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set and the display of the demonstration animation is not started from the beginning. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 89(d), instead of the first volume selection icon SI1, a second volume selection icon SI2 displaying the characters "power saving mode" displays an error such as "error occurrence". It is displayed overlapping the display EI2.

Also, in FIG. 89(d), there is no change in the mode of various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains off.

In the above explanation, the power saving mode is not set unless the demonstration effect is being executed. However, the power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is reproduced in a dark state to save power, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown at 79, power saving may also be performed in other devices. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may not be moved, or the movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be lowered, not limited to animation reproduction. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 may be extinguished. Furthermore, instead of completely extinguishing the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, the luminance (light amount) is lowered. Even in the dimmed state, it leads to power saving.

Furthermore, the timing for starting power saving depends on the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (the timing of FIG. 86(d)) and the effect image display device 157 (the timing of FIG. 86 ( Although the timing of g) is different from the timing of g), power saving is started first with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, and then the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157 are started. You may make it start power saving. In addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device having a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and the effect image display device 157 starts power saving later. You may do so. In addition, the combination of the light emitting means and the sound output means, the combination of the effect movable body and the display means, the combination of the light emitting means and the effect movable body, the combination of the effect movable body and the sound output means, the combination of the display means and the sound output means, etc. The timing of starting power saving may be varied.

In addition, although the brightness (light amount) of various lamps cannot be selected by operating the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of each lamp can also be selected by the first selection switch 190 in the same way as the sound volume level. You may enable it to select by operation.

In addition, although the slot machine 100 has been described as an example in the description so far, the selection of the volume level by operating the first selection switch 190 described above and the selection of setting to the power saving mode are It can also be applied to machines.

FIG. 90 is a back view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the back side.

The pachinko machine 100P has a ball tank 150P, which has an upwardly opening opening at the upper part of the rear surface, for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have flowed down into the payout device 152P through the tank rail 154P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit. A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. A ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the drawing, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P that constitutes a first sub-controller that performs a second sub-board case 165P housing a second sub-board 164P; a payout board 170P comprising a payout control section for performing control processing relating to payout of game balls; , a launch board case 176P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control section that performs control processing related to launching game balls, and a power supply control section that supplies power to various electric game machines. A power supply board case 184P that houses a power supply board 182P that includes a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface section 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section and the card unit.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch that can perform RWM clear (initialization of RAM) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating. It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 180P, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on while being operated, gives a predetermined notification (for example, a character display or sound saying "Please press again to clear the RAM", or a character display). and sound), and if the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

A first selection switch 190P, which is the same as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 79(a), is arranged on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P. Since this first selection switch 190P is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a store clerk, etc.) However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front frame door cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is arranged on the lower left side of the rear surface, and the first selection switch 190P is arranged on the upper left side of the rear surface. It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened), or vice versa.

According to the above description,
"A first device [for example, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740];
a second device [for example, effect image display device 157];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b is set to either “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [eg, extinguished state or dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device enters a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state. ],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, after the first device transitions to the first state [for example, FIG. 86(d)], the second device It may shift to the second state [for example, FIG. 86 (g) to (h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be easier to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, due to the time lag, it may be possible to check the first state of the first device and then check the second state of the second device.

again,
"Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operating means, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state." ,
The second device does not shift to the second state unless the state is the certain state [for example, the demo state] even if the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. 79(a). ~ When matched to any of "8"],
the first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"the number of first devices [e.g., six] is greater than the number of second devices [e.g., one];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first device, which has a large number, and reduce power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first device in the first state is less than the power consumption of the second device in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first device is higher than that of the second device.

Power consumption in the first device during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the second device during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting the first device, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] for controlling the first device;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said second device;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
the second device receives the first signal via the second control means;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. longer than the time it takes for the device to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 86(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first device is a first rendering means [e.g., first light emitting means, first display means],
The second device is a second effect means [e.g., second light emitting means, second display means],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second effect means shifts to the second state after the first effect means shifts to the first state. may,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 90],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

note that,
"A game machine comprising a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first effect setting, wherein the operation means is operated to set the first effect setting is set, the first notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting, and thereafter the second notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting. A playground characterized by
also explained.

again,
"The operation means is a means that can set a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is suppressed more than the second effect setting. A game machine characterized by:
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the number of said first notification means is greater than the number of said second notification means."
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the power consumption of said first notification means during notification of a certain notification is greater than the power consumption of said second notification means during notification of said certain notification."
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that said operating means are means that cannot be operated by a player."
also explained.

again,
" A first control means and a second control means are provided, and the first notification means transmits a signal regarding the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. and the second notification means receives a signal related to the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. Characteristic game table." was also explained.

again,
"The time taken from the notification mode not corresponding to the first effect setting to the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A playground characterized by a long."
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
selection operation means [for example, first selection switch 190] capable of selecting a first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] according to an operation;
A game machine comprising
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the instruction unit 190b is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. ], the display means may start displaying the first animation [for example, demo animation] from the beginning [for example, FIG. 86(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in Fig. 86] and the first setting is selected, the display means displays the first animation." is to restart the display of the animation from the beginning [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first animation may be a demonstration animation. The demo animation is an animation that is started to be displayed on the display means after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In other words, the demo animation is started when the player does not perform any operation while the second animation (non-demonstration animation) is being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). It is an anime that will be played.

again,
``The display means operates when the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 84] while the second animation [for example, the non-demo animation shown in FIG. Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation is not started from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 85],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 84] and the first setting is selected during display of the second animation, the display means It continues the display of animation [for example, FIG. 84 (d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, demo state).

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected during the display of the first animation, the display means displays the first animation that has started to be displayed from the beginning. display in a display mode corresponding to the setting [for example, a darkened display mode] [for example, FIG. 86 (g) to (h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Producing means [for example, the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740],
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the effect means shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state]. may migrate,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to the second state after the effect means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 86(d)]. state [for example, (g) to (h) in FIG. 86],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the effect means may be a light emitting means. Also, the first state may refer to a state in which the effect means executes the effect corresponding to the first setting. Also, the second state refers to a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the rendering means is not in a state where the first animation is displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. does not transition to
Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operation means, the display means is in the second state unless the first animation is being displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. which does not migrate,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. 79(a). ~ When matched to any of "8"],
wherein the effect means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of the production means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the production means having a large number, thereby suppressing the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the rendering means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect is higher with the presentation means than with the first display means.

Power consumption of the effect means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption of the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting to the first state for the presentation means that consumes a large amount of power.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400 ] that controls the effect means,
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The effect means receives the first signal from the first control means without passing through the second control means,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means receives the first signal via the second control means. 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
``The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIG. longer than the time required to transition from a state different from one state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 86(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 90],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"first light emitting means [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740];
a second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b is set to either “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising
When the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. is [for example, FIG. 86(d)],
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. [e.g., remains lit white in FIG. 86(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be recognized by simultaneously recognizing that the state corresponding to the first setting will be changed and that the state will not be changed. It may become easier.

again,
"First operation means [eg, first chance button 165],
a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166];
with
The first operating means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp],
The second operating means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp],
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power-saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b can be set to "0" to "0" shown in FIG. When combined with any of "8"],
The first setting is a setting that suppresses the power consumption of the first light emitting means more than the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the first light emitting means. Also, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the second light emitting means. Further, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not transition to a state corresponding to this setting is operated even if the first setting is set. The player can be made to recognize that it is possible. Moreover, as a result, the load on the first operating means can be reduced.

again,
"Equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
The display means can display a second display [eg, first guide display icon GI1] related to the second operation means in a state where the first setting is set [eg, the (b) to (d) and (h) in the same figure],
When the second display is displayed on the display means in a state where the first setting is set, and the second operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, The payout table shown in FIG. 83(a)] is displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second display may be an operation-promoting display that prompts the operation of the second operating means, or may be an operation-promoting display that suggests the operation of the second operating means. , the second operation means may be displayed. For example, the first guidance display icon GI1 corresponds to this second display.

again,
"When the second display is displayed on the display means in a state where the first setting is set, and the first operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, , setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 83(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Note that the state in which the first setting is set may be a demonstration state. That is, the power saving setting is set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demonstration state (normal state) shifted from the demonstration state. That is, when the first operation means is operated, the demo state is changed to the non-demonstration state (normal state), and even if the first operation means is operated instead of the second operation means, The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means and the game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display to the operation of the first operation means performed while the second display is displayed may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. There may be.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is set [for example, whether or not the second display is displayed], the display means In response to the operation [for example, the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 83(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Here, the second display may or may not be displayed on the display means. The response display to the operation of the first operation means performed with the second display hidden may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. good too.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated while the first setting is set, the response display to the operation may not be displayed on the display means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as "first state") [for example, 86(d)], the state in which the display means corresponds to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, demo A state in which animation is played back in a dark state] [for example, FIG. 86(g) to FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light-emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demonstration state]. is non-migratory and
The display means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting unless the certain state [for example, demonstration state] is selected even if the first setting is selected by operating the operation means for selection. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
"The power consumption of the first light emitting means is reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting, and
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of said first light emitting means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of said display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first light emitting means, which are numerous in number, and to suppress the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first light emitting means in the first state is less than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first light emitting means is higher than that of the display means.

Power consumption in the first light emitting means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be suppressed by preferentially shifting the first light emitting means, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] that controls the first light emitting means;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means receives the first signal via the second control means. 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
``The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIG. is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 86(d)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 90],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The prefixes for identification such as "first . For example, "second .." may be replaced with "first ..".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are only the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. isn't it. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

91 to 116, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 91 to 116 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 91 to 116 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 116, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 91 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 92, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol. is the middle reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the drawing) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively. 112, three in each vertical direction, nine in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 94) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. The symbol position on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The effective line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 99, is displayed. When the pattern corresponding to stops, it is determined as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 92 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine. Note that, of the lines shown in FIG. 92, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the lines becomes effective, and when 3 medals are betted, the line L4 becomes effective. (to be used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in a special game state, which will be described later. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141 . A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirm button. Sometimes.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 93) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 93) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). . Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 93 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below, a reel unit 700 with three reels 110-112 is arranged. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement shop, etc.) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out the medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264. Above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, there is a power supply having a power supply board. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power device 252 . The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

Next, the structure of reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 94 is a perspective view showing the structure of the reel unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. A connector 703 for connecting to a power source, the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is provided on the top of the reel case 702 . Also, the reel case 702 accommodates three reels 110 to 112 . These reels 110-112 are attached to a motor 720 for rotationally driving the reels 110-112. This motor 720, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational positions of the reels 110 to 112, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back surface to the front surface of the belt-shaped members 710 of the reels 110 to 112 are attached. It is attached to base 732 .

95(a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 95(b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 detachably attached to the back of the reflector 742 . The reflector 742 has three vertically arranged openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front side to the back side. Also, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (the positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 2) which are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, when irradiating light, it is configured not to interfere with light irradiated to other positions. As a result, light can be applied to each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate a part of the symbols visible to the player from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 93 will be described in detail. FIG. 96 shows the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG.

FIG. 96(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. FIG. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 96(a) has 16 contacts, a rotatable circular rotating portion 190a, and a circular rotating portion 190a protruding outward from the rotating portion 190a. and an indicator 190b. Also, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number out of 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (set values) representing settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to externally output the numerical information indicated by the instruction section 190b as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When "B" is indicated, the value of hexadecimal "B" is selected, and the information of the value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, receives this detection signal and selects the numerical value (one of the numerical values from 0 to F in hexadecimal) selected by the first selection switch 190. In the first sub-control section 400, the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b is treated as the selected setting value.

Instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 96(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 96(b) may be applied, or a slide switch 191 as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may be applied.

A rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 96(b) has 16 contacts, a rotatable ring-shaped rotating portion 191a, and a cutout window 191b formed in the rotating portion 191a. . Also, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

The rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value that can be seen through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output the information of the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 96(b), when the numerical value seen from the cutout portion 191b is "F", the numerical value of hexadecimal F is selected, and the information of the numerical value is expressed as a 4-bit binary code. can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, selects a numerical value seen from the notch 191b of the rotary switch 191 (hex 0 to Any of the numerical values of F) can be detected.

A slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 96(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. Also, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are given corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

With this slide switch 192, the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is positioned is selected, and information on the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 96(c), when the slide portion 192b is positioned at the position of the numerical value "0", the numerical value of hexadecimal 0 is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into a binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, selects the position of the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 (0 to F in hexadecimal). Either) can be detected.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 96(a) to 96(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. , the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained even when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off. In addition, since a number (display means) for confirming the selected numerical value is provided, it is easy to confirm the set value, which is highly convenient.

FIG. 96(d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. FIG. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 96(d) is composed of the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 functioning as the confirmation button shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 96(a) is an operating means provided at a position where the player cannot operate, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided at a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected set value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 is operated. Therefore, first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, receives this detection signal to detect which of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 has been operated. It has a configuration that allows

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 96(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195 , and this cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194 . Alternatively, two types of operating means may be provided, one of which may also serve as a chance button, or only one of which may be the second selection switch 194 .

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a non-energized state and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide storage means for storing the set values. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, but it may be backed up.

FIG. 96(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. Left button 167 and right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 96(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166 .

In addition, under the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, or one of the chance buttons is used for repeated hit effects, etc., and the other chance button is used as a hidden button. may Here, a hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, or the built-in effect lamp does not light up). at least one or both), but when the operation means is operated, some kind of production is performed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194. In FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 are the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position where the player cannot operate it, and serves as a switch used by the store clerk to select a set value. Only the first selection switch 190 out of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the power saving mode is set only while the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration effect is a effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 is set to the power saving mode when the demonstration effect is started in a state where setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is reproduced in a dark state, thereby suppressing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . In addition, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157 .

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays either the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from among seven volume levels. Also, in the non-power saving mode, mute can be selected.

FIG. 97(A) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. The first sound volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first sound volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97A displays that the selection value of the seven levels of sound volume level is 0 (0/7) and the characters "mute". In addition, none of the 7 levels of horizontal level display are illuminated. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 are completely inaudible.

FIG. 97(B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(B) displays characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven-level volume level is 1. In FIG. In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first step level is illuminated in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 97(C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(C) displays characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 7. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh-stage volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 97(D) shows a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(D) displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). In place of the exhibition volume, a special volume that cannot be selected with the second selection switch 194 but can be selected only with the first selection switch 190 may be selected. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 96(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays characters indicating power saving mode, selection values of seven levels of volume levels, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). In the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 97(a), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 7 are displayed. there is In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are illuminated in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 97(b) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 96(a).

On the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 97(b), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1 are displayed. there is In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the first step level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. A power saving mode is selected to be set. Note that even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode. be a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to any one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. When setting to the non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is not set even in the demonstration state. Also, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 97(B) and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 97(b) are the same, and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. The volume output with the selection value and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 97(a) are also the same.

FIG. 97(a) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the player operates the second selection switch 194 while the effect image display device 157 displays the first guide display icon GI1, which will be described later, the effect image display device 157 displays the third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 97(a) displays characters "volume 1/5" indicating that the selection value of the volume level in five stages is 1. In FIG. Also, in the five-stage level display, only the lowest level, the first stage, is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 97(a), the level does not drop any further. That is, it is not possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194 . It should be noted that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194 .

FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 97(a).

On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 97(a), characters of "volume 5/5" indicating that the selection value of the volume level in five stages is 5 are displayed. In addition, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels from the first step to the fifth step are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined time.

Seven levels of volume are selected by operating the first selection switch 190, while five levels of volume are selected by operating the second selection switch 194. FIG. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the volume setting range is in the range of 0 to 127, and the setting values in the seven stages are 18 in the first stage, 36 in the second stage, 54 in the third stage, and 4 stages. The number is 73, the 5th row is 91, the 6th row is 109, and the 7th row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the 2nd to 6th stages are left except for the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage. That is, the 2nd step (36) of 7 steps is the 1st step of 5 steps, and the 6th step (109) of 7 steps is the 5th step of 5 steps. Therefore, only the store clerk of the amusement arcade can select the setting value (18) in the 7th stage and the setting value (127) in the 7th stage. In addition, the 1st stage (18) of 7 stages may be the 1st stage of 5 stages, the 5th stage (91) of 7 stages may be the 5th stage of 5 stages, or the 3rd stage of 7 stages (54 ) may be the first stage of the five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of the seven stages may be the fifth stage of the five stages. Alternatively, the set values in the five stages may be 26 in the first stage, 51 in the second stage, 76 in the third stage, 102 in the fourth stage, and 127 in the fifth stage.

With the effect image display device 157 displaying the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and a first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the volume level selection value is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, when the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. The display shows that the volume selection value is the fourth level. These displays are displayed regardless of what selection value the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 displays. That is, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once causes the selected value to be displayed as 2/5. Also, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value is displayed as 4/5. This is because when the third volume selection icon SI3 is switched to, the selected values up to that point are discarded, and the volume level value of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is selected again, and the left button is pressed. By operating 167 or right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by changing the initial value by operating the second selection switch 194 is changed to the first value. 3 Displayed by volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the intention of the player can be prioritized. Conversely, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selected value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is selected. By operating the switch 190, a value obtained by changing the previously selected value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (eg, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without taking over the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 , the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 339 (effective line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 162 lamp, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . The switch sensor 427 also detects pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166 , the left button 167 and the right button 168 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-controller 400 transmits to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-controller 500 a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-controller 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives control signals without going through the second sub-controller 500 .

FIG. 99 shows a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect.

A predetermined time period during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed continuously during the game or after the game ends. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the animation is switched to display the demonstration animation. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the demo animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, an opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen of the effect image display device 157 turns white once, and then the corporate logo gradually starts to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. 99(a). The company logo appears in full. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the characters appear begins. First, an animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character, Lord appears, is displayed as shown in FIG. 99(b). Also, when an animation in which a character appears is started, a first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. FIG. This first guide display icon GI1 is an icon that is displayed only during the demonstration effect. That is, it is displayed only in the animation in which the character in the demo animation appears. However, non-demonstration animations may also be displayed. The display of the second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guidance display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the letters "volume adjustment" are also displayed in black. It is suggested that the output sound from 272 and the output sound from the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted in volume. As described with reference to FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), when the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. When the right button 168 is pressed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and the volume level of the five steps is increased by one step. In addition, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the characters "game information" are also displayed in white, suggesting that the game information will be displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 100(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed.

The game information displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed is a payout table. The payout table shown in FIG. 100(a) indicates that 8 medals are paid out when the symbol combination of Bell-Bell-Bell is aligned on the activated line described with reference to FIG. - It is shown that three medals are paid out when the combination of watermelon symbols is complete. It also shows that two medals are paid out if the cherry symbol stops at the middle symbol. This payout table consists of a plurality of pages, and the payout table shown in FIG. 100(a) is the first page. The first guide display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen is replaced with the second guide display icon GI2. In the second guidance display icon GI2, black characters of "move page" are displayed in contrast to the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168, which are displayed in black, and the left button 167 and the right button 168 are operated. It is suggested that you can change the paytable page by doing. When the left button 167 is pressed once while the second guide display icon GI2 is displayed, the payout table page is returned by one page, and when the right button 168 is pressed once, the payout table page is advanced by one page. In addition, the characters "END" are displayed in white against the display 166p of the second chance button 166 displayed in white, and the display of the payout table can be terminated by operating the second chance button 166. is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the non-demonstration animation starts to be displayed. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration effect ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demonstration animation is started.

The first guidance display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the payout table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord, appears as shown in FIG. 99(b), the animation in which the princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) shown in FIG. 99(c) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Further, in the demo animation, following the animation in which the princess appears, an animation in which an old man appears (demonstration animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 99(d) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. At the end of the demonstration animation, an ending animation (demonstration animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, a warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 99(e), and the first guide display icon GI1 has disappeared. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demonstration animations ends, and if the demonstration production continues, the above-mentioned opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) returns, the entire screen turns white again, and after that, a series of animations Demonstration animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing, step by step, the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while a non-demonstration animation is being displayed.

In FIG. 101(a), the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the head seat and the old man is reading a letter. This animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 continuously during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game is over. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation".) In addition, in this non-demonstration animation, the lord's eyes and fan move, and the hands of the old man move.In addition, this non-demonstration animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer displaying the non-demonstration animation in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. Shown are button 165, second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112. The first effect lamp incorporated in the first chance button 165 shown in a) is lit in white, and the second effect lamp incorporated in the second chance button 166 is also lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 96) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. 101(a), and the three reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 101(a) are illuminated white.

The lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be illuminated in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be extinguished. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, among the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 96), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

In the state shown in FIG. 101(a), the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. 96(a). The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

In the example shown in FIG. 101 , in order to operate the first selection switch 190 , the store clerk inserts the key into the key hole 140 and turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock and open the front door 102 . Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the opening sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, and the upper speaker 272 outputs a message indicating that the door is open. An error annunciation sound is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door being opened". The output of the error notification sound for the door opening error and the display of the error display are continued until the front door 102 is closed. Not a few players think that the error notification sound is too loud for other players to hear. Therefore, there is a case where the store clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening/closing piece does not protrude, the opening sensor does not detect the opening of the front door 102, and the door opening error is not notified. In the example shown in FIG. 101, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, switch operation (1) is performed by the store clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 96(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 101(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed.

FIG. 102 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 102, time elapses from left to right in the figure, timing of (c) in FIG. 102 coincides with timing of FIG. 101(c), and timing of (d) in FIG. 101(d), and the timing of (e) in FIG. 102 matches the timing of FIG. 101(e). FIG. 102 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp and the second chance lamp built in the first chance button 165. The lighting modes of various lighting means such as the second effect lamp built into the button 166, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown. .

At the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 102, the effect image display device 157 displays the non-demonstration animation with normal brightness, and also displays the first volume selection icon SI1 with the characters "volume 7/7". is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above-described various light-emitting means are lit in white.

Next, the store clerk performs the switch operation (2) of setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 101(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Even at the timing (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 102, the effect image display device 157 displays a non-demonstration animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 with the characters "exhibition volume" displayed. It is shown.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs switch operation (3) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 96(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state. FIG. 101(d) shows the state immediately after the switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 102, the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 101(d) is as shown in FIG. The time from switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 101(c) is the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. ) is the same length as the time until the state shown in FIG.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101(d), the same second volume selection icon SI2 as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 97(a) is attached to the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. are displayed in an overlapping manner, and in the subsequent effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. This change of icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG.

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 101(e) displays the characters "power saving mode". This display indicates that the power saving mode setting has been selected, and the power saving It does not indicate that the mode has been set. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101(e) continues to display the non-demonstration animation, and remains in the non-demonstration state. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing charts of FIG. 101(e) and FIG. 144R, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 96) of each reel 110-112 remain lit white. In addition, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. Furthermore, the non-demonstration animation is played in a bright state without being darkened.

FIG. 103 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

In FIG. 103(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 99(a). That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(a), after the entire display screen has turned white once, the company logo that has gradually started to appear from the back is displayed in a state in which it has completely appeared. Also, the demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark. 103 also include a first chance button 165, a second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144L, as in FIG. 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. In addition, the first effect lamp incorporated in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 103(a) is lit in white, and the second effect lamp incorporated in the second chance button 166 is also lit in white. . Also, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 103(a) are lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 96) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 103(a) are illuminated in white. .

Also in the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be illuminated in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be extinguished. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, only the left side lamp 144L of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 96) may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may flash white, and the right side lamp 144R may light red.

In the state shown in FIG. 103(a), the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. 96(a). The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

In the example shown in FIG. 103 as well as the example shown in FIG. 101, the amusement store clerk presses the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. to operate. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example, as in the example shown in FIG. 101, the store clerk performs switch operation (1) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 96(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(b) displays the animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, appears, as described with reference to FIG. 99(b). The display of the display icon GI1 has started. This first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but on the contrary, the first volume selection icon SI1 overlaps part of the first guidance display icon GI1. May be displayed overlapping.

Next, the store clerk performs the switch operation (2) of setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. 103(c), the animation (demonstration animation 3/5) in which the princess appears, which has been described with reference to FIG. 99(c), is displayed. The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the volume for the exhibition, which started to be displayed after the first guidance display icon GI1, overlaps the first guidance display icon GI1.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs switch operation (3) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 96(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state.

FIG. 104 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 104, time elapses from left to right in the same manner as in FIG. Also, the timing of (c) in FIG. 104 matches the timing of FIG. I am doing it. Further, FIG. 104 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157, and the first effect lamp incorporated in the first chance button 165, the second effect lamp incorporated in the second chance button 166, the left side Light emission modes of various light emitting means such as the lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown.

Also at the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 104, an animation (demo animation 3/5) in which a princess appears is displayed in a bright state on the effect image display device 157, and the characters "exhibition volume" are displayed. A state in which the volume selection icon SI1 and the first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above-described various light-emitting means are lit in white.

FIG. 103(d) is a diagram showing the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed, and the state shown stepwise after (d) in FIG. It becomes the one shown at a shorter time interval than the one shown.

When the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration effect is being executed, that is, the demonstration animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 103(d), the power saving mode has already been set, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light-emitting means that have lit in white until now, the light-emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 are turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. In addition, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(d), the same second volume selection as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. The icon SI2 is displayed overlapping.

Furthermore, when the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. That is, as described above, if the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the power saving mode is set. is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 101, even if the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is not displayed, the power saving mode is not set and the demonstration animation is displayed. It doesn't even start from the beginning. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 104, at the timing of FIG. 103(d), while the demonstration animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is reproduced. is also started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. Also, the display of the demo animation 3/5 has ended, and the company logo has begun to appear faintly on the display screen that has become entirely white due to the start of the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). Also, the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(f), the corporate logo appears quite clearly, but since the second volume selection icon SI2 overlaps, the corporate logo is It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Also, at the timing of FIG. 103(f), the display of the power saving mode setting display AI, which notifies that the power saving mode is set, "power saving mode being set" is started at the bottom of the display screen.

At the timing shown in FIG. 103(g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to darken, it becomes more difficult to see than before it starts to darken, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 does not change, and the power saving mode setting AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the power saving mode setting display AI and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 103(h), the first guidance display icon GI1 that disappeared once is displayed again. The re-displayed first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed in the foremost layer, and overlaps part of the second volume selection icon SI2 and also overlaps the power saving mode setting display AI. The first guidance display icon GI1 also has the same visibility as the first guidance display icon GI1 in FIG. 103(b), and the first guidance display icon GI1 can also be clearly seen. That is, the brightness of the first guidance display icon GI1 does not change either.

Note that the power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed in the foremost layer and partially overlap the first guidance display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed in the foremost layer, partially overlapping the first guidance display icon GI1, and partially overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demonstration animation starts to darken to when it completely darkens on the effect image display device 157 (Fig. 103(g) to Fig. 103(h)) is determined by the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left It is longer than the time when the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are extinguished at the timing of FIG. 103(d). When the demonstration animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the effect image display device 157 is malfunctioning or be surprised. may be noticed by the player.

It should be noted that even if the store clerk performs a switch operation to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. Display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

When the second chance button 166 lit in white is pressed in accordance with the first guidance display icon GI1 in the state where the power saving mode is set, the display returns to the non-power saving mode, the display of the demonstration animation ends, and the display of the demonstration animation ends. A payout table shown in 100(a) is displayed. Also, when the left button 167 or the right button 168 is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1, the non-power saving mode is restored and the demonstration animation is changed to the non-demonstration animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the old man shown in FIG. 101). ), and the third volume selection icon SI3 described with reference to FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b) is displayed.

Also, when the unlit first chance button 165 is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, switching from the demonstration animation to the non-demonstration animation (for example, the lord shown in FIG. 101). Toji's animation), and a certain production may be started.

FIG. 100(b) shows a display screen displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 103(h).

In the state shown in FIG. 103(h), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 displays the first guidance display icon GI1. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display related to the first chance button 165. FIG. Also, since the power saving mode is being executed, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is there no prompt to press the first chance button 165, but there is no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165 either. In spite of this, when the first chance button 165 is operated, a setting suggestion display for the slot machine 100 is displayed as the certain effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. The player usually cannot know this setting value, but there are cases where a setting suggestion display is displayed as shown in FIG. 100(b). If only the Lord's character is displayed, it suggests an odd (settings 1, 3, 5) setting. If only the old man character is displayed, it suggests an even (settings 2, 4, 6) setting. If only the princess character is displayed, it suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, it suggests setting 5 or setting 6. When such setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the states of FIGS. 103(d) to 103(g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the effect image display device 157 does not display the setting suggestion display. can be Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the pressing timing.

FIG. 105 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece while the demonstration animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The example shown in FIG. 105 is an example in which the door opening error is being notified. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 103 in which the error notification of the door open error is stopped will be mainly described.

In the example shown in FIG. 105, the store clerk opens the front door 102 before the demonstration animation starts. At this time, the store clerk opened the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece protruding when the front door 102 is opened, so that the error notification of the door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by a character display such as "Door being opened", and an upper speaker 272 (not shown) in FIG. is repeatedly output.

In FIG. 105(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, there is displayed an error display EI1 indicating a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door opening". This error display EI1 is displayed on the foremost layer and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

In addition, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 105(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is lit in white. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 96) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 105(a) are illuminated in white. .

The store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with characters "/7" is displayed. Also, at the lower left, the display of the first guide display icon GI1 has started.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "Exhibition volume" is displayed. A first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left.

Subsequently, the clerk performs switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 105(d), the power saving mode has already been set, but only the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is still lit in white. The off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

Also, the display of the demonstration animation is started from the beginning, and while the demonstration animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is also started to be reproduced. Furthermore, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 105(d), the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed so as to overlap the first volume selection icon SI1. Even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. The rest is the same as the example shown in FIG. 103, except for the mode of various light emitting means and the fact that the error display EI1 is continuously displayed, so the description is omitted.

In this example as well, during the display of the demonstration animation in the power saving mode, the store clerk operated the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to switch from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a). Also in this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing, step by step, the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error is still occurring.

A motor-driven medal discharge device 180 (see FIG. 93) is provided inside the slot machine 100, and during the medal payout operation, the game medals in the bucket run out, and the medal payout sensor detects the lapse of a predetermined first time. The hopper empty error is reported when the motor is not turned on even when the motor is turned on, and the recovery process for rotating the motor in the reverse direction cannot be recovered. If the hopper is empty error, open the front door 102 to replenish the bucket with tokens, press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted into the keyhole 140 to the left. The error is cleared by turning to .

FIG. 106(a) is a diagram showing a state in which an empty hopper error has occurred. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 106(a), the error notification is displayed in the background display of the error notification (background display with diagonal hatching). That is, an error display EI2 such as "error occurred" that cannot identify the error that has occurred, and an error display EI3 that explains how to cancel the hopper empty error such as "replenish medals and press the reset switch". is displayed. It should be noted that an error display indicating an instruction to the player, such as "please call a clerk", may also be provided.

Also, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 106(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 96) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 106(a) are illuminated in white. .

The amusement store clerk opens the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece, and performs the switch operation (1) of setting the indicating portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 96(a). Since the effect image display device 157 displays an error display EI2 such as "Error Occurred", this error display EI2 also serves as an error notification of the door opening error. The error display EI of the door opening error by display is not displayed. In addition, an error notification sound for a door opening error such as "the door is open" is not output. It is also possible to output an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player, such as "Please replenish medals." Alternatively, an error display EI for a door opening error may be displayed, or an error notification sound for a door opening error may be output.

When the store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying characters "7/7" is displayed overlapping an error display EI2 such as "error occurred". The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed in the foremost layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call a clerk" is also displayed, this error display is displayed. are also displayed overlapping each other. Alternatively, an error display EI3 explaining how to remove the hopper empty error may be displayed in the foremost layer.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first sound volume selection icon SI1 is displayed, which displays the characters "Meeting sound volume".

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190 to select the setting of the power saving mode, and the volume level is set to the seventh stage volume level. However, since the state shown in FIG. 106(d) is not a state in which the demonstration effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set and the display of the demonstration animation is not started from the beginning. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 106(d), instead of the first volume selection icon SI1, a second volume selection icon SI2 displaying the characters "power saving mode" displays an error such as "error occurrence". It is displayed overlapping the display EI2.

Also, in FIG. 106(d), there is no change in the mode of various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains off.

In the above explanation, the power saving mode is not set unless the demonstration effect is being executed. However, the power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is reproduced in a dark state to save power, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown at 96, power saving may also be performed in other devices. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may not be moved, or the movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be lowered, not limited to animation reproduction. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 may be extinguished. Furthermore, instead of completely extinguishing the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, the luminance (light amount) is lowered. Even in the dimmed state, it leads to power saving.

Furthermore, the timing for starting power saving depends on the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (the timing of FIG. 103(d)) and the effect image display device 157 (the timing of FIG. 103 ( Although the timing of g) is different from the timing of g), power saving is started first with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, and then the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157 are started. You may make it start power saving. In addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device having a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and the effect image display device 157 starts power saving later. You may do so. In addition, the combination of the light emitting means and the sound output means, the combination of the effect movable body and the display means, the combination of the light emitting means and the effect movable body, the combination of the effect movable body and the sound output means, the combination of the display means and the sound output means, etc. The timing of starting power saving may be varied.

In addition, although the brightness (light amount) of various lamps cannot be selected by operating the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of each lamp can also be selected by the first selection switch 190 in the same way as the sound volume level. You may enable it to select by operation.

Next, operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 will be described.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing two examples of operation effects.

In FIG. 107, an effect image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167 and a right button 168 are shown. The first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is capable of displaying luminescent display of seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) forming a rainbow. Luminescent display is also possible. This white luminous display becomes the default luminous display of the first chance button 165 . The second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is also capable of displaying luminous display of seven colors forming a rainbow like the first luminous display, and white light-emitting display is also available as a default light-emitting display. It is displayable. Note that the second chance button 165 may be configured to display only white light (default light emission).

In the state shown on the left side of FIG. 107(a), the operation presentation has started. This operation effect is an effect started after the end of the game, and is an effect executed only during a period in which the game is not played. That is, the operation effect is an effect that is started when the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. is started. In addition, the operation effect may be an effect that is continuously executed during the game (while the reels are rotating), an effect that is continuously executed even after the game is started, or an effect that is continuously executed even after the game is started. ) may be executed only.

In the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 107(a), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in the third color (for example, red), and the luminescence display of the third color is displayed. The production image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the upper seat and the old man is reading a letter (this animation is hereinafter referred to as the "large hall animation"). , a first operation prompting display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165 is displayed. The first operation prompting display HD1 here is composed of a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165. FIG. The first button display 165D is a display representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the third color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual first chance button 165. FIG.

The start timing of the operation effect may be the timing when the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes, or the timing when the display of the first operation prompting display HD1 is started. The timing at which the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes and the timing at which the display of the first operation prompting display HD1 is started may be the same timing, but the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes. The timing may be faster. Since the timing at which the light emission display changes is earlier, the player's attention is drawn to the first chance button 165, and the change in the light emission display functions as an advance notice of the first operation promotion display HD1. However, the timing at which the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes may be later.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the first chance button 165 is operated on the effect image display device 157 as shown on the right side of FIG. 107(a). An operation result display (response display) displayed in response to this is displayed. The operation result display will be described in detail later, but here, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is a display that suggests the degree of expectation by the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord. Here, the frame display RD21 is the first color (eg, yellow). . Further, the operated first chance button 165 continues to display the luminous display of the third color (for example, red). That is, the display mode does not change after the operation.

Also in the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 107(b), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in the third color (for example, red) as in FIG. 107(a). A luminous display is displayed. 107(a), the effect image display device 157 includes a first button display 165D representing a first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. HD1 is displayed.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. A suggestive operation result display RD20 including a (eg, yellow) frame display RD21 is displayed. On the other hand, in this example, the operated first chance button 165 is turned off, and the light-emitting display of the third color (for example, red) is terminated.

Note that the first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and even if the first chance button 165 is not operated within this predetermined period of time, the operation result display will be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Is displayed. That is, the operation result display is displayed whether or not the first chance button 165 is operated. You can start the next game after watching. Note that if the first chance button 165 is not operated within a predetermined period of time, the operation result display may not be displayed.

Next, a characteristic operation presentation in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 will be described.

FIG. 108 is a table summarizing characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

There are two types of characteristic operation effects described here, which differ in the type of operation result display. One is the first operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. The other is a second operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, an operation result display of suggestive display is displayed.

In both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 before the operation, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after the operation, and the frames included in the operation result display. There are multiple patterns of display color combinations.

FIG. 108(a) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display in the first operation effect. (b) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display in the first operation effect. The rainbow color may be a mode in which the display colors are changed one by one continuously to display each of the seven colors forming the rainbow, or the seven colors forming the rainbow may be displayed at once. A mode in which areas are separated and displayed may be used.

In the first operation effect, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation prompting display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165. However, even if the second chance button 166 is operated, the operation result is displayed. may be displayed. In other words, both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 may become operation valid buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (eg, white) light-emitting display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (eg, red) light-emitting display, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (eg, rainbow colors). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is valid only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (eg, red) light-emitting display or a fourth color (eg, rainbow color) light-emitting display. It can be a button.

The state in which the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) is the same as the state shown on the left side of FIGS. 107(a) and 107(b). In addition, in the first operation effect, there is also a state where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display. In either state, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation prompting display HD1 as the first operation prompting display HD1 shown in FIG. When the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display that notifies the number of AT-added games. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs according to the number of AT-added games, as shown in the respective tables of FIGS. 108(a) and 108(b). Also, after being operated, the first chance button 165 changes to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

If both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, even if the second chance button 166 instead of the first chance button 165 is operated, the first chance button 165 However, the second chance button 166 changes to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may be the same light emitting display as the light emitting display before the operation, or the first chance button 165 and the Similarly, the luminous display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light-emitting display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Even if the first chance button 165 before operation displays a third color (for example, red) luminous display (the table shown in FIG. 108(a)), a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is displayed. ) is displayed (the table shown in FIG. 108(b)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) , the operation result display is not displayed even if the second chance button 166 is pressed, and the operation result display is not displayed unless the first chance button 165 is pressed. Note that the number of AT-added games is determined in advance by a lottery before the first operation effect is started, and the content of the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is determined based on the result of the lottery. It is also decided whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be an operation enable button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted in terms of control, but the operation result display is not displayed. Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 itself may not be accepted for control purposes.

FIG. 108(c) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) light-emitting display in the second operation effect. (d) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display in the second operation effect.

In the second operation effect as well, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation promotion display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165, but the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 Both may be operation enable buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (eg, white) light-emitting display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (eg, red) light-emitting display, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (eg, rainbow colors). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is valid only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (eg, red) light-emitting display or a fourth color (eg, rainbow color) light-emitting display. It can be a button.

In the second operation effect as well, before the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation prompting display HD1 as the first operation prompting display HD1 shown in FIG. 107(a). there is In the second operation effect, when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display of suggestive display (see FIG. 107). be. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs according to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display, as shown in the respective tables of FIGS. 108(c) and 108(d). Also, in the second operation effect, the first chance button 165 after being operated changes to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Furthermore, in the second operation effect, when both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165. However, the first chance button 165 may change to a luminous display in the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may have the same luminous display as the luminous display before the operation. However, like the first chance button 165, it may change to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light-emitting display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Also, even if the first chance button 165 before operation displays a third color (for example, red) luminous display (the table shown in FIG. 108(c)), a fourth color (for example, 108(d)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestive display is the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). Only when the second chance button 166 is pressed, the suggestive display operation result display is not displayed, and unless the first chance button 165 is pressed, the suggestive display operation result display is not displayed. It should be noted that the result of the expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display (details will be described later, whether or not to shift to the AT state) is determined in advance by a lottery before the second operation effect is started, and the lottery result. In response, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display is determined, and it is also determined whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be an operation valid button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestive display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted as a control, but the operation result of the suggestive display is displayed. It may not be displayed, or may not accept the operation of the second chance button 166 for control purposes.

It should be noted that in both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the light emission display before the operation of the first chance button 165 is the first color, the second color, the fifth color, or other colors. The color of the frame display and the light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 after the operation may be other colors.

Also, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may occur at the same time. In this case, both the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games and the operation result display for suggestive display are displayed. It becomes the same color as the frame display color. It should be noted that the color may be the same as the color of the frame display in the operation result display for notifying the number of additional games.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the relationship of colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 109, the light emission display mode of the first chance button 165 is shown in the vertical line on the left side.

The vertical line on the left side shows the light-emitting display state of the first chance button 165 .

The vertical line in the center shows the display mode of the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT-added games. For example, +25G displayed in the AT added game number display RD12 indicates that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added by 25 games. The color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the AT added game number display RD12 is a color corresponding to the number of games added to the number of games in which the AT state is maintained. Note that the color of the frame display RD11 may indicate the reliability of other benefits. For example, in the case of a game feature of accumulating points, the color of the frame display RD11 may be a color corresponding to the number of points.

The vertical line on the right shows the display mode of the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. What is implied here is the level of expectation (reliability) with which the player is awarded a privilege (AT state in this example). When the character display RD22 of the lord inside the frame display RD21 is displayed, an effect for predicting whether or not the above privilege will be granted (in this example, if you win, the above privilege will be granted) The start of the battle effect) is confirmed, and the color of the frame display RD21 indicates the degree of expectation (in this example, the degree of expectation (reliability) of winning the battle effect) to transition to the state in which the above privilege is granted. ). In this sense, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display also corresponds to the display regarding the player's privilege. In addition, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is also a notice display of the start of an effect that predicts whether or not the privilege will be given or not, or a notice display of the start of the effect in the next game. Furthermore, it corresponds to a notice display that a privilege will be given to the player or a notice display that the player will win the battle effect. Note that the privilege given to the player may be a big bonus or the like in addition to the AT state. Also, instead of the lord character display RD22, a princess character display or an old man character display may be displayed. In the case of displaying a princess character, there is a 50% chance that the effect will be started to predict whether or not the privilege will be granted, and the color of the frame display RD21 will also correspond to that probability (for example, , the first color), and in the case of the character display of the old man, the probability of starting the effect that predicts whether or not the privilege will be granted is 0%, and the color of the frame display RD21 is 0%. may also be colored according to its probability (for example, a fifth color).

In FIGS. 107 to 115, the state in which the first chance button 165 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching.

Also, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the fifth color (for example, white) is represented by vertical hatching. This fifth color corresponds to the default luminescent display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT games added, the fifth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 25 games added. do. Further, the fifth color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 0% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the fifth color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for the transition to the AT state is 0%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of the transition to the AT state is 0%. Corresponds to a color that suggests absolutely no migration.

In addition, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the first color (eg, yellow) is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the left. This first color corresponds to the first light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, the first color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added by 50 games. do. The first color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 25% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the first color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 25%, or that the degree of reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 25%.

In addition, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the second color (eg, blue) is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the right. This second color corresponds to the second light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT games added, the second color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 100 games added. do. The second color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 50% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the second color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 50%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 50%.

Also, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the third color (eg, red) is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This third color corresponds to the third light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT games added, the third color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 300 games added. do. The third color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 75% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 75%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 75%.

Also, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the fourth color (eg, rainbow color) is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This fourth color corresponds to the fourth light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT games added, the fourth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 500 games added. do. The fourth color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 100% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color indicating that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 100%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 100%. Corresponds to colors suggesting migration.

In addition, in the explanation here, it was explained that the degree of expectation (reliability) that the privilege is given to the player differs according to the color, but the fifth color, the first color, the second color, The third color, the fourth color, and so on, in order of description, may suggest that the player's degree of advantage increases, or that the degree of expectation (reliability) of various notices increases.

FIG. 110 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation presentation 1 described with reference to FIG. 108(a). FIG. 110 also shows the effect image display device 157, the first chance button 165, the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168 as in FIG. 107 (FIGS. 111 to 115). the same).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 110(a) to 110(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 107, the first operation urging display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 110(a) to 110(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light-emitting display before the operation. The light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes before the operation result display RD10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (the same applies to the following examples). By doing so, the display mode of the operation result display RD10 can be suggested in advance by the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165. FIG.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +50G is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. A color (eg, red) is changing to a first color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +100G is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. It is changing from a color (eg red) to a second color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a fourth color. It should be noted that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed, and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is also changed, unlike the previous example. do not.

As described above, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after being operated is the luminous display related to the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165. In some cases, it is possible to obtain information according to the operation. In addition, in the effect image display device 157, various images may be displayed at the same time or various display colors may be used at the same time. The effect represented by the luminous display of the one-chance button 165 may be easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, since the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after the operation and the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165 are related displays, cohesive effects are developed, and in this respect also, the player can enjoy the effects. easier to understand.

FIG. 111 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 108(b).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 111(a) to 111(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 consists of a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the fourth color. It is configured.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 111(a) to 111(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 111(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +25G is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a color (eg rainbow) to a fifth color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 111(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +300G is displayed in a third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in a fourth color. It is changing from a color (eg rainbow) to a third color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 111(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. remains displayed in the color of Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed unlike the previous example.

FIG. 112 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation presentation 1 described with reference to FIG. 108(c).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 112(a) to 112(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 110, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165, and the first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed, the state shown on the right side of each of FIGS. 112(a) to 112(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light-emitting display before the operation.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 112(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a first color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 112(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a second color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 112(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a third color (eg red) to a fourth color. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed, and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is also changed, unlike the previous example. do not.

FIG. 113 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 108(d).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 111, the first operation prompting display HD1 here includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying the light-emitting display of the fourth color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 113(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. color (for example, rainbow colors) to a fifth color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 113(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord is displayed in a third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in a fourth color. color (eg, rainbow) to a third color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 113(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It remains displayed in four colors. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed unlike the previous examples.

Furthermore, another example of operation effects will be described.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of operation presentation.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 114(a) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light of the third color as shown on the right side of FIG. 114(a). The display has changed to a luminous display of a first color (eg, yellow). In addition, in the central portion of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. This operation result display RD10 has the same size as the operation result display RD10 described so far, and the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the +100 G AT added game number display RD12 is different from the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. different and displayed in a second color (eg, blue). On the other hand, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is also displayed at the lower right of the display screen. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display displayed at the lower right is smaller than the operation result display RD20 described so far, and is displayed in a reduced size. It is displayed in the same first color as the light-emitting display color of the chance button 165 . In other words, although the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the reduced suggestive display, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is The suggestive display operation result display RD20 is given priority over the suggestive display operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games, and is displayed in the same color as the frame display RD21 in the suggestive display operation result display RD20. As described above, although the priority of the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are different, the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 may be displayed at the same time. When the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are displayed at the same time, when the next game is started, the battle effect is started, and the right to shift to the AT state is stocked by winning the battle effect. That is, even if 100 games are added and the condition for ending the AT state is satisfied, the stocked right shifts to the AT state again. It should be noted that the battle effect is not started when the next game is started, but when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (for example, when the added 100 games are completed), the battle effect is started and the battle is started. There may be a case where the player wins the performance and shifts to the AT state again.

Further, as in this example, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the same color as the color of the frame display RD21 in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display, and also the light-emitting display of the first color and the light-emitting display of the first color. It is also possible to alternately display light emitting displays of two colors. Alternatively, half of the light emitting area may be displayed in the first color and the other half in the second color. Furthermore, the area of the light emitting region may be made larger for the priority color. For example, a first color may be displayed in a 3/4 luminous area and a second color may be displayed in a 1/4 luminous area.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 114(b) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 114(b), the luminous display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, but does not display an operation result display RD20 for suggestive display. In the operation result display RD10 shown on the right side of FIG. 114(b), the color of the frame display RD11 is different from the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 and is the second color (for example, blue). In this example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. As a result, the frame display RD21 is displayed in the first color. The display of the operation result display RD20 is hidden. According to the home pages and strategy guides of game machine manufacturers introducing the slot machine 100, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, a player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is hidden, can display the frame display RD21 in the first color. It can be guessed that the operation result display RD20 of the displayed suggestive display is hidden, which may improve the interest of the game. Also, when there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player cannot know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it is possible to make it so that it is not necessarily hidden. It is possible that the color of the frame display will be inconsistent, and the player does not know whether the display is hidden or not. may improve.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 114(c) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 114(c), the luminous display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display RD20 of suggestive display, but does not display the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 114(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is different from the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 and is the second color (for example, blue). In this example, contrary to the previous example, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is given priority over the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT-added games. The display of the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games displayed in color is hidden. According to the home pages and strategy guides of game machine manufacturers introducing the slot machine 100, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, a player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is not displayed can display the frame display RD11 in the first color. It can be inferred that the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of displayed AT-additional games is not displayed, and the interest in the game may be improved. Also, when there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player cannot know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it is possible to make it so that it is not necessarily hidden. It is possible that the color of the frame display will be inconsistent, and the player does not know whether the display is hidden or not. may improve.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example in which an operation means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 115(a) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the end of the game, and the first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

When the start lever 135 is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the game is started. That is, the three reels 110-112 start rotating. The large hall animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. (response display) kind of display is not displayed. It should be noted that, when the game is started, other animation (for example, animation dedicated to the game) may be displayed instead of the large hall animation. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed to the light-emitting display of the fifth color, that is, the default light-emitting display. Note that the first chance button 165 may be turned off. If the player wants to proceed with the game without looking at the light-emitting display or the operation result displays RD10 and RD20 as in the example shown in FIG. 110 or the example shown in FIG. be.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 115(b) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. On the other hand, second chance button 166 is in the off state. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

Even if the second chance button 166 in the off state is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, as shown on the right side of FIG. , the luminous display of the first chance button 165 that has not been operated changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). On the other hand, the operated second chance button 166 remains unlit. Further, on the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed as an operation result display (response display) displayed in response to the second chance button 166 being operated. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b), the color of the frame display RD21 is the same first color as the light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 is operated without operating the first chance button 165, but the result is the same as the example (example shown in FIG. 112(a)) when the first chance button 165 is operated. It has become. If the second chance button 166 is operated without operating the first chance button 165, the result may be the same as the example shown in FIG. 112B where the first chance button 165 is operated. The result may be the same as the example shown in FIG.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 115(c) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the end of the game. In this state, the first chance button 165 displays a second color (for example, blue) light-emitting display. It is On the other hand, the second chance button 166 displays a fifth color (for example, white) light-emitting display. The first chance button 165 may also display a default fifth color (for example, white), or a color other than the first to fifth colors (sixth A color (eg, green) light emitting display may be displayed. Alternatively, the first chance button 165 may be turned off. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a second operation prompting display HD2 prompting the user to operate the second chance button 166 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. The second operation prompting display HD2 here is composed of a character display LD2 indicating that the second chance button 166 should be pressed, and a second button display 166D representing the second chance button 166 on which the index finger is placed. The second button display 166D is a display including the second chance button 166 displaying the light emitting display of the fifth color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual second chance button 166.例文帳に追加Before the second operation prompting display HD2 is displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light in a sixth color (for example, green) to announce that the second operation prompting display HD2 will be displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is operated while the second operation prompting display HD2 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result of the second chance button 166 as shown on the right side of FIG. , an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed. Also in the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 115(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is the first color (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 after being operated also displays a light-emitting display of the same first color as the color of the frame display RD21, and the operated means of operation indicates that the operated means of operation has been operated. A light-emitting display in a color common to the color included in the operation result display (response display) displayed in response is displayed. On the other hand, the first chance button 165 continues to display the light-emitting display of the second color (for example, blue), which is different from the light-emitting display color (first color) of the second chance button 166 after the operation. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 115(b), even if the second chance button 166 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the operation result display is displayed. Even if the first chance button 165 is operated during the display, the operation result display (response display) such as the operation result display RD10 for informing the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 for suggestive display are not displayed.

It should be noted that when the second chance button 166 is operated, the first chance button 165 may also display light emission in the first color.

Further, after the operation, the second chance button 166 may remain illuminated in the fifth color, may be extinguished, or may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue). For example, the light-emitting display may change to another color.

Furthermore, in the case where the second chance button 166 is configured to perform only the fifth color light emission display, the second chance button 166 may remain in the fifth color light emission display after being operated. , may be turned off.

Note that both the first button display 165D and the second button display 166D are displayed on the display effect image display device 157 before the display of the operation prompting display such as the first operation prompting display HD1 and the second operation prompting display HD2. In some cases, it may be announced that either one of the first-operation prompting display HD1 and the second-operation prompting display HD2 will be displayed.

In addition, the color of the frame displays RD11 and RD21 changes in both the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 that is a suggestive display. may change, the color of the kimono of the lord's character may change, or the color of the character display and the color of the dialogue may change. That is, the main color of the operation result display, the most conspicuous color, and the color with the largest display area may change to the light-emitting display color of the operation means after the operation.

Furthermore, in the present specification, the common color does not have to be completely the same, and there may be a difference in shade, and there may be a difference due to different types of devices such as liquid crystal display devices and LEDs. good too. If the hues are similar, such as yellow, blue, and red, they are treated as common colors.

In addition, the display effects on the operating means after the operation may be display effects related to the operation result displays RD10 and RD20, or may be display effects matching the colors of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20. It may be a display effect that makes the result display RD10, RD20 image.

Furthermore, it may be a combination of the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games and the operation result display that suggests the degree of expectation for shifting to a state in which a big bonus is awarded, or an operation that notifies the number of AT-added games. Even if it is a combination of the result display RD10, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the state where the AT state is awarded, and the operation result display suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the state where the big bonus is awarded. good.

In summary, the display effects (e.g., light-emitting display) performed by the operation means (e.g., the first chance button 165) after the operation means are displayed on the display means (e.g., the effect image display device 157). It may be displayed during presentation display (for example, operation response display). For example, the color displayed by the display effect performed by the operation means is displayed in the effect display performed by the display means.

Further, the display effects (eg, light emitting display) performed by the operating means after the operating means (eg, first chance button 165) is operated are the first display effect (eg, light emitting display of the first color) and the second display effect (eg, light emitting display of the first color). It is selected from among a plurality of display effects including a display effect (e.g., light emitting display of a second color), and the first display effect is a first effect display A (e.g., , 50 game addition) may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD10), and the second display effect (for example, a light emitting display in a second color) may be displayed by display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 ) during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying that 100 games are added). For example, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the first effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying that 50 games are added), and the color displayed in the second display effect is This is displayed during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 that informs of the addition of 100 games).

Alternatively, the first display effect (for example, light-emitting display of the first color) is the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the degree of expectation of 25%) on the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). ), and the second display effect (e.g., light-emitting display of a second color) is the second effect display B (e.g., expectation It may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD20) suggesting a degree of 50%. That is, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 25%), and the color displayed in the second display effect is , is displayed during the display of the second effect display (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 50%).

Furthermore, the third display effect (e.g., luminous display of a third color) performed by operating means (e.g., first chance button 165) is changed to the first display effect (e.g., first color display) after operating the operating means. luminous display), and the third display effect (e.g., luminous display of a third color) performed by the operating means changes to a second display effect (e.g., a luminous display of a second color) after the operation of the operating means luminous display).

In addition, although the slot machine 100 has been described as an example in the description so far, the selection of the volume level by operating the first selection switch 190 described above, the selection of setting to the power saving mode, and the operation It is also applicable to pachinko machines to devise the luminous display after the operation of the means and to associate the luminous display after the operation of the operating means with the mode of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20.

FIG. 116 is a back view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

The pachinko machine 100P has a ball tank 150P, which has an upwardly opening opening at the upper part of the rear surface, for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152P is made of a tubular member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154P and flowed down into the payout device 152P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit. A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. A ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the drawing, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P that constitutes a first sub-controller that performs a second sub-board case 165P housing a second sub-board 164P; a payout board 170P comprising a payout control section for performing control processing relating to payout of game balls; , a launch board case 176P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control section that performs control processing related to launching game balls, and a power supply control section that supplies power to various electric game machines. A power supply board case 184P that houses a power supply board 182P that includes a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface section 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section and the card unit.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch that can perform RWM clear (initialization of RAM) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating. It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 180P, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on while being operated, gives a predetermined notification (for example, a character display or sound saying "Please press again to clear the RAM", or a character display). and sound), and if the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

A first selection switch 190P, which is the same as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 96(a), is arranged on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P. Since this first selection switch 190P is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a store clerk, etc.) However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front frame door cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is arranged on the lower left side of the rear surface, and the first selection switch 190P is arranged on the upper left side of the rear surface. It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened), or vice versa.

On the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. A second effect button that replaces 166 is arranged.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game machine comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The display means displays a first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. may be displayed,
The first operating means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation prompting display. and
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in the first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, a common color system]. display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

By looking at the first operation means even after the operation, it may be possible to obtain information corresponding to the operation. In addition, the display means may display various images at the same time or use various display colors at the same time. The effect represented by the light emission display may be easier for the player to understand. Further, since the first light-emitting display and the first operation result display are related displays, a coherent presentation is developed, which also makes it easier for the player to understand the presentation.

The first operating means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be. Further, the first operation means may execute a display effect instead of the light emission display. For example, an effect in which a certain pattern is displayed may be executed.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first operation result display may be a display relating to the grant amount of the privilege granted to the player, may be a display relating to the granting period of the privilege granted to the player, or may be a display relating to the period during which the privilege is granted to the player. It may be a display related to the granting time of the privilege granted to the person.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the player's hand does not cover the first operating means, the first light-emitting display can be easily seen. Further, the first light emitting display is performed by operating the second operation means, which may surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second operation means may be capable of displaying a light-emitting display. For example, the second operation means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the game can be played without looking at the first light-emitting display.

It should be noted that the third operation means may be operated to advance the game (for example, start the game).

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can confirm the first light-emitting display even when the power saving mode is set.

The power consumption of the first operating means may be reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting. That is, the first setting may be the power saving mode, and the second setting may be the normal mode (non-power saving mode).

Further, the first operation means may shift to a first state corresponding to the first setting when the first setting is set. The first state may be a turned off state. That is, it may be in a state in which light emission display is not performed.

The display means displays a second display related to the second operation means [for example, the first guidance display icon GI1 ] can be displayed [for example, FIG. 103(h)], the second display is displayed on the display means in the state where the first setting is set, and the second operation means It may be characterized in that when an operation is performed, a display in response to the operation (for example, display of a payout table shown in FIG. 100(a)) is displayed on the display means.

again,
``The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 110(a), etc.] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The amusement machine is a slot machine, and includes a plurality of reels (for example, three reels) each of which stops rotating when a stop operation is performed, and the display means displays the first operation prompting display. can be displayed after a reel that has been rotating the slowest among the plurality of reels is stopped (for example, a third stop operation).

again,
"The first luminescent display has a main luminescent color that is the same color as the display color in the first mode [eg, the mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [eg, the first is the color (yellow) of
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game machine comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays a second mode [for example, a mode where the frame display RD11 is in a second color (blue)]. A first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] may be displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays the first mode [for example, the mode where the frame display RD21 is in the first color (yellow)]. A second operation result display [for example, a suggestive display operation result display RD20] may be displayed,
The first operation means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation prompting display. and
The first light emitting display is related to the second operation result display of the first aspect rather than the first operation result display of the second aspect [for example, the display color in the second aspect including a color closer to the display color in the first aspect than
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to suggest an operation result display by the luminous display (the first luminous display) of the first operating means after the operation. That is, if the first light-emitting display is displayed earlier than the operation result display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation result display displayed on the display means will be displayed in the first mode. . In addition, since the first light emitting display and the second operation result display of the first mode are associated displays, a coherent presentation is developed and the player can easily understand the presentation.

The first operating means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

Further, the first light-emitting display may be a light-emitting display unrelated to the first operation result display of the second aspect. The first operating means may display a second light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display, and the second light-emitting display is the second aspect. It may be a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display.

The second operation result display may be the same type of operation result display as the first operation result display, or may be a different type of operation result display.

The second operation result display may be a display suggesting the player's degree of expectation that a privilege will be awarded. Alternatively, it may be a display of advance notice that a privilege will be given to the player. In the case where it is regarded as the display of the notice in this way, it may be a display showing the reliability of the notice.

again,
"The display means displays both the first operation result display and the second operation result display when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. may be displayed,
The first operating means may display the first light-emitting display in a state in which both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means [for example, the state shown on the right],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the operation result display with a high priority by looking at the first operation means.

The first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode on the display means. The first light-emitting display may be displayed in the state where the light-emitting display is being performed. Alternatively, the first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode on the display means. The first light-emitting display may always be displayed in the state where the light-emitting display is on.

Further, the first operating means may display a third light-emitting display in a state in which both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means, and the third light-emitting display A light emitting display different from the one light emitting display and the second light emitting display may be used. The third light-emitting display may be, for example, a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display and also a light-emitting display related to the second operation result display. good. More specifically, the third light emission display may be a display of alternate light emission of a color common to the display color in the second aspect and a color common to the display color in the first aspect. However, even if it is a display in which a part of the light-emitting region is light-emitting and displayed in the same color as the display color in the second aspect, and the remaining part is light-emitting and displayed in the same color as the display color in the first aspect. good.

again,
"The first operation means is such that the display means is the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode. The first light emission display may be displayed while only the second operation result display is displayed [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 112(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, the first operation means is such that the display means is the second mode of the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode. The first light emitting display may not be displayed while only the first operation result display is being displayed.

again,
"Both of the operation result displays displayed on the display means are displays in which the second operation result display is displayed smaller than the first operation result display."
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, even if it is difficult for the player to see the high-priority display (the second operation result display) on the display means, the player can see the high-priority operation result display by looking at the first operation means. can be recognized.

again,
"When the first operating means is operated during the display of the first operation prompting display, it may display the first light-emitting display [for example, the right side of FIG. indicated state],
The first light emitting display is the first operation result display [for example, an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games] in a first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)]. RD10], which is a light-emitting display related to [e.g., a light-emitting display containing a color common to the display color in the first aspect];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The display color in the first aspect of the first operation result display and the display color in the first aspect of the second operation result display are a common first color [e.g., yellow],
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display in which a main emission color is the first color,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [eg, AT state],
The second operation result display is a display of advance notice that a certain effect [for example, a battle effect that shifts to AT state when winning] will start.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. " to "F"], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, extinguished state or dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 110(a), etc.] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game machine comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The first operation means may display a third light-emitting display during display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 110(a)],
The first operating means may display a first light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the situation],
The first operating means may display a second light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. situation],
The first luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a first color [e.g., yellow],
The second luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a second color [e.g., blue],
The third luminescent display is a display that includes a luminescent color of a third color [e.g., red].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

It would be uninteresting if the state after operation of the operating means is either to continue the light emission display before operation or to turn off the light, but according to this game machine, you can expect a change in color after operation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first light emission display is display in which a main emission color is a first color; the second light emission display is display in which a main emission color is a second color; The third luminous display may be a display in which the main luminous color is the third color.

Moreover, the display including the emission color of the first color may be the display not including the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color is included, the display including the emission color of the first color most often or the first color It is acceptable if the color of is most conspicuous.

The display including the emission color of the second color may be a display that does not include the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first emission color and the third emission color is included, a display that includes the second emission color most often or the second emission color is included. Any display in which the luminescent color of the color of .

The display including the third luminescent color may be a display that does not include the first luminescent color and the second luminescent color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission colors of the first color and the second color is included, the display including the emission color of the third color most often or the third emission color is used. Any display in which the luminescent color of is most conspicuous may be used.

Further, the first operating means may display the third light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display.

again,
"The display means is capable of displaying a first suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation that a privilege [for example, AT state] will be granted to the player,
The display means is capable of displaying a second suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation,
The display means is capable of displaying a third suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation,
the first suggestion display is a display including the first color [for example, the operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the first color (yellow)];
the second suggestive display is a display including the second color [for example, an operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the second color (blue)];
the third suggestive display is a display including the third color [for example, an operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is a third color (red)];
The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestive display is different from the degree of expectation [for example, 50%] suggested by the second suggestive display,
The degree of expectation suggested by the first indication of suggestion is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third indication of suggestion [for example, 75%],
The degree of expectation suggested by the second suggestive display is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third suggestive display,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the degree of expectation by the color of the light-emitting display after operating the first operating means.

The first suggestive display corresponds to the first aspect of the second operation result display, the second suggestive display corresponds to the second aspect of the second operation result display, The third suggestion display may correspond to a third aspect of the second operation result display.

Further, the first suggestive display is a display in which the first color is the most conspicuous among the included colors, and the second suggestive display is a display in which the second color is the most conspicuous among the included colors. The most prominent display, and the third suggestive display may be the display in which the third color is the most prominent among the included colors. The first suggestive display is a display that matches the first color, the second suggestive display is a display that matches the second color, and the third suggestive display is a display that matches the second color. It may be displayed in three colors. The first suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the first color, the second suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the second color, and the third suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the second color. It may be a display that gives an image of three colors.

again,
"The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestion is smaller than the degree of expectation [for example, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion,
the degree of expectation suggested by the second suggestive display [for example, 50%] is less than the degree of expectation suggested by the third suggestive display [for example, 75%];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first color is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is smaller than the third color, and the second color is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is smaller than the third color. It may be a suggestive color.

By performing light emitting display with low expectation after operating the first operation means (by changing from the third light emitting display to the first light emitting display or the second light emitting display), the player is kept calm. may be able to

again,
"When the first operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays a first operation result [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games]. is to display
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in the first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, a common color display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display has a second mode and a third mode in addition to the first mode,
The first aspect is an aspect including the first color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)],
The second aspect is an aspect including the second color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the second color (blue)],
The third aspect is an aspect including the third color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is a third color (red)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the aspect including the first color may be an aspect that does not include the second color and the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the second color and the third color is included, the aspect in which the first color is included most or the first color is the most conspicuous Any form is acceptable.

The mode including the second color may be a case in which the first color and the third color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one color of the first color and the third color is included, the aspect in which the second color is included the most or the second color is the most conspicuous Any form is acceptable.

The mode including the third color may be a case in which the first color and the second color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first color and the second color is included, a mode in which the third color is included most or the third color is most conspicuous Any form is acceptable.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b)],
The first operating means may display the second light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if the first operating means may display the third light-emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is being displayed, good.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light-emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed [for example, FIG. )],
The first operating means does not display the second light-emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the second light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 110(a), etc.] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"A first device [for example, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740];
a second device [for example, effect image display device 157];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b is set to either “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [eg, extinguished state or dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device enters a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state. ],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, after the first device transitions to the first state [for example, FIG. 103(d)], the second device There is a case where the transition to the second state [for example, FIG. 103 (g) to (h)]
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be easier to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, due to the time lag, it may be possible to check the first state of the first device and then check the second state of the second device.

again,
"Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operating means, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state." ,
The second device does not shift to the second state unless the state is the certain state [for example, the demo state] even if the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. 96(a). ~ When matched to any of "8"],
the first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"the number of first devices [e.g., six] is greater than the number of second devices [e.g., one];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first device, which has a large number, and reduce power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first device in the first state is less than the power consumption of the second device in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first device is higher than that of the second device.

Power consumption in the first device during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the second device during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting the first device, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] for controlling the first device;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said second device;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
the second device receives the first signal via the second control means;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)] is longer than the time it takes for the device to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 103(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first device is a first rendering means [e.g., first light emitting means, first display means],
The second device is a second effect means [e.g., second light emitting means, second display means],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second effect means shifts to the second state after the first effect means shifts to the first state. may,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``A game machine characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 』
also explained.

note that,
"A game machine comprising a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first effect setting, wherein the operation means is operated to set the first effect setting is set, the first notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting, and thereafter the second notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting. A playground characterized by
also explained.

again,
"The operation means is a means that can set a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is suppressed more than the second effect setting. A game machine characterized by:
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the number of said first notification means is greater than the number of said second notification means."
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the power consumption of said first notification means during notification of a certain notification is greater than the power consumption of said second notification means during notification of said certain notification."
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that said operating means are means that cannot be operated by a player."
also explained.

again,
" A first control means and a second control means are provided, and the first notification means transmits a signal regarding the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. and the second notification means receives a signal related to the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. Characteristic game table." was also explained.

again,
"The time taken from the notification mode not corresponding to the first effect setting to the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A playground characterized by a long."
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
selection operation means [for example, first selection switch 190] capable of selecting a first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] according to an operation;
A game machine comprising
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the instruction part 190b is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. ], the display means may start displaying the first animation [for example, demo animation] from the beginning [for example, FIG. 103(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in Fig. 103] and the first setting is selected, the display means displays the first animation." 103(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first animation may be a demonstration animation. The demo animation is an animation that is started to be displayed on the display means after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In other words, the demo animation is started when the player does not perform any operation while the second animation (non-demonstration animation) is being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). It is an anime that will be played.

again,
``The display means is configured so that the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 101] while the second animation [for example, the non-demonstration animation shown in FIG. Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation does not start from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 102],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 101] and the first setting is selected during display of the second animation, the display means to continue displaying the animation [for example, FIG. 101(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, demo state).

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected during the display of the first animation, the display means displays the first animation that has started to be displayed from the beginning. Display in a display mode [for example, a darkened display mode] corresponding to the setting [for example, FIG. 103 (g) to (h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Producing means [for example, the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740],
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the effect means shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state]. may migrate,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to the second state after the effect means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 103(d)]. state [for example, (g) to (h) in FIG. 103],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the effect means may be a light emitting means. Also, the first state may refer to a state in which the effect means executes the effect corresponding to the first setting. Also, the second state refers to a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the rendering means is not in a state where the first animation is displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. does not transition to
Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operation means, the display means is in the second state unless the first animation is being displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. which does not migrate,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. 96(a). ~ When matched to any of "8"],
wherein the effect means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of the production means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the production means having a large number, thereby suppressing the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the rendering means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect is higher with the presentation means than with the first display means.

Power consumption of the effect means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption of the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting to the first state for the presentation means that consumes a large amount of power.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400 ] that controls the effect means,
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The effect means receives the first signal from the first control means without passing through the second control means,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means receives the first signal via the second control means. 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)] is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from one state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 103(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``A game machine characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"first light emitting means [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740];
a second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b is set to either “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising
When the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. is [for example, FIG. 103(d)],
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. [e.g., remains lit white in FIG. 103(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be recognized by simultaneously recognizing that the state corresponding to the first setting will be changed and that the state will not be changed. It may become easier.

again,
"First operation means [eg, first chance button 165],
a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166];
with
The first operating means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp],
The second operating means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp],
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power-saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b can be set to "0" to "0" shown in FIG. When combined with any of "8"],
The first setting is a setting that suppresses the power consumption of the first light emitting means more than the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the first light emitting means. Also, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the second light emitting means. Further, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not transition to a state corresponding to this setting is operated even if the first setting is set. The player can be made to recognize that it is possible. Moreover, as a result, the load on the first operating means can be reduced.

again,
"Equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
The display means is capable of displaying a second display [for example, a first guide display icon GI1] related to the second operation means in a state where the first setting is set [for example, the (b) to (d) and (h) in the same figure],
When the second display is displayed on the display means in a state where the first setting is set, and the second operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, The payout table shown in FIG. 100(a)] is displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second display may be an operation-promoting display that prompts the operation of the second operating means, or may be an operation-promoting display that suggests the operation of the second operating means. , the second operation means may be displayed. For example, the first guidance display icon GI1 corresponds to this second display.

again,
"When the second display is displayed on the display means in the state where the first setting is set, and the first operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, , setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 100(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Note that the state in which the first setting is set may be a demonstration state. That is, the power saving setting is set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demonstration state (normal state) shifted from the demonstration state. That is, when the first operation means is operated, the demo state is changed to the non-demonstration state (normal state), and even if the first operation means is operated instead of the second operation means, The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means and the game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display to the operation of the first operation means performed while the second display is displayed may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. There may be.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is set [for example, whether or not the second display is displayed], the display means In response to the operation [for example, the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 100(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Here, the second display may or may not be displayed on the display means. The response display to the operation of the first operation means performed with the second display hidden may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. good too.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated while the first setting is set, the response display to the operation may not be displayed on the display means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as "first state") [for example, 103(d)], the display means corresponds to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, demo 103 (g) to (h) in FIG. 103].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light-emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demonstration state]. is non-migratory and
The display means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting unless the certain state [for example, demonstration state] is selected even if the first setting is selected by operating the operation means for selection. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
"The power consumption of the first light emitting means is reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting, and
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of said first light emitting means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of said display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first light emitting means, which are numerous in number, and to suppress the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first light emitting means in the first state is less than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first light emitting means is higher than that of the display means.

Power consumption in the first light emitting means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be suppressed by preferentially shifting the first light emitting means, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] that controls the first light emitting means;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means receives the first signal via the second control means. 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)] is is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 103(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``A game machine characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 』
also explained.

The prefixes for identification such as "first . For example, "second .." may be replaced with "first ..".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are only the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. isn't it. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

A slot machine according to an embodiment of a gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 168. FIG.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that progresses a series of games ending without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. FIG. 117 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 118, the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure) are called the right reel bottom row symbols, respectively. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 121, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 118 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 requires 2 to 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines become valid, and when 2 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet. , the winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1, a special combination 2) is internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special combination internal winning state (special combination 1 internal winning state or special combination 2 internal winning state) or a special game state (BB1 operating state or BB2 operating state). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 119) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 119) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of display means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited. It should be noted that the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of first updating means, state setting means, advantage setting means, storage means, and privilege lottery means. Also, the first sub-controller 400 corresponds to an example of a second update means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 , the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112, and the light shield provided on the reel frame. It becomes L level every time a piece passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the pattern arrangement applied to each reel 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 1 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 4 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell 1 pattern", and the frame numbered 6 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 pattern” are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in this embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning hands of the slot machine 100 include special hands 1-2, replay hands 1-3, and small hands 1-7. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as BB1 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player by winning. be. In this embodiment, only 48 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state. This special combination 1 is a combination that is won only when three medals are inserted in the normal game state, which will be described later (see remarks column in FIG. 121).

The special combination 2 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a BB2 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player by winning a prize. In this embodiment, only two medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state. This special combination 2 is a combination that is won only when two medals are inserted in the normal game state (see remarks column in FIG. 121).

Further, replay combinations 1 to 3 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 to 2 and replay roles 1 to 3 may be called "operating roles". In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. 2. Winning of replay hands 1 to 3 is included. In addition, special roles 1 and 2 are special roles that are carried over to the next game when it is not determined to be winning, and other roles are not carried over to the next game when it is not determined to be winning. is a role.

For the special roles 1 and 2, medals are not paid out due to winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are "bell 2-watermelon-replay 2" for special role 1 and "bell 2-seven 1-replay 2" for special role 2. In the following explanation, special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1" and special role 2 may be referred to as "BB2", and special roles 1 and 2 may be collectively referred to as "special role" or "BB". be.

When the special combination 1-2 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to each of the internally won special combinations is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination 1 internal winning state. When the flag corresponding to the special combination 2 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination 2 internal winning state. These flags are maintained in the on state until the corresponding working combination is won, and in the next and subsequent games, it becomes easy to win these working combinations. Specifically, even if the special roles 1 and 2 are not won in the game in which the special roles 1 and 2 are internally won, the same state as the special role 1 and 2 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combination is performed. It will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

Special role 1 internally elected state and special role 2 internally elected state will be described later in detail. The stop control of the reels is executed so that the symbols constituting the are aligned preferentially.

The re-playing hands 1 to 3 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combinations are that replay 1 is "replay 1/2-replay 1/2-replay 1/2", replay 2 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1", and replay The role 3 is "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2". Among the above replay hands, the replay hand 1 may be referred to as "normal replay", the replay hand 2 may be referred to as "seven 1 matching replay", and the replay hand 3 may be referred to as "seven 2 matching replay". Also, when the replay combination 2 is won in the AT state described later, the state shifts to the pseudo BB1 state described later, and when the replay combination 3 is won in the AT state, the state shifts to the pseudo BB2 state described later (see remarks column in FIG. 121). ). The symbol combination of the replay combination 2 is the pseudo BB1 transition symbol, and the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 is the pseudo BB2 transition symbol. The pseudo BB1 state continues for 50 games, while the pseudo BB2 state lasts only 20 games.

The replay hands 1 to 3 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a replay, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 8 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BAR-Watermelon-Replay 1" for the small combination 1, "Watermelon-Cherry-Replay 1" for the small combination 2, and "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" for the small combination 3. There, the small winning combination 4 is "BAR-Replay 1/2-Replay 1/2", the small winning combination 5 is "Bell 2-Bell 1-Bell 1", and the small winning combination 6 is "Bell 1-Bell 1/ 2-Bell 1/2", small win 7 is "Bell 1-Bell 1/2-Replay 1/2", and small win 8 is "Bell 1-Replay 1/2-Bell 1/2" be. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "watermelon", the small role 2 is "weak cherry", the small role 3 is "strong cherry", the small role 4 is "chance eye", the small role 5 is "common bell", The small winning combination 6 may be referred to as "push order bell", and the small winning combination 7 and small winning combination 8 may be referred to as "one bell". A strong cherry is more likely to obtain a privilege than a weak cherry, and a role that is easier to obtain a privilege at the second chance. Further, the pressing order bell is a combination that, when internally won, does not win unless the order of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is correct, and is a combination that always wins regardless of the operation timing as long as the order of operation is correct. A single bell is a win when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the wrong order.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows a lottery table of internal winning combinations in the state of internal winning special combination 2 together with types of internal winning combinations.

FIG. 122 shows 12 types of condition devices (condition device numbers 1 to 12) that combine the roles explained in FIG. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this conditional device. These conditional devices are determined by lottery at the time of the game start operation. At this time, the combination corresponding to the condition device is called an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the time of the game start operation. In the following description of this operation, it may be referred to as internal winning of a role.

As will be described later, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 is a gaming machine that tends to have the longest playing period in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2). FIG. 122 shows a lottery table for each internal winning combination in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2).

Conditional device number 1 is a conditional device constituted by a replay combination. As described above, in the present embodiment, the replay combination includes the replay combination 1 to the replay combination 3, and if the pseudo BB1 state schedule flag described later is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 2 can be stopped. , and if a pseudo BB2 state schedule flag, which will be described later, is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 can be stopped. If none of these pseudo BB state schedule flags are set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 1 can be stopped.

Condition device numbers 2 to 12 are internal winning hands composed of small hands. Among them, the conditional device numbers 7 to 12 are internally won by overlapping with the small winning combination 6, the small winning combination 7, and the small winning combination 8, and six kinds of A to F are prepared. The combination of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is six patterns: "left-right center", "left-center right", "right-left center", "right-center left", "center-left-right", and "center-right-left". The six patterns A to F correspond to each of these six patterns as the correct operation order. That is, the correct answers for the pushing order are different for the condition device numbers 7 to 12. When conditional device numbers 7 to 12 are internally elected, if the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the correct operation order, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 6 is stopped (payout of 15 cards). On the other hand, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in an operation order different from the correct operation order (incorrect operation order), the symbol combination of the small winning combination 7 or the small winning combination 8 is stopped (one payment).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

In the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 122, the value obtained by dividing the displayed numerical value by 65536 is the internal winning probability. This internal winning probability is determined for each set value, but in the special winning 2 internal winning state (RT2), only the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 5 of the condition device 6 is different. In other game states (for example, normal state, special game state, etc.), the higher the set value of the internal winning probability, the higher the player's advantage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the condition devices with condition device numbers 7 to 12 are uniform, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If you do not win the role of each condition device, you will lose, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that you did not win the role of any of the conditional devices is expressed as "won wrong".

As described above, in the state where the special combination 2 is internally elected, if a combination other than the special combination 2 is internally won, the reels are stopped and controlled so that the symbols constituting the other combination are preferentially aligned. is executed. Therefore, in order to shift from the special role 2 internal winning state to the BB2 operating state which is a special game state, it is necessary to insert two medals, internally win without losing, and then win the special role 2.例文帳に追加

<Types of game state>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 and the transition of the game states will be described. FIG. 123(a) is a transition diagram of the game state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, as shown in FIG. 123(a), the game states include a normal game state, a special combination 1 internal winning state, a special combination 2 internal winning state, a BB1 operating state, and a BB2 operating state. It is configured so that five game states with different degrees of advantage for the player can be switched, and the degree of advantage is changed by switching between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, five states RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 are provided as states having different types and probabilities of internally winning replay combinations. and RT have a one-to-one relationship. That is, RT0 in the normal game state, RT1 in the state of winning the special prize 1, RT2 in the state of winning the special prize 2, RT3 in the state of BB1 operation, and RT4 in the state of BB2 operation. The game state is controlled by the main control section 300 . It should be noted that RT1 and RT2 are more likely to be internally elected as a replay combination than RT0. Further, RT1 is more likely to internally win a replay role than RT3, and RT2 is more likely to internally win a replay role than RT4. Further, the internal winning probabilities of the replayed hands of RT1 and RT2 may be the same or different, and the internal winning probabilities of the replayed hands of RT3 and RT4 may be the same or different. may

In the normal game state, the internal winning probability of the replay combination is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Note that this is also the initial state in this embodiment.

The special combination internal winning state (special combination 1 internal winning state and special combination 2 internal winning state) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination is set to ON. In this game state, it is easy to shift to the special game state (BB1 operating state and BB2 operating state), which is more advantageous than the normal game state. However, as described above, in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2), if a role other than the special role 2 is internally won, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , the reel stop control is executed, so that the BB2 operating state cannot be entered.

The special game state (BB1 operation state and BB2 operation state) is an advantageous game state in which it is easier to win a small role than in the normal game state and the special role internal winning state, and it is easy to obtain medals. However, as described above, only 48 medals are given in the BB1 operating state, and only 2 medals are given in the BB2 operating state.

FIG. 123(a) shows the game states described above, and the symbols (A) to (F) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between game states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the game state transitions in the direction of the arrow. The transition from the normal game state (RT0) to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT1) indicated by the arrow (A) is performed by internally winning the special combination 1, and the normal game state indicated by the arrow (D). The transition from (RT0) to the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) is performed by internally winning the special combination 2. In the normal game state (RT0), the internal winning probability of the special combination 2 is higher than the internal winning probability of the special combination 1, and the internal winning probability of the special combination 2 is considerably high, and the slot machine shown in FIG. 100 is a gaming machine where the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) tends to be the longest. The transition from the special role 1 internal winning state (RT1) to the BB1 active state (RT3) indicated by the arrow (B) is performed by winning the special role 1. As described above, in order to win the special role 1, it is necessary to perform a 3-coin bet. The transition from the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) to the BB2 active state (RT4) indicated by the arrow (E) is performed by winning the special combination 2. As described above, in order to win the special role 2, it is necessary to win the special role 2 after performing a two-coin bet and winning an internal win. The transition from the BB1 active state (RT3) to the normal game state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (C) is performed by paying out 48 medals as the specified number. Also, the transition from the BB2 active state (RT4) to the normal game state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (F) is performed by paying out two medals as the prescribed number.

<Types of production state>
Next, the types of effect states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 and transitions of the effect states will be described. As described above, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 is a gaming machine in which the period during which the game is played in the internal winning state of the special combination 2 tends to be the longest. It should be noted that the transition of the presentation state in other game states is the same as the transition described here. FIG. 123(b) is a transition diagram of the effect state in the state where the special role 2 is internally elected in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, as shown in FIG. 123(b), the production states are the initial state, the point specialization A state, the normal state, the point specialization B state, the sign state, the confrontation state, AT (assist It is configured to be able to switch between a total of eight production states, namely, the time) state and the pseudo BB state. In this embodiment, the initial state goes through the normal state to the confrontation state, and if the AT lottery is won in this confrontation state, the state returns to the initial state via the AT state, and if the AT lottery is not won, the confrontation state occurs. It adopts a configuration that repeats a series of loops from the initial state to the initial state. Hereinafter, a period from starting from the initial state to returning to the initial state may be expressed as a cycle. In addition, in this embodiment, items that make it easier to transition to the AT state ("Defeat 1 body" item, "Defeat rate UP" item, which will be described later) are provided, and the accumulated points earned in the game during the lap (hereinafter referred to as the accumulated point ), this item can be acquired according to the configuration. Information on these cumulative points and items is stored in the RAM 308 . Each effect state will be described below based on the above description.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the setting or clearing the RAM (at the start of a cycle). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next cycle). In this initial state, the confrontation mode (described later) and the number of games to transition to the precursor state are set (FIG. 130). That is, in this initial state, it can be said that the scheduling for the premonitory state and the confrontation state is executed at the start of the cycle. Only one game is set in this initial state, and the state immediately shifts to the point specialization A state.

The point specialization A state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state.

The normal state is a presentation state in which the player mainly stays during the round. Points may be obtained in this production state. In the normal state, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment), a lottery for the acquired item is executed in exchange for the predetermined number of accumulated points, and an effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect). . In addition, in this normal state, the state shifts to the premonitory state according to the schedule set in the initial state, but apart from that, the state may shift to the point specialization B state by lottery.

The point specialization B state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. After 5 games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state.

There are two types of precursory states: a true precursory state and a false precursory state. The difference is that the true portent state shifts to the confrontation state after the set number of games has passed, while the false portent state returns to the normal state after the set number of games has passed. That is, it can be said that the false portent state is a presentation state provided to increase the expectation of transition to the confrontation state. You may be able to earn points even in this premonitory state.

In the confrontation state, an effect indicating that the state has shifted to the confrontation state is executed in the first game, and further, a confrontation effect (up to three games) between the main character and the enemy character is executed. Here, in the first game in the confrontation state, an item may be acquired in exchange for the remaining accumulated points, and an effect (item acquisition effect) indicating this may be executed. Further, when the player has the "destruction rate UP" item, an effect (item use effect) for using the "defeat rate UP" item is executed in the second game. In addition, when there is no "killing rate UP" item in the first game, the confrontation effect is started from the second game (item use effect is not executed). When the result of the confrontation presentation is a complete victory, the state shifts to the AT state, and when the main character loses in the confrontation presentation, the state shifts to the initial state. When shifting to the AT state, the number of remaining AT games is set.

In the AT state, when the condition devices 7 to 12 (duplicate combination of minor combinations 6 to 8) are internally elected, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified. Therefore, the player can obtain more profits. This AT state shifts to the initial state when the set AT remaining game number becomes 0, but this AT remaining game number may be added. In addition, in the AT state, a lottery is executed to enable a shift to the pseudo BB state, and when the lottery is won, an effect is executed to urge the player to stop the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3, which is a pseudo BB symbol. Then, when the pattern of the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3 is stopped, the state shifts to the pseudo BB state.

In the pseudo BB state, in the same way as in the AT state, when the conditions devices 7 to 12 (duplicate wins of minor wins 6 to 8) are internally won, the order of pressing the correct answer is reported, and the player can obtain more profit. becomes. This pseudo BB state includes two types of pseudo BB1 state which is shifted by the replay combination 2 and pseudo BB2 state which is shifted by the replay combination 3 . The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have passed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have passed.

FIG. 123(b) shows the production states described above, and the symbols (a) to (l) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between the production states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the production state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. Also, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" are aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control section 400 .

In step S 115 , if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the given number is displayed using the payout number display 127 .

In step S117, state update processing is executed. The details of this status update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Receipt command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, acquisition point command, setting change command, power recovery command ) and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

Next, details of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in the main controller main process of FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, initialization is performed at startup. In this initial setting, processes such as setting (temporary setting) of stack initial value to stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, setting of interrupt mask, initial setting of I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in RAM 308 are performed. conduct.

In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). monitor whether it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped in the case. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff). to step S1005. Note that step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. Here, the setting key switch is a switch for setting the player's advantage in the slot machine 100 (for example, six kinds of advantages from 1 to 6), and can be operated when the front door 102 is opened. If this switch is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned right by 90 degrees), the process proceeds to step S1013; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and the main controller initial setting process ends. In this initialization, for example, item information and accumulated point values are deleted.

In step S1011, RAM data write-back processing is executed. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 308 is abnormal. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or when the power supply is interrupted (the voltage temporarily drops below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 125). In other words, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the data is definitely saved in the RAM 308. FIG. Specifically, it determines whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal. It is judged that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer saving area provided in the RAM 308 is read out when power is cut off, and the stack Reset the pointer (this setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process immediately before the power failure. Furthermore, here, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 . This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state at the time of power failure has been restored. This power recovery command includes information such as RT, game state, and effect state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 125).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an error in the return data of the RAM 308, after making preparations such as clearing all storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, the system shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured such that the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs in the RAM 308 .

In step S1013, which is followed when the setting key switch is ON in step S1005, setting change processing is executed according to the state of the setting key, and this main control unit initial setting processing ends. The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main controller initial setting process of FIG. 126 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, the data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. The data cleared here includes item information and accumulated point values.

In step S1103, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has started to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 125), and the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set during setting change, and the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary set value is set as the display set value. By the processing here, a temporary set value is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . After that, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has been accepted. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1113. In this embodiment, the bet button is used as the setting switch, but the operating means related to the game may be used as in this configuration, or the setting switch may be provided separately.

In step S1111, the provisional set value is updated. In the present embodiment, the temporary set value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switch is operated, and the temporary set value is set to 1 when the setting switch is operated while the temporary set value is 6. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1115; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of confirming the temporary set value as a set value is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1117, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is closed and the setting key switch is off (the setting key switch is turned counterclockwise 90 degrees and the setting key is pulled out). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1119; otherwise, step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparations for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change is completed to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 125) are executed. Also, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before it was changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

Next, details of various lottery processes (step S105) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 executed first, an internal winning combination lottery is executed. In this process, the internal lottery table of the internal winning combination stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state and RT, and the internal lottery (lottery of the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. to determine an internal winning combination. For example, in the RT2 state in which the special combination 2 is internally elected, the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 122 is read. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on.

In step S1203, item addition processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129(a).

In step S1205, confrontation setting processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1207, point specialization B state transition lottery processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132(a).

In step S1209, AT-related processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S1211, preparation for transmission of an internal winning command (sent at step S211 in FIG. 125) is executed, and various lottery processes are terminated. The internal winning command includes the internal winning hand, the current rendering state (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining games in the state and the number of remaining AT games), the result of the confrontation, Information that can specify the results of the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state or pseudo BB state, the correct operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 for the internal winning command of the internal winning combination including the small combination 6 (condition devices 7 to 12 shown in FIG. 122) It also includes operation instruction information representing the operation order of .

Next, details of the item addition process (step S1203) in various lottery processes in FIG. 128 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of item addition processing (step S1203) in FIG.

First, in step S1301 executed first, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1303; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are 1000 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1305; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1305, a lottery for items to be acquired is performed. In this embodiment, either the "defeat 1 body" item or the "defeat rate UP" item is selected. Here, the "destroy one" item is an item that ensures that one win will be achieved in the confrontation state, and the "defeat rate UP" item is an item that increases the probability of winning in the confrontation state. There are 5 types of "destruction rate UP" items in order from the lowest defeat rate: "destruction rate? UP", "destruction rate small UP", "destruction rate UP medium", "destruction rate large UP", and "destruction rate super UP". is provided.

129(b) and 129(c) are diagrams showing tables used for the lottery in step S1305. First, the item lottery table A in FIG. 129(b) is used to select either the "defeat 1" item or the "defeat rate UP" item. In this table, the "defeat 1 enemy" item is selected with a probability of 25%, and the "defeat rate UP" item is selected with a probability of 75%. If the "killing rate UP" item is selected here, the type of the "killing rate UP" item is selected using the defeating rate UP lottery table A in FIG. 129(c). In this table, if you don't have a "destruction rate UP" item (the "destruction rate UP" item you get here is the first item), there is a 75% chance that the "medium defeat rate UP" item will be selected, and 24% , and 1% chance to select the item "Great Destruction Rate UP". On the other hand, if you have a "destruction rate UP" item (the "destruction rate UP" item obtained here is the second or later), there is a 70% chance that the "destruction rate small UP" item will be selected, and 25% , a 4% chance to select a ``Major kill rate UP'' item, and a 1% chance to select a ``Super kill rate UP'' item.

In step S1307, 1000 is subtracted from the accumulated points, and the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1301, which is executed first, in step S1311, which is followed when the presentation state is not the normal state, it is determined whether or not it is the first game in the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are 1 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1315; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1315, a lottery for items to be acquired is performed. 129(d) and 129(e) are diagrams showing tables used for the lottery in step S1315. First, the item lottery table B in FIG. 129(d) is used to select either the "defeat 1 body" item or the "defeat rate UP" item. In this table, the "defeat 1 enemy" item is selected with a probability of 10%, and the "defeat rate UP" item is selected with a probability of 90%. If the "killing rate UP" item is selected here, the type of "killing rate UP" item is selected using the defeating rate UP lottery table B shown in FIG. 129(e). In this table, the "defeat rate? UP" item is selected with a probability of 90%, and the "defeat rate small UP" item is selected with a probability of 10%. For the item lottery here, the same table as that used in step S1305 may be used so that the items obtained in the normal state and the items obtained in the confrontation state are the same.

In step S1317, the accumulated points are cleared (set to 0), and the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1321, a process of acquiring the item selected in step S1305 or step S1315 is executed. In this process, the acquired item information is stored (added) in the RAM 308 . In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of "defeat 1 body" items possessed is set to 3, and the upper limit of the number of "defeat rate UP" items possessed is set to 8, respectively. When the number of possession of the selected item reaches the upper limit, no new item is acquired.

In step S1323, preparation for transmission of an item addition command is executed (transmitted in step S211 of FIG. 125), and this item addition processing ends. This item addition command includes information on the number of items possessed, the acquisition order, and the current accumulated points. This item addition command is sent even when no new items have been acquired.

Next, details of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in various lottery processes in FIG. 128 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG.

First, in step S1401, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the confrontation setting condition is established. Here, the confrontation setting condition is established in the initial state. More specifically, it corresponds to the first game after setting change, the first game after RAM clearing, the first game after being defeated in confrontation state, and the first game after AT state ends. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1403; otherwise, this confrontation setting process ends.

In step S1403, the confrontation mode setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 131(a). FIG. 131(a) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the confrontation mode. In this embodiment, two types of battle modes are provided: a normal mode and a chance mode. In chance mode, the number of games required for laps is smaller than in normal mode (shorter from the initial state to the confrontation state), it is easier to transition to point specialization B state than in normal mode, and pseudo BB lottery is more likely than normal mode. It has become easier to be elected to The table shown in FIG. 131(a) is set such that the setting probability of the chance mode increases as the set value increases. For example, in setting 1 where the player's advantage is the lowest, the setting probability of the chance mode is 20% (remaining 80% is the normal mode), but in setting 6 where the player's advantage is relatively highest, chance Mode setting probability is increased to 50% (remaining 50% is normal mode).

In step S1405, the precursor start zone setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 131(b). FIG. 131(b) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the precursor start zone. In the present embodiment, zones are defined by dividing the number of games being played in a certain range, and zones 1 to 12 are shown in FIG. 131(b). In this step S1405, a zone is set to transition to the portent state (true portent state and false portent state) with a lottery probability corresponding to the confrontation mode.

First, the setting of the true precursor state will be described. Only one of a plurality of zones is set as the zone that transitions to the true precursor state. In the table of FIG. 131(b), any one of zones 6 to 12 (the number of games being played is 201 or more) is set when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, whereas when the chance mode is the zone Any one of 2 to 4 (the number of games being played is 1 to 150) is set. Therefore, the number of games required to reach the confrontation state is smaller in the chance mode.

Next, the setting of the false portent state will be described. Zones that transition to the false portent state are set by lottery for each of a plurality of zones. In the table of FIG. 131(b), when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, zones 3 to 11 (the number of games being played is 51 to 499) may each be set as a false omen start zone, and the chance mode In the case of , only zone 3 (the number of games being played is 51 to 100) may be set as the false portent start zone. As a result of this lottery, there are cases where a plurality of zones that transition to the false portent state are set, and there are cases where only one zone is set. In addition, after transitioning to the true precursor state, it transitions to the confrontation state and returns to the initial state, so the true precursor state is the final precursor state among the precursor states that transition during the cycle. Therefore, the zones subsequent to the zone transitioning to the true precursor state may be excluded from the zones transitioning to the false precursor state.

In step S1407, the start game of the premonitory state is set for each zone set in step S1405, and the confrontation setting process ends. In this process, for example, when zone 6 is set as the zone to transition to the false portent state, the start game of the false portent state is set within the range of 201-250. Further, when zone 4 is set as the zone to shift to the true precursor state, the starting game of the true precursor state is set within the range of 101-150. Although the lottery probabilities of the starting game for the zones are equal, the probabilities may be biased.

In the showdown setting process shown in FIG. 130, a zone is selected once and then a starting game is selected from within that zone. Any configuration may be used as long as the starting game is selected.

Next, details of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in various lottery processes of FIG. 128 will be described with reference to FIG. 132(a). FIG. 132(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG.

First, in step S1501 executed first, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1503; otherwise, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not a specific combination is internally won. Here, the specific combination means condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1505; otherwise, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

In step S1505, lottery processing for transition to the point specialization B state is executed using the table shown in FIG. 132(b). FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery for transition to the point specialization B state. For example, if the condition device 2 (small hand 1, watermelon) is internally elected, if the confrontation mode is normal mode, it will be elected with a probability of 3/100 (shift to point specialization B state), and the confrontation mode is a chance If it is the mode, it wins with a probability of 50/100 (shifts to the point specialization B state). Then, when winning, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to ON. After that, this point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

Next, details of AT-related processing (step S1209) in various lottery processing in FIG. 128 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG.

First, in step S1601 executed first, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1621.

In step S1603, it is determined whether or not a specific combination (condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4)) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1605; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1605, the acquisition lottery process for the "defeat one" item is executed using the table shown in FIG. 134(a). In this table, there is a probability of 1% if a small win 1 (watermelon) is internally won, and a small win 3 (strong cherry) is a 1% probability if a small win 2 (weak cherry) is won internally. 100% probability when internal winning is made in 2, and 13% probability when internal winning is made in small combination 4 (chance 4). In addition, when the number of possession of the "destroy 1 body" item has already reached the upper limit, the "destroy 1 body" item is not obtained. Further, when the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character has started in the confrontation state, the result of the confrontation has been determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615) which is executed prior to this, so the "defeat one character" is performed. ” Instead of the process of obtaining items, the result of this confrontation is rewritten. Specifically, if one of the three games includes a defeat of the main character, this one is overwritten as a victory of the main character. As a result, when the main character wins all three games, the AT state schedule flag is turned on, and the number of remaining AT games is set by lottery. The AT remaining game number lottery is the same as the AT remaining game number lottery in the confrontation result lottery process to be described later.

In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in confrontation state is five. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1609; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item. If the player does not possess the "killing rate UP" item, the process advances to step S1611; otherwise, the process advances to step S1613.

In step S1611, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining games in confrontation state, and the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1613, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is four. This condition is satisfied in the game immediately before the start of the showdown between the main character and the enemy character (starting when the number of remaining games in the showdown state is 3). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1615; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1615, a competition result lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the main character will win each of the three games. The initial value of the victory probability (killing rate) of this hero character is 50%, but 6% is added as a basic addition for each "killing rate UP" item, and the table shown in FIG. is used to increase the kill rate. For example, if there is a "destruction rate? UP" item, there is a 50/100 probability of 6% (6% base increase + 0% increase from the table), and a 50/100 probability of 11% (6% base increase). % + 5% table top-up) is added to the kill rate. Based on this added kill rate, a lottery is executed as to whether the main character will win each of the three games. Incidentally, if the result of the previous game is a loss, the lottery for the subsequent game may not be performed.

Also, if there is one "defeat one" item, the victory of the main character is determined instead of conducting a lottery for one game. That is, when there are three "destroy one" items, it is determined that the main character will win without lottery in all three games, and the transition to the AT state is ensured.

By the above processing, when the main character wins all three games, the AT state schedule flag is set to ON, and the number of remaining AT games is calculated using the table of FIG. 134(c). lottery and setting.

In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the AT-related processing is terminated; otherwise, the process advances to step S1619.

In step S1619, AT direct hit lottery processing is executed using the table of FIG. 134(d). Here, apart from the lottery processing in step S1615, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to shift to the AT state. In the table of FIG. 134(d), for example, when the set value is 1, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/7500, and when the set value is 6, the probability is 1/1000. If the lottery here is won, and if the result of the confrontation has been determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615), the result of this confrontation is rewritten as the main character's unanimous victory, and the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. At the same time, lottery and setting of the number of AT remaining games are performed using the table of FIG. On the other hand, if the result of the confrontation has not yet been determined, the processing is executed so that the main character wins all rounds (for example, the "defeat one" item is added up to the upper limit).

In step S1621 to which the production state is not the confrontation state in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the production state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1623; otherwise, the AT-related processing ends.

In step S1623, a pseudo BB lottery process is executed using the table of FIG. 134(e). According to this table, there is a probability of 1/500 when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, and a probability of 1/100 when the confrontation mode is the chance mode. If the player wins the prize, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and the state becomes possible to shift to the pseudo BB state in a later game.

In step S1625, it is determined whether or not a specific combination (condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4)) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1627; otherwise, the AT-related processing ends.

In step S1627, lottery processing for adding the number of AT remaining games is executed using the table shown in FIG. 134(f). In this table, for example, when a small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, an addition is made with a probability of 1/13. Further, the number of additional games at that time is set to 20 with a probability of 9/100, 30 with a probability of 70/100, 50 with a probability of 20/100, and 100 with a probability of 1/100.

Next, details of the state update process (step S117) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the state update process (step S117) in FIG.

First, in step S1A01 executed first, a point acquisition process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136(a).

In step S1A03, RT is updated. As described above, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, the RT and the game state are in a one-to-one relationship, so when the RT is updated, the game state is also updated.

In step S1A05, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the initial state, and if it is the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A07, and if not the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A09.

In step S1A07, initial state processing is executed. Here, the effect state is set to the point specialization A state, and 30 is set to the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state. After that, the process proceeds to step S1A35.

In step S1A09, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the point specialization A state.

In step S1A11, point specialization A state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the point specialization A state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 137(a).

In step S1A13, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state. If the normal state, the process proceeds to step S1A15. If not the normal state, the process proceeds to step S1A17.

In step S1A15, normal state processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the normal state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 137(b).

In step S1A17, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the point specialization B state, and if it is the point specialization B state, the process proceeds to step S1A19.

In step S1A19, point specialization B state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the point specialization B state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 137(c).

In step S1A21, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a precursor state, and if it is a precursor state, the process proceeds to step S1A23, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A25.

In step S1A23, precursor state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the precursor state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 138 .

In step S1A25, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the confrontation state.

In step S1A27, confrontation state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the confrontation state processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A29, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT state, and if it is the AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A31, and if not the AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A33.

In step S1A31, AT state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the AT state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 140(a).

In step S1A33, pseudo BB state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the pseudo BB state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 140(b).

At step S1A35, preparation for transmission of a state update command including information on the game state, RT, and effect state (sent at step S211 in FIG. 125) is executed, and this state update process is terminated.

Next, details of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in the state update process of FIG. 135 will be described with reference to FIG. 136(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG.

First, in step S1B01 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the point acquisition condition is satisfied. The point acquisition conditions here are conditions that are satisfied in the normal state, the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the premonitory state. However, even in the normal state, the point earning condition is not met even in the normal state for a game (a game in which an item acquisition effect is executed) that is started when the accumulated points exceed 1000. If this point acquisition condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B03, and if not, this point acquisition process is terminated.

In step S1B03, a point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 136(b). FIG. 136(b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. For example, if you do not win internally in any of the condition devices in the normal state (if you lose), you will get 0 points with a probability of 90%, 5 points with a probability of 9%, and 1%. Gain 10 points with a probability. Then, the value of the acquired points is added to the accumulated points. In this description, the points acquired in one game will be referred to as acquired points, and the cumulative total of acquired points during a round will be referred to as accumulated points.

At step S1B05, preparations for transmitting an acquired point command (sent at step S211 in FIG. 125) are executed. This command includes the value of acquired points and information on the effect state. After that, the point acquisition process ends.

Next, details of the point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described with reference to FIG. 137(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG.

First, in step S1C01 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of points specialization A state remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1C03.

In step S1C03, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C05; otherwise, the point specialization A state processing is terminated.

In step S1C05, the effect state is set to the normal state, and this point specialization A state processing is terminated.

Next, details of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described with reference to FIG. 137(b). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG.

First, in step S1C11 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C13; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C13, point specialization B state setting processing is executed. Here, the presentation state is set to the point specialization B state, and the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is set to 5. After that, the process proceeds to step S1C15.

In step S1C15, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C17, it is determined whether or not a transition condition to the precursor state has been established. This transition condition is established when the start game in the premonitory state set in the confrontation setting process (FIG. 130) is reached. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C19; otherwise, the normal state processing is terminated.

In step S1C19, the effect state is set to the portent state, and any value from 1 to 32 is set by lottery (the probability of each value being selected is equal) as the value of the number of remaining games in the portent state. After that, this normal state processing ends.

Next, details of the point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described with reference to FIG. 137(c). 135. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG.

First, in step S1C21 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of points specialization B state remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1C23.

In step S1C23, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C25; otherwise, the point specialization B state processing is terminated.

In step S1C25, the effect state is set to the normal state, and this point specialization B state processing is terminated.

Next, details of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG.

First, in step S1D01, which is executed first, the number of precursor state remaining games is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1D03.

In step S1D03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of precursor state remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D05; otherwise, the precursor state processing is terminated.

In step S1D05, it is determined whether or not the precursor state is a true precursor state. If it is a true portent state, the process proceeds to step S1D07, and if it is not a true portent state (if it is a false portent state), the process proceeds to step S1D09.

In step S1D07, the effect state is set to the confrontation state, and 5 is set as the number of remaining games in the confrontation state. After that, this precursor state processing ends.

In step S1D09, the effect state is set to the normal state, and the precursor state processing ends.

Next, details of the confrontation state process (step S1A27) in the state update process of FIG. 135 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation state process (step S1A27) in FIG.

First, in step S1E01, which is executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1E03.

In step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1E13.

In step S1E05, it is determined whether or not the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1E11.

At step S1E07, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the process proceeds to step S1E09.

In step S1E09, the AT state schedule flag is set to OFF, and this confrontation state processing ends.

At step S1E11, the presentation state is set to the initial state, and the confrontation state processing ends.

In step S1E13, which proceeds when the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is not 0 in step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the main character has been defeated in the confrontation effect being executed based on the confrontation result (set in the AT-related processing in FIG. 133). be judged. The values of the three confrontation effects and the number of remaining games in the confrontation state correspond to 3 for the first game, 2 for the second game, and 1 for the third game. Also, the confrontation results include information about the wins and losses of the three confrontations. Therefore, the number of games remaining in the current confrontation state is used to determine the number of the current battle, the win/loss corresponding to this is derived from the result of the confrontation, and it is determined whether or not the main character has been defeated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E11; otherwise, the confrontation state process ends.

Next, details of the AT state processing (step S1A31) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described with reference to FIG. 140(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the AT state process (step S1A31) in FIG.

First, in step S1F01 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining AT games, and the process proceeds to step S1F03.

In step S1F03, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F05, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB symbol has stopped. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F07, the rendering state is set to the pseudo BB state, and the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state is set to a predetermined value (50 for pseudo BB1, 20 for pseudo BB2, see FIGS. 121 and 123(b)). is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F11, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F13; otherwise, the AT state processing is terminated.

In step S1F13, the presentation state is set to the initial state, and the AT state processing ends.

Next, details of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described with reference to FIG. 140(b). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG.

First, in step S1F21 executed first, the value of the number of pseudo BB state remaining games is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1F23.

In step S1F23, it is determined whether or not the number of pseudo BB state remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F25; otherwise, the pseudo BB state processing is terminated.

At step S1F25, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the pseudo BB state processing is terminated.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 141(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 141(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state. Note that the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data. Details of this effect control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 142 .

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 141(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 141(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 141(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, using FIG. 142, details of the effect control processing (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main processing of FIG. 141 will be described. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the effect control process (step S309) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 executed first, information acquisition update processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3003. Various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. In this information acquisition update process, information included in the various commands (RT, game state, effect state, total points, acquired points, items , number of remaining AT games, number of AT additional games, etc.) and stores (updates) this information. The first sub-control section 400 executes various effects based on these pieces of information. When a power restoration command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the information about the game state and the performance state is updated based on the information included in the power restoration command, but the performance state is the point specialization A state. Only when information indicating that is received, the presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the normal state instead of the point specialization A state. For this reason, when power failure and power recovery occurs when the presentation state of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, after power recovery, the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 's production state becomes inconsistent. In addition, this state of inconsistency in the presentation state is maintained until the presentation state of the main control unit 300 thereafter shifts to the normal state.

In step S3003, display point management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3005. The details of this display point management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143(a).

In step S3005, display item management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3007. The details of this display item management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3007, navigation-related display processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3009. For example, when the production state is the AT state, the number of AT remaining games and the number of AT additional games are displayed, and the number of medals obtained in that state is displayed. In addition, if the condition devices 7 to 12 are internally won, an effect is set to inform the correct operation order, and if the condition device 1 is internally won with the pseudo BB state schedule flag turned on, this pseudo BB. An effect is set to prompt the player to stop the role corresponding to the scheduled state flag. Further, when the AT state shifts to the pseudo BB state, if the conditions devices 7 to 12 are internally won, an effect is set to notify the operation order of the correct answer, and medals are obtained continuously from the AT state. A number is displayed. Thus, in this embodiment, the number of medals obtained is displayed through the AT state and the pseudo BB state. In the pseudo BB state, the value of the pseudo BB state remaining game number is displayed instead of the AT remaining game number, and the AT remaining game number is not subtracted.

In step S3009, other production setting processing is executed, and this production control processing is terminated. Here, for example, a process of displaying a background according to the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 or executing an appropriate rendering is executed. In this process, if the display points have reached 1000 when all the reels have stopped, 1000 is subtracted from the display points, and a display indicating that the player has obtained the right to acquire an item in the next game (for example, "Roulette x 1") is included. Also, in the confrontation state, a process of executing a confrontation effect based on the result of the confrontation is included. It should be noted that, in displaying the background according to the effect state in this processing, if the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 do not match, background is displayed.

Next, the details of the display point management process (step S3003) in the effect control process of FIG. 142 will be described with reference to FIG. 143(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the display point management process (step S3003) in FIG.

First, in step S3101, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not an acquisition point command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3103; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the production states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent (the main control unit 300 is in the point specialization A state, and the first sub-control unit 400 is in the normal state). be done. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3105; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3105, a point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 143(b). FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery for determining the value of acquired points. This table is the same as the part of the table shown in FIG. 136(b) that is used when the rendering state is the normal state. For example, if none of the condition devices are internally elected (in the case of a loss), 0 points are obtained with a probability of 90%, 5 points are obtained with a probability of 9%, and 10 points are obtained with a probability of 1%. Earn points. Note that the lottery process may be configured to be executed by the main control unit 300 . For example, when the production states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent, the acquisition points sent by the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 are derived separately from the normal acquisition points. and this value may be used in the first sub-control section 400 .

In step S3107, the acquired point value is added to the display points, and the process proceeds to step S3121. For the acquired points to be added here, the value of acquired points included in the acquired point command is used as it is. specified value is used. A display point is a point displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

In step S3111, to which the acquired point information is not obtained in step S3101, it is determined whether or not an item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3113; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3121.

In step S3113, the cumulative point value included in the item addition command is set as the display point value, and the process proceeds to step S3121. Note that if the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match, this process resolves the mismatch.

In step S3121, it is determined whether or not the condition for displaying the display point is satisfied. This condition is satisfied when the rendering state of the first sub-control section 400 is any of the initial state, point specialization A state, normal state, point specialization B state, portent state, and confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3123; otherwise, the display point management process ends.

In step S3123, processing for displaying the value of the display point is executed, and this display point management processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 144, the details of the display item management process (step S3005) in the effect control process of FIG. 142 will be described. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the display item management process (step S3005) in FIG.

First, in step S3201, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not an item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3203; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3203, the information of the currently possessed item is updated based on the information included in the item addition command, and the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, it is determined whether or not the display point value is greater than 0, or whether or not "roulette x 1" is displayed. If any of these conditions are met, the process advances to step S3207; otherwise, the display item management process ends.

In step S3207, item acquisition effect setting processing is executed, and this display item management processing ends. Details of the item acquisition effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 .

In step S3211, which is followed when it is determined in step S3201 that information on item addition has not been obtained, it is determined whether or not an internal winning command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S3213; otherwise, the display item management process ends.

In step S3213, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is four. When the effect state in the main control unit 300 is the showdown state, the internal winning command includes information on the value of the number of remaining games in the showdown state, and the value of the number of remaining games in the showdown state is included in the game immediately before the showdown effect. be 4. That is, the above determination is for determining whether or not the current game is the game immediately before the confrontation effect. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S3215; otherwise. This display item management process ends.

At step S3215, an effect is set to use the "killing rate UP" item among the displayed items. Specifically, an effect of erasing all of the displayed "Kill Rate UP" items and displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (match result determined in the AT-related processing of FIG. 133) is executed. Note that the above effect is not set when the "killing rate UP" item is not displayed.

In step S3217, the item information (possessed items and display items) stored in the RAM 408 is cleared, and the display item management process ends.

Next, details of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in the display item management process of FIG. 144 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 executed first, the item currently displayed in the effect image display 157 is compared with information on the item currently possessed, and the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not there is a difference between the two items as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3305; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3305, an item obtainment effect is set as a result of not obtaining an additional item, and the item obtainment effect setting process is terminated.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not there is one item difference as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise (when there are multiple item differences), the process proceeds to step S3321.

In step S3313, an item obtainment effect indicating that an item has been obtained is set, and the item obtainment effect setting process is terminated. When an item is acquired (acquired in step S1321 in FIG. 129(a)) during normal game progress, the acquired item information is added to the possessed item information included in the item addition command. Since this information is not reflected in the displayed items, only the newly obtained one will be different when compared with the information of the items in possession. Based on the above, when the displayed item is compared with the information of the currently possessed item, and only the newly acquired item is different, the newly acquired item is added in step S3313. A production (item acquisition production) is set. Note that when the number of items possessed reaches the upper limit, although the item addition command is transmitted, there is no newly acquired item, so there is no difference even if the above comparison is made. In this case, the effect is set in the same manner as the item acquisition effect, in which the final item is not added (step S3305).

In step S3321, it is determined whether or not there are a plurality of different items as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3321.

In step S3321, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3323.

In step S3323, it is determined whether or not the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item that is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. FIG. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3325; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3313.

In step S3325, an item acquisition effect is set to add the oldest of the "defeat rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed, and this item acquisition effect setting process is terminated. When the power is restored due to the end of business hours or the like, the information of the items possessed by the main control unit 300 is restored (step S1011 in FIG. 126), but the first sub-control unit 400 Information about the displayed item is cleared from RAM 408 . If a new item is acquired in this state, the item displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the possessed item information included in the item addition command may differ for a plurality of items including the newly acquired item. have a nature. In this way, if the displayed item and the information of the possessed item are different from the information of the newly acquired item (determination of No in step S3311), the 3325) to add the oldest item among the "destruction rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed (step S3325). If the player does not possess the "Killing Rate UP" item, an item acquisition rendering for adding a newly acquired item is set (step S3313). However, when the production state is the confrontation state, the items to be obtained are different from those in the normal state (steps S1305 and S1315 in FIG. 129), so the oldest item among the "defeat rate UP" items possessed is If the item acquisition effect is performed, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the effect state is the confrontation state, an item acquisition effect for adding a newly acquired item is set (Yes in step S3321).

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 146(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 146(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 146(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 146(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an instruction for image control in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 146(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 146(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 146(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 146(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Explanation of operation≫
The features of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below using an operation example.

[From the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 147, the flow from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state will be described. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the setting or clearing the RAM (at the start of a round, step S1009 in FIG. 126, step S1101 in FIG. 127). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next cycle, step S1E11 in FIG. 139, step S1F13 in FIG. 140(a)). FIG. 147(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. "0000/1000" at the bottom left of this display indicates the total points on the display at the top and the upper limit of the total points on the display at the bottom. That is, the display of "0000/1000" indicates that the accumulated points are 0 points. This display of points is displayed in the confrontation state until the result of the confrontation is displayed, and is not displayed in the AT state or pseudo BB state (steps S3121 and S3123 in FIG. 143(a)). In this embodiment, a value different from the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 may be displayed as the accumulated points on the display due to power failure and power restoration.

When the game is started in this state and one game ends (all reels are stopped), the display of the effect image display device 157 is changed to the state shown in FIG. 147(b). During this one game, the number of games to shift to the confrontation mode and the precursor state is set (FIG. 130). In FIG. 147(b), a message indicating that the confrontation mode has been set is displayed at the top of the screen. At the time of FIG. 147(a), the confrontation mode has not yet been set, and a message indicating that the confrontation mode setting has not been completed is displayed at the top of the screen. In accordance with the number of games set here, it shifts to the precursor state.

Only one game is set in the initial state, and when the next game is started from the state shown in FIG. 147(b), the state shifts to point specialization A state (step S1A07 in FIG. 135). FIG. 147(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this point specialization A state is set. This point specialization A state is a state in which the points for obtaining items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 136(b)). A message is displayed in the upper part of the screen indicating that it is in a state where it is easy to After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C05 in FIG. 137(a)). FIG. 147(d) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set.

[From the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state, until the production state returns to the normal state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 148, a description will be given of the flow from the normal state to the point specialization B state or false portent state to the normal state again. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state changes from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state and returns to the normal state.

The normal state is a presentation state in which the player mainly stays during the round. In this presentation state, points may be acquired based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (see FIG. 136). FIGS. 148(a) and 148(b) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. FIG. 148(a) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 148(b) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. From this normal state, it shifts to any of the point specialization B state, the false portent state, and the true portent state. Of these, the point specialization B state and the false portent state transition to the normal state again, whereas the true portent state does not transition to the normal state. Here, the transition to the point-specific B state and the false portent state will be described.

In the normal state, a lottery for transition to the point specialization B state is executed based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (Fig. 132). ) step S1C13). FIGS. 148(c) and 148(d) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this point specialization B state is set. FIG. 148(c) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 148(d) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. This point specialization B state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 136(b)). A message is displayed at the top of the screen indicating that the number is likely to increase. After 5 games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C25 in FIG. 137(c)).

In addition, in the normal state, when the number of games to start the false precursory state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the false precursory state (the number of remaining precursory precursory games) is set and the state shifts to the false precursory state (FIG. 137(b) ) step S1C19). FIGS. 148(e) and 148(f) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the false portent state is set. FIG. 148(e) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 148(f) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. This false portent state is a state in which points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 136(b)). In FIGS. 148(e) and 148(f), a message indicating a precursor state is displayed in the upper right of the screen. This screen is the same screen as the true precursor state, and is configured so that the type of the precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) with this screen alone. This false portent state transitions to a normal state after the set number of games has passed (step S1D09 in FIG. 138).

[Acquisition of items when the production state is normal]
The flow of item acquisition when the rendering state is the normal state will be described below with reference to FIG. 149 . This figure is a diagram showing an example of the item acquisition effect when the effect state is the normal state.

In a normal state, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment), a lottery for an acquired item is executed in exchange for this predetermined number of accumulated points (route of Yes in step S1303 in FIG. 129(a)). , an effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 144, FIG. 145). FIGS. 149(a) to (f) show an example of changes due to this item acquisition effect.

First, FIG. 149(a) shows that the cumulative points on the display have reached 1000 in the normal state. When all the reels stop in this state, 1000 is subtracted from the accumulated points on the display as shown in FIG. is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.

Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 to start the game, the display of "Roulette x 1" shown in Fig. 149(b) is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Fig. 149(c). Further, as shown in FIG. 149(d), a roulette effect is executed in which one is selected from three of "defeat one", "defeat rate? UP", and "chance". Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, an effect in which one of the options is determined is executed. FIG. 149(e) shows an example of displaying that the "defeat rate small UP" item has been acquired. Also, FIG. 149(f) shows that the display of items obtained in the next game has been added.

"Defeat 1" and "Defeat Rate? UP" in FIG. 149(d) indicate the obtainability of items with the same names. Also, the display of "chance" indicates the acquisition possibility of some item. In addition, when the number of items reaches the upper limit and cannot be obtained, this "chance" is selected and an effect that the item cannot be obtained is executed. In other words, the options displayed during the item acquisition effect are not limited to items with the same name. good too.

In addition, as explained above, there are cases where you can move from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the precursor state to acquire more points, but in the point specialization B state or the precursor state, items cannot be obtained. It's becoming For this reason, for example, when the accumulated points are 2000 or more, the point-specialized B state (or precursor state) may shift to the normal state, but only one item can be obtained in one game. there is For example, when the accumulated points are 2000 or more, the item acquisition process is executed continuously for two games.

[From the normal state to the true omen state, and then to the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 150, a description will be given of the flow from the normal state to the true omen state to the confrontation state. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the true omen state and shifts to the confrontation state.

FIG. 150(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. In the normal state, when the number of games to start the true precursor state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the true precursor state (the number of games remaining in the precursor state) is set and the state shifts to the true precursor state (FIG. 137(b)). step S1C19). FIG. 150(b) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this true precursor state is set. This true omen state is a state in which the points for obtaining items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 136(b)). In FIG. 150(b), a message indicating a precursor state is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Note that this screen is the same screen as the false precursor state, and is configured so that the type of the precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) with this screen alone. When the set number of games has passed, this true precursor state shifts to a confrontation state (step S1D07 in FIG. 138). FIG. 150(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this confrontation state is set.

[Regarding item acquisition effects during confrontation]
The flow of item acquisition when the effect state is the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 151(a) to (c). This figure is a diagram showing an example of the item acquisition effect when the effect state is the showdown state.

In the confrontation state, an effect indicating that the state has shifted to the confrontation state is executed in the first game, but if there are accumulated points remaining in this game, items can be obtained in exchange for them (Fig. 129(a)). Yes in step S1313), an effect indicating this (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 144, FIG. 145) is executed. Since there is no route to transition from the confrontation state to the normal state, and item acquisition in the normal state is not performed in the current round, 130 points are wasted. For this reason, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which items can be acquired in exchange for the remaining points that do not reach 1000 points in the normal state.

First, FIG. 151(a) shows that there are 130 accumulated points on the display in the game (true precursor state) immediately before shifting to the confrontation state. Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 to start the game, the accumulated points on the display are set to 0 as shown in FIG. ” is executed. Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, an effect in which one of the options is determined is executed. FIG. 151(c) shows an example of displaying that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been obtained. It should be noted that the content of the item obtaining effect here may be the same as the item obtaining effect in the normal state, or may be different.

The above is the effect executed in the first game in the confrontation state. In the second game, if the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, an effect using this item is executed (FIGS. 151(d) to (f)). On the other hand, when the "Killing rate UP" item is not displayed, the confrontation effect starts (Fig. 151(g)).

[Regarding item use effect during showdown]
The flow of item use when the presentation state is the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 151(d) to (f). This figure shows an example of the item use effect when the effect state is the confrontation state.

In the confrontation state, if the player has the "defeat rate UP" item, an effect (item use effect) using the "defeat rate UP" item is executed in the second game (Yes in step S3213 of FIG. 144). . First, by operating the start lever 135 at the start of the second game in the showdown state, a message "Defeat rate UP challenge" is displayed at the top of the screen as shown in FIG. 151(d). Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, a message "Press the 〇〇 button!" is displayed as shown in FIG. The victory probability (defeat rate) of the main character due to the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, and the "defeat rate UP" item is erased. FIG. 151(f) shows that the hero character's victory probability (defeat rate) is 72% due to the "defeat rate UP" item. It should be noted that it is not limited to the example in which the kill rate is displayed by the button operation described above, and the configuration may be such that the kill rate is displayed without requiring such an operation. Further, the operation means used for button operation may be used for the progress of the game, or may be used for performance regardless of the progress of the game.

The confrontation effect is started from the next game after the game in which the item use effect is executed. It should be noted that, if the "defeat rate UP" item is not displayed at the end of the first game of the confrontation effect, the above-mentioned item use effect is not executed, and the confrontation effect is started from the second game (Fig. 151(g)). is started.

[Regarding the case of winning all the confrontation effects in the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, the case where the game is completely won in the confrontation effect in the confrontation state will be described with reference to FIG. 152 . This figure is a diagram showing an example of a case where the showdown effect is completely won.

In the confrontation state, a lottery is executed to determine whether the main character will win against the enemy character (step S1615 in FIG. 133), and a confrontation effect is executed based on the result of this lottery (step S3009 in FIG. 142). It should be noted that the "defeat rate UP" item and the "defeat 1 body" item make it easier for the main character to win and make it easier to shift to the AT state (see the process of step S1615 in FIG. 133).

FIG. 152(a) shows an example of the start of the first battle of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 152(b) shows an example of the victory of the first race of the confrontation effect. At this time, at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 152(b), the characters "One body witnessed" indicating that the first game was won are displayed. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

FIG. 152(c) shows an example of the start of the second battle of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 152(d) shows an example of winning the second race of the confrontation effect. At this time, at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 152(d), the characters "Double Witness Destruction" are displayed to indicate that the player won the second battle. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

FIG. 152(e) shows an example of the start of the third battle of the confrontation production, and FIG. 152(f) shows an example of winning the third battle of the confrontation production. At this time, at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 152(f), the characters "Three bodies witnessed" indicating that the player won the third battle are displayed. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

In the case where the confrontation effect is to win all games, the AT state schedule flag is set to ON at the time of lottery for the result of the confrontation preceding this. As a result, the next game in which all wins have been achieved in the confrontation effect is shifted to the AT state (Yes at step S1E05 in FIG. 139). FIG. 152(g) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the AT state is set.

[Regarding the case of losing the showdown during the showdown]
A case where the player loses in the confrontation presentation in the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIG. 153 . This figure is a diagram showing an example of a case in which the player loses in the confrontation effect.

In the confrontation state, a lottery is executed to determine whether the main character will win against the enemy character (step S1615 in FIG. 133), and a confrontation effect is executed based on the result of this lottery (step S3009 in FIG. 142).

FIG. 153(a) shows an example of the start of the first battle of the confrontation production, and FIG. 153(b) shows an example of the defeat in the first battle of the confrontation production. As in the example of FIG. 152, when the confrontation effect is completely won, the state shifts to the AT state, but when the main character loses in the confrontation effect, the next game shifts to the initial state (step S1E11 in FIG. 139). FIG. 153(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. After shifting to the initial state, various settings are executed and the next cycle starts.

[Transition from AT state to pseudo BB or initial state]
The flow from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the effects that are executed from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state.

In the AT state, the player can make more profit by notifying the order of pressing the correct answer when the condition devices 7 to 12 (duplicate hands of minor hands 6 to 8) are internally won (step S3007 in FIG. 142). It is in a state where it can be obtained. FIG. 154(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the AT state is set. In the example of FIG. 154(a), three numbers are used to indicate the pressing order of the right, middle, correct answer. In addition, at the bottom left of the screen, the number of games remaining in AT state and the number of games played so far in AT state are displayed. The number of medals is displayed. The AT state shifts to the initial state when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 (step S1F13 in FIG. 140). FIG. 154(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. Note that the number of remaining AT games may be added (step S1627 in FIG. 133).

Also, in the AT state, a lottery is executed to enable transition to the pseudo BB state (step S1623 in FIG. 133). If the lottery is won, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and an effect is executed to prompt the player to stop the replay role 2 or the replay role 3, which are pseudo BB symbols (step S3007 in FIG. 142). Then, when the pattern of the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3 stops, the state shifts to the pseudo BB state (step S1F07 in FIG. 140(a)).

In the pseudo BB state, in the same way as in the AT state, when the conditions devices 7 to 12 (duplicate wins of minor wins 6 to 8) are internally won, the order of pressing the correct answer is reported, and the player can obtain more profit. (step S3007 in FIG. 142). FIG. 154(b) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the pseudo BB state is set. In the example of FIG. 154(b), three numerals are used to indicate the pressing order of the right, middle, correct answer. Further, the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state and the number of elapsed games in the pseudo BB state up to the present are displayed at the lower left of the screen. Further, the number of earned medals is displayed continuously from the AT state at the bottom right of the screen. This pseudo BB state includes two types of pseudo BB1 state which is shifted by the replay combination 2 and pseudo BB2 state which is shifted by the replay combination 3 . The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have passed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have passed (step S1F25 in FIG. 140(b)).

[Regarding the operation of reflecting the state of the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit 400]
The operations of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an operation example of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

As explained in the operation examples of FIGS. 147 to 154, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the points acquired in the normal state, the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the sign state, The cumulative points are increased, and items are acquired in exchange for a predetermined value (1000 in the embodiment) of cumulative points. In the example of FIG. 155 (the upper part of the figure), the effect state changes from the initial state to the normal state through the point specialization A state, and in the next game after reaching 1000 total points (cumulative P in the figure), 1000 It is shown that the item "Medium kill rate UP" was acquired in exchange for the cumulative points (Main control: Medium UP added to possessed item column). Also, after that (lower part of the figure), in the next game when the total points reached 1010, in exchange for 1000 total points, the "kill rate small UP" item (main control: small UP added to the possession item column) was acquired. is shown. It should be noted that only 10 accumulated points remain here and are used in subsequent games.

The above operations are executed in the main control section 300 , but these states are reflected by the first sub-control section 400 . First, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 reflects the effect state of the main control unit 300 (step S1A35 in FIG. 135, step S3001 in FIG. 142), and the effect state such as the operation examples in FIGS. state according to

Also, in the first sub-control section 400, the points acquired for each game are added to the display points (step S3107 in FIG. 143(a)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155, the display points and the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are the same. By displaying the value of the display points, the player can grasp the accumulated points of the main control section 300 (step S3123 in FIG. 143(a)).

Furthermore, in the first sub-control unit 400, when an item is acquired in the main control unit 300, the information of the possessed item is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). is updated (step S3207 in FIG. 144, step S3313 in FIG. 145). FIG. 155 shows that in a game in which a possessed item is added in the main control section 300, an item acquisition effect is executed and a display item of the first sub-control section 400 is added.

[Handling of points in the event of a power outage/restoration]
156 and 157, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. 156 and 157 are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences power failure and power recovery.

In FIG. 155, the operation of reflecting the state of the main control section 300 in the first sub-control section 400 has been described. However, when the power is restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. The accumulated points and the displayed points of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. FIG. 156(a) shows an example in which a power failure/recovery occurs when the cumulative point value reaches 500. FIG. In this case, there is no change in the accumulated points of the main control section 300 before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the display points of the first sub-control section 400 are 0 after the power failure and power recovery. In this case, since the display points increase from this point, although the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 and the amount of increase are the same, the values do not match.

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated. (Step S3207 in FIG. 144, Step S3313 in FIG. 145). FIG. 156(a) shows that in a game in which a possessed item is added in the main control section 300, an item acquisition effect is executed and a display item of the first sub-control section 400 is added. there is Also, at this time, the value of the accumulated points is reflected in the value of the displayed points (step S3113 in FIG. 143(a)). Therefore, from this point on, the accumulated points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match. In this case, the item acquisition effect is executed before the display points reach 1,000.

Unlike the above example, if power failure and power recovery occurs when the production state is the point specialization A state, it is configured so that not only the points but also the production state will be inconsistent ( step S3001 in FIG. 142). FIG. 156(b) shows an example in which power failure and power recovery occurred when the presentation state was the point specialization A state and the cumulative point value reached 500. In FIG. In this case, there is no change in the accumulated points of the main control section 300 before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the display points of the first sub-control section 400 are 0 after the power failure and power recovery. Also, it is shown that the effect state of the main control unit 300 remains the point specialization A state before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the normal state. ing. In this case, the amount of increase in display points does not reflect the amount of increase in accumulated points of main control section 300, and the amount of increase is drawn separately (step S3105 in FIG. 143(a)). FIG. 156(b) shows that there are cases where the amount of increase in accumulated points and the amount of increase in display points do not match. Specifically, after the power failure, the cumulative points increase in the order of 20, 200, 0, 0 from 500, while the display points increase in the order of 0, 5, 20, 5, 0. ing. After that, when the production state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, it becomes a state that matches the production state of the first sub-control unit 400, and from here on, as in FIG. , the amount of increase in the display points of the first sub-controller 400 is the same. Then, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits the information of the possessed item (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated ( Step S3207 in FIG. 144, step S3313 in FIG. 145), and the accumulated point value is reflected in the display point value (step S3113 in FIG. 143(a)). From this point on, the cumulative points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match.

FIG. 157 shows an example in which the power failure and power recovery occurred immediately after the presentation state shifted from the initial state to the point specialization A state. In this example, both the accumulated points and the display points immediately after power restoration are zero. 156(b), the effect state of the main control unit 300 remains the point specialization A state, but the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the normal state. ing. In this case, as in FIG. 156(b), the amount of increase in display points does not reflect the amount of increase in accumulated points of main control unit 300, and the amount of increase is drawn separately (step S3105 in FIG. 143(a)). ). FIG. 157 shows that there are cases where the amount of increase in cumulative points and the amount of increase in display points do not match. After that, when the production state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, it becomes a state that matches the production state of the first sub-control unit 400, and from here the main control unit 300 , and the amount of increase in the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 become the same. Then, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits the information of the possessed item (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated ( Step S3207 in FIG. 144, step S3313 in FIG. 145), and the accumulated point value is reflected in the display point value (step S3113 in FIG. 143(a)). From this point on, the cumulative points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure (1)]
158, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 158, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the "medium kill rate UP" item is possessed and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "medium kill rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 158, an example of obtaining a "small kill rate UP" item is shown, and in this case, information is transmitted that the item "medium kill rate UP" and "small kill rate UP" item are possessed. . Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 158, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 158). 145 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 158, an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which has not yet been displayed, of the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and the "Small Destruction Rate UP" item is obtained. It will be. In the example of FIG. 158, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 158, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, when there are a "medium kill rate UP" item and a "low kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and a "medium kill rate UP" item is displayed, an item use effect in a confrontation state is executed. (Item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). In this case, since the "defeat rate increase" item is displayed, all of the "defeat rate increase" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 151). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 158). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 133). step S1615). FIG. 158 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure/recovery (2)]
159, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 159, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the "medium kill rate UP" item is possessed and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "medium kill rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). The example of FIG. 159 shows an example in which the "destroy 1 body" item is obtained, and in this case, the information that the "defeat rate UP" item and the "defeat 1 body" item are transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 159, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 159). 145 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 159, an effect is executed in which the oldest item that has not yet been displayed is the "medium defeat rate UP" item. In the example of FIG. 159, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 159, it is shown that the rendering state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are a "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and a "Defeat 1 body" item as possessed items, and a "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item is a display item, and the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed. I will explain (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). In this case, since the "defeat rate increase" item is displayed, all of the "defeat rate increase" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 151). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 159). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 133). FIG. 159 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (3)]
160, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 160, as a result of a power outage and restoration in a state in which two items of "Medium Destruction Rate UP" are possessed and a state in which these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 possesses the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item. An example is shown in which there is information but this item is not displayed (there is no display item).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). The example in FIG. 160 shows an example in which a "small kill rate UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that two "medium kill rate UP" items and a "small kill rate UP" item are possessed is transmitted. be done. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 160, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 160). 145 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 160, the effect of acquiring the "medium kill rate UP" item, which is the oldest item that has not yet been displayed among the two "medium kill rate UP" items and the "low kill rate UP" item, is executed. will be In the example of FIG. 160, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 160, it is shown that the production state has changed to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are two "Medium Destruction Rate UP" items and a "Small Destruction Rate UP" item as possessed items, and the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed with the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item as the displayed item. (In the confrontation state, an item acquisition effect may be executed, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). In this case, since the "defeat rate increase" item is displayed, all of the "defeat rate increase" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 151). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 160). In addition, since the kill rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that you have, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item that are not displayed here are also reflected. (Step S1615 in FIG. 133). FIG. 160 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (4)]
161, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 161, as a result of a power outage and restoration in a state in which the item "Defeat 1" and "Medium Defeat Rate UP" item are possessed and in a state in which these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 "defeats 1". ' item and a 'medium kill rate UP' item, but this item is not displayed (there is no displayed item).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). The example of FIG. 161 shows an example of acquiring a "low kill rate UP" item. information is sent. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 161, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 161). 145 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 161, an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which has not yet been displayed, of the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and the "Small Destruction Rate UP" item is acquired. It will be. In the example of FIG. 161, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 161, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are "defeat 1" item, "medium kill rate UP" item, and "small kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and in a state where there is a "medium kill rate UP" item as a display item, in the confrontation state A case where an item use effect is executed will be described (although an item acquisition effect may be executed in a confrontation state, it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). In this case, since the "defeat rate increase" item is displayed, all of the "defeat rate increase" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 151). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 161). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 133). step S1615). FIG. 161 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (5)]
162, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 162, as a result of a power failure and restoration in the state in which the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed and in the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has the possession information of the "defeat 1 body" item, but this An example is shown in which no items are displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). The example of FIG. 162 shows an example in which the "defeat rate small UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "defeat 1 body" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item are possessed is transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 162, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 162). 145 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 162, an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which has not yet been displayed, is the “small kill rate UP” item. In the example of FIG. 162, it is shown that the item "defeat rate small UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 162, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are a "defeat 1" item and a "small kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and a "small kill rate UP" item is displayed, and an item use effect is executed in a confrontation state. I will explain (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate small UP" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate UP" items are erased, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 151). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 162). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 133). FIG. 162 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure/recovery (6)]
163, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 163, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the "medium kill rate UP" item is possessed and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "medium kill rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items). Also, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 163, it is shown that the rendering state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 163) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 129(a)), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). The example of FIG. 163 shows an example in which the "Killing Rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "Medium Killing Rate UP" item and the "Killing Rate? UP" item are possessed are transmitted. . Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, an effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 145). In the example of FIG. 163, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 158) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. In the example of FIG. 163, it is shown that the item "defeat rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 163, in a state in which the possessed items include the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate? UP" item, and the displayed item is the "defeat rate? UP" item, the item use presentation in the confrontation state is performed. executed. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 151). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 163). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "medium defeat rate UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 133). step S1615). FIG. 163 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (7)]
164, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an operation example in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences power failure and power recovery.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 164, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the item "medium defeat rate UP" and the item "small defeat rate UP" are in possession and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 reads "Medium defeat rate UP” item and “Small kill rate UP” item are present, but these items are not displayed (there are no displayed items). Also, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 164, it is shown that the production state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 164) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 129(a)), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). The example of FIG. 164 shows an example in which the "Killing Rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the player possesses the "Medium Killing Rate UP" item, the "Small Killing Rate UP" item, and the "Killing Rate? UP" item. information is sent. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 145). In the example of FIG. 164, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 158) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. The example of FIG. 164 shows that the item "Killing Rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 164, there are a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possessed items, and there is a "defeat rate? UP" item as a display item. executed. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 151). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 164). In addition, since the kill rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that you have, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item that are not displayed here are also reflected. (Step S1615 in FIG. 133). FIG. 164 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure (8)]
165, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 165, as a result of a power failure and restoration in the state in which the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed and in the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has the possession information of the "defeat 1 body" item, but this An example is shown in which no items are displayed (there are no displayed items). Also, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 165, it is shown that the rendering state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 165) in the main control unit 300, a process for obtaining an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 129(a)). Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). The example of FIG. 165 shows an example in which the "Killing Rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "Killing 1 body" item and the "Killing Rate? UP" item are possessed are transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 145). In the example of FIG. 165, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 158) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. In the example of FIG. 165, it is shown that the item "defeat rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 165, there are a "Defeat 1 body" item and a "Defeat rate? UP" item as possessed items, and an item use effect in a confrontation state is executed in a state where there is a "Defeat rate? UP" item as a displayed item. be done. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 151). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 165). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 133). FIG. 165 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the player possesses the "Defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production (right side of FIG. 165).

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (9)]
166, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 156 and 157, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. described the operation of Similarly, in the example of FIG. 166, 130 is maintained as the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure and power recovery, while the display point of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 0 after the power failure and power recovery. It is shown that In this example, the item is not in possession at the time of power failure.

In the example of FIG. 166, it is shown that the production state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, when there is a surplus in the accumulated points (130 in the example of FIG. 166) in the main control unit 300, a process for obtaining an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 129(a)). Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 166, an example of acquiring the "defeat 1 body" item is shown, and in this case, the information that the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed is transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 144). However, the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state is not executed when the display point is 0 (No in step S3205 in FIG. 144). In the example of FIG. 166, it is shown that although the item "defeat 1 body" is obtained, it is not displayed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 166, there is a "Defeat 1 body" item as a possessed item, but since there is no display item, the item use effect in the confrontation state is not executed, and the confrontation effect is started. In the example of FIG. 166, it is shown that the first game of the confrontation effect is executed in the second game in the confrontation state. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment employs a configuration in which cumulative points are obtained as the game progresses, items are acquired according to the cumulative points, and an item acquisition effect is executed at that time. When the item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the accumulated points increase (count up) as the game progresses. The point update is not limited to addition. Also, the initial value and the target value can be appropriately set. That is, it is sufficient that the value of the provided counter is updated in the direction of approaching the target value.

In addition, what can be obtained when the points reach the target value may be an item that brings an advantageous state to the player like the item of this embodiment, or an item that provides information about the gaming machine. There may be, and some effect may be executed like the item acquisition effect of the present embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and this display point is updated to the same value as the accumulated points, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, a configuration is adopted in which the cumulative point value is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the display points are set to have the same initial value and update amount as the total points. Any configuration is acceptable. The display points are managed by the first sub-controller 400, and are cleared to the initial value (0) when power is restored. On the other hand, the accumulated points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if the power is cut off and restored (except when reset processing is involved). Due to this difference in operation, when a power failure or power recovery occurs, the total points and the display points do not match (the value of the total points is different from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since acquisition of items is based on accumulated points, items may be acquired even when the number of points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is less than 1,000. By adopting a configuration in which the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match when some condition (in this embodiment, power failure and power recovery) is established like this configuration, the displayed points (display points) Even when is less (or more) than the target value, an event such as item acquisition can be expected to occur.

In the above description, the case where the value of the accumulated points is maintained even if the power is cut off and the power is restored has been described. is pressed and the setting is changed), and in this case, the value of the accumulated points is cleared to the initial value (0) after the power failure and power recovery (step S1009 in FIG. 126, step S1101 in FIG. 127). . In this case, even if power is cut off and restored, the accumulated points and the displayed points will match. In other words, as states after the power failure and power restoration, there are a state in which the accumulated points and the display points match (with reset processing) and a state in which they do not match (without reset processing). For this reason, for example, when a power failure occurs at all the game machines in the shop due to the end and start of business of the shop, the states of the game machines can be changed so that the players can grasp the states of the game machines. can be made difficult. In addition, as a state after power failure and power recovery when reset processing is involved, a configuration in which the initial value of the display points is different from the initial value of the total points (for example, the initial value of the display points is randomly determined, Alternatively, the initial value may be a value obtained by adding a predetermined value to the initial value of the total points. In this case, the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match both with and without the reset process, making it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the update amount of the total points when the production state is the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the premonitory state is larger than the update amount of the cumulative points when the production state is the normal state. (Fig. 136(b)). It is not always necessary to adopt such a configuration in which the update amount of the accumulated points differs depending on the state, but by providing such a state, the game can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved. Even if the number of points is small, if the update amount is large, the player may be expected to continue playing the game enthusiastically.

Further, in the present embodiment, if power failure and power recovery occurs when the production state is the point specialization A state, the normal states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent. The update amounts of the point and the display point are different (step S3105 in FIG. 143(a), FIGS. 156 and 157). In this case, the change in the amount of update of the displayed points (display points) makes it appear that the player is at a disadvantage, but actually the player is in an advantageous state. In this way, when the power is interrupted and the power is restored in a state in which the update of the total points and the display points is advantageous to the player, the update amount of the points (display points) displayed after the power is restored is By making it different, it is possible to hide the state that is actually advantageous to the player. In addition, players who are familiar with this configuration can expect that even if the situation appears to be disadvantageous, it is actually advantageous. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the above operation occurs when a power failure and power recovery occurs in the point special A state. In the state B), the above operation should be performed when the power is interrupted and restored. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or power recovery occurs in the point specialization A state, the background of the normal state is displayed instead of the background of the point specialization A state, which is actually advantageous to the player. This further enhances the effect of hiding the state where the user is in the state (step S3009 in FIG. 142).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the set value is changed, a configuration is adopted in which the initial state changes to the point specialization A state and then the normal state. In other words, after the setting is changed, the update amount of the total points becomes advantageous to the player before it becomes disadvantageous to the player. In this case, if the setting is left as it is after the setting is changed, there is a risk that the player who sees that the point specialization A state has been established will know whether or not the setting has been changed. However, in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed by causing a power failure and power recovery at the point of transition to the point specialization A state.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (2)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item obtaining effect is executed and the item is displayed. Also, when using an item, a configuration is adopted in which an item use effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. Also, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

In addition, in this embodiment, the item information displayed in the first sub control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the possessed item information managed in the main control unit 300. In addition, by displaying the information of the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, a configuration is adopted in which the state of the possessed item is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, the configuration is adopted in which the information of all possessed items is sent and the displayed item information is made the same information as the possessed item information. Any configuration may be used as long as the item information can be updated to the same information as the possessed item information.

The displayed item information will be cleared when the power is restored, but the information on the items in your possession will remain the same as it was before the power failure (except when reset processing is involved). ). Due to this operation, the possessed items are not displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the power is cut off and restored. In this case, the player may feel uncomfortable if the item use effect is executed in spite of the existence of the information of the possessed item. In this embodiment, by redisplaying the item that was not displayed at the timing when a new item is obtained in the normal state, it is possible to execute the item use effect without any discomfort (FIGS. 158 to 161). The timing of the redisplay is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, but if the timing of the item use effect is determined in advance, it may be earlier. In any case, it is sufficient that the items that were displayed before the power failure are displayed again after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed. In addition, if there are multiple items that are not displayed due to a power outage, by redisplaying less than this number of items at once, a large number of items can be redisplayed at once. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort from being displayed (Fig. 160). In addition, as in the present embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, the item "defeat rate UP" is to be redisplayed, but the item "destroy 1 body" is not to be redisplayed. In this way, items to be redisplayed and items not to be redisplayed may be provided, and a configuration in which items are uniformly redisplayed may be adopted. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, items to be redisplayed are targeted for the item use effect, while items that are not to be redisplayed are not targeted for the item use effect. In this configuration, by redisplaying the item that is the target of the item use presentation, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

It should be noted that by redisplaying an item that has not been displayed due to a power outage at the timing of the item acquisition effect as in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce discomfort during redisplay. Also, by storing the information about acquired items, it may be possible to prevent the player from being put in a disadvantageous state.

It should be noted that, for example, even in the case of a configuration in which the possessed item of the main control unit 300 changes to a more advantageous item based on the internal winning condition device, the above-described item re-display configuration can be employed. In this case, the re-displayed item becomes more advantageous, and the interest in the game may be enhanced. Note that, in this configuration, the items displayed before the power failure and the items displayed after the power failure are displayed differently.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (3)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item obtaining effect is executed and the item is displayed. Also, when using an item, a configuration is adopted in which an item use effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. Also, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

In addition, in this embodiment, the item information displayed in the first sub control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the possessed item information managed in the main control unit 300. In addition, by displaying the information of the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, a configuration is adopted in which the state of the possessed item is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, the configuration is adopted in which the information of all possessed items is sent and the displayed item information is made the same information as the possessed item information. Any configuration may be used as long as the item information can be updated to the same information as the possessed item information.

The displayed item information will be cleared when the power is restored, but the information on the items in your possession will remain the same as it was before the power failure (except when reset processing is involved). ). Due to this operation, the possessed items are not displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the power is cut off and restored. In this case, the player may feel uncomfortable if the item use effect is executed in spite of the existence of the information of the possessed item. In this embodiment, an opportunity to obtain a new item is provided in the first game in a confrontation state, and a configuration is adopted in which the item used in the item use effect can be displayed (step S1315 in FIG. 129(a)). With this configuration, it is possible to create a state in which no sense of incongruity is caused even if the item use effect is subsequently executed (FIGS. 163 to 165).

Note that in this embodiment, the types of items that can be obtained in the confrontation state are different from the types of items that can be obtained in the normal state. There is For this reason, the items that are shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect in the confrontation state are the items acquired in the confrontation state, not the items that are no longer displayed due to the power failure and power restoration. The timing of item acquisition and item acquisition effect is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, but if the timing of item use effect is predetermined, it may be earlier. In any case, after the item that was displayed before the power failure is no longer displayed due to the restoration of power and before the item use effect is executed, the item acquisition effect will be executed for the newly obtained item and the item will be used. Any configuration can be used as long as it is used for displaying. Note that in the present embodiment, regardless of the number of items that are not displayed due to a power failure, only one item can be obtained and displayed as a result in the confrontation state. In this configuration, if there are multiple items that are not displayed, a smaller number of items will be newly displayed. If new items can be acquired in accordance with the number of items that are not displayed, there is a risk that the player's interests will not be balanced or that the player will feel uncomfortable. If the number of newly displayed items is set to be smaller than the number of items that are not displayed, as in , it may be possible to prevent the item use effect from giving a sense of incongruity. In addition, as in the present embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, the item "Kill Rate UP" is targeted for the item use effect, but the item "Defeat 1 body" is not targeted for the item use effect. In this way, not all items are subject to the item use effect, and some items may be subject to the item use effect and others may not. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the "Kill Rate UP" item, which is the object of the item use effect, may be displayed in the item acquisition effect in the confrontation state (FIGS. 163 to 165). With this configuration, when there is an item that is not displayed, the item that is the target of the item use effect can be displayed, and the item use effect can be executed without a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the item that is the target of the item use effect is not displayed due to the power failure and power recovery. is reflected in (FIGS. 163 and 164). As in this configuration, even if the item targeted for the item use effect is not displayed due to power failure and power restoration, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, after the item that was displayed before the power failure is no longer displayed due to the power restoration, until the item use effect is executed, the item acquisition effect is executed for the newly obtained item and the item is displayed. In doing so, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an item of the same type as the item displayed before the power failure is newly acquired. As a specific example, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the "small kill rate UP" item is no longer displayed, a new "medium kill rate UP" item is acquired.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (4)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item obtaining effect is executed and the item is displayed. Acquisition of an item makes it easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the accumulated points increase (count up) as the game progresses. The point update is not limited to addition. Also, the initial value and the target value can be appropriately set. That is, it is sufficient that the value of the provided counter is updated in the direction of approaching the target value. In this embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. Also, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

Further, in this embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and this display point is updated to the same value as the accumulated points, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, a configuration is adopted in which the cumulative point value is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the display points are set to have the same initial value and update amount as the total points. Any configuration is acceptable. The display points are managed by the first sub-controller 400, and are cleared to the initial value (0) when power is restored. On the other hand, the accumulated points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if power is lost and restored (except when reset processing is involved). Due to this difference in operation, when a power failure or power recovery occurs, the accumulated points and the display points do not match (the accumulated points differ from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since acquisition of items is based on accumulated points, items may be acquired even when the number of points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is less than 1,000. Here, when the display point is 0, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not executed when the item is acquired (FIG. 166). As in this configuration, by setting a case where the item acquisition effect is executed and a case where it is not executed when an item is acquired, it is possible to know that the item is being acquired even if the item acquisition effect is not executed. can be expected.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the display point is 0, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not executed even when the item is acquired. Even if the display point is 0, if the item acquisition effect is performed, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur. However, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which whether or not to execute the item acquisition effect is determined according to some displayed value, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, the case where the display point is 0 means that the value of the display point has not changed after the power failure and power recovery. sometimes it is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games for transition to the true omen state is set, and the number of games for transitioning to the showdown state from there is set separately. That is, it can be said that the timing of transition to the confrontation state is set based on the number of games. Also, in this confrontation state, a new item may be acquired in the first game. These configurations can be said to be configurations in which an item may be acquired based on the number of elapsed games. By combining this configuration with a configuration that provides a case where the item acquisition effect is executed and a case where it is not executed when an item is acquired, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the number of games while expecting that the item has been acquired. .

It should be noted that the advantage of the acquired item may differ depending on whether or not the item acquisition effect is executed when the item is acquired. For example, the acquired item may be more advantageous when the item acquisition effect is not executed than when the item acquisition effect is executed. In the case of this configuration, expectations can be heightened even when the item acquisition effect is not executed.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (5)]
In this embodiment, if there is an item that has been hidden due to a power outage, and the showdown state is entered, the hidden item will not be displayed. is derived, the player is not in a disadvantageous state. Here, unlike the present embodiment, when a state in which there is an item that has been hidden due to a power outage is shifted to a confrontation state, this item is displayed before the item is deleted by the item use effect. may be An example of this configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of redisplaying an item that has been hidden before the item is used (erased).

In this FIG. 167, it is assumed that the state is shifted to the confrontation state in the same flow as in FIG. 164, and the item acquisition effect is executed. Specifically, when the total points are 130 and the power is cut off and restored while the player has the "medium kill rate UP" item and the "small kill rate UP" item, the main control unit 300 cannot read this information. is retained, but the display will be in a state where there are no items or total points, and then the production state will transition to a confrontation state via the true sign state, and the item acquisition production by the total points will be "defeat rate ?UP” item is acquired.

In the example of FIG. 164, the item use effect is executed in the next game, and the kill rate is displayed at the timing of the third stop, and the "defeat rate UP" item is erased (see FIGS. 151(d) to (f)). ). At this time, the hidden "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and "Small Destruction Rate UP" item are not displayed again. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 167, at the timing of the next game start operation, the item acquisition effect and re-display are executed for the hidden "defeat rate medium UP" item and "defeat rate small UP" item, and the third item is displayed. After the kill rate is displayed at the timing of the stop, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted. The lower half of FIG. 167 shows changes in display and non-display of items in this game.

In the example of FIG. 167, items that are hidden due to a power outage are redisplayed at a timing different from usual. It is good also as a structure provided. In this configuration, there are a plurality of display timings for the items, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. For example, in the example of FIG. 167 above, when the item display timing is after the third stop operation (display associated with item acquisition), and when it is after the game start operation (display of hidden items in confrontation state). There are two ways. That is, there are cases where the stop operation in the game has ended (after the third stop operation) and cases where it has not ended yet (after the start operation and before the third stop operation). By displaying the items, the interest in the game can be improved. Particularly in the example of FIG. 167, the frequency of item display at the end of the game is higher than the frequency of item display during the game, which may surprise the player during the game. Also, as in the example of FIG. 167, items are displayed in a game in which an item use effect is executed, and by associating one of a plurality of display timings, item display at this timing Anticipation can be improved. Also, as in the example of FIG. 167, by associating one of a plurality of display timings with the timing of redisplaying an item that has been hidden due to a power outage, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for item display at this timing. can be improved. In the example of FIG. 167, depending on the item display timing, the number of displayed items may be one (item display based on total points), or may be one or more (redisplay of hidden items). ), however, by configuring the number of items to be displayed differently depending on a plurality of display timings in this way, it may be possible to improve expectations for item display.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (6)]
As described in [Handling of points when power failure and power recovery occurs] and [Handling of items when power failure and power recovery occurs (1)], etc., in this embodiment, When power is applied, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display points and display items are cleared in the first sub-control unit 400 . Further, when power failure occurs when the effect state is the point specialization A state, the normal state effect is executed after the power is restored. FIG. 168(a) shows that the display points and display items before power failure (FIG. 168(a1)) are cleared after power is restored (FIG. 168(a2)). Furthermore, it is shown that the effect of the point specialization A state that was executed before the power failure is changed to the normal state effect after the power is restored.

With the above configuration, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the slot machine 100 at the end of business hours at the start of business hours on the following day. However, for example, if power is cut off due to a lightning strike during a game, the display after the power is restored will not match the display before the power cut off, which may confuse the player or reduce his motivation to play. be. Therefore, if power failure occurs while one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating (during a game), the display after power recovery may be configured to match the display before power failure. good. FIG. 168(b) shows that the display points and display items before power failure (FIG. 168(b1)) are still displayed after power is restored (FIG. 168(b2)). Furthermore, it is shown that the effect of the point specialization A state that was executed before the power failure is still being executed after the power is restored. In this example, the characters "reel spinning" are displayed in the center of the screen so that the player can understand that the game is in progress after the power is restored, but this display may be omitted. . In the example of FIG. 168(b), the display points, display items, and background all match before and after the power failure. Even when the display before and after the power is restored is made to match, it may be possible to prevent confusion and loss of motivation to play. That is, when power failure occurs while any one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating (during a game), the display before the power failure is executed after the power is restored, and the reels 110 to 112 are all stopped. In that case, after the power is restored, a display different from the display before the power failure may be executed. In this case, the target display is not limited to the display including all of the display point, the display item, and the background as in the example of FIG. 168, and may be a display including any of these.

In order to realize the above operation, for example, in the present embodiment, the information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared due to power failure, so when the reels 110 to 112 resume rotation when the power is restored, the main control unit 300 Information may be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, and the state before the power failure may be restored based on this information. Further, in the case where the information of the first sub-controller 400 is not cleared due to power failure, the information of the first sub-controller 400 is maintained when the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is restarted when power is restored, The above operation can also be realized by a configuration in which the information in the first sub-controller 400 is cleared when it is not accompanied. Note that the configuration for realizing the above operation is not particularly limited.

≪Others≫
In the embodiment using FIGS. 117 to 168, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the game is not limited to this, and game balls ( For example, it can be applied to a slot machine using pachinko balls as a game medium, a pachinko machine, an arrange ball game machine, a Jankyu game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

117 to 168, the present embodiment has been described above, but it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made without departing from the gist of the technical idea. can. And, it can be said that those involving such deformations and changes are based on the same technical idea and are included in the same technical scope. Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments are merely enumerations of the most preferable actions and effects, and the actions and effects are not limited to those described in the embodiments.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
The configuration of the invention described in the description using FIGS. 117 to 168 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above description,
a first updating means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of the first counter (for example, total points) in the direction of approaching a predetermined value (for example, 1000) according to the progress of the game;
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the value of the second counter;
A game machine comprising
The display means is
It is possible to display a predetermined effect (for example, an item acquisition effect in a normal state) based on the value of the first counter reaching the predetermined value,
The second updating means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, if the value of the second counter is updated to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 155), the value of the first counter There are cases (e.g., Figures 156 and 157) that do not update the second counter value to the same value as
(See [Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
State setting means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (e.g., normal state) and a second state (e.g., point specialization A state) different from the first state,
The second state is a state in which the update amount of the value of the first counter tends to be larger than in the first state.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When power is restored in the second state, the update amount of the first counter value and the update amount of the second counter value are different (for example, in FIG. 143(a)). Step S3105, FIG. 156, FIG. 157),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
It is possible to display a first background (for example, the normal state background in FIG. 147(d)) in the first state,
It is possible to display a second background (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 147 (c)) in the second state,
When the power is restored in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when the power is restored in the point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed. Displaying the background in the normal state, step S3009 in FIG. 142) is a means capable of
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Advantage setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages,
The state setting means
When the setting value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the setting value is changed, the point specialization A state is changed from the initial state). is a configuration that becomes a normal state from
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
A first updating means (for example, , main control unit 300);
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the value of the second counter;
A game machine comprising
The display means is
It is possible to display a predetermined effect (for example, an item acquisition effect in a normal state) based on the value of the first counter reaching the predetermined value,
The second updating means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, if the value of the second counter is updated to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 155), the value of the first counter There are cases where the value of the second counter is not updated to the same value as (for example, FIG. 156, FIG. 157),
The first update means is
It may or may not be accompanied by reset processing after power failure and power recovery (for example, reset processing is accompanied by pressing the RAM clear button and changing settings),
When reset processing is required after power failure and power recovery, the value of the first counter is set to the initial value, while when power failure and power recovery is not accompanied by reset processing, the first counter before power failure is set (For example, when reset processing is involved, the total points are set to 0 in step S1009 in FIG. 126 and step S1101 in FIG. 127),
The second updating means is
After the power is restored, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value or an initial value different from the initial value. and the total points and the display points match, or the initial value of the display points is different from the initial value of the total points to make the total points and the display points not match),
(See [Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second updating means is
After power failure and power recovery, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value (for example, the display point becomes 0 in the first sub-control unit 400 after power failure and power recovery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
State setting means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (e.g., normal state) and a second state (e.g., point specialization A state) different from the first state,
The second state is a state in which the update amount of the value of the first counter tends to be larger than in the first state.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When power is restored in the second state, the update amount of the first counter value and the update amount of the second counter value are different (for example, in FIG. 143(a)). Step S3105, FIG. 156, FIG. 157),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
It is possible to display a first background (for example, the normal state background in FIG. 147(d)) in the first state,
It is possible to display a second background (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 147 (c)) in the second state,
When the power is restored in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when the power is restored in the point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed. Displaying the background in the normal state, step S3009 in FIG. 142) is a means capable of
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Advantage setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages,
The state setting means
When the setting value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the setting value is changed, the point specialization A state is changed from the initial state). is a configuration that becomes a normal state from
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is a means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is a means for redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure during a period from power restoration to execution of the item use effect (for example, in FIG. 158, the item use effect is displayed. The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Medium kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut was added again to the display item column),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item acquisition effect which is executed after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed, indicates that the item that was displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then displays the item. (For example, in FIG. 158, the item "defeat rate UP" that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored until the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 158, an item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring a "small kill rate UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 158, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power is restored. Medium UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is
During the period from when the power is restored to when the item use effect is executed, the item that was displayed before the power failure can be redisplayed (for example, in FIG. Executed, and one of the two "defeat rate UP" items displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
If there are a plurality of items that have not been displayed due to a power failure, this is means for redisplaying the items that are less than this number once (for example, in FIG. 160, One of the two "defeat rate increase" items that were displayed in ) is displayed again),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item acquisition effect which is executed after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed, indicates that the item that was displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then displays the item. (For example, in FIG. 160, the item "Medium kill rate UP" that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored until the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 160, an item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring a "small kill rate UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 160, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
Means capable of executing an item use effect (eg, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) that indicates the degree of advantage (eg, ease of transition to AT state) for benefits using the displayed item and
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is a means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is a means for redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure during a period from power restoration to execution of the item use effect (for example, in FIG. 158, the item use effect is displayed. The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Medium kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut was added again to the display item column),
The advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the possessed item),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item acquisition effect which is executed after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed, indicates that the item that was displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then displays the item. (For example, in FIG. 158, the item "defeat rate UP" that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored until the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 158, an item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring a "small kill rate UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 158, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 151 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 151(c) is displayed in FIG. 151(d)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means indicates that the new item different from the item that is not displayed has been acquired during the period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. It is a means that can execute an item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. 163, before the item use effect, an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired is “defeat rate? UP”, and power is cut off). Instead of the previously displayed "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item, the "Destruction Rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During a period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays the new item, which is different from the item not being displayed, and the item is used. It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the effect has been acquired and display the item (for example, in FIG. 163, before the item use effect, the target item for the item use effect An item acquisition effect is executed to indicate that you have acquired the "destruction rate? UP" item, and instead of the "destruction rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power cut, the "destruction rate? UP" item is displayed in the item column. ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to the power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. item is not visible)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of re-displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure until the item use effect is executed after the item is not displayed due to power restoration (for example, 158, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 151 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 151(c) is displayed in FIG. 151(d)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item and ”Small kill rate UP” item are not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means displays the new items different from the items not displayed during the period from when the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. 164 is a means capable of executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the number of items obtained is less than the number of items that have not been acquired, and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. An item acquisition effect that indicates that the item has been acquired is executed, and the "Defeat rate? UP" item is displayed instead of the "Medium kill rate UP" item or the "Small kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut. has been added to the Display Items column),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During the period from when the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays the new items different from the items not displayed, It is means for executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the item use effect has been acquired and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. 164, before the item use effect, the item use effect An item acquisition effect that indicates that you have acquired the target item "Kill Rate? UP" item is executed, and instead of the "Medium Kill Rate UP" and "Small Kill Rate UP" items that were displayed before the power cut, Destruction rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. Items and "defeat rate small UP" items are not displayed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is means for redisplaying the items that were being displayed before the power failure, after the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration and before the item use effect is executed. (For example, in FIG. 158, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power outage is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 151 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 151(c) is displayed in FIG. 151(d)),
Means capable of executing an item use effect (eg, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) that indicates the degree of advantage (eg, ease of transition to AT state) for benefits using the displayed item and
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means indicates that the new item different from the item that is not displayed has been acquired during the period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. It is a means that can execute an item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. Instead of the previously displayed "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item, the "Destruction Rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
The advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the possessed item),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During a period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays the new item, which is different from the item not being displayed, and the item is used. It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the effect has been acquired and display the item (for example, in FIG. 163, before the item use effect, the target item for the item use effect An item acquisition effect is executed to indicate that you have acquired the "destruction rate? UP" item, and instead of the "destruction rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power cut, the "destruction rate? UP" item is displayed in the item column. ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to the power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. item is not visible)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of re-displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure until the item use effect is executed after the item is not displayed due to power restoration (for example, 158, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means may execute an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired or may not execute the item acquisition effect when the storage means stores the acquired item information. Yes (For example, in FIG. 155, the item acquisition effect is executed when a possessed item is added, but in FIG. 166, the item acquisition effect is not executed even if the "defeat 1 body" item is acquired),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) , and the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 151(c) is displayed in FIG. 151(d)),
(See (4) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a first updating means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of the first counter (for example, total points) in the direction of approaching a predetermined value (for example, 1000) according to the progress of the game;
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
with
The storage means is means for storing the information of the item based on the value of the first counter (for example, when the accumulated points reach 1000 or when the accumulated points are not 0 in a confrontation state, the item ),
The value of the second counter may be the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 155),
The value of the second counter may become different from the value of the first counter after power failure and power recovery (for example, FIG. 156),
The display means is means capable of displaying the value of the second counter (for example, in FIG. 147 etc., the display point is shown at the lower left of the effect image display device 157),
The display means is means for not executing the item acquisition effect according to the value of the second counter when the storage means stores the acquired item information (for example, FIG. 166 Then, if the display point is 0, the item acquisition effect is not executed, the determination in step S3205 in FIG. 144 is No, and step S3207 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means does not perform the item acquisition effect if the value of the second counter does not change after power is restored (for example, in FIG. 166, the display point is 0 after power is restored). The item acquisition effect is not executed until),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means may store the information of the item acquired based on the number of games that have passed (for example, the item may be acquired in the first game of a confrontation state that transitions with the number of games that have passed). ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is not executed may be more advantageous to the player than the item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is executed (for example, item acquisition A configuration with a difference in the advantage of the item obtained depending on whether the effect is executed or not),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A privilege lottery means capable of executing a lottery related to a privilege based on the item stored in the storage means (for example, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for transition to the AT state using the possessed item).
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
Means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The timing for displaying a new item includes a first timing between the start of a game and the start of the next game, and a second timing between the start of a game and the start of the next game.
The first timing is a timing different from the second timing,
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for receiving a start operation for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A stop control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven,
The first timing is a timing after the last stop operation on the plurality of reels,
The second timing is a timing after the timing of the start operation and before the final stop operation on the plurality of reels,
The frequency at which new items are displayed at the first timing is higher than the frequency at which new items are displayed at the second timing;
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the game in which the item use effect is executed, a new item may be displayed at the second timing (for example, FIG. 167).
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. item is not in the display item column after power failure),
Before the game in which the item use effect is executed, if the power is cut off and restored while the item is being displayed, a new item may be displayed at the second timing. (for example, FIG. 167),
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 167, before and after the power failure and power no change in information),
The display means is a means for displaying items that are not displayed due to power failure and power recovery when displaying new items at the second timing (for example, FIG. 167).
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The number of items newly displayed at the first timing is 1,
The number of items newly displayed at the second timing is 1 or more,
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which information of an item (hereinafter referred to as "first item") before power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 167, power failure There is no change in the possessed item information of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored),
The display means is means for not displaying the first item that had been displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 167, "Defeat Rate UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on information that a new item (hereinafter referred to as a "second item") has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored to when the item use effect is executed. Then, after indicating that the first item has been acquired in the item acquisition effect, the first item can be displayed again (for example, in FIG. Acquiring the item executes the item acquisition effect, but the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the second item (in FIG. 158, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first item may be different from the second item,
the first item may be the same as the second item;
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for receiving a start operation for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation,
The display means is
In a period before all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control after receiving the start operation, the first display (for example, FIG. 168(a1) and FIG. 168(b1)) is displayed. When power failure occurs, after the power is restored, the first display that was displayed before the power failure is displayed (for example, FIG. 168(b)),
In the period in which all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, if a power failure occurs while the first display is displayed, the first display that was displayed before the power failure after the power is restored is a means for displaying a second display without displaying the display of (for example, FIG. 168(a)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
In the period after receiving the start operation and before all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, if a power failure occurs while the second display is displayed, the power failure occurs after the power is restored. means for displaying the previously displayed second display (in the event that a power failure occurs during a game, the display after the power is restored matches the display before the power failure);
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item) (eg, FIG. 168(a1)),
The second display is a display that does not contain items (for example, FIG. 168 (a2)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including that the points updated based on the progress of the game are values different from the initial values (for example, FIG. 168(a1)),
The second display is a display including that the point is an initial value (for example, FIG. 168 (a2)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including a background suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 168(a1)),
The second display is a display including a background different from the background suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 168(a2)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body" item),
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
Means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which information of an item (hereinafter referred to as "first item") before power failure occurs when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 158, power failure There is no change in the possessed item information of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored),
The display means is a means for not displaying the first item that was displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 158, "Defeat Rate UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on information that a new item (hereinafter referred to as a "second item") has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored to when the item use effect is executed. and after indicating that the first item has been acquired in the item acquisition effect, the first item can be displayed again (for example, in FIG. 158, the item acquisition The effect is executed, and the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the second item (in FIG. 158, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first item may be different from the second item,
the first item may be the same as the second item;
A game machine characterized by:

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment H1]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

169 to 188 are used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 169 to 188 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. Also, although illustration is omitted, an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is received is provided. Note that the effect button may also have the function of another button (for example, the bet button 132).

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. .

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player of the change, the light may also be turned on when performing various notifications described later.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game, and are also used when performing various notifications to be described later. may also light up.

A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and will be described later. It may be displayed when performing various notifications to be performed.

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 170 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

Further, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting key that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation. This setting key is an operation means for starting to change or confirm settings of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), which will be described later. Further, inside the main body 101, a setting switch is provided that can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) or to confirm settings by pressing. The setting switch is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch that enables an operation for canceling various errors (error canceling operation) to be described later. These setting keys and setting switches can be operated by opening the front door 102, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 inputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like through the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage value of the power supply to a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 172(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 19 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 19 on the middle reel 111 has a "blank pattern", and the frame numbered 18 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 2 Designs” are arranged respectively. In the following description, "Seven 1 pattern" may be referred to as "Blue 7 (design)", and "Seven 2 design" may be referred to as "Red 7 (design)".

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 172(b). FIG. 172(b) is a diagram showing winning lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 2). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is the left reel bottom stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, The symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is displayed on the middle reel lower stage symbol and the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 7). The symbol displayed is the right reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 8 in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the right reel 112 lower stage symbol (9 shown in the figure) position (also referred to as symbol position 9) are called right reel lower symbols, and each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three-dimensionally displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through a symbol display window 113. , a total of nine are displayed.

In this embodiment, one prize line 114 is provided, which is a middle prize line L1 composed of a left reel middle pattern (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle pattern (symbol position 5) and a right reel middle pattern (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a symbol stop position that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination to be described later with reference to FIGS. It is the line on which it is determined whether or not the combination is displayed. FIG. 172(b) shows the middle winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment can bet three or two, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, none of the winning lines are activated and three or two medals are placed. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a coin is betted. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three pay lines 114 may be set as the valid pay lines 114, or the number of pay lines 114 corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid pay lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 173 shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special combinations (special combination 1 and special combination 2) and general combinations (replay combination 1 to replay combination 13, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination 1 to replay combination 13 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands." In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Special winning combination 2 and replay winning combination 1 to replay winning combination 13 are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize 1 or the special prize 2. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is). The special game state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The “replay role (replay role 1 to replay role 13)” is a winning role (operating role) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay role 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay role 2 (effect replay 1), and replay role 3 (Effect replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 173, such as "seven 1-seven 2-seven 1".

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 5)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. As shown in FIG. 173, the role 2 (watermelon 1) is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding number of payouts is also shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 should be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination to be described later), and the selected reel is stopped. Based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 . Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is carried over), and the timing at which the player operates the stop buttons 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed all together within the range of the above number of frames even if it is bad. However, since it is only "acceptable", there are cases where the symbol combinations are not aligned depending on the timing of operating the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than 4 frames. don't stop at

Of course, depending on the layout of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are 100% aligned. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, the player wins 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is lost and the internal winning of the special combination is not being performed (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 174(a) is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state. It has a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as AT game state), and according to the AT game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control section 400 is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 174(b).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination is changed from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 175(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT type game state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination is obtained at the time of the internal lottery. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data within a numerical range (eg, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value for the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability for the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss.

A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for this lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. It should be noted that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the probability is not limited to this.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also In the replay low-probability state, the lottery table in the "RT1" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

Winning hands that are internally won in the replay low probability state include special hand 1 (condition device No. 1, only 3 bet games), special hand 2 (not shown, only 2 bet games), replay hand 1 ( Condition device No. 2), replay hands 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), small hand 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device No. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that the winning role was not won is expressed as "won the wrong way".

Here, "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" are replay hands 2, replay hands 4, replay hands 5, replay hands 6, replay hands 7, replay hands 8, replay hands 9 , and replay combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 5, replay combination 6, replay combination 7, replay combination in accordance with the stop operation timing of each reel 110 to 112 8, a symbol combination corresponding to either a replay combination 9 or a replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. It should be noted that, like this "replayed combination 2, 4 to 10", there is a case where the combination in which the winning combination is determined by the order of operations is referred to as a "push order combination".

Further, "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are replay hands 3, replay hands 4, replay hands 6, replay hands 8, replay hands 10, replay hands 11 , replay combination 12, and replay combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 6, replay combination 8, replay combination 10, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 11, a replay combination 12, and a replay combination 13 are displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the player's operation order (Fig. 175 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals are paid out ( bell award). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

In addition, "small winning combination 4" is composed of "small winning combination 4a" and "small winning combination 4b". ” is displayed on the pay line. On the other hand, if the “small win 4b” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as

Here, with reference to FIG. 175(b), the correct operation order of "small winning combination 4" will be described in detail. "Small role 4" is exactly six of "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". , and a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 4". It should be noted that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small win 4LCR" of the "small win 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 174(a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), which will be described later. When the special combination 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), it is indicated that the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal election state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the internal winning winning combination is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the "RT2" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), a winning combination for internal winning is selected by referring to the lottery table in the "RT3" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 175(a). Winning hands internally won in the special role internal winning state include replay hand 1, replay hands 2, 4 to 10, replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, small hand 1 to small hand 4. There is If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, in FIG. 174 (a), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), a special game to be described later is performed. A transition to state (RT4) is shown.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In the special game state, the winning combination for internal winning is drawn by referring to the drawing table in the row of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 175(a). The winning combination internally won in the special game state is only the small combination 5. - 特許庁Also, if the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 174(a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when the specified number of payouts is executed. For example, the game may end when a prize is won eight times, or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 174(a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 174(b), the game state of the AT system will be described. FIG. 174(b) is a transition diagram of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The game state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigator means that an internal winning combination (in this example, replay combination 2, 4 to 10, replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or a small combination 4) is won. In this case, it refers to an effect that informs the correct operation order. That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state.

Operation navigation will now be described with reference to FIGS. 175(b) and 176. FIG. In this embodiment, the payout number display 127 and effect image display device 157 are used to execute operation navigation. FIG. 175(b) is a diagram for explaining the order of correct operation for pushing the winning hand of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention, and FIG. It is a diagram.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, and the display data 03 is , and data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel.

Therefore, when "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" or "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number indicator 127 displays a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03, and an effect image is displayed. Device 157 displays an image (eg, the characters “--1”) that suggests that the first stopping reel is right reel 112 .

The display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 06 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111, and the second stop reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110, the display data 08 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. , the display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel.

Therefore, when the small win 4CLR of the "small win 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, the display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected. and the effect image display device 157 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the characters “213”) is displayed.

In this embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a small combination of 4. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the small winning combination 4 may be three choices like the replay winning combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be notified using the display data 01-03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, it is also possible to configure the stop operation of the correct answer for the replay combination to be six options such as the small combination 4, and to notify the replay combination using the display data 04 to 09 as well. Also in this case, it is not possible to determine the internal winning combination only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 174(c), for example, the transition is made in the order of fixed notification state→AT1 state→judge state, and from this judge state, the game shifts to normal game state or AT2 state via pullback state. There is a route, and a route that directly transitions from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (eg, 50 games) of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is provided. Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 174(b), and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state is, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (This case will be described later). In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. , permission to operate the WDT 314, setting of initial values, and the like.

In step S102, bet number setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Prepare to send the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the effect state control processing A relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, control of various effects and the like are performed.

In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

At step S113, an effect state control process B relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state ending process for ending the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission processing (step S2006 in FIG. 178) of the main control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S2003, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>2006 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S2007, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S2009, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 when power is restored, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 177 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 179(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 179(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 179(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 179(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. FIG. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the driving circuit 424. FIG. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of a command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 179(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S3101 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 179(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 179(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S3202, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 180(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 180(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 180(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 180(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 180(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 180(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 180(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 180(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S4202, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 180(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S4303; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534 . The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306; wait for is entered.

In step S4306, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Initial setting processing>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) of the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 177 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the flow of initialization processing.

First, in step S201 executed first, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of stack initial value to stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, setting of interrupt mask, initial setting of I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in RAM 308, etc. are performed. .

In step S202, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). monitor whether it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped in the case. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), this step S202 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff). to step S203. Note that step S202 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value even if it has not yet reached the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on.

In step S203, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, the test output port, the first Output port to the sub-control unit 400) to output a clear signal, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been turned to the on position. If the setting key has been turned to the on position, the process proceeds to step S211; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, the setting change flag is set to OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S207. In step S207, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 308 is abnormal. The data determined here is data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or when there is an instantaneous power failure. In other words, it is determined in this step S207 whether or not the data is definitely saved in the RAM 308 . If there is an abnormality in this data, the process proceeds to step S208, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S208, RWM error processing is performed. In this RWM error processing, after making preparations such as clearing all storage areas of the RAM (RWM) 308 excluding the used stack area, the process shifts to an infinite loop state. From this state, the game can be started by operating the setting key switch after the power is turned on again.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not forced RWM clear is ON. Specifically, when the power is turned on and the RWM clear button (not shown) is pressed for a long time (for example, pressed for 5 seconds or more), the forced RWM clear is turned ON. Then, if the forced RWM clear is ON, the process proceeds to step S212, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, and the state of the register is restored to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed. After executing related processing (details of which will be described later), the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S211, to which the setting key is turned to the ON position in step S204, the RWM clear process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S212. In step S212, the setting change flag is set to ON, and in next step S213, power-on setting-related processing (details will be described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S214, processing for activating the WDT 314 is performed. Here, activation permission of the WDT 314, initial value setting, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. After that, the initialization process is terminated.

<Setting-related processing at power-on>
Next, referring to FIGS. 182 and 183, the power-on setting-related processing (steps S206 and S212) of the initial setting processing described using FIG. 181 will be described. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the flow of power-on setting-related processing, and FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an example of various notifications.

Prior to the description of the power-on setting-related processing, various means used for various notifications will be described with reference to FIG. 183(a). FIG. 183(a) is a front view schematically showing the appearance of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 uses light emitting means 137a of each of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 described with reference to FIG. , 138a, 139a, backlights for the respective reels 110 to 112, and the like.

Although details will be described later, in this example, in various notifications, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are lit in red, and when the error is resolved, lights the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in pink. In addition, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are lit in red, and the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state during rotation are lit in blue.

In addition, the slot machine 100 includes display means capable of various displays at the time of various notifications, such as the payout number display 127, the accumulated number display 125, and the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) described with reference to Fig. 169 . 157 and the like. Although details will be described later, in this example, when an error occurs, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and when the error is resolved, the error code is erased (cleared). Also, when confirming the setting, the set value is displayed on the payout number indicator 127 .

The slot machine 100 also includes the speakers 272, 277 and the like described with reference to FIG. 171 as sound output means capable of outputting sounds when various notifications are given. Although details will be described later, in this example, various sounds are output from the speakers 272 and 277 according to the content of various notifications.

In addition, the notification mode (color, means, etc.) of various notifications is not limited to this example. Alternatively, instead of (or in addition to) the display means, various notifications may be given by movement of movable means such as the shutter 163 or the like.

As shown in FIG. 182, in step S301 of the power-on setting-related process, an instruction to execute power-on notification for notifying that the power has been turned on is given, and then the process proceeds to step S302.

FIG. 183(b) is a diagram showing an example of power-on notification. In this example, with the power-on notification instruction as a trigger, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are turned red. lights up, and a voice saying "Power is turned on" is output from the speakers 272 and 277.例文帳に追加

If no error occurs when the power-on notification is executed, the payout number display 127 is hidden (without displaying the error code), and the setting key is turned off when the power-on notification is executed. In this case, the stored number display 125 is used to display the number of credits (the number of electronically stored medals) at the time of the most recent power failure.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred, and if so, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not, the process proceeds to step S310. In step S303, an instruction is given to execute an error notification to notify an error code (identifier) of a certain error that has occurred, and then the process proceeds to step S304.

Errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 include medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM errors, winning errors, and the like.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals stay, and the corresponding error code is E1, for example. The medal insertion error 1 is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is greater than or equal to a specified number, and the corresponding error code is E2, for example. Medal insertion error 2 can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing, and the corresponding error code is E3, for example. Medal insertion error 4 occurs when inserted medals do not pass normally through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, and the corresponding error code is, for example, EA. Medal insertion abnormality 3 and medal insertion abnormality 4 are resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when there is no payout of medals for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is E4, for example. Medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is E5, for example. Medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and the corresponding error code is E5, for example. Any of the medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3 is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the auxiliary medal storage is turned on, and the corresponding error code is E7, for example. The overflow abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM 308, and the corresponding error code is E8, for example. The RAM defect is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting key in this example) is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the corresponding error code is E9, for example. Winning abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is accepted.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, but can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

FIG. 183(e) is a diagram showing an example of notification of a certain error and notification of setting change impossible state. In this example, with the error notification instruction as a trigger, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are turned red. An error code (for example, E1) is displayed using the payout number indicator 127 while maintaining the lighted state.

In step S304, an instruction is given to execute setting change impossible state notification for notifying that the setting change is not possible even if the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (first state). After that, the process proceeds to step S305. In this example, an image including a character string "setting change is disabled" is displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157 while maintaining the error notification, triggered by the setting change disabled state notification instruction. It should be noted that if a plurality of certain errors that invalidate the setting change occur, the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 may be common, or information that can distinguish the type of error may be notified together. may

In step S305, it is determined whether or not a certain error has been resolved. If not resolved, the determination processing of step S305 is continued, and if resolved, the process proceeds to step S306.

There is no particular limitation on how to eliminate certain errors, but as described above, most of the errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 are resolved by removing the cause of the error and then accepting the operation of the error release switch (the setting key in this example). be resolved if

The setting switch can be operated to change settings (setting value change operation) or to confirm settings, and can also be used as an error release switch that can be used to resolve various errors (error resolution operation). is also a functioning operation means, if the state is shifted to a state where the setting can be changed after the error is cleared by pressing the setting switch, the setting value is changed (for example, +1) by pressing the setting switch by mistake. There is a risk of being

However, in this example, when both the setting value change operation and the error resolution operation are possible, the error resolution operation is preferentially enabled and the setting value change operation is disabled. In addition, error resolution can be executed with priority, and the error can be resolved as soon as possible to start the game.

In step S306, an instruction is given to execute error code non-display to erase an error code corresponding to a certain error that has been resolved, and then the process proceeds to step S307. In this example, the error code displayed using the payout number display 127 is erased (cleared) with the instruction to hide the error code as a trigger.

In step S307, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been turned to the on position. If the setting key has been turned to the on position, the process proceeds to step S308. End the process. In step S308, after an instruction to execute setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation (details will be described later using FIG. 184) is possible, the process proceeds to step S309.

FIG. 183(d) is a diagram showing an example of setting confirmation notification. In this example, with the setting confirmation notification instruction as a trigger, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are kept lit in red, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a are lit in pink, and the payout number indicator 127 is used to display the current set value (for example, number 3 indicating set value 3). In addition, the speaker 272, 277 outputs a voice saying "setting is being confirmed".

Also, in step S308, setting confirmation processing is performed. In this setting confirmation process, when the pressing operation of the setting switch is detected, the initially set value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by setting change (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the setting key is off (whether or not the setting key has been turned from on to off by rotating the setting key), and if it is on, the process returns to step S307, and the setting can be confirmed by the setting switch. continue to be in good condition. On the other hand, if the setting key is turned off (when the setting key is turned from on to off by rotating the setting key), the power-on setting-related processing ends. As a result, the process shifts to the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process (step S102) of the main process of the main control unit, and the normal game is started.

In step S310, which is followed when it is determined that an error has not occurred in step S302, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been rotated to the ON position, and the setting key has been rotated to the ON position. If so, the process proceeds to step S311; otherwise, the power-on setting-related processing is terminated.

In step S311, it is determined whether the setting change flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process advances to step S312 to notify that the setting change (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 184) is possible. If it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S313, and after giving an instruction to perform the setting confirmation notification described with reference to FIG. .

The determination of whether to proceed to the setting change process in step S313 or to the setting confirmation process in step S313 is not limited to the flag. If it is on (when the setting key is turned on after the power is turned on), it may be configured to proceed to the setting confirmation process.

FIG. 183(c) is a diagram showing an example of setting change notification. In this example, with the instruction of the setting change notification as a trigger, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 in the stopped state are turned red. While maintaining the lighting state of , the payout number display 127 is used to display the current set value (for example, the number 3 indicating the set value 3). In addition, the speaker 272, 277 outputs the sound "the door is open".

Also, in step S312, setting change processing is performed. In this setting change process, each time the pressing operation of the setting switch is detected, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, the setting value returns to 1. Execute repeatedly. Also, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the set value currently displayed on the payout number display 127 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 308. to confirm the setting value.

Further, in step S313, setting confirmation processing is performed. In this setting confirmation process, when the pressing operation of the setting switch is detected, the initially set value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by setting change (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not the setting key is off (whether or not the setting key has been turned from on to off by rotating the setting key). Continue to be able to confirm. On the other hand, if the setting key is off (if it is detected that the setting key is turned off by rotating the setting key), the process proceeds to step S315.

In step S315, it is determined whether the setting change flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S316. - The process shifts to start operation reception processing (step S102), and a normal game is started.

In step S316, an instruction is given to execute setting change completion notification for notifying that the setting change has been completed. In the next step S317, after setting the setting change flag to off, the power-on setting-related processing is terminated, The process proceeds to the bet amount setting/start operation acceptance process (step S102) of the main process of the main control unit, and the normal game is started. In this example, with the instruction to notify the completion of the setting change as a trigger, as shown in FIG.

<Errors that take precedence over changing settings/Change settings and confirm settings>
Next, referring to FIGS. 184 and 185, setting change and setting confirmation that can be executed by the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described.

Here, changing the setting refers to changing the setting value of the gaming machine. Each time a pressing operation of the setting switch) is detected once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and when the set value exceeds 6, the set value returns to 1 repeatedly. It is possible to change the setting value with .

It should be noted that when the operation means (setting switch) is not pressed and the operation of the start lever 135, which will be described later, is performed, or when the operation means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed down, the set value changes once (for example, setting 5). → When setting 5) is performed and the start lever 135 is operated, the setting is the same as the setting before the power failure.

Further, the setting confirmation refers to confirming the setting value of the gaming machine. By displaying the setting value (one of setting 1 to setting 6) set by the change on the payout number display 127, it is possible to confirm the setting value.

<Errors that take precedence over setting changes/Setting changes and setting confirmation/Normal time>
FIG. 184(a) is a diagram showing an example of the setting change flow in normal times when no error has occurred in the gaming machine, and FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an example of various notifications.

When the setting key is turned on (FIG. 184(a)(1)) and the power is turned on (FIG. 184(a)(2)), the setting change flag is set in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. It is set to ON, and the power-on setting-related processing described with reference to FIG. 182 is executed.

In this power-on setting-related processing, first, after the power-on notification (FIG. 184(a)(3)) as shown in FIG. 185(a) is executed, no error occurs in this example. In addition, since the setting change flag is ON, the setting can be changed by operating the setting switch. 184(a)(4)).

Further, when it is detected that the setting key is turned off after accepting the operation of the start lever 135 and confirming the setting value, a setting change completion notification ( FIG. 184(a)(5)) is executed, and after confirming the setting value currently displayed on the setting value display, the normal game is started based on this setting value (FIG. 184(a)). (6)).

FIG. 184(b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of setting confirmation during normal times when no error has occurred in the gaming machine.

When the setting key is turned off and the power is turned on (FIG. 184(b)(1)), the setting change flag is set to off in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. The described power-on configuration related processing is executed.

In this power-on setting-related processing, first, after the power-on notification (FIG. 184(b)(2)) as shown in FIG. 185(a) is executed, no error occurs in this example. In addition, since the setting change flag is off, if the setting key is in the on state (FIG. 184(b)(3)), setting confirmation notification as shown in FIG. 185(d) (FIG. 184(b) ) (4)).

Also, when it is detected that the setting key has returned from ON to OFF, the normal game is started based on the current set value (FIG. 184(b)(5)).

<Error that takes precedence over setting change/Setting change and setting confirmation/When an error occurs>
FIG. 183(c) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of setting confirmation when an error occurs in the gaming machine.

When the power is turned on (FIG. 184(c)(2)) in the state where a certain error has occurred (FIG. 184(c)(1)), the power-on setting-related operations described with reference to FIG. A process is executed while an error is occurring in the process.

In this power-on setting-related processing, first, after power-on notification (FIG. 184(c)(3)) as shown in FIG. 185(a) is executed, an error occurs in this example. Therefore, during the preparation of the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 184(c)(4)), and when the preparation of the liquid crystal display device 157 is completed, a setting change impossible state notification as shown in FIG. 185(c) is executed. is executed (FIG. 184(c)(5)), the occurrence of an error and the unchangeable state (first state) are notified.

When the error that has occurred is eliminated (Fig. 184(c)(6)), the error notification and setting change impossible state notification are terminated (Fig. 184(c)(7)), and the setting key is pressed. is in the ON state, the setting confirmation notification (FIG. 184(c)(9)) as shown in FIG. , the normal game is started based on the current set value (FIG. 184(c)(10)). Also, after the error is resolved, the normal game is started based on the current setting value even when the setting key is in the OFF state (FIG. 184(c)(8)).

In order to change the setting continuously, the power is turned on again with the setting key turned on, and the operation is performed according to the flow of setting change described with reference to FIG. 184(a).

According to this example, even if a certain error is resolved, the setting cannot be changed unless the user performs an operation according to the setting change flow, so that the setting can be changed reliably.

<Errors that take precedence over setting changes/features of the invention>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 169) is a gaming machine capable of reporting a certain error. At least one error among a plurality of types of errors that can occur in the gaming machine (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM errors, prize winning errors, etc.); If the power is turned off with an error occurring and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (for example, 184(a) (1), the setting value cannot be changed even by rotating the setting key switch to turn it on) (hereinafter referred to as "first state". For example, FIG. 182 The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting cannot be changed shown in step S304 of step S304).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, an error occurs after the operation to change the setting value is completed and the game is started, and the situation in which the operation to change the setting value is wasted is prevented. This can be avoided and workability can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 169) is a gaming machine capable of reporting a certain error, and the certain error is At least one error out of a plurality of types of errors that can occur (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM defects, prize winning errors, etc.), and the error occurs. If the power is turned off while the power is on, and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (for example, FIG. 184 (a ) (1), a state in which the setting value cannot be changed even if the setting key switch is turned on (hereinafter referred to as a "first state". For example, in step S304 of FIG. 183(d)), and after the certain error notification (for example, the certain error notification shown in FIG. 183(d)) is started, the notification of the first state is started. (for example, to perform setting change impossible state notification shown in FIG. 183(d)).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, an error occurs after the operation to change the setting value is completed and the game is started, and the situation in which the operation to change the setting value is wasted is prevented. This can be avoided and workability can be improved. In addition, since the first state is notified after the notification of a certain error is started, it is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that a certain error has occurred and that the set value cannot be changed. and workability can be further improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 169) is a gaming machine capable of reporting a certain error, and the certain error is At least one error out of a plurality of types of errors that can occur (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM defects, prize winning errors, etc.), and the error occurs. If the power is turned off while the power is on, and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (for example, FIG. 184 (a ) (1), a state in which the setting value cannot be changed even if the setting key switch is turned on (hereinafter referred to as a "first state". For example, in step S304 of FIG. 183(b)), and after power-on notification (for example, power-on notification shown in FIG. 183(b)) is started, notification of the first state is started (for example, 183(d), the setting change disabled state is notified).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, an error occurs after the operation to change the setting value is completed and the game is started, and the situation in which the operation to change the setting value is wasted is prevented. This can be avoided and workability can be improved. In addition, since the first state is notified after the power-on notification is started, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the power has been turned on and that the set value cannot be changed. and workability can be further improved.

Further, in the first state, when a power failure is detected in a state in which the certain error is resolved, and the power is turned on after the power failure, a state in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change operation (for example, , a state in which the setting can be changed as shown in FIG. 17(f)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting value in a state in which the error is surely resolved, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary work from occurring.

Further, an operation means (for example, a setting key) is provided, and the operation means is an operation means capable of executing a setting value change operation for changing a setting value as part of the setting change operation, and the operation means An operation means capable of executing an error elimination operation for eliminating a certain error, and when the operation means is operated in the first state, the error elimination operation becomes valid and the set value change operation becomes invalid. It may be

With such a configuration, setting values are not set erroneously, error resolution can be executed with priority, and the error can be quickly resolved and the game can be started. .

In addition, when the power is turned on, the state in which the certain error has not occurred is a state in which the setting value can be changed (hereinafter referred to as a “second state”. For example, as shown in FIG. a state in which settings can be changed) and a state in which setting values can be checked (hereinafter referred to as a “third state”; for example, a state in which settings can be checked, shown in FIG. 184(b)). The power is turned on in a state where a certain operation with the setting key (for example, turning on the setting key switch shown in FIG. 184(a)(1)) has been performed as part of the setting change operation. 184(b)(3), the certain operation (for example, turning on the setting key switch shown in FIG. 184(b)(3)) is performed. If the power is turned off while the certain error is occurring and the power is turned on while the certain operation is being performed after the power is turned off, the third state will occur. A first state may be entered, and when the certain error is eliminated in the first state, the third state may be entered.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the setting value after the error is resolved, so it is possible to check whether the setting value has been changed to an incorrect value due to an error (whether there is a malfunction). It can be confirmed, and workability can be improved.

Further, the certain error may be an error including an error related to the payout of game media (for example, medal payout failures 1 to 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of an error occurring even when a game is started.

<Button production that changes the production depending on the operation method>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188, button effects that change depending on the operation method will be described.

<Button effect / first effect that changes the effect depending on the operation method>
FIGS. 186 and 187 are diagrams showing an example of an effect (pseudo bonus) in which the first effect (first button effect) is executed in chronological order.

A certain effect is a first operation (in this example, a single pressing operation (single press) of the effect button shown in FIG. 169) and a second operation different from the first operation (in this example, Long press operation (including automatic operation) and continuous pressing operation) of the production button shown in FIG. (in this example, an effect including an operation response display) is executed.

In addition to the pseudo-bonus effects described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188, certain effects include effects such as bonuses, AT games, and mini games. Production such as games is included. Further, the first effect includes the first button effect described with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, as well as various effects executed based on the first operation.

FIG. 186(a) shows an example of an effect in a normal game. In this example, two icons IC1 and IC2 (character images in this example) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the normal game to inform the player that two items have been awarded. ing.

Here, the item is a benefit given to the player according to the internal winning combination, the number of addictive games, and the like. In this example, the item given to the player can be consumed in the pseudo bonus, and one button effect can be executed for each item. In addition, by acquiring items, the possibility of shifting to AT games (excluding pseudo bonuses) after the end of the pseudo bonus increases, but if it does not shift to AT games after the end of the pseudo bonus, it will shift to normal games. .

Next, FIG. 186(b) shows an example of bonus confirmation effect indicating that the shift to the pseudo bonus is confirmed. In this example, in the normal game, the liquid crystal display device 157 executes a bonus confirmation effect (in this example, a display including a character string such as "Bonus Confirmed!!") to notify that the transition to the pseudo bonus has been confirmed. By displaying four icons IC1 to IC4 (character images in this example) in the display area of , the player is notified that four items have been awarded.

Next, FIG. 186(c) shows an example of a pseudo-bonus start effect indicating that a pseudo-bonus has started and an item display suggesting the current number of items. In this example, with the third stop operation in the game as a trigger, item display (in this example, a character string such as "4th chance" to inform the player that four items are given and a character image are displayed) ) and a pseudo-bonus start effect (in this example, a display including a character string such as "press the button to get an item").

Next, FIG. 186(d) shows an example of button IN animation 1 that announces that the first operation will be effective before the operation effective period of the first operation. In this example, by displaying the effect image EF1 in the button IN animation 1, the first operation request display (button image BT1) appears (is displayed) at the display position of the effect image EF1. , suggests that the first operation for the first time is effective.

Next, FIG. 186(e) shows an example of button IN animation 2 that announces that the first operation will be valid before the operation valid period of the first operation. In this example, by displaying the effect image EF2 in the button IN animation 2, the first operation request display (button image BT1) appears (is displayed) at the display position of the effect image EF2. It suggests that the first operation of the first time becomes effective.

FIG. 186(f) shows an example of the first operation request display. In this example, after erasing the effect EF2 of the button IN animation 2, the button image BT1 imitating the appearance of the effect button and the character string "Press!" It suggests that the first operation (single press of the production button) is effective (that the effective period of the first operation has started), and prompts the first operation (single press of the production button) .

Subsequently, FIG. 186(g) shows an example of an operation response display and a result display corresponding to the first operation (single press of the production button). In this example, when the first operation (single press of the effect button) is received, the operation response display corresponding to the operation is provided as a privilege that suggests that a privilege advantageous to the player has been granted. A display SG1 (in this example, a display including a character string such as "win rate level 1 UP") and a result display RG1 consisting of a character image of the number leader are displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(h) shows an example of a continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display. In this example, an animation is executed to erase the privilege award display SG1 shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 186(i) shows an example of the continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display and the button IN animation 1 for notifying that the second first operation (single press of the production button) will be effective. ing. In this example, an animation that gradually reduces the size of the result display RG1 is executed, and the effect image EF1 is displayed in the button IN animation 1 so as to overlap in front of the animation. It suggests that one operation (single press of the production button) is valid and the first operation is valid.

Next, FIG. 186(j) shows the continuation of the result display RG1 and an example of the button IN animation 2 for notifying that the second first operation (single press of the effect button) will be effective. In this example, an animation that gradually reduces the size of the result display RG1 is executed, and an effect image EF2 is displayed in the button IN animation 2 so as to overlap in front of the animation. It suggests that the first operation is valid within the operation valid period of one operation (single press of the production button).

FIG. 186(k) shows an example of the second operation request display. In this example, as the operation request display, a character string such as "Press!" By displaying the button image BT2, it is suggested to the player that the first operation (single press of the effect button) is effective (that the effective period of the operation has started), and the first operation (effect (single press of a button) is encouraged.

According to this example, in the case of a single press of the effect button, the previous operation response display (result display RG1) is overlapped with the next operation request display (button image BT2). A corresponding performance can be performed, and the game can be livened up by preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Also, by making the next operation request display conspicuous, the player's desire to operate can be improved.

Next, FIG. 186(l) shows an example of changing the display mode of the second operation request display. In this example, the result display RG1 corresponding to the first operation request display is moved to the lower right of the display area, and the button image BT2 displayed in FIG. (Deca button) is changed. The button image BT3 (big button) is a display (chance-up button display) that facilitates the derivation of a more advantageous result than the button image BT2, and in this example, is configured to increase the winning percentage level by two or more.

According to this example, in the case of a single push of the effect button, there is a case where a display that easily leads to an advantageous result is performed, so that the effect can be prevented from becoming monotonous and the game can be livened up.

Subsequently, FIG. 187(m) shows an example of an operation response display and a result display corresponding to the second first operation (single press of the effect button). In this example, when the second first operation (single press of the production button) is accepted, the operation response display corresponding to the operation is provided as a privilege that suggests that a privilege advantageous to the player has been granted. A display SG2 (in this example, a display including a character string such as "AT additional level 2UP") and a result display RG2 consisting of a character image of a panda are displayed.

FIG. 187(n) shows an example of the result display corresponding to the first to fourth first operations (single press of the effect button). In this example, after the 4th first operation (single press of the production button) is completed, the operation response display corresponding to all the 1st to 4th first operations suggests the privilege given in the pseudo bonus. (in this example, a display including a character string such as "winning rate LV4 plus LV3") and lottery result displays RG1 to RG4 in the start game of the pseudo-bonus are displayed.

FIG. 187(o) shows an example of the confrontation effect during the pseudo bonus. In this example, an animation including a scene in which Yoshimune and Chuta face off is executed as the confrontation production.

FIG. 187(p) shows an example of result determination (winning effect), and FIG. 187(q) shows an example of AT game effect. In this example, when the conditions for shifting from the pseudo-bonus to the AT game are satisfied (for example, when items exceeding a predetermined number can be obtained in the pseudo-bonus), after execution of the confrontation effect shown in FIG. 187(o), As a result determination, after executing a victory effect (in this example, an animation including a scene in which Yoshimune wins the confrontation) suggesting a transition to the AT game, the AT game is started in the next game.

FIG. 187(p') shows an example of result determination (defeat effect), and FIG. 187(q') shows an example of normal game effect. In this example, when the conditions for shifting from the pseudo-bonus to the AT game are not satisfied (for example, when the item exceeding the predetermined number cannot be acquired in the pseudo-bonus), the execution of the confrontation production shown in FIG. 187(o) Later, as a result judgment, after executing a defeat performance (in this example, an animation including a scene in which Yoshimune is defeated in a confrontation) suggesting a shift to the normal game, the normal game is continued in the next game.

<Button effect / second effect that changes the effect depending on the operation method>
FIG. 188 is a diagram showing an example of a certain effect (pseudo bonus) in which the second effect (second button effect) is executed in chronological order. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 188(d) to (f) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 186(d) to (f), so the description thereof will be omitted.

A certain effect is a first operation (in this example, a single pressing operation (single press) of the effect button shown in FIG. 169) and a second operation different from the first operation (in this example, The long press operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 169 (including the long press operation by auto (long press auto)) and the continuous press operation) are effects that are at least effective, and the second operation in the certain effect When performed, the second effect (in this example, the effect including the operation response display) is executed.

As will be described later, even if a third operation different from the first operation and the second operation (for example, a continuous pressing operation in which one press is continuously performed at short intervals) is performed, the first It may be configured such that two effects are executed.

The second effect includes the second button effect described with reference to FIG. 188 as well as various effects executed based on the second operation.

FIGS. 188(g) and 188(h) show an example of the operation request display. In this example, as the operation request display, a button image BT1 imitating the appearance of a production button and a character string such as "Press!" ) is valid (that the lifetime of the operation has begun).

Subsequently, FIG. 188(i) and FIG. 188(j) show an example of the operation response display and the result display corresponding to the first second operation (long press auto of the effect button). In this example, when the first second operation (automatic long press of the effect button) is received (automatic operation (automatic operation) is set by the player, it is assumed that the long press of the effect button is performed). When the control unit of the machine considers it), as an operation response display corresponding to the operation, a privilege grant display SG1 (in this example, such as "winning rate level 1 UP") that suggests that a privilege advantageous to the player has been granted including a character string) and a result display RG1 consisting of a character image of Bancho.

Next, FIG. 188(k) shows an example of a continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display. In this example, an animation is executed to erase the privilege award display SG1 displayed in FIG.

Next, FIG. 188(l) shows the button IN animation 1 that foretells that the second operation (long press of the effect button auto) will be effective, and the second operation (long press of the effect button). An example of an operation response display and a result display corresponding to the push auto) is shown.

In this example, by displaying the effect image EF1 in the button IN animation 1, in a state suggesting that the second first operation (long press auto of the effect button) becomes effective, the second Since the second operation (long-press auto of the production button) has been accepted, as an operation response display corresponding to the operation, a privilege grant display SG2 (in this example, A display including a character string such as "AT additional level 2UP") and a result display RG2 consisting of a character image of a panda are displayed.

In this example, by accepting the operation of the operation means during the period before the display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed, the next operation response effect can be executed. , the operation request display can be clearly shown to prompt the operation, and the result can be preferentially shown to the player who is in a hurry to play the game, so that the player's satisfaction can be improved.

Next, FIG. 188(m) shows an example of the continuation of the result display RG2 of the operation response display. In this example, the effect image EF1, the result display RG1, and the privilege giving display SG2 displayed in FIG. Running animation to move.

Next, FIG. 188(n) shows a button IN animation 1 that foretells that the third second operation (long press of the effect button auto) will be effective, and the third second operation (long press of the effect button). An example of an operation response display and a result display corresponding to the push auto) is shown.

In this example, by displaying the effect image EF1 in the button IN animation 1, in a state suggesting that the third first operation (long press auto of the effect button) becomes effective, the third Since the second operation (long-press auto of the production button) has been accepted, as an operation response display corresponding to the operation, a privilege grant display SG3 (in this example, A display including a character string such as "win rate level 1 UP") and a result display RG3 consisting of the character image of the number leader are displayed.

FIG. 188(o) shows an example of a result display corresponding to the first to fourth second operations (long-press auto of the effect button). In this example, after the fourth second operation (auto long press of the production button) is completed, the privilege given in the pseudo bonus is displayed as an operation response display according to all the second operations of the first to fourth times. Suggesting privilege grant display SGA (in this example, a display including a character string such as "winning rate LV4 plus LV3") and all result displays RG1 to RG4 in the pseudo bonus are displayed.

<Button effects/features that change the effect depending on the operation method>
As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 169) has effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277) capable of executing a certain effect. etc.), wherein the certain effect includes a first operation (for example, a single push of a production button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, a production button Long press auto) is an effect that is at least effective, and when the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 186 (g), FIG. 187 (m), Operation response display shown in FIG. i), the operation response display shown in (i), (o), etc. of the figure) is executed, and the first effect and the second effect are different effects at least in part. It is a play table that

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of effects according to the operation by the player in a certain effect, thereby preventing the effect from becoming monotonous and making the game lively.

In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) is provided with production means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, etc.) capable of executing a certain production. In the gaming machine, the certain effect includes a first operation (for example, single press of the effect button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, long press auto of the effect button) is an effect that is at least effective, and when the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 186 (g), FIG. 187 (m), FIG. 187 (n ), etc.) is executed, and when the second operation is performed in the certain effect, the second effect (for example, FIG. 188 (i), FIG. 188 (j), The operation response display shown in (l), (o), etc. in FIG. The game machine is characterized in that it is an effect in which an operation may be performed multiple times, and that the operation request display can be displayed a plurality of times in the certain effect.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of effects according to the operation by the player in a certain effect, thereby preventing the effect from becoming monotonous and making the game lively. In addition, since there are cases where the operation is performed multiple times, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by executing the effect corresponding to the operation.

In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) has an effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, etc.) capable of executing a certain effect. A gaming machine provided with a game machine, wherein the certain effect includes a first operation (for example, a single press of the effect button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, a long press of the effect button) ) is at least an effective effect, and when the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 186(g), FIG. 187(m), the same figure ( n), etc.) is executed, and when the second operation is performed in the certain effect, the second effect (for example, FIG. 188 (i), (j), The operation response display shown in (l), (o), etc. of the figure is executed, the first effect and the second effect are different effects at least partially, and It is an effect in which a plurality of operations may be performed, and in the certain effect, a plurality of operation request displays can be displayed, and the plurality of operation request displays include a first operation request display (for example, FIG. 186(f), the operation request display shown in FIG. 18(k), etc.) and a second operation request display different from the first operation request display (for example, FIG. ), and the second operation request display is a display that facilitates derivation of a more advantageous result than the first operation request display.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of effects according to the operation by the player in a certain effect, thereby preventing the effect from becoming monotonous and making the game lively. In addition, since there are cases where the operation is performed multiple times, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by executing the effect corresponding to the operation. In addition, since the second operation request display is a display from which more advantageous results can be derived than the first operation request display, the player's expectation is heightened when the second operation request display is displayed. be able to.

Further, an operation means (for example, an effect button) provided at a position operable by the player is provided, the certain effect is a effect that may be operated a plurality of times, and the certain effect is the above-mentioned An effect including an effect in which an operation request display of an operation means is displayed, the operation request display is a display including an image simulating an appearance of the operation means, and the first operation is performed in the certain effect. 186(g) and 187(m). , operation response display shown in FIG. As an effect, an operation response display corresponding to the second operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation response display". For example, FIG. The operation response display shown in o), etc.) may not be displayed in an overlapping manner with the operation request display.

With such a configuration, the operation response display may or may not be overlapped with the operation request display depending on the player's operation.

Further, the first operation response display is a result display based on the lottery by the first operation (hereinafter referred to as "first lottery"), and the second operation response display is the second operation response display. It is a result display based on a lottery by operation (hereinafter referred to as "second lottery"), and the first lottery and the second lottery may be executed using the same lottery table. .

With such a configuration, the player can obtain the same result regardless of the player's own operation, and the player does not feel unfair.

Further, the first operation is an operation (for example, single-shot push) in which the operation by the operation means is performed once in the certain effect, and the first effect is the operation request in the certain effect. After the display is executed, the first operation response display is displayed in response to the first operation, the first operation response display is displayed overlapping the newly generated operation request display, and The effect may include displaying the next first operation response display in response to the next first operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the effect content of the first effect executed by the first operation, and the player can select the first operation or the second effect according to his/her preference. It is possible to decide whether to perform the operation of , and the degree of satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

Further, the second operation is an operation in which a plurality of operations (for example, long-press auto) become effective by continuing to press the operation means in the certain effect, and the second effect is the or After the operation request display is executed in the production, the second operation response display is displayed in response to the second operation, and the newly generated operation request display imitates the appearance of the operation means. Before the image is displayed, the effect may be such that the next second operation response display is displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the effect content of the second effect executed by the second operation, and the player can select the first operation or the second effect according to his/her preference. It is possible to decide whether to perform the operation of , and the degree of satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

Further, the second effect is performed after the animation display of the newly generated operation request display is started and before the image simulating the appearance of the operation means is displayed. The display may be an effect including the displayed content.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly show the operation request display to the player enjoying the game and prompt the operation, while performing the second operation allows the player to play without waiting for the operation request display. can progress, and the satisfaction of the player who wants to progress the game quickly can be improved.

Further, the certain effect is a effect in which a third operation (for example, a continuous pressing operation) different from the first operation and the second operation is effective, and the third operation is performed in the certain effect. When the operation is performed, the second effect is executed, and the third operation is an operation in which the operation by the operating means is performed once in the certain effect, and is performed twice consecutively. may be an operation in which the interval of the operation of is shorter than the interval of the first operation.

With such a configuration, an effect corresponding to the third operation can also be executed, so the effect does not become monotonous and the game can be lively.

In addition, an operation means (for example, a production button) provided at a position where the player can operate, and a production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, etc.) capable of executing a certain production are provided. wherein the certain performance includes a performance prompting the operator to operate the operating means a plurality of times, an animation display relating to an operation request display of the operating means is displayed in relation to the certain performance, and the animation The display includes an animation in which a display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed, and when the operation means is operated in the certain effect, an operation response effect is executed, the animation display is started, and the animation display is performed. Even if the operation means is operated during the period before the display simulating the appearance of the operation means is displayed (for example, if it is determined that the effect button is long pressed for auto), the operation response effect (For example, the operation response display shown in FIG. 188(l), etc.) may be executed.

With such a configuration, by operating the operation means during a period before the display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed in the animation display, the next operation response effect can be executed. A player who enjoys the game can be prompted to operate by clearly showing the operation request display, and a player who is in a hurry to play the game can be shown the result with priority, thereby increasing the satisfaction of the player. can.

In addition, an operation means (for example, a production button) provided at a position where the player can operate, and a production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, etc.) capable of executing a certain production are provided. wherein an animation display relating to an operation request display of the operation means is displayed in relation to the certain performance, and the animation display is a first display imitating the appearance of the operation means. A display that may execute an animation, wherein the animation display is a display that may execute an animation in which a second display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed, and the first display and the The second display is a different display, and when the operation means is operated in the certain effect, an operation response effect is executed, the animation display is started, and the animation display imitates the appearance of the operation means. The amusement machine may be characterized in that the operation response effect is executed even when the operation means is operated during a period before the display is displayed.

Further, the operation request display in the certain effect may be a display prompting one operation. Further, the operation request display in the certain effect may be an operation request display prompting two or more operations, or may be an operation request display prompting repeated hits.

The game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine. It can also be taken as In addition, even if the operation request display of the button is generated once at a time, it can also be regarded as a certain effect that the operation effective period is one in succession.

In addition, although the big button display has been exemplified as another example of the operation request display, an operation request display related to a different color or other operation means may be displayed.

Also, a given effect may include a plurality of operations, any one of which may be the second effect. For example, even if the second operation is performed for a part of the period in a certain production and the first operation is performed for a part of the period, the second operation is performed while the second operation is performed. It also includes those in which production is performed.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the contents described in one configuration among the plurality of configurations described in the above embodiment to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In principle, the symbols shown in FIGS. 189 to 200 are used only for the explanation of this embodiment. 189 to 200 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 are configured to notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the controller of the slot machine will be described. The control section of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") sent by the main control section that controls the main effects. and a second sub-controller for controlling various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller.

The main control section has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section and enables communication with the first sub-control section. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit. It is not possible to send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller based on the control commands. The first sub-controller controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.) and various lamps.

The second sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller based on this control command. The second sub-controller controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained.

Symbols displayed on the top of the left reel are symbols on the top left reel, symbols displayed on the middle of the left reel are symbols on the middle of the left reel, symbols displayed on the bottom of the left reel are symbols on the bottom of the left reel, and symbols displayed on the top of the middle reel. The symbol to be displayed is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the right reel is the top symbol Right reel top symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel bottom symbols, and right reel bottom symbols. There are 3 vertically on each reel, for a total of 9.

In this embodiment, one winning line is provided, which is a middle winning line composed of left reel middle symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel middle symbols. A winning line is a line set at a stop position of a symbol visible through a symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine of this embodiment can bet 3 or 2, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines are activated and 3 or 2 medals are placed. Win lines are activated when bets are placed. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 pay lines, which are upward-sloping pay lines, may be set as valid pay lines, or a number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 190(a) and 190(b). FIG. 3(a) shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination, and remarks. ) is a diagram showing the types of normal pressing order bells and special pressing order bells, and payouts corresponding to each pressing order.

Each of the reels 110 to 112 has a predetermined number of frames (eg, 20 frames) of a plurality of types of symbols (eg, replay symbols, watermelon symbols, cherry symbols, bell symbols, etc. shown in FIG. 190(a)). .

Winning roles of the slot machine 100 include special roles (not shown) (special role 1, special role 2), general roles (replay role, small wins 1 to 4, normal order bell, special order bell), etc. There is Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is, for example, "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is).

A "replay combination" is a prize winning combination (operating combination) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 4)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The hand 2 (cherry) is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", etc., as shown in FIG. 190(a). The corresponding number of payouts is also shown in the figure.

The small win 1 (watermelon) and the small win 2 (cherry) are wins that can be won by operating the correct timing. This indicates that any pattern may be used for the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 . In addition, although the details will be described later, the small win 3 and the small win 4 are wins that can be won by operating the correct answer order. There is a case.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (result of internal lottery processing for a winning combination), and based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in a uniform manner within the range of the number of frames, even if it is bad. However, since it is only "accepted", there are cases where the symbol combination is not complete depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than four frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon pattern will be placed on the winning line. Do not stop.

Of course, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination is 4 frames at maximum, if the replay combination is internally won, 100% of the winnings are won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the internal winning of the special role is not in progress (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Push order bell>
Next, the normal push-order bell and special push-order bell will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 190(b).

<Normal push order bell>
When one of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, a plurality of small wins (in this example, a small win 3 and a small win 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. A symbol combination to be displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that it is possible to internally win the "normal pushing order bell 1-6" even if the set value is any of the settings 1-6. It should be noted that it is also possible to combine a further small winning combination to win multiple prizes.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), each of the "normal order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". , and in this example, 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to one of the six types of pushing orders. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six types of pushing order is the same.

For example, in the case of internal winning of "normal pushing order bell 1LCR" out of "normal pushing order bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. A stop operation for the reel 112 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stopping operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order). In addition, when "normal push order bell 4CRL" of "normal push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. A stop operation for the reel 110 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3), "Bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 "Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if there is a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to one small win (small win 4) will be won. Displayed on the line, one medal is paid out, or if the small winning combination 4 is missed (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), medals are paid out. It will not be done (it will be lost).

In addition, when the stop operation (correct pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), " Bell-Bell-Replay” is displayed on the pay line, and if one medal is paid out or if the small win 4 is missed (the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 4 was not displayed on the pay line case), medals will not be paid out (it will be lost).

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) is performed that does not follow the navigation for winning one, depending on the operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line. , and 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the 4th small win is displayed on the winning line, and 1 medal is paid out, or the 4th small win is missed. In this case (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), no medals are paid out (lost).

In the "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" of this example, 12 small wins (small winning 3) are assigned to one of the 6 types of pushing orders, so "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" , 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 1/6. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be greater than 1/6.

<Privilege push order bell>
When one of the "privilege pushing order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, a plurality of small wins (in this example, a small win 3 and a small win 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. A symbol combination to be displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that even if the set value is any one of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "privilege pushing order bell 1 to 6". It should be noted that it is also possible to combine a further small winning combination to win multiple prizes. Also, the combination of small wins may be different between the normal push-order bell and the privilege push-order bell.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), each of the "privilege order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (4 small winning combinations) is assigned to one of the six types of pushing orders, and the six types of pushing orders are set. 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 of them. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six types of pushing order is the same.

For example, in the case of internal winning of "Privilege push order bell 1LCR" among "Privilege push order bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. A stop operation for the reel 112 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stopping operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order). Further, when the "privilege push order bell 4CRL" of the "privilege push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. A stop operation for the reel 110 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct pushing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), "Bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 Bell-Replay” is displayed on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if there is a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one, "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the 12-card small win (small win 3) will be awarded. displayed on the line.

Also, when the stop operation (correct order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the " "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) is performed that does not follow the navigation for acquiring 12 coins, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small win 4 is displayed on the winning line, One medal is paid out.

In this example, "Privilege push order bells 1-6", since 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 out of 6 push orders, "Privilege push order bells 1-6" , 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 5/6. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger or smaller than 5/6. In addition, even if any one of the privilege push-order bells 1 to 6 is internally won, the payout will not be 0 due to missing. Therefore, the player can easily notice that he/she has won the privilege push-order bell.

<advantageous section, non-advantageous section>
Next, the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 191(a). FIG. 191(a) is a diagram schematically showing an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 has a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous section. After the power is turned on or after the setting value is changed, a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state, and when the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in this non-advantageous section (for example, when a replay role is won in a certain game) Then, an advantageous section is set from the next game.

In addition, when the non-advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in this advantageous section (for example, when the AT state ends after shifting from the normal state to the AT state, or when the limiter is reached, etc.), the non-advantageous section from the next game An advantageous section is set, and the navigation number counter 2 is initialized to 0.

Here, the navigation number counter 2 is a counter that indicates the accumulated number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation for acquiring one card executed when internally winning the privilege push-order bell), and the number of times when the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. It is initialized to 0 when a case or RAM clear is executed, and 1 is added each time navigation is executed in an advantageous section. Although the details will be described later, this navigation number counter 2 is used when displaying the numerical values of the navigation number counter 2 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

<Types of game state>
Next, the game state and transition of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 191(b). FIG. 191(b) is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 has game states including at least a normal state, a first chance state, a second chance state, and an AT state, in addition to the above-described advantageous interval and non-advantageous interval.

<Normal state>
The normal state is set as the initial state after the power is turned on or after the set value is changed. When the conditions for shifting to the first chance state are established in this normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 1 reaches 50), the game shifts to the first chance state from the next game. This state includes non-advantageous sections and advantageous sections.

Here, the navigation number counter 1 is a counter that indicates the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push-order bell (navigation for obtaining one card), and is used when the first chance state shifts to the normal state or when the RAM is cleared. is initialized to 0 when executing, etc. Every time navigation (navigation for winning one card) that suggests the operation order to win the special order bell and win one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is performed is incremented by 1. Although the details will be described later, this navigation frequency counter 1 is used when calculating the navigation compliance rate, when displaying numerical values of the navigation frequency counter 1 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the like.

Also, when the condition for transition to the second chance state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second chance state (for example, lottery with a winning probability of 1/300) is won), the next time The game shifts to the second chance state. Also, when the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 2 reaches 300), the game shifts to the AT state from the next game.

<First chance state>
The first chance state is a state in which it is possible to shift to the second chance state, and is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state. In this example, the first chance state is 5 games (fixed), and every game, a lottery to determine whether to shift to the second chance state (lottery for transition to the second chance state. This example Then, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/5 is performed.

In this first chance state, when the conditions for shifting to the second chance state are satisfied (in this example, when the lottery for shifting to the second state is won), the second chance state is entered from the next game. Transition. Also, when the conditions for shifting to the normal game are satisfied in the first chance state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second chance state is not won), the next game is shifted to the normal game. At the same time, the navigation number counter 1 is initialized to 0.

<Second Chance State>
The second chance state is a state in which an AT lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state, and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the first chance state. In this example, the second chance state is 5 games (fixed), and every game, a lottery (AT transition lottery) to determine whether to shift to the AT state. )I do.

When the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT shift lottery is won), the next game is shifted to the AT state. Also, when the conditions for shifting to the normal game are established in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT shift lottery is not won), the next game is shifted to the normal game.

In this example, the configuration is such that the AT state does not transition to the second chance state, but the transition may be made possible. It is preferable that the probability is set to 1/2 regardless of the navigation adherence rate, which will be described later, and that the playability is different from the second chance state that does not go through the AT state.

<AT state>
The AT state is a state in which the AT game can be played a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 games per set), and is more advantageous to the player than in other game states.

In this AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game in the starting game of the AT game. In this example, AT games (30 games per set) are given, and the AT state is extended.

When the condition for shifting to the normal game is satisfied in this AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are completed), the next game is shifted to the normal game.

It should be noted that the benefits granted to the player in the AT state are not limited to the granting of the AT game. The probability of winning the extension lottery may be increased (for example, from 10% to 20%), and the rate of entry into the special zone (extension determination period) in the AT state may be increased (for example, from 20% to 30%). ), the extension decision rate in the AT state may be increased (for example, an average of 10 games added to an average of 30 games added), and the navigation rate in the AT state may be increased (for example, from 80% to 100% up).

<Navi compliance rate>
Next, the navigation compliance rate will be described with reference to FIG.

In the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when winning the special order bell in the normal state, navigation (navigation for winning one card) is performed to suggest the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4). , 1 is added to the navigation number counter 1. Then, when the player performs an operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation, it is treated as having performed a correct operation, and 1 is added to a correct operation counter indicating the number of correct operation. , when an operation that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation is performed, it is treated as an incorrect answer sequence operation, and 1 is not added to the correct operation counter.

In this example, during the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state, the navigation number counter 1 and the correct operation counter are updated, and the correct operation counter is divided by the navigation number counter 1. A navigation observance rate is calculated, and based on this navigation observance rate, the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in the AT state are changed.

Further, in this example, the case where the stop operation following the navigation for obtaining one card is continued for a certain period and the case where the stop operation not following the navigation for obtaining one card is continued for a certain period are determined for a certain period of time. It is designed so that the player's profit is almost the same if the game is over a long period of time. Further, if the stop operation following the navigation for obtaining one medal is continued, the consumption of medals increases in the normal state, but it is advantageous in later games, while the stop operation not following the navigation for obtaining one medal is performed. is continued, the amount of tokens consumed is reduced during normal operation, but there is no advantage in subsequent games.

For this reason, the player has no choice but to finish in front of the ceiling by choosing between a stop operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation and a stop operation not according to the one-card acquisition navigation according to his or her budget. , it is possible to reduce situations such as ending the game without winning, and the player's desire to play the game is not diminished.

Note that the navigation compliance rate may be calculated by other methods. For example, the number of times the player does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation may be determined every 100 games, and if the number is 0, the number may be reset (the navigation compliance rate may be set to 100%). In this case, it may be possible to reduce the influence of other players' game histories. It is also possible to simply count the number of times the player did not follow the one-card acquisition navigation, and change the winning probability according to the count value. In this case, it may be possible to reduce the processing load associated with the calculation. This also applies to other states.

In addition, the probability of winning the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in the AT state are based on other numerical values instead of (or in addition to) the navigation compliance rate. For example, even if the navigation compliance rate is low, if the number of operation errors is small, the navigation compliance rate may be treated as high.

<Navi adherence rate and transition lottery (first chance state)>
FIG. 192(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation adherence rate and the transition lottery winning probability in the first chance state.

As described above, in the first chance state, if the transition lottery with a winning probability of 1/5 is won, the state will shift to the second chance state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90% increases the winning probability of the transition lottery from 1/5 to 1/3, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70-90%, increases the winning probability of the transition lottery If the adherence rate is less than 70%, it is configured to maintain the winning probability of the shift lottery.

That is, in the first chance state, if the navigation compliance rate in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the winning probability of the transition lottery becomes higher, making it easier to transition to a second chance state.

In other words, if the privilege push-order bell is won in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more the correct pushing order operation is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one card) that suggests the operation order to win a small role (small role 4), the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery, and the second chance state. easier to do.

With such a specification, the player will perform operations according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of transition to the second chance state. It is possible to realize a ball payout rate and game performance in line with the intention of the player.

It should be noted that the ease of transition from the first chance state to the second chance state may be the same regardless of the navigation compliance rate. In addition, when operating according to the navigation (when the navigation compliance rate is high), it may be configured to favor matters related to the second chance state determined in the first chance state, for example, the second chance The length of the state period may be extended (resulting in easier transition to AT state), or the likelihood of winning the lottery in the second chance state may be increased (resulting in transition to AT state may be made easier).

<Navi adherence rate and transition lottery (second chance state)>
FIG. 192(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the transition lottery winning probability in the second chance state.

As described above, in the second chance state, if the transition lottery with a winning probability of 1/10 is won, the state is shifted to the AT state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90%, the transition is made. Raise the winning probability of the lottery from 1/10 to 1/8, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70-90%, increase the winning probability of the migration lottery from 1/10 to 1/9, and increase the navigation compliance rate In the case of less than 70%, it is configured to maintain the winning probability of the shift lottery.

That is, in the second chance state, if the navigation compliance rate is high for a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), the winning probability of the transition lottery becomes higher, making it easier to shift to the AT state.

In other words, if the privilege push-order bell is won in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more you perform the correct pushing order operation according to the navigation (navigation for winning one card) that suggests the operation order to win a small role (small role 4), the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery, and the easier it is to shift to the AT state. .

With such specifications, the player will perform operations according to the navigation in order to increase the rate of navigation compliance in order to increase the probability of transition to the AT state. It is possible to realize the pay-out rate and game performance along the line.

<Navi adherence rate and set continuation lottery (AT state)>
FIG. 192(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the AT state and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery.

As described above, in the AT state, if you win the set continuation lottery with a winning probability of 1/4, you will be given an AT game of 30 games per set, and the AT state will be extended, but the navigation compliance rate will be 90%. If it exceeds, the winning probability of the set continuation lottery will be increased from 1/4 to 1/2, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70-90%, the winning probability of the set continuation lottery will be increased from 1/4 to 1/3. , and when the navigation compliance rate is less than 70%, the winning probability of the set continuation lottery is maintained.

That is, in the AT state, if the navigation compliance rate in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the probability of winning the set continuation lottery is high. , and the AT game is likely to be given in the AT state.

In other words, if the privilege push-order bell is won in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The AT game is more likely to be given in the AT state as the correct pushing order operation is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one card) that suggests the operation order to win a small winning combination (small winning combination 4).

With such specifications, the player will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the rate of compliance with the navigation in order to increase the probability of continuing the set. It is possible to achieve a ball payout rate and playability.

<Various navigation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 193, various types of navigation will be described.

<Various navigation / non-AT state>
FIG. 193(a) is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in the non-AT state.

In this example, in the non-advantageous section (non-AT state), even if you win the special push order bell, the navigation (1 win navigation) and navigation (navigation for winning 12 cards) suggesting an operation order for winning a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) are not executed.

This non-advantageous section (non-AT state) is highly likely to be stayed after the setting is changed (immediately after the amusement arcade opens) or the like, and is a period in which it is difficult to shift to the AT state immediately. That is, since it is a disadvantageous period for the player compared to the advantageous section, navigation is not performed in this non-advantageous section, so that it is easy to win 12 small wins (small win 3) (5/6 12 small wins (3 small wins) with a probability of .

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), if the normal pushing order bell is won, the navigation that suggests the operation order to win one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) (navigation for acquiring one pushing order) , and the navigation (navigation for winning 12 cards) that suggests the operation order to win the 12-card small role (small role 3) is not executed, but if you win the special order bell, some Except for the exception of 1, it is configured to execute navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests an operation order for winning a small winning combination (small winning combination 4).

In this advantageous section (non-AT state), if the privilege push-order bell is won, the player is strongly urged to operate according to the one-piece acquisition navigation, so the normal push-order bell is won in the AT state. The notification mode is different from the navigation for obtaining 12 cards (for example, the navigation described later with reference to FIG. 193(c)).

Specifically, in the AT state, a sound effect (navigation sound) different from the navigation for obtaining 12 cards normally performed when the order bell is won in the AT state is output, and a display suggesting the operation order (RCL in this example) is displayed. By enclosing the periphery with the effect image EF, the player is strongly encouraged to perform the operation according to the navigation for acquiring one card.

In addition, there is no particular limitation on the aspect of navigation for acquiring one when winning the privilege pushing order bell in the advantageous section (non-AT state), for example, the color of the navigation image may be changed (for example, If the image of the navigation for obtaining 12 images, which is performed when the normal pressing order bell is won in the AT state, is black, it may be displayed in red). In addition, the display position of the navigation image may be changed (for example, if the position of the navigation image for acquiring 12 images performed when the normal push order bell is won in the AT state is below the display area, the display may be displayed in the center of the area). In addition, it is preferable to make it easy for the player to notice by turning on a dedicated lamp or turning off a lamp that is always on.

FIG. 193(b) is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (non-AT state).

As described above, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), navigation is not performed when the normal push-order bell is won, so the execution frequency of navigation in the advantageous section (non-AT state) is lower than in the AT state. For this reason, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), players who are accustomed to operating conventional machines have a preconceived notion that this is a period in which navigation is not performed, and even if navigation is performed, inertia There is a possibility that you will perform the forward pressing operation (incorrect pressing order operation).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193(b), when winning a role other than the privilege push-order bell (for example, a replay role), in the same way as when winning the privilege push-order bell, navigation should be performed. For example, by increasing the execution frequency of navigation and impressing the player with the execution of navigation, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the player and increase the satisfaction of the player. When a replay role is won, the navigation may be performed every time, or the navigation may be performed at an appropriate number of times (for example, about once every three times). In addition, even if navigation is performed when winning the replay role, the navigation at the time of winning this replay role is irrelevant to the navigation compliance rate, and the navigation is more important than when winning the bonus order bell. Since the degree is low, the effect image EF for calling attention may be configured not to be displayed.

In addition, if it is configured so that navigation is performed even when the winning role is not won (in the case of a loss) in the same way as when winning the privilege order bell, the execution frequency of navigation is increased, and the execution of navigation is increased. By impressing the player, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the player and increase the degree of satisfaction of the player. It should be noted that navigation may be performed each time in the case of a loss, or may be performed at an appropriate number of times (for example, about once every five times).

<Various navigation / advantageous section (AT state)>
FIG. 193(c) is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (AT state).

In the advantageous section (AT state), if you win the normal pushing order bell, with some exceptions, navigation that suggests the operation order to win 12 small wins (small win 3) (navigation for winning 12 coins ) is configured to run.

Although illustration is omitted, when the player performs an operation according to the 12 medal acquisition navigation, when paying out 12 medals, a sound effect (payout sound) is output and 12 medals are paid out. A display indicating that the game has been performed (for example, a display including a character string "get 12 cards") is displayed.

Also, in the advantageous section (AT state), even if you win the special push order bell, with some exceptions, in the same manner as when you win the normal push order bell, 12 small wins (small win 3) It is configured to execute navigation (navigation for winning 12 cards) that suggests an operation sequence for winning a prize.

In addition, even if you perform an incorrect answer pushing order operation due to an operation error etc. and win a prize of 12 small wins (small win 3), in the same manner as when the correct answer pushing order operation is performed, the sound effect (payout sound ) is output, and a display indicating that 12 coins have been paid out (for example, a display including a character string “Get 12 coins”) is performed. Since the AT state is a state in which a large number of medals are given to the player, even if the player has performed the wrong answer pressing order operation, if the player has obtained 12 medals, the correct answer pressing order is given. By executing the same effect as the operation, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing in the AT state.

In this example, if you win the privilege push order bell (for example, privilege push order bell 1), 12 pieces acquisition navigation (for example, one of the five push orders excluding the LCR push order) 1), but when selecting one of a plurality of types of 12-card acquisition navigators, if the navigator is selected by lottery, the order of pressing will be biased. fairness can be ensured.

Further, when selecting one of a plurality of types of navigation for obtaining 12 cards, a predetermined navigation may be executed. If the navigation (predetermined navigation) to be executed when the bell 2 is won is executed, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the determination of the pressing order.

In addition, during the AT game, navigation that reduces the operating conditions (for example, navigation that reduces the number of options in the order of pressing, navigation that lowers the difficulty of operation by widening the pressing range, etc.) may be executed. , For example, when the privilege pushing order bell 1 wins other than the AT game, while executing the so-called 6-choice pushing order navigation that specifies the order of LCR, when the privilege pushing order bell 1 wins in the AT game, "First If the so-called 3-option pressing order navigating specifying "stop the middle reel immediately" is executed, the player can easily perform the operation during the AT game, and the player's satisfaction can be enhanced.

In addition, if one, a plurality, or all of the processes such as the process of executing predetermined navigation and the process of executing navigation with fewer operation conditions during AT games are applied, it is possible to determine the pushing order. While reducing the related control load, it is possible to reduce the player's operation errors during the AT game and increase the player's satisfaction.

<Navigation frequency counter>
Next, the navigation number counter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a display example of the navigation number counter.

The state shown in FIG. 1(i) is the state in which the navigation display is started. The display of the navigation prompting the operation and the effect image EF has started.

In the same state, the current value of the navigation number counter 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 provided on the upper right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the counter 2 is provided below the counter 1 display area CT1. The current value of the navigation number counter 2 is displayed in the display area CT2.

The numerical value of the counter 1 and the numerical value of the counter 2 are the displayed numerical values that match the internally stored numerical values. For example, immediately after the power is turned on, both the numerical value of the counter 1 and the numerical value of the counter 2 are displayed as 0, which may not match the internally stored numerical value.

As described above, the number-of-navigation counter 1 is a counter indicating the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push-order bell. , a numerical value of 1 is displayed. Further, the navigation number counter 2 is a counter that indicates the accumulated number of times of navigation in an advantageous section. ing.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 2(ii) is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 139) is performed with the first stop reel being the right reel 112. In this example, the first stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation that prompts the first stop operation (right) (in this example, the image where 1 is circled) is deleted and the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (in this example, 2 is circled) image) is enlarged.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 3(iii) is a state in which a second stop operation (an operation of pressing the stop button 138) is performed with the second stop reel being the middle reel 111. In this example, the second stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (in this example, the image where 2 is circled) is deleted and the navigation that prompts the third stop operation (left) (in this example, 3 is circled) image) is enlarged.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(iv) is a state in which a third stop operation (an operation of pressing the stop button 137) has been performed with the left reel 110 as the third stop reel. Since it has been accepted, the navigation prompting the third stop operation (left) (in this example, the image where 3 is circled) and the effect image EF are deleted.

In addition, in the same state, since one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is won, a payout process of paying out one medal is executed, and a display suggesting the payout of medals (in this example, one payout display including a string of "+1" suggesting ). In this example, the number of medals to be paid out is one, and the number of medals to be paid out in the game is reduced. is configured not to output a payout sound (sound effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort or discomfort.

In addition, by the payout process of paying out one medal, it is determined that the player has performed the correct operation according to the navigation, and that the player has won a small winning combination (small winning combination 4) by the correct operating operation. A suggestive display (in this example, a display containing the string "success") is started.

The subsequent state shown in (v) of the same figure is the state after the payout of medals has been completed. 4) The display (success) that suggests winning is deleted.

In addition, since the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push-order bell (navigation number counter 1) is incremented by one in the game, a numerical value of 2 (=1+1) is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. Note that the value of the navigation number counter 1 displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 is incremented by one even when an operation other than the correct order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like. can be prevented from decreasing more than necessary.

In addition, since the cumulative number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation number counter 2) has been incremented by one in the game, the counter 2 display area CT2 value of 15 (=14+1) is displayed. In addition, the value of the navigation number counter 2 displayed in the counter 2 display area CT2 is incremented by 1 even when winning a prize combination other than the special order bell (for example, based on the winning of the replay combination) Therefore, it is possible to increase the update frequency of the display of the navigation number counter 2, and the player can proceed with the game at a good tempo while appropriately enhancing the performance effect.

<Navi execution period>
Next, the navigation execution period will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195(a) is a diagram showing an example of a navigation execution period and a non-execution period.

As explained using FIG. 193(a), in the advantageous section (non-AT state), when winning the normal push-order bell, it suggests an operation order to win one small winning combination (small winning combination 4). It is configured so that neither navigation (navigation for acquiring 1 card) nor navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests an operation order for winning a 12-card small win (3 small wins) is executed, A period T2b shown in FIG. 195(a) indicates a period during which navigation is not performed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), if you win the privilege pushing order bell, with some exceptions, the navigation (1 The period T1a shown in FIG. 195(a) indicates the period during which the one-card acquisition navigation is executed.

It should be noted that the state in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed, that is, in this example, when the condition for transition to the AT state is satisfied in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is won), or When the condition for shifting to the AT state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 2 reaches 300), even if the privilege push order bell is won, the navigation for obtaining one is not executed, and a period T1b shown in FIG. 195(a) indicates a period during which navigation for obtaining one card is not executed (a period during which AT determination is notified).

In this period T1b (the period during which AT confirmation is announced), as shown in FIG. (Display of moving image regarding AT determination) is performed, but navigation for obtaining one card is not performed.

During the period T1b (the period during which the AT determination is announced), the AT game has not started, but since reducing the number of balls paid out leads to the disadvantage of the player, navigation for acquiring one is not executed, and the number of 12 To make it easier to win a prize in a piece role (small role 3). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction without giving the player an excessive disadvantage.

In addition, depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that the 1-card role (small role 4) will win more than the 12-card role (small role 3) During this period, the number of medals to be paid out will be reduced a lot). It may be configured to perform navigation (navigation for winning 12 coins) suggesting an operation order for winning a small win (small win 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of unfairness among the players and increase the level of satisfaction of the players. In the meantime, when winning the normal push-order bell, navigation (12-card winning navigation) that suggests an operation order to win a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) may be executed, and it is determined that the number of payouts is small. In this case, the possibility of increasing the payout number at an early stage can be increased.

Also, as described with reference to FIG. 193(c), in the advantageous section (AT state), except for some exceptions, when winning the normal pushing order bell, 12 small wins (small win 3) 195(a) indicates the period during which the navigation for winning 12 cards is executed. .

In addition, in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, even if you win the special order bell, the navigation (12 win The period T1c and the period T1e shown in FIG. 195(a) indicate the periods during which the 12-card acquisition navigation is executed.

In the period T1c, as shown in FIG. 4(c), an AT-in-time notification (in this example, displaying a moving image regarding the AT state) is performed to notify that the player is in the AT state, while navigation for acquiring 12 images is executed. It is configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to play during the AT.

Similarly, in the period T1e, as shown in FIG. 4(e), an ending notification (in this example, a moving image related to the ending) is performed to notify that it is the ending period of the AT, while 12 images are acquired. It is configured to run navigation. With such a configuration, even in the ending period when the AT state is about to end, the player can proceed with the game in a good mood, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in a certain period in the advantageous section (AT state) (in this example, the period of continuous judgment of AT), even if the normal pushing order bell is won or the specific pushing order bell is won, It is configured not to execute the navigation (navigation for winning 12 coins) suggesting the operation order for winning the 12 coins small win (small win 3). It shows the period during which the card acquisition navigation is not executed.

In the period T1d, as shown in FIG. 10(d), an AT continuation judge effect (in this example, a video display regarding the presence or absence of an AT set continuation) that informs that the AT is being judged continuously. It is configured not to execute 12-card acquisition navigator while performing an effect showing whether or not to execute it by the conclusion (victory or defeat) of the battle effect). With such a configuration, the navigation display does not hinder the visibility of the AT continuation judge effect, and the player can fully enjoy the effect.

It should be noted that, depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that the 1-card hand (small hand 4) will win more than the 12-hand hand (small hand 3), so during this period, the number of medals to be paid out will be managed. When it is judged that the number of payouts is small after processing, navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests an operation order for winning a 12-coin small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is performed when winning the special push-order bell. It may be configured as

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of unfairness among the players and increase the level of satisfaction of the players. In the meantime, when winning the normal push-order bell, navigation (12-card winning navigation) that suggests an operation order to win a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) may be executed, and it is determined that the number of payouts is small. In this case, the possibility of increasing the payout number at an early stage can be increased.

<Modification>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 200, modified examples of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described.

<Mode in normal game>
FIG. 196(a) is a diagram showing an example of modes in the normal state and count values of the navigation number counter 2 corresponding to each mode, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a value.

In this example, three modes of modes 1 to 3 are provided in the normal game. When the condition for shifting to the normal game is satisfied in the AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are completed), the lottery data shown in FIG. One of modes 1 to 3 is selected by lottery based on , and when the normal state is shifted, the mode selected by lottery is selected.

Here, mode 1 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the navigation number counter 2 reaches 500 in the normal state. Mode 2 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the number-of-navigation counter 2 reaches 400 in the normal state. Mode 3 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the number-of-navigation counter 2 reaches 300 in the normal state.

For example, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state exceeds 90%, select mode 1 with a probability of 50/100, select mode 2 with a probability of 30/100, and select mode 2 with a probability of 20/100. Choose mode 3 with probability.

Also, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is in the range of 70% to 90%, select mode 1 with a probability of 70/100, select mode 2 with a probability of 20/100, and select mode 2 with a probability of 10/100. Select mode 3 with a probability of 100.

Also, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is less than 70%, select mode 1 with a probability of 90/100, select mode 2 with a probability of 5/100, and select mode 2 with a probability of 5/100. Select Mode 3.

That is, in this example, the higher the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state, the more likely it is that a mode (mode 3 in this example) that facilitates transition to the AT state will be selected. With such a configuration, the player performs an operation according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to facilitate the transition to the AT state. It is possible to achieve a higher ball payout rate and game playability.

<Modified example of display of navigation frequency counter>
FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a modification of the display of the navigation number counter.

In the above embodiment, even if an operation other than the correct operation order is performed due to an operation error, etc., 1 is added to the navigation number counters 1 and 2, and the value after the addition is displayed. In this example, the navigation number counters 1 and 2 are not incremented by 1 when an operation other than the correct operation is performed due to an operation error or the like. The numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2 are displayed as numerical values that match internally stored numerical values.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 1(i) is the state in which the display of the navigation system has started. The display of the navigation prompting the operation in order (LCR) and the effect image EF is started.

In addition, in the same state, since the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push order bell at the start of the game is 1, the numerical value 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1, and the navigation in the advantageous section at the start of the game is displayed. is 14, the numerical value 14 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT2.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 2(ii) is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 137) is performed by an operation other than the correct pressing order operation. 3) and one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) were not won, so the navigation and the effect image EF are erased, and the payout process allows the player to perform operations other than the correct pressing order without following the navigation. is determined to have been performed, and a display (in this example, a display including a character string of "failure") indicating that it is a failure is started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 3(iii) is the state after the winning determination, in which the display (failure) suggesting the loss is erased.

Also, in the game, operations other than the correct order operation are performed, and the total number of navigation executions of the privilege order bell (navigation number counter 1) is not incremented, so a numerical value of 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. However, since the accumulated number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation number counter 2) is not added, 14 is displayed in the counter 2 display area CT2.

In the above embodiment, when the player performs the operation according to the navigation for obtaining 12 medals, a sound effect (payout sound) is output when 12 medals are paid out. In this example, since an operation other than the correct operation order (operation not recommended) was performed, even if one win (small win 4) is won, the effect sound (payment sound) is not output. Configure.

In this example, as a result of performing an operation other than the correct order operation, it is possible to reduce the number of balls released. It is not necessary to perform the process of changing the set continuation probability. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the gaming machine. It should be noted that if the game state is changed according to the numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2, it is possible to make the game less susceptible to the operation errors of other players.

<Modified example of navigation execution period>
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a modification of the navigation execution period.

In the above embodiment, in the advantageous section (AT state), except for some exceptions, if you win the normal push order bell, the navigation for 12 acquisition is executed, and even if you win the privilege push order bell , an example of executing navigation for obtaining 12 coins is shown, but as shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the navigation for obtaining 12 cards is executed 100% even when the privilege order bell is won in the period T1c1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2(ii), in the advantageous section (AT state), if the normal pushing order bell is won in the period T2a2, the navigation for obtaining 12 cards is executed 100%, and the privilege pushing is performed in the period T1c2. When the order bell is won, the navigation (for example, displaying "?-1-?" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157) for notifying only the first stop operation of the correct operation order is executed 100%. It may be configured as

With such a configuration, the probability of winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is reduced from 5/6 to 1/2, so that the difficulty of winning can be increased, and the correct operation order can be guessed. It is possible to give a character and improve the playability. In this case, there is a possibility that the first stop operation is performed on a stop button other than the stop button of the middle reel.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3(iii), in the advantageous section (AT state), if the normal pushing order bell is won in the period T2a3, the navigation for obtaining 12 cards is executed 100%, and the privilege pushing is performed in the period T1c3. It may be configured so that the navigation for obtaining 12 cards is not executed when the winning order is won.

With such a configuration, the probability of winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is 5/6. Since the navigation display does not impede the visibility of the performance (for example, the ending performance) during the AT state, the player can fully enjoy the performance.

<Variation of Navi>
FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a modification of navigation.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a game with a small number of balls is played by executing navigation for acquiring one in an advantageous section (non-AT state), but as in this example, a small win 1 (watermelon) may be constructed so as to perform navigation so as not to win the small winning combination 1 (watermelon).

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 1(i) is a state in which the navigation display is started, and in this example, based on the winning of the small winning combination 1 (watermelon), it corresponds to the small winning combination 1 (watermelon). Navigation (in this example, the character string "Caution") that prompts you to stop the symbol combination (in this example, "watermelon - watermelon - watermelon") so that it does not appear on the winning line (watermelon is missing) ) and the effect image EF are started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 2(ii) is a state in which the third stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 139) has been performed with the right reel 112 as the third stop reel. Since it was accepted, the navigation and the effect image EF that encourages the watermelon to be dropped are deleted.

Also, in the payout process, it is determined that the player has performed a stop operation following the navigation so as to miss the small win 1 (watermelon), and a display (in this example, "success") suggests that the player has missed the watermelon. ) is started.

With such a configuration, by controlling the display of the navigation, it is possible to play a game with a small number of balls, and it is possible to realize the ball-out rate and game performance in line with the intention of the designer of the game machine. It becomes possible.

The same navigation may be performed for the small winning combination 2 (cherry), which is the missing combination, or the same navigation may be carried out for both the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (cherry). In addition, since both the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (cherry) can be operated to miss even without the navigation prompting the missing, the game property may be such that navigation is not performed. By executing a predetermined specific operation mode every game even without the navigation prompting the game to be missed, if the game characteristic becomes such that more failures can occur than when the specific operation mode is not executed every game, then this specification It is possible to change the advantage by using the result of directly or indirectly determining that the operation mode of is executed. Since it is not necessary to change the operation mode for each game, it is possible to provide a game property in which operation errors are less likely to occur. Furthermore, by setting the internal winning probability of a winning combination that can be won when a specific operation mode is performed to be lower than the internal winning probability of a winning combination that can be won when another operation mode is performed, a specific operation mode can be achieved. By executing each game, the frequency of winning can be reduced as compared with the case where the specific operation mode is not executed for each game.

<Modified example of AT state>
FIG. 200(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the AT state, and FIG. 200(b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT termination screen displayed during the AT extension period.

In the above embodiment, the AT state is 1 set of 30 games. It may be configured to extend the AT state by increasing the number of games in the AT state according to the order miss.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4(a), in one set (30 games), there are X times of pushing order errors (operations other than the correct pushing order operation of the 12-card hand), and the 12-card hand is not performed. The AT state may be extended until the 12-card hand wins X times when the hand is missed.

If the AT state is extended until the 12-card combination is won by the number of pushing order errors (in this example, X times), there is a possibility that the profit given to the player will be excessive due to the winning of other winning combinations. Therefore, the AT state may be extended until a 12-card combination is won by a number less than the number of pushing order errors (X times in this example).

Further, when the AT state is extended, the display that was displayed at the end of one set (30 games) (for example, the AT end screen shown in FIG. 4B) continues to be displayed. Since the extension period of the AT state is uncertain and the occurrence frequency of extension is low, a special display for extension is not prepared. In order to clarify the total number of medals to be paid out, the total number of medals to be paid out may be displayed on the AT end screen.

In the advantageous section (non-AT state), it is possible to increase the number of payouts by performing an operation that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one, so the player who notices this can There is a possibility of performing operations that do not follow the navigation. Therefore, as in this example, if the AT state is extended until the 12-card combination is won by the number of pushing order errors, the player's profit can be secured in the extended ATT state. The player's satisfaction can be enhanced.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. 112), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to one or more wins or losses (e.g., winning combination internal lottery processing); Based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed, and the stop control means Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of stopped reels, and operation information for reporting operation information (for example, operation navigation) in the AT state. A gaming machine comprising notifying means and game control means (for example, processing for transitioning the game state) that controls the progress of the game and can change the degree of advantage, wherein the game control means is the first One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and the first game state The first game state is terminated and the second game state is set based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning the AT transition lottery) while the game state is being set. When the internal lottery means derives a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6) in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button is the first When the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the second operation condition than the first operation (for example, stop operation of RCL) according to the operation condition, the game A large amount of value (for example, medals) can be acquired, and the game control means controls the stop operation of the stop button when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The lower the number of times the second operation is performed, the higher the advantage of the second game state. The game machine is characterized by being in the AT state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

It should be noted that ``the more the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the lower the advantage in the second game state is changed'' means ``the stop of the stop button The advantage degree related to the second game state is "always" changed to a lower advantage degree as the number of times the operation is performed in the second operation increases." The greater the number of times the stop operation is performed in the second operation, the more the advantage degree related to the second game state is changed to a lower advantage degree. The same applies to the game table).

Therefore, for example, the second operation may be performed 3 times and 4 times, and the advantage level related to the second game state may be set to the same advantage level. As a result, the second game state may be set to an advantage that is higher than the third game state due to other factors (for example, lottery etc.). Even if the number of times the second operation is performed is 0 (for example, operation error is 0), there may be a case where the advantage regarding the second game state does not change.

In addition, the "specific lottery result" according to the present invention is not limited to a single lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 1), but one of a plurality of lottery results (for example, privilege push order bell 1 6) may be (the same applies to the gaming machines described later).

Therefore, for example, when a small winning combination X, a small winning combination Y, and a small winning combination Z are selected as a specific small winning combination group, and a small winning combination X, a small winning combination Y, or a small winning combination Z is internally won, the specific small winning combination group is internally won. (the "specific lottery result" according to the present invention is derived), the small winning combination X is a winning combination when the left reel is the first stop reel, and the small winning combination Y is the middle reel being the first stop reel. The small winning combination Y is a winning combination when the right reel is the first stopping reel, and the small winning combination X is compared to the small winning combination Y and the small winning combination Z. , is a combination with a low internal winning probability, and the small combination X, the small combination Y, and the small combination Z may have the same number of medals (for example, 8) to be paid out when winning.

With such a configuration, when the game with the left reel as the first stop reel (the game in which the first operation is performed) is continued, the number of medals that the player can obtain is reduced, and the middle reel or the right reel is reduced. is the first stop reel (a game in which the second operation is performed), the number of medals that the player can obtain increases, but if the left reel is the first stop reel and the game is continued In addition, games such as AT games can be advantageously changed.

In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; game value imparting means for imparting game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, medal payout processing); operation information reporting means for reporting operation information in the AT state; and controlling progress of the game. , game control means capable of changing the degree of advantage (for example, processing for transitioning the game state), wherein the state before the AT state includes a normal state and a chance state. , The chance state is a state in which it is easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state, and the game control means is a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least two game states (for example, a second chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. (For example, winning the AT transition lottery) is a means capable of terminating the first game state and setting the second game state, and in the first game state, the When a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation). ) in accordance with the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) can acquire more game value (for example, medals), and the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed less times by the second operation; The gaming machine is characterized in that it is means for changing the degree of advantage relating to the second game state to a degree of advantage as high as possible, and the second game state is the chance state. .

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, the advantage of the chance state is increased by performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; game value imparting means for imparting game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, medal payout processing); operation information reporting means for reporting operation information in the AT state; and controlling progress of the game. , game control means capable of changing the degree of advantage (for example, processing for transitioning the game state), wherein the state before the AT state includes a normal state and a chance state. The chance state includes a first chance state and a second chance state, the second chance state is a state in which transition to the AT state is easier than the normal state, and the first chance state. is a state in which the higher the advantage, the easier it is to shift to the second chance state, and the game control means is different from the first game state (for example, normal state) and the first game state One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Means capable of ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on that (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first game state Based on the player's operation result of the stop button when a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the predetermined condition is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Means capable of changing the degree of advantage relating to the second game state, wherein the specific lottery result is guided by the internal lottery means in the first game state. If issued, the stop operation of the stop button is more likely to be the second operation according to the second operating condition (e.g., The game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more in the case of performing a stop operation such as LCR, and the game control means allows the internal lottery means to win the specific value in the first game state. Means for changing the advantage in the second game state to a higher advantage as the number of stop operations of the stop button performed in the second operation is smaller when a lottery result is derived. and the second game state is a state for shifting to the first chance state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, the first operation to stop the stop button is more advantageous in terms of the state for shifting to the chance state. , it is possible to prompt the player to perform the first operation in the first game state, and to appropriately control the provision of game values such as the payout of game media.

In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; game value imparting means for imparting game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, medal payout processing); operation information reporting means for reporting operation information in the AT state; and controlling progress of the game. , game control means capable of changing the degree of advantage (for example, a process for transitioning the game state), and a game machine, wherein the game control means is a first game state (for example, normal state) and the It is possible to set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined state in which the first game state is set is satisfied (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), the first game state can be terminated and the second game state can be set; When a specific lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in one game state, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation according to the first operation condition ( For example, the game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more when performing the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) according to the second operation condition than the RCL stop operation). and the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation is Means for changing the advantage degree related to the second game state to a lower advantage degree as the number increases, the second game state is an AT state, and the first game state includes the AT A plurality of modes (for example, modes 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 196(a) and (b)) with different degrees of advantage regarding the transition to the state are included, and the game control means controls the stop operation of the stop button. When the mode in the first game state is changed to a mode with a higher degree of advantage regarding transition to the AT state as the number of times the second operation is performed is smaller (for example, the higher the navigation adherence rate) is a certain means.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, if the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation, the advantage of the second advantageous state increases, so the first In this game state, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the giving of game values such as the payout of game media. In addition, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation makes it easier to shift to the AT state. It is possible to prompt an operation, and to appropriately control the giving of game values such as the payout of game media.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, it is possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the first operation by issuing a notification prompting the first operation in the first game state.

In addition, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state, a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation (for example, 12 wins) navigation) may be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to impress the player that the second operation is advantageous by performing a notification to prompt the player to perform the second operation with a high profit for the player in the second game state. Along with, a player benefit can be granted,
Further, in the game in which the notification is performed, a count value indicating the number of times the notification is performed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of execution times of the notification, and the player's desire to operate can be improved.

In addition, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, privilege order bell) different from the first lottery result. , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, the game value can be obtained more when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, and the second game value can be obtained by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When the result of the lottery is derived, it may be possible to execute a notification to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can obtain a profit. can be resolved.

<Navigation count>
In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means for imparting game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, medal payout processing), game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, processing for changing the game state), , wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, AT state, second One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a chance state, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set (for example, Winning the AT transition lottery) is a means that can end the first game state and set the second game state, and the second game state is the first game state. It is a state more advantageous to the player than the game state, and when a specific lottery result (for example, a privilege push-order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop button is operated to stop. is performed under the second operating condition (e.g., stop operation of LCR, etc.) rather than the first operation (e.g., stopping operation of RCL) under the first operating condition. However, when it is possible to obtain a large amount of game value (for example, medals) and the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation The greater the number, the greater the number of games played until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the internal lottery means derives the specific lottery result, it is updated when the first operation is performed. 194 (for example, the numerical values of navigation number counters 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 194).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since the count value updated when a specific lottery result is derived is displayed, the lottery result can be grasped, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation (for example, navigation for acquiring 1 card, navigation for acquiring 12 cards, etc.) navigation) may be executable.

With such a configuration, the stop operation can be notified, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the certain count value may be a count value indicating the number of times the stop operation is performed according to the notification in the game in which the notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of execution times of the notification, and the player's desire to operate can be improved.

In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least one state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied when the first game state is set. Means capable of ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and the first game state, when the internal lottery means derives a specific lottery result (e.g., privilege push-order bell 6), the player performs the stop operation of the stop button in accordance with the first operation condition ( For example, the game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more when performing the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) according to the second operation condition than the RCL stop operation). and the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation is It is means for changing the degree of advantage relating to the second gaming state to a higher degree of advantage as the number decreases, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the A game capable of executing notification (e.g., 1-card acquisition navigation, 12-card acquisition navigation) for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation or the second operation, and executing the notification is capable of displaying a certain updated count value (for example, the numerical value of the navigation number counter 2 shown in FIG. 194).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since a count value indicating the number of times of execution of notification is displayed, the number of times of execution of notification can be visually grasped, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be means for changing the degree of advantage in the game to a higher degree of advantage as the certain count value increases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation according to the navigation, and to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

In addition, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, privilege order bell) different from the first lottery result. , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, the game value can be obtained more, and at least the first game value can be obtained by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When a second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can obtain a profit. can be resolved.

<Navigation non-execution period>
In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least one state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Means capable of ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and the first game state, when the internal lottery means derives a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6), the stop operation of the stop button is set to the first operation (for example, RCL A second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) according to the second operation condition than the stop operation) can acquire more game value (for example, medals), The game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the smaller the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation, It is a means that may change the degree of advantage related to the second game state to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means controls the specific period in the first game state (for example, FIG. 193 In the non-advantageous section shown in (a)), when the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, the advantage degree related to the second game state is not included in the number of times to change, It is a game machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since there is a period during which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least one state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. It is possible to end the first game state and set the second game state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first game state, the When a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation). ) in accordance with the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) can acquire more game value (for example, medals), and the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the second The game control means may change the degree of advantage related to the game state to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means may stop the stop button during a specific period in the first game state When the operation is performed by the second operation, it is means not to include it in the number of times the advantage degree related to the second game state is changed, and the specific period is a specific effect (for example, FIG. 195 ( This is a game machine characterized in that it is a period during which the AT confirmation effect shown in b) is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since there is a period during which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, , a game state transition process), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state It is possible to set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least states (for example, AT state, second chance state, first chance state), and in the first game state, a specific game state is selected by the internal lottery means. When the lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is performed according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation) rather than the second operation. The game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the operation condition, and the game control means controls the first operation. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the game state of (1), the fewer times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more advantageous the second game state The game control means is a means that may change the degree to a high advantage, and the game control means is a specific period in the second game state (for example, period T1d shown in FIG. 195 (a). Continuous judgment period of AT state) In the case where the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, it shall not be included in the number of times of changing the advantage level related to the second game state. It is a game machine characterized in that it is a good means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since there is a period during which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state, it is possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. , the notification may not be executed during a certain period in the second game state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to add sharpness to the game, and to keep the player's desire to play.

Also, the specific period may be a period in which the game value given to the player changes less than a period other than the specific period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to add sharpness to the game and increase the variation of the game.

Further, when the total amount of the game value awarded in the specific period falls below a certain amount, the stop operation of the stop button is performed when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means. It may be possible to execute notification for performing the second operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid giving a disadvantage to the player and increase the satisfaction of the player.

In addition, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, privilege order bell) different from the first lottery result. , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, the game value can be obtained more, and at least the first game value can be obtained by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When a second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can obtain a profit. can be resolved.

<Navigation when winning other prizes>
In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, and first chance state), and in the first game state, the internal lottery means selects a specific game state. When the lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is performed according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation) rather than the second operation. The game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the operation condition, and the game control means controls the first operation. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the game state of (1), the fewer times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more advantageous the second game state When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button is changed to the first game state. It is possible to execute a first notification (for example, navigation for acquiring one image with effect image EF shown in FIG. 193(b)) to be performed by operation, and the first notification Even when a lottery result different from the specific lottery result (for example, a replay combination, a loss) is derived by the internal lottery means in the game state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. 193(b), and the second notification and the first notification are at least partly are the same in the aspect of

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, even when a lottery result different from a specific lottery result is derived, it is notified, so that the player can play the game at a good tempo.

Further, in the game in which the first notification is performed, a count value indicating the number of times the first notification is performed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of execution times of the notification, and the player's desire to operate can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be means for changing the degree of advantage in the game to a higher degree of advantage as the count value increases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation according to the navigation, and to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

In addition, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, privilege order bell) different from the first lottery result. , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, the game value can be obtained more, and at least the first game value can be obtained by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When a second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can obtain a profit. can be resolved.

<Navigation in AT state>
In addition, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189). , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, first chance state) can be set, and in the first game state, a specific lottery result ( For example, when the privilege push order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is set to the second operation condition rather than the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation) Therefore, when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed, more game value (for example, medals) can be obtained, and the game control means controls the first game state When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the lower the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation, the higher the advantage in the second game state. The specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result ( For example, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button with the second operation when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means When the second lottery result is derived, the game value can be obtained more when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation than when the second lottery result is derived. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state, a notification (e.g., 12-card acquisition navigation ) can be executed, and when the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation. (For example, navigation for acquiring 12 cards) is a game machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, in the second game state, in both the case where the first lottery result is derived and the case where the second lottery result is derived, in order to perform notification for performing the second operation, In the second game state, the game value can be easily acquired without worrying about the lottery result, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, when the first lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 1) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. When the second lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 2) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button can be executed in the second operation.

Also, the second game state may be an AT state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily acquire game value without worrying about the lottery result in the AT state, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, notification executed when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state, and the second lottery result by the internal lottery means in the second game state The notification performed when is derived may have the same notification mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily acquire game value without being conscious of the stop operation, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first game state" and "second game state" according to the present invention may be a combination of different game states, for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, specialized zone, In addition to the ED state, it may be a combination of game states such as RT, AT, ART, bonus, pullback zone for AT and ART, and the like.

In addition, "fulfilling a predetermined condition" according to the present invention is not limited to winning the AT lottery. , internal winning (or prize winning) in a predetermined conditional device, fulfillment of bonus termination conditions, and the like.

In addition, the combination of "first game state" → "predetermined condition is established" → "second game state" according to the present invention is "normal game" → "AT lottery winning" → "AT state" For example, "CZ state" → "AT lottery win" → "AT state", "Bonus" → "AT lottery win" → "AT state", "Normal state" → "Number of games is default The number of games has been reached" → "AT state", "AT state" → "The number of games has reached the default number of games" → "Specialized zone", "Normal game" → "The number of points has reached the default number of points Reached" → "AT state", "AT state" → "The number of points has reached the specified number of points" → "Specialized zone", "AT state" → "The number of points has reached the specified number of points" → "Pseudo-bonus", "Normal state" → "Internally won (or won) a predetermined condition device" → "AT state", "Normal state" → "Internally won (or won) a predetermined condition device ”→“Bonus”, “Bonus”→“Bonus end condition satisfied”→“Normal state”, “Bonus”→“Bonus end condition satisfied”→“AT state”, etc. .

In addition, the "result of operation of the stop button" according to the present invention is not limited to the timing at which the player presses the left reel. (Reverse press), symbols (or symbol combinations) that are stopped by operating the stop button are also included.

In addition, the "ease of acquiring gaming value" according to the present invention is not limited to the ease of adding the number of AT games, and for example, the ease of adding the difference in the number of AT games, the ease of acquiring the number of AT sets, etc. Ease of entry, ease of entering specialized zones, frequency of execution of navigating the push order bell, ease of transition to good RT on ART machine (high and low navigation probability of pushing order promotion replay), good RT ease of transition to, frequency of execution of replay navigation, ease of continuation of a state in which gaming value is easy to acquire (for example, AT, ART, RT, bonus), state in which gaming value is easy to acquire ( AT high probability, ease of transition to AT specialized zone, etc. may be used.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are rotationally driven with a plurality of types of symbols, and is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels. A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the rotation of and an internal lottery that derives one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more wins or losses means (e.g. internal lottery for winning combination), and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, the reel corresponding to the stop button operated to stop is stopped based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. Stop control means (for example, reel stop control) for performing stop control to stop the reels, and game value giving means (for example, medal payout) for giving game values according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means ), and a game control means (for example, game start state processing and game state update processing) that controls the progress of the game and can change the ease of acquiring game value, The game control means selects one game from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state (eg, non-advantageous section) and a second game state (eg, advantageous section) different from the first game state A state can be set, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, the first game state is terminated and the second game state is set. is possible, and is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the player's operation result of the stop button in the first game state (for example, the timing at which the player presses the left reel 110) Means that can change the ease of acquiring the game value in the second gaming state (for example, the ease of adding the number of AT games), and the player presses the stop button in the first gaming state It is easier for the player to obtain a profit when the second operation is performed according to the second operation condition than when the first operation is performed according to the first operation condition, and the game control means controls the first operation. When the second operation is performed more than the first operation in the gaming state, the predetermined condition is higher than when the first operation is performed more than the second operation The game machine may be characterized in that the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state set after being satisfied may change disadvantageously for the player.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to change the ease of acquiring game value in the second gaming state after the transition, depending on the operation result of the player's stop button in the first gaming state. It is possible to appropriately control the payout of game value through the first game state and the second game state.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). When a start lever operation) is received, rotation is started, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation by a stop button described later), the propriety of internal winning of multiple types of hands is determined by lottery. Then, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop. This game machine advances a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, game media are paid out and the game is terminated, and if the game is not met, the game is terminated without paying out the game media.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 201 to 207. FIG. 201 to 207 are used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 201 to 207 have priority.

Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other. In particular, another embodiment that applies the same winning combination as the winning combination shown in FIG. Further effects may be obtained by combining each example of the embodiment.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the controller of the slot machine will be described. The control section of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") sent by the main control section that controls the main effects. and a second sub-controller for controlling various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller.

The main control section has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section and enables communication with the first sub-control section. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit. It is not possible to send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller based on the control commands. The first sub-controller controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.) and various lamps.

The second sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller based on this control command. The second sub-controller controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained.

Symbols displayed on the top of the left reel are symbols on the top left reel, symbols displayed on the middle of the left reel are symbols on the middle of the left reel, symbols displayed on the bottom of the left reel are symbols on the bottom of the left reel, and symbols displayed on the top of the middle reel. The symbol to be displayed is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the right reel is the top symbol Right reel top symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel bottom symbols, and right reel bottom symbols. There are 3 vertically on each reel, for a total of 9.

In this embodiment, one winning line is provided, which is a middle winning line composed of left reel middle symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel middle symbols. A winning line is a line set at a stop position of a symbol visible through a symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine of this embodiment can bet 3 or 2, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines are activated and 3 or 2 medals are placed. Win lines are activated when bets are placed. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 pay lines, which are upward-sloping pay lines, may be set as valid pay lines, or a number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b). FIG. 3(a) shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination, and remarks. ) is a diagram showing the types of normal pressing order bells and special pressing order bells, and payouts corresponding to each pressing order.

Each of the reels 110 to 112 has a predetermined number of frames (eg, 20 frames) of a plurality of types of symbols (eg, replay symbols, watermelon symbols, cherry symbols, bell symbols, etc. shown in FIG. 202(a)). .

Winning roles of the slot machine 100 include special roles (not shown) (special role 1, special role 2), general roles (replay role, small wins 1 to 4, normal order bell, special order bell), etc. There is Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is, for example, "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is).

A "replay combination" is a prize winning combination (operating combination) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 4)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The hand 2 (cherry) is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", etc., as shown in FIG. 202(a). The corresponding number of payouts is also shown in the figure.

The small win 1 (watermelon) and the small win 2 (cherry) are wins that can be won by operating the correct timing. This indicates that any pattern may be used for the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 . In addition, although the details will be described later, the small win 3 and the small win 4 are wins that can be won by operating the correct answer order. There is a case.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (result of internal lottery processing for a winning combination), and based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in a uniform manner within the range of the number of frames, even if it is bad. However, since it is only "accepted", there are cases where the symbol combination is not complete depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than four frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon pattern will be placed on the winning line. Do not stop.

Of course, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination is 4 frames at maximum, if the replay combination is internally won, 100% of the winnings are won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the internal winning of the special role is not in progress (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Push order bell>
Next, the normal push-order bell and special push-order bell will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 202(b).

<Normal push order bell>
When one of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, a plurality of small wins (in this example, a small win 3 and a small win 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. A symbol combination to be displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that it is possible to internally win the "normal pushing order bell 1-6" even if the set value is any of the settings 1-6.

As shown in FIG. 202(b), each of the "normal order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". , and in this example, 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to one of the six types of pushing orders. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six types of pushing order is the same.

For example, in the case of internal winning of "normal pushing order bell 1LCR" out of "normal pushing order bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. A stop operation for the reel 112 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stopping operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order). In addition, when "normal push order bell 4CRL" of "normal push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. A stop operation for the reel 110 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3), "Bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 "Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if there is a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to one small win (small win 4) will be won. Displayed on the line, one medal is paid out, or if the small winning combination 4 is missed (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), medals are paid out. It will not be done (it will be lost).

In addition, when the stop operation (correct pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), " Bell-Bell-Replay” is displayed on the pay line, and if one medal is paid out or if the small win 4 is missed (the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 4 was not displayed on the pay line case), medals will not be paid out (it will be lost).

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) is performed that does not follow the navigation for winning one, depending on the operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line. , and 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the 4th small win is displayed on the winning line, and 1 medal is paid out, or the 4th small win is missed. In this case (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), no medals are paid out (lost).

In the "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" of this example, 12 small wins (small winning 3) are assigned to one of the 6 types of pushing orders, so "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" , 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 1/6. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be greater than 1/6.

<Privilege push order bell>
When one of the "privilege pushing order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, a plurality of small wins (in this example, a small win 3 and a small win 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. A symbol combination to be displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that even if the set value is any one of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "privilege pushing order bell 1 to 6".

As shown in FIG. 202(b), each of the "privilege order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (4 small winning combinations) is assigned to one of the six types of pushing orders, and the six types of pushing orders are set. 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 of them. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six types of pushing order is the same.

For example, in the case of internal winning of "Privilege push order bell 1LCR" among "Privilege push order bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. A stop operation for the reel 112 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stopping operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order). Further, when the "privilege push order bell 4CRL" of the "privilege push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. A stop operation for the reel 110 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct pushing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), "Bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 Bell-Replay” is displayed on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if there is a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one, "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the 12-card small win (small win 3) will be awarded. displayed on the line.

Also, when the stop operation (correct order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the " "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) is performed that does not follow the navigation for acquiring 12 coins, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small win 4 is displayed on the winning line, One medal is paid out.

In this example, "Privilege push order bells 1-6", since 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 out of 6 push orders, "Privilege push order bells 1-6" , 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 5/6. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger or smaller than 5/6.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine will be described.

The main control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a high replay probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state ( RT3), and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as AT game state). The sub control unit is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 203(A).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination varies from the default state.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also

When the special role 1 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later, and when the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later. do.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state, the game moves to a special game state (RT4), which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states.

In the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out, the state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be explained.

The game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode.

Here, operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the correct operation order when the player wins internally for the pushing order. That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state. In this embodiment, operation navigation is executed using a payout number display and effect image display device.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is established in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state (normal game state) of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 203 (A), for example, it shifts to the AT1 state, and after repeating a plurality of sets (for example, 2 sets or 10 sets) of the AT1 state of the first round, the normal state (normal game state) , a route that repeats multiple sets (for example, 10 sets) of the AT1 state, then shifts to the AT2 state (ending state) and then shifts (returns) to the AT1 state for the second round, or a route that transitions (returns) to the AT1 state on the second round, or via the pullback state Then, there is a route that shifts to the normal game state or AT2 state.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (eg, 50 games) of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is provided. Further, when a certain condition is established in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state is, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state). In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control section will be described.

The storage means (for example, ROM) of the first sub-control section stores an effect table provided for each effect state. The first sub control unit acquires the effect information (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, effect state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit, and refers to the effect table corresponding to the effect state, etc. , to perform an effect according to the effect state counter or the like. For example, when the current production state is the AT1 state, the production table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state production table) is referred to, and the production data for executing the AT1 production is read from the ROM. When the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

Also, if the current production state is the judgment state, the production table corresponding to the judgment state (judgment state production table) is referred to, and processing such as reading out production data for executing the judgment production from the ROM is performed. When the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1)/Overview>
A gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning machine for winning a combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

In addition, the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state (for example, non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous game state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 203 (A ) and a judge state regarding whether to shift to the AT state) and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, in FIG. 203 (A) AT2 state (ending state) shown) is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the second The first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, if you win a lottery to transition to the AT1 state), and the second condition includes includes the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, when winning a lottery to transition to the AT2 state), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (the plurality of reels is stopped in the first stop mode), the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate 21 shown in FIG. 203(B)) is that the plurality of stop buttons The degree of advantage in satisfying the first requirement when the operation is performed in the operation mode (when it is not stopped in the first stop mode) (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 203 (B)) Advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode) The degree (for example, the AT2 shift rate of 9% shown in FIG. 203(B)) is when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (not stopped in the first stop mode case) (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 11% shown in FIG. 203(B)).

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1) / specific example>
FIG. 203(B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (1) when ignoring operation navigation.

The state shown in FIG. 203(B)(1) is a normal state in which, for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is performed. This is the state in which the operation navigation prompting is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of shifting to the AT1 state by the transition lottery. The advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of shifting to the AT2 state by the transition lottery). The probability (advantage for meeting the second requirement) is 10%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 203(B)(2) is a state in which the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels is in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line). ), and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first ) increased from 20% to 21% (higher advantage), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for meeting the second requirement) decreased from 10% to 9% (advantageous degree is lower), 1 point is awarded and the total number of points pt is increased from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 203(B)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "bell" on the winning line). -Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Also, in the same state, the plurality of reels were stopped in the second stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). , the AT1 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) drops from 20% to 15% (lower advantage), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) is 10%. to 11% (higher advantage) and no points awarded.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT1 transition rate decreases, making it difficult to transition to the AT1 state, but the AT2 transition rate increases. This makes it easier to shift to the AT2 state.

When the player does not follow the operation navigation, even a second specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not it will shift after the first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) is made disadvantageous. Although it is cruel, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous game state is more advantageous than when the operation navigation is followed. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be maintained until the player's operation error or the like is remedied and the game shifts to the second specific advantageous game state.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result is the first In the case of the lottery result, if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will be in the first stop mode (for example, "Bell -Bell-replay" symbol combination is aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (For example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of reels When it stops in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 cards) than when it stops in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 card), the game value is given more. , and the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous game state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 203 AT1 state shown in (A) and a judgment state regarding whether to shift to AT state) and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 203 (A ) includes the AT2 state (ending state) shown in ), and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the It is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when winning the lottery for transition to the AT1 state), the second The conditions include fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, if you win the ), and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which AT transition such as 1G after the transition to the advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 203(B)) is is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the stop button is operated in the second operation mode (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 203 (B)), and the plurality of The degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the stop button is operated in the first operation mode (for example, the AT2 transition rate 9% shown in FIG. 203 (B)) is the plurality of stop It is characterized by being lower than the advantage (for example, the AT2 shift rate of 11% shown in FIG. 203(B)) for satisfying the second requirement when the button is operated in the second operation mode. It is a play table that

When the player does not follow the operation navigation, even a second specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not it will shift after the first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) is made disadvantageous. Although it is terrible, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state Since the player's operation error or the like can be remedied, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the game shifts to the second specific advantageous game state.

It should be noted that "satisfaction of the second requirement" is not limited to the case of winning a lottery for transition to the AT2 state, for example, the number of acquired game media reaches a certain number (for example, 1840). included (as well as other examples).

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

In addition, a certain counter (for example, the remaining ceiling counter shown in FIG. 204 (A) and the second counter shown in FIGS. 206 (C) and (D)) related to the satisfaction of the first requirement is provided, and one game is A count value of the certain counter may be updated each time the processing is performed, and the notification means may be capable of starting a count display indicating the count value.

Further, when 0 is displayed as the count display after the power failure and the power is restored, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power failure and the power is restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display The count value may match, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after power failure and power recovery, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. There may be no cases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performed the operation according to the operation navigation, and to alert the player who did not perform the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (eg, non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (eg, advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of display of operation navigation, and the advantageous states include , The first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there is a case where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the game, and to increase the player's satisfaction.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed may not be lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player who has performed the operation according to the operation navigation.

Moreover, even if the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may stop in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even if the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the degree of satisfaction of the player can be increased.

In addition, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed However, the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and when the first operation navigation is executed, only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed An effect corresponding to the operation may be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the difference between the operation according to the second operation navigation and the operation according to the first operation navigation easy to understand by the difference in presentation. In addition to this, the production effect can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the game value imparting means is configured not to impart the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. may have been

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states, lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and deriving the lottery result, and a plurality of game machines. a game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the reels; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode. is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means is arranged such that when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The plurality of game states are configured to impart a large amount of the game value, and the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state, a first specific advantageous game state to which the normal advantageous game state can be shifted, and the first specific advantageous game state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the second condition is When established, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the second requirement and when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels is stopped in the first stop mode The advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode. , It may be a game machine characterized by:

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels. , one of a plurality of game value giving states is set in relation to the game value giving state (for example, the base (so-called machine discount), the acquisition state of the bell for pushing order, the compliance rate of navigation, etc.). and a game value imparting state control means, wherein the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state and a first specific advantageous game state that can be shifted to after the normal advantageous game state. and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state is possible. , When the second condition is established, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes includes satisfaction of the second requirement, and the plurality of game value provision states includes at least a first game value provision state (for example, a state where the base is 60%) set in the normal advantageous game state. and a second game value provision state (for example, a state in which the base is 80% m), and the game value provision state control means controls a state in which the game value provision state is a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state ), the first game value giving state can be set, and the game value giving state is a situation different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as "second situation") ), the second situation can be set, and the second situation is more advantageous to the player than the first situation with respect to the situation of giving the game value. , when the first game value giving state is set in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of won (MY) is 0 at the 300th G in the normal advantageous gaming state) The advantage for satisfying the first requirement is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the second gaming value provision state is set, and the first gaming value provision state is set, the advantage for satisfying the second requirement is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the second gaming value provision state is set. It may be a game machine characterized by

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2)/Overview>
The gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 203(B) is the second stop button when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode). is the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when multiple stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (when they are not stopped in the first stop mode) However, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can be operated when a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode). case), the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement is the second It is the same as the advantage for satisfying requirements.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2) / specific example>
FIG. 203(C) is a diagram showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (2) when operation navigation is ignored.

The state shown in FIG. 203(C)(1) is a normal state in which, for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is performed. This is the state in which the operation navigation prompting is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of shifting to the AT1 state by the transition lottery. The advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of shifting to the AT2 state by the transition lottery). The probability (advantage for meeting the second requirement) is 10%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 203(C)(2) is a state in which the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels is in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line). ), and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first (advantage to fulfillment of requirement 2) increased from 20% to 21% (benefit increased), AT2 transition rate (advantage to fulfillment of second requirement) was maintained at 10% (benefit changed not), 1 point is awarded and the total number of points pt is increased from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 203(C)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "bell" on the winning line). -Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Also, in the same state, the plurality of reels were stopped in the second stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). , the AT1 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) drops from 20% to 15% (lower advantage), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) is 10%. (the advantage does not change) and no points are awarded.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT1 shift rate decreases and it becomes difficult to shift to the AT1 state, but the AT2 shift rate changes. do not.

When the player does not follow the operation navigation, even a second specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not it will shift after the first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) is made disadvantageous. However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, there is no difference in the degree of advantage in the second specific advantageous game state compared to when the operation navigation is followed. Since it is not provided, the player's desire to play can be maintained until the transition to the second specific advantageous game state is made while relieving the player's operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result is the first In the case of the lottery result, if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will be in the first stop mode (for example, "Bell -Bell-replay" symbol combination is aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (For example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of reels When it stops in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 cards) than when it stops in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 card), the game value is given more. , and the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous game state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 203 AT1 state shown in (A) and a judgment state regarding whether to shift to AT state) and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 203 (A ) includes the AT2 state (ending state) shown in ), and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous game state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the second It is configured to be able to shift to two advantageous gaming states, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when winning a lottery to transition to the AT1 state), and the second condition includes If the second requirement is satisfied (for example, if you win a lottery to transition to the AT2 state, etc.) In a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which AT transition such as 1G after the transition to the advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the stop button is operated in the first operation mode (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 203(C)) is the plurality of stop buttons is higher than the advantage (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 203(C)) for satisfying the first requirement when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and the plurality of stop buttons The degree of advantage (for example, the AT2 shift rate of 10% shown in FIG. 203(C)) for satisfying the second requirement when the operation is performed in the first operation mode is that the plurality of stop buttons are the A game characterized in that it is the same as the advantage (for example, AT2 transition rate 10% shown in FIG. 203 (C)) for satisfying the second requirement when the operation is performed in the second operation mode It is a table.

When the player does not follow the operation navigation, even a second specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not it will shift after the first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) is made disadvantageous. Although it is cruel, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state is the same as when the operation navigation is followed. Since there is no difference in the advantage, the player's desire to play can be maintained while relieving the player's operation error or the like until the transition to the second specific advantageous game state.

Further, in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the first Even if the advantage in the specific advantageous gaming state is higher than the advantage in the first specific advantageous gaming state when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. good.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

In addition, a certain counter (for example, the remaining ceiling counter shown in FIG. 204 (A) and the second counter shown in FIGS. 206 (C) and (D)) related to the satisfaction of the first requirement is provided, and one game is A count value of the certain counter may be updated each time the processing is performed, and the notification means may be capable of starting a count display indicating the count value.

Further, when 0 is displayed as the count display after the power failure and the power is restored, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power failure and the power is restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display The count value may match, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after power failure and power recovery, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. There may be no cases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performed the operation according to the operation navigation, and to alert the player who did not perform the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (eg, non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (eg, advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of display of operation navigation, and the advantageous states include , The first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there is a case where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the game, and to increase the player's satisfaction.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed may not be lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player who has performed the operation according to the operation navigation.

Moreover, even if the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may stop in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even if the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the degree of satisfaction of the player can be increased.

In addition, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed However, the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and when the first operation navigation is executed, only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed An effect corresponding to the operation may be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the difference between the operation according to the second operation navigation and the operation according to the first operation navigation easy to understand by the difference in presentation. In addition to this, the production effect can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the game value imparting means is configured not to impart the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. may have been

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states, lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and deriving the lottery result, and a plurality of game machines. a game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the reels; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode. is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means is arranged such that when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The plurality of game states are configured to impart a large amount of the game value, and the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state, a first specific advantageous game state to which the normal advantageous game state can be shifted, and the first specific advantageous game state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the second condition is When established, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the second requirement and when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels is stopped in the first stop mode The advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode is the same as the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode. , It may be a game machine characterized by:

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels. and game value provision state control means capable of setting one of a plurality of game value provision states in relation to the provision state of the game value, wherein the plurality of game states are provided. includes a normal advantageous gaming state, a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state, and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state. When the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state. The first condition includes satisfaction of the first requirement, the second condition includes satisfaction of the second requirement, and the plurality of gaming value provision states include at least the The game value provision state control means includes a first game value provision state and a second game value provision state that are set in a normal advantageous gaming state, and the game value provision state control means controls the state in which the game value provision state is a certain state (hereinafter referred to as In the case of "first situation"), the first game value giving state can be set, and the game value giving state is a certain situation different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as "second situation"). The second situation can be set in the case of "second situation"), and the second situation is more important to the player than the first situation with respect to the situation of giving the game value. In a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state, the degree of advantage with respect to the satisfaction of the first requirement when the first gaming value imparting state is set is the second gaming value The advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the provision state is set is higher than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the first gaming value provision state is set. , is the same as the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the second gaming value provision state is set.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3)/Overview>
A gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning machine for winning a combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, in FIG. AT1 state and AT2 state shown) are included, and a first counter (for example, high navigation counter and advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 204 (A)) related to the advantageous state is provided, and one game is played in the advantageous state every time, the count value of the first counter (first count value) can be updated, and a second counter (for example, the ceiling remaining counter shown in FIG. 204A) related to a certain profit provision each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the second counter (second count value) can be updated, and the advantageous state and the lottery result are the first In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode), the first and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (the plurality of reels are the first not stopped in the stop mode), only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3) / specific example>
FIG. 204(A) is a diagram showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (3) when operation navigation is ignored.

The state shown in FIG. 204(C)(1) is a normal state in which, for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is performed. This is the state in which the operation navigation prompting is executed.

The count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) in the same state is 900, and the count value (second count value) of the remaining ceiling counter (second counter) in the same state is 550. Here, the ceiling remaining counter is a counter indicating the number of remaining games until reaching the so-called ceiling.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 204(A)(2) is a state in which the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels is in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line). ), and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), a high navigation counter (first counter) count value (first count value) is decremented by 1 and updated to 899, and the count value (second count value) of the remaining ceiling counter (second counter) is decremented by 1 and updated to 549 is updated to

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 204(A)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "bell" on the winning line). -Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Also, in the same state, the plurality of reels were stopped in the second stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). , the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is subtracted by 1 and updated to 899, but the count value (second count value) has not been updated.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is updated However, the count value (second count value) of the remaining ceiling counter (second counter) is not updated.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is severely disadvantageous to the player, but according to this example, the second count value (for example, the ceiling Counter) can be updated, but even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter) is updated in the same way as when the player follows the operation navigation. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player's operation, and to prevent the player from losing motivation to play due to an operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result is the first In the case of the lottery result, if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will be in the first stop mode (for example, "Bell -Bell-replay" symbol combination is aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (For example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of reels When it stops in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 cards) than when it stops in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 card), the game value is given more. , and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 203 (A) ) includes AT1 state and AT2 state), and includes a first counter (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 204 (A)) regarding the advantageous state, and one game is played in the advantageous state The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated each time it is performed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 204 ( A) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the “second count value”) can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. and the advantageous state and the extraction When the selection result is the first lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode in the advantageous state, the first count value and the second Both of the count values can be updated, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode in the advantageous state, the first count value and the second count value The gaming machine is characterized in that only the first count value of the count values can be updated.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is severely disadvantageous to the player. Even though the count value (for example, the ceiling counter) can be updated, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter), it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player's operation and to prevent the player from losing motivation to play due to an operation error or the like.

In addition, the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous game state and a first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state shown in FIG. (judgment state regarding whether or not) is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement is included, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which AT transition such as 1G after the transition to the advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the stop button is operated in the first operation mode is The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement may be higher.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

Further, the advantageous state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and when the second count value reaches the second value, the first specific advantageous gaming state may be configured to transition to

Further, when the first count value reaches a first value (for example, a ceiling value), it is configured to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and in the advantageous state, the first operation navigation configured such that the second count value reaches the second value before the first count value reaches the first value when an operation according to may have been

In addition, the advantageous state includes a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state, and can be granted in the first specific advantageous gaming state The amount of the game value may be larger than the amount of the game value that can be given in the second specific advantageous game state.

Further, when an operation according to the first operation navigation is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends before the first count value reaches the first value. There may be cases.

Further, the count display indicating the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter display) can be started in the middle of the advantageous state, and the count display indicating the second count value (for example, the ceiling remaining counter display). ) may be displayable until some point before the count display indicating the first count value is started.

Further, the game value imparting means is configured not to impart the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. may have been

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states, lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and deriving the lottery result, and a plurality of game machines. a game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the reels; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means determines whether the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than in the first stop mode. is configured to provide a large amount of the game value, the plurality of game states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of operation navigation display, and a first game state related to the advantageous state counter, and configured to be able to update the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") each time one game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain profit A second counter relating to awarding is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. , when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in the advantageous state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first count value and the second count both count values of the value are updatable, and when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the first of the first count value and the second count value This game machine is characterized in that only the count value of is renewable.

<Ending/Summary when ignoring operation navigation>
A gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning machine for winning a combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

In addition, the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 203(A)) and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state shown in FIG. 203(A)) that can be shifted after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state. The first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the normal advantageous gaming state in terms of execution of the operation navigation, and the second type of specific advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and in the normal advantageous gaming state, when the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons When only the game operated in the second operation mode is played, the normal advantageous game state is shifted to the second type specific advantageous game state without going through the first type specific advantageous game state. It is possible.

<Ending when ignoring operation navigation / specific example>
FIG. 204(B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the ending when operation navigation is ignored.

The state shown in FIG. 204(B)(1) is the normal state, for example, winning the privilege push-order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is the state in which the operation navigation prompting is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT1 state by a transition lottery) is 20%.

204(B)(2) to 204(B)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the reverse press operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, forward press. This is a state in which a stop operation has been performed by operation (operation in the second operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "bell" on the winning line). -Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Also, in the same state, the plurality of reels were stopped in the second stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). Therefore, it has not transitioned to the AT1 state (the first kind of specific advantageous game state).

The following FIG. 204(B)(4) shows the state of transition from the normal state to the bonus ending AT2 state (the second type of specific advantageous game state).

Although not shown, in the normal state shown in (B) (3) of FIG. Since it was stopped in the stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (it was not stopped in the first stop mode), the AT2 state of the bonus ending (the second type of specific advantageous gaming state).

On the other hand, in FIG. 204 (B) (5), from the normal state shown in (B) (2) in FIG. It is a state that has shifted to a state (second type of specific advantageous game state).

In this example, the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, and the plurality of reels is in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line). mode), the AT1 state (first type of specific advantageous gaming state) is transferred to the normal ending AT2 state (second type of specific advantageous gaming state).

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call attention to the player, and the operation that does not follow the operation navigation is continued unintentionally. However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to obtain the second type of advantage Since it is possible to shift to the game state, the player's desire to play can be maintained while relieving the player's operation error or the like until the shift to the second kind of advantageous game state.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example,
a main control unit), a lottery for internal winning of a combination, a lottery means capable of deriving the lottery result (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing), and providing game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, a stop button shown in FIG. 201) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. buttons 137 to 139), and the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result is the first lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (e.g., reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (e.g., winning line When the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second operation mode (for example, a forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels move to the second position. Stop in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, The gaming value is greater when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel). The plurality of game states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the execution of operation navigation, and the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous game state (e.g. , normal state shown in FIG. 203 (A)), a first type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state shown in FIG. 203 (A)) that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first A second type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state shown in FIG. 203 (A)) that can be shifted after the type of specific advantageous gaming state is included, and the first type is more than the normal advantageous gaming state is a game state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and the second type of specific advantageous game state is more advantageous than the normal advantageous game state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation. In the normal advantageous game state, when the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, only the game in which the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode is performed. When the first type of specific advantage is obtained from the normal advantageous gaming state The game machine is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the second type of specific advantageous game state without going through the game state.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call attention to the player, and the operation that does not follow the operation navigation is continued unintentionally. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to obtain the ball out. Since it is possible to shift to two types of advantageous game states, the player's desire to play can be maintained while relieving the player's operation error or the like until the player shifts to the second type of advantageous game state.

Also, when a certain condition is established, it is configured to be able to shift to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state, the certain condition includes satisfaction of certain requirements, and the normal advantageous gaming state In a certain state (for example, a state in which an AT shift such as the first G after a transition to an advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are in the first operation mode. is more advantageous for satisfying the certain requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode than for satisfying the certain requirement when the operation is performed in It may be higher.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

Further, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state may be an advantageous gaming state that can be continued until the advantageous state ends.

Further, a counter relating to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the counter can be updated. The count display indicating the count value may not be updated when the operation according to the operation navigation is not performed.

In addition, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state includes at least a first ending (for example, a normal ending shown in FIG. 204(B)(5)) and a second ending different from the first ending. (for example, bonus ending shown in FIG. 204(B)(4)). frequency of time notification, etc., execution frequency of full navigation, payout amount of medals, etc.) are greater than the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the second ending, and the first operation navigation in the advantageous state If the following operation is not performed, even if the transition to the second ending is performed without transitioning to the first ending when transitioning to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state good.

In addition, in the second type of specific advantageous gaming state, a set value suggestion display that suggests a set value (for example, a display that suggests that the set value is even (or odd), a set value that is a specific set value ( setting 6, etc.) can be displayed, and the frequency at which the setting value suggesting display is displayed in the first ending is the frequency at which the setting value suggesting display is displayed in the second ending may be higher than the frequency of

Further, in the second ending, the setting value suggestion display may not be displayed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states, lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and deriving the lottery result, and a plurality of game machines. a game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the reels; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means determines whether the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than in the first stop mode. is configured to provide a large amount of the gaming value, and the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state, a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first A second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the type of specific advantageous gaming state is included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more favorable than the normal advantageous gaming state. It is a game state that is advantageous for execution, and the second type of specific advantageous game state is a game state that is more advantageous for execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous game state, and in the normal advantageous game state, When the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, only the game in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode is performed, the normal advantageous game state is changed to the first The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state without going through the type of specific advantageous gaming state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels. , a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; and a game value giving state control means capable of setting one of the states from the above, wherein the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous game state and a first state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous game state. A type of specific advantageous gaming state and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state are included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more important than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous game state is a game state that is more advantageous for the execution of the operation navigation, and the second type of specific advantageous game state is more advantageous for the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous game state. The second type of specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state relating to an ending, and the plurality of game value imparting states includes at least a first game value imparting set in the normal advantageous gaming state. state and a second game value provision state, and the game value provision state control means controls the first state when the game value provision state is in a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). can be set, and when the game value provision state is in a certain situation different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as "second situation"), the second game A value awarding state can be set, the second situation is more advantageous to the player than the first situation in terms of the game value awarding situation, and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state. , when the second game value imparting state is set, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state is entered from the normal advantageous gaming state without going through the first type of specific advantageous gaming state. This game machine is characterized by being movable.

<Bell hit production / overview>
A gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning machine for winning a combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device).

In addition, the lottery results include the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)) and the second lottery result (for example, FIG. 202 (b) includes the normal pushing order bell 1), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels Stop in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, perform the second operation mode. When an operation (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value When the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode (e.g., payout of 12 coins), the number of reels is higher than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (e.g., payout of 1 coin). is configured to give the game value of

Further, when the lottery result is the second lottery result, if the operation in the third operation mode (eg, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels will be placed in the third stop mode (eg, on the winning line " When the game is stopped in a mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the lottery result is the second lottery result, an operation in a fourth operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed. A plurality of reels are stopped in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means determines that the plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop mode. It is configured such that more game value is given when the game is stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when stopped in the stop mode (for example, 1 payout). .

Also, one of the plurality of types of display is a certain effect that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result (for example, in FIG. 204(C) The certain effect includes a case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and a case where the lottery result is the first lottery result. In the case of the second lottery result, when the plurality of reels stop in the fourth operation mode, an effect that suggests success (for example, an effect that displays a character string "success"), or The probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (eg, 5/6) is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode (eg, 1/6) ) is higher.

<Bell hit production / specific example>
FIG. 204(C) is a diagram showing a specific example of the bell hit effect.

In the state shown in FIG. 204(C)(1), in the AT1 state, for example, the normal push order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), and the operation navigation prompting the bell hitting effect (certain effect) is performed. It is in an executed state.

In the bell hit effect (certain effect) of this example, when the correct answer operation (in this example, an LCR operation in which 12 medals are paid out) is performed using the liquid crystal display device 157, AT1 is performed. Information suggesting continuation of the state (in this example, a display including a character string "Continue AT1 with the correct pressing order!") and guessing the pressing order while keeping all the correct pressing orders confidential. Display (in this example, display of "???") is performed.

Also, although illustration is omitted, when the player's stop operation matches the correct push-order operation (in this example, the LCR push-order operation) (when the player's stop operation hits), The symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned (stopped in the fourth stop mode), 12 medals are paid out, and an effect suggesting success (for example, a display containing the character string "success") is displayed. production) is started.

In this example, when winning the normal push-order bell 1 (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct push-order operation (LCR push-order operation) is 1/6.

On the other hand, in the state shown in (C)(2) of FIG. 4, in the AT1 state, for example, winning the privilege push-order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), and an operation prompting the bell hit performance (certain performance) is performed. Navi is running.

In the bell hit effect (certain effect) of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform the correct answer operation (in this example, one of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC in which 12 medals are paid out). (In this example, a display including a character string “Continue AT1 with the correct pressing order!!”), and all the correct pressing orders are indicated. A pressing order guessing display (in this example, the display of "???") is carried out to allow the player to guess in secret.

Also, in this example, the player performs a bell guessing effect (certain effect) based on the normal pushing order bell 1 (second lottery result) or a bell guessing effect based on the special pushing order bell 6 (first lottery result). In order to be able to discriminate whether it is an effect (a certain effect), the bell guessing effect (a certain effect) based on the privilege pushing order bell 6 (first lottery result) has different pressing order guess display modes. (In this example, the square lines surrounding the "?" are thickened). With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the player has won the first lottery result, which is advantageous to the player, by means of the display mode of the bell hitting performance (certain performance), thereby enhancing the player's sense of expectation. can be done.

Also, although not shown, when the player's stop operation matches the correct order operation (in this example, any one of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC) (when the player's stop operation is If you win), the pattern combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line (stopped in the second stop mode), 12 medals are paid out, and an effect that suggests success (for example, , an effect of displaying a character string “success”) is started.

That is, in this example, when the normal push-order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct push-order operation (LCR push-order operation) is 1/6, and when winning the privilege push-order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), the player's stop operation is the correct push-order operation (any of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC). Since the probability of coinciding with the pressing order operation) is 5/6, the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode in a certain game is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. more likely to be stopped at

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment performs operation navigation in which all 1-card hands are aligned, and as a result, the player is forced to miss the 12-card hand. According to this, since it is possible to execute a certain effect in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the dislike of the operation navigation, and it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player.

It should be noted that the second lottery result is not limited to the normal pushing order bell, and if there is a pushing order combination other than the first lottery result, the other pushing order combination may be applied.

FIG. 204(C)(3) is a diagram showing modification 1 of the bell hitting effect, and FIG. 204(C)(4) and (5) are diagrams showing modification 2 of the bell hitting effect. be.

In the bell guessing effect (certain effect) explained with reference to (1) and (2) of FIG. 11C, all the correct pressing orders are concealed and the player guesses the correct pressing order display ("??????"). ”) is shown, but as in Modification 1, some of the non-correct keystrokes are disclosed and other part of the correct keystrokes are concealed and the player is allowed to guess the keystrokes. In the production including the correct guess display (in this example, the display of "x??" indicating that the first stop operation is not the left stop button and suggesting that the second and third stop operations are concealed) There may be.

By performing such an effect, when the first lottery result is derived, it is possible to increase the probability that the player's stop operation coincides with the correct pushing order operation, and the player's desire to play can be improved. can.

Further, as in Modified Example 2, a part of the correct order is disclosed, and the other part of the correct order is concealed to allow the player to guess the correct order (in this example, the first stop operation is The display of "? 1?" indicating that it is a middle stop button and suggesting that the second and third stop operations are concealed) may be included.

By performing such an effect, when the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, it is possible to increase the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct pushing order operation, and the player's game can be improved. Motivation can be improved.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) and production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the privilege order shown in FIG. 202(b) Bell 6) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, normal pushing order bell 1 shown in FIG. In this case, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation pattern (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will win a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "first winning combination"). (for example, a mode in which the "Bell-Bell-Replay" symbol combination is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second operation pattern (for example, , forward push operation) are performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second mode corresponding to the winning of the first winning combination (for example, the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line). mode), and when the lottery result is the second lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a third operation pattern (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels Stop in a third stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) that does not correspond to the winning of a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "second winning combination") Then, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a fourth operation pattern (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are set to a fourth stop mode (for example, , the pattern combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the number of operation patterns to be the second operation pattern is larger than the number of operation patterns to be the fourth operation pattern. When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value imparting means WHEREIN: When said plurality of reels are stopped in said second stop mode than when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode, more said gaming value is awarded, and said lottery result is In the case of the second lottery result, more game value is given when the plurality of reels stop in the fourth stop mode than when the plurality of reels stop in the third stop mode. The effect means can execute a certain effect (for example, the bell guess effect shown in FIG. 204(C)) at least when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result. and the certain effect executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result is a successful effect (for example, The certain effect executed when the lottery result is the second lottery result is that at least the plurality of reels are in the fourth stop mode. The game machine is characterized in that the performance is successful when the machine stops at .

Since operation navigation is performed so that one-card role is complete, and as a result the player is forced to drop out of the 12-card role, there is a risk of dissatisfaction with the player. Since it is possible to execute a certain effect in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the disgust of the operation navigation and eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player.

The first winning combination and the second winning combination may be the same winning combination or may be different winning combinations. Further, the difference in the operation pattern is not limited to the order of pressing the stop button, and may be the difference in stop timing of the stop button. Therefore, for example, a specific pattern on the reel (for example, red and blue patterns) may be aimed at and the stop operation (eye pressing) may be performed. In this case, a success effect is executed, and a successful effect is not executed when red-red-blue are aligned.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the display of the operation navigation, and the advantageous state includes the normal advantageous game state and the normal advantageous game state. A first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted to later is included, and when a certain condition is established, the transition to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is possible, and the certain condition includes: In the case that a certain requirement is satisfied, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation pattern in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result. The degree of advantage for satisfying the certain requirement in the case where the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern is higher than the degree of advantage in satisfying the certain requirement in the case where the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern. may be

Further, the certain effect is a effect that is started before the operation of the plurality of stop buttons, and is an effect that makes the player guess the successful operation pattern of the plurality of stop buttons. It can be something.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, on the winning line). , and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, an operation in a second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed. and the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means determines that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second It is configured such that more game value is given when the game is stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when stopped in one stop mode (for example, 1 payout). , When the lottery result is the second lottery result, when the operation in the third operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop mode (for example, on the winning line (a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned), and when the lottery result is the second lottery result, an operation in a fourth operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed. The plurality of reels are stopped in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means determines that the plurality of reels are stopped in the third When the game is stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than in the case of stopping in the stop mode (for example, 1 payout), more gaming value is given, One display among the plurality of types of display is a certain effect that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result (for example, a bell shown in FIG. The certain effect includes a case where the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and a case where the lottery result is the second lottery result. An effect including a display suggesting success (for example, a display including a character string "success") when the plurality of reels stop in the fourth operation mode in the case of a lottery result, The probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (eg, 5/6) is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode (eg, 1/6) in a certain game. 6) may be higher.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, in FIG. (AT1 state, AT2 state shown) are included, and if the advantageous state has the right to continue, the certain effect may be executed at least once in the advantageous state.

In addition, the lottery result includes a third lottery result (for example, another winning combination) that is different from both the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the certain effect is The effect may be performed in some cases even when the lottery result is the third lottery result.

Further, the advantageous state includes an AT state, and in a period of the advantageous state but not the AT state, the first operation navigation is executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is possible, and in the period of the advantageous state and the AT state, the execution of the certain effect may be started when the lottery result is the first lottery result.

Further, the game value imparting means is configured not to impart the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. It may be one that has been

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4)/Overview>
A gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning machine for winning a combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, a liquid crystal display device , speakers, etc.).

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

In addition, a first game (for example, a three-piece bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, three) and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, two) wherein the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is greater than the second game The game is more advantageous for the player.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, in FIG. (AT1 state, AT2 state shown) are included, a first counter (for example, a high navigation counter shown in FIG. 204 (A) and an advantageous section counter) related to the advantageous state is provided, and one game is performed in the advantageous state 206(C) and (D), the count value of the first counter (first count value) can be updated every each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the second counter (second count value) can be updated, and in the advantageous state, the plurality of When the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of reels are in the advantageous state. Only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value can be updated if not stopped in the first stop mode.

Also, one of the plurality of types of effects includes a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 205(A)) and a second scene (for example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 205(A)). and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is produced, the first game in the first game It is possible to start the execution of the production of the second scene, and when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the second game in the second game When execution of the effect of the second scene is not started and then execution of the first game is started, execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game, In the game after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. Even if the second scene is stopped (even in a game in which the plurality of reels are not stopped in the first stop mode), execution of the second scene effect can be started in the game.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4) / specific example>
Figure 205 (A) ~ (C) is a diagram showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (4) when ignoring the operation navigation, the same figure (A) is the case of continuing the three bet game in the continuous effect is a diagram showing an example of transition of scenes in the interlocking effect.

Here, the interlocking effect means a effect that is continuously (or intermittently) executed over a plurality of games, and is composed of a plurality of scenes including a first scene and a second scene. For example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 205(A) is composed of three scenes, scene 1, scene 2, and scene 3, and scene 2 further includes scenes 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, and so on. It consists of multiple scenes including

In this example, when the execution of the 3-bet game (first game) is started after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed, scene 2 (second scene) is executed in the game. scene) can be started. Also, when the execution of the 3-bet game (first game) is started after the game in which the effect of this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, scene 3 (second scene) ) can be started.

That is, in this example, when the 3-coin bet game is continued during execution of the interlocking effect, the scene of the interlocking effect progresses.

FIG. 205(C) is a diagram showing an example of scene transition of interlocking performance when a double bet game is executed in continuous performance.

In this example, when the execution of the two-bet game (second game) is started after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed, scene 2 (second scene) is executed in the game. scene) is not started, and next time the execution of the 3-bet game (first game) is started, the execution of scene 2 (second scene) is started in the game. It is possible.

Also, when the execution of the 3-bet game (first game) is started after the game in which the effect of this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, scene 3 (second scene) ) can be started.

That is, in this example, when the two-coin bet game is executed during execution of the interlocking effect, the scene of the interlocking effect does not progress. It should be noted that, when the two-coin bet game is executed while the interlocking effect is being executed, the next scene of the interlocking effect may be displayed for a moment.

FIG. 205(B) is a diagram showing an example of transition of scenes in interlocking production when operation navigation is executed in continuous production.

In the example shown in (B) (1) of the same figure, execution of a 3-bet game (first game) is started in the game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) was performed, and the scene Along with starting the execution of the effect of 2-1, for example, winning the privilege push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), operation navigation to prompt the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) This is an example in which the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the execution of the effect of scene 2-2 is started with the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button), followed by the second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button). The execution of scene 2-3 is started with the pressing operation of ), and then the execution of scene 2-4 is triggered with the third stop operation (pressing operation of the left stop button in this example). have started.

Although illustration is omitted, in this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, on the winning line " The game is stopped when the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned), and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, in the example shown in (B)(2) of the same figure, execution of a 3-bet game (first game) is started in the game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) was performed. , Starts execution of the effect of scene 2-1, for example, wins the privilege pushing order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), and an operation to prompt the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) This is an example in which navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is used as a trigger to start the execution of the effect of scene 2-2, followed by the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button The execution of the scene 2-3 is started with the operation of pressing the right stop button), and then the execution of the scene 2-4 is started with the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button). have started. Further, in this example, since the visibility of the effect of the scene 2-4 is reduced, during the effect of the scene 2-4, at least part of the winning effect executed after the third stop operation is not executed. Configure.

Although illustration is omitted, in this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels were in the second stop mode (this example Then, the game is stopped in a mode where the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and 12 medals are paid out.

As described above, in this example, the first scene (in this example, scene 1) is a game after the game in which the effect is performed, and the lottery result is the first lottery result (in this example, the privilege In the case of pushing order bell 6), the plurality of reels were not stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "bell-bell-replay" is aligned on the winning line) (the player operates Even in a game in which a stop operation is performed without following the navigation, execution of the second scene (scene 2 in this example) can be started in the game.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call attention to the player. However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the continuous effect can be progressed. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's desire to play without making the player feel embarrassed.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) and production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of production, wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, FIG. 202 (b) includes a privilege push order bell 6), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second mode. When the operation (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), and the When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value imparting means provides the second stop than the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). A first game in which a larger game value is given when the game is stopped in a mode (e.g., 12 payouts), and the number of game media bet is a first number (e.g., 3) (e.g., 3-bet game) and a second game (e.g., 2-bet game) in which the number of game media bets is a second number (e.g., 2). The number of and the second number are different numbers, the first game is a game more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states include a normal state ( For example, a normal state shown in FIG. 203 (A)) and an advantageous state state (for example, AT1 state and AT2 state shown in FIG. Equipped with a first counter related to an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 204 (A)) , the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") each time one game is played in the advantageous state. ) relating to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 206C and 206D, a counter for counting the number of remaining ATs during AT, an AT transition a counter that counts a certain count value for the game), and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. and when the execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, When execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the advantageous The states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a certain specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state. A specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the certain specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition includes , including satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, if you win the lottery to transition to the AT1 state or AT2 state), and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, AT transition such as 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode for satisfying the first requirement The advantage is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, and is one of the plurality of types of effects. is a production composed of a plurality of scenes including a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 205(A)) and a second scene (for example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 205(A)), When the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene can be started in the first game, When the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game, and the following When the execution of the first game is started at , in the first game Execution of the effect of the second scene can be started, and the game is after the game in which the effect of the first scene has been performed, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, A game machine characterized in that execution of the second scene effect in the game can be started even when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. be.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call attention to the player. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to continue By proceeding with the presentation, the player can maintain his desire to play without feeling embarrassed.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

Further, when the operation according to the first operation navigation is not performed in the advantageous state, only the count display indicating the first count value (for example, the remaining ceiling counter display) can be updated, A count display indicating the second count value may not be updated.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state, When a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, an effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. When the player is hit, an effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Also, in the second game, when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out) Even if there is, it may be possible to start a display suggesting the total amount of game value given in the advantageous state (for example, display of an image including a character string "500 coins won").

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5)/Overview>
A gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning machine for winning a combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and display means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, a liquid crystal display device etc.) and

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

In addition, a first game (for example, a three-piece bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, three) and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, two) wherein the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is greater than the second game The game is more advantageous for the player.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, in FIG. AT1 state shown) is included, and a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 204 (A)) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, The count value (first count value) of the first counter is configured to be updatable, and the second counter (for example, the second counters shown in FIGS. 206C and 206D) relating to the advantageous state ), each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the second counter (second count value) can be updated, and in the advantageous state, the plurality of reels is the When stopped in the first stop mode, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of reels are in the first state in the advantageous state. Only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated if not stopped in the stop mode.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a specific display (for example, a warning display shown in FIG. 206(A)) which is a display regarding attention to the player and is not an effect display. When the second game is played, the specific display is displayed, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous game state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons is the second game. is configured so that the specific display is not displayed even when an operation is performed in the operation mode of .

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5)/concrete example>
FIGS. 206A and 206B are diagrams showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (5) when ignoring operation navigation.

As shown in FIG. 4A, in this example, in the 3-coin bet game (first game), a warning display (a certain display) is displayed to the player to suggest that the game is a 2-coin bet game. However, in the two-coin bet game (second game), it is possible to display a warning display (a certain display).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 4B, execution of a two-coin bet game (second game) is started in the game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) was performed. The push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), operation navigation is performed to prompt the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), and the player performs the reverse push operation (first operation) This is an example in which a stop operation was performed without following the operation navigation prompting the operation in the mode.

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is triggered to display a warning display (a certain display), followed by the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button ) to display a warning display (a certain display) triggered by a third stop operation (in this example, a right stop button pressing operation) to display a warning display (a certain display). it's shown. Also, in this example, after the third stop operation, the warning display (a certain display) is erased, and the execution of the scene 1 effect is started.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, the execution of a three-coin bet game (first game) is started, for example, winning the privilege pushing order bell 6 (first lottery result is derived), reverse pushing operation (first If the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), a warning is issued. The display (some display) is configured not to be displayed.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call the player's attention. Although it may embarrass the player, according to this example, it is possible to display a certain display (warning display) in the second game (two-bet game) that requires a warning. However, if the player does not follow the operation navigation, a certain display (warning display) is not performed, so that the player is not embarrassed and the player's desire to play can be maintained. can.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) and production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of production, wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, FIG. 202 (b) is included, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons can be operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) When executed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second operation mode. When an operation (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the awarding means is more likely to be in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout) A first game (e.g., payout of 12 coins) is configured to award a larger game value when the game is stopped (e.g., payout of 12 coins), and the number of bets on the game media is a first number (e.g., 3 coins) (e.g., , 3-bet game) and a second game (for example, 2-bet game) in which the number of game media bet is a second number (for example, 2), and the first number and the second number are different numbers, the first game is a game more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)), and an advantageous state state (for example, AT1 state and AT2 state shown in FIG. A first counter (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 204 (A)) is provided, and the front Each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value"). ) relating to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 206C and 206D, a counter for counting the number of remaining ATs during AT, an AT transition a counter that counts a certain count value for the game), and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. and when the execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, When execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the advantageous The states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a certain specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state. A specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the certain specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition includes , including the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when winning a lottery to transition to the AT1 state or AT2 state), a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result , the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode is determined by the degree of advantage with respect to the satisfaction of the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement in the case where the first requirement is satisfied, and one of the plurality of types of display is a specific display that is a display regarding attention to the player and is not a production display (for example, , a warning display shown in FIG. 206(A)), and when the second game is performed, the specific display is displayed, and a certain state in the normal advantageous game state (for example, after transition to an advantageous section) in the case where the AT transition has not been determined for the 1st game, etc.) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode; Also, the game machine is configured so that the specific display is not displayed.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call the player's attention. Although this may embarrass the player, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a certain display (warning display) is provided in the second game (2-bet game) that requires a warning. While enabling the display of , by not performing a certain display (a warning display) when the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player does not feel embarrassed and the player's desire to play. can be sustained.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

In addition, a rendering means capable of executing a plurality of types of rendering is provided, and one of the multiple types of rendering is a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 205(A)) and a second scene. (For example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 205(A)) is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes, and the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. In this case, the execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed. In this case, the execution of the second scene effect is not started in the second game, and when the execution of the first game is started next, the first game is executed in the first game It is possible to start execution of the production of the second scene, in the game after the game in which the production of the first scene was performed, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of Even when the stop button is operated in the second operation mode, execution of the second scene effect may be started in the game.

With such a configuration, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player is not embarrassed by proceeding with the continuous performance, and the player's desire to play is maintained. be able to.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state, When a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, an effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. When the player is hit, an effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Also, in the second game, when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out) Even if there is, it may be possible to start a display suggesting the total amount of game value given in the advantageous state (for example, display of an image including a character string "500 coins won").

FIG. 206(C) is a time-series diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game in the AT state, and FIG. 206(D) is a time-series example of a two-coin bet game in the AT state. It is a diagram showing.

In this example, the second state (AT state in this example) is an advantageous state, and the advantageous state is a state more advantageous to the player than the first state (normal state in this example). is provided with a first counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 206C and 206D, an advantageous interval counter), and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") is configured to be renewable. For example, as shown in FIG. When the execution of (for example, a 3-coin bet game) is started, both the count values related to the first count value and the count display (for example, the remaining ceiling counter, etc.) are updated. configured, and when execution of the second game (for example, a two-bet game) is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value is updated, and the count value related to the count display is not updated. configured as

Further, in this example, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state. 206(C) and (D), each time one game is played in the first advantageous state. , the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display", for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 206(C) and (D)), and one display among the plurality of types of display is the A display including an image representing an updated value of a certain value (hereinafter referred to as a “second display”; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 206(C)), wherein the certain value is the This is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. , both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the second display can be displayed in the first game, for example, FIG. , when execution of the second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) is started in the certain advantageous state, one of the first count value and the second count value Only the first count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game.

<Modified example of advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 207, a modified example of advantageous section control when operation navigation is ignored will be described.

FIG. 207(A) is a diagram showing Modification 1 of the advantageous section control when operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIG. 207(A)(1), in the AT1 state, for example, winning the privilege push-order bell 5 (the first lottery result is derived), the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode) ) is executed. Note that the AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT2 state by a transition lottery, the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 30%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 207(A)(2) is a state in which the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the stop operation of the RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "Bell-Bell-Bell" on the winning line). 12 medals are paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), the AT2 transition rate (first ) increased from 30% to 31% (increasing advantage).

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 207(B)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode). mode operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward pressing operation without following the operation navigation prompting the stop operation of the RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, " The game is stopped when the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned), and one medal is paid out.

Also, in the same state, a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the second stop mode). Therefore, the AT2 transfer rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is reduced from 30% to 29% (the advantage is lowered).

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the operation navigation, the AT2 shift rate increases and the AT1 state is easily shifted to the AT2 state, but the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation. In this case (when operation navigation is ignored), the AT2 shift rate decreases, making it difficult to shift from the AT1 state to the AT2 state.

In addition, as shown in (A) (4) of the same figure, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT2 shift rate may be maintained (AT2 shift without changing the rate).

FIG. 207(B) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the advantageous section control when operation navigation is ignored.

In the example shown in FIG. 207(B)(1), for example, the operation navigation bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived) and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is prompted. , and the player performs the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button) triggers a certain effect (in this example, displaying a character string "Good!" and outputting a sound effect). However, when triggered by the following second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button) and third stop operation (in this example, pressing the left stop button), nothing is displayed. are doing.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 207(B)(2), for example, winning the privilege pushing order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived) prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which the operation navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button), the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button), and the third stop operation (in this example, the right It is configured so that nothing is displayed when the user presses the stop button).

In the example shown in FIG. 207(B)(3), for example, winning the privilege push-order bell 5 (the first lottery result is derived), and the operation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) This is an example in which navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) triggers the first effect (in this example, the display including the character string "Good!" and the output of sound effects). Subsequently, the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) triggers a second effect (in this example, a display including a character string “Good!” and output of a sound effect) is started, followed by the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button) as a trigger for the third production (in this example, the display including the character string “Let’s do it!” And the sound effect output) has started.

In the example shown in FIG. 207(B)(4), for example, winning the privilege push-order bell 5 (the first lottery result is derived), and the operation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) This is an example in which navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) triggers the first effect (in this example, the display including the character string "Good!" and the output of sound effects). Subsequently, the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button) triggers a second effect (in this example, a display including a character string “What are you doing!” output), and subsequently, when the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is used as a trigger, nothing is displayed.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the advantageous state is not limited to the AT1 state or the AT2 state, and may be another game state. Also, the first game is not limited to the 3-coin bet game, and the second game is not limited to the 2-coin bet game. Also, the first counter is not limited to the advantageous section counter, and may be another counter relating to an advantageous state. Further, the attention-calling display may be other images or the like instead of characters. Also, the game value is not limited to game media such as medals, and may be a privilege (winning an AT game, granting an AT game, etc.) advantageous to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. However, depending on the stop position of any one of the plurality of reels (for example, the left reel), the plurality of reels will stop in the first stop mode. It may be configured to determine whether to stop at , or to stop in the second stop mode. That is, the first operation mode and the second operation mode may have the same pressing order (for example, left-center-right), but may differ in the stop timing of the left reel. Further, in the above embodiment, the first stop mode and the second stop mode are selected, but the third stop mode (for example, failure) may be selected.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 208 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, three lines will be valid with the addition of the upper horizontal prize line and the lower horizontal prize line, and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right Five lines, ie, a downward pay line and an upward pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted is a "three bet game," a game in which two medals are inserted is a "two bet game," and a game in which one medal is inserted. is sometimes referred to as "one bet game".

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment functions as a effect device that executes effects (for example, panel attack effect, bonus symbol notification effect, etc.) to be described later.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A driving circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127 is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 . The speakers 272 and 277 of this embodiment function as an effect device that executes an effect (for example, a bonus symbol stop effect) to be described later.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each reel 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 210(a). In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 210(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are bonus combinations that shift to a bonus game, and the replay is a replay without inserting new medals. The winning combination may be called a "working combination" to be distinguished from the winning combination. included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7)-BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" for BB1 and "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7)-BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating the internal winning is set (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the bonus internal winning state) is maintained until the next game is played, and the internal winning of BB1 and BB2 is in progress even after the next game. White 7-White 7" and the symbol combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" corresponding to BB2 are in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also called bonus)-RB symbol-RB symbol". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not based on the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. A regular bonus game may be started later, and the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started.

The RB game of this embodiment is composed of 8 games, and the RB game ends when the 8 games of the RB game are finished.

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbols The combination is "cherry pattern-ANY pattern-ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for the replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each role is obtained by combining numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role with numerical data within the range of random numbers acquired during internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). It is obtained by the value divided by The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination that is internally won at the same time as watermelon or cherry.

In the present embodiment, watermelon and cherry are respectively won when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. Further, Bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a pushing role.

The AT state is a game state in which information (details of stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the player wins an internal win for a chance combination or a push-up combination. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 are used to execute the operation navigation for informing the content of the stop operation to help win a prize. Specifically, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the timing of the stop operation (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the details of the stop operation of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which operation navigation is not executed even if the player wins internally for a chance combination or a push-up combination.

In this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state is shifted to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on the result of an internal winning combination lottery. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games), the state is shifted to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state, and a predetermined number of AT games is awarded. In the AT state, an AT add-on lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the given AT game numbers are consumed, the AT state ends and shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 in accordance with the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 212) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. 211, and then returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 213(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 213(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 213(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 214(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 214(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 214(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 214(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 214(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 214(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 214(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 214(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Example L1>
Example L1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 224. FIG. In embodiment L1, a panel attack effect is executed under a certain time limit during eight games of RB. The panel attack effect is an image effect using the effect image display device 157 . More specifically, the panel attack effect is performed by moving the cursor (indicated by C in the drawing) on a grid-like panel (indicated by P in the drawing) provided on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and moving. When the cursor stops, the panel at the position of the stopped cursor is erased, and the hidden image behind the erased panel is exposed (on the drawing The exposed image is indicated as d1). Among the panel attack effects, the effect that the panel disappears is referred to as a panel erasing effect. The panel attack effect is a effect related to the stop operation, and can be said to include both this panel erase effect and the reel stop effect of stopping the reels 110-112.

FIG. 215(a) is a diagram showing the appearance of a panel provided on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 215(b) shows the movement path of the cursor (indicated by RT on the drawing). It is a diagram. In Example L1, it is composed of 7×7=49 panels, and some of the panels are special panels (panels marked with the letter B, indicated by BP on the drawing). . Hereinafter, the panel on which the letter B is displayed is called a bomb panel, and the other panels are called normal panels. On such a panel, the cursor moves in a horizontal zigzag direction from the upper left corner of the screen to the lower right corner of the screen, as indicated by the movement path.

In addition, in Example L1, 49 panels of 7×7 are used, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be more or less than 7×7. For example, the player may be allowed to select the difficulty level, and the number of vertical and horizontal panels may be changed according to the difficulty level. In addition, although the moving speed of the cursor is constant in the embodiment L1, it is not limited to this, and the moving speed may be variable. For example, the moving speed of the cursor may be changed according to the number of remaining RB games, the remaining time limit, and the difficulty level.

In Example L1, when the cursor stops at the position of the normal panel, the region of the stopped panel is erased and the rear image of the panel region is displayed. On the other hand, when the cursor stops at the position of the bomb panel, the areas of multiple panels including the stopped panel (for example, the top, bottom, left, and right panels adjacent to the bomb panel) are erased, and the rear image of the multiple panel areas is displayed. be done. FIG. 215(c) is an example of the overall image d10 arranged behind the panel, and the image d1 is an image displayed by partially exposing the overall image d10. The overall image d10 may be, for example, an image that informs the player of advantageous information, or may be an image that suggests setting values, for example. That is, the panel attack effect (panel erasing effect) may be an effect for giving a predetermined privilege to the player.

FIG. 215(d) is a diagram for explaining the image display of the panel erasing effect (hereinafter referred to as "panel erasing effect display"). The panel erasing effect display d20 is a display in which a cloud-like balloon image suddenly displayed on the entire screen in response to the stop operation gradually becomes smaller and finally disappears. As the cloudy image disappears, the image behind is exposed and displayed. The display time of the panel erasing effect display d20 is the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect. The execution time TA in Example L1 is the same regardless of whether the cursor stops at the normal panel position or at the bomb panel position.

Here, in the panel attack effect of embodiment L1, it is possible to stop the cursor a maximum of 24 times (=8G×3) within the time limit. There is a need to. Therefore, the panel attack effect is a effect that requires careful stopping operations.

Further, in the panel attack effect of Example L1, an operation invalid time TB is provided between the first stop operation and the second stop operation and between the second stop operation and the third stop operation. The operation invalid time TB is a period in which the target reel is stopped even if a stop operation is received during this period, but the panel erase effect is not executed based on this stop operation. In the embodiment L1, the operation invalid time TB is the same time as the execution time TA of the panel clear effect. In other words, it is possible to execute the next panel erasing effect after the currently executed panel erasing effect is completed. As a result, the player can clearly see the entire panel erasing effect.

FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an overview of the panel erasing effect based on the first stop operation when the left reel 110 is used as the first stop reel. FIG. 216(a) shows an overview of the panel clear effect when the cursor stops on the normal panel, one panel at the position where the cursor stops is cleared, and the image d1 for one panel is displayed. It shows the mode of production in this case. On the other hand, FIG. 216(b) shows the case where the cursor stops on the bomb panel, and not only the panel where the cursor stopped but also the eight adjacent panels, a total of nine panels are erased and the panel It shows a rendering mode when nine images d1 are displayed.

FIG. 217 shows that in a game in which a panel attack effect is being executed, the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation>the operation invalid time TB, and the time interval between the second stop operation and the third stop operation 4 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2>operation invalid time TB. In this case, since the second stop operation and the third stop operation are the stop operations after the panel erase effect is completed, the panel erase effect is performed based on each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Execution is started.

Note that the cursor movement display shown in FIG. 217 refers to an image display in which the cursor is moving, and the cursor stop display refers to an image display in which the cursor is stopped (the same applies hereinafter). In the embodiment L1, as shown in FIG. 217, the cursor stop display is performed while the panel erasing effect display is performed, and the cursor movement display is started after the execution time TA (operation invalid time TB) has passed. It has become.

FIG. 218 shows the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation<operation invalid time TB. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of a panel clear effect based on the first stop operation and the second stop operation in the case. In this case, first, the left reel 110 is stopped based on the first stop operation, and the panel erasing effect is also started to be executed. Subsequently, the middle reel 110 is stopped based on the second stop operation, but since the panel elimination effect started based on the first stop operation is still being executed, a new panel elimination effect based on the second stop operation is not executed. Not executed.

As described above, in Example L1, even if there is a stop operation, there is a case where the panel clear effect is not executed. This is to show the player the panel erasing effect. That is, in the panel attack effect, (1) when both the effect of stopping the reels 110 to 112 and the panel erasing effect are executed based on one stop operation, (2) the reels 110 to 112 are executed based on one stop operation. There is a case where an effect to stop only is executed.

FIG. 219 shows that in a game in which a panel attack effect is being executed, the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation < operation invalid time TB, and the time interval between the second stop operation and the third stop operation 4 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2<operation invalid time TB. In this case, the panel clear effect based on the first stop operation ends at time t1 when the operation invalid time TB has passed from time t0 of the first stop operation. The panel erasing effect based on the 3 stop operation is not executed. Note that the stopped cursor starts to move and display from time t1.

It should be noted that, in the embodiment L1, when the panel erasing effect being executed ends, that is, when the execution time TA (=operation invalid time TB) elapses from the stop operation, the panel erasing effect based on the next stop operation is executed. Apart from this, if a stop operation is performed during the operation invalid time TB, the measurement of the operation invalid time TB is reset and the operation invalid time TB has elapsed since the time of the stop operation. may be re-measured (Modification 1).

FIG. 220 shows a game in which the panel attack effect of Modification 1 is executed, in which the operation interval time T1<operation invalid time TB between the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and the second stop operation and the second stop operation 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2 between three stop operations<operation invalid time TB. In this case, since the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed in a period in which the operation invalid time TB does not elapse from the previous stop operation, the panel is erased based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation in the game. No performance is performed. In addition, since the measurement of the operation invalid time TB is reset each time the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed, the cursor movement display is started at the time t1 when the operation invalid time TB has passed from the time t0 of the third stop operation. do.

In addition, in Example L1, as shown in FIG. 221(a), the execution time TA of the panel clear effect and the operation invalid time TB are set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 221(b), execution time TA of panel clear effect<operation invalid time TB may be set, or as shown in FIG. 221(c), execution time TA of panel clear effect>operation invalid time. TB may be used. In the case of FIG. 221(b), it is possible to pay attention to and enjoy the effect after the panel erasing effect is finished. Also, in the case of FIG. 221(c), the user can enjoy the panel erasing effect from the beginning to the middle.

In the embodiment L1, the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect is the same when the cursor stops on the normal panel and when the cursor stops on the bomb panel. Good (Modification 2).

FIG. 222 shows each device when the cursor stops on the normal panel based on the first stop operation and stops on the bomb panel based on the second stop operation in the game executing the panel attack effect of the modification 2. is a timing chart showing the operation of In FIG. 222, the execution time TA1 of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops on the normal panel and the execution time TA2 of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops on the bomb panel are indicated.

For example, execution time TA1<execution time TA2 as shown in FIG. 222(a), or execution time TA1>execution time TA2 as shown in FIG. 222(b). The panel erasing effect shown in FIG. 222(a) has an execution time that matches the size of the panel area to be erased, so the effect is consistent and natural whether the user stops at the normal panel or the bomb panel. can be realized. On the other hand, in the panel erasing effect shown in FIG. 222(b), the more panel areas to be erased, the shorter the execution time.

In addition, in the panel attack effect of the above embodiment L1, the number of panels to be erased in the panel erasing effect varies depending on whether the cursor is stopped at the normal panel or the bomb panel. You may perform an attack production.

For example, when the cursor moves along the movement path on a grid-like panel as shown in FIG. A benefit that is advantageous to the player who stops the cursor at a closer position may be given. Also, if the cursor is stopped at a position closer to the special bomb panel, an operation response effect with a longer execution time may be executed. In this case, the operation response effect with a long execution time may suggest giving a privilege more advantageous to the player than the operation response effect with a short execution time.

Specifically, the benefits when the cursor is stopped on the panel (denoted as NP in the drawing) one before or one after on the movement path of the special bomb panel shown in FIG. It is also a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege when it is stopped at a panel (denoted as FP in the drawing) that is two ahead or two ahead on the movement path of the special bomb panel shown in 16 (c). good.

In the above embodiment L1, the panel attack effect is executed in the RB game, but the game in which the panel attack effect is executed is not limited to RB. For example, it may be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state or a BB game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment L1, the panel clear effect is executed for one operation of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but other operations such as simultaneous operation of multiple buttons and slide operation of multiple buttons are executed. may apply. In this case, for example, the panel clear effect may be executed for the operation detected first in the simultaneous operation or the slide operation, or the panel clear effect may be executed for the operation detected later. . In the latter case, a reel stop effect of stopping the reels is executed for the previous operation, and a reel stop effect of stopping the reels and a panel erasing effect are executed for the subsequent operation.

Further, the panel attack effect of Example L1 has been described as an effect on the effect image display device 157 of the slot machine 100, but the target of the panel attack effect is not limited to the slot machine 100. FIG. For example, the panel attack effect shown in FIG. 223 may be applied to a game machine.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the panel attack effect executed by the game machine. The panel attack effect shown in FIG. 224 is a effect in which a cursor falling from top to bottom is stopped based on a stop operation, and a better evaluation can be obtained by stopping the cursor at a position closer to a predetermined line TL. be. For example, PERFECT (good evaluation) is given when the cursor is stopped on a predetermined line TL, and GOOD (ordinary evaluation) is given when the cursor is stopped within a predetermined range R1 near the predetermined line TL. evaluation), and when the cursor is stopped outside the predetermined range R1, an evaluation of BAD (bad evaluation) is given, and an effect according to the evaluation is executed, or a privilege according to the evaluation is given. good.

Also, a panel attack effect may be executed on a pachinko machine equipped with a chance button. For example, the panel attack effect may be executed during 15 rounds of the jackpot, and the panel elimination effect may be executed based on the operation of the chance button. As a rule, for example, the chance button can be operated up to three times in one round, and an operation invalid time is provided between chance button operations. When the chance button is operated after the operation invalid time has elapsed, the panel clear effect is executed based on the operation of the chance button, but the next chance button is operated before the operation invalid time has elapsed. In this case, the panel clear effect may not be executed based on the operation of the chance button.

<Example M1>
Example M1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 229. FIG. In the embodiment M1, in the internal bonus winning state (BB1 and BB2), there is an effect (e.g., bonus combination symbol combination) that notifies the symbol of the internally won bonus combination and instructs to align the symbol combination of the internally won bonus combination. , an effect that instructs one symbol among the stop modes including the symbol combination of the bonus combination, hereinafter referred to as a bonus symbol notification effect) may be executed. Then, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is being executed, one symbol constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the internally won bonus combination is stop-displayed on the active line based on the player's first stop operation. In this case, a bonus symbol stop effect indicating that the bonus symbol has stopped on the active line is executed.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining the effect outline of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB1 internal winning state. The bonus symbol notification effect is an image display effect, and as shown in FIGS. This is an effect displayed on the display device 157 . The bonus pattern stop effect is a voice output effect, and as shown in FIGS. 225(a) to 225(c), the effect of outputting predetermined sounds v1 to v3 from the speakers 272 and 277 congratulating that the bonus symbols have stopped. is.

FIG. 225(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the left reel 110 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the left reel 110, the slot machine 100 outputs the first voice v1 (for example, "I'm sure!~") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

FIG. 225(b) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the middle reel 111, the slot machine 100 outputs the second voice v2 (for example, "I did it!") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

FIG. 225(c) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the right reel 112 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the right reel 112, the slot machine 100 outputs the third voice v3 (eg, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

As described above, the slot machine 100 of the embodiment M1 executes different bonus symbol stop effects in accordance with the reel targeted by the first stop operation in the BB1 internal winning state. Various performances can be provided to the player in the executed game, and interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

In addition, in the BB1 internal winning state of the embodiment M1, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect was executed, when the symbol of BB1 was stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop effect was executed. A bonus symbol stop effect may be executed at a predetermined rate even when a specific symbol other than the symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

FIG. 226(a) is a diagram for explaining the effect outline of the minor symbol combination notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state. In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination in which Watermelon or Cherry is internally won at the same time, so there is a case where Watermelon or Cherry is won in the BB1 internal winning state. Therefore, in the BB1 internal winning state, there is a case where the small winning symbol notification effect is executed. The small winning pattern notification effect is a presentation image display effect for notifying the internally won small winning pattern and instructing to align the small winning pattern combination, and the simultaneously winning small winning pattern (for example, a watermelon pattern). is displayed on the effect image display device 157 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 226(a) shows a case where the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation in the game in which the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed. In this case, the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the active line of the middle reel 111, but the slot machine 100 does not output the sound of the bonus symbol stop effect from the speakers 272 and 277.例文帳に追加That is, in the game in which the BB1 internal winning state of the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed, even if the player ignores the content of the notification and stops the BB1 symbol on the effective line for the predetermined reel, the bonus symbol is stopped. No performance is performed.

FIG. 226(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 225(b)) for comparison with FIG. 226(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the effective line for a predetermined reel, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 226(a) and 226(b), in Example M1, even if the symbol of BB1 stops on the active line on the same predetermined reel, the bonus symbol is displayed in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed. Although the stop performance is executed, the bonus symbol stop performance is not executed in the game in which the bonus symbol notification performance is not executed (specifically, the game in which the minor winning symbol notification performance is executed). As a result, it is possible to improve consistency between the symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect, and to increase the reliability of the symbol notification effect.

In the embodiment M1, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed with a probability of 100%, and in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is not executed. When the symbol of BB1 stops on the active line, the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed with a probability of 100%, but it is not limited to this. In a broad sense, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line on the same predetermined reel, the probability of executing the bonus symbol notification effect in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed>Bonus in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is not executed It suffices if it is the probability of executing the symbol notification effect.

FIG. 226(c) is a diagram showing a modification of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the minor winning symbol notification effect. The image d32 shown in FIG. 226(c) is an image displaying the symbol combination of BB1 together with the symbols of the minor winning combination. In this way, in the small win symbol notification effect, a symbol different from BB1 may be displayed together with the symbol combination of BB1. It may not be executed. That is, in the minor winning symbol notification effect, at least a symbol different from the bonus symbol should be displayed in the displayed effect image.

FIG. 227(a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the overview of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB2 internal winning state. Even in the BB2 internal winning state, there is a case where the bonus symbol notification effect is executed in the same manner as in the BB1 internal winning state. The bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state is an effect of displaying the image d40 showing the symbol combination of BB2 on the effect image display device 157 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 227(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB2 symbol has stopped on the active line of the middle reel 111, the slot machine 100 outputs a second voice v1 (for example, "Ichika!~") from the speakers 272 and 277 as a bonus. Execute the symbol stop effect.

FIG. 227(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 225(a)) for comparison with FIG. 227(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the activated line with respect to the left reel 110 based on the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 , to execute a bonus symbol stop effect for outputting a second voice v1 (for example, “Ichika!~”) from the speakers 272 and 277 .

As described above, in the embodiment M1, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state, as shown in FIGS. 227(a) and 227(b). 111), when the symbol of BB2 stops on the activated line, the bonus symbol notification effect of outputting the second sound v1 is executed. For example, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line on the left reel 110), the bonus symbol stop effect of outputting the second sound v1, that is, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed. As a result, even if the content of the bonus symbol notification effect is different, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed for different stop operations, so the interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

FIG. 228(a) is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect outline of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB2 internal winning state.

FIG. 228(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the right reel 112 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB2 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the right reel 112, the slot machine 100 outputs the second sound v3 (for example, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277 as a bonus symbol. Execute the stop effect.

FIG. 228(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 225(c)) for comparison with FIG. 228(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the activated line with respect to the right reel 112 by the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 operates as a bonus symbol. A symbol stop effect is executed, and a bonus symbol stop effect of outputting a third voice v3 (for example, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277 is executed.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state, as shown in FIGS. 112), when the symbol of BB2 stops on the active line, the first bonus symbol notification effect of outputting the sound v3 is executed, while the BB1 is on the first reel (for example, the right reel 112) in the BB1 internal winning state. symbol stops on the activated line, the first bonus symbol notification effect of outputting a voice v3, that is, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed. As a result, even if the content of the bonus symbol notification effect is different, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed for the same stop operation, so the interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

In addition, in the BB2 internal winning state of the embodiment M1, the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, and when the BB2 symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed. Even when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop performance may be executed at a predetermined rate.

225 to 228 explained the bonus symbol stop effect for the first stop operation, but the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed only for the first stop operation. The bonus symbol stop effect is executed also for the second stop operation and the third stop operation.

FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of the bonus symbol stop effect from the first stop operation to the third stop operation in the BB1 internal winning state. Specifically, in FIG. 22, the stop operation is performed with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110, and the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed in any stop operation. indicates the case. It should be noted that FIG. 229(a) shows an outline of an effect when a bonus symbol notification effect is executed, and FIG. 229(b) shows an effect outline when a minor symbol symbol notification effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), when the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect of outputting the sound v2 for the first stop operation (see FIGS. 225(b) and 226(b)). , a bonus pattern stop effect (see FIG. 225(c)) that outputs a voice v3 for the second stop operation, and a bonus that outputs a voice v4 (for example, "Big bonus!") for the third stop operation Execute the symbol stop effect. A bonus symbol stop effect (see FIG. 225(a)) for outputting a voice v1 may be executed for the third stop operation.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229(b), when the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed for the first stop operation (see FIG. 226(a)), A bonus symbol stop effect that outputs a voice v3 for the second stop operation (see FIG. 225(c)), and a bonus symbol that outputs a voice v4 (for example, "Big bonus!") for the third stop operation Execute the stop effect. A bonus symbol stop effect (see FIG. 225(a)) for outputting a voice v1 may be executed for the third stop operation.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, even when the symbol combination of BB1 is stopped and displayed with the same stop operation content, when the bonus symbol notification effect and the minor winning symbol notification effect are executed, the first stop operation is performed. There is a difference regarding whether or not the bonus symbol stop effect is executed. However, for the second stop operation and the third stop operation, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed.

Examples L1 and M1 of the present embodiment have been described above, but the example of the present embodiment is not limited to this, and each example may be combined.

<Summary of embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the amusement machine (e.g., slot machine 100, pachinko machine, game machine, etc.) of the above-described embodiment (e.g., Example L1),
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, operation buttons such as stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300, production buttons, and chance buttons);
Effect means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277 , various lamps 336, 420, etc.);
A game machine comprising
When the operation means receives a first operation (for example, a first stop operation, etc.) during execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as a first case), the effect means performs the first Means capable of executing an operation response effect (for example, a panel deletion effect based on the first stop operation) (for example, FIG. 216, FIG. 217, etc.),
In the first case, when a second operation (e.g., second stop operation, etc.) is performed after the first time (e.g., operation invalid time TB, etc.) has elapsed after the first operation is performed (hereinafter , the second case), the effect means executes a second operation response effect (for example, a panel erase effect based on the second stop operation) (for example, FIG. 216, FIG. 217, etc.),
In the first case, if the second operation is performed before the first time elapses after the first operation is performed, the second operation response effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 218, Fig. 219, etc.),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, the second operation response effect may or may not be executed depending on the second operation timing, but the first operation response effect is reliably executed. , the first operation response performance is prioritized over the second response performance, and the player can firmly confirm it. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has never existed before.

In the above first basic configuration,
The effect means is means for executing at least part of the first operation response effect during at least part of the first time (for example, FIG. 217, FIG. 221, etc.),
This is the first preferred configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, it is possible to clearly show the player the first operation response effect at the first time.

The first time may be the same as the execution time of the first operation response effect, the first time may be shorter than the execution time of the first operation response effect, The first time may be longer than the execution time of the first operation response effect.

In the first basic configuration or the first preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of changing the execution time of the first operation response effect according to the timing when the operation means receives the first operation (for example, FIG. 222),
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, since the execution time of the first operation response effect is the time intended by the player, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, or second preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of changing the first time according to the execution time of the first operation response effect (for example, FIG. 222),
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the second operation as well.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, or third preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of executing the first operation response effect requiring a second time (for example, execution time TA),
The effect means is means capable of executing the first operation response effect by requiring a third time longer than the second time (for example, execution time TA2 in FIG. 222(a)). ,
When the effect means executes the first operation response effect taking the third time (hereinafter referred to as the third case), the effect means takes the second time and executes the first operation response effect. There is a high possibility that the player will be more advantageous than when one operation response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the fourth case) (for example, FIG. 222 (a), etc.),
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first operation response effect is lengthened, it is possible to concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the fourth preferred configuration,
The production means includes display means (for example, production image display device 157, display, etc.),
The first effect is a display effect in which a cursor display (for example, the cursor display in FIGS. 223 and 224) moves along a path including the target display,
The fourth case is a case where the cursor display position is the first position (for example, panel FP, area R1, etc.) and the first operation is received,
The third case is a case where the cursor display position is the second position (for example, panel NP, line TL, etc.) and the first operation is accepted,
the second position is closer to the target display than the first position;
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on performing the first operation at a position close to the target display.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, third preferred configuration, fourth preferred configuration, or fifth preferred configuration,
The rendering means performs a third operation response rendering when a third operation (for example, a third stop operation, etc.) is received after the first time has elapsed from the second operation in the second case. (For example, a panel erasing effect based on the third stop operation, etc.) can be executed,
After receiving the second operation before the first time elapses from the first operation in the first case, the effect means elapses the first time from the second operation. Means that does not execute the third operation response effect if the third operation is received before
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player firmly confirm the first operation response effect.

In the sixth preferred configuration,
After receiving the second operation before the first time elapses from the first operation in the first case, the effect means elapses the first time from the second operation. Execution of the first operation response effect may be terminated before
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, it is possible to carefully operate the operating means.

The first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or in a seventh preferred configuration,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, the above effects can be applied to slot machines.

The first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or in a seventh preferred configuration,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, the above effects can be applied to the pachinko machine.
(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100, pachinko machine, game machine, etc.) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example L1),
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, operation buttons such as stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300, production buttons, and chance buttons);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, reels 110 to 112, effect image display device 157, speaker 272,
277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.);
A game machine comprising
The directing means is
First effect means (for example, first sub-control means 400, second sub-control means 500, effect image display device 158, etc.) capable of executing a first response effect (for example, panel erasing effect, etc.);
Second effect means (for example, main control unit 300, reels 110 to 112, etc.) capable of executing a second response effect (for example, stopping reels 110 to 112);
with
The effect means executes both the first response effect and the second response effect when the operation means receives a first operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, etc.). There is a case (hereinafter referred to as the first case),
The effect means is such that the operation means performs a second operation (for example, when the first operation is the first stop operation, the second stop operation, when the first operation is the second stop operation, the first stop operation, etc.). ) is accepted, there is a case where only the second response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the second case) (for example, FIG. 219),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, since the response performance can be varied according to the operation of the operating means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and to execute a new performance that has never existed before. can.

In the above second basic configuration,
The effect means, in the first case, when the second operation is performed before a first time (for example, operation invalid time TB) elapses after the first operation is performed A means for the second case,
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

In addition, in the above second basic configuration,
The effecting means is means for becoming the first case when the first operation is performed before the first time elapses after the second operation is performed in the second case. is
This is the tenth-1 preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration or the tenth-1 preferred configuration, when the operation interval between the first operation and the second operation is less than the first time, the first operation and the second Since different response effects can be executed by the operation of , it is possible to provide diverse response effects.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the tenth-1 preferred configuration,
In the first case, the effect means is means for executing at least part of the first response effect in at least part of the first time,
This is the eleventh preferred configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, it is possible to clearly show the player the first response effect at the first time.

In the eleventh preferred configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The operation means are stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
The second effect means are the plurality of reels,
This is the twelfth preferred configuration.

According to the twelfth preferable configuration, the first response effect may or may not be executed in response to the stop operation, but the reels can always be stopped.

In the eleventh preferred configuration or the twelfth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the execution time of the first response effect in accordance with the timing at which the operation means receives the first operation.
This is the thirteenth preferred configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first response effect is the time intended by the player, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the eleventh preferred configuration, the twelfth preferred configuration, or the thirteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the first time according to the execution time of the first response effect,
This is the fourteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the second operation as well.

In the eleventh preferred configuration, the twelfth preferred configuration, the thirteenth preferred configuration, or the fourteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first response effect requiring a second time (for example, execution time TA),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first response effect by requiring a third time longer than the second time (for example, execution time TA2 in FIG. 222(a)),
When the effect means takes the third time to execute the first response effect (hereinafter referred to as the third case), the effect means takes the second time to execute the first response effect. 222 (a), etc.),
This is the fifteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first response effect is lengthened, it is possible to concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above,
The production means includes display means (for example, production image display device 157, display, etc.),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a display effect in which a cursor display (for example, the cursor display in FIGS. 223 and 224, etc.) moves on a path including the target display,
The fourth case is a case where the first operation is accepted while the cursor display position is the first position (for example, panel FP, area R1, etc.) during execution of the display effect,
The third case is a case where the first operation is received while the display effect is being executed and the cursor is displayed at a second position (for example, panel NP, line TL, etc.),
the second position is closer to the target display than the first position;
This is the sixteenth preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on performing the first operation at a position close to the target display.
(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Notification means capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a first instruction (e.g., instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB1) in a first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state);
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The first instruction can stop the first symbol (eg, BB1 symbol) among the stop modes including the first symbol combination (eg, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result. is an instruction indicating that
The effect means performs a first symbol stop effect (e.g., " It is a means that can execute voice output such as "I did it",
The effect means, when the notification means executes notification regarding the first instruction, executes the first symbol stop effect more than when the notification means does not execute notification regarding the first instruction. is a means with a high probability of
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, when the first instruction is executed, the probability of executing the first symbol stop effect is higher than when the first instruction is not executed, so the effect consistency can be improved, and a novel production that has not existed in the past can be executed.

In the third basic configuration above,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a second instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the watermelon pattern) in the first state,
the second instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display a symbol (for example, a watermelon symbol) that corresponds to the first result and is different from the first symbol combination;
When the notification regarding the first instruction is not executed, including the case where the notification means executes the notification regarding the second instruction (for example, Fig. 226 (b), (c), etc.),
This is the seventeenth preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, no instruction information that is disadvantageous to the player is given.

In the seventeenth preferred configuration,
The notification means executes notification regarding the second instruction until a stopping operation (for example, a third stopping operation) is performed on a reel to be stopped last (for example, a third stop reel) among the plurality of reels. do,
This is the eighteenth preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferable configuration, the player can understand that the combination corresponding to the different symbols can be arranged.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, or the eighteenth preferred configuration,
When the certain symbol (for example, BB1 symbol) is stop-displayed on a reel other than the certain reel among the plurality of reels, the effect means performs a second symbol stop effect (for example, "Let's go!"). such as voice output) is a viable means,
The effect means, when the notification means executes the notification regarding the first instruction, and when the notification means does not execute the notification regarding the first instruction, among the plurality of reels Means capable of executing the second symbol stop effect on reels other than the first stopped reel (for example, second stop reel, third stop reel) (for example, FIG. 229),
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, for example, the pattern stop effect is executed also in the second stop operation and the third stop operation, so the interest can be improved.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration,
The stop control means is capable of stop-displaying the first symbol combination even when the notification means does not perform notification regarding the first instruction in the first state (for example, FIG. 226(a), etc.)
This is the twentieth preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, even if the first instruction is not executed, the first symbol combination can be stop-displayed at one's own will, so the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, the nineteenth preferred configuration, or the twentieth preferred configuration,
The probability that the first symbol stop effect is executed when the notification means does not execute the notification regarding the first instruction is 0.
This is the 20th-1 preferred configuration.
(4) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
A game machine comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in the first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in a second state (e.g., BB2 internal winning state),
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
the second state is a state in which a second result (for example, BB2) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The effect means selects the first symbol (for example, BB1 symbol) among the stop modes including the first symbol combination (for example, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result in the first state. ) is stop-displayed on the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) of the plurality of reels, means for executing the second symbol stop effect,
The effect means selects the second symbol (eg, BB2 symbol) among the stop modes including the second symbol combination (eg, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the second result in the second state. ) is stop-displayed on the second reel (for example, the middle reel 111) of the plurality of reels, a means for executing the second symbol stop effect,
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, the symbols constituting the first symbol combination or the symbols constituting the second symbol combination are stopped and displayed on different reels to execute the second symbol stop effect. Therefore, it may be possible to specify the result of internal winning by grasping the stop reel in the second symbol stop effect. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has never existed before.

Further, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) , and
A game machine comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in the first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a third pattern stop effect (for example, outputting a sound such as "Let's go") in the first state,
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The effect means selects a first symbol among the stop modes including a first symbol combination (eg, a symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result (eg, BB1) in the first state. means for executing the second symbol stop effect when (for example, BB1 symbol) is stop-displayed on the first reel (for example, left reel 110) of the plurality of reels,
The effect means produces the third symbol stop effect when the first symbol is stop-displayed on a third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the first state. is the means to carry out
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, different symbol stop effects are executed according to the reels on which the symbols constituting the first symbol combination are stop-displayed, so that the symbol stop effects are varied according to the stop reels. be able to. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has never existed before.

In the fourth basic configuration or the fifth basic configuration,
The effect means produces the second symbol based on a stop operation (for example, a first stop operation) for stopping a first reel (for example, a first stop reel) of the plurality of reels in the first state. It is a means that can execute the stop production,
This is the 21st preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-first preferred configuration, it is possible to grasp that the first result is internally won at the time of the first stop operation.

In the fourth basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a third pattern stop effect (for example, outputting a sound such as "Let's go") in the first state,
The effect means produces the third symbol stop effect when the first symbol is stop-displayed on a third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the first state. is a means of carrying out
The effect means stops the third symbol when the second symbol is stop-displayed on the third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the second state. is a means of carrying out the performance,
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-second preferred configuration, the same symbol stop effect is executed for the same reel even if the internal winning results are different, so the symbol stop effect can be shared.

In the twenty-second preferred configuration,
The effect means provides the third symbol stop effect based on a stop operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, or a third stop operation) for stopping one of the plurality of reels. is a viable means of
This is the 23rd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-third preferred configuration, the third symbol stop effect can be executed for any stop operation, so that the sense of anticipation for each stop operation can be improved.

In the 22nd preferred configuration or the 23rd preferred configuration,
A notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, the effect image display device 157, etc.) is provided,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a first instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB1) in the first state,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a second instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB2) in the second state,
the first instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display the first symbol combination corresponding to the first result;
The second instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display the second symbol combination corresponding to the second result.
This is the twenty-fourth preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-fourth preferred configuration, since an instruction is issued according to the internal winning result, consistency of presentation can be enhanced.

<Other game machines>
In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as game media is shown as an example of the game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used in the game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu game machines, smart balls, casino machines, etc., which are used as media.

For example, a pachinko machine consists of "a launching device that shoots game balls into a predetermined game area, a start winning hole configured to allow the game balls fired from the launching device to enter, and a game in which a ball enters the start winning hole. Detecting means for detecting a ball, payout means for paying out a game ball when the detecting means detects the game ball (or awarding means for awarding a value equivalent to the game ball), and predetermined patterns (identification information) are varied. A pachinko machine equipped with a variable display device for displaying, and triggered by the detection of a game ball by a detection means, the variable display device changes the pattern and then stops displaying to announce the transition of the game state. There may be.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and paying out game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 230 to 238. FIG. 230 to 238 are basically used only for the description of this embodiment, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 230 to 238 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 230 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game is finished after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as the production button 132 .

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. .

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player of the change, the light may also be turned on when performing various notifications described later.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. An upper lamp 142 (a first upper lamp 142a and a second upper lamp 142b shown in FIG. 233, etc.) provided on the upper portion of the front door 102 and side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 make the game exciting. In addition to being a decorative lamp, it may be turned on when performing various notifications to be described later.

A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and will be described later. It may be displayed when performing various notifications to be performed.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 231 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Error display/overview during reel rotation>
Next, an overview of error display during reel rotation will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 230) includes notification means, and the notification means detects when the second error is detected in the first period. a first error annunciation in which the detected error is not identifiable as the second error, and during a second time period after the first time period, the detected error is the second error; A second error notification that can be identified as an error can be executed.

Here, the "informing means" according to the present invention means means capable of informing, for example, display means capable of informing an error by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 230), , sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 232) capable of announcing errors by sound, and light emitting means (in this example, the first upper part shown in FIG. 233) capable of announcing errors by emitting light. In addition to the lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlight of each reel 110 to 112), and the error notification due to the movement of the movable body. Possible movable means (reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 230 in this example) and the like correspond.

Errors that can occur in slot machines include, for example, door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1-4, medal payout errors 1-3, overflow errors, RAM defects, winning errors, and the like.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number of medals or more is delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error cancellation switch is accepted.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

Further, the “first period” according to the present invention is, for example, the period of one game, and as a specific example, after the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by pressing the start lever 135, the stop button 137 139 until the reels 110 to 112 stop rotating. In addition, it is preferable that the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved in the second period after the first period.

Further, the "first error notification" is an error notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. "An error has occurred", "Anomaly detected", "Please call the staff", "Please clear the error", etc.

In addition, the "second error notification" is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error. , "Error code: E3" display and voice), and notifications that suggest the location of the error (e.g., "Please check the medal selector", "Door is open", etc.). do.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 230) includes display means, and the display means is capable of displaying a first display showing game information, means capable of displaying a first error display, the first error display being a display executed when a second error is detected during the first period, and the display means displaying the first When the second error is detected during the execution of the first display during the period, the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention means means capable of displaying the first display, the first error display, and the second error display. For example, the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. Apparatus 157 etc. correspond.

Further, the "first display" according to the present invention is a display showing game information, for example, an operation instruction display (operation navigation) showing information for instructing the operation of the player, or Display of the total number of acquired game media, display of the number of AT sets, display of the initial number of AT games, display of the number of AT additional games, display of the number of times operation navigation has been performed, display of the number of times the player has This includes display of acquired points and items, display of the number of game media paid out, and the like.

Further, the "first error display" according to the present invention is a display executed when the second error is detected in the first period, for example, "an error has occurred", " This applies to displays such as "Anomaly detected", "Please call the staff", "Please clear the error", etc. Even if the first error display is executed, the player can still see the first display. Therefore, display having transparency is preferable.

Further, the "second error display" according to the present invention is a display that is executed when a second error is detected during the first period. For example, a display representing an error name or error code ( For example, displays such as "error in the number of medals passed" and "error code: E3"), and displays suggesting where the error occurred (for example, displays such as "please check the medal selector" and "the door is open"). ) applies, and execution of the second error display makes the first display invisible, preferably the display is non-transmissive (non-transmissive).

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 1>
Next, Example 1 of error display during reel rotation will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. FIG.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed.

Here, the “display device” in FIG. 234 is display means capable of announcing errors by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 233), and the “speaker” is capable of announcing errors by sound. Sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 232 in this example), and lamp 1 and lamp 2 are light emitting means (in this example, speaker 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 233) capable of emitting (outputting) light. 1 upper lamp 142a and second upper lamp 142b), which are one of the notification means. The payout number display is payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 230).

Figure 233 (a) and Figure 234 (a) is the state of receiving the pressing operation of the start lever 135 in the AT game.

In this state, when the start lever 135 is pushed down, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating and the AT effect is executed. In the AT effect of this example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 includes a background display including a character image, etc., and an operation instruction display (first display, first game information) for instructing the player's operation. A display) SD and a total win number display (first display, second game information display) GD indicating the total number of medals won by the player are displayed.

Also, from the speaker (sound output means), background sound (BGM) corresponding to the AT production is output, and from the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the AT production. emit light.

Figures 233(b) and 234(b) show that a medal passing number error (second error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during the rotation of the reels and is within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the number of medals passed error (second error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the first error display, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. and light is emitted from the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, background display and operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total winning number display (first display, second game information display) by liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 ) GD display, background sound output by the speaker (sound output means), and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

According to this example, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed). If the fraudulent person who attempted to commit the fraud causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error can make the fraudulent person feel uneasy and discourage the fraudulent act. Sometimes we can. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Also, the first effect means (in this example, the first upper lamp 142a) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) while executing the first effect in the first period. In this case, since the first effect is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is notified, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

In addition, the second effect means (in this example, the second upper lamp 142b) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) during execution of the second effect in the first period. In this case, since the second effect is not executed, there is a case where the clerk who is nearby can notice the occurrence of the error before the player calls the clerk of the game parlor, and the error must be dealt with quickly. can be done.

In addition, when the notification means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speaker) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) during execution of the third effect during the first period. Since the third performance is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is reported, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error. be able to.

Also, even if the first error display (in this example, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is applied) is executed, the first display (in this example, operation instruction display Since the player can visually recognize the SD and the total acquired number display GD), the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's willingness to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Also, the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) is detected while the sound output means (in this example, the speaker) is outputting a certain sound (in this example, background sound) during the first period. In this case, since the certain sound is continuously output, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

FIG. 233(c) and FIG. 234(c) show a state in which the second error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing number error (second error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal number error (second error). Execute the second error notification.

In the second error notification of this example, as the second error display, an opaque (non-transparent ) By displaying the background image, the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total number of wins display (first display, second game information display) GD are invisible. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the second period, the second error display causes the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total win number display (first display, second game information display) to be displayed. Display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved.

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed) is resolved. During the period, the player can call the store clerk to solve the error.

In addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound is output from the speaker (sound output means). , the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E2 in this example) corresponding to the medal number error (second error).

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. During the period, the player can continue playing the game, and during the second period, the player can call the store clerk to deal with the error.

Also, the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) is detected while the sound output means (in this example, the speaker) is outputting a certain sound (in this example, background sound) during the first period. In this case, since the error sound is output without outputting the certain sound during the second period, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, but during the second period, By outputting an error sound, the player can call a store clerk at the game parlor to deal with the error.

FIGS. 233(d) and 234(d) show the state in which the medal passing number error (second error) has been resolved and the error has been cancelled.

In the same state, the AT effect is resumed when the error is resolved. In the AT effect after the restart, the background display and the total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157, and the speaker (sound output means) is displayed. ) outputs a background sound corresponding to the AT effect, and the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) emit light in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the AT effect. In addition, the payout number display 127 displays the number of payout medals (0 in this example) corresponding to the winning combination (Bell in this example).

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 2>
Next, Example 2 of error display during reel rotation will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236. FIG.

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed.

Note that the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234 only in the types of errors that occur, so description of other contents will be omitted.

Figures 235(b) and 236(b) show that a medal passing time error (third error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during rotation of the reel and within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the medal passing time error (third error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the first error display, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. and light is emitted from the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, background display and operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total winning number display (first display, second game information display) by liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 ) GD display, background sound output by the speaker (sound output means), and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

According to this example, the first error notification is a notification in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the second error (in this example, the medal passing time error), so that the gaming machine is notified of fraudulent activity. If the fraudulent person who attempted to commit the fraud causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error can make the fraudulent person feel uneasy and discourage the fraudulent act. Sometimes we can. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Also, the first effect means (in this example, the first upper lamp 142a) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) while executing the first effect in the first period. In this case, since the first effect is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is notified, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Also, the second effect means (in this example, the second upper lamp 142b) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) while executing the second effect in the first period. In this case, since the second effect is not executed, there is a case where the clerk who is nearby can notice the occurrence of the error before the player calls the clerk of the game parlor, and the error must be dealt with quickly. can be done.

In addition, when the notification means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speaker) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) during execution of the third effect in the first period Since the third performance is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is reported, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error. be able to.

Also, even if the first error display (in this example, a semi-transparent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is applied) is executed, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD Since the player can visually recognize the display of the total number of winnings (GD), the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's willingness to play is limited due to the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Further, the second error (medal passing time error in this example) is detected while the sound output means (speaker in this example) is outputting a certain sound (background sound in this example) during the first period. In this case, since the certain sound is continuously output, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

In addition, the occurrence of the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) and the third error (in this example, the medal passing time error) can be notified by the common (same mode) first error notification. can improve convenience.

Figures 235(c) and 236(c) show a state in which the third error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing time error (third error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal passing time error (third error). Execute the third error notification.

In the third error notification of this example, as the third error display, an opaque (non-transparent ) By displaying the background image, the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total number of wins display (first display, second game information display) GD are invisible. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the second period, the third error display causes the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total winning number display (first display, second game information display). Display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed until the third error is resolved.

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the third error (in this example, the medal passing time error) is resolved. During the period, the player can call the store clerk to solve the error.

In addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound is output from the speaker (sound output means). , the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E3 in this example) corresponding to the medal passing time error (third error).

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. During the period, the player can continue playing the game, and during the second period, the player can call the store clerk to deal with the error.

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 3>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238, a third embodiment of error display during reel rotation will be described.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the fourth error occurs in a certain game and the fourth error display is executed; FIG. is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when error 1 occurs and a fourth error display is executed.

In this example, in order to avoid duplication of explanation, only the contents different from those in the first and second embodiments will be explained.

Figures 237(b) and 238(b) show that a medal passing number error (fourth error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during the rotation of the reels and within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the number of medals passed error (fourth error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the fourth error display, an opaque background image with a character string "selector error" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. , the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the display of the total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD become invisible. Further, the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) emits light in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, output of background sound by the speaker (sound output means) and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

FIG. 237(c) and FIG. 238(c) show a state in which the second error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing number error (fourth error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal number error (fourth error). Execute the second error notification.

In the second error notification of this example, as the second error display, an opaque (transparent By overlapping and displaying the background image without ), operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD, total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD and the fourth error indication become invisible.

From the fourth error display, which is the first error notification, only the information that "a selector error has occurred" can be obtained, but from the second error display, which is the second error notification, " You can get the information "A medal passing error, which is one of the selector errors, has occurred."

That is, since the second error notification includes error notification with more detailed content than the first error notification, the second error notification provides detailed information about the error (for example, the location of the error, the cause of the error, etc.). , countermeasures, etc.) can be specified, and it is possible to respond appropriately to the error. In addition, after preparing for the occurrence of an error with the first error notification, it is possible to deal with the error with the second error notification, so it is possible to quickly respond to the error. Become.

In addition, in this example, the fourth error display and the second error display provide operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total win number display (first display, second display). Game information display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed after the occurrence of the fourth error until the fourth error is resolved.

According to this example, after the error occurs, the game cannot proceed until the fourth error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed) is resolved. It is possible to call a store clerk and resolve the error.

In addition, in the second error notification, in addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emitting mode, and the speaker (sound output means) outputs an error sound, and the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E2 in this example) corresponding to the medal number error (fourth error).

According to this example, from the first period to the second period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. From the period to the second period, the player is asked to call the store clerk of the game shop, and the error can be quickly dealt with.

<Error display during reel rotation/Summary>
As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 230 or the pachinko machine) includes notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 230 and the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 232). , 277, the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b shown in FIG. 233, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112, and the backlight of the reels 110 to 112, FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown in ), wherein the notification means detects a second error (e.g., medal number error) during a first period (e.g., one game period) When the first error notification (e.g., the first error notification shown in FIG. 233 (b)) can be executed, and the second error notification is performed in the second period after the first period (e.g., Second error notification shown in FIG. 233 (c)) is a means capable of executing the first error notification is notification that the detected error is the second error that cannot be specified, The gaming machine is characterized in that the second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. When a person causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error may make the person uneasy and discourage the person from committing the fraudulent act. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Further, the first period is a period during which the game can proceed (for example, after the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by pressing the start lever 135, the reels 110 by the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 112 until the rotation stops).

With such a configuration, during the period of one game, an unidentifiable notification is given that the detected error is the second error. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, the first error notification is a notification indicating that an error has been detected (for example, ``an error has occurred'', ``anomaly has been detected'', ``please call a staff member'', ``cancel the error''). Please,” may be displayed or voiced).

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk with the minimum necessary information.

Further, the notification means can execute the first error notification when a third error (for example, medal passing time error) is detected during the first period, and after the first period means capable of executing a third error notification during the second period of , and the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the third error (for example, FIG. 235(b)), and the third error notification is a notification that can specify that the detected error is the third error (for example, It may be the first error notification shown).

With such a configuration, the occurrence of the second error and the third error can be notified by the common (in the same mode) first error notification, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, the reporting means is means including at least display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 230), and the first error reporting means that the detected error is the second error. The first error notification is notification by an unspecified indication that the detected error is the third error, and the second error notification is an indication that the detected error is the third error. The error is reported by a display capable of specifying that the error is the second error, and the third error report is a report by a display capable of specifying that the detected error is the third error. may

With such a configuration, since the first error notification and the second error notification can be performed using the display means, the error can be noticed more reliably through vision.

In addition, the notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 232) and light emitting means (for example, first upper lamp 142a and second upper lamp 142b, side lamp 144, and stop button shown in FIG. 233). Illuminators 137a, 138a, 139a of each of 137-139, backlight of each of reels 110-112).

With such a configuration, the error can be more reliably noticed through hearing and sight.

Further, a first effect means capable of executing a first effect (for example, the first upper lamp 142a) is provided, and the first effect means is during the first period during the execution of the first effect. It may be means for continuously executing the first effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game even when the error is being reported, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error.

Further, a second effect means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a second upper lamp 142b) is provided, and the second effect means is during the second effect during the first period. It may be means for not executing the second effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, there is a case where a store clerk nearby can notice the occurrence of an error before the player calls the store clerk, and the error can be dealt with quickly.

Further, the notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speaker) is a means capable of executing a third effect, and the notifying means is capable of executing the third effect during the first period. It may be means for continuing to execute the third effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game even when the error is being reported, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error.

Further, the notification means is means for not executing the third effect during the second period when the second error is detected while the third effect is being executed during the first period. may

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk of the game parlor by not executing the effect.

Further, when the second error is detected during the second period, the notification means executes the second error notification without going through the execution of the first error notification. may

With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly respond to the error by not performing the first error notification.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 230) includes notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 230, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. The first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b shown in 233, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112, and the reel 110 shown in FIG. 112), wherein the notifying means detects the first error notification (for example, the first error notification shown in FIG. 233(b)) can be executed, and a second error notification (for example, FIG. 233(c ) is a means capable of executing a second error notification shown in ), the first error notification is a notification that the detected error is the second error, and the second error notification The error notification is notification capable of specifying that the detected error is the second error, and the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification. It is a playground to play.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. When a person causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error may make the person uneasy and discourage the person from committing the fraudulent act. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk. Further, since the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification, after noticing the occurrence of the error by the first error notification, the error is dealt with according to the second error notification having a large amount of information. and respond quickly and appropriately to errors.

Further, the second error notification may be notification including the first error notification.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk with the minimum necessary information.

In addition, the second error notification (for example, an opaque background image with a character string "selector error, number of medals passed error" shown in FIG. 237(c)) is the same as the first error notification (for example, More detailed content than the opaque (non-transparent) background image with the character string "selector error" shown in FIG. Identifiable content) may be included in the error notification.

With such a configuration, it is possible to specify the location of the error by the second error notification, and it is possible to appropriately deal with the error. In addition, after preparing for the occurrence of an error with the first error notification, it is possible to deal with the error with the second error notification, so it is possible to quickly respond to the error. Become. Also, the contents of the corresponding error can be recognized at the timing when the store clerk of the game shop called by the player checks the game machine.

Further, the notification means executes the first error notification when a fourth error (for example, a door open error) is detected during the first period, and executes the first error notification after the first period. Only the first error notification may be continuously executed during the two periods.

With such a configuration, if the player wants to give priority to time, such as when the store is about to close, it may be possible to continue the game in the case of a minor error.

Further, the player can continue playing the game during the second period after the fourth error is detected during the first period, and the second error is detected during the first period. The player may not be able to continue playing the game during the second period of time.

With such a configuration, the game can be continued with respect to minor errors, and the degree of importance of the error can be notified to the player or the store clerk depending on whether or not the game can be continued. can be done.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 230) is a game machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means First display (for example, operation instruction display SD and total win number display GD shown in FIGS. 233(a) and 235(a), display of set number of AT, display of initial game number of AT, AT additional game number, display of the number of executions of operation navigation, display of points and items acquired by the player, display of the number of game media paid out), and the first display is game information. , and the display means is a first error display (for example, a translucent display with a character string "An error has occurred" shown in FIGS. 233(b) and 235(b). background image), and the first error display means that the second error (for example, the number of medals passed or the number of medals passed) is displayed during the first period (for example, the period of one game). The first error display is performed when the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. The game machine is characterized in that the player can visually recognize the first display even if the game is played.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed, the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error.

Note that "a player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed" means that at least a part of the first display is visible. A case in which at least part of one error display overlaps at least part of the first display is also included.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 230) is a game machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means First display (for example, operation instruction display SD and total win number display GD shown in FIGS. 233(a) and 235(a), display of set number of AT, display of initial game number of AT, AT additional game number, display of the number of executions of operation navigation, display of points and items acquired by the player, display of the number of game media paid out), and the first display is game information. , and the display means is a first error display (for example, a translucent display with a character string "An error has occurred" shown in FIGS. 233(b) and 235(b). background image), and the first error display means that the second error (for example, the number of medals passed or the number of medals passed) is displayed during the first period (for example, the period of one game). The first error display is performed when the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. that the player can visually recognize the first display even if the error is detected, and the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved in the second period after the first period. It is a game table characterized by

It should be noted that ``during the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved'' means that the first display overlaps the error display, etc. In addition to the case where it is displayed and the game cannot proceed, the case where all the display areas of the display means are overlapped with an error display etc. and the game cannot proceed, or alternatively (or in addition) , when the operation of the operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139) becomes invalid and the game cannot proceed, when an error sound is output from the sound output means and the game cannot proceed, or when the light emitting means This also includes the case where light is emitted to indicate an error and the game cannot proceed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed, the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error. Also, during the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved. It is possible to eliminate the error.

Also, the first display may be invisible during a second period after the first period.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, and the player can call the game parlor clerk during the second period to deal with the error. .

Also, the first period may be a period during which a game can proceed.

With such a configuration, at least the game can be continued, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, the game information may be information that instructs the operation of the player.

With such a configuration, the game can be continued based on the game information, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, the first error display is a display having transparency, and the above-mentioned "a player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed" The first error indication may overlap the first indication.

With such a configuration, while the first error notification is displayed in front, the player can visually recognize the first display in the back, so that the player can play the game even under the condition that the error occurs. The game can be continued, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error.

In addition, the display means can display a second error display (for example, an opaque background image with a character string "Error in the number of passed medals" shown in Figs. 233(c) and 235(c)). and the second error display is non-transparent display, and the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. , the second error display is executed without executing the first error display during the second period, and the above-mentioned "the first display becomes invisible" means that the first The display may be overlapped with the second error display.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, but during the second period, the second error display is overlapped before the first display. By doing so, the first display becomes invisible, so that the player can call the store clerk of the game parlor to deal with the error.

Further, sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277) are provided, the sound output means is means capable of outputting a certain sound (for example, background sound), and the sound output means is capable of outputting during the first period When the second error is detected while the certain sound is being output, the certain sound may be continuously output.

With such a configuration, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited by the occurrence of the error. can.

Further, the sound output means is means capable of outputting an error sound, and when the second error is detected while the sound output means is outputting the certain sound during the first period, the The error sound may be output without outputting the certain sound during the second period.

With such a configuration, while the player can continue playing the game during the first period, an error sound is output during the second period, thereby discouraging the player from playing the game parlor. You can call us and deal with the error.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first period" and the "second period" according to the present invention are not limited to consecutive periods. When that has elapsed (eg, after 3 seconds have passed since the reels 110-112 have stopped), a second time period may begin.

In addition, the start timing of the second period is not particularly limited, but when game media are to be paid out, a second error notification is sent before paying out in order to prevent fraudulent payouts by fraudulent players. preferably.

In addition, the "notification indicating that an error has been detected" is not limited to display notification (in this example, the display of "an error has occurred"), notification by sound, notification by light emission, notification by movement of the movable body It may be a notification or the like.

Also, "the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification" means, for example, that there are multiple types of errors classified into multiple categories (insertion error, payout error, winning error, etc.). In this case, in the first error notification, only the error category (e.g., payout error) is notified, and in the second error report, the error category and name (e.g., payout error: medal payout error 1) are notified. case is included.

Also, for example, in the first error notification, only the name of the error (for example, medal payout error 1) is notified, and in the second error report, the error name and cancellation method (for example, medal payout error 1: remove medals , please operate the error release switch).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). When a start lever operation) is received, rotation is started, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation by a stop button described later), the propriety of internal winning of multiple types of hands is determined by lottery. Then, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop. This game machine advances a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, game media are paid out and the game is terminated, and if the game is not met, the game is terminated without paying out the game media.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 239 to 243. FIG. 239 to 243 are used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 239 to 243 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 239 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals from a medal payout device (not shown) (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket).

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Refill production / overview>
Next, an overview of the “refill effect” that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (slot machine in this example) provides a first grant effect for granting a privilege, and the first grant effect in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed. A second giving effect (refilling effect) of giving the same kind of privilege as the given privilege can be executed. In addition, in the first giving effect and the second giving effect, it is possible to display the privilege display regarding the privilege given to the player.

Here, the "privilege" according to the present invention means a profit advantageous to the player, such as points, items, bonuses, AT, addition of AT games, mini games, payout of game media (medals), Operation navigation, internal winning of prizes, prize winning, special effects, etc. correspond to this. In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention is a display related to a privilege granted to a player, for example, a display including points, a display including items, and an operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of operation means. This includes a display including the number of operation instructions indicating the number of executions, a display announcing an AT-additional game, a display announcing the provision of a bonus, and the like.

Examples of the "display including points" include a display including numbers and character strings such as "+10" indicating the number of points given, and a display including numbers and character strings such as "0010/1000" indicating the number of accumulated points. Applies to indications that include In addition, the "display including items" includes, for example, a display including an image showing the given item (for example, an image imitating the appearance of fruits such as bananas, apples, grapes, etc.), and a display including characters indicating the given item. (For example, a display including a character string such as "banana", "apple", "grape", etc.). Further, as the "operation navigation suggesting the operation mode of the operation means", for example, symbols or character strings such as "←", "right center left", "321" suggesting reverse pressing of the stop buttons 137 to 139. For example, "15 times", "●● (* represents 2 times)", etc. Applies to indications that include

<Refill production / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, Example 1 of the “refill effect” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) are executed, and the same type of privilege is performed in the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) (in this example, bananas of the first value).

Here, the point-specific state effect is a progress effect that may progress for each game, and in this example, is continuously executed over a plurality of games (at least 10 games), and This is an effect in which items are always given in the game. In addition, the "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may not be continuous games (may be discontinuous games), and items may not be awarded in any game. There may be.

FIG. 240(a) is a diagram showing items given in the point specialization state rendering and the points corresponding to each item.

The item in this example is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of points (values). Also, in this example, there are a plurality of types of groups, and one type of group, "banana", is a group (item) to which points (values) of 10, 20, or 30 are given. Another type of group, “apples,” is a group (item) to which points (values) of 30, 40, or 50 are given. is a group (item) to which either 100, 200 or 300 points (value) are given.

The points (second value) that can be given by the item "grape" in this example are either 100, 200, or 300, and any of the points that can be given by the item "apple" (first points of value greater than 30, 40, or 50, which is the value). Needless to say, the type and number of items (groups) and the type and number of points given by each item (group) are not limited to this example.

FIG. 240(b) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of the first addition effect in the point specialization state effect.

The state shown in FIG. 240(b)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect has been started in an N (N is a positive integer) game, and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted. .

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display suggesting the number of remaining games for the effect (in this example, a display including the character string “remaining 10G”) and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string “0000/1000”) ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 240(b)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N game.

In this example, N games are started with the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135, and since one game has been completed, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is changed from "remaining 10 G". It is updated to "Remaining 9G".

Also, since the item (privilege) "banana" was granted in the N game, a privilege display SP1 (in this example, displaying an image imitating the appearance of a banana) suggests the item (privilege) granted to the player. running

The method of selecting one item from a plurality of types of items is not particularly limited. You can select items.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 240(b)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N game.

In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ends the N game, so the privilege display suggests points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" given to the player. SP2 (in this example, a display including a character string "+10" suggesting that 10 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 10 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0000/1000" to "0010/1000".

In addition, in this example, when the number of points acquired by the player reaches 1000, in the performance (judgment performance) for judging whether or not to shift to AT, so that it is easy to shift to AT (If you win the AT lottery, to make it easier).

The method of selecting one point from a plurality of types of points included in the item is not particularly limited. For example, one point may be selected by lottery. A point may be selected based on

FIG. 240(c) is a diagram showing an example of a second addition effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 240(c)(1) is a state in which the point specializing state effect is continued in the N+1 game, and the state is before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "9 G left"), and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0010/1000"). ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 240(c)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+1 game.

In this example, the N+1 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 as a trigger, and one game is completed, but in the game in which the second giving effect (replacement effect) is executed, the progress effect is not allowed to progress. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 9G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the second grant effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the N+1 game executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item "banana" in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Since it is a game, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a second giving effect (refill effect), and is given to the player. The privilege display SP1 suggesting the item (privilege) "banana" (in this example, the display of an image simulating the appearance of a banana) is executed.

Note that the effect suggestion display RD is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a display such as "KEEP" or "LOCK" that suggests that the progress effect is not to proceed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 240(c)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+1 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+1 game is completed with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, the points (privileges) corresponding to the items (privileges) given to the player ) (in this example, a display including a character string “+10” indicating that 10 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 10 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0020/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the benefit granted in the first grant effect can be executed. Even in the game immediately after executing the first giving performance, the player's expectation for the privilege can be heightened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained from the first giving performance to the second giving performance. be able to.

In addition, in the second grant effect, in order to grant the privilege of the same value as the privilege granted in the first grant performance, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is granted in the second grant performance, and the game It is possible to give the player a sense of security and prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

Fig. 240 (c3') shows a case where the same item "banana" as in the first grant effect is granted in the second grant effect, but points (30 points) different from the first grant effect are granted. It is the figure which showed the example of.

In this example, a privilege display SP3 that suggests points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" granted to the player (in this example, the characters "+30" suggesting that 30 points have been granted) column) is executed, and since 30 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0040/1000".

According to this example, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of values, and the same group is selected again in the second giving effect, so if the value of the privilege given in the first giving effect is low Even so, in the second giving effect, the player can have a feeling of anticipation that a privilege with a greater value than that in the first giving effect may be given.

<Refill production / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, Example 2 of the “refill effect” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) are executed, and the same type of privilege is performed in the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) (In this example, the second value item "grape" which is higher in value than the first value item "banana") is given.

FIG. 241(a) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of the first addition effect in the point specialization state effect.

The state shown in FIG. 241(a)(1) is a state in which the point specializing state effect has been started in the N+2 game and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string “9G left”) and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string “0020/1000”). ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 241(a)(2) is the state after receiving the pressing operation of the start lever 135 in the N+2 game.

In this example, N+2 games are started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135, and since one game has been completed, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state effect is changed from "remaining 9G". It is updated to "Remaining 8G".

In addition, since the item (privilege) "grape" was granted in the N game, a privilege display SP4 (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the grape) suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" granted to the player display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 241(a)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+2 game.

In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ended the N+2 game, so the privilege display suggesting points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "grape" given to the player. SP5 (in this example, a display including a character string of "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0020/1000" to "0120/1000".

FIG. 241(b) is a diagram showing an example of the second addition effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 241(b)(1) is a state in which the point specializing state effect is continued in the N+3 game, and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "remaining 8G") and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0120/1000") ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 241(b)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+3 game.

In this example, the N+3 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 as a trigger, and one game is completed, but in the game in which the second giving effect (replacement effect) is executed, the progress effect is not allowed to progress. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the second grant effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the N+3 game is a game that executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (the item “grape” in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Therefore, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a second giving effect (refill effect), and the effect given to the player A privilege display SP4 suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" (in this example, displaying an image imitating the appearance of a grape) is executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 241(b)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+3 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+3 game is ended with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, A privilege display SP5 suggesting points (privileges) (in this example, a display including a character string "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0120/1000" to "0220/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the second benefit granted in the first grant effect is executed. Therefore, in the game immediately after executing the first imparting effect, the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value greater than the first value, can be increased, and the first imparting effect can be changed to the second privilege. The player's desire to play can be maintained over the two giving performances.

In addition, in the second grant effect, in order to grant the privilege of the same value as the privilege granted in the first grant performance, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is granted in the second grant performance, and the game It is possible to give the player a sense of security and prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

FIG. 241(c) is a diagram showing an example of the third addition effect (refill effect of refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 241(c)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N+4 game, and the operation of pressing the start lever 135 (lever ON) is not accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "8G remaining") and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0220/1000"). ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 241(c)(2) is the state after receiving the pressing operation of the start lever 135 in the N+4 game.

In this example, the N+4 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135, and one game is completed. Since the progress is not made, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the third imparting effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the third imparting effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In this example, an example is shown in which the progress effect is not progressed in the third grant effect. It may be configured to advance the progress effect in the refill effect of the effect).

In addition, in the N+4 game, a third grant effect (refill effect of refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item “grape” in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game) is performed. Since it is a game to be executed, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string of "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a third giving effect (refill effect of refill effect), A privilege display SP4 (in this example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of grapes) that suggests the item (privilege) granted to the player is executed.

In addition, the display mode of the effect suggesting display suggesting the third imparting effect and the effect suggesting effect display suggesting the second imparting effect may be different. ), a display including a character string of "Refill! Refill!" may be executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 241(c)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+4 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+4 game is ended with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, A privilege display SP6 suggesting points (privileges) (in this example, a display including a character string "+300" suggesting that 300 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 300 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0220/1000" to "0520/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the third grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the benefit granted in the second grant effect can be executed. Even in the game immediately after executing the second giving performance, the player's expectation for the privilege can be heightened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained from the second giving performance to the third giving performance. be able to.

In addition, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of values, and the same group is selected again in the third giving effect, so even if the value of the privilege given in the first giving effect is low In the third giving performance, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a privilege with a greater value than that in the first giving performance may be given.

<Refill production / Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 239) is a gaming machine equipped with display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157). A first giving effect (for example, FIG. 240 (b) (1) to the same figure that gives any one of the types of benefits (for example, 10 points for the item “banana” shown in FIG. 240 (a)) (b) The first giving effect shown in (3)) is a means capable of executing, and the display means displays a privilege related to the privilege given to the player (for example, in FIG. 240 (b) (2) and a privilege display SP2 shown in FIG. 240(b)(3), wherein the display means is means for displaying the first reward display SP2 shown in FIG. A second grant effect (for example, FIG. 240 (c) (1) to FIG. 240 (c) that grants the same type of benefit (for example, 10 points for the item “banana”) as the benefit granted in one grant effect It is a game machine characterized in that it is a means capable of executing (2nd given effect shown in (3)).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first giving effect is executed, the second giving effect to give the same kind of privilege as the privilege given in the first giving effect can be executed, even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's expectation is increased from the first grant effect to the second grant effect. It is possible to maintain the desire to play.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 239) is a gaming machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means displays a plurality of types of benefits. First giving effect (for example, FIG. 241 (a) (1) to (a) ( 3) is a means capable of executing the first giving effect shown in 3), and the display means is a privilege display relating to the privilege given to the player (for example, privilege display SP4 shown in FIG. 241 (a) (2)). , privilege display SP5 shown in FIG. 10 points of "banana") and a second type of privilege that is a second value greater than the first value (for example, 100 points of the item "grape" shown in FIG. 240 (a)), The display means provides the same type of privilege (for example, 100 points of the item “grape”) as the privilege given in the first giving effect in the game subsequent to the game in which the first giving effect is executed. 241 (b) (1) to (b) (3), which is a means capable of executing the second grant performance (for example, the second grant performance shown in FIG. 241 (b) (3)). be.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second benefit of the same type as the second benefit granted in the first grant effect is granted. can be executed, the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value greater than the first value, can be increased in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed. It is possible to keep the player's willingness to play from the second giving performance to the second giving performance.

In addition, the display means, in the game subsequent to the game in which the second imparting effect is executed, the privilege of the same type as the privilege imparted in the second imparting effect (for example, 300 points of the item "grape") 241(c)(1) to FIG. 241(c)(3)).

With such a configuration, in the game subsequent to the game in which the second imparting effect is executed, the third imparting effect of imparting the same type of privilege as the privilege imparted in the second imparting effect can be executed. Therefore, even in the game immediately after the execution of the second giving effect, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's willingness to play is increased from the second giving effect to the third giving effect. can be sustained.

Moreover, said 1st provision production|presentation may be the production|presentation which always provides the said privilege.

With such a configuration, the player will not be discouraged even if the second imparting effect is executed after the first imparting effect.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing a progress effect that may progress for each game (for example, a point specialization state effect shown in FIGS. 240 and 241), and the second imparting effect is executed. In the game, the progress effect may not progress.

With such a configuration, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the chances of granting the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so the second grant effect is executed. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game will be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing the second giving effect in the next game when the power is restored before the game next to the game in which the first giving effect was executed is started. may be

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to a player who has started a game when the amusement arcade opens.

Further, the privilege is composed of a group (for example, item "banana", "apple", or "grape") consisting of a plurality of types of values (for example, three types of points), and the above-mentioned "first The "same type as the privilege given in the giving effect" may refer to one type of group selected again from among the plurality of types of groups.

With such a configuration, even when the value of the privilege given in the first giving performance is low, the second giving performance gives a privilege with a greater value than the first giving performance. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that it may be possible.

Moreover, said 2nd provision production|presentation may be production|presentation which provides the said privilege of the same value (for example, point) as the said privilege provided by said 1st provision production|presentation.

With such a configuration, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is given even in the second giving performance, so that the player can be given a sense of security and the player's willingness to play can be reduced. can be prevented from occurring.

Further, the privilege may include points, and the privilege display may be a display including the points (for example, privilege display SP2 shown in FIG. 240(b)(3)).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first giving effect, the player's expectation for re-giving points can be increased, and the first giving effect can be changed to the second giving effect. It is possible to keep the player's desire to play for a long time.

Further, the privilege may include an item, and the privilege display may be a display including the item (for example, privilege display SP1 shown in FIG. 240(b)(2)).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first grant effect, the player's expectation for re-delivery of the item can be heightened, and the first grant effect can be changed to the second grant effect. It is possible to keep the player's desire to play for a long time.

Further, an operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 239) is provided, the privilege includes operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of the operation means, and the privilege display indicates the number of times the operation navigation is executed. The display may include the number of operation instructions to be displayed.

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first imparting effect, the player's expectation for the operation navigation can be increased, and from the first imparting effect to the second imparting effect, It is possible to keep the player's desire to play.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "privileges" according to the present invention are not limited to items or points, and include, for example, bonuses, ATs, AT game additions, mini games, game media (medal) payouts, operation navigation, inside prizes Winning, winning a prize, special performance, or the like may be used.

In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention may be a display related to benefits, such as a display that foretells that a privilege will be granted, or a false notice that a privilege will be granted (a false notice that does not actually grant a privilege). Alternatively, it may be a display (tutorial display) or the like that explains the content of the privilege.

In addition, the "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to a point-specific effect, and may be, for example, a game section effect in which the number of AT-added games can be obtained, or a special winning role can be won. It may be a production of a game section or the like.

Also, the "value" according to the present invention is not limited to points, and may be, for example, the ease of transitioning to an advantageous state, the number of game media paid out, the winning percentage of mini games, and the like.

<Disbursement after power outage / overview>
Next, an overview of "payout after power failure and power recovery" that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

A gaming machine (slot machine in this example) according to the present embodiment includes payout means capable of executing payout of game media, and sound output means capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the game media. Further, the payout means is capable of executing the rest of the payout when power is restored during execution of the payout of game media, and the sound output means is capable of executing the rest of the payout by the payout means. is configured so as not to output the payout sound. Further, the sound output means is capable of outputting a background sound, and is configured not to output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means.

Here, the ``payout means'' according to the present invention means a means capable of paying out game media (for example, medals). Apparatus, etc. fall under this category. The 'sound output means' is a means capable of outputting sound such as payout sound and background sound, and corresponds to, for example, a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 239, a musical instrument, and the like.

The “payout sound” corresponds to, for example, a sound effect such as “charin” that is output in accordance with the payout of game media, or a voice such as “medals are being paid out”. Also, the "background sound" corresponds to, for example, BGM that is output together with effects using lamps or the like, effect sounds for livening up the game, and the like.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes display means capable of displaying a return display after power is turned on, and a period during which the return display is displayed by the display means is a silent period during which no sound is output by the sound output means. , the payout means executes the remainder of the payout in the silent period.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention is means capable of displaying a return display after power-on, and corresponds to, for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 or the like. Further, the "recovery display" according to the present invention is a display suggesting that it is a period (recovering) from after power is restored to the slot machine to when the normal game can be started. This includes a display including character strings such as "medium" and "please wait for a while", and a display in which the entire display area is set to a certain color (for example, black or white).

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment includes payout display means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out, and the payout display means displays the payout amount during execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. Execute the display of the number of payouts.

Here, the "payout display means" according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out. . Note that the payout display means is not limited to the 7-segment (SEG) display, and may be other display means such as a liquid crystal display device.

<Payment after power failure / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 242, Example 1 of “payout after power failure and power recovery” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payouts before and after the power is cut off and restored to the slot machine.

Here, the "display device" in the figure is display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157), the "speaker" is sound output means, and the lamp is light output means capable of outputting light ( In this example, it is a side lamp (decorative lamp) 144) shown in FIG. The payout number display is payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 239), and the payout device is payout means (payout device not shown in this example).

Before the power interruption shown in FIG. 242(b), the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the settlement button 134 is pressed, a background display is displayed on the display device, a background sound is output from the speaker, and light is output from the lamp in a normal light emission mode. Further, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the display for the number of tokens to be paid out, and since medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is non-payout.

The state shown in FIG. 242(a) is a state in which a pressing operation of the settlement button 134 is accepted during a game and payout of betted medals is started. This state may be a state in which a winning combination is won in a certain game, a third stop operation is accepted, and payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is started.

In this example, the state of the payout device is changed from the non-payout state to the payout state when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, and the payout device starts to pay out the medals, and the payout device also pays out the medals. During the period, a sound to be played (for example, a sound effect of "charin") is output from the speaker.

In addition, the number of payout display device displays the number by subtracting 1 in the order of 50→49→48→47→... each time one medal is paid out by the payout device.

It should be noted that the background display by the display device, the background sound output by the speaker, and the light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp are all continued during the medal payout period.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 242(b) is a state in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which power supply to the slot machine 100 is interrupted).

In this state, since the power supply to various devices is stopped, background display by the display device, background sound output by the speaker, light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp, payout number display by the payout number indicator, and payout The payout of medals by the device will be in a state where none are executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 242(c) is the power recovery state (the power supply to the slot machine 100 is restarted).

In this example, when the power is restored, the return display is started on the display device, and the display period of the return display is a silent period during which no sound is output from the speaker.

In addition, during this silent period, the rest of the payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 46 medals) is executed by the payout device, and the number of payout display is displayed each time one medal is paid out by the payout device. , 46->45->...3->2->1. After the payout of all medals is completed, the state of the payout device is changed from the payout state to the non-payout state, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number 0 is displayed on the payout number display.

According to this example, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout means by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound and the background sound, it is possible to check whether the payout means is operating normally outside business hours. To easily confirm whether or not a player is wrong by an operation sound, and to prevent a fraudulent act by allowing a store clerk of a game parlor to notice the occurrence of fraudulent payout by a fraudulent person during business hours. becomes possible.

In addition, since the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed by the payout number indicator, the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

In addition, as in the case of a power failure and power recovery, even after the power is turned on, the operating sound of the payout means can be confirmed in a silent state. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 242(d) is a state in which the game can be started after power is restored.

In this example, when it becomes possible to start a game after the power is restored, instead of the return display by the display device, the background display before the power failure is resumed, the background sound is output by the speaker, and the normal sound is generated by the lamp. By restarting the output of the light in the light emission mode, the state before the power failure is restored.

<Payment after power failure / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, Example 2 of “payout after power failure and power recovery” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payout and error notification before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine. 242(a) to 242(c), description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, in addition to the contents of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. device) may output an error sound during the remaining execution of the payout.

Errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 include door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM errors, winning errors, and the like.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number of medals or more is delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error cancellation switch is received.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, but can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

The state shown in FIG. 243(e) is a state in which an error is detected during recovery display after power restoration.

In this example, since a door open error or a hopper empty error was detected during recovery display after power restoration, instead of recovery display, an error display is performed on the display device, an error sound is output from the speaker, and a lamp is displayed. is outputting light in an error light emission mode.

Even when an error is detected, the payout of medals by the payout device and the display of the number of payouts by the payout number display are both continued.

The mode of error display by the display device is not particularly limited, but for example, an error display that notifies the content of the error by a character string (for example, a character string such as "Door open error occurred!", "Hopper empty error occurred!" error display), error display prompting error resolution (for example, display including a character string such as "Please call a clerk"), and error display showing an error with a still image or video.

In addition, the mode of the error sound by the speaker is not particularly limited. This includes an error sound (for example, a voice or warning sound such as "Please call the store clerk") that prompts to eliminate the problem.

In addition, the error light emission mode of the lamp is not particularly limited. , the lighting of an error-dedicated lamp, etc.

According to this example, the operation sound of the payout means not accompanied by the payout sound overlaps with the output timing of the error sound, so that the game store clerk more reliably notices that the fraudulent payout has occurred. becomes possible.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 243(f) is a state in which the cause of the error has been eliminated and the error has been cancelled.

In this example, the error display by the display device, the output of the error sound by the speaker, and the output of the light in the error light emission mode by the lamp are all stopped, while the recovery display is resumed on the display device.

<Disbursement/summary after power failure/recovery>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 239) includes a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out game media (for example, medals), A game machine provided with sound output means (e.g., a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, wherein the payout means is powered off and restored during the payout of the game medium. the sound output means does not output the payout sound while the payout means is executing the rest of the payout (while the payout means is operating) The gaming machine is characterized in that it is a means for not outputting an audio signal of a sound, or temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal of a payout sound while outputting the audio signal.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound, the clerk of the game parlor can confirm that the payout means operates normally outside business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that the illegal payout has been made by the fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. It becomes possible to

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 239) includes a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of executing payout of game media (for example, medals), and a game medium payout unit. and a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound (for example, a sound effect of "charin") during a period, wherein the payout means is during the payout of the game medium. means for executing the rest of the payout in the event of a power failure and power recovery, and the sound output means outputs the payout sound while the rest of the payout is being performed by the payout means (while the payout means is operating). Means that does not output (for example, does not output the sound signal of the payout sound, temporarily blocks (mutes) the sound signal while outputting the sound signal), and the sound output means is an error (for example, , a door open error for informing the opening of the door of the game table, and a hopper empty error for payout), and the sound output means is capable of outputting an error sound for announcing the payout by the payout means during the rest of the payout. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is means for outputting the error sound.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound, the clerk of the game parlor can confirm that the payout means operates normally outside business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that the illegal payout has been made by the fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. It becomes possible to In addition, by overlapping the output timing of the error sound with the operation sound of the payout means that is not accompanied by the payout sound, it is possible for the store clerk to more reliably notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred. Become.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting background sound (for example, BGM), and the sound output means does not output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means (for example, Means for not outputting the audio signal of the background sound or temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal of the background sound while outputting the audio signal of the background sound may be used.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without background sound, so that the staff of the game parlor can check whether the payout means is operating normally outside business hours. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that an illegal payout has been made by a fraudulent person, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. It becomes possible.

Further, display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a return display after power-on is provided, and during the display period of the return display by the display means, no sound is output by the sound output means (for example, no sound is output). 242 and 243), and the payout means is , means for executing the remainder of said payout in said silent period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout means by the payout means in a silent state after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is in operation by the operation sound.

Further, a payout display means (e.g., a payout number display device) capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out is provided, and the payout display means displays the payout amount during execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. It may be a means for executing the display of the number of payouts.

With such a configuration, the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed, so the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

Further, the error may be a door open error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine.

With such a configuration, even if power is restored by a fraudulent person during business hours, the door open error sound may alert the store clerk of the fraudulent act.

Also, the error may be a payout error related to the payout.

With such a configuration, the store clerk can check both the operation of payout and the operation of error detection outside business hours, thereby enhancing convenience.

Further, a main control section and a sub-control section may be provided, the main control section may control the payout means and the payout display means, and the sub-control section may control the display means. good.

With such a configuration, when the recovery time of the main control unit is earlier than that of the sub-control unit after power failure or after power is turned on, the payout of game media and the display of the number of payouts can be started with priority. is possible, the game media can be paid out quickly, and the convenience can be enhanced.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, errors that can be notified by the sound output means are not limited to door open errors and hopper empty errors, but medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM defects, prize winning errors, and the like. There may be. Also, the payout error related to payout is not limited to the hopper empty error, and may be, for example, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, or the like.

Further, the "silent period" according to the present invention may be a period in which no sound is output by the sound output means. It may be a period during which it is cut off (muted).

Further, the "payout number display" according to the present invention is not limited to subtraction display (eg 50→49→...), and may be addition display (eg 1→2→...).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 244 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, three lines will be valid with the addition of the upper horizontal prize line and the lower horizontal prize line, and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right Five lines, ie, a downward pay line and an upward pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect. The reel panel lamp 128 of the present embodiment may indicate the result of the internal winning combination lottery process by the light emission color.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted is a "three bet game," a game in which two medals are inserted is a "two bet game," and a game in which one medal is inserted. is sometimes referred to as "one bet game".

Note that the bet button 132 of the present embodiment functions as a button for inserting a predetermined number of credits, and may also be used as an effect button.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as a effect device that executes effects described later.

The information display button 191 is an operation button for calling and operating a user menu (for example, a menu for setting various information for individual players). The information display button 191 is composed of a cross key button 191a and an OK button 191b. The cross key button 191a is a selection button used when the player selects one of a plurality of options. The cross key button 191a is composed of up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and the cursor can be moved in the direction of the arrow by operating the respective arrow keys. The OK button 191b is a button for confirming an option on which the cursor is positioned. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of information setting by the user menu, in the case of volume setting, light amount setting, etc., it is used in the character (stage) selection of the effect executed after winning the bonus prize.

The production button 192 is a button that becomes operable when executing an production prompting the operation of the button. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 192 is operated, as a response effect, a effect suggesting awarding of a privilege, notification of an internal winning combination in the internal winning combination lottery process, effect related to character selection, and the like are executed.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the information display button 191 sensor, the performance button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A driving circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127 is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each reel 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 246(a). In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 246(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are bonus combinations that shift to the bonus game, and the replay (replay) is repeated without inserting new medals. Winning hands may be distinguished from winning hands and may be called "working hands" as the hands that can be played. is included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7)-BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" for BB1 and "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7)-BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating internal winning is set is maintained until the next game and thereafter, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2. The combination "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also called bonus)-RB symbol-RB symbol". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not based on the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. A regular bonus game may be started later, and the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started.

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbols The combination is "cherry pattern-ANY pattern-ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for the replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each role is obtained by combining numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role with numerical data within the range of random numbers acquired during internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). It is obtained by the value divided by The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination that is internally won at the same time as watermelon or cherry. It should be noted that the bonus combination may be a simultaneous winning combination with the replay, or may be a simultaneous winning combination with the chance. In addition, since a difference in winning probability is provided for each set value for a simultaneous winning combination that internally wins a bonus combination and a cherry, and a simultaneous winning combination that simultaneously wins a bonus combination and a watermelon, the simultaneous winning combination is notified. help the player guess the setting.

In the present embodiment, watermelon and cherry are respectively won when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. Further, Bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a pushing role. It should be noted that a configuration may be provided with a so-called common bell that wins prizes regardless of the order of stop operations.

The AT state is a game state in which information (details of stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the player wins an internal win for a chance combination or a push-up combination. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 are used to execute the operation navigation for informing the content of the stop operation to help win a prize. Specifically, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the timing of the stop operation (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the details of the stop operation of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which operation navigation is not executed even if the player wins internally for a chance combination or a push-up combination.

In this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state is shifted to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on the result of an internal winning combination lottery. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games), the state is shifted to the AT state. In other words, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state, and the predetermined AT game number or the AT game determined by lottery etc. number is given. In the AT state, an AT add-on lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the given AT game numbers are consumed, the AT state ends and shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 in accordance with the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number obtained in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 248) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 247 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 249(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 249(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 249(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 249(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 249(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 249(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 250(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 250(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 250(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 250(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 250(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 250(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 250(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 250(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Playability>
Next, the game features common to the following Examples N1 to N4 will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect prompting the operation of a predetermined button (hereinafter referred to as an operation request effect) and a response effect when the predetermined button is operated when the operation request effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as an operation response effect ). Here, the predetermined buttons include, for example, the effect button 192, the cross key button 191a, the bet button 132, etc., but are not limited to these. The predetermined button may be any operation means provided at a position where the player can operate it.

As an example of the operation request effect, for example, in the AT state, an operation request effect prompting the user to operate the effect button 192 may be executed after the third stop operation. In this case, the number of given AT-additional games, which is the result of the AT-additional lottery, may be notified as the operation response effect.

As another example of the operation request effect, for example, in a game in which a bonus combination is won (hereinafter referred to as a bonus winning game), an operation request effect prompting the user to operate the effect button 192 may be executed after the third stop operation. . In this case, as the operation response effect, when the effect button 192 is operated once, a winning combination notification effect is executed to notify the internal winning combination at the same time as the bonus combination, and when the effect button 192 is pressed for a long time. Then, a character selection effect is executed to select and notify a character appearing in the bonus effect executed in the bonus game. Hereinafter, as the operation response effect, the effect executed when the effect button 192 is operated once is referred to as the first operation response effect, and the effect performed when the effect button 192 is long-pressed is referred to as the second operation. It is sometimes called a response performance.

It should be noted that the "single operation" for a predetermined button in the present embodiment means that the detection time by a sensor that detects the operation of the predetermined button (the time from the start of the operation of the predetermined button to the end of the operation) is a predetermined time. A "long-pressing operation" refers to a case in which the detection time by a sensor that detects an operation of a predetermined button is equal to or longer than a predetermined time T1. Whether or not the predetermined time T1 or longer is determined by whether or not the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300 continues to detect the ON state (pressed state) for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the predetermined time T1.

<Example N1>
The operation request effect and the operation response effect of Example N1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 256. FIG.

FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the AT game, and shows an effect example when the effect button 192 is operated once. Since one game shown in FIG. 251 is a game in which the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the slot machine 100 executes operation navigation from the start lever operation to the third stop operation, and displays an effect image. The device 157 displays an image d1 showing the correct stopping operation order.

After the third stop operation, the slot machine 100 executes an operation request effect and displays an image d2 prompting the operation of the effect button 192. - 特許庁In the state where the image d2 is displayed, when the player operates the effect button 192 once, the slot machine 100 executes the operation response effect, and the effect image display device 157 displays the result of the AT addition lottery, An image d3 showing the number of games with added AT added is displayed. That is, the first operation response effect in this case is a effect related to the privilege.

Thus, in the AT game of the embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect after the third stop operation, and the first operation response effect based on one operation of the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect. is set to run.

In FIG. 8, the case where the operation response effect is executed when the player operates the effect button 192 once has been described, but the operation response effect is executed when the player presses the effect button 192 for a long time. may

FIG. 252 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and shows an effect example when the effect button 192 is operated once.

The slot machine 100 executes a bonus winning effect based on the third stop operation, and displays an image d10 indicating the bonus winning effect on the effect image display device 157. FIG. Next, the slot machine 100 executes a bonus congratulatory effect when the display of the image d10 ends, and displays an image d11 congratulating the winning of the bonus on the effect image display device 157. FIG.

After displaying the image d11 for a predetermined period of time, the slot machine 100 executes an operation request effect, and displays an image d12A prompting one operation of the effect button 192 on the effect image display device 157. FIG. The image d12A is an image displaying a message to the effect that when the effect button 192 is operated once, a bonus combination and an internally won combination (watermelon, cherry) will be announced at the same time. In the state where the image d12A is displayed, when the player operates the effect button 192 once, the slot machine 100 executes the winning combination notification effect as the first operation response effect. Specifically, the winning combination notification effect is such that the effect image display device 157 displays an image d13 of words indicating attention to the reel panel lamps 128, and the reel panel lamps 128 are displayed in a predetermined color ( For example, green for watermelons, red for cherries, etc.). That is, the first operation response effect is a effect related to a privilege. The privilege in this case is the notification of the winning combination, but is not limited to this as long as the notification is related to the player's privilege. For example, notification of pseudo bonus, transition to AT state, addition of AT game, transition to specialized zone, etc. may be used.

In the image example shown in FIG. 252, only the image d12A prompting one operation is displayed. After that, an image d12B prompting a long press operation of the effect button 192 is displayed. Henceforth, when describing including both the image d12A and the image d12B, it may be described as the image d12.

Further, in this embodiment, if the effect button 192 is operated once during the predetermined time period during which the image d11 is displayed, the operation of the effect button 192 is not accepted. In other words, the operation to the effect button 192 is effective after the operation request effect is started.

As described above, in the bonus winning game of the embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect after the lapse of the predetermined time after the third stop operation, and the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect is operated once. The first operation response effect is executed based on.

FIG. 253 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and shows an effect example when the effect button 192 is pressed for a long time. Since the bonus prize effect is the same as in FIG. 252, FIG. 253 shows an effect example after the third stop operation.

After displaying the image d11 for a predetermined period of time, the slot machine 100 executes an operation request effect, displays an image d12A prompting the effect image display device 157 to operate the effect button 192 once, and then presses the effect button 192 for a long time. A prompting image d12B is displayed. The image d12B is an image in which a message is displayed to the effect that a random lottery will be made for a bonus effect character when the effect button 192 is pressed for a long time. In the state where the image d12A or the image d12B is displayed, when the player operates the effect button 192 once (when the pressing time is less than the predetermined time T1), the slot machine 100 responds as the first operation response effect. A winning combination notification effect is executed. The winning combination notification effect is as described with reference to FIG. 252 above.

Subsequently, when the player continues to operate the effect button 192 and performs a long press operation (when the pressing time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time T1), the slot machine 100 responds to the first operation response effect being executed. is terminated, and a character selection effect is executed as a second operation response effect. In the character selection effect, the effect image display device 157 displays an image d14 showing a character selected by random lottery from among a plurality of characters. Hereinafter, the character selection effect automatically selected by the random lottery may be referred to as the character selection effect by the random lottery. That is, the second operation response effect is an effect of setting information related to the game. In the character selection effect by random lottery, specifically, one character is determined by random lottery from among three characters (for example, a lord, a princess, and an old man).

As described above, in the bonus winning game of the embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect after the lapse of the predetermined time after the third stop operation, and the operation of the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect is performed. In the case where the pressing time of the effect button 192 is less than the predetermined time T1, first, the first operation response effect is executed, and then the second operation is performed during the period of T1 or more. It is designed to execute a response production. In other words, the player can enjoy both the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect when performing a long press operation on the effect button 192 .

In the operation request effect shown in FIG. 10, the image d12A that prompts the user to operate the effect button 192 once is first displayed, and then the image d12B that prompts the long press operation of the effect button 192 is displayed. can be That is, the image d12B prompting the long press operation of the effect button 192 may be displayed first, and then the image d12A prompting the single operation of the effect button 192 may be displayed.

FIG. 254 is a diagram showing a high-level concept of the effect outline of one game shown in FIGS. 251-253. Here, the first game in FIG. 254 corresponds to the AT game, and the second game in FIG. 254 corresponds to the bonus winning game. Also, the first period indicates a period that starts immediately after the third stop operation, and the second period indicates a period that starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the third stop operation. there is

FIG. 254(a) is a diagram showing an outline of effects in the first game. FIG. 254(a) is the first period of the first game, that is, in the period immediately started after the third stop operation during the AT game, when one operation to the effect button 192 is performed, It shows that the first operation response effect corresponding to one operation is executed in the first period (see FIG. 8).

FIG. 254(b) is a diagram showing an overview of the effect in the second game, and shows a case where the effect button 192 is operated once. FIG. 254(b) shows the first period of the second game, that is, the period immediately after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game (specifically, the period during which the bonus blessing effect is executed). , indicates that when the effect button 192 is operated once, the first operation response effect corresponding to the one-time operation is not executed in the first period (see FIG. 9). In other words, the slot machine 100 does not accept the operation for the effect button 192 during the period during which the bonus blessing effect is being executed (not during the operation effective period of the effect button 192), so the first operation response effect is not executed. In addition, FIG. 254(b) shows the second period of the second game, that is, the period started after the lapse of a predetermined period of time from the third stop operation of the bonus winning game (specifically, the operation request effect is executed). If the effect button 192 is operated once during the time period), the first operation response effect corresponding to the one-time operation is executed in the second period (see FIG. 9). . That is, the slot machine 100 accepts an operation to the effect button 192 during the period during which the operation request effect is being executed (which is the effective period of operation of the effect button 192), so the first operation response effect is executed.

FIG. 254(c) is a diagram showing an outline of the effect in the second game, and shows a case where the effect button 192 is pressed for a long time. FIG. 254(c) shows the first period of the second game, that is, the period immediately after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game (specifically, the period during which the bonus blessing effect is executed). , indicates that when a long press operation is performed on the effect button 192, the second operation response effect corresponding to the long press operation is not executed in the first period (see FIG. 10). That is, since the slot machine 100 does not accept an operation for the effect button 192 during the period during which the bonus blessing effect is being executed (the first period is not the operation effective period of the effect button 192), the second operation response effect do not run In addition, FIG. 254(b) shows the second period of the second game, that is, the period started after the lapse of a predetermined period of time from the third stop operation of the bonus winning game (specifically, the operation request effect is executed). In the second period, when a long press operation is performed on the effect button 192, first, in the second period, a first operation response effect corresponding to the one-time press is executed, and then the long press operation is performed. It shows that the second operation response effect is executed (see FIG. 10). That is, since the slot machine 100 accepts an operation to the effect button 192 during the period during which the operation request effect is being executed (the second period is the operation effective period of the effect button 192), the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect are sequentially executed.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing outlines of modifications of the operation request effect and the operation response effect described in Example N1, and show image examples of the effect image display device 157. FIG. In the embodiment N1 described above, the first game is the AT game and the second game is the bonus winning game, but the first game and the second game are not limited to this. For example, the first game is "game without notice", the second game is "game with notice", a blank period exists after the third stop operation, and the first period starts after the blank period ends. (Modification 1). In other words, the first game period may be a period that starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the third stop operation. Note that the notification in Modification 1 means, for example, notification of the result of the internal winning combination lottery process.

255 is a diagram showing an overview of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the first game of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 255 shows that after the third stop operation, while the background image d20 of the game without notice is being displayed, the blank period starts first, and after the blank period ends, the first period starts. there is The first period in the first game is the period during which the operation request effect is executed. The operation request effect in the modified example 1 is an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 192. Specifically, after displaying an image d21A prompting the long-press operation of the effect button 192 on the effect image display device 157, the effect button This is an effect of displaying an image d21B prompting the one-time pressing operation of 192 . In Modified Example 1, first, an image d21A prompting a long-press operation is displayed, and then an image d21B prompting a single-press operation is displayed.

When the effect button 192 is long-pressed during the first period, the slot machine 100 executes a stage selection effect and displays a stage selection screen d22 on the effect image display device 157. FIG. More specifically, the stage selection screen d22 is a screen for selecting one of the Yoshimune stage, the grandpa stage, and the princess stage based on the player's operation. The player's operation is, specifically, the operation of the cross key button 191 a and the OK button 191 b of the information display button 191 . In the stage selection screen d22, when the player selects and confirms a stage using the cross key button 191a and the OK button 191b, the stage selected in the bonus game is rendered. That is, the stage selection effect is the second operation response effect in Modification 1, and is an effect for setting information related to the game.

On the other hand, when the effect button 192 is pressed once during the first period, the slot machine 100 executes the volume/light amount adjustment effect, and displays the sound volume/light amount adjustment screen on the effect image display device 157. Display d23. The sound volume/light amount adjustment screen d23 is a screen for setting sound volume adjustment or light amount adjustment based on the player's operation. The player's operation is, specifically, the operation of the cross key button 191 a and the OK button 191 b of the information display button 191 . When the player selects and confirms volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key button 191a and the OK button 191b on the volume/light intensity adjustment screen d23, the selected volume adjustment screen d24 or light intensity adjustment screen (not shown) is displayed. ) is displayed. On the volume adjustment screen d24 or the light intensity adjustment screen, the player uses the cross key button 191a and the OK button 191b to set desired volume or light intensity. That is, the sound volume/light amount adjustment effect is the first operation response effect in Modification 1, and is an effect for setting information related to the game.

As described above, in the game without advance notice of Modification 1 of Embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 executes the operation request effect in the first period after the blank time after the third stop operation has passed, and When the operation of the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect is performed, the stage selection effect (second operation response effect) is executed for the long press, and the volume - Execute the light amount adjustment effect (first operation response effect).

256 is a diagram showing an overview of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the second game of Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 256, after the third stop operation, while the background image d30 of the game with notice and the notice image d31 are being displayed, the blank period starts first, and after the blank period ends, the first period starts. It is shown that. The preview image d31 is an image showing the result of the internal winning combination lottery process of the game. Specifically, the color of the clothes of the appearing character indicates the result of the internal winning combination lottery process. For example, red clothing suggests winning a cherry, and green clothing suggests winning a watermelon.

In the second game, unlike the first game, the operation request effect is not displayed during the first period (during the first period, the operation of the effect button 192 is not valid). The first period in the second game is a period during which the image d31 is continuously displayed. In other words, in the second game, the image d31 is displayed for a longer period than in the first game, and the notification period is set longer in order to perform the display suggesting the result of the internal winning combination lottery process.

Subsequently, the second period started after the end of the first period is the period during which the operation request effect is executed. As in the first game, the operation request effect is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 192. Specifically, the effect image display device 157 displays an image d21A that prompts the player to press and hold the effect button 192. After that, the effect is to display an image d2B prompting the user to press the effect button 192 once. Since the content of the operation response effect in the second game is the same as that in the first game, the explanation is omitted.

As described above, in the game with notice of Modification 1 of Embodiment N1, the slot machine 100 continues to display the notice image d31 even in the first period after the blank time after the third stop operation has elapsed. , the operation request effect is executed in the second period after the end of the first period, and if the effect button 192 corresponding to the operation request effect is operated in the second period, executes a stage selection effect (second operation response effect), and when pressed once, executes a sound volume/light amount adjustment effect (first operation response effect).

In addition, in the game with notice of the modification 1, even if the operation to the effect button 192 is started in the first period, the operation to the effect button 192 is continued thereafter, and the long press operation is performed in the second period. is determined, the stage selection effect (second operation response effect) is executed in the second period. However, when the operation of the effect button 192 is started in the first period, even if the long press operation is determined in the second period, the stage selection effect (second operation response effect) is not executed. good too. That is, the stage selection effect (second operation response effect) may not be executed unless the long press operation is started during the second period.

Thus, according to the first modification, in the first game, the operation request effect is executed in the first period, and when the effect button 192 is operated once during the first period, the first is performed, and when a long press operation is performed on the effect button 192 during the first period, a second operation response effect is performed. Further, according to the modification 1, in the second game, the operation request effect is executed in the second period, and when the effect button 192 is operated once in the first period, the first An operation response effect is executed, and a second operation response effect is executed when a long press operation is performed on the effect button 192 during the first period. That is, in Modification 1, either one of the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect is executed in one game, and both are not executed.

In addition, in the first modification, the demonstration effect may be executed at the start of the first period in the first game, and the demonstration screen may be displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In this case, stage selection or volume/light amount adjustment may be performed on the demonstration screen. Further, a demonstration effect may be executed at the start of the second period in the second game, and a demo screen may be displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In this case, stage selection or volume/light amount adjustment may be performed on the demonstration screen.

Further, in the modified example 1, the game with notice is a game in which the winning combination is announced in the winning combination internal lottery process, but the notice is not limited to this. Any advance notice regarding a player's privilege may be used. For example, notice of pseudo bonus, transition to AT state, addition of AT game, transition to specialized zone, etc. may be used.

In the above embodiment N1, the operation request effect (image d2, image d12A, image d12B) is executed during the entire period during which the operation of the effect button 192 is valid, but only during a part of the period. may be executed. In this case, even when the operation request effect (image d2, image d12A, image d12B) is not being executed, the operation response effect may be executed as long as the operation of the effect button 192 is valid. .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment N1, the operation explanation in the operation request effect is given in words (see images d12A and d12B), but the one-time operation explanation image and the long-press operation image in the operation request effect may be changed ( For example, changing the display mode of a button by one-time operation and long-press operation).

In the above embodiment N1, the lighting state (for example, lighting, blinking, luminescent color, etc.) of the effect button 192 was not mentioned, but it can be designed as appropriate. For example, during the first period of the second game, since the performance button 192 cannot be operated, the performance button 192 may be turned off. In addition, when the period in which the one-time press operation is possible and the period in which the long-press operation is possible are separated, the effect button 192 lights up during the period in which the one-time press operation is possible and the period in which the long-press operation is possible. The states may be the same or may be different.

<Example N2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the operation request effect and the operation response effect of Example N2 will be described. FIG. 257 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game. In Example N2, the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game are partially different from those in Example N1. In the following, functions different from those of the embodiment N1 will be mainly described. That is, the parts having the same functions and the same processes as those described in Example N1 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In Example N2, there are three types of operation instructions for the operation request effect. The first operation explanation is an operation explanation for informing a simultaneous winning combination by operating the effect button 192 once, and an image d12A prompting the operation of the effect button 192 once is displayed. The second operation explanation is an operation explanation for randomly drawing a bonus character by pressing the effect button 192 for a long time, and an image d12B is displayed to prompt the user to press the effect button 192 for a long time. The third operation instruction is an operation instruction for selecting a character for a bonus effect by operating the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132, and an image d12C prompting the operation of the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132 is displayed.

In other words, in the operation request effect of Example N2, the third operation explanation is added to the operation request effect of Example N1. When the player operates the cross key button 191a (specifically, the left arrow key or the right arrow key) during execution of the operation request effect, the effect image display device 157 displays a character to be selected. is displayed (for example, the image d12C, which was the selection target with the character ``Mr. d15). Then, when the player operates the bet button 132, the character to be selected is determined, and the slot machine 100 displays an image d16 notifying that the character for the bonus effect has been determined. Hereinafter, as an operation response effect, the effect executed by operating the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132 will be referred to as a third operation response effect.

According to the embodiment N2, it is possible to select the character for the bonus effect by two methods. One is a method of automatically determining a character based on a long-pressing operation of the effect button 192. In this case, a character selection effect is executed by random lottery. The other is a method of determining a character based on the player's selection based on the operation of the cross key 191a and the bet button 132. In this case, the character selection effect is executed according to the player's selection. In any method, although the number of character options is the same (specifically, the three of lord, old man, and princess), different results may be obtained.

In addition, in the above embodiment N2, the character type determined by the second operation response effect and the character type determined by the third operation response effect are the same, but they may be different ( Modification 2).

258 is a diagram showing an outline of a modified example of the operation request effect and the operation response effect of Modified Example 2. FIG. The slot machine 100 may display an image d16 explaining the operation of the up arrow key after displaying the image d15 explaining the operation of the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132 on the effect image display device 157 . Then, when the player operates the up arrow key and operates the bet button 132, the slot machine 100 determines a rare character (for example, premier old man) that does not exist in the original options, and displays an effect image display device. In 157, an image d17 may be displayed to notify that a rare character has been determined.

According to Modified Example 2, in the third operation response effect, there are cases where an option that is not selected in the second operation response effect can be determined. be able to.

In the above embodiment N2, the first operation response effect is the winning combination notification effect, and the second operation response effect (and the third operation response effect) is the character selection effect. However, the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect (and the third operation response effect) are not limited to this, and the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect (and the third Operation response effects) may be different types of effects. For example, an effect in which the same type of effect develops, such as an advance notice step-up effect, is not a different kind of effect from each other, so it cannot be applied to the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect. In other words, the combination of the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect is not limited to the notification effect of notifying the privilege and the selection effect of selecting the option. , a selection effect, an explanation effect related to predetermined information, and the like.

In the above embodiment N2, when the effect button 192 is pressed once, the first operation response effect is executed, and when the effect button 192 is long pressed, the second operation response effect is executed. The operation condition for executing the first operation response effect and the second operation response effect is not limited to this. For example, (1) a first operation response effect may be executed when a predetermined button is operated once, and a second operation response effect may be executed when a predetermined button is operated a plurality of times; A first operation response effect may be executed when the button is operated a number of times less than a predetermined threshold N, and a second operation response effect may be executed when the button is operated a number of times equal to or greater than N; A first operation response effect may be executed when a button is operated a plurality of times, and a second operation response effect may be executed when a predetermined button is long pressed a plurality of times.

In the above embodiment N2, the operation request effect and the operation response effect are executed after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game, but the conditions for executing the operation request effect and the operation response effect are not limited to this. For example, it may be applied after the third stop operation such as AT game, pseudo bonus game, challenge zone game, etc., or when notifying a predetermined privilege, after the third stop operation or after medal payout according to the notification pattern may be executed.

In this embodiment, by operating the information display button 191 to call up a user menu, the player can set various information (for example, sound volume, amount of light, etc.) by himself/herself. After the third stop operation of the bonus winning game, it is impossible to call up the user menu and set various information.

In addition, in the above embodiment N2, the first operation explanation, the second operation explanation, and the third operation explanation are notified directly using the effect image display device 157, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all of the first operating instructions, the second operating instructions, and the third operating instructions need not be directly notified. For example, some of the operations may not be directly reported to the player as hidden operations.

<Example N3>
Example N3 is an example relating to volume adjustment of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game of Example N1. In Example N3, after a predetermined time TA has elapsed after the bonus prize is won, the sound volume of the presentation is adjusted so that the sound volume is lowered from the normal sound volume to the eco sound volume. In this embodiment, the player can set the volume by operating the information display button 191 to call up the user menu. is not allowed.

FIGS. 259 and 260 are time charts relating to changes in volume of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game, and the operation of the effect button 192. FIG. Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 259 and 260, the effect button 192 is activated after time t3 when the operation request effect is started.

FIG. 259 shows a case where the effect button 192 is operated before the predetermined time TA elapses. In this case, the effect sounds of the bonus winning effect, the bonus blessing effect, and the operation request effect are output with the normal volume. Also, the sound volume of the operation response effect that is started after the effect button 192 is operated is output as normal sound volume. When the effect image display device 157 displays the image d12B prompting the user to press and hold the effect button 192, the music related to the currently selected character (the character displayed large in front) is output at normal volume. ing.

FIG. 260 shows a case where the effect button 192 is operated after the predetermined time TA has passed. In this case, at time tx after the predetermined time TA has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound is lowered from the normal volume to the eco volume. Therefore, the slot machine 100 outputs the effect sounds of the bonus winning effect and the bonus blessing effect at the normal volume, outputs the effect sound of the operation request effect before the time tx at the normal volume, and outputs the effect sound of the operation request effect before the time tx at the normal volume. The effect sound of the requested effect is output at the eco sound volume.

After that, when the player operates the production button 192 while the production sound for the operation request production is being output at the eco volume, the slot machine 100 restores the volume and responds to the operation at the normal volume. perform the performance. In other words, even if the sound volume of the effect once drops to the eco sound volume, the sound volume of the effect returns to the normal sound volume in response to the player's operation. The player can confirm that the operation of the effect button 192 is effective by the return of the volume of the effect sound to the normal volume.

More specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 253, when the operation to the effect button 192 is the one-time operation, the first operation response effect corresponding to the one-time operation (specifically, duplicate role winning notification) After that, when the operation for the effect button 192 is a long press operation, a second operation response effect (specifically, random character selection) corresponding to the long press operation is executed.

In the embodiment N3, when the effect volume is the eco sound volume, when the effect button 192 is operated, the volume returns to the normal volume. It is designed to return to the volume.

In addition, in the embodiment N3, after the predetermined time TA has passed after the bonus prize is won, the sound volume of the effect is adjusted from the normal sound volume to the eco sound volume. For example, the brightness of the effect image may be lowered to realize the eco state of the effect.

Also, in the embodiment N3, when the predetermined time TA has passed after winning the bonus prize, the sound volume of the performance is adjusted from the normal sound volume to the eco sound volume, but the condition for the sound volume reduction is not limited to this. For example, the sound volume of the effect may be lowered from the normal sound volume to the eco sound volume in the case of transition to the demo screen, credit settlement, and the like.

In addition, although the embodiment N3 is an embodiment relating to the volume adjustment of the operation request effect and the operation response effect in the bonus winning game of the above embodiment N1, the operation request effect and the operation response effect of the bonus winning game of the above embodiment N2 An embodiment relating to volume adjustment may also be used.

<Example N4>
Example N4 is an example for explaining in detail the light emission mode of the bet button 132 when character selection is performed by operating the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132 in the example N2. In the embodiment N4, when a character is selected by operating the cross key button 191a and the bet button 132, the bet button 132 is operated both to determine the character and to insert credit medals. It is an operation that also serves as When the bet button 132 emits light (lights up), it indicates that the operation of the bet button 132 is valid. Indicates that the operation is not valid.

FIG. 261 shows that during execution of the operation request effect (more specifically, the image d12C displaying the third operation explanation) and the operation response effect (more specifically, the third operation response effect) in the bonus winning game, Also, it is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the bet button 132 after the start lever operation of the next game, and shows the case where the bet button 132 is operated based on the medal insertion.

The bet button 132 is in a non-lighting state while the slot machine 100 is executing the bonus winning effect (displaying the image d10 indicating the bonus winning) (time t10). Subsequently, when the slot machine 100 starts executing the operation request effect (displays d12A, d12B, and d12C indicating the operation explanation), the operation of the cross key 191a and the bet button 132 becomes effective, so the bet button 132 is lit. becomes (time t11).

Subsequently, even when the player operates the cross key button 191a to select a character, the bet button 132 remains lit (time t12). At time t12, the character has been selected but has not yet been determined.

Subsequently, when the player operates the bet button 132, the bet button 132 is turned off (time t15). That is, after the operation request effect is started, the bet button 132 remains lit until the bet button 132 is operated. Note that the operation of the bet button 132 at time t15 serves both as an operation for determining the selected character and an operation for inserting three credit medals. Therefore, the slot machine 100 executes both the process of determining a bonus game character and the medal insertion process of inserting three medals based on the operation of the bet button 132 .

Subsequently, when the player operates the start lever 135, the slot machine 100 starts the next game and starts executing the effect during the bonus game. The effect during the bonus game is, for example, an effect of displaying a bonus game image d31 on the effect image display device 157. FIG. After time t20, the bet button 132 is turned off because the bet button is not operated.

FIG. 262 shows that during execution of the operation request effect (more specifically, the image d12C displaying the third operation explanation) and the operation response effect (more specifically, the third operation response effect) in the bonus winning game, Also, it is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the bet button 132 after the start lever operation of the next game, and shows the case where the medal insertion is performed based on the operation of inserting three medals from the medal insertion slot 141. FIG.

The bet button 132 is turned off while the slot machine 100 is executing the bonus winning effect (displaying the image d10 indicating the bonus winning) (time t10). Subsequently, when the slot machine 100 starts executing an operation request effect (displays d12A, d12B, and d12C indicating an operation explanation), the operation of the cross key 191a and the bet button 132 becomes valid, so the bet button 132 is lit. becomes (time t11).

Subsequently, even when the player operates the cross key button 191a to select a character, the bet button 132 remains lit (time t12). At time t12, the character has been selected but has not yet been determined.

Subsequently, when the player performs an operation of inserting three medals from the medal insertion slot 141, the bet button 132 is in a lighting state (time t13). That is, even if three medals are inserted, the bet button 132 remains lit. This is because the bet button 132 still has a character determination function. Therefore, at time t13 when three medals have been inserted, it is possible for the player to operate the bet button 132 to determine the character. , the bet button 132 is turned off after the operation (not shown).

Subsequently, when the player operates the start lever 135 without operating the bet button 132 after time t13, the slot machine 100 determines the currently selected character without operating the bet button 132. (time t16), the next game is started, and the performance during the bonus game is started (time t20). The effect of determining a character is, for example, an effect of displaying, on the effect image display device 157, an image d16 notifying that the character of the bonus effect has been determined. The effect during the bonus game is, for example, an effect of displaying a bonus game image d31 on the effect image display device 157. FIG.

After time t16 when the start lever 135 is operated (time t16, time t20), the bet button 132 is turned off because the bet button is not activated.

As described above, according to the embodiment N4, when the operation request effect is executed in the bonus winning game, the bet button 132 remains lit until the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 is operated regardless of whether or not medals are inserted. continue.

In addition, in FIG. 19, the case of inserting three medals from the medal inserting slot 141 is the same when Mr. Explanatory inserts one or two medals. That is, in this case as well, the bet button 132 is in the lighted state at the time when the medal is inserted. The bet button 132 continues to be illuminated until the bet button 132 is operated or the start lever 135 is operated.

Since the embodiment N4 follows on from the embodiment N2, it is also possible to execute the character selection effect by random lottery as shown in FIG. That is, when the operation request effect is being executed, it is also possible to select a character by performing a long press operation on the effect button 192 .

Although the examples N1 to N4 of the present embodiment have been described above, the examples of the present embodiment are not limited to these, and the respective examples may be combined.

<Summary of embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example N1),
Operation means (for example, effect button 192, information display button 191, bet button 132, etc.) provided at a position operable by the player;
production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.); ,
A game machine comprising
In a certain game (referred to as a "first game") (for example, an AT game, a game without notice, etc.), the first period (for example, a period started immediately after the third stop operation, When the operation means is operated once during the period after the blank period after the third stop operation (hereinafter referred to as "first effect") (for example, the number of AT-added games is notified) A means capable of starting the first operation response effect to adjust the volume and the first operation response effect to adjust the light intensity),
The effect means is a certain game (referred to as "second game") different from the first game (for example, AT game, game with notice, etc.), during the second period (for example, the third Operation response presentation when the operation means is long-pressed during the period after the end of the bonus blessing presentation started after the stop operation, the period after the first period after the blank period after the third stop operation, etc. (Hereinafter referred to as "second production") (for example, a second operation response production informing a character selected by random lottery, a second operation response production in which stage selection is performed by oneself) means that can start from and
The second period is a period that starts after the first period starts,
The effect means, in the second game, a period after the first period is started and before the second period is started (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined period") ( For example, the long press operation is started by the operating means during the first period, the period between the first period and the second period when the first period and the second period are not continuous, etc.). In the case of, means not to start the second effect in the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 254 (c), etc.),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, different effects corresponding to two types of operations on the operating means are executed in different periods for each game, so that variations in effects can be enriched for each game, operation and execution time. It is possible to execute a new performance that has not existed in the past.

In the above first basic configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of starting the second effect during the second period when a long-pressing operation on the operation means is started during the predetermined period in the second game,
This is the first preferred configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, even if the long-pressing operation is performed during the predetermined period, the second effect can be executed during the second period if the second period lasts.

In addition, in the above first basic configuration,
The effect means does not start the second effect in the second period when a long press operation on the operation means is started in the predetermined period in the second game,
This is the 1-1 preferred configuration.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, or 1-1 preferred configuration,
The effect means, in the second game, a effect (hereinafter referred to as "third effect") corresponding to one operation of the operation means during the second period (for example, a bonus combination) A means capable of executing a first operation response presentation for notifying the winning combination at the same time,
The effect means is means for not executing the third effect when the operation means is operated once during the predetermined period in the second game,
The first production and the third production are different productions,
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, in the second game, the effect is not executed for any kind of operation during the first period. It can be recognized as a non-execution period.

In addition, the first effect (for example, the first operation response effect for adjusting the volume and the amount of light) and the third effect (for example, the first operation response effect for adjusting the volume and the amount of light) are the same. It can be a performance.

In the second preferred configuration,
The first effect is a effect related to a privilege given to the player (for example, a first operation response effect for notifying the number of AT-added games),
At least one of the second effect and the third effect is an effect that can be individually set by the player in relation to the game (for example, a second effect that notifies the character selected by random lottery). Operation response production, second operation response production that performs stage selection by itself),
A third preferred configuration is adopted.

According to the third preferred configuration, the second effect and the third effect can be executed until the second period, so even if the operation means is frequently operated, the player can set it individually. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of performance appearance.

In the first preferred configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The first period is a period that starts after all of the plurality of reels have stopped,
The second period is a period that starts after all of the plurality of reels have stopped,
When a certain condition is established in the second game (for example, when executing an effect suggesting an internal winning combination in internal winning combination lottery processing), the effect means performs the second effect. in said second time period;
The certain condition is a condition that may be established when an announcement effect (for example, an effect suggesting an internal winning combination in internal winning combination lottery processing) occurs in the second game.
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferred configuration, the notice effect can be executed in the first period before the second effect is executed, so the notice period of the notice can be lengthened.

In the second preferred configuration or the third preferred configuration,
The operation means determines a long-press operation when an operation on the operation means continues for a predetermined time (for example, a predetermined time T1) or longer after the operation on the operation means, and the operation on the operation means Means for determining a one-time operation when the predetermined time has not elapsed since the means was operated,
The effect means is a means for executing the second effect after executing the third effect when the long press operation is performed during the second period in the second game (for example, Figure 253, etc.),
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferable configuration, when the button is long pressed in the second game, the third effect and the second effect are executed, so that a plurality of types of effects can be enjoyed with one operation.

In the fourth preferred configuration,
The effect means, in the second game, effect (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect") corresponding to the fact that the operation means is operated once during the second period (for example, volume adjustment, A means capable of executing the first operation response effect for adjusting the light intensity),
The operation means determines a long-press operation when an operation on the operation means continues for a predetermined time (for example, a predetermined time T1) or longer after the operation on the operation means, and the operation on the operation means Means for determining a one-time operation when the predetermined time has not elapsed since the means was operated,
The effect means executes the second effect when the long-pressing operation is performed during the second period of the second game, and performs the 1 When the turning operation is performed, means for executing the fourth effect (for example, FIG. 256 etc.),
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, the third effect or the second effect is executed in response to the single press or long press in the second game, so be careful with the operation during the second period. can be demanded.

(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example N2),
A first operating means (for example, a production button 192, etc.) provided at a position where the player can operate;
production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.); ,
A game machine comprising
In a certain state (for example, after the third stop operation of the bonus winning game, etc.), the effect means performs the first operation (for example, one-time press or long press) on the first operation means. is a means for executing a first effect (for example, a winning combination notification effect, a character selection effect, etc.) when
In the certain state, the rendering means performs a second operation on the first operation means (for example, a long press if the first operation is a single press, and a 1 press if the first operation is a long press). (e.g., when the first effect is the winning combination notification effect, the character selection effect, and when the first effect is the character selection effect, the winning combination notification effect, etc.) is performed. is a means of performing
The first operation and the second operation are different operations,
The first production and the second production are different types of production (for example, FIG. 257),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to this second basic configuration, different performances are executed in accordance with two types of operations on the operating means in a certain state, so that it is possible to increase the variation of performances in a certain state, which is new and unprecedented. performance can be executed.

Here, the first effect is executed by a first notification means (for example, one or a combination of effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420), and the second effect The effect is executed by a second notification means (for example, one or a combination of one or more of the effect image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 336 and 420), and the first notification means and the second notification means The notification means may be different notification means or may be the same notification means.

In the above second basic configuration,
the first operation (e.g., one-time press) on the first operation means is an operation that is completed before the second operation (e.g., long press) on the first operation means is completed;
The effect means starts the second effect (for example, character selection effect) after starting the first effect (for example, winning combination notification effect).
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, two effects can be executed by executing the second operation, so that two effects can be enjoyed.

In the above seventh preferred configuration,
The first operation is a one-time operation on the first operation means,
the second operation is a long press operation on the first operation means;
After the one-time operation on the first operation means ends, the long press operation on the first operation means ends;
This is the preferred configuration of 7-1.

In the second basic configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, or the 7th-1 preferred configuration,
A second operation means (for example, cross key button 191a, bet button 132, etc.) provided at a position where the player can operate,
The effect means performs the first effect and the second effect when a third operation (for example, operation of the cross key button 191 and then operation of the bet button 132) is performed on the second operation means. is a means of executing at least one of the effects of
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferable configuration, it is possible to execute the same effect using the first operating means and the second operating means, so that the execution timing of the effect can be diversified.

In the eighth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means for executing the second effect (for example, character selection effect, etc.) when the third operation is performed on the second operation means,
The result of the second effect executed when the second operation (for example, long press) is performed on the first operation means is that the third operation on the second operation means is performed. A result different from the result of the second production executed when it is executed may be derived,
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, even if the same effect can be executed using the first operating means and the second operating means, different results are derived according to the operating means. Since there is a case, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the above ninth preferred configuration,
The second effect is a selection effect (for example, an effect of selecting a character that is winning a bonus),
The effect means, when one of the second operation and the third operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), allows the player to select an option in the selection effect. A means for executing an arbitrarily selectable effect (for example, a character selection effect by a player),
When the other operation of the second operation and the third operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the effect means selects an option in the selection effect by lottery. A means of executing a production (for example, a character selection production by random lottery),
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferable configuration, since there are cases where the player can make a selection by himself and cases where he cannot, it is possible to improve interest in the selection effect.

In the tenth preferred configuration,
The number of options that can be selected in the selection effect in the first case is different from the number of options that can be selected in the selection effect in the second case (for example, the options for the character selection effect by random lottery are 3 types , 4 types of character selection effects by the player, etc.)
This is the eleventh preferred configuration.

According to the eleventh preferable configuration, since the options in the selection effect differ depending on whether the player can select by himself or not, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

In the eighth preferred configuration, the ninth preferred configuration, the tenth preferred configuration, or the eleventh preferred configuration, a game is played using at least one of the first operating means and the second operating means Information setting means (for example, information display button 191, etc.) that allows a person to individually set predetermined information (for example, volume of effect sound, etc.),
The information setting means is means that cannot set the predetermined information in the certain state.
This is the twelfth preferred configuration.

According to the twelfth preferable configuration, since a certain state is a special state, the first operating means or the second operating means can be used for purposes different from normal times, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example N3),
A first operating means (for example, a production button 192, etc.) provided at a position where the player can operate;
production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.); ,
A game machine comprising
When a first operation (for example, pressing once) is performed on the first operation means during execution of a first effect (for example, operation request promotion effect), the effect means performs a first operation A means for executing a response effect (for example, a winning combination notification effect, etc.),
The first production is a production that may be executed in a first production state (for example, a normal mode that outputs a normal volume),
The first effect is a effect that may be executed in a second effect state (e.g., an eco mode that outputs an eco sound volume, etc.),
When a certain condition is satisfied in the first effect state (for example, when a predetermined time TA has passed after the third stop operation), the first effect state is shifted to the second effect state. can be,
In the second production state, when the first operation is performed on the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first production is performed from the second production state. state (e.g., FIG. 260),
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, based on the first operation to the first operation means, while continuing the first effect, it returns to the second state or the first effect state. It is possible to recognize through the first effect that the operation of is valid, and to execute a novel effect that has not existed in the past.

In the third basic configuration above,
When a second operation (for example, a long press) is performed on the first operation means while the first production is being executed, the production means performs a second operation response production (for example, is a means of executing character selection effects, etc.)
This is the 13-0 preferred configuration.

In the preferred configuration of 13-0 above,
The effect means is means for executing the first operation response effect in the first case,
This is the thirteenth preferred configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferable configuration, the first operation response effect is executed in response to the first operation on the first operating means, so the first operation is valid based on the execution of the operation response effect. It can be recognized that it is a period.

In the thirteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means performs the first operation on the first operation means after the first effect is started in the first effect state and before the certain condition is satisfied. means for executing the first operation response effect while maintaining the first effect state when the
This is the fourteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferable configuration, the first operation is possible even before a certain condition is established, and the first operation response effect can be executed even in the first effect state. can. ,
In the above 13-0 preferred configuration, 13th preferred configuration, or 14th preferred configuration,
A second operation means (for example, cross key button 191a, bet button 132, etc.) provided at a position where the player can operate,
The effect means performs a third operation on the second operation means (for example, after operating the cross key button 191a, the bet button 132 is operated) while executing the first effect. means for executing the second operation response effect when
This is the fifteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferred configuration, since the second operation response effect can be executed by two types of operations, it is possible to increase the variety of games.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above,
The third operation is an operation including a selection operation (for example, a selection operation by the cross key button 191a) and a decision operation (for example, a decision operation by the bet button 132),
The third operation is an operation that is completed by executing the decision operation after the selection operation,
When the selection operation of the third operation for the second operation means is performed while the first effect is being executed in the second effect state, until the decision operation is performed It switches to said 1st production|presentation of said 1st production|presentation state.
This is the sixteenth preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferable configuration, even when the third operation consists of a plurality of operations, it is possible to return to the first effect of the first state before the decision operation.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration or the sixteenth preferred configuration,
The result of the second operation response effect executed when the second operation is performed on the first operation means is the result of the third operation on the second operation means. A result different from the result of the second operation response effect to be executed may be derived,
This is the seventeenth preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferable configuration, even if the same effect can be executed using the first operating means and the second operating means, different results are derived according to the operating means. Since there is a case, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the seventeenth preferred configuration,
The second operation response effect is a selection effect (for example, an effect of selecting a character that is winning a bonus),
The effect means, when one of the second operation and the third operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as "third case"), allows the player to select an option in the selection effect. A means for executing an arbitrarily selectable effect (for example, a character selection effect by a player),
When the other operation of the second operation and the third operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as "fourth case"), the effect means selects an option in the selection effect by lottery. A means of executing a production (for example, a character selection production by random lottery),
This is the eighteenth preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferable configuration, there are cases where the player can make a selection by himself and cases where he cannot, so it is possible to improve interest in the selection effect.

In the eighteenth preferred configuration,
The number of options that can be selected in the selection effect in the third case is different from the number of options that can be selected in the selection effect in the fourth case (for example, there are three types of options for the character selection effect by random lottery, the game There are 4 types of character selection effects by the person, etc.),
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the 19th preferable configuration, since options in the selection effect differ depending on whether the player can select by himself or herself, interest in the game can be improved.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration, the sixteenth preferred configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration,
Information setting means (e.g., information display button) that allows the player to individually set predetermined information (e.g., volume of effect sound, etc.) using at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means 191, etc.),
The information setting means is a means that cannot set the predetermined information while the first effect is being executed.
This is the twentieth preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, when the first effect is being executed, the first operation means or the second operation means can be used for a purpose different from the normal time, and the game is performed. Interest can be improved.
(4) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example N4),
Operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 to 132, effect button 192, cross key button 191a, etc.) provided at positions operable by the player;
production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336, 420, etc.); ,
A game machine comprising
The gaming table is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 100), and the operation means is an operation means (eg, bet buttons 130 to 132) capable of inserting electronically stored game media,
It is possible to insert game media without using the operation means (for example, medal insertion slot 141),
with
The effect means is means for executing an operation response effect (for example, an operation response effect) when the operation means is operated and a game medium is inserted during execution of a certain effect (for example, an operation request effect). can be,
The effect means is means for not executing the operation response effect if a game medium is inserted without using the first operation means during execution of the certain effect.
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, since it is possible to select whether or not to execute the operation response effect according to the operation means, the intention of the player can be reflected in the selection of the operation means, and a novel effect that has not existed in the past can be realized. can be executed.

In the fourth basic configuration above,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The effect means is means for starting the certain effect in a period after all of the plurality of reels have stopped and before a new game medium is introduced,
The effect means is means for executing the operation response effect and inserting a game medium when the operation means is operated and a game medium is inserted during execution of the certain effect.
This is the 21st preferred configuration.

According to the 21st preferred configuration, one operation serves as two actions, so the operation can be simplified.

In the twenty-first preferred configuration,
The operation means is operated when the upper limit number (for example, 3) of game media used for one game is inserted without being operated by the operation means while the effect means is executing the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as referred to as "the first case"), the means configured to accept the operation,
the operation means is means for not inserting game media when the operation means is operated in the first case;
The effect means is means for executing the operation response effect when the operation means is operated in the first case (for example, FIG. 262),
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-second preferred configuration, even after the upper limit number of game media used for one game has been inserted, the operation response effect can be executed using the operation means, so that the operation means can be used for various purposes. can be used for

In the twenty-first preferred configuration,
The operation means is operated when game media less than the upper limit number (for example, 3) used for one game are inserted without being operated by the operation means while the effect means is executing the certain effect ( hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the means configured to accept the operation,
The operation means is means for inserting game media up to the upper limit number when the operation means is operated in the second case,
The effect means is means for executing the operation response effect when the operation means is operated in the second case.
This is the 23rd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-third preferred configuration, since both the input of game media and the operation response effect can be executed using the operation means before the upper limit number of game media used in one game is input, the operation means can be used. It can be used for various purposes.

In the 22nd preferred configuration or the 22nd preferred configuration,
In a state in which the certain effect is not being executed and no game medium has been inserted, the operation means is in a first state (for example, a lit state) suggesting waiting for the insertion of the game medium. ) is a means of
The operation means is means that is in the first state when the certain effect is being executed and no game medium is inserted,
The operation means is means for changing from the first state to the second state (e.g., turned-off state) in relation to the operation of the operation means and the insertion of the upper limit number of game media. and
The operation means is kept in the first state even after the upper limit number of game media has been inserted using the second operation means during execution of the certain effect (hereinafter referred to as after a predetermined period of time). is a means of continuing the
This is the twenty-fourth preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-fourth preferred configuration, the operation means continues the first state even after the upper limit number of game media has been inserted, so the player recognizes that the operation response effect can be executed. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth preferred configuration above,
A start operation reception means (for example, start lever 135, main control unit 300) that receives an operation instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels,
The effect means is means for executing the operation response effect when the operation means is not operated after the predetermined period of time and the start operation receiving means receives the operation.
This is the twenty-fifth preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-fifth preferable configuration, the game can be started while executing the operation response presentation when the start operation accepting means accepts the operation even if the operating means is not operated.

In the fourth basic configuration, the 21st preferred configuration, the 22nd preferred configuration, the 23rd preferred configuration, the 24th preferred configuration, or the 25th preferred configuration,
The certain effect is a selection effect (for example, a character selection effect),
The operation means is a means for functioning as means for determining the option of the selection effect (for example, a determination button for determining the selected character).
This is the 26th preferred configuration.

According to a twenty-sixth preferred arrangement,
In the twenty-sixth preferable configuration, the operation means can be used as means for determining options for selection effects, so that the operation means can be used for various purposes.

In the twenty-sixth preferred configuration above,
A second operation means (for example, a production button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate,
The second operation means is a means that functions as means for determining options for the selection effect (for example, a button that executes a character selection effect by random lottery).
This is the 27th preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-seventh preferred configuration, the selection effect can be realized by different operations, so that the diversity of the game can be realized and the interest can be improved.

In addition, it is preferable that the operation method of the operation means and the operation method of the second operation means are different. Since the same selection effect can be executed by different operations, it is possible to realize diversity of games.

<Other game machines>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and paying out game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 263 to 271. FIG. 263 to 271 are used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 263 to 271 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 263 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 263 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as the production button 132 .

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. .

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player of the change, the light may also be turned on when performing various notifications described later.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game, and are also used when performing various notifications to be described later. may also light up.

A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and will be described later. It may be displayed when performing various notifications to be performed.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 264 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Information display/overview during switching display>
Next, an outline of information display during switching display will be described.

The game machine according to the present embodiment (in this example, the slot machine or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 263) includes display means capable of displaying the first display or the second display, and a certain effect is provided on the display means. There is a case where a switching display is displayed before the display is displayed (first case), the first display and the second display are displays included in the certain effect display, and the first display In the case of (1), the first display is configured to start displaying while the switching display is being displayed.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention means means capable of displaying the first display or the second display, and corresponds to, for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG.

Further, the "first display" and the "second display" according to the present invention are displays included in a certain effect display. In the case of the AT effect display), the number of remaining AT games related to this AT effect display, the display of the number of acquired AT games indicating the number of game media acquired in the AT game, and the number of accumulated game media in the AT game The display of (the number of credits), the number of AT initial games, the number of AT sets, and the normal number of addictive rotations correspond to the first display or the second display.

Further, when a given effect display is a bonus effect display (a effect display executed during a bonus game), the number of remaining bonus games related to this bonus effect display and the number of acquired game media in the bonus game are displayed. The display of the number of bonuses obtained, the display of the number of accumulated game media (the number of credits) in the bonus game, and the like correspond to the first display or the second display. The combination of the first display and the second display described above is not particularly limited.

The first display and the second display are displays related to game information and include numerical information, that is, displays related to important game information for the player in progress of the game. is preferred.

Further, the "switch display" according to the present invention is a display that may be displayed before a certain effect display is displayed. A switching display displayed between the AT start effect (a certain effect display), a switching display temporarily displayed between a certain effect display executed in one or more games, an insert image, etc. do. Further, the switching display is not limited to the case where a certain display is erased and a new switching display is displayed. A case of switching a layer of switching display is also included.

<Information display during switching display/Embodiment 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 266, Example 1 of information display during switching display will be described. FIG. 266 is a diagram showing an example of the switching display performed at the start of AT in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 266(a) is a state in which the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to start AT winning notification.

In this example, the AT winning notification is started when the start of the AT game is decided. Although the mode of AT winning notification is not particularly limited, in this example, three images imitating the blue 7 symbols provided on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed.

The states shown in subsequent FIGS. 266(b) to 266(e) are states in which the switching display is executed before the AT effect display (certain effect display) shown in FIG. 266(f) is displayed.

In this example, there are four types of switching displays: first switching display (1), first switching display (2), second switching display (1), and second switching display (2). and are displayed in this order before a certain effect display is displayed. Note that the number of switching displays is not limited to this example, and for example, only the second switching display (2) of the four types of displays may be displayed. You may insert indications other than indications.

In the switching display of this example, as the first switching display (1), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4(c), an image is displayed in which the character of the lord brandishes a sword.

On the other hand, in the subsequent second switching displays (1) and (2), as shown in (d) and (e) of FIG. In this example, the number of color types displayed in the second switching display (1 in this example) is smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display. are doing.

According to this example, since the number of color types displayed in the second switching display is smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display, By making the first display (in this example, the number of remaining AT games) conspicuous, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the first display, which is important information, and the second display By making the first switching display more conspicuous than the switching display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed.

Note that the modes of the first switching display and the second switching display are not particularly limited. It may be configured to reduce the number of types. In addition, the number of color types displayed in the display area around the first display in the second switching display is greater than the number of color types displayed in the corresponding display area in the first switching display. It may be configured to be less.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 4E, the display of AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is started while the second switching display (2) is being displayed. This AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is a display corresponding to the AT effect display (certain effect display) shown in FIG. The display includes a character string “remaining 29G” suggesting that the number is 29.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 266(f) is a state in which the display of the AT effect display (certain effect display) is started following the second switching display (2) of FIG. 266(e).

In this example, with the start of the AT game as a trigger, the AT effect display (a certain effect display) is started.

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) of this example, the display of the AT remaining game number display (first display) RD, which started to be displayed in the second switching display (2), is continuously displayed, and the AT The display of the AT winning number display (second display) GD indicating the number of medals obtained in the game and the stored medal number display (second display) CD in the AT game is started.

According to this example, the first display (AT remaining game number display RD in this example) continues to be displayed even during the display of a certain effect display, and the second display (AT win number display GD in this example) is continued. , the accumulated number (the number of credits) display CD) starts to be displayed during the display of a certain effect display. You can draw attention to the display of

Also, after the first switching display is displayed, the second switching display is displayed and a certain effect display is displayed, and the first display starts to be displayed while the second switching display is being displayed. By setting the switching display to a two-stage display, the player can be made to pay attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed, and the display is started during the second switching display. (In this example, the number of remaining AT games) is conspicuous, the player can be reliably notified of the first display, which is important information.

In this example, when the AT game is started, switching display is performed before a certain effect display is displayed, and the first display corresponding to the certain effect display is started during the switching display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A first display corresponding to a new scene or scene may be started at .

In addition, if the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, switching display is performed before a certain effect display (special effect, etc.) is displayed with the occurrence of super ready-to-win, etc., and the certain effect display is performed during the switching display. may initiate a first display corresponding to .

In addition, all or a plurality of the first switching display, the second switching display, and a certain effect display may be performed during the period of one game, and when the display is performed over a plurality of games. is not limited to

<Information display during switching display/Embodiment 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 267, Example 2 of information display during switching display will be described. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing an example of information display during switching display performed during an AT game in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 267(a) is a state in which the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to start the AT effect display (certain effect display).

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) of this example, there are an AT remaining game number display RD, an AT win number display GD indicating the number of medals won in the AT game, and a accumulated medal number display CD in the AT game. , and the operation navigation suggesting the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are displayed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 267(b) is the state in which the button effect is started during the AT effect display (certain effect display).

In the button effect of this example, a button image BD (in this example, an image simulating the appearance of the effect button 132 and the characters "Push") that prompts the user to press the effect button 132 is triggered by the third stop operation in a certain game. (images with

267(c) to 267(e), the effect button 132 is pressed (certain condition is satisfied), so the AT effect display (certain effect display) becomes difficult to see. After that, the switching display is displayed.

In this example, the switching display is composed of three types of display: the first switching display (display that also serves as a button response effect), the second switching display (1), and the second switching display (2). are displayed in this order before a certain effect display is displayed.

In the switching display of this example, as the first switching display, the button response effect shown in FIG. 4(c) is displayed. In the button response effect of this example, the pressing operation of the effect button 132 triggers an effect including a display (in this example, a display including the character string "+100G") that informs the player of the number of AT-added games. Is going. Further, in this example, the AT effect display (certain effect display) is temporarily made invisible (unvisible) by performing the button response effect in the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

On the other hand, in the subsequent second switching displays (1) and (2), as shown in (d) and (e) of FIG. In this example, the number of color types displayed in the second switching display (1 in this example) is smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display. are doing. Further, in this example, by performing white-out display in all display areas of the liquid crystal display device 157, the AT effect display (certain effect display) is temporarily made invisible (invisible).

According to this example, since the number of color types displayed in the second switching display is smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display, By making the first display (in this example, the number of remaining AT games) conspicuous, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the first display, which is important information, and the second display By making the first switching display more conspicuous than the switching display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 4E, the display of AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is started while the second switching display (2) is being displayed. This AT remaining game display (first display) RD is a display corresponding to the AT effect display (certain effect display) shown in FIG. has occurred, the display includes the character string "remaining 129 G" suggesting that the number of remaining AT games has increased from 29 to 129.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 267(f) is a state in which the display of the AT effect display (certain effect display) is resumed.

In this example, since the display of the second switching display (2) shown in FIG. Resume and make the display visible.

In the AT effect display after the restart (certain effect display), the display of the remaining AT game number display (first display) RD after adding the number of AT additional games, which started to be displayed in the second switching display (2), is displayed. is continuously displayed, and after the addition of the medals obtained in the game, AT acquisition number display (second display) GD indicating the number of medals acquired in AT games, and display of accumulated number of medals in AT games ( Second display) Resuming CD.

<Information display/summary during switching display>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 263) has the first display (for example, the AT shown in FIGS. 266(e) and 267(e) A gaming machine equipped with display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a remaining game number display RD), wherein a switching display (for example, FIG. 266) is displayed before a certain effect display is displayed on the display means. (b) to (e) of FIG. 267 and (c) to (e) of FIG. is a display included in the certain effect display, and in the first case, the display of the first display is started during the display of the switching display. .

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first display, which is started to be displayed during the switching display, is made conspicuous, so that the player can be reliably notified of the first display, which is important information.

The switching display includes a first switching display (for example, the first switching display shown in FIGS. 266(b) to 266(c)) and a second switching display different from the first switching display. (for example, the second switching display shown in FIGS. 266(d) to (e)), and in the first case, the second switching display is displayed after the first switching display is displayed. may be displayed to display the certain effect display, and in the first case, the first display may start to be displayed while the second switching display is being displayed.

With such a configuration, the switching display can be displayed in two stages, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed, and during the second switching display. By making the first display to be started stand out, the player can be reliably notified of the first display, which is important information.

Further, the number of color types displayed in the second switching display may be smaller than the number of color types displayed in the first switching display. Also, the second switching display may be a display of a single color (for example, only white or only black).

With such a configuration, by making the first display, which starts to be displayed during the second switching display, stand out, the player can be reliably notified of the first display, which is important information. Furthermore, by making the first switching display more conspicuous than the second switching display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means before the second switching display is displayed.

In addition, the display means can display a second display (for example, AT acquisition number display GD and accumulated medal number display CD shown in FIG. It is a display included in the effect display, and in the first case, the first display (for example, the AT remaining game number display RD shown in FIG. 266(e)) is also displayed during the display of the certain effect display. is continued, and the display of the second display may be started during the display of the certain effect display.

With such a configuration, the first display continues to be displayed even while a certain effect display is being displayed, and the second display is started during the display of a certain effect display. By starting the display of the first display earlier, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first display.

Further, in the first case, the first display continues to be displayed even while the certain effect display is being displayed, and the second display is continued even when the certain effect display is not being displayed. Display may start.

In addition, the first display and the second display are displays related to game information (for example, display of AT remaining game number, display of AT acquisition number indicating the number of game media acquired in AT game, display of game medium in AT game). display of accumulated number (number of credits), display of initial number of AT games, display of set number of AT), which includes number information, and the first display and the second display are different. It may be a display related to game information.

With such a configuration, by making the information important to the player stand out, the important information can be surely notified to the player, and the player will not be disadvantaged.

Also, the first case may occur in relation to the start of a certain game state (for example, AT game, button response effect, bonus, super reach).

With such a configuration, the player can grasp the timing at which the first display is started, and the player can be reliably notified of the first display, which is important information.

Further, in the first case, when a certain condition is satisfied while the certain effect display is being displayed, the certain effect display is temporarily difficult to see (for example, the certain effect display disappears, Another display is displayed overlapping a part of a certain effect display, and a part of the certain effect display is covered by the movable body arranged in front of the display means), and the switching display is displayed. There may be a case where the certain effect display becomes visible after the display.

With such a configuration, the player can grasp the timing at which the first display is started, and the player can be reliably notified of the first display, which is important information.

<Information display/outline after switching display ends>
Next, an outline of the information display after the end of the switching display will be described.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (in this example, the slot machine and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 263) has a display means capable of displaying the first display, the second display, or the third display, There is a case (first case) in which a switching display is displayed before a certain effect display is displayed on the display means, and the first display, the second display, and the third display are: It is a display corresponding to the certain effect display, and in the first case, the second display becomes visible when the certain effect display is displayed after the display of the switching display is finished. is configured as

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention means means capable of displaying the first display, the second display, or the third display, such as the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. is applicable.

Further, the "first display", "second display", and "third display" according to the present invention are displays corresponding to a certain effect display. In the case of the AT effect display (the effect display executed during the AT game), the display of the AT remaining game number corresponding to (related to) the AT effect display, and the AT acquired number indicating the acquired number of game media in the AT game , the number of accumulated game media (credits) in AT games, the number of AT initial games, the number of AT sets, and the normal number of addictive rotations. falls under a representation, a secondary representation, or a tertiary representation;

In addition, when a certain effect display is a bonus effect display (a effect display executed during a bonus game), the number of remaining bonus games corresponding to (related to) this bonus effect display is displayed, and the number of game media in the bonus game is displayed. The display of the number of bonus wins indicating the number of wins, the display of the number of accumulated game media (the number of credits) in the bonus game, etc. correspond to the first display, the second display, or the third display. Combinations of the first display, second display, and third display described above are not particularly limited.

It should be noted that the second display and the third display are displays relating to game information and include numerical information, that is, displays relating to important game information for the player in progress of the game. is preferred. Moreover, it is preferable that the first display is a display relating to game information, and is a display that is started during the display of the switching display and continues to be displayed during the display of the certain effect display.

Further, the "switch display" according to the present invention is a display that may be displayed before a certain effect display is displayed. A switching display displayed between the AT start effect (a certain effect display), a switching display temporarily displayed between a certain effect display executed in one or more games, an insert image, etc. do. Further, the switching display is not limited to the case where a certain display is erased and a new switching display is displayed. and switching display layers are also included.

<Information display after switching display/Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, an example of information display after switching display is finished will be described. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing an example of the information display after the end of the switching display performed during the AT game in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 268(a) is a state in which the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to start the AT effect display (some effect display).

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) of this example, there are an AT remaining game number display RD, an AT win number display GD indicating the number of medals won in the AT game, and a accumulated medal number display CD in the AT game. , and the operation navigation suggesting the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are displayed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 268(b) is the state in which the button effect is started during the AT effect display (certain effect display).

In the button effect of this example, a button image BD (in this example, an image simulating the appearance of the effect button 132 and the characters "Push") that prompts the user to press the effect button 132 is triggered by the third stop operation in a certain game. (images with

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 268(c) is the state in which the button response effect is started.

In the button response effect of this example, the pressing operation of the effect button 132 triggers an effect including a display (in this example, a display including the character string "+100G") that informs the player of the number of AT-added games. Is going.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 268(d), since the effect button 132 has been pressed (certain condition has been met), the AT effect display (certain effect display) is not visible in FIG. 268(c). After that, the switching display is displayed.

In the switching display of this example, a display (white-out) in which the display area is made white (single color) is displayed. It is configured so that the number of types of colors displayed in the switching display of is smaller.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 4(d), the display of AT remaining game number display (first display) RD is started during the display of the switching display. This AT remaining game display (first display) RD is a display corresponding to the AT effect display (certain effect display) shown in FIG. has occurred, the display includes the character string "remaining 129 G" suggesting that the number of remaining AT games has increased from 29 to 129.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 268(e) is a state where the display of the AT effect display (certain effect display) is resumed.

In this example, since the display of the switching display shown in FIG. 4(d) has ended, the display of the AT rendering display (certain rendering display) that has become temporarily difficult to see due to the button response rendering or the switching display is resumed. , the display is visible.

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) after the restart, the display of the remaining AT game number display (first display) RD after the addition of the number of AT additional games, which was started in the switching display, is continuously displayed. At the same time, after adding the medals obtained in the game, the AT winning number display (second display) GD indicating the number of medals obtained in the AT game is restarted and made visible.

According to this example, by making the second display (in this example, the AT acquisition number display GD) visible after making the player pay attention to the display means by the switching display, the second display, which is important information, is made visible. The display of can be surely notified to the player.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 268(f) is a state in which the display of the stored number of medals (third display) CD in the AT game is resumed.

In the AT effect display (certain effect display) of this example, the display of AT remaining game number display (first display) RD after adding the number of AT additional games, and the number of AT wins indicating the number of won medals in the AT game The display (second display) GD is continuously displayed, and the display of the accumulated number of medals (third display) CD in the AT game is restarted and made visible.

According to this example, by displaying the second display (in this example, the AT acquisition number display GD) and the third display (in this example, the accumulated number of medals display CD) in order, each display can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and to reliably inform the player of the display of important information.

In this example, after the switching display, the display of the AT acquisition number display (second display) is resumed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display of the AT acquired number display (second display) may be newly started after the switching display without displaying the display (second display).

<Information display/summary after switching display>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 263) displays the second display (for example, the AT acquisition number display GD shown in FIG. 268(e)). A gaming machine equipped with a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a switching display (for example, a switching display shown in FIG. 268(d)) before a certain performance display is displayed on the display means ) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the “first case”), the second display is a display included in the certain effect display, and in the first case, the second display The display becomes visible (or starts to be displayed) when the display of the switching display ends and the certain effect display is displayed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, by making the second display visible after making the player pay attention to the display means by the switching display, the second display, which is important information, can be displayed to the player. I can let you know for sure.

In addition, the display means can display a third display (for example, the accumulated number of medals display CD in the AT game shown in FIG. 268(f)), and the third display can A corresponding display, in the first case, the third display is to be displayed after the second display becomes visible (or after the display is started). may

With such a configuration, by displaying the second display and the third display in order, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking each display, and the display of important information is presented to the player. I can let you know for sure.

In addition, the display means can display a first display, and the first display (for example, AT remaining game number display RD shown in FIGS. 268(d) to 268(e)) It is a display included in the effect display, the first display is a display related to game information, the first display is started during the display of the switching display, and is displayed during the display of the certain effect display. may be displayed continuously.

With such a configuration, since the first display continues to be displayed even during the display of a certain effect display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first display.

Further, in the first case, the first display continues to be displayed even while the certain effect display is being displayed, and the second display is continued even when the certain effect display is not being displayed. Display may start.

In addition, the second display and the third display are displays related to game information (for example, display of the number of remaining AT games, display of the number of acquired AT games indicating the number of acquired game media in AT games, display of the number of acquired AT games, and display of game media in AT games). display of accumulated number (number of credits), display of number of initial AT games, display of number of sets of AT), which includes number information, and the second display and the third display are different. It may be a display related to game information.

With such a configuration, by making the information important to the player stand out, the important information can be surely notified to the player, and the player will not be disadvantaged.

Also, the first case may occur during execution of a certain game state (for example, AT game, button response effect, bonus, super reach).

With such a configuration, the player can grasp the timing at which the second display is started, and the player can be reliably notified of the second display, which is important information.

Further, in the first case, when a certain condition is satisfied while the certain effect display is being displayed, the certain effect display is temporarily difficult to see (for example, the certain effect display disappears, Another display is displayed overlapping a part of a certain effect display, and a part of the certain effect display is covered by the movable body arranged in front of the display means), and the switching display is displayed. There may be a case where the certain effect display becomes visible after the display.

With such a configuration, the player can grasp the timing at which the second display is started, and the player can be reliably notified of the second display, which is important information.

<Two-stage error notification/Overview>
Next, an outline of the two-stage error notification will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (in this example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 263) is provided with an error notification means capable of executing an error notification regarding an error. There is a period (first period) in which the error cannot be cleared and a period (second period) in which the error can be cleared.

Here, errors that can occur in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment include door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM defects, prize winning errors, and the like. mentioned.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number of medals or more is delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error cancellation switch is accepted.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

Further, the "notification means" according to the present invention is means capable of executing error notification regarding errors, for example, display means capable of notifying errors by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 269). , sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 265) capable of announcing errors by sound, and light emitting means (in this example, an upper lamp shown in FIG. 269) capable of announcing errors by emitting light. 142, side lamp 144, light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of stop buttons 137-139, backlight of each reel 110-112) and movable means capable of announcing errors due to movement of movable bodies (in this example, The reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 269 and the like correspond to this.

Further, the "first period" according to the present invention is a period in which a certain error cannot be canceled, for example, a period during reel rotation, a game period during which a game can be played, or a game is in progress. When a certain error occurs during the first period, the first error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error.

Further, the "second period" according to the present invention is a period during which a certain error can be canceled, for example, a period during which reels are stopped, a non-game period during which a game cannot be played, or a period during which a game cannot be played. If a certain error occurs during the second period, the second error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error.

<Two-stage error notification/notification means>
Next, before explaining the two-stage error notification, the notification means used for error notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 is a diagram showing an example of the mode of notification means in a normal game in chronological order, and each diagram is a front view schematically showing the appearance of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 includes the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 and payout number display device 127 described with reference to FIG. Although the details will be described later, in this example, when an error occurs, information about the error is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 and an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127 .

The slot machine 100 also includes the speakers 272, 277 and the like described with reference to FIG. 265 as sound output means capable of announcing errors by sound. Although the details will be described later, in this example, when an error occurs, various sounds are output from the speakers 272 and 277 to notify the error.

In addition, the slot machine 100 uses light emitters 137a and 138a of the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 described with reference to FIG. 263 as light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light. , 139a, a backlight for each of the reels 110-112, and the like. Although details will be described later, in this example, when an error occurs, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are lit in red, and each of the stopped states is turned on. The backlights of the reels 110-112 are turned off.

The notification mode (color, means, etc.) of the error notification is not limited to this example. Instead (or in addition), error notification may be performed by movement of movable means such as shutter 163 and reels 110 to 112, for example.

The state shown in FIG. 269(a) is the state before the last game is finished and the medals for the next game are bet.

In the same state, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used until the medals for the next game are bet, for example, a normal effect is executed, and yellow light, for example, is emitted from the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, while a payout is made. The display of the number display 127 is erased, and the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of the stop buttons 137-139 are extinguished.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 269(b) is a state in which medals for the next game have been bet and the start lever 135 has been pressed.

In the same state, when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started, and the normal effect is continued using the liquid crystal display device 157, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 , emits light in a lighting pattern for production. In addition, since the reels 110 to 112 can be stopped, for example, orange light is emitted from the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. is possible.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 269(c) is a state in which the first stop operation has been performed.

In this state, the rotation of the left reel 110 is stopped when the operation of pressing the left stop button 137 is accepted as the first stop operation, and the light emitter 137a of the stop button 137 emits blue light, for example. It notifies that the pressing operation of the stop button 137 has been received.

In addition, the speaker 272, 277 outputs an effect sound (in this example, a voice of "chance") triggered by the reception of the pressing operation of the left stop button 137 as the first stop operation. It should be noted that the normal effect by the liquid crystal display device 157 and the light emission of the light emission pattern for effect by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are continued.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 269(d) is a state in which the third stop operation has been performed.

In this state, when the third stop operation is received, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped from rotating, and the light emitting bodies 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139 emit blue light, for example. It emits light to notify that the pressing operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been accepted. Also, when the third stop operation is received, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 emit green light, for example.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 269(e) is a state in which medals have been paid out.

In this state, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 emit, for example, yellow light when the medals are paid out, and the payout number indicator 127 displays a number indicating the number of payouts.

In this example, the period from after accepting the third stop operation shown in FIG. 4(d) to before accepting the pressing operation of the start lever 135 shown in FIG. The period from after accepting the pressing operation of the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 10(b) to before accepting the third stop operation shown in FIG. 10(d) is the period during reel rotation.

<Two-stage error notification/Embodiment 1>
Next, using FIG. 270, Example 1 of two-step error notification will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing an example of the mode of notification means in two-step error notification 1 in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 270(a) is a state in which the first stop operation has been performed in a certain game.

In this state, the rotation of the left reel 110 is stopped when the operation of pressing the left stop button 137 is accepted as the first stop operation, and the light emitter 137a of the stop button 137 emits blue light, for example. It notifies that the pressing operation of the stop button 137 has been received.

Also, although not shown, the speakers 272 and 277 output an effect sound (for example, a voice saying "chance") triggered by the pressing operation of the left stop button 137 as the first stop operation. In addition, the normal effect by the liquid crystal display device 157 and the light emission of the light emission pattern for effect by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 continue the state before the first stop operation.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 270(b) is a state in which a certain time (in this example, 5 seconds) has passed since the selector error (certain error) occurred. The selector error (certain error) in this example is an error that occurs when, for example, a fraudulent person (a so-called goto master) illegally opens the front door 102 and malfunctions the internal medal selector. be.

Since this state is the period during which the reel is rotating (the first period during which a certain error cannot be canceled), the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means) executes the first error notification. On the other hand, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (second effect means) continue to emit light in the effect light pattern, and the speaker (second effect means) continues to output sound effect.

In the first error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means) of this example, a display including a character string "An error has occurred. Details will be displayed after the game ends." is executed. This first error notification is a notification that can identify the occurrence of an error, but is a notification that cannot identify a selector error (a certain error) that is the type of error.

In addition, the first error notification includes a notification to call the amusement store clerk (for example, a display such as "Please call the attendant") and a notification to suggest an inspection point (for example, a display such as "Please inspect the selector"). ) and an error notification that does not include a notification suggesting that the error can be canceled (for example, a display such as "error can be canceled").

Also, in the same state, an error code (E3 in this example) corresponding to the selector error (certain error) is displayed on the payout number indicator 127 controlled by the main control section 300 .

With such a configuration, the player is unlikely to notice the occurrence of an error displayed on the payout number display 127, so the player can continue the game without worrying about the occurrence of the error. It is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to play, and to notify the game store clerks, who are accustomed to the display of the game machines, of the occurrence of the error.

The mode of the first error notification is not limited to this example. It may be possible to visually recognize the effect being executed from the front by displaying the effect.

With such a configuration, even if an error occurs, the effect can be visually recognized, the player can continue the game, and the player's desire to play can be prevented from declining.

Further, in this example, even during execution of the first error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means), the light emitters 138a and 139a of the stop buttons 138 and 139 emit, for example, orange light. , and that the stop buttons 138 and 139 can be pressed.

With such a configuration, even if an error occurs, the operation means can be operated, the player can continue the game, and the player's desire to play can be prevented from declining.

The state shown in FIG. 270(c) is a state in which the third stop operation has been performed in the game.

Since this state is the period during which the reels are stopped (the second period during which a certain error can be canceled), the liquid crystal display device 157 (first effect means) displays the first error notification mode. In addition to executing the second error notification by changing (effect means) also performs error notification by emitting light of the light emission pattern for error (in this example, emitting red light).

In the second error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 (first rendering means) of this example, "E3: Selector error, please call a nearby staff. The error can be canceled. Please check the selector." Executes a display containing the string This second error notification is a notification capable of specifying a selector error (certain error).

In addition, the second error notification includes a notification to call the amusement store clerk (in this example, "Please call the staff") and a notification suggesting an inspection point (in this example, "Please check the selector"). ) and a notification suggesting that the error can be canceled (in this example, a display such as "error can be canceled").

According to this example, in the first period, although the first error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, it is impossible to cancel the certain error. (Goto, etc.) can be notified to the surroundings, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. In addition, during the second period, it is possible to execute a second error notification in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to cancel the certain error. Since it is different, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error.

Further, the second error notification is an error notification with more detailed information regarding a certain error than the first error notification, and the second error notification is an error notification that can specify a certain error. Therefore, the error can be handled more appropriately.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the payout number indicator 127 controlled by the main control unit 300 continues to display the error code (E3 in this example) corresponding to the selector error (certain error). do. In this example, the error code display is started 5 seconds after the occurrence of the selector error, but the display may be started at the timing when the third stop operation is received.

Further, in the same state, by turning off the backlight of each reel 110 to 112 in the stopped state, an error notification regarding a selector error (certain error) is performed.

According to this example, when a certain error (selector error in this example) occurs in the second period, the first rendering means (liquid crystal display device 157 in this example) changes the mode of error notification. Instead, the second error notification is executed, and the second effect means (in this example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144) also executes error notification in relation to the certain error. It is possible to reliably notify that it is the second period in which cancellation is possible. Further, when a certain error occurs in the first period, the first rendering means executes the first error notification, and the second rendering means executes before the certain error occurs. Since the presentation that was being performed is continued, it is possible to notify that it is the first period in which it is impossible to cancel a certain error, and it is possible to prevent useless error cancellation operations.

Note that the timing of the first error notification is not limited to this example, and may be when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of a certain error, or may be simultaneous with the occurrence of a certain error. Also, the timing of the second error notification is not limited to this example. For example, if medals are to be paid out after the third stop operation, it may be before the payout is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent payout by a fraudulent person.

Also, when a certain error occurs during the second period, only the second error notification may be performed (the first error notification may not be performed). Also, the combination of the notification means used for the first error notification and the second error notification is not particularly limited. For example, the combination of the notification means used for the first error notification The combination may be different.

<Two-stage error notification/Embodiment 2>
Next, Example 2 of two-step error notification will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIGS. 271(a) to 271(d) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of the mode of the notification means when executing the third error notification in the two-stage error notification. 271(a), 271(c), and 271(d) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 270(a) to 270(c), so description thereof is omitted. do.

The state shown in FIG. 271(b) is a state in which one minute has passed without the stop operation being performed after the first stop operation shown in FIG. 271(a).

In the same state, the state of reel rotation continued for one minute, and an error during reel rotation (an error different from a certain error) occurred. In the example, the notification including the character string "Please stop the reels" is executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 271(c) is a state in which a certain time (in this example, 5 seconds) has passed since the selector error (certain error) occurred.

In the same state, a selector error (a certain error) occurs in a state where an error during reel rotation (an error different from a certain error) occurs and a notification (third error notification) prompting a stop operation is being executed. Since the error has occurred, the first error notification is executed so that the notification (third error notification) prompting the stop operation is difficult to identify (invisible).

On the other hand, if a selector error (certain error) occurs and an error during reel rotation (an error other than a certain error) occurs, a notification (a third error It may be configured so that the notification is not performed (becomes invisible).

FIG. 271(g) is a diagram showing a modification of the first error notification.

In the two-step error notification described with reference to FIG. 270, five seconds after the occurrence of a selector error (certain error), a second message containing the character string "An error has occurred. Details will be displayed after the game ends." An example of executing one error notification has been shown.

However, the first error notification is not limited to this example, and as shown in FIG. A first including a notification prompting transition from a period (a first period in which a certain error cannot be canceled) to a period in which the reel is stopped (a second period in which a certain error can be canceled) error notification may be executed.

With such a configuration, by stopping the reel, it is possible to shift to the second period in which a certain error can be canceled, so that the error can be quickly dealt with in the second period. can be done. In particular, when an important error occurs as a certain error, if such a first error notification is performed, the error notification will be performed preferentially for fraudulent actions, etc., and appropriate measures will be taken for the error. can take action.

<Two-stage error notification/Summary>
As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 263) can detect an error (for example, in the case of a slot machine, a door open error, a hopper empty error, and a medal insertion error). 1 to 4, Medal payout error 1 to 3, Overflow error, RAM failure, Winning error, etc. If it is a pachinko machine, lower tray full error, payout device error, over payout error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, Abnormal magnetic field error, abnormal magnetic field error, frame open error, RAM clear error, impact sensor error, etc.) can be notified by means of notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 269, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 265) , upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of stop buttons 137-139, backlights of reels 110-112, reels 110-112 shown in FIG. A game machine equipped with a certain error (for example, selector error shown in FIG. 270 (b)), a period during which it is impossible to cancel the error (hereinafter referred to as "first period" For example, a period during which the reel is stopped) and a period during which the certain error can be cleared (hereinafter referred to as a "second period"; for example, a period during which the reel is rotating). One error notification (for example, the first error notification shown in FIG. 270 (b)) and a second error notification different from the first error notification (for example, the second error shown in FIG. 270 (c) notification), and when the certain error occurs in the first period, the first error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error, and the certain error in the second period When an error occurs, the second error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error, and the notification modes of the first error notification and the second error notification are different notification modes. It is a game machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the first period, it is possible to execute the first error notification in relation to a certain error, but it is impossible to cancel the certain error. It is possible to inform the surroundings that a fraudulent act (such as a hoax) has occurred by the person doing the act, and to prevent the fraudulent act. In addition, during the second period, it is possible to execute a second error notification in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to cancel the certain error. Since it is different, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error.

Further, the second error notification is more detailed error notification than the first error notification (e.g., notification including error name and error code, notification to call a store clerk (e.g., , Error notification including display and sound such as "Please call the staff"), error notification including notification suggesting inspection points (for example, display and sound such as "Please check the selector"), error cancellation is possible. It may also be an error notification that includes a message suggesting that it is a period of time (for example, a display or voice saying "error can be canceled").

With such a configuration, errors can be handled more appropriately.

Further, the first error notification is a notification that allows identification of the occurrence of an error, but is a notification that cannot identify the certain error, and the second error notification is a notification that the error cannot be identified. It may also be an error notification that can specify an error that causes the error.

With such a configuration, errors can be handled more appropriately.

Further, the notification means is means including a plurality of effect means, and the plurality of effect means includes a first effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) and a second effect means different from the first effect means. (for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the speakers 272 and 277, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112), and when the certain error occurs in the first period, the first The rendering means executes the first error notification, the second rendering means continues the rendering that was being executed before the certain error occurred, and the certain error occurs during the second period. occurs, the first effect means changes the mode of error notification and executes the second error notification, and the second effect means also performs error notification in relation to the certain error may be executed.

With such a configuration, when a certain error occurs in the second period, the second rendering means also executes error notification in relation to the certain error, so that the certain error can be canceled. It is possible to reliably inform that it is a second period. Further, when a certain error occurs in the first period, the first rendering means executes the first error notification, and the second rendering means executes before the certain error occurs. Since the presentation that was being performed is continued, it is possible to notify that it is the first period in which it is impossible to cancel a certain error, and it is possible to prevent useless error cancellation operations.

The first period is a period during which the game is in progress (for example, a period during which the reels are rotating), and the second period is a period during which the game is stopped (for example, when the reels are stopped). period).

With such a configuration, while the first error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error during the period in which the game is progressing (for example, during the period during which the reels are rotating), Since it is impossible to cancel the , it is possible to inform the surroundings that a fraudulent act (such as a fraud) has occurred by a fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. Also, during a period in which the game is stopped (for example, a period in which the reels are stopped), a second error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, and the error can be canceled. Moreover, since the notification mode is different from that of the first error notification, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 263) can detect errors (for example, in the case of slot machines, door open error, hopper empty error, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, Medal payout error 1-3, overflow error, RAM failure, winning error, etc. If it is a pachinko machine, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic error, Abnormal magnetic field error, frame open error, RAM clear error, impact sensor error, etc.) A gaming machine equipped with upper lamps 142, side lamps 144, light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of stop buttons 137-139, backlights of reels 110-112, reels 110-112 shown in FIG. The notification means is means including a plurality of effect means, and when a certain error (for example, a selector error shown in FIG. 270(b)) occurs, it is impossible to cancel the error. period (hereinafter referred to as "first period"; for example, the period during which the reel is stopped) and a period during which the certain error can be canceled (hereinafter referred to as "second period"; for example, during reel rotation) period), and the error notification includes a first error notification (for example, the first error notification shown in FIG. 270(b)) and a second error notification different from the first error notification (for example, second error notification shown in FIG. 270(c)), and when the certain error occurs in the first period, the first error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error. and when the certain error occurs in the second period, the second error notification can be executed in relation to the certain error, and the first error notification and the second error The notification mode of the notification is a different notification mode, the first error notification is an error notification executed using the first number of effect means among the plurality of effect means, and the second error The notification is an error notification executed using a second number of effect means among the plurality of effect means, and the first number and the second number are different. is.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the first period, it is possible to execute the first error notification in relation to a certain error, but it is impossible to cancel the certain error. It is possible to inform the surroundings that a fraudulent act (such as a hoax) has occurred by the person doing the act, and to prevent the fraudulent act. In addition, during the second period, it is possible to execute a second error notification in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to cancel the certain error. Since it is different, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error. In addition, since the number of effect means used for error notification is different, it is possible to distinguish between the first period and the second period, and to recognize that the second period in which the error can be canceled has started. This makes it possible to quickly deal with the error and to improve the convenience of the store clerk and the like.

Also, the second number may be larger than the first number.

With such a configuration, by increasing the number of effect means used in the second error notification than in the first error notification, the start of the second period in which the error can be canceled can be more easily detected. Errors can be reliably recognized, and errors can be dealt with quickly.

Further, the plurality of effect means includes a first effect means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157) and a second effect means different from the first effect means (for example, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, speaker 272, 277, backlight of reels 110 to 112), the first effect means is effect means used for the first error notification and the second error notification, and the second effect means may be effect means used for the second error notification.

With such a configuration, when a certain error occurs in the second period, the second rendering means also executes error notification in relation to the certain error, so that the certain error can be canceled. It is possible to reliably inform that it is a second period. Further, when a certain error occurs in the first period, the first rendering means executes the first error notification, and the second rendering means executes before the certain error occurs. Since it is possible to continue the presentation that was being performed, it is possible to notify that it is the first period in which it is impossible to cancel a certain error, and it is possible to prevent useless error cancellation operations.

Further, the first effect means executes the first error notification in the first notification mode during the first period, and performs the second error notification in the second notification mode during the second period. and the first notification mode and the second notification mode may be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the first period and the second period, to recognize that the second period in which the error can be canceled has started, and to correct the error. While being able to respond quickly, the convenience of store clerks, etc. of a game store can be improved.

Further, the first effect means may be means including display means, and the second effect means may be means including light emitting means and sound output means.

The first period is a period during which the game is in progress (for example, a period during which the reels are rotating), and the second period is a period during which the game is stopped (for example, when the reels are stopped). period).

With such a configuration, while the first error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error during the period in which the game is progressing (for example, during the period during which the reels are rotating), Since it is impossible to cancel the , it is possible to inform the surroundings that a fraudulent act (such as a fraud) has occurred by a fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. Also, during a period in which the game is stopped (for example, a period in which the reels are stopped), a second error notification can be executed in relation to a certain error, and the error can be canceled. Moreover, since the notification mode is different from that of the first error notification, it is possible to take a different response from the first error notification, and it is possible to appropriately respond to the error.

Also, the error notification by the first production means (for example, the display of "an error has occurred") is switched to the notification by the second production means (for example, the sound of "an error has occurred"). good too.

In addition, the first error notification is an error notification that does not include notification to call the amusement arcade clerk (for example, a display or voice saying, "Please call the attendant"), and the second error notification is an error notification that does not include the amusement arcade error notification including notification to call a store clerk.

In addition, the first error notification is an error notification that does not include a notification suggesting an inspection location (for example, a display or voice such as "please inspect the selector"), and the second error notification is an error notification that does not include an inspection location. It may be an error notification including a notification that suggests.

Further, the second error notification may be an error notification including a notification indicating that the error can be canceled (for example, display or voice saying "error can be canceled").

Further, the first error notification is an error notification that includes a notification indicating that the error cannot be cleared during a period (for example, a display or voice saying "error cannot be cleared"), and the second error notification includes The error notification may be an error notification that does not include a notification suggesting that the error cannot be cleared during the period.

In addition, in the first period or the second period, an error other than the certain error may occur. It may be an error in which a notification prompting a reel stop operation (for example, a notification prompting a stop operation (third error notification) shown in FIG. 271(b)) is made when a minute has elapsed.

Further, it may be configured such that the third error notification is not performed (becomes invisible) when the other error occurs while the certain error is occurring.

Also, when the other error occurs and the certain error (for example, the selector error (certain error) shown in FIG. 271(c)) occurs while the third error notification is being performed. The first error annunciation may be performed such that the third error annunciation is difficult to identify.

In addition, when the timing of multiple error notifications overlaps, or when the effect overlaps with the error notification, at least one of them may be translucent so that both may be visible, or one may be overlaid on the other. Both may be visually recognized by wrapping and displaying.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

A slot machine according to an embodiment of a gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 272 to 283. FIG.

In the slot machine of the basic embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, it is determined by lottery (internal lottery) whether the internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is appropriate, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. The rotation is stopped individually, and if the condition determined by the symbol combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. This game machine advances a series of games that end without paying out game media if they do not match.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 272 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed in the upper part of the main body 101, and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. ing. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the basic embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at regular intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 is the upper stage symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 is the middle stage symbol of the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 is the left reel symbol. The pattern displayed on the lower stage of the reel 111 is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 is the middle stage symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 is the lower stage of the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 are referred to as right reel upper stage symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 are referred to as the right reel middle stage symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 112 are referred to as right reel lower stage symbols. Each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is displayed vertically three times on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Also, in the basic embodiment, three reels are provided on the top of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

Backlights for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

Here, the winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 273, is displayed. There is provided only one right-sloping winning line composed of symbols and symbols on the bottom row of the right reel. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 272 requires 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the winning lines become valid, and when 3 medals are betted, the winning lines become valid. become. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the right-down winning line, a middle winning line consisting of left reel middle symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel middle symbols, and left reel bottom symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel top symbols. A total of 3 lines of the upward-sloping pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (eg, BB1, BB2, RB) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that the internal winning of a specific winning combination has been carried over. This is a lamp that informs the player of a winning state or a special game state that is shifted by winning a specific winning combination. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the basic embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. (up to 3 cards). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. In the basic embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, after inserting the desired number of medals into the medal insertion slot 141 or after inserting the required number of medals by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132 (except for the case of replaying), the start lever 135 is operated. 110-112 will start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. As shown in FIG. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player. These stop buttons 137 to 139 correspond to an example of stop operation means.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided on the top of the slot machine 100 to the outside. The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided at the bottom inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game.

An effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) is provided in the central portion of the front door 102 . It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the basic embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it could also be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in the basic embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of first display means and second display means.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit that controls the effect according to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit. and a control unit. Among them, the main control unit corresponds to an example of the stop control means and the internal winning result determination means.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include BB1, BB2, RB, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell, and Replay. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the basic embodiment, BB1, BB2, and RB are combinations (operating combinations) that transition to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player upon winning. A replay is a combination that can be played again without inserting new medals. These BB1, BB2, RB and Replay are sometimes called "actors". In addition, the "winning" in the basic embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line, for example, BB1, BB2, RB and replay prizes are included. BB1, BB2, and RB are special roles that are carried over to the next game when it is not determined to be winning, and the other roles are general not to be carried over to the next game when it is not determined to be winning. is a role.

BB1, BB2, and RB are combinations (operating combinations) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. However, medals will not be paid out due to winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combinations are "red square-red square-red square" for BB1, "blue square-blue square-blue square" for BB2, and "black square-black square-black square" for RB. .

When BB1, BB2 and RB are internally won, an internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won special combination is set to ON. When these flags are set to ON, the main control unit shifts the game state to a special combination internal winning state. This flag is maintained in the on state until the corresponding working role is won, and it becomes a state in which it is easy to win these working roles in the next and subsequent games. For example, even if the player does not win the role in the game in which BB1 is internally elected, the same state as the state in which BB1 is internally elected will be obtained in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding pattern combinations will be aligned to easily win the prize.

In the state of internal winning of a special combination, when a combination other than the special combination is internally won, reel stop control is executed so that symbols constituting the other combination are preferentially aligned.

A replay is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combination is "blue circle-blue circle-blue circle".

The replay may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when a replay wins, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game, or the medals inserted in the replay winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are. may be

Cherry, watermelon, and bell are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "red triangle-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "green square-green square-green square" for watermelon, and "yellow triangle-yellow triangle-yellow triangle" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "red triangle-ANY-ANY", the pattern on the upper middle reel of the left reel 110 should be "red triangle", and the patterns of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any patterns. In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to the roles other than cherry may not all be the same symbols, and may be different in shape and color to the extent that the three symbols can be visually recognized as roughly the same. , may be a combination of three symbols that are generally the same and cannot be visually recognized.

≪Explanation of operation≫
The features of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below using an operation example.

[Pattern fluctuation effect and pattern stop effect)]
In the slot machine 100, the game progresses by operating the start lever 135 to start the rotation of the plurality of reels 110 to 112, and by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels 110 to 112. . That is, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 function as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols.

On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, the effect of changing the pattern according to the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 (hereinafter referred to as the symbol change effect), and the effect symbol for stopping according to the stop of the reels 110 to 112 ( Hereafter, an effect (hereinafter referred to as a symbol stop effect) for displaying a stop effect symbol) is executed. The symbol variation effect is a effect of displaying an image simulating a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. The symbol stop effect is a effect of displaying an image simulating a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. That is, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the symbol variation effect corresponding to each of these reels 110 to 112 is executed. Then, when the stop operation is performed, the symbol variation effect corresponding to the reel corresponding to this stop operation is switched to the symbol stop effect. That is, the symbol stop effect is started when any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped, and the images corresponding to the reels 110 to 112 are displayed as completed based on the stop operation of all the reels 110 to 112. According to the symbol variation effect and the symbol stop effect, it can be perceived as if reels other than the actual reels 110 to 112 are provided.

In the symbol variation effect and the symbol stop effect, symbols different from those of the reels 110 to 112 are used which are suitable for the scene during the game. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the winning line on the actual reels 110 to 112, the stop effect symbols corresponding to this winning combination are displayed, but even if the winning combination is not won. For example, when the game moves to an advantageous state or when some privilege is obtained, the corresponding stop effect pattern may be displayed. Also, even if the winning combination is different, there are cases where a common stop effect symbol and its combination are displayed. In addition, various patterns can be used in the pattern variation effect and the pattern stop effect, such as using a pattern that matches the effect scene as described in the embodiment described later, and the interest in the game can be improved. . Incidentally, such symbols are not limited to symbols different from those of the reels 110 to 112, and the same symbols may be used.

In the slot machine 100, the reels 110 to 112 are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to visually recognize, and furthermore, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are not very distinctive. Furthermore, due to the configuration in which the winning line is set diagonally downward to the right, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning of the winning combination. These configurations are for allowing the player to proceed with the game while looking at the effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device). Regarding the symbol variation effect and the symbol stop effect, it can be adopted without being limited to such a configuration that makes it difficult to grasp the winning of the role, and it is expected that the player will proceed with the game mainly with the symbol change effect and the symbol stop effect. can. In addition, since various symbols can be used in the symbol variation effect and the symbol stop effect, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Winning confirmation display]
As described above, various symbols can be used in the symbol variation effect and the symbol stop effect, but on the other hand, it may be difficult to grasp whether or not the actual reels 110 to 112 have won a role with only these effects. . In the slot machine 100, when a winning combination is won on the reels 110 to 112, a corresponding winning confirmation display (winning confirmation effect) is executed separately from the symbol stop effect. In this winning confirmation display, the same symbols as those of the reels 110 to 112 are used to display the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. On the other hand, if the winning combination is not won, the winning confirmation display is not executed. According to this winning determination display, when the reels 110 to 112 are provided at positions that are difficult to see, or when the winning line is difficult to understand even if the reels 110 to 112 are at positions that are easy to see, Even with a configuration that makes it difficult to grasp the winning of a winning combination, it is possible to make it easier to grasp that a winning combination has been won on the actual reels 110-112.

The symbols used for the confirmation of the winning prize are not limited to the same symbols as those of the reels 110 to 112, but may be deformed symbols or simplified symbols excluding detailed features. Further, for example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination consists of a plurality of identical symbols, only one symbol may be displayed. In any case, it is sufficient if the display makes it possible to easily grasp that a winning combination has been won on the actual reels 110 to 112. For example, the name of the winning combination or the name of the symbol together with the symbol (or without using the symbol). may be displayed.

Further, in the example described later, the effect image display device 157 executes both the symbol variation effect, the symbol stop effect, and the prize confirmation display, but the same display device is used for these effects and displays. The configuration is not limited to the configuration, and each configuration may be executed in a different display device.

[Example of symbol change effect, symbol stop effect and winning confirmation display (1)]
An example of the symbol variation effect, the symbol stop effect, and the prize confirmation display will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 274(a) shows an example of the operation of the effect image display device 157 when the result of the internal lottery is a loss. Although illustration is omitted, in this example, it is assumed that a background suitable for the exploration scene is displayed. FIG. 274(a) shows that the stop operations are executed in the order of left, middle, right, and the cloud pattern is stopped for each of the stop operations. This cloud pattern is a stop effect pattern corresponding to a failure in the exploration scene here, and is an example of a pattern suitable for the scene during the game (exploration scene). Then, when the insertion operation for starting the next game is performed, the display of the cloud pattern combination is cleared. The timing of this clearing may be the operation timing of the start lever 135 in the next game or the timing of starting rotation of the reels 110-112.

FIG. 274(b) shows an example of the operation of the effect image display device 157 when the result of the internal lottery is Bell. Although illustration is omitted, in this example, it is assumed that a background suitable for the exploration scene is displayed. FIG. 274(b) shows that the stop operations are executed in the order of left, middle, right, and the shield pattern is stopped for each of the stop operations. This shield pattern is a stop effect pattern corresponding to the bell in the exploration scene here, and is an example of a pattern suitable for the scene during the game (exploration scene). Also, when all the stop operations are completed and the bell is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the bell (see FIG. 273) is displayed at the lower left of the screen in addition to the stop performance symbols. This display corresponds to an example of winning confirmation display. In addition, in the example of FIG. 274(a) described above, since no prize has been won, this prize confirmation display is not executed (nothing is displayed). Then, when the insertion operation for starting the next game is performed, the prize confirmation display is cleared. In this example, the symbol combination of the shield (symbol stop effect) remains displayed, but is cleared at the operation timing of the start lever 135 in the next game or at the timing when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. be. That is, when the winning combination is won, the symbols by the symbol stop effect are cleared after the winning confirmation display. For example, if the contents of the scene during the game (exploration scene) change due to the winning of the bell, the scene during the game is preferably displayed by displaying the pattern (shield pattern) for as long as possible. can be expressed. Not limited to this configuration, it may be cleared at the same time, but in the case of the above configuration, it is possible to display for a longer time that the profit is obtained by the symbol stop effect, and the symbol stop effect can be displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by.

[Example of symbol change effect, symbol stop effect and winning confirmation display (2)]
An example of the symbol variation effect, the symbol stop effect, and the prize confirmation display (winning prize confirmation effect) will be described below with reference to FIG. 275 .

FIG. 275(a) shows an example of the operation of the effect image display device 157 and the reels 110 to 112 when the result of the internal lottery is watermelon. Although illustration is omitted, in this example, it is assumed that a background matching the cave scene is displayed. In FIG. 275(a), stop operations are executed in the order of left, middle, right, and the symbol of the treasure box is stopped for each stop operation. The pattern of this treasure box is a stop effect pattern corresponding to the watermelon in the cave scene here. Also, when all stop operations are completed and a watermelon is won, a symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon (see FIG. 273) is displayed at the lower left of the screen separately from the stop effect symbols. This display corresponds to an example of winning confirmation display. Furthermore, here, an example is shown in which an image of light surrounding the design of the treasure box is displayed at the timing when it is determined that the watermelon has won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 275(b), of the operations shown in FIG. 275(a), operations after the third stop operation will be supplemented. In addition, in the explanation here, when three treasure chest symbols are displayed in the symbol stop effect, the privilege is granted, and when three treasure chest symbols are not displayed, the privilege is not granted. There are games in which three treasure chests are displayed together and games in which three treasure chests are not displayed (for example, only two treasure chests are displayed). It is assumed that two treasure chests are complete.

In FIG. 275(a), a prize confirmation display indicating a watermelon prize for the third stop operation and a symbol stop effect by a symbol combination of three treasure chests are displayed. At this time, if the winning determination display is executed after displaying the symbol combination of the three treasure boxes (symbol stop performance), the grounds for awarding the privilege are unclear, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the watermelon wins due to the third stop, as shown in FIG. By displaying the third treasure box in (the second scene in FIG. 275(b)), the expectation can be heightened. It should be noted that benefits are provided for both cherries and watermelons, and in the case of a structure in which watermelons are given benefits that are more advantageous than cherries, three treasure box patterns are combined after the watermelon wins (design stop effect). is displayed, it is possible to heighten expectations for a large privilege.

After that, at the timing when it is determined that the watermelon has won, the operation of displaying the image of the light surrounding the treasure chest pattern is the same as in FIG. scene). The size of the privilege is determined by the presence or absence of the light image. After that, this image changes into a pattern of an open treasure box, and the characters "acquired" indicating that the privilege has been obtained are superimposed on the pattern of the treasure box (fourth in FIG. 275(b)). scene). After the execution of the winning confirmation display, the player who expected the image of the light surrounding the pattern of the treasure box to be displayed won the watermelon because the expected display was performed. You can feel the good luck of

Then, when the inserting operation for starting the next game is performed, first, the prize confirmation display is cleared (fifth scene in FIG. 275(b)), and then the treasure box is opened at the operation timing of the start lever 135 in the next game. The symbols and winning characters are cleared (sixth scene in FIG. 275(b)). The timing of clearing the symbol of the treasure box and the character of acquisition may be the timing of starting rotation of the reels 110-112.

In the above example, the configuration in which the symbol stop effect is completed later than the display of winning confirmation (the first scene and the second scene in FIG. 275(b)) has been described, but the specifics of this processing will be described below. An example will be described.

First, the main control section generates winning information when the third stop operation is performed, and transmits a winning (watermelon winning) command to the sub-control section. Then, the sub-control section executes the prize confirmation display upon receiving this command. Since the main control unit transmits the command regardless of whether the reel corresponding to the third stop operation is stopped, information can be transmitted to the sub control unit in the shortest possible time. Thereafter, the main control section generates reel stop information in response to the fact that the reel on which the third stop operation was performed has stopped, and transmits a reel stop command to the sub-control section. Then, the sub-control section executes processing for completing the symbol stop effect upon receiving this command. According to the flow described above, the symbol stop effect can be completed later than the prize confirmation display.

Further, the main control unit generates prize winning information when there is a watermelon prize, and transmits a prize winning (watermelon prize) command to the sub-control unit. Then, the sub-control section executes the prize confirmation display upon receiving this command. After that, the main control unit performs a payout by winning a watermelon, and then transmits a command of payout end information to the sub-control unit. Then, the sub-control section executes processing for completing the symbol stop effect upon receiving this command. In this case, the completion of the symbol stop effect can be completed later than the prize confirmation display by the time required for the main control unit to pay out 12 coins.

In addition, the sub-control unit may be configured to first perform a winning confirmation display by a watermelon winning or third stop operation command, and then display the third treasure box after one second has passed (symbol stop effect is completed).

[Example of symbol change effect, symbol stop effect and winning confirmation display (3)]
An example of the symbol variation effect, the symbol stop effect, and the prize confirmation display will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 276(a) shows an example of the operation of the effect image display device 157 and the reels 110-112 when the result of the internal lottery is Bell. Although illustration is omitted, in this example, it is assumed that a background matching the cave scene is displayed. Also, here, it is assumed that in order to win the bell, it is necessary to perform stop operations in the order of left, middle, and right. In this example, unlike the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275, operation navigation is executed instead of symbol variation effect. FIG. 276(a) shows that operation navigation prompting stop operations in the order of left, middle, and right by operating the start lever 135 is displayed. Then, according to this operation navigation, stop operations are executed in the order of left, middle, right, and it is shown that the design of the sword is stopped for each of the stop operations. This sword pattern is a stop effect pattern corresponding to the bell in the cave scene here. Also, when all the stop operations are completed and the bell is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the bell (see FIG. 273) is displayed at the lower left of the screen in addition to the stop performance symbols. This display corresponds to an example of winning confirmation display. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 276(b), a bell pattern is displayed instead of the sword pattern as a pattern combination generally recognized as a bell. Even if the bell "yellow triangle-yellow triangle-yellow triangle" is displayed, it is difficult to recognize it as a bell. It can be easily recognized. In this example, the player can know that he or she has won a role by changing the pattern to cherry, watermelon, or bell, which are commonly used in slot machines. It should be noted that such changing patterns are not limited to general patterns, and various patterns can be used.

[Example of symbol change effect, symbol stop effect and winning confirmation display (4)]
An example of winning confirmation display will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the examples of FIGS. 274 to 276 described above, the configuration for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in the winning confirmation display has been described. You may add the display which can grasp a line. In FIG. 277(a), a state in which the bell pattern is stopped on the winning line set diagonally downward to the right is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 277(b), the winning line on which the winning combination is established may be displayed during a period other than the time of winning. The left diagram of FIG. 277(b) shows a state in which the winning line set diagonally downward to the right during reel rotation is emphasized and displayed. The right diagram of FIG. 277(b) shows a state in which a bell pattern is displayed on the winning line set diagonally downward to the right after the reels are stopped. As in these examples, the configuration may be such that the pay line is displayed so that the winning line can be grasped more clearly.

[Operation when power is turned on (1)]
The operation of the slot machine 100 when the power is turned on will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the slot machine 100, when the power is turned on, the effect image display device 157 performs an activation display (for example, displaying an image such as "preparing for image display") indicating that it is being activated. This activation display is a display for notifying that activation processing (processing on the side of the main control section that controls the progress of the game and processing on the side of the sub-control section that controls the effect) immediately after the power is turned on is being executed. Then, when the start-up processing is completed, a display during play (game background display in FIG. 278) is executed instead of the start-up display. FIG. 278 shows the flow of this display change.

In the start-up display, an indication of the degree of progress of processing such as "50% completed" is displayed (in this example, progress is made in increments of 1%), and at 100% the processing is almost completed. If the message "100% completed" is displayed when the start-up process is actually completed, the background image displayed during the game is instantly displayed, making it difficult to recognize the end of the start-up process. For this reason, a period (for example, 1 second) is provided for this display after the startup process is completed so that the display of "100% completed" can be easily recognized. However, as for the effect means other than the effect image display device 157, the effect in the playable state is executed first. It becomes the flow that the production starts. It should be noted that "100% completed" may be displayed just before the end of the start-up process. can do. In addition, the content of the activation display may be a display such as "○% completed", a meter indicating the degree of progress of the activation process, or a remaining time of the activation process. Also, the start-up display may not be displayed during execution of the start-up process. For example, even if the activation process is executed immediately after the power is turned on, there may be a period during which the activation display is not performed. This configuration may speed up the boot process. Further, for example, there may be a non-display period from just before the end of the activation process until the end. In this case, it can be understood that the activation process is about to end due to the non-display period.

Further, in the slot machine 100, a power-on sound is output when the power is turned on, in addition to the above-described activation display. This power-on sound is a sound that notifies that the power has just been turned on (for example, "The power has been turned on"). This is to let you know that there was Note that the power-on sound does not have to start immediately after the power is turned on, and even if the startup process is executed immediately after the power is turned on, there may be a period during which the power-on sound is not output. This configuration may speed up the boot process. In the following description, the period from the start of the initial output of the power-on sound to the end of the final output of the power-on sound will be referred to as the execution period of the power-on sound. The execution period of this power-on sound is shorter than the execution period of the activation display, as shown in FIG. That is, when the power is turned on, the power-on sound is repeatedly output while executing the activation display, and then the power-on sound is terminated and only the activation display is displayed. . Figure 278 shows the flow of these changes. It should be noted that the power-on sound as described above is only an example, and other than such an example, a power-on sound in which some kind of sound is continuously output (no silent period) may be used.

As for start-up processing, there are processing on the side of the main control section that controls the progress of the game and processing on the side of the sub-control section that controls the effect, and the processing time on the side of the main control section is shorter. Therefore, even if the process on the side of the sub-controller is not finished, it is possible to proceed with the game starting from the insertion of medals when the process on the side of the main controller is finished. It should be noted that medals inserted before the end of processing on the main control unit side are not detected and are dropped into the receiving tray 161 as they are. In FIG. 278, it can be seen that the state where medals cannot be inserted and the state where payment cannot be made after the power is turned on change to the state where medals can be inserted and the state where payment is possible as the start-up processing on the main control unit side ends. It is shown.

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 278, the execution period of the power-on sound extends to the timing after medal insertion and payment operation become possible. Normally, corresponding sounds (medal insertion sound and settlement sound) are output for the coin insertion and settlement operation, but only when the power-on sound is being output, the corresponding sounds are not output. It's becoming In FIG. 278, for inserting (maintenance) of medals during the medal insertable period, the medal inserting sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output, and the medal inserting sound is output after the power-on sound is finished. It is shown that there are In the above example, the period during which the power-on sound is executed includes a silent period. On the other hand, in the case of a configuration in which the token insertion sound and the settlement sound can be output during the silent period of the power-on sound, as in the embodiment, it is possible to easily notice fraudulent insertion of tokens and to prevent fraud. can do.

The effect of the above configuration will be described below. Normally, the power is turned on when the hall is opened, but there are cases where the power is turned on even during business when the gaming machine is illegally used. The slot machine 100 employs a configuration in which a power-on sound continues to be emitted for a certain period of time so that such unauthorized power-on can be noticed.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which medals can be inserted after the activation process is completed, it will take a long time before medals can be inserted, and inconvenience will occur when the player wishes to proceed with preparations for the game. . Therefore, there is provided a period during which medals can be inserted even before the activation process is completely completed. However, when the medal insertion sound is output in response to the medal insertion, this sound interferes with the power-on sound, making it difficult to recognize the power-on sound, which causes a problem that it is difficult to notice fraud.

To address this problem, the slot machine 100 employs a configuration in which the token insertion sound and the settlement sound are not output while the power-on sound is being output (see FIG. 278). With this configuration, the power-on sound is not disturbed by other sounds, and the power-on sound can be easily recognized.

Also, for the above reasons, the power-on sound needs to be output at a relatively loud volume. In this case, there is a possibility of making the user feel annoyed. Therefore, the slot machine 100 is configured to end the output of the power-on sound before the end of the activation process (in FIG. 278, the time when the output of the game background sound is started). With this configuration as well, it is possible to make the power-on sound recognizable while making it less annoying. It should be noted that after the output of the power-on sound is completed, the state becomes possible to output sounds corresponding to coin insertion and settlement operation (see FIG. 278). For example, if the power is turned on illegally, it is conceivable that an illegal operation such as inserting medals or making a payment will be performed after that, but during the period when the power-on sound is not output and during the execution of the startup process is not yet in a state in which it is possible to output BGM or the like for presentation, and only the sounds of such operations are output. That is, since the output of the sound related to the unauthorized operation is conspicuous, it is possible to easily notice the unauthorized operation. For example, in the case of illegal insertion of medals without using actual medals, and the amount of the inserted medals is collected by the payment operation, the sound of both the insertion of medals and the payment operation will be output. , can make it easier to notice such fraud.

In the example of FIG. 278, the medal insertion sound and the settlement sound are not output while the power-on sound is being output. As described above, the sound volume of the token insertion sound and the settlement sound may be lower than normal (after the activation process). By outputting the token insertion sound and the settlement sound to such an extent that the power-on sound is not difficult to recognize, it is possible to grasp that the token insertion and settlement have occurred. Also, in the example of FIG. 278, the output of the power-on sound is terminated before the end of the startup process. may

Since the medal insertion sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output, the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals may be turned on when medals are inserted. good. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the state of medal insertion. Further, even during the period after the execution period of the power-on sound, when medals are inserted, the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals may be turned on. With this configuration, when the insertion immediately before and immediately after the end of the execution period of the power-on sound is continuously performed, the lamp can be lit continuously, making it easy to recognize the medal insertion state. be able to.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 278, the description has been made on the premise that the period during which the power-on sound is output coincides with the period during which the coin-insertion sound and the settlement sound are not output. for example, 1 second). For example, the medal insertion sound may be output just before the output of the power-on sound is finished, and after the output of the power-on sound is finished (for example, after one second has passed), the medal insertion sound is output. It may be in a state in which output is possible. Since medals are not necessarily inserted immediately after the output of the power-on sound is finished, any sound may not be output during a part of the game if it is convenient for processing or the like. As an example of such a configuration, the time is monitored regardless of the output period of the power-on sound, and when the time has passed (before or after the output of the power-on sound is finished), the power-on sound can be output. There are things to do.

Although the power-on sound has been described in the example of FIG. 278, in a game machine that requires the door to be opened when the power is turned on, in addition to the power-on sound, a door opening sound that notifies that the door is open may be used. is sometimes output. After the power is turned on, the door opening sound alone may have the same effect as the power-on sound. In addition, it may be a preparatory sound for a game or the like that is output when the power is turned on. That is, not only the power-on sound, but also any warning sound that is output during execution of the activation process at the time of power-on can have the same configuration. The door opening sound is preferably continued for a certain period of time even after the door is closed. For example, it is preferable to output the door opening sound for 10 seconds after detecting the door opening, or to output the door opening sound for 3 seconds after closing the door. The output of the door opening sound may end when the door is closed. As a countermeasure against fraud, the door is generally designed so that the power switch cannot be reached unless the door is opened wide, and it may be difficult to close the door immediately after operating the power switch. be.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 278, the configuration for displaying the game background or outputting the game background sound (BGM) when the start-up process ends has been described, but the behavior after the end of the start-up process is not limited to this. A demonstration may be executed without any background music, and BGM may or may not be output. It should be noted that FIG. 278 shows that the game background sound is output after the startup process is completed. means the sound corresponding to the state of Depending on the state of the game, there is a period during which the sound as the game background sound is not output, and the game background sound here includes such a period. In addition, when a medal insertion or payment operation is performed while a sound such as a game background sound is being output, the volume of another sound (for example, the sound of the game background sound) is output when the corresponding sound is output. may be reduced (including zero volume).

[Operation when power is turned on (2)]
In the example of FIG. 278, the output of the power-on sound is terminated during execution of the startup process, and a period of silence is provided unless an operation is performed. However, this silent period may occur each time the power is turned on. If it is known, there is a risk of causing fraud.

For this reason, there may be a case where there is a silent period as shown in FIG. 279(a) and a case where there is no silent period as shown in FIG. 279(b). FIG. 279 shows a startup display such as "preparing for image display" indicating preparation for displaying an image, and a power supply such as "ping-pong, ping-pong" indicating that power has been FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a period during which an input sound, a game background display indicating that a game is in progress, such as “coastal scenery,” and a game background sound, such as “sound of waves,” indicating that a game is in progress; A blank period indicates a silent period in which no sound is output. Note that the power-on sound and start-up display may be started immediately after the power is turned on, or may be started after a preparatory period after the power is turned on.

In FIG. 279(b), the game background sound is forwardly output after the power-on sound is finished so as not to cause a silent period, but the configuration is not limited to this. Also, in order to realize the operation of FIG. 279(b), it is sufficient to adopt a configuration in which the game background sound can be output forwardly in the start-up process on the sub-control unit side. Furthermore, after the end of the power-on sound, as shown in FIG. 279(c), the silent period may continue even after the startup process is completed, or in the case shown in FIG. 279(a). In addition to this, there may be a case shown in FIG. 279(b). In addition, in any of FIGS. 279(a) to (c), if the power-on sound is not output, the medal-throwing sound and the settlement sound can be output. Further, which of the actions in FIGS. 279(a) to (c) is to be executed may be determined by, for example, a lottery, or may be determined according to the state of the game after the activation process and the effect. In addition, in the case of FIG. 279(c), it is possible to make the medal insertion sound and the settlement sound more conspicuous.

[Operation when power is turned on (3)]
In the example of FIG. 278, a configuration has been described in which the token insertion sound and the settlement sound are not output while the power-on sound is being output, thereby making it easier to recognize the power-on sound. By restricting the output in the same manner as the token insertion sound and the settlement sound, the power-on sound can be easily recognized. For example, FIG. 280 shows an example in which power is interrupted during payout of medals based on winning or settlement, and the remaining medals are paid out after power is turned on. In this example, since the power-on sound is being output during the payout period of the remaining medals, the payout sound corresponding to this payout is not output. On the other hand, in the case of a payout during a game, the payout sound is output with a relatively loud volume as an anti-fraud measure. In this case, since there is no pay-out sound, only the power-on sound is output, and it is possible to make the user aware of the power failure. In practice, the power-on sound output from the speaker, the operation sound of the medal dispensing device dispensing medals, and the medal collision sound of the medal tray 161 are heard. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the medal dispensing device normally performs the medal dispensing operation and whether or not the medals dispensed by the medal dispensing device have reached the medal receiving tray 161.例文帳に追加It should be noted that if the payout is during a game, the payout sound is output at a high volume, making it difficult to confirm the operation of the medal payout device.

It should be noted that, for example, if the settlement button is operated after the power is turned on, the configuration may be such that the settlement sound is output even while the power-on sound is being output. The type of sound produced can be arbitrarily adopted.

[Operation when power is turned on (4)]
The above-described operation when the power is turned on can also be applied to a so-called medalless slot machine (hereinafter referred to as a medalless machine). In this description, the medalless machine is equipped with a gaming machine electronic storage device that increases the number of credits when electronic data is input from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). This medalless machine can add the number of games inserted by subtracting the number of credits stored in the gaming machine electronic storage device based on the operation of the bet button 132, and subtracts the number of games inserted based on the operation of the settlement button 134. can be added to the number of credits stored in the gaming machine electronic storage device. Input of electronic data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device) may be referred to as input, and the number of credits stored in the electronic storage device of the gaming machine based on the operation of the bet button 132 Subtracting and adding the number of game inputs may be referred to as input. When the power is turned on, a medal insertion sound (bet sound) may be output when any insertion is performed, or electronic data input from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device) may be output. A medal insertion sound may be output only when there is one. This is because there is a possibility that a fraudulent act will be carried out on the communication facility between the slot machine and a predetermined external device (electronic storage device), so that fraud can be easily noticed.

In a medalless machine, information on the number of game media owned is managed with an external device (for example, a lending machine, a hall computer), and a game can be played without getting actual medals. In this configuration, an operation for performing a counting process of transferring the number of owned game media (number of credits) stored in the medalless machine to an external device is called a counting operation. This counting operation can be handled in the same way as the medal insertion and settlement operation in FIG. A description will be given below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing a state change at power-on. In FIG. 281, activation processing is performed in a flow similar to that described in FIG. 278, and activation display and power-on sound are output. In the example of FIG. 278, even if the processing on the side of the sub-controller is not finished, it is possible to perform operations such as inserting medals when the processing on the side of the main controller is finished. In the example, the bet operation and the counting operation are enabled when the processing on the main control unit side is completed. In FIG. 281, the betting operation disabled state and the counting operation disabled state after the power is turned on change to the betting operation enabled state and the counting operation enabled state, respectively, with the end of the activation process on the main control unit side. is shown. Although this diagram shows that the bet operation and the counting operation can be performed at the same time, the timing at which these operations can be performed may differ depending on the order of processing on the main control unit side. .

In FIG. 278, a configuration has been described in which the medal insertion sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output, but in the example of FIG. there is In FIG. 281, during the period when the bet operation and the counting operation are possible, the sound corresponding to these operations is not output while the power-on sound is being output, and after the power-on sound is finished, the operation corresponding to these operations is performed. It is indicated that sound is being output.

The example of FIG. 281 has the same effect as the example of FIG. 278. For example, since the counting operation sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output, the power-on sound can be made easier to recognize. can. Also, if an illegal counting operation is performed, it can be easily noticed. As for the counting operation and the corresponding counting sound, the same configuration as the sound corresponding to the medal insertion and settlement operation in FIG. 278 can be applied unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, the configuration relating to the counting sound of the medalless machine will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, it is assumed that the number of credits (for example, 1000) greatly exceeds the number of bets required for one game. Then, it is assumed that, immediately after the betting operation is performed in this state, the counting operation for the remaining credits is performed. FIG. 282(a) shows that, corresponding to these operations, the output of the counting sound is started after the output of the bet sound is started, and there is a period during which these sounds are output in parallel. . Also, it is shown that the counting sound is output for a long time according to the number of credits. Furthermore, it is assumed that the settlement operation is performed after the output of the bet sound is finished and while the counting sound is being output. FIG. 282(a) shows that the settlement sound corresponding to the settlement operation is output in parallel with the counting sound. In this way, in addition to the betting sound and the settlement sound, the medalless machine outputs a counting sound different from these sounds, so that it is easier to notice that an illegal operation has been performed.

In addition, when the counting operation becomes possible after the power is turned on, this part is changed so that the message corresponding to the counting operation is displayed even during the startup process (during startup display). You may make it perform a process preferentially. In FIG. 282(b), since the counting operation is performed during execution of the activation process, a counting sound is output in response to this and a message indicating that the counting process is in progress is displayed. (after the game background display and the game background sound are started), the count sound and message are output in accordance with the counting process that is continuing.

Incidentally, when the counting operation is performed and the number of credits becomes 0, the fact that the number of credits has become 0 may be notified by a counting end sound different from the counting sound. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the counting process has ended. In order to prevent the counting end sound from becoming difficult to hear, the output of other sounds may be restricted while the counting end sound is being output. For example, in the case of a configuration that allows bet operations to be performed in parallel with the counting process, there is a possibility that the betting operation sound and betting end sound overlap with the counting end sound. Sound may not be output.

Note that when the counting operation is performed and the number of credits becomes 0, an effect may be performed by means of an image or light emission of a lamp, without notifying with a sound different from the counting sound. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the counting has been performed.

Note that the effect executed when the settlement process is executed and the bet amount becomes 0 and the effect executed when the credit amount becomes 0 after the counting process is executed may be different. . For example, in the former, an effect with a short execution time is executed by outputting the sound "Payment has been made" once, and in the latter, the sound "The game has ended. Please be careful not to forget anything" is executed once. You may make it perform the production|presentation with a long production|presentation execution time to output. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game has ended. Also, for example, in the former, an effect with a long execution time is executed, in which the voice "Payment has been made. Please finish the game after counting" is output once. It is also possible to execute an effect with a short effect execution time for outputting the voice once. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from ending without counting.

The effect executed when the settlement process is executed and the bet amount becomes 0 and the effect executed when the credit amount becomes 0 after the counting process is executed may be the same effect. . For example, in both cases, an effect of outputting a voice saying "Processing has ended" once may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the execution of the effect.

[Operation when power is turned on (5)]
The slot machine outputs an error sound when it detects an error (e.g. insertion error, communication error between the main and sub boards, harness disconnection error, payout error, hopper error, communication error between the medalless machine and the lending machine). , the output of the abnormality occurrence sound is stopped when the resolution condition (for example, the reset button is operated after the abnormality is resolved) is satisfied. When the abnormal sound is output, if the game background sound is being output (for example, during AT state or CZ), the abnormal sound is output together with the game background sound. In FIG. 283(a), an abnormality is detected during the output of the game background display and the game background sound, and the output of the abnormality occurrence sound is started while the game background sound is maintained. It is shown that the output of the generated sound continues.

Here, in the embodiments of FIGS. 278 and 281, a configuration has been described in which sounds corresponding to various operations are output during a period in which the power-on sound is not output, thereby making it easier to notice fraud. However, the power-on sound is not output. If the abnormal sound is output during the period, it may become difficult to notice fraud. In view of this, for example, when the power-on sound is not output from the time the power is turned on until the startup process is completed, or for a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) after the power is turned on, the abnormal sound is output. It may be configured not to output. FIG. 283(b) shows that although an abnormality is detected during execution of startup processing after power-on, an abnormality-occurring sound is not output until a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on. . This predetermined period is a period during which the game background sound is not output, and includes a period during which the betting sound and the settlement sound can be output. In other words, the predetermined period is a period after a period in which the game background sound is not output to a period in which the game background sound is output. In this configuration, since the abnormal sound is not output, it is possible to easily notice fraud.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, rock-paper game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment>>
Hereinafter, the technical idea described in the description using FIGS. 272 to 283 will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above description,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels;
stop control means (e.g., main control unit) for stopping the plurality of reels being rotated based on the operation result of the stop operation means;
an internal winning result determining means (for example, a main control unit) capable of determining a winning combination as an internal winning result;
a first display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (for example, winning confirmation display);
Second display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying a second display (for example, pattern stop effect);
with
A gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 100) that determines winning of a combination based on the aspect of the plurality of reels that are stopped,
The first display is a display relating to the symbol combination of the winning combination (FIG. 274(b), the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in FIG. 275),
The second display is a display relating to the combination of symbols for production (in FIGS. 274 and 275, the combination of symbols suitable for the scene is displayed),
The first display means is a means for executing the first display when winning a role (see FIG. 274),
The second display means is a means for executing the second display regardless of whether or not the role is won (see FIG. 274),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second display is started to be displayed before the first display, and is completed after the first display is completed. start and complete with every stop operation),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying, after executing the second display, decoration display for decorating the second display (for example, an image of light surrounding the treasure chest pattern in FIG. 275). is
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second display means is a means capable of changing the content of the second display after executing the second display (see FIG. 276(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second display is a display that may be erased after the first display is erased (see FIGS. 274(b) and 275(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels;
stop control means (e.g., main control unit) for stopping the plurality of reels being rotated based on the operation result of the stop operation means;
an internal winning result determining means (for example, a main control unit) capable of determining a winning combination as an internal winning result;
a first display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (for example, winning confirmation display);
Second display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying a second display (for example, pattern stop effect);
with
A gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 100) that determines winning of a combination based on the aspect of the plurality of reels that are stopped,
The first display is a display relating to the symbol combination of the winning combination (FIG. 274(b), the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in FIG. 275),
The second display is a display relating to the combination of symbols for production (in FIGS. 274 and 275, the combination of symbols suitable for the scene is displayed),
The first display means is a means for executing the first display when winning a role (see FIG. 274),
The second display means is a means for executing the second display regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won (see FIG. 274),
The second display means is means capable of displaying a third display different from the second display (for example, operation navigation in FIG. 276(a)),
The third display is a display related to production,
The second display means is means capable of displaying the third display before displaying the second display (see FIG. 276(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second display is started to be displayed before the first display, and is completed after the first display is completed. start and complete with every stop operation),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying, after executing the second display, decoration display for decorating the second display (for example, an image of light surrounding the treasure chest pattern in FIG. 275). is
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second display means is a means capable of changing the content of the second display after executing the second display (see FIG. 276(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second display is a display that may be erased after the first display is erased (see FIGS. 274(b) and 275(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
capable of outputting a first sound (e.g., power-on sound) after being powered on,
A gaming machine capable of outputting a second sound (e.g., medal insertion sound) upon execution of a predetermined process related to game media,
In the first period after the power is turned on, the volume of the first sound is higher than the volume of the second sound (Fig. 278, see the description of [Operation when power is turned on (1)] ),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
capable of outputting a first sound (e.g., power-on sound) after being powered on,
A gaming machine capable of outputting a second sound (e.g., medal insertion sound) upon execution of a predetermined process related to game media,
In the first period after power-on, the first sound is output without outputting the second sound (Fig. 278),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the second period after the first period, the volume of the second audio is higher than the volume of the first audio (Fig. 278, [Operation at power-on (1) ]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the second period after the first period, the second sound can be output without outputting the first sound (Fig. 278),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the second period, the background sound of the game is not output (Fig. 278),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In a third period after the second period, the background sound of the game is output without outputting the first sound,
the volume of the second audio is the same for the second period and the third period (Fig. 278);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the second sound is a sound output based on the insertion of a game medium;
The first period is a period that starts after game media can be inserted (Fig. 278).
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, in the above description ([Operation when power is turned on (1) to (5)]),
A predetermined sound (for example, power-on sound) can be output based on the fact that the power is turned on,
A first process (e.g., counting process) for outputting a game value to an external device can be executed, and a first sound (e.g., counting sound) can be output along with the execution of the first process,
A second process (e.g., betting operation) for setting a game value determined at the start of a game can be executed, and a second sound (e.g., bet sound) can be output as the second process is executed. a playground,
A first period that is part of the period until a predetermined process based on power-on (for example, startup process) is completed )), the predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the first sound (for example, in FIG. 281, the counting sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output),
In the first period, the predetermined sound is output with a volume higher than the volume of the second sound (for example, in FIG. 281, the bed sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output),
In a second period after the first period (for example, after the execution period of the power-on sound has elapsed), the first sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound (for example, 281 can output counting sound without outputting power-on sound),
In the second period, the second sound is output with a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound (for example, in FIG. 281, the bed sound can be output without outputting the power-on sound),
During the second period, the game background sound is not output (for example, in FIG. 281, there is a period during which the game background sound is not output after the power-on sound execution period has elapsed),
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, in the above description ([Operation when power is turned on (1) to (5)]),
A predetermined sound (for example, power-on sound) can be output based on the fact that the power is turned on,
A first process (e.g., counting process) for outputting a game value to an external device can be executed, and a first sound (e.g., counting sound) can be output along with the execution of the first process,
A second process (e.g., betting operation) for setting a game value determined at the start of a game can be executed, and a second sound (e.g., bet sound) can be output as the second process is executed. a playground,
A first period that is part of the period until a predetermined process based on power-on (for example, startup process) is completed )), the first sound is not output when the predetermined sound is output (for example, in FIG. 281, the counting sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output),
In the first period, the second sound is not output when the predetermined sound is output (for example, in FIG. 281, the bed sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output),
In a second period after the first period (for example, after the execution period of the power-on sound has elapsed), the first sound can be output and the predetermined sound is not output (for example, in FIG. 281 Counting sound can be output without power-on sound output),
In the second period, the second sound can be output and the predetermined sound is not output (for example, in FIG. 281, the bed sound can be output without the power-on sound being output),
During the second period, the game background sound is not output (for example, in FIG. 281, there is a period during which the game background sound is not output after the power-on sound execution period has elapsed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first sound and the second sound may be output in duplicate,
The first sound and the second sound are different sounds (for example, FIG. 282(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Display according to the first process (for example, display of "counting" in FIG. 282 (b)) is performed, and display according to the second process is not performed.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
capable of outputting an abnormal sound based on the detection of an electrical connection abnormality with the external device (for example, FIGS. 283(a) and 283(b));
In the second period, even if the electrical connection abnormality occurs, the abnormality generation sound is not output (for example, FIG. 283(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, in the above description ([Operation when power is turned on (1) to (5)]),
A predetermined sound (for example, power-on sound) can be output based on the fact that the power is turned on,
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (e.g., counting process) for outputting a game value to an external device and capable of outputting a first sound (e.g., counting sound) in accordance with the execution of the first process. hand,
A first period that is part of the period until a predetermined process based on power-on (for example, startup process) is completed )), the predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the first sound (for example, in FIG. 281, the counting sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output),
In a second period after the first period (for example, after the execution period of the power-on sound has elapsed), the first sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound (for example, 281 can output counting sound without outputting power-on sound),
During the second period, the game background sound is not output (for example, in FIG. 281, there is a period during which the game background sound is not output after the power-on sound execution period has elapsed),
The first sound that started to be output during the second period may continue to be output after the second period (for example, in FIG. 282(b), the game background sound is not output, until the game background sound is output after the activation process, the counting sound is continuously output),
A game machine characterized by:

In addition, in the above description ([Operation when power is turned on (1) to (5)]),
A predetermined sound (for example, power-on sound) can be output based on the fact that the power is turned on,
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (e.g., counting process) for outputting a game value to an external device and capable of outputting a first sound (e.g., counting sound) in accordance with the execution of the first process. hand,
A first period that is part of the period until a predetermined process based on power-on (for example, startup process) is completed )), the first sound is not output when the predetermined sound is output (for example, in FIG. 281, the counting sound is not output while the power-on sound is being output),
In a second period after the first period (for example, after the execution period of the power-on sound has elapsed), the first sound can be output and the predetermined sound is not output (for example, in FIG. 281 Counting sound can be output without power-on sound output),
During the second period, the game background sound is not output (for example, in FIG. 281, there is a period during which the game background sound is not output after the power-on sound execution period has elapsed),
The first sound that started to be output during the second period may continue to be output after the second period (for example, in FIG. 282(b), the game background sound is not output, until the game background sound is output after the activation process, the counting sound is continuously output),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
capable of outputting an abnormal sound based on the detection of an electrical connection abnormality with the external device (for example, FIGS. 283(a) and 283(b));
In the second period, even if the electrical connection abnormality occurs, the abnormality generation sound is not output (for example, FIG. 283(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
After the second period, the state in which the abnormal sound is not output may continue (for example, in FIG. 283(b), the There is a period during which the abnormal sound is not output until the game background sound is output),
A game machine characterized by:

A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 284 to 309. FIG.

In the slot machine of the basic embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that progresses a series of games ending without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 284 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the basic embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at regular intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 is the upper stage symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 is the middle stage symbol of the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 is the left reel symbol. The pattern displayed on the lower stage of the reel 111 is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 is the middle stage symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 is the lower stage of the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 are referred to as right reel upper stage symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 are referred to as the right reel middle stage symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 112 are referred to as right reel lower stage symbols. Each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is displayed vertically three times on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the basic embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

Backlights for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 287, is displayed. There is provided only one middle winning line composed of middle reel symbols. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 284 requires 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the winning lines are activated, and when 3 medals are betted, the winning lines are activated. become. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the upward-sloping pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1, a special combination 2) has been internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special combination internal winning state or special game to be described later. It is a lamp that informs the player of the status. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the basic embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. (up to 3 cards). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. In the basic embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Although not shown in FIG. 284, an advantageous zone lamp 191 is provided at the bottom right of the payout number indicator 127 to indicate that it is in an advantageous zone, which will be described later (FIG. 302). Note that the payout number indicator 127 and the advantageous section lamp 191 are arranged on the same substrate. This payout number display 127 corresponds to an example of operation navigation executing means. Also, the advantageous section lamp 191 corresponds to an example of advantageous section notification executing means.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. As shown in FIG. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player. These stop buttons 137 to 139 correspond to an example of stop operation means.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 285) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 285) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the basic embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it could also be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in the basic embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of operation navigation executing means.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of lottery means, profit provision means, game execution means, advantageous interval setting means, and state setting means.

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, reel 110- 112 optical sensors (index sensor 80, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor (index sensor 80) of the reels 110 to 112 is installed at a predetermined position on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece (detection piece 50) provided on the reel frame passes, L become a level. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display device 125, a game information display 126, a payout number display 127, and a driving circuit 328 for driving the advantageous section lamp 191).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. A low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped if the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in the basic embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in the basic embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 in the basic embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the basic embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 Designs” are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in the basic embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum withdrawal range (less than 5 frames in the basic embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination 1, replay combinations 1-2, and small combinations 1-6. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the basic embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. Further, replay combinations 1 and 2 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 and 2 and replay roles 1 and 2 may be called "operating roles". In addition, the "winning" in the basic embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not involve the payout of medals (does not involve the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning of replay hands 1 and 2 is included. The special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning, and the other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning. be.

The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (RT2) by winning a prize. However, medals will not be paid out due to winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for special role 1. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1" or "BB".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won special combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination internal winning state (RT1). This flag is maintained in the on state until the corresponding working role is won, and it becomes a state in which it is easy to win these working roles in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if the special role 1 is not won in the game in which the special role 1 is internally won, the same state as the special role 1 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations are all won. becomes easier.

The special role internally elected state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internally elected state, if a role other than the special role is internally elected, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , reel stop control is executed.

The re-playing hands 1 and 2 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay combination 1 and "replay-replay-watermelon" for replay combination 2. Among the replay hands, the replay hand 1 may be referred to as "normal replay" and the replay hand 2 may be referred to as "chance replay".

The replay hands 1 and 2 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a replay, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 6 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "ANY-Cherry-ANY" for the small combination 1, "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" for the small combination 2, and "Bell-Bell-Bell" for the small combination 3. 4 is "Replay-Bell-Bell", the small winning combination 5 is "Bell-Replay-Bell", and the small winning combination 6 is "Bell-Bell-Replay". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "cherry", the small role 2 is "watermelon", the small role 3 is "bell", the small role 4 is "left bell", the small role 5 is "middle bell", and the small role 6 is sometimes referred to as the "right bell". In the case of "ANY-Cherry-ANY", the middle reel middle pattern of the middle reel 111 may be "Cherry", and the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may have any pattern.

Here, the small winning combination 3 (bell) is a winning combination regardless of the order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but the small winning combination 4 (left bell) and the small winning combination 5 (middle bell). And a small winning combination 6 (left bell) wins when the order of stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 matches a predetermined order of stop operations. For example, a small win 4 (left bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 110, and a small win 5 (middle bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 111. A small win 6 (right bell) is won when the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 112 . Hereinafter, the small wins 4 to 6 may be collectively referred to as push-order bells. In addition, the order of stop operation for winning the internal winning push order bell is also called the correct order of stop operation.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 288, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 288 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations for each RT.

FIG. 288 shows 12 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 1 to 10), which are combinations of the combinations explained in FIG. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by lottery at the start of the game.

Condition device numbers 1 and 2 are both internally winning combinations including special combination 1. Of these, condition device number 1 is an internal winning combination in which special combination 1 is won alone and there is no duplication with other combinations. When this winning combination is won internally, it becomes possible to win a special winning combination 1 (transition to a special game state (RT2)), but if no prize is won, a transition is made to a special winning internal winning state (RT1). In this case, unless another winning combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games, the special winning combination 1 can be continuously won.

On the other hand, the condition device number 2 is an internal winning combination in which the special combination 1 and another combination are duplicated and internally won. In the basic embodiment, the small winning combination and the replay winning combination are stopped with priority over the special winning combination. Therefore, in a game in which the special role 1 and another role are duplicated and internally won, there is a possibility that this other role will win (in the case of a replay role, the prize will always be won), but the special role 1 will win. do not. It should be noted that the special combination internal winning state (RT1) is entered from the next game, and the special combination 1 can continue to be won as long as no other combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games.

Conditional device numbers 3 and 4 are internal winning hands made up of replayed hands.

In addition, in the condition device numbers 2 and 4, the replay combination 1 and the replay combination 2 are won in duplicate. When these conditional devices are internally won, if a predetermined stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, and if any other stop operation is performed, the replay combination 1 is displayed. Stop control is executed so that the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. In the basic embodiment, the predetermined stop operation is the left first stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, not only the first stop operation but also the second stop operation may be included in the predetermined stop operation. Alternatively, the timing of the stop operation may be the predetermined stop operation described above, or a combination thereof, and any operation condition may be adopted.

Condition device numbers 5 to 10 are internal winning hands made up of small hands. Of these, the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are provided with operation conditions (push order here, correct push order below) for winning the corresponding minor combination (left bell, middle bell, right bell). In the following description, conditional device numbers 8 to 10 may be collectively referred to as push order bells. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the order of pressing the correct answer, it may be lost. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

In the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 288, the horizontal axis represents each game state (RT), and the vertical axis represents each lottery value (size of lottery data range). In each RT to be described later, the internal winning probability of a role is determined by selecting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and using random values acquired during the internal lottery. is obtained by dividing by numerical data (for example, 65536) in the range of . For example, in the replay low probability state (RT0), the lottery value of special role 1 is 50, and the winning probability of special role 1 is 50/65536*100≈0.06%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination (internal winning combination) is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for the lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values.

In the basic embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the condition devices with condition device numbers 8 to 10 for each game state are uniform, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If you do not win the role of each condition device, you will lose, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that you did not win the role of any of the conditional devices is expressed as "won wrong".

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 284, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

<Types of game status (RT)>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 289 is a transition diagram of the game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of states with different degrees of advantage, namely, a replay low probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree is changed to improve the amusement of the game. In the following description, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the replay low probability state, the special role internal winning state, and the special game state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. be. Also, when these RTs are switched, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). RT is controlled by the main controller 300 .

FIG. 289 shows each of the RTs described above, and their transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, RT transitions in the direction of that arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined winning combination, internal winning of a predetermined winning combination, stop display of a specific symbol combination on a specific winning line, and completion of a specified number of games. , and a predetermined number of coins may be paid out.

Hereinafter, each RT will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

<Replay low probability state (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal winning probability of a replay role than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

There are conditional device numbers 1 to 10 for internally won hands in RT0. If the winning combination is not won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "won't win".

FIG. 289 shows that when the special combination 1 is internally won while RT0 is set, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state to be described later.

<Special role internal elected state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON. Also, the probability of winning a replay role is higher than RT0, and RT is more advantageous than RT0.

There are condition device numbers 3 to 10 in RT1 for internally won hands.

FIG. 289 shows that when the special combination 1 is won in RT1 (when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the process proceeds to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 is an advantageous RT in which the internal winning probability of Bell (small combination 3) is higher than in other RTs and medals can be easily obtained.

The condition device number 7 is the only internal winning combination in RT2. A small winning combination 3 that is internally won with the condition device number 7 is a winning combination that wins a bell regardless of operation conditions (operation timing, operation order) if internally won.

FIG. 289 shows that in RT2, when the payout exceeds the prescribed number (324, see the remarks column in FIG. 287), the transition to RT0 is shown.

In the basic embodiment, the RT2 is terminated when a specified number of payouts or more are executed. 8 times), or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) is played, the game may end.

<Unadvantageous Sections and Advantageous Sections>
In the slot machine 100 of the basic embodiment, apart from the above-described RT, the game state is divided into non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals for management. Of these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation navigation) is allowed, and in the non-advantageous section, this operation navigation is not displayed. In addition, the operation navigation is displayed according to the conditions in the advantageous section, but the operation navigation may not be displayed even if the push order bell is internally elected. These states will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 .

In the basic embodiment, the initial state (eg, factory default state) is set to the non-advantageous section. Also, when there is a RAM clear (setting change), this non-advantageous interval is set. The state of the non-advantageous section is referred to as normal state A. In addition, in the basic embodiment, three types of advantageous section states are provided: normal state B, chance state, and AT state. FIG. 290 shows transitions between four states: normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state. In the basic embodiment, the advantageous section flag is set to OFF for a non-advantageous section, and the advantageous section flag is set to ON for an advantageous section. distinguish. In addition, in order to prevent the gambling spirit, when the advantageous section continues over a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or when the predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400) is exceeded is configured to be a non-advantageous section.

It should be noted that the state of the advantageous section may be only the AT state, or, for example, a premonitory state before shifting to the AT state may be further provided, and is not limited to the configuration of the basic embodiment. . Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the states of the non-advantageous sections.

Since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from the RT, for example, there are cases where the transition to RT2 occurs during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally won, and the operation navigation is not displayed, so for RT2, a non-advantageous section may be set once, and after RT2 is completed, it may return to the advantageous section. . Further, the configuration is not limited to the above, and it may be configured such that an internal winning is made to the pressing order bell at RT2 and an operation navigation is displayed. Note that the advantageous section lamp 191 may be turned on during the entire period of the advantageous section or during a part of the period. However, when a part of the advantageous section is in the AT state, if the advantageous section lamp 191 is lit in a section that is not in the AT state of the advantageous section, the impression that the AT state is imminent may give Therefore, it is preferable that the interval in which the advantageous interval lamp 191 is turned on is a minimum interval such as when the vehicle is in the AT state.

Each state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be described below.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internal winning combination. If the lottery is won, the state shifts to the normal state B in the advantageous section.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the state shifts to the chance state when the conditions for shifting to the chance state are met. Further, when the transition condition is established, the number of games in the chance state is set. Regarding this transition condition, for example, a condition that is established by executing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a lottery for transition to each game chance state in the normal state B, and when this lottery is won , conditions to be established when points (any of 1 to 3) added according to the result of one game in normal state B accumulate up to a specified number (100 points), and so on. Conditions can be adopted.

<Chance status>
In the chance state, an AT lottery may be conducted according to the internally won combination. When the AT lottery is not won (the number of AT sets is 0) before the set number of games has passed, the game shifts to the normal state B, and when the number of AT sets is 0, the game shifts to the AT state. When shifting to the AT state, the AT set number is decremented by 1, and the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 50).

In the slot machine 100 of the basic embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the chance state. The AT lottery timing and execution conditions can be arbitrarily adopted.

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be explained. Below, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won, an operation navigation showing the correct push order corresponding to each is displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...", or the pressing order and timing. may indicate both. In addition, on the payout number indicator 127, the 7 segments are lit up in a manner corresponding to the pressing order of the correct answer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number indicator 127 may also be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, or may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to both the pressing order and the timing. .

In the basic embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is subtracted as the AT state game progresses. Then, when the AT remaining game number becomes 0, if the AT set number is greater than 0, the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined value (eg, 50) again, and if the AT set number is 0, the chance state is entered. conduct a lottery. When the lottery is won, the state shifts to the chance state, and when the lottery is not won, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section (parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized). Incidentally, when the special game state (RT2) is entered in the middle of the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is stopped, and the subtraction is resumed when RT0 is reached.

The AT state may be started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific game state is reached) without being limited to the configuration using the AT set number or the AT remaining game number.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the insertion of medals. Also, when medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (three) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery for the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine internal winners. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on. Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when a replay is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating that the replay is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning combination is executed. If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (non-winning role), preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400 . The internal winning command includes information on the internal winning combination, information on the current advantageous section (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games), and AT lottery. And information that can specify the result of the AT addition lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state, the internal winning command including that the condition device numbers 8 to 10 have been internally won also includes operation instruction information representing the correct operation order of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. .

In step S107, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S109; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S111.

In step S109, a pseudo-game related process is executed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S113, reel rotation start processing is executed on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in timer update processing, which will be described later) is 0, and the reels 110 to 112 are started to rotate. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in the basic embodiment) to suppress gambling. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S115, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small win 2 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S119, if the player wins any winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the payout number indicator 127 is used to display the given number.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S123, game state update processing is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the status regarding the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described in FIG. 290 is updated. For example, when the normal state A shifts to the normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to ON, and when the AT state shifts to the normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set OFF. In addition, a pseudo-game flag is set to ON when the state is shifted from the chance state to the AT state. Further, when the AT state is shifted to the normal state A, the advantageous section lamp 191 is extinguished. In addition, preparations are made for transmission of the game state update command. This command includes information on RT, information on non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals (for example, advantageous interval flag, number of AT sets and number of AT remaining games).

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on (basically 32.8 ms) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the basic embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to interrupt statuses (acquiring various interrupt statuses based on signals from various sensors 318) are executed. For example, if the interrupt status is medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interruption status is payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in the basic embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Acceptance command, internal winning command, production command accompanying production lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110-112, pseudo game rotation start command, stop buttons 137-139 First to accompanying acceptance of operation Third press command, first to third stop commands associated with stopping reels 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command), command data (corresponding to command type predetermined information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Pseudo-game related processing>
Next, using FIG. 293, pseudo-game related processing (step S109) in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 291 will be described. Figure 293 is a flowchart showing the flow of pseudo-game related processing (step S109) in Figure 291 .

In step S1001, pseudo-game reel stop data is prepared. Specifically, reel stop data is prepared for pseudo-stopping when seven 2 symbols are aligned on the winning line. It should be noted that reel stop data for stopping an arbitrary combination of symbols can be used as long as the combination of symbols is different from the combination established in this game. Also, a plurality of types of such reel stop data may be prepared and one of the plurality of types may be selected.

In step S1003, pseudo-game reel rotation start processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1005, a pseudo-game reel stop control process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1007, the random delay flag is set to ON.

In step S1009, the pseudo-game flag is set to off.

<Pseudo game reel rotation start processing>
Next, referring to FIG. 294, the pseudo-game reel rotation start processing (step S1003) in the pseudo-game related processing of FIG. 293 will be described. Figure 294 is a flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo-game reel rotation start process (step S1003) in Figure 293 .

In step S1101, acceleration parameters for each reel are set.

In step S1103, preparation for transmitting a pseudo-game rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 is executed.

In step S1105, the reels 110-112 are started to rotate using the acceleration parameters set in step S1101.

In step S1107, it is determined whether or not the rotational speeds of the reels 110-112 are constant. If the rotational speeds of the reels 110-112 are constant, the process proceeds to step S1109; otherwise, step S1107 is repeated.

In step S1109, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 is validated.

<Pseudo-game reel stop control processing>
Next, referring to FIG. 295, the pseudo-game reel stop control process (step S1005) in the pseudo-game related process of FIG. 293 will be described. Figure 295 is a flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo-game reel stop control process (step S1005) in Figure 293 .

In step S1201, a pseudo-game regulation timer is set. The pseudo-game regulation timer is a timer that measures the time of one pseudo-game. In the basic embodiment, using a pseudo-game regulation timer, the execution time of one pseudo-game is limited to a predetermined time TA (specifically about 20 seconds). In step S1201, a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time TA is set as an initial value to the pseudo-game regulation timer. This timer value is decremented each time the timer interrupt processing (timer update processing in step S209) of the main control unit 300 is executed.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 137-139 have been operated. If the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S1205; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1209.

In step S1205, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped are quasi-stopped.

In step S1207, it is determined whether or not all the reels 110 to 112 are quasi-stopped. If all the reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped, the process proceeds to step S1213; otherwise, the process returns to step S1203.

In step S1209, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game regulation timer has timed out, that is, the predetermined time TA corresponding to the set timer value has elapsed. If the pseudo-game regulation timer times out, proceed to step S1211, otherwise return to step 1203.

In step S1211, all the reels 110-112 are quasi-stopped because the predetermined time TA has elapsed without any of the stop buttons 137-139 being operated. Thus, the pseudo-game of the basic embodiment has a function of automatically pseudo-stopping the reels 110 to 112 when there is no stop operation in order to promote the progress of the pseudo-game.

In step S1213, a pseudo game end timer is set. The pseudo-game end timer is a timer that measures the time interval between the pseudo-game and the main game, and a predetermined effect (for example, the effect that the pseudo-game has ended, the effect that the main game is started, etc.) It is provided to reserve time for execution. In the basic embodiment, since the time interval between the pseudo-game and the main game is set to a predetermined time TC (specifically about 1 second), in step S1213, the pseudo-game end timer corresponds to the predetermined time TC as an initial value. A timer value is set. This timer value is decremented each time the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 is executed. In addition, in step S1213, preparations are made to transmit a pseudo-game end command indicating that the pseudo-game has ended to the first sub-control unit 400.

<Pseudo-game related processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 296, reel rotation start processing (step S113) in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 291 will be described. FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing the flow of reel rotation start processing (step S113) in FIG.

In step S1301, acceleration parameters for each reel are set.

In step S1303, preparation for transmission of the game rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 is executed.

In step S1305, 7 segment setting processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the random delay flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1311; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, the reels 110-112 are started to rotate using the acceleration parameters set in step S1301.

In step S1311, random delay rotation start processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the rotational speeds of the reels 110-112 are constant. If the rotational speeds of the reels 110 to 112 are constant, the process proceeds to step S1315; otherwise, step S1313 is repeated.

At step S1315, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 is validated.

<7 segment setting processing>
Next, the 7-segment setting process (step S1305) in the reel rotation start process of FIG. 296 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the flow of the 7-segment setting process (step S1305) in FIG.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not there is operation navigation information indicating the pressing order. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1403; otherwise, the 7-segment setting process ends. The operation navigation information is set when the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are internally won in the AT state.

In step S1403, display setting of operation navigation (navi lighting) by the payout number display 127 is executed.

In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1407; otherwise, the 7-segment setting process ends.

In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval display by the advantageous interval lamp 191 is set to off (extinguished). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1409; otherwise, the 7-segment setting process ends.

In step S1409, the advantageous section display by the advantageous section lamp 191 is set to ON (lit).

<Random delay rotation start processing>
Next, random delay rotation start processing (step S1311) in the reel rotation start processing of FIG. 296 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing the random delay rotation start process (step S1311) in FIG.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time TC has elapsed by measuring the pseudo-game end timer. When the predetermined time TC has passed by measuring the pseudo-game end timer, the process proceeds to step S1503, otherwise step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1503, the left reel 110 starts rotating.

In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the left reel 110 has finished accelerating. If the left reel 110 has finished accelerating, the process proceeds to step S1507; otherwise, the process returns to step S1505.

In step S1507, a rotation start timer for the middle reel 111 is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 0 to 756.512 ms is obtained by lottery, and this value is set. The value of the rotation start timer of the middle reel 111 is decremented each time the main controller timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1509, it is determined whether or not the rotation start timer of the middle reel 111 has timed out, that is, whether or not the standby time corresponding to the initially set timer value has elapsed. If the rotation start timer of the middle reel 111 times out, the process proceeds to step S1511; otherwise, the process returns to step S1509.

In step S1511, rotation of the middle reel 111 is started. Although the middle reel 111 starts rotating in step S1511, the middle reel 111 is in a pseudo stop state until the rotation starts.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the acceleration of the middle reel 111 has ended. If the acceleration of the middle reel 111 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1515, and if not, the process returns to step S1513.

In step S1515, a rotation start timer for the right reel 112 is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 0 to 756.512 ms is obtained by lottery, and this value is set. The value of the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 is decremented each time the main controller timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 has timed out, that is, whether or not the standby time corresponding to the initially set timer value has elapsed. If the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 has timed out, the process proceeds to step S1519; otherwise, the process returns to step S1517.

In step S1519, the right reel 112 starts rotating. Although the right reel 112 starts rotating in step S1511, the right reel 112 is in a pseudo stop state until it starts rotating.

In step S1521, the random delay flag is set off.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 299(a) is a flow chart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 299(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 299(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 299(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 299(c). The first sub-control unit 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 299(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 300(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 300(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 300(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 300(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 300(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read out in step S409, the image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 300(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 300(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 300(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 300(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 300(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Explanation of operation≫
The features of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below using an operation example.

[About pseudo-games]
In the slot machine 100, the reels 110 to 112 are rotated by inserting medals and operating the start lever 135, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139. , a combination is established when a combination of symbols corresponding to internal determination is displayed on the symbol display window. Then, when a winning combination involving payout of medals is established, a specified number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination is paid out. This series of actions is a normal game, but this normal game is called a main game in order to distinguish it from the pseudo-game described below.

On the other hand, in the pseudo-game, similar to the main game, the rotated reels 110-112 are stopped by operating the stop buttons 137-139 (pseudo-stop in the basic embodiment), and some symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display window. It is a kind of reel production that lets you play. In this pseudo game, the reels 110 to 112 can be stopped in the same way as in the main game, but unlike the main game, medals are not paid out as a result of the reels 110 to 112 stopping. In the basic embodiment, in the pseudo game, the reels 110 to 112 are not completely stopped like this game, and the reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped (for example, by continuing microvibration). (It is not a main game) is made to be understood. When the pseudo game ends, the reels 110 to 112 rotate again and the main game is started. That is, the pseudo-game, after operating the start lever 135 until the speed of rotation of the reels 110-112 in this game becomes constant, for the spinning reels 110-112 stop button 137 ~ This is a game as an effect in which the reels 110 to 112 are quasi-stopped by the operation of 139 to display an arbitrary symbol combination.

In the basic embodiment, the pseudo-game is an effect game that can be executed until the speed of rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 in this game becomes constant. It is good also as a production game which can be performed by the time it becomes constant. For example, when the rotated reels 110 to 112 are stopped by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139, only the reel 110 is caused to stop the pseudo game, and the reels 111 and 112 are allowed to stop the main game. Alternatively, the pseudo game may be stopped for the reels 110 and 111, and the real game may be stopped only for the reel 112.

Also, after the design is stopped as it is when the first stop is made in the pseudo game, the pseudo stop may be executed from the time when the second stop is made, or until the third stop is made As in the game, the symbols may be stopped, and the pseudo-stop may be executed when the third stop is made.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, when shifting to the AT state, a configuration is adopted in which a pseudo game is executed before the reel rotation of this game is started. That is, when the pseudo-game ends, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 in the main game is started, and the normal game progress is resumed. When the pseudo game is not performed, when the start lever 135 is operated, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 in this game is started. In addition, in the basic embodiment, "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2", which is not aligned in this game, stops in the pseudo-game. Therefore, the symbol combination of "seven-two-seven-two-seven-two" suggests a transition to the AT state. In addition, the pattern combination of "Seven 2 - Seven 2 - Seven 2" will stop regardless of the order and timing of the stop operation (unlimited withdrawal), but it will stop when these operation conditions are met. good too. Further, after all the reels 110 to 112 are temporarily temporarily stopped, the symbol combination of "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2" may be displayed by the reel action.

Here, an example of the operation of the pseudo-game of the basic embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, in the case of the AT state from the next game (pseudo game flag ON), when the start lever 135 is operated (STA1 in FIG. 301(a)), the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. Next, the corresponding first stop reel (left reel 110 in FIG. 301(a)) is pseudo-stopped based on the first stop operation (STO1-1 in FIG. 301(a), operation of the left stop button 137 here). . Next, the corresponding second stop reel (middle reel 111 in FIG. 301(a)) is pseudo-stopped based on the second stop operation (STO1-2 in FIG. 301(a), operation of the middle stop button 138 here). . Next, the corresponding second stop reel (middle reel 111 in FIG. 301(a)) is pseudo-stopped based on the second stop operation (STO1-2 in FIG. 301(a), operation of the middle stop button 138 here). . Next, the corresponding third stop reel (the right reel 112 in FIG. 301(a)) is pseudo-stopped based on the third stop operation (STO1-3 in FIG. 301(a), operation of the right stop button 139 here). .

As shown in FIG. 301(b), the reels 110 to 112 that are in a pseudo-stop state are not completely stationary, and the reels 110 to 112 do not maintain the same state for more than 500 ms. As shown in the figure, it is in a state in which the state is changed at a timing of 500 ms or less. Specifically, the reels 110 to 112 vibrate slightly up and down between a predetermined position A and a position A' slightly away from the position A. The state in which the reels 110 to 112 are not completely stationary means the state in which the reels 110 to 112 are not stationary when viewed macroscopically (in units of seconds). It includes a moving state (swaying state) and a stationary state when viewed microscopically (in units of several hundred milliseconds). In other words, the micro vibration may include a period in which the reels 110 to 112 are in a stationary state, and in the basic embodiment, the period between movements in the micro vibration is less than 500 ms. ing. That is, in the basic embodiment, if there is a stationary state of 500 ms or more between movement and movement in microvibration, it is assumed that the reels 110 to 112 are stationary, and there was a stationary state of less than 500 ms. In this case, the reels 110 to 112 are defined as being stationary. In addition, the pseudo-stop in the pseudo-game is that if the reels 110 to 112 are completely stopped, the player misunderstands that the game is stopped, ends the game, and may leave the table. It is from. In other words, this is to prevent a situation in which the privilege that would have been obtained in the subsequent game is discarded. In the above example, each of the reels 110 to 112 is respectively pseudo-stopped. For example, at the stage of the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the corresponding reels 110 to 112 are completely stopped, and the third stop After the operation, all the reels 110 to 112 may be brought into a pseudo stop state all at once. Also, the vibrations of the reels 110 to 112 may be synchronous or asynchronous.

It should be noted that the state of micro-vibration is a state close to the shaking fluctuation of the decorative pattern image displayed on the pachinko display device. However, pachinko has a specification in which the result of the main game is notified by stopping the shaking after shaking and fluctuating the decorative pattern image. It is not intended to notify the result of this game by stopping the micro-vibration. When the reels 110 to 112 are completely stopped in the main game executed after this pseudo game, the result of the game is announced.

In the basic embodiment, when all the reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game ends and the main game is started. there is In the pseudo-game, a specific outcome (“Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2”) is aligned, so if the reels 110 to 112 start rotating all at once in the following game, the player may It may be easier to stop aiming at the pattern. That is, when the reels 110 to 112 start spinning all at once when a specific number is aligned, and when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating all at once when a particular number is not aligned, Advantages/disadvantages may occur in the operation of this game. In the basic embodiment, as shown in FIG. 301(c), when starting the reel rotation of the main game after the pseudo game, the reels 110 to 112 are sequentially rotated in the order of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112. As for the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, the reels 110 to 112 are rotated after the lapse of a random predetermined time determined by lottery. With this configuration, the positions of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112 are varied without starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 all at once from the state in which specific numbers are aligned. In addition, as a configuration for distributing the positions, rotation may be started in an order other than the above order, and after individually setting a timer for the rotation start delay time for each reel 110 to 112, each timer may be counted down at the same time. After the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112 start rotating, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in this game becomes valid after the rotation of all the reels becomes constant.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, the operation of the start lever 135 at the start of the pseudo-game is actually the operation of the start lever 135 for starting the game, and immediately after that, the process of the pseudo-game interrupts. There is no need to operate the start lever 135 immediately before the start of reel rotation. That is, after the pseudo stop, the reel rotation of this game is started without intervention of the player's operation. If the start lever 135 is operated within this period, the start timing of reel rotation (including random delay) in this game may be advanced.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a pseudo-game is executed when shifting to the AT state, but for example, it may be executed in a state where a special role is internally elected. By executing the pseudo-game in such a state that is advantageous to the player, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, pseudo-games may be executed under certain conditions even in states other than such advantageous states. In this case, it may be possible to increase the interest in the game by making the player expect an advantageous situation.

In addition, the pseudo-game, for example, reel rotation and reel stop that are difficult to realize in this game (for example, reel control different from reel control in this game, such as reverse rotation of reels 110 to 112) Alternatively, for example, by increasing the number of games including pseudo-games, gambling properties may be reduced as a result. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which a pseudo|simulation game is continuously performed several times.

In addition, when the pseudo-game is executed, the effect image display device 157 displays that it is in the pseudo-game, or outputs BGM dedicated to the pseudo-game from the speakers 272 and 277, so that the pseudo-game is in progress. It may be notified that there is something, or it may be notified that the state will shift to an advantageous state for the player. Also, these notifications may be used alone or in combination. In addition, these notifications may be used to notify the winning line of a pattern of a simulated stop.

[About the lighting of the advantageous section lamp and the display of the number of payouts]
In the basic embodiment, when shifting to the AT state, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 in the main game is started after the pseudo game is once executed. For example, in a pseudo-game, if a combination of symbols that look like bonus symbols are arranged by the operation of the player, and then the AT state is started from the main game, the start of the AT state can be thought to be the start of the bonus game. can. In this AT state, operation navigation is executed when conditional device numbers 8 to 10 are internally elected, but when shifting to AT state with the advantageous section lamp 191 not lit, operation navigation is executed first. 297, the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 is started at the timing when the operation navigation (hereinafter referred to as navigation lighting) by the payout number display 127 is executed (FIG. 297). That is, when the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are internally elected in the first game after shifting to the AT state while the advantageous section lamp 191 is not lit, navigation lighting is executed following the pseudo game, and the advantageous section lamp 191 is lit. is started. In this case, it gives an impression that the lighting of the navigation system and the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 are performed at the same time. Also, the player can grasp two pieces of information at the same time. Note that once the advantageous section lamp 191 is turned on, the lighting state continues until the transition to the normal state A (non-advantageous section) occurs. A specific description will be given below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 302 shows an example of the case where the condition device number 9 (minor combination 5) is internally elected by the operation of the first start lever 135 after shifting to the AT state, and this game is executed with a pseudo game in between. ing. At the start of this pseudo-game, the effect image display device 157 executes an effect for making the player aim at the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" which is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. ing. Further, during this pseudo-game, the operation navigation by the payout number display 127 is not executed, and accordingly the advantageous section lamp 191 is also in a non-lighting state. By not executing the operation navigation by the payout number display 127 during the pseudo game, the player is prevented from being confused. This is because the number-of-payout display 127 is a two-digit display, and it is difficult to provide an easily identifiable display in a case where a particular symbol is aimed at.

After the pseudo game is executed, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating in the main game. FIG. 302 shows that the payout number indicator 127 performs navigation lighting (here, navigation lighting corresponding to the middle first stop) in accordance with the start of the game, and that the advantageous section lamp 191 lights up. ing. Also, the effect image display device 157 indicates that the pressing order (middle first stop) for winning the small winning combination 5 is notified at the start of the game.

In addition, since random delay is executed for the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112 in this game after the pseudo game, as shown in FIG. are started at the same time, the reels 110 to 112 rotate after the lighting of the navigation light and the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 are started. By turning on the navigation light and the advantageous section lamp 191, it is possible to simultaneously grasp that there is a possibility that the navigation light is not only for one game but that the next game and the following games are in the AT state. can. If there is an operation error in this game in the AT state, the player's loss may occur, but it is possible to increase concentration and prepare to challenge the navigation game that may occur in succession from now on. On the other hand, FIG. 303(b) shows that the navigation light and the advantageous section lamp 191 are not lit when the reel rotation is started in the pseudo-game. In addition, it may be configured to execute a random delay even when the reel rotation of the pseudo-game is started. In this case, when the pseudo-game continues, it may be possible to make it difficult to notice the second and subsequent pseudo-games.

In the first internal lottery after shifting to the AT state, if the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are not internally elected, the operation navigation in this game is not executed. not start. In this case, lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 is started at the timing when navigation lighting is executed for the first time in the subsequent game. It should be noted that the advantageous section lamp 191 may be lit by being in a state in which the AT state is set in the present game after the pseudo game.

Further, in the basic embodiment and the example of FIG. 302, a pseudo-game is executed when shifting to the AT state, but there may be cases where the AT state is shifted without performing the pseudo-game. In this case, regardless of whether there is a pseudo-game or random delay, by performing the navigation lighting at the start of reel rotation of this game and lighting the advantageous section lamp, a separate process for pseudo-game and random delay is provided. This can be done without the need for processing, and the processing can be simplified. In addition, although it may be configured not to execute the random delay, even if the random delay is not executed as in the case of executing the random delay, the lighting of the operation navigation and the advantageous section lamp 191 is executed before the rotation of the reels of this game is started. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, when the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won in the AT state, the operation navigation indicating the correct push order corresponding to each is displayed, and the navigation lighting is executed. Not limited to this configuration, for example, in the AT state, it may be configured to display the operation navigation even when internally winning a conditional device that can win a replay role (eg, conditional device numbers 2 to 4), and further this operation It is good also as a structure which performs navigation lighting separately from navigation (or together). Furthermore, even if none of the conditional devices are internally won (in the case of a loss), the operation navigation may be displayed, and the navigation lighting may be performed separately (or together) with this operation navigation. may be However, when the condition device that can win a replay role (for example, the condition device number 2 to 4) is internally elected or when the navigation is lit in the case of loss, the advantageous section lamp 191 does not start lighting, and the pushing order Lighting starts only when the bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp that the player has internally won the push-order bell in the game in which the advantageous section lamp 191 has started lighting, so it is possible to improve the attentiveness for the stop operation.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) requires only the operation order for winning a small winning combination, but it may also require only the operation timing. Both the operation order and the operation timing may be requested. A request for operation timing is a request for so-called eye pressing, for example, a request for eye pressing aimed at Seven 1. Although the bells for the small winnings 4 to 6 are so-called 3-choice bells for the pressing order, they may be 6-choice bells for the pressing order. .

[Modified Example (1) of Start Timing of Illumination of Advantageous Section Lamp and Navigation Illumination]
Modified examples of the start timing of lighting of the advantageous section lamp and navigation lighting will be described below with reference to FIGS. These figures are diagrams showing modified examples of the start timing of lighting of the advantageous section lamp and lighting of the navigation system.

In FIG. 303(a), an example of starting navigation lighting and lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 before the start of reel rotation of this game was described, but navigation lighting before the start of reel rotation of this game (before random delay) The advantageous section lamp 191 may be turned on during the game in which the navigation is turned on (before the start of the next game). For example, the advantageous section lamp 191 may be lit after the third stop operation of the game in which the navigation is lit. With such a configuration, it is possible to let the player know that there is a possibility that the navigation light will be on after the next game. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 304(a), the configuration may be such that the lighting of the navigation and the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 is started when the random delay ends and all the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. Also, as shown in FIG. 304(b), when the random delay ends and the rotational speeds of all the reels 110 to 112 reach a constant speed, navigation lighting and the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 may be started. good. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the lighting of the navigation system and the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 are started during the random delay.

During the random delay, the player's operation may be invalid (the reel has not reached a certain speed), and if the navigation lighting is executed before the random delay, even if the operation is invalid Regardless, there is a possibility that the stop operation is performed. With the above configuration, the operation is unlikely to be disabled after the navigation lighting is started, and useless operation can be prevented. In addition, in the example of FIG. 304(b), navigation lighting and lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 can be executed regardless of the presence or absence of random delay, and processing can be shared.

Further, it may be configured to start the navigation lighting and the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 during the pseudo-game before the main game in which the operation navigation is scheduled. FIG. 305(a) shows an example of starting lighting of the navigation lighting and the advantageous section lamp 191 before the stop operation in the pseudo-game is validated. It should be noted that lighting of the navigation system and lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 may be started at the timing when any stop operation is performed. At this time, by not displaying the operation navigation on the effect image display device 157 during the pseudo game, the operation according to the operation navigation may be prevented during the pseudo game. The navigation lighting is operation navigation using the payout number display 127, and although the presence or absence of operation navigation can be grasped, it is difficult to grasp the content. In these examples, it is possible to grasp that the operation navigation is executed during the pseudo-game.

In addition, during the pseudo-game before the main game in which the operation navigation is scheduled, when the outcome is displayed only when the shift to the AT state is confirmed, the navigation lighting and the advantageous section lamp 191 are displayed. may be configured to start lighting. In FIG. 305(b), the left reel 110 stops in the pseudo-game, and after the outcome displayed only when it is determined to shift to the AT state, the navigation lighting and the advantageous section lamp 191 An example of starting lighting is shown. Even in this example, it may be possible to grasp that the operation navigation will be executed during the pseudo-game.

Also, for example, when a plurality of pseudo-games are performed, such as starting navigation lighting and lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 during the second pseudo-game of three pseudo-games, after the first time It may be configured to start the lighting of the navigation lighting and the advantageous section lamp 191 immediately after the start of the pseudo-game. Also in this example, it is possible to grasp that the operation navigation is executed during the pseudo-game.

[Modified Example (2) of Start Timing of Illumination of Advantageous Section Lamp and Navigation Illumination]
In the basic embodiment, four types of states (normal state A, normal state B, chance state, AT state) are configured to transition, but there are various states other than these states depending on the game machine. . Hereinafter, when a CZ (chance zone) is provided as an example of such a state, a modified example of the lighting of the advantageous section lamp and the navigation lighting in the CZ will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a modified example of the start timing of lighting of the advantageous section lamp and lighting of the navigation.

CZ in this modification is one of the states in the advantageous section, and when shifting from CZ to AT state (for example, winning the AT lottery), and when shifting to another state (for example, not winning the AT lottery ). In other words, CZ corresponds to a state before shifting to the AT state, such as the chance state of the basic embodiment. Further, this CZ continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 to 5), during which operation navigation is executed, so that the game can be continued without running out of medals until the CZ ends. Operation navigation during CZ is performed at a lower frequency than in AT state.

Here, when the transition to CZ is made while the advantageous section lamp 191 is not lit, and the operation navigation is executed for the first time, lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 is started at the timing when the navigation lighting is executed. In FIG. 306, the transition to CZ is performed while the advantageous section lamp 191 is not lit, and the navigation lighting is executed by internally winning the condition device number 9 (small winning combination 5) in the second game, and further the advantageous section lamp 191 lighting is started.

When the state of CZ in which the advantageous section lamp 191 is lit changes to the AT state, or when the state is not in the AT state but is shifted to some state in the advantageous section, the lighting state of the advantageous section lamp 191 continues. Further, when the transition from CZ in which the advantageous zone lamp 191 is on to the non-advantageous zone, the advantageous zone lamp 191 is set to be extinguished.

On the other hand, when the state is changed from CZ in which the advantageous section lamp 191 is not lit to the AT state, lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 is started at the timing when the navigation lighting is performed in the AT state. Further, when the transition from CZ in which the advantageous zone lamp 191 is not lit to the non-advantageous zone, the advantageous zone lamp 191 remains in the off state.

In addition, in CZ, it may be configured such that operation navigation is executed at a certain rate when the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are internally elected. is started. Here, furthermore, operation navigation may be executed without fail when the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are internally won for the first time after shifting to CZ. In this case, the advantageous section lamp 191 can be lit early.

In the above-described basic embodiment, it is configured to execute a pseudo-game without sandwiching the game after confirming that it will shift to the AT state, but like the CZ described above, for example, to the AT state It may be configured to notify that the transition to the AT state is performed by executing a pseudo-game after the game has been played several times (for example, three times) after the determination of the transition. In this case, it may be configured to execute operation navigation in this game from when it is confirmed that it will shift to the AT state until the pseudo game is executed, and furthermore, the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 along with the execution of this operation navigation may be started. That is, there may be a case where the advantageous section lamp 191 is lit before the pseudo game is executed.

[Modified Example (3) of Start Timing of Illumination of Advantageous Section Lamp and Navigation Illumination]
In the basic embodiment and its modifications, a pseudo-game is configured to be executed when transitioning to the AT state. delay) may be executed. FIG. 307 shows an example in which the period during which the pseudo-game was executed in FIG. 302 is replaced with the execution period of freezing. In the configuration for executing the pseudo game, the interest in the game can be improved by using the reel performance, but in the configuration for executing the freeze, the interest in the game can be improved by the performance during the freeze execution period. Unlike pseudo-games, freeze does not require the player's operation, but gives the player a sense of incongruity that the operation cannot proceed, thereby making the player expect to receive benefits.

In the example of FIG. 302, at the start of the pseudo-game, the effect image display device 157 executes an effect to make the player aim for the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2". In the example of FIG. 307 in which the game is not executed, an effect indicating that the AT state starts at the start of freezing is executed. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 307, and a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed to notify of some kind of operation at the start of freezing. FIG. 308 shows an example in which operation navigation is executed to notify the pressing order at the start of freezing. In this configuration, since the reels are not rotating due to the freeze, the stopping operation according to the notification cannot be performed. On the other hand, the player feels a sense of incongruity when the player is notified of the operation even though the reels are not rotating. , can make it easier to grasp the transition to an advantageous state. It should be noted that the operation navigation display period does not need to be the same as the freeze execution period.

It should be noted that, in the above example, from the transition to the AT state, until the navigation lighting and lighting of the advantageous section lamp 191 is executed until pseudo-games and freezes were described, but these pseudo-games or freeze may not be executed.

[Other applicable configurations]
In the basic embodiment, the pseudo-game flag is set to ON at the end of the chance state, and the pseudo-game is executed at the time of transition of the AT state. Arbitrary conditions can be adopted in the execution of pseudo-games. Moreover, it is good also as the structure which can be canceled about the reserved pseudo-game. An arbitrary condition (for example, when 2 or 3 coins are betable and 2 coins are bet) can be adopted as the cancellation condition. FIG. 309(a) shows an example in which a pseudo-game was reserved after two games, but the pseudo-game was canceled after two games. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can postpone a reservation.

Also, it may be configured to output a signal (eg, bonus signal) to the outside (eg, hall computer) in the execution of the pseudo-game. FIG. 309(b) shows that a signal is output based on the operation of the start lever 135 of the game in which the pseudo game is executed. It should be noted that, when the pseudo-game can be canceled, even if the pseudo-game is canceled, the above signal may be output as it is without being canceled. In addition, when adopting the configuration that can postpone the reservation of the pseudo-game, the output of the signal may be postponed together with the pseudo-game.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, rock-paper game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment>>
Hereinafter, the technical ideas described in the description using FIGS. 284 to 309 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above description,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels;
operation navigation execution means (for example, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157) for executing operation navigation of the plurality of stop operation means;
A lottery means (for example, the main control unit 300) that determines the lottery result;
profit giving means (for example, main control unit 300) for giving profit;
Advantageous interval setting means (for example, main control unit 300) for setting an advantageous interval (see, for example, FIG. 290);
state setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting a state in which manipulation navigation can be executed in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section notification executing means (e.g., advantageous section lamp 191) for executing advantageous section notification that is notification that the advantageous section is set;
A game machine comprising
The profit granting means is means for granting a replay in a game in which a first lottery result (for example, a conditional device including a replay combination) is determined by the lottery means,
The profit granting means is means capable of granting a predetermined profit in a game in which a second lottery result (for example, a conditional device including minor wins 4 to 6) is determined by the lottery means,
The operation navigation execution means is capable of executing the operation navigation in the game in which the first lottery result is determined by the lottery means (for example, [about navigation lighting by the advantageous section lamp and the payout number indicator]) See "Construction to display operation navigation even when internally winning in the condition device that can win the replay role" described)),
The operation navigation executing means can execute the operation navigation for facilitating acquisition of the predetermined profit in the game in which the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means (for example, FIG. 302, FIG. Operation navigation of the effect image display device 157 in 307, navigation lighting of the payout number display 127),
The advantageous section notification executing means is configured such that the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the operation navigation executable state is set by the state setting means in the advantageous section and the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means. means for executing the advantageous section notification in the game when the
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels;
operation navigation execution means (for example, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157) for executing operation navigation of the plurality of stop operation means;
A lottery means (for example, the main control unit 300) that determines the lottery result;
profit giving means (for example, main control unit 300) for giving profit;
Advantageous interval setting means (for example, main control unit 300) for setting an advantageous interval (see, for example, FIG. 290);
state setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting a state in which manipulation navigation can be executed in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section notification executing means (e.g., advantageous section lamp 191) for executing advantageous section notification that is notification that the advantageous section is set;
A game machine comprising
The profit giving means is means for not giving profit in a game in which the first lottery result (for example, losing) is determined by the lottery means,
The profit granting means is means capable of granting a predetermined profit in a game in which a second lottery result (for example, a conditional device including minor wins 4 to 6) is determined by the lottery means,
The operation navigation execution means is capable of executing the operation navigation in the game in which the first lottery result is determined by the lottery means (for example, [about navigation lighting by the advantageous section lamp and the payout number indicator]) See "Configuration to display operation navigation even if you have not internally won any of the condition devices"),
The operation navigation executing means can execute the operation navigation for facilitating acquisition of the predetermined profit in the game in which the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means (for example, FIG. 302, FIG. Operation navigation of the effect image display device 157 in 307, navigation lighting of the payout number display 127),
The advantageous section notification executing means is configured such that the operation navigation is executed in a game in which the operation navigation executable state is set by the state setting means in the advantageous section and the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means. means for executing the advantageous section notification in the game when the
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The advantageous section notification executing means is means for executing the advantageous section notification before the plurality of reels start rotating (for example, in FIG. 303(a), the advantageous section lamp 191 lights up before the reels start rotating). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels;
operation navigation execution means (for example, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157) for executing operation navigation of the plurality of stop operation means;
Advantageous interval setting means (for example, main control unit 300) for setting an advantageous interval (see, for example, FIG. 290);
state setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting a state in which manipulation navigation can be executed in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section notification executing means (e.g., advantageous section lamp 191) for executing advantageous section notification that is notification that the advantageous section is set;
A game machine comprising
The advantageous section notification execution means is means capable of executing the advantageous section notification when the advantageous section is set,
When the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the operation navigation executable state is set by the state setting means, the advantageous interval notification execution means performs the Means for executing advantageous section notification (for example, FIG. 302, FIG. 307),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels;
operation navigation execution means (for example, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157) for executing operation navigation of the plurality of stop operation means;
Advantageous interval setting means (for example, main control unit 300) for setting an advantageous interval (see, for example, FIG. 290);
state setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting a state in which manipulation navigation can be executed in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section notification executing means (e.g., advantageous section lamp 191) for executing advantageous section notification that is notification that the advantageous section is set;
A game machine comprising
State transition notification (for example, pseudo game in FIG. 302, freeze in FIG. 307) can be executed when the transition to the operation navigation executable state is confirmed in the advantageous section,
The advantageous section notification execution means is configured to execute the operation navigation executable state after the transition to the operation navigation executable state is confirmed in the advantageous section until the state transition notification is executed, if the operation navigation executable state is set. is a means capable of executing the advantageous section notification before the start of rotation of the plurality of reels in the game after the state transition notification (for example, FIG. 302, FIG. 307),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels;
operation navigation execution means (for example, payout number display 127) for executing operation navigation of the plurality of stop operation means;
Game execution means (e.g., main control unit 300) that sets a predetermined timer (e.g., pseudo game end timer, freeze timer) and executes a game when the predetermined timer expires;
Advantageous interval setting means (for example, main control unit 300) for setting an advantageous interval (see, for example, FIG. 290);
state setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting a state in which manipulation navigation can be executed in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section notification executing means (e.g., advantageous section lamp 191) for executing advantageous section notification that is notification that the advantageous section is set;
A game machine comprising
The game executing means is means capable of setting the predetermined timer when the operation navigation executable state is set in the advantageous section (for example, FIGS. 302 and 307),
The operation navigation executing means performs the operation navigation before the predetermined timer expires even if a condition for executing the operation navigation (e.g., an internal winning at the bell in the pressing order in the AT state) is satisfied. Means capable of executing the operation navigation without execution and after the predetermined timer expires (for example, after a pseudo-game or after freezing),
The advantageous section notification execution means is means for executing the advantageous section notification when the operation navigation is executed after the predetermined timer expires by the operation navigation execution means (for example, FIG. 302). , FIG. 307),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A second operation navigation execution means (for example, effect image display device 157) for executing operation navigation of the plurality of stop operation means separately from the operation navigation execution means,
Said second operation navigation execution means is means capable of executing operation navigation of said plurality of stop operation means before said predetermined timer runs out (for example, in FIG. navigation prompting to stop the pattern, push order navigation before freezing in Fig. 308),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The content of the operation navigation before the predetermined timer expires differs from the content of the operation navigation after the predetermined timer expires (for example, in FIG. 302, the effect image display before and after the pseudo game The navigation content of the device 157 is different (in FIG. 308, the navigation content of the effect image display device 157 is different before and after freezing),
A game machine characterized by:

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 effect image display device 272, 277 speaker 420 various lamps 300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 500 second sub-control Department

Claims (5)

It is possible to output a predetermined sound based on the fact that the power is turned on,
capable of executing a first process of outputting a gaming value to an external device, capable of outputting a first sound as the first process is executed,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second process for setting a predetermined game value at the start of a game, and capable of outputting a second sound as the second process is executed,
During a first period, which is a part of the period until a predetermined process based on power-on is completed, the predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than that of the first sound,
In the first period, the predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the second sound,
In a second period after the first period, the first sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound,
In the second period, the second sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound,
In the second period, the background sound of the game is not output,
In the second period, the first process and the second process can be executed, and the first sound and the second sound may be output in duplicate,
the first sound and the second sound are different sounds;
A playground characterized by: It is possible to output a predetermined sound based on the fact that the power is turned on,
capable of executing a first process of outputting a gaming value to an external device, capable of outputting a first sound as the first process is executed,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second process for setting a predetermined game value at the start of a game, and capable of outputting a second sound as the second process is executed,
During a first period that is part of a period until a predetermined process based on power-on is completed, the first sound is not output when the predetermined sound is output,
In the first period, the second sound is not output when the predetermined sound is output,
In a second period after the first period, the first sound can be output and the predetermined sound is not output,
During the second period, the second sound can be output and the predetermined sound is not output;
In the second period, the background sound of the game is not output,
In the second period, the first process and the second process can be executed, and the first sound and the second sound may be output in duplicate,
the first sound and the second sound are different sounds;
A playground characterized by: It is possible to output a predetermined sound based on the fact that the power is turned on,
capable of executing a first process of outputting a gaming value to an external device, capable of outputting a first sound as the first process is executed,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second process for setting a predetermined game value at the start of a game, and capable of outputting a second sound as the second process is executed,
During a first period, which is a part of the period until a predetermined process based on power-on is completed, the predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than that of the first sound,
In the first period, the predetermined sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the second sound,
In a second period after the first period, the first sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound,
In the second period, the second sound is output at a volume higher than the volume of the predetermined sound,
In the second period, the background sound of the game is not output,
capable of outputting an abnormal sound based on the detection of an electrical connection abnormality with the external device;
In the second period, even if the electrical connection abnormality occurs, the abnormality generation sound is not output.
A playground characterized by: It is possible to output a predetermined sound based on the fact that the power is turned on,
capable of executing a first process of outputting a gaming value to an external device, capable of outputting a first sound as the first process is executed,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second process for setting a predetermined game value at the start of a game, and capable of outputting a second sound as the second process is executed,
During a first period that is part of a period until a predetermined process based on power-on is completed, the first sound is not output when the predetermined sound is output,
In the first period, the second sound is not output when the predetermined sound is output,
In a second period after the first period, the first sound can be output and the predetermined sound is not output,
During the second period, the second sound can be output and the predetermined sound is not output;
In the second period, the background sound of the game is not output,
capable of outputting an abnormal sound based on the detection of an electrical connection abnormality with the external device;
In the second period, even if the electrical connection abnormality occurs, the abnormality generation sound is not output.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 3 or 4,
outputting the abnormal sound when the electrical connection abnormality that occurred during the second period continues after the second period;
A playground characterized by:

Images